AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Saṃyuttanikāye

Saṃyutta Nikāya

Sagāthāvagga-aṭṭhakathā

Sagāthā Vagga Aṭṭhakathā

Ganthārambhakathā
Introduction to the Text

Karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ, paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ;

Whose heart is cooled with compassion, whose delusion's darkness is dispelled by the light of wisdom; the Sugata, who is freed from destinies.

Buddhopi buddhabhāvaṃ, bhāvetvā ceva sacchikatvā ca;

The Buddha, having developed and realized Buddhahood; the Dhamma.

Sugatassa orasānaṃ, puttānaṃ mārasenamathanānaṃ;

The Ariyasaṅgha, the Sugata's own sons, who have crushed Māra's army.

Iti me pasannamatino, ratanattayavandanāmayaṃ puññaṃ;

Thus, with a mind full of faith, the merit of my reverence for the Triple Gem;

saṃyuttaāgamavarassa;

May it be without obstacles, by the power of that,

aṭṭhakathāādito vasisatehi;

of the Saṃyutta Āgamavara;

Sīhaḷadīpaṃ pana ābhatātha, vasinā mahāmahindena;

Of that which was praised by the Buddha and the enlightened ones, which generates varieties of wisdom;

Apanetvāna tatohaṃ, sīhaḷabhāsaṃ manoramaṃ bhāsaṃ;

The Aṭṭhakathā, which was first sung by the wise ones;

Samayaṃ avilomento, therānaṃ theravaṃsadīpānaṃ;

Which was sung in five [recensions], and also subsequently re-sung.

Hitvā punappunāgata-matthaṃ, atthaṃ pakāsayissāmi;

But then brought to the island of Sri Lanka, by the wise Mahāmahindā;

Sāvatthipabhūtīnaṃ, nagarānaṃ vaṇṇanā katā heṭṭhā;

Established in the Sinhala language, for the benefit of the island dwellers.

Vitthāravasena sudaṃ, vatthūni ca yāni tattha vuttāni;

Having removed from that, the Sinhala language, a language pleasing [to the ear];

Suttānaṃ pana atthā, na vinā vatthūhi ye pakāsanti;

Adhering to the style of the texts, faultless and beautiful.

Sīlakathā dhutadhammā, kammaṭṭhānāni ceva sabbāni;

Without violating the tradition, of the elders, the luminaries of the Theravāda lineage;

Sabbā ca abhiññāyo, paññāsaṅkalananicchayo ceva;

Of those with very precise judgement, dwelling in the Mahāvihāra.

Saccāni paccayākāradesanā, suparisuddhanipuṇanayā;

Having omitted meanings that have been repeatedly stated, I will reveal [new] meanings;

visuddhimaggemayā suparisuddhaṃ;

For the satisfaction of good people, and for the long-lasting establishment of the Dhamma.

visuddhimaggo,esa catunnampi āgamānañhi;

Descriptions of Sāvatthi and other cities have been made below;

Icceva kato tasmā, tampi gahetvāna saddhimetāya;

Of the two recitations, which I have described in meaning.

1. Devatāsaṃyuttaṃ

Indeed, in terms of expansion, the topics that were mentioned there;

1. Naḷavaggo

Regarding those, I will not make a lengthy discussion here again.

1. Oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

But the meanings of the suttas, which are not clear without the stories;

saṃyuttāgamonāma sagāthāvaggo, nidānavaggo, khandhakavaggo, saḷāyatanavaggo, mahāvaggoti pañcavaggo hoti. Suttato –

For the purpose of clarifying them, I will also show the stories.

‘‘Satta suttasahassāni, satta suttasatāni ca;

The talk on morality, the dhutaguṇa practices, and all the kammaṭṭhānas;

sagāthāvaggoādi, suttesuoghataraṇasuttaṃ. Tassāpi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādi. Sā panesā paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya ādimhi vitthāritā, tasmā sā tattha vitthāritanayeneva veditabbā.

Together with the method of conduct, the expansion of jhāna and samāpatti.

1.Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ, tatthaevanti nipātapadaṃ.Metiādīni nāmapadāni.Sāvatthiyaṃ viharatīti etthati upasaggapadaṃ,haratīti ākhyātapadanti iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.

All the abhiññās, and the determination of the classification of wisdom;

evaṃsaddo tāva upamūpadesa-sampahaṃsana-garahaṇa-vacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādi-anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) evamādīsu upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha – ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi – ‘sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti’’ādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti vā no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.

The khandhas, dhātus, āyatanas, indriyas, and the four Noble [Truths].

evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇaṃ anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanā paṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ? Sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.

The truths, the teaching of dependent origination, with a very pure and subtle method;

Nidassanatthena – ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ suta’’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalasuttaṃ nidasseti.

The path of non-deviation, and vipassanābhāvanā.

Avadhāraṇatthena – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.220-223) evaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo dhammakusalo byañjanakusalo niruttikusalo pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.

Have been very well explained by me in the Visuddhimagga;

Mesaddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa – ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū ’’ tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā suta’’nti ca ‘‘mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.

Therefore, I will not discuss them further here.

Sutanti ayaṃsutasaddo saupasaggo anupasaggo ca gamana-vissuta-kilinnaupacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāraviññātādianekatthappabhedo. Tathā hissa – ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnākilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati – ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati – ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.

The Visuddhimagga, indeed, will stand and explain,

evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ.Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ.Sutanti assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathāevanti tassa sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ.Meti attappakāsanaṃ.Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.

The meaning spoken there, for all four āgamas.

evanti niddisitabbappakāsanaṃ.Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ.Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ suta’’nti.

Therefore, having made it thus, taking that also with faith;

evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanagahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso.Evanti hi ayaṃ ākārapaññatti.Meti kattuniddeso.Sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattuvisaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.

Understand from this Aṭṭhakathā, the meaning determined by the Saṃyutta.

evanti puggalakiccaniddeso.Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso.Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena suta’’nti.

1. Devatā Saṃyutta

evanti cameti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha.Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti. Tathāevanti cameti ca taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti.Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti.

1. Naḷa Vagga

evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti.Sutanti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā. Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.

1. Oghataraṇa Sutta Commentary

evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti, ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato.Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupanissayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.

The Saṃyutta Āgama is named as Sagāthā Vagga, Nidāna Vagga, Khandhaka Vagga, Saḷāyatana Vagga, Mahā Vagga, thus it is in five sections.

‘‘evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ, so ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmāevanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti.Sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti, purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi, tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato, yoniso manasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa, arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapentoevaṃ me sutantiādimāha.

"Thus" (evaṃ): it was said that "for one whose stream of consciousness has various modes of occurring, there is grasping of various meanings and expressions," to him the various modes are indicated. And this "thus," this auspicious mode, does not occur rightly for one whose self is not rightly established or who has not previously done merit; therefore, with this "thus," with this auspicious mode, he indicates his attainment of the later pair of wheels. "Heard" (sutaṃ): by way of hearing, (he indicates) the attainment of the earlier pair of wheels. For one not living in a suitable region or lacking the support of good people, there is no hearing. Thus, with the accomplishment of the later pair of wheels, purity of intention is accomplished; with the accomplishment of the earlier pair of wheels, purity of effort is accomplished; and by that purity of intention, accomplishment of understanding expression is accomplished; by purity of effort, accomplishment of scriptural expression is accomplished. Thus, the word of one with pure effort and intention, accomplished in scripture and understanding, like the dawn rising of the sun, and like appropriate attention for wholesome action, is worthy to be the forerunner of the Blessed One's word, and so, establishing the basis in its proper place, he said "Thus I have heard" (evaṃ me sutaṃ) and so on.

evanti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti.Sutanti iminā sotabbabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ.Evanti ca idaṃ yoniso manasikāradīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti.Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenapi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabboti.

"Thus": with this word, which illuminates various kinds of penetration, he indicates the entire existence of his accomplishment in meaning-intuition-discrimination. "Heard": with this word, which illuminates the divisions of what should be heard, he indicates the entire existence of his accomplishment in Dhamma-expression-discrimination. And uttering this word "Thus," which illuminates appropriate attention, he indicates: "These things (dhammā) have been examined by me with the mind, well-penetrated by insight." Uttering this word "Heard," which illuminates connection with hearing, he indicates: "Many things (dhammā) have been heard by me, retained, recited in words." By both of these, indicating the completeness of meaning and expression, he generates respect for hearing. For one who does not attentively listen to the Dhamma complete in meaning and expression is far removed from great benefit, thus generating respect, the Dhamma should be heard respectfully.

Evaṃme sutanti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.

But with this entire utterance, "Thus I have heard", Venerable Ānanda, not attributing the Dhamma proclaimed by the Tathāgata to himself, transcends the ground of an unrighteous person, and affirming his discipleship, enters the ground of a righteous person. Thus, he removes his mind from unrighteous things, and establishes his mind in righteous things. Indicating, "This is only heard by me, but it is the word of that Blessed One himself," he frees himself, indicates the Teacher, applies the word of the Conqueror (Jina), and establishes the Dhamma-eye.

Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto – ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādetīti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –

Moreover, not affirming that it was produced by himself, declaring the former statement, "Thus I have heard" — "This was received by me face to face from that Blessed One, skilled in the four grounds of self-confidence, possessor of the ten powers, standing in the place of a bull, roaring the lion's roar, the highest of all beings, lord of the Dhamma, king of the Dhamma, master of the Dhamma, island of the Dhamma, refuge of the Dhamma, turner of the excellent wheel of the Dhamma, the rightly self-awakened one, there should be no doubt or uncertainty here in meaning or in Dhamma or in word or in expression" — thus, for all gods and humans, he destroys disbelief in this Dhamma and generates the accomplishment of faith. Therefore, this is said:

‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane;

"He destroys disbelief, increases faith in the Dispensation;
'Thus I have heard, thus indeed,' says the disciple of Gotama."

Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso.Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso.Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tatthasamayasaddo –

"One" (ekaṃ): is an indication of numerical restriction. "Time" (samayaṃ): is an indication of delimitation. "One time" (ekaṃ samayaṃ): is a declaration of unspecified limit. There, the word "samaya" (time) —

‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu;

"Is seen in coming together, moment, period,
collection, cause, views;
in attainment, abandonment, and penetration."

Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati – ‘bhaddāli, nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.

Thus, for example, in such passages as, "Perhaps we may approach tomorrow, taking into account the time and the occasion" (dī. ni. 1.447), the meaning is coming together. In such passages as, "Monks, a single moment and occasion are for dwelling in the holy life" (a. ni. 8.29), it is a moment. In such passages as, "Hot season, burning season" (pāci. 358), it is a period. In such passages as, "The Great Assembly in the Pavana Forest" (dī. ni. 2.332), it is a collection. In such passages as, "Bhaddāli, even the time was not penetrated by you, the Blessed One dwells in Sāvatthi, the Blessed One will know me: 'A monk named Bhaddāli is not a fulfiller of the training in the Teacher's dispensation.' Even this time was not penetrated by you, Bhaddāli" (ma. ni. 2.135), it is a cause. In such passages as, "At that time, Uggāhamāna the wanderer, son of Samaṇamuṇḍikā, was dwelling in the Tindukācīra, the single-sāla grove of Mallikā, a proponent of doctrines of time" (ma. ni. 2.260), it is a view.

‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko;

"He who is wise through understanding the meaning
in the seen Dhamma, and the meaning in the future life,
is called 'wise.'"

Ādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.129) paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 2.8) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvacchara-utu-māsaḍḍhamāsa-ratti-diva-pubbaṇha-majjhanhika-sāyanha-paṭhamamajjhimapacchimayāma-muhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.

In such passages as (saṃ. ni. 1.129), it is attainment. In such passages as, "By the right overcoming of conceit, he made an end to suffering" (ma. ni. 1.28), it is abandonment. In such passages as, "Suffering has the characteristic of oppression, the characteristic of being conditioned, the characteristic of agitation, the characteristic of change, the characteristic of penetration" (paṭi. ma. 2.8), it is penetration. But here, its meaning is a period. Therefore, "one time" indicates one among the periods that are divisions of time, such as year, season, month, half-month, night, day, forenoon, midday, afternoon, first, middle, and last watch, and moment.

Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.

Therein, although whatever sutta was spoken in whatever year, season, month, fortnight, part of the night, or part of the day among these periods such as years, all that was well known and well established in the Elder's wisdom. But because if it were said, "Thus I heard in such and such a year, in such and such a season, in such and such a month, in such and such a fortnight, in such and such a part of the night, or in such and such a part of the day," it would not be possible to easily remember, recite, or have recited, and much would have to be said, therefore, summarizing that meaning with a single word, he said "one time."

Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya suppakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā. Tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.

Or those times such as the time of conception, the time of birth, the time of awakening, the time of going forth, the time of ascetic practice, the time of the victory over Māra, the time of complete Awakening, the time of dwelling in the bliss of the Dhamma here and now, the time of teaching, the time of final Nibbāna, and so on, are various divisions of time that are exceedingly well-known among gods and humans for the Blessed One. Among those times, he indicates one time, reckoned as the time of teaching. And this time of compassionate activity among times of knowledge and compassionate activity, the time of benefiting others among times of benefiting oneself and benefiting others, the time of Dhamma talk among times of twofold action for those assembled, the time of teaching among times of teaching and practice, in those times too, referring to one or another, he said, "one time."

Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacanena niddeso katoti. Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.

But why here, as in the Abhidhamma, "at the time when the sense sphere," and in other sutta passages, "at the time when, monks, a bhikkhu quite secluded from sense pleasures," the indication is made with the locative case, and in the Vinaya, "at that time the Buddha, the Blessed One," with the instrumental case, why was it not done so, but the indication was made with the accusative case as "one time"? There, it is so, and here it is otherwise, because of the possibility of a difference in meaning. There, in the Abhidhamma and in other sutta passages, the meaning of location and the meaning of the relation of conditionality are possible. For time is a locative, and time is a collective meaning, and the presence of those phenomena such as contact that were mentioned is defined by the presence of time, reckoned as moment and concurrence and cause. Therefore, to reveal that meaning, the indication was made there with the locative case.

Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.

And in the Vinaya, the meaning of cause and the meaning of instrument are possible. For that time of the laying down of the training rule, which was difficult to know even for Sāriputta and others, at that time, as the cause and as the instrument, laying down the training rules and expecting the cause for the laying down of the training rule, the Blessed One dwelt in such and such a place. Therefore, to reveal that meaning, the indication was made there with the instrumental case.

Idha pana aññasmiṃ ca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.

But here, in this and other similar cases, the meaning of uninterrupted connection is possible. For at whatever time the Blessed One taught this or another sutta, at that very time, he dwelt in compassionate abiding. Therefore, to reveal that meaning, the indication was made here with the accusative case.

Tenetaṃ vuccati –

Therefore, this is said:

‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca;

"Taking into account that and that meaning,
with the locative and with the instrumental;
elsewhere time is spoken of, but here with the accusative."

Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.

But the ancients describe: "Whether it is 'at that time' or 'by that time' or 'one time,' this is merely a difference in expression; in all cases, the meaning is the locative." Therefore, even when "one time" is said, the meaning "at one time" should be understood.

Bhagavāti garu. Garuṃ hi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –

"Blessed One" (bhagavā): is a term of respect. For in the world, they call a respected person "bhagavā." And this one is respected by all beings because of his distinction in all qualities; therefore, he should be understood as "bhagavā." It was also said by the ancients:

‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ;

"The word 'bhagavā' is the best, the word 'bhagavā' is the highest;
He is venerable and endowed with respect, therefore he is called 'bhagavā'" (visuddhi. 1.142);

Apica –

Moreover —

‘‘Bhagyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā;

"Fortunate, a breaker (of defilements), endowed,
and distinguished by virtues;
a nourisher, one who has gone beyond existence,
therefore, in existences, he is 'bhagavā.'"

visuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.144) buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.

It is described in the Visuddhimagga (visuddhi. 1.144) in the section on recollection of the Buddha.

evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti.Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati.Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ.Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ.Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.

By the statement "Thus I have heard" (evaṃ me sutaṃ), showing the Dhamma as it was heard, he makes the Dhamma-body of the Blessed One apparent. Thus, reassuring the people who were longing for the Teacher due to not seeing him, "This teaching does not lack a Teacher, this is your Teacher." By the statement "One time the Blessed One" (ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā), showing the non-existence of the Blessed One at that time, he establishes the final Nibbāna of the form-body. Thus, arousing the sense of urgency in people who were conceited with the intoxication of life, "Even the Blessed One, the ten-powered one, the teacher of such a noble Dhamma, whose body was like a thunderbolt-formation, has passed away, in what other life should hope be generated?" and generating enthusiasm for the good Dhamma in them. And saying "Thus," he indicates the accomplishment of teaching. "I heard," the accomplishment of disciples. "One time," the accomplishment of time. "Blessed One," the accomplishment of the teacher.

Sāvatthiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpanametaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjāsayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ, tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.

"In Sāvatthi" (sāvatthiyaṃ): in a city of that name. This locative case is in the sense of proximity. "Was dwelling" (viharati): this is a declaration that is not specific, (but indicates) being associated with one or another dwelling among the modes of deportment, divine, Brahma, and noble abodes. But here, it is a declaration of association with one or another mode of deportment among standing, walking, sitting, and lying down; therefore, the Blessed One should be understood as dwelling whether standing, walking, sitting, or lying down. For he carries on and maintains the continuity of the existence that does not fall away by interrupting one mode of deportment with another mode of deportment; therefore, he is said to be "dwelling."

Jetavaneti jetassa rājakumārassa vane. Tañhi tena ropitaṃ saṃvaḍḍhitaṃ paripālitaṃ ahosi, tasmā ‘‘jetavana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Tasmiṃ jetavane.Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyātitattā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti saṅkhaṃ gate ārāme. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana papañcasūdaniyā majjhimaṭṭhakathāya sabbāsavasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.14) vutto.

"In Jeta's Grove" (jetavane): in the grove of Prince Jeta. For it was planted, grown, and maintained by him; therefore, it went by the name "Jeta's Grove." In that Jeta's Grove, "In Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery" (anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme): in the monastery that went by the name "Anāthapiṇḍika's monastery" because it was given to the Saṅgha of monks with the Buddha at its head by the householder Anāthapiṇḍika at the cost of fifty-four million gold coins. This is the summary here; the detail, however, is described in the commentary to the Middle Length Discourses, Papañcasūdanī, in the commentary to the Discourse on All the Taints (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.14).

Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, ‘‘jetavane’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Atha tattha viharati, ‘‘sāvatthiya’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

Here there may be (this question): if indeed the Blessed One was dwelling in Sāvatthi, it should not be said "in Jeta's Grove." But if he was dwelling there, it should not be said "in Sāvatthi." For it is not possible to dwell in both places at one time. But this should not be seen in this way.

Nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ caranti, yamunāyaṃ carantī’’ti vuccati, evamidhāpi yadidaṃ sāvatthiyā samīpe jetavanaṃ, tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa sāvatthivacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ sesavacanaṃ.

Have we not said, "The locative case is in the sense of proximity"? Therefore, just as herds of cattle grazing near the Ganges, Yamunā, and other rivers are said to be "grazing in the Ganges, grazing in the Yamunā," so too here, since Jeta's Grove is near Sāvatthi, one dwelling there is said to be "dwelling in Sāvatthi, in Jeta's Grove." For the word "Sāvatthi" is for the purpose of indicating the village for alms-seeking, and the remaining words are for the purpose of indicating a dwelling place suitable for renunciates.

Aññatarā devatāti nāmagottavasena apākaṭā ekā devatāti attho. ‘‘Abhijānāti no, bhante, bhagavā ahu ñātaññatarassa mahesakkhassa yakkhassa saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ bhāsitā’’ti ettha pana abhiññāto sakkopi devarājā ‘‘aññataro’’ti vutto. ‘‘Devatā’’ti ca idaṃ devānampi devadhītānampi sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Imasmiṃ panatthe devo adhippeto, so ca kho rūpāvacarānaṃ devānaṃ aññataro.

"A certain deity" (aññatarā devatā): the meaning is, a single deity, not known by name or clan. But here, in "Bhante, does the Blessed One remember the succinct explanation of the cessation of craving spoken to a known yakkha of great power?" even the deva-king Sakka, who was known, was called "a certain one." And this word "devatā" (deity) is a general term common to both devas and deva-maidens. But in this context, a deva is intended, and he was one of the devas of the form realm.

Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkanta-saddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhānumodanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho, uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.20; cūḷava. 383) khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.

"When the night was far advanced" (abhikkantāya rattiyā): here, the word abhikkanta is seen in the meanings of decline, beautiful, pleasing, praise, etc. There, in such passages as, "Bhante, the night is far advanced, the first watch has passed, the Saṅgha of monks has been sitting for a long time, may the Blessed One recite the Pātimokkha to the monks" (a. ni. 8.20; cūḷava. 383), it is seen in the sense of decline. In such passages as, "This one is more beautiful and excellent than these four persons" (a. ni. 4.100), in the sense of beautiful.

‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;

"Who bows at my feet, blazing with power and glory;
with surpassing radiance, illuminating all directions?"

Evamādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ bho gotamā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 15) abbhānumodane. Idha pana khaye. Tena abhikkantāya rattiyā, parikkhīṇāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthāyaṃ devaputto majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatoti veditabbo. Niyāmo hi kiresa devatānaṃ yadidaṃ buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantā majjhimayāmasamanantareyeva āgacchanti.

In instances such as "Evamādīsu" (Vi.va. 857), it refers to beauty. In instances such as "Abhikkantaṃ bho Gotama, abhikkantaṃ bho Gotamā'ti evamādīsu" (Pārā. 15), it implies approval. But here, it signifies "end." Therefore, "abhikkantāya rattiyā, parikkhīṇāya rattiyā" means the night is far spent. Here, the devaputta should be understood as having arrived close to the middle watch of the night. It is said that it is the rule for the devas to arrive near the middle watch when coming to attend upon Buddhas or disciples of Buddhas.

Abhikkantavaṇṇāti idhaabhikkanta-saddo abhirūpe,vaṇṇa-saddo pana chavithuti-kulavagga-kāraṇa-saṇṭhānappamāṇa-rūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti evamādīsu (su. ni. 553) chaviyā. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115) kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhathenoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyā daṭṭhabbo. Tena abhikkantavaṇṇā abhirūpacchavi, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ jahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇaṃ atirekaiddhiṃ māpetvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Tattha kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti, rūpāvacarā pana na sakkonti. Tesañhi atisukhumo attabhāvo, na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayaṃ devaputto abhisaṅkhateneva āgato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkantavaṇṇā’’ti.

Abhikkantavaṇṇā: Here, the word abhikkanta means beautiful, while the word vaṇṇa appears in contexts of complexion, praise, lineage, cause, shape, measurement, visible object, etc. For example, in "Suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi Bhagavā" (Su. Ni. 553), it refers to complexion. In "Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa vaṇṇā" (Ma. Ni. 2.77), it refers to praise. In "Cattārome, bho Gotama, vaṇṇā" (Dī. Ni. 3.115), it refers to lineage. In "Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhathenoti vuccatī" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.234), it refers to cause. In "Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.138), it refers to shape. In "Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā" (Pārā. 602), it refers to measurement. In "Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā" and so on, it refers to the visible object. Here, it should be understood as complexion. Therefore, abhikkantavaṇṇā means having a beautiful complexion, iṭṭhavaṇṇā means having a pleasing complexion. When devas come to the human world, they abandon their natural complexion and natural psychic power, create a grosser form, conjure up an extraordinary complexion and extraordinary psychic power, and come with a body created by contrivance, like humans going to a festival or a show. Among them, devas of the Sensuous Sphere (kāmāvacara) can come without contrivance, but devas of the Form Sphere (rūpāvacara) cannot. For them, their form is very subtle; with that, the assumption of postures is not possible. Therefore, this devaputta came by contrivance. Therefore, it is said, "abhikkantavaṇṇā."

Kevalakappanti etthakevala-saddo anavasesa-yebhuyyābyāmissānatirekadaḷhatthavisaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti evamādīsu (pārā. 1) anavasesatthamattho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 43) yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti evamādīsu (vibha. 225) abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 244) anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.243) daḷhatthatā. ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.57) visaṃyogo attho. Idha panassa anavasesattho adhippeto.

Kevalakappaṃ: Here, the word kevala has various meanings such as without remainder, majority, unmixed, not exceeding, firm, disconnected, etc. For example, in "kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya" (Pārā. 1), the meaning is without remainder. In "Kevalakappā ca aṅgamagadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī" (Mahāva. 43), it means majority. In "Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī" (Vibha. 225), it means unmixed. In "Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā" (Mahāva. 244), it means not exceeding. In "Āyasmato, bhante, Anuruddhassa bāhiyo nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito" (A. Ni. 4.243), it means firmness. In "Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī" (Saṃ. Ni. 3.57), it means disconnection. Here, however, the meaning "without remainder" is intended.

Kappa-saddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahana-vohāra-kāla-paññatti-chedana-vikappa-lesasamantabhāvādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 250) vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti evamādīsu paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū’’ti evamādīsu (vi. va. 1094, 1101) chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 446) vikappo. ‘‘Ātthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.80) leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāvo. Idha panassa samantabhāvattho adhippeto. Tasmākevalakappaṃ jetavananti ettha ‘‘anavasesaṃ samantato jetavana’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

The word kappa, however, has various meanings such as conviction, expression, time, designation, cutting, alternative, trace, complete state, etc. For example, in "Okappaniyametaṃ bhoto Gotamassa, yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā" (Ma. Ni. 1.387), the meaning is conviction. In "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ" (Cūḷava. 250), it refers to expression. In "Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī" (Ma. Ni. 1.387), it refers to time. In "Iccāyasmā kappo," and so on, it refers to designation. In "Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū" (Vi. Va. 1094, 1101), it refers to cutting. In "Kappati dvaṅgulakappo" (Cūḷava. 446), it refers to alternative. In "Ātthi kappo nipajjituṃ" (A. Ni. 8.80), it refers to trace. In "Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.94), it refers to a complete state. Here, however, the meaning of complete state is intended. Therefore, in kevalakappaṃ jetavanaṃ, the meaning "completely, on all sides, Jetavana" should be seen.

Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, candimā viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho.

Obhāsetvā: Having pervaded it with light arising from clothing, ornaments, and body, having made it a single radiance and a single illumination like the moon or the sun, is the meaning.

Yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti tasmā ‘‘yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamī’’ti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya.Upasaṅkamīti ca gatāti vuttaṃ hoti.Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gatā tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.

Yenā: The instrumental case in the sense of location. Yena Bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī: Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as "where the Blessed One was, there he approached." Or, the meaning here should be understood as, "for whatever reason the Blessed One should be approached by devas and humans, for that reason he approached." And for what reason should the Blessed One be approached? With the intention of attaining various special qualities, like a great tree constantly laden with fruit to be enjoyed by flocks of birds. Upasaṅkamī means went. Upasaṅkamitvā indicates the conclusion of approaching. Or, having gone thus, having gone to a place closer to him, which is called the vicinity of the Blessed One, is also the meaning.

Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso – ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā ṭhitā ekamantaṃ ṭhitā hoti, tathā aṭṭhāsīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ.Aṭṭhāsīti ṭhānaṃ kappesi. Paṇḍitā hi devamanussā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ tiṭṭhanti, ayañca devo tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi.

Ekamantaṃ: The neuter gender designation (bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso), like in "visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī" (A. Ni. 4.70). Therefore, the meaning here should be understood as, "just as those standing, stand to one side, so he stood." Or, this is the locative case, the accusative of use. Aṭṭhāsī: He made a standing place. Wise devas and humans, having approached one worthy of respect, stand to one side due to skill in seating arrangements, and this deva is one of them; therefore, he stood to one side.

Kathaṃ ṭhito pana ekamantaṃ ṭhito hotīti? Cha ṭhānadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ, accāsannaṃ, uparivātaṃ, unnatappadesaṃ, atisammukhaṃ, atipacchāti. Atidūre ṭhito hi sace kathetukāmo hoti, uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne ṭhito saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte ṭhito sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese ṭhito agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā ṭhito sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā ṭhito sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha ṭhānadose vajjetvā aṭṭhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsī’’ti.

But how does one who stands, stand to one side? By avoiding six faults in standing. Namely: too far, too close, upwind, on elevated ground, too directly in front, and too far behind. For one standing too far, if he wishes to speak, he must speak in a loud voice. One standing too close causes crowding. One standing upwind is offensive with body odor. One standing on elevated ground shows disrespect. One standing too directly in front, if he wishes to see, must strike eye with eye in order to see. One standing too far behind, if he wishes to see, must stretch his neck in order to see. Therefore, he also avoided these six faults in standing. Therefore, it is said, "ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi."

Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca.Kathaṃ nūti kāraṇapucchā. Bhagavato hi tiṇṇoghabhāvo dasasahassilokadhātuyā pākaṭo, tenimissā devatāya tattha kaṅkhā natthi, iminā pana kāraṇena ‘‘tiṇṇo’’ti na jānāti, tena sā taṃ kāraṇaṃ pucchamānā evamāha.

Etadavocā: He said this. Kathaṃ nū: A question of cause. For the Blessed One's state of having crossed the flood is evident in the ten-thousand world-system, and the deity has no doubt about that. However, he does not know that he has crossed due to this reason. Therefore, asking about that reason, he said this.

Mārisāti devatānaṃ piyasamudācāravacanametaṃ. Niddukkhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘yadā kho te, mārisa, saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyya, atha naṃ tvaṃ jāneyyāsi ‘vassasahassaṃ me niraye paccamānassā’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.512) idaṃ virujjhati. Na hi nerayikasatto niddukkho nāma hoti. Kiñcāpi na niddukkho, ruḷhīsaddena pana evaṃ vuccati. Pubbe kira paṭhamakappikānaṃ niddukkhānaṃ sukhasamappitānaṃ esa vohāro, aparabhāge dukkhaṃ hotu vā mā vā, ruḷhīsaddena ayaṃ vohāro vuccateva nippadumāpi nirudakāpi vā pokkharaṇī pokkharaṇī viya.

Mārisa: This is a term of affectionate address for devas. It means without suffering. If so, then "Yadā kho te, mārisa, saṅkunā saṅku hadaye samāgaccheyya, atha naṃ tvaṃ jāneyyāsi ‘vassasahassaṃ me niraye paccamānassā'" (Ma. Ni. 1.512) is contradicted. For a being in hell is not without suffering. Although not without suffering, it is thus called by convention. It is said that formerly, this was the expression of those in the first age, who were without suffering and endowed with happiness. In later times, whether there is suffering or not, this expression is used by convention, just as a lotus pond is called a lotus pond, even without lotuses or water.

Oghamatarīti ettha cattāro oghā, kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjoghoti. Tattha pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo kāmogho nāma. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti ca bhavogho nāma. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhogho nāma. Catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ avijjogho nāma. Tattha kāmogho aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, bhavogho catūsu diṭṭhigatavippayuttalobhasahagatesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, diṭṭhogho catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu cittuppādesu uppajjati, avijjogho sabbākusalesu uppajjati.

Oghamatarī: Here, there are four floods: the flood of sensuality (kāmogha), the flood of becoming (bhavogha), the flood of views (diṭṭhogha), and the flood of ignorance (avijjogha). Therein, lust and desire for the five sense pleasures is called the flood of sensuality. Lust and desire for existence in the realms of form and formlessness, as well as attachment to jhāna, is called the flood of becoming. The sixty-two views are called the flood of views. Ignorance of the four noble truths is called the flood of ignorance. Therein, the flood of sensuality arises in the eight types of consciousness accompanied by greed. The flood of becoming arises in the four types of consciousness accompanied by greed that are dissociated from views. The flood of views arises in the four types of consciousness associated with views. The flood of ignorance arises in all unwholesome states.

Avahananaṭṭhenāti adhogamanaṭṭhena. Ayañhi attano vasaṃ gate satte adho gameti, nirayādibhedāya duggatiyaṃyeva nibbatteti, uparibhāvaṃ vā nibbānaṃ gantuṃ adento adho tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu ca gametītipi attho.Rāsaṭṭhenāti mahantaṭṭhena. Mahā heso kilesarāsi avīcito paṭṭhāya yāva bhavaggā patthaṭo, yadidaṃ pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo nāma. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evamayaṃ rāsaṭṭhenāpi oghoti veditabbo.Atarīti imaṃ catubbidhampi oghaṃ kena nu tvaṃ, mārisa, kāraṇena tiṇṇoti pucchati.

Avahananaṭṭhenā: In the sense of going downwards. For this makes beings who are under its control go downwards, causing them to be reborn in only the unfortunate states, such as hell. Or, not allowing them to go to the higher state, Nibbāna, it makes them go downwards in the three realms of existence, in the four modes of generation, in the five destinies, in the seven abodes of consciousness, and in the nine abodes of beings. Rāsaṭṭhenā: In the sense of a great heap. For this mass of defilements (kilesarāsi) is great, extending from Avīci hell up to the peak of existence (bhavagga), namely, the lust and desire for the five sense pleasures. The same method applies to the remaining ones. Thus, this should be understood as a flood (ogha) also in the sense of a great heap. Atarī: By what reason did you, sir, cross this fourfold flood, he asks.

appatiṭṭhaṃ khvāhantiādimāha. Tatthaappatiṭṭhanti appatiṭṭhahanto.Anāyūhanti anāyūhanto, avāyamantoti attho. Iti bhagavā gūḷhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ katvā pañhaṃ kathesi. Devatāpi naṃ sutvā ‘‘bāhirakaṃ tāva oghaṃ tarantā nāma ṭhātabbaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhantā taritabbaṭṭhāne āyūhantā taranti, ayaṃ pana avīcito yāva bhavaggā patthaṭaṃ kilesoghaṃ kilesarāsiṃ appatiṭṭhahanto anāyūhanto atarinti āha. Kiṃ nu kho etaṃ? Kathaṃ nu kho eta’’nti? Vimatiṃ pakkhantā pañhassa atthaṃ na aññāsi.

He said beginning with appatiṭṭhaṃ khvāhaṃ. Therein, appatiṭṭhaṃ means not standing firm. Anāyūhaṃ means not striving, not making effort. Thus, the Blessed One spoke the question having made it concealed and covered. The deity, hearing it, thinking, "Those who cross an external flood stand in a place where one must stand and cross by striving where one must strive. But this one says that he crossed the flood of defilements, the mass of defilements extending from Avīci up to the peak of existence, by not standing firm and not striving. What is this? How is this?" did not understand the meaning of the question, being overwhelmed by doubt.

Kiṃ pana bhagavatā yathā sattā na jānanti, evaṃ kathanatthāya pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutā paṭividdhāti? Na etadatthāya paṭividdhā. Dve pana bhagavato desanā niggahamukhena ca anuggahamukhena ca. Tattha ye paṇḍitamānino honti aññātepi ñātasaññino pañcasatā brāhmaṇapabbajitā viya, tesaṃ mānaniggahatthaṃ yathā na jānanti, evaṃ mūlapariyāyādisadisaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Ayaṃ niggahamukhena desanā. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘niggayha niggayhāhaṃ, ānanda, vakkhāmi, pavayha pavayha, ānanda, vakkhāmi, yo sāro, so ṭhassatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.196). Ye pana ujukā sikkhākāmā, tesaṃ suviññeyyaṃ katvā ākaṅkheyyasuttādisadisaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, ‘‘abhirama, tissa, abhirama, tissa, ahamovādena ahamanuggahena ahamanusāsaniyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.84) ca ne samassāseti. Ayaṃ anuggahamukhena desanā.

But did the Blessed One fulfill the perfections (pāramiyo) and realize omniscience for the sake of speaking in such a way that beings do not understand? It was not realized for that purpose. However, the Blessed One has two modes of teaching: by way of rebuke and by way of encouragement. Therein, to those who are conceited, thinking they know even what is unknown, like the five hundred brahmin ascetics, he teaches the Dhamma similar to the Mūlapariyāya Sutta in such a way that they do not know, for the purpose of rebuking their conceit. This is teaching by way of rebuke. And it was said, "Niggayha niggayhāhaṃ, Ānanda, vakkhāmi, pavayha pavayha, Ānanda, vakkhāmi, yo sāro, so ṭhassatī" (Ma. Ni. 3.196). But to those who are upright and desirous of training, he teaches the Dhamma similar to the Ākaṅkheyya Sutta, making it easily understood, and he encourages them, "Abhirama, Tissa, abhirama, Tissa, ahamovādena ahamanuggahena ahamanusāsaniyā" (Saṃ. Ni. 3.84). This is teaching by way of encouragement.

Ayaṃ pana devaputto mānatthaddho paṇḍitamānī, evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ahaṃ oghaṃ jānāmi, tathāgatassa oghatiṇṇabhāvaṃ jānāmi, ‘‘iminā pana kāraṇena tiṇṇo’’ti ettakamattaṃ na jānāmi. Iti mayhaṃ ñātameva bahu, appaṃ aññātaṃ, tamahaṃ kathitamattameva jānissāmi. Kiñhi nāma taṃ bhagavā vadeyya, yassāhaṃ atthaṃ na jāneyyanti. Atha satthā ‘‘ayaṃ kiliṭṭhavatthaṃ viya raṅgajātaṃ abhabbo imaṃ mānaṃ appahāya desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ, mānaniggahaṃ tāvassa katvā puna nīcacittena pucchantassa pakāsessāmī’’ti paṭicchannaṃ katvā pañhaṃ kathesi. Sopi nihatamāno ahosi, sā cassa nihatamānatā uttaripañhapucchaneneva veditabbā. Tassa pana pañhapucchanassa ayamattho – kathaṃ pana tvaṃ, mārisa, appatiṭṭhaṃ anāyūhaṃ oghamatari, yathāhaṃ jānāmi, evaṃ me kathehīti.

This devaputta, however, was conceited and arrogant, and it occurred to him thus: I know the flood, and I know the Tathāgata's state of having crossed the flood; however, I do not know to what extent he has crossed by this reason. Thus, what I know is much, and what is unknown is little; I will know it merely by it being spoken. For what would the Blessed One say, the meaning of which I would not know? Then the Teacher, thinking, "Like a stained cloth, this one, with his nature for stain, is incapable of receiving the teaching without abandoning this conceit; having first rebuked his conceit, I will reveal it to him when he asks again with a humble mind," spoke the question having made it concealed. And he became one whose pride was destroyed, and his destroyed pride should be known only by his asking a further question. However, this is the meaning of his asking the question: How did you, sir, cross the flood by not standing firm and not striving? Tell me as I know.

yadāsvāhantiādimāha. Tatthayadā svāhanti yasmiṃ kāle ahaṃ. Sukāro nipātamattaṃ. Yathā ca ettha, evaṃ sabbapadesu.Saṃsīdāmīti paṭicchannaṃ katvā ataranto tattheva osīdāmi.Nibbuyhāmīti ṭhātuṃ asakkonto ativattāmi. Iti ṭhāne ca vāyāme ca dosaṃ disvā atiṭṭhanto avāyamanto oghamatarinti evaṃ bhagavatā pañho kathito. Devatāyapi paṭividdho, na pana pākaṭo, tassa pākaṭīkaraṇatthaṃ satta dukā dassitā. Kilesavasena hi santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, abhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, avasesakilesānañceva abhisaṅkhārānañca vasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Taṇhāvasena vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, diṭṭhivasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Sassatadiṭṭhiyā vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, ucchedadiṭṭhiyā āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Olīyanābhinivesā hi bhavadiṭṭhi, atidhāvanābhinivesā vibhavadiṭṭhi. Līnavasena vā santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, uddhaccavasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Tathā kāmasukhallikānuyogavasena santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, attakilamathānuyogavasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Sabbākusalābhisaṅkhāravasena santiṭṭhanto saṃsīdati nāma, sabbalokiyakusalābhisaṅkhāravasena āyūhanto nibbuyhati nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi, cunda, ye keci akusalā dhammā, sabbe te adhobhāgaṅgamanīyā, ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te uparibhāgaṅgamanīyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.86).

yadāsvāhanti etc. is said first. Therein, yadā svāhanti means at which time I. Su is merely a particle. Just as here, so in all instances. Saṃsīdāmīti concealing and not crossing over, I sink right there. Nibbuyhāmīti being unable to stand, I go beyond. Thus, having seen the fault in both standing and striving, not standing, not striving, one crosses the flood—in this way, the question was spoken by the Blessed One. It was also understood by the deity, but not made clear; for the purpose of making that clear, seven pairs were shown. For, clinging due to defilements, one is said to sink; by intending, due to volitional activity (abhisaṅkhāra), one is said to go beyond (nibbuyhati). Or, clinging due to craving and views, one is said to sink; by intending due to the remaining defilements and volitional activities, one is said to go beyond. Or, clinging due to craving, one is said to sink; by intending due to views, one is said to go beyond. Or, clinging to the eternalist view, one is said to sink; by intending with the annihilationist view, one is said to go beyond. For clinging to leaning is the view of existence (bhava-diṭṭhi), clinging to rushing is the view of non-existence (vibhava-diṭṭhi). Or, clinging to being lax, one is said to sink; by intending due to restlessness, one is said to go beyond. Similarly, clinging to indulgence in sensual pleasures, one is said to sink; by intending due to self-mortification, one is said to go beyond. Clinging to all unwholesome volitional activities, one is said to sink; by intending due to all mundane wholesome volitional activities, one is said to go beyond. This was also said: "Just as, Cunda, whatever unwholesome things there are, all of them lead downwards; whatever wholesome things there are, all of them lead upwards" (ma. ni. 1.86).

cirassaṃ vatāti gāthamāha. Tatthacirassanti cirassa kālassa accayenāti attho. Ayaṃ kira devatā kassapasammāsambuddhaṃ disvā tassa parinibbānato paṭṭhāya antarā aññaṃ buddhaṃ na diṭṭhapubbā, tasmā ajja bhagavantaṃ disvā evamāha. Kiṃ panimāya devatāya ito pubbe satthā na diṭṭhapubboti. Diṭṭhapubbo vā hotu adiṭṭhapubbo vā, dassanaṃ upādāya evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Brāhmaṇanti bāhitapāpaṃ khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ.Parinibbutanti kilesanibbānena nibbutaṃ.Loketi sattaloke.Visattikanti rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu āsattavisattatādīhi kāraṇehi visattikā vuccati taṇhā, taṃ visattikaṃ appatiṭṭhamānaṃ anāyūhamānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nittiṇṇaṃ uttiṇṇaṃ cirassaṃ vata khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇaṃ passāmīti attho.

cirassaṃ vatāti says the verse. Therein, cirassanti means after a long time has passed. It seems that this deity, having seen Kassapa Sammāsambuddha, had not seen another Buddha in the interval from his Parinibbāna onwards; therefore, having seen the Blessed One today, he speaks thus. But had this deity not seen the Teacher before this? Whether he had seen him before or not, it is fitting to speak thus based on the seeing. Brāhmaṇanti a Brāhmaṇa who has banished evil, a Brāhmaṇa whose āsavas are destroyed. Parinibbutanti extinguished with the extinction of defilements. Loketi in the world of beings. Visattikanti Visattikā, which is called craving due to the causes of clinging and non-clinging in objects such as form, etc., not standing firm in that Visattikā, not intending, having crossed, well-crossed, crossed over, indeed after a long time I see a Brāhmaṇa whose āsavas are destroyed, is the meaning.

Samanuñño satthā ahosīti tassā devatāya vacanaṃ citteneva samanumodi, ekajjhāsayo ahosi.Antaradhāyīti abhisaṅkhatakāyaṃ jahitvā attano pakatiupādiṇṇakakāyasmiṃyeva ṭhatvā laddhāsā laddhapatiṭṭhā hutvā dasabalaṃ gandhehi ca mālehi ca pūjetvā attano bhavanaṃyeva agamāsīti.

Samanuñño satthā ahosīti the Teacher approved of the words of that deity with his mind, he was of one mind. Antaradhāyīti having abandoned the materialized body, standing in his own natural, acquired body, having obtained hope, having obtained a foundation, having honored the Ten-Powered One with perfumes and garlands, he went to his own abode.

Oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Oghataraṇasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

2. Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā

2.Idāni dutiyasuttato paṭṭhāya paṭhamamāgatañca uttānatthañca pahāya yaṃ yaṃ anuttānaṃ, taṃ tadeva vaṇṇayissāma.Jānāsi noti jānāsi nu.Nimokkhantiādīni maggādīnaṃ nāmāni. Maggena hi sattā kilesabandhanato nimuccanti, tasmā maggo sattānaṃnimokkhoti vutto. Phalakkhaṇe pana te kilesabandhanato pamuttā, tasmā phalaṃ sattānaṃpamokkhoti vuttaṃ. Nibbānaṃ patvā sattānaṃ sabbadukkhaṃ viviccati, tasmā nibbānaṃvivekoti vuttaṃ. Sabbāni vā etāni nibbānasseva nāmāni. Nibbānañhi patvā sattā sabbadukkhato nimuccanti pamuccanti viviccanti, tasmā tadeva ‘‘nimokkho pamokkho viveko’’ti vuttaṃ.Jānāmi khvāhanti jānāmi kho ahaṃ. Avadhāraṇattho khokāro. Ahaṃ jānāmiyeva. Sattānaṃ nimokkhādijānanatthameva hi mayā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭividdhanti sīhanādaṃ nadati. Buddhasīhanādaṃ nāma kira etaṃ suttaṃ.

2.Now, beginning from the second sutta, having omitted that which came first and is of obvious meaning, whatever is not obvious, that itself we will describe. Jānāsi noti Do you know? Nimokkhanti etc. are names for the path, etc. For beings are freed from the bonds of defilements by the path, therefore the path is said to be the nimokkha of beings. But at the moment of fruition (phala), they are released from the bonds of defilements, therefore fruition (phala) is said to be the pamokkha of beings. Having attained Nibbāna, all suffering is separated for beings, therefore Nibbāna is said to be viveko. Or, all of these are names for Nibbāna itself. For having attained Nibbāna, beings are freed, released, and separated from all suffering, therefore that itself is said to be "nimokkho pamokkho viveko". Jānāmi khvāhanti Indeed, I know. The kho-sound is for emphasis. I certainly know. Indeed, for the purpose of knowing the nimokkha, etc., of beings, having fulfilled thirty perfections (pāramī) and realized the knowledge of omniscience, he roars a lion's roar. It is said that this sutta is a Buddha's lion's roar.

Nandībhavaparikkhayāti nandīmūlakassa kammabhavassa parikkhayena. Nandiyā ca bhavassa cātipi vaṭṭati. Tattha hi purimanaye nandībhavena tividhakammābhisaṅkhāravasena saṅkhārakkhandho gahito, saññāviññāṇehi taṃsampayuttā ca dve khandhā. Tehi pana tīhi khandhehi sampayuttā vedanā tesaṃ gahaṇena gahitāvāti anupādiṇṇakānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpakkhandhānaṃ appavattivasena saupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.Vedanānaṃ nirodhā upasamāti upādiṇṇakavedanānaṃ nirodhena ca upasamena ca. Tattha vedanāgahaṇena taṃsampayuttā tayo khandhā gahitāva honti, tesaṃ vatthārammaṇavasena rūpakkhandhopi. Evaṃ imesaṃ upādiṇṇakānaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appavattivasena anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Dutiyanaye pana nandiggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandho gahito, bhavaggahaṇena upapattibhavasaṅkhāto rūpakkhandho, saññādīhi sarūpeneva tayo khandhā. Evaṃ imesaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ appavattivasena nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Imameva ca nayaṃ catunikāyikabhaṇḍikatthero roceti. Iti nibbānavaseneva bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti.

Nandībhavaparikkhayāti by the destruction of the becoming rooted in delight (nandī). Or, of delight and becoming is also fitting. There, in the former method, by delight-becoming, by way of the three kinds of karma-volitional activities, the aggregate of volitional activities is taken, and two aggregates connected with it, namely perception and consciousness. However, feeling connected with those three aggregates is taken by the taking of them, thus, with the non-occurrence of the four immaterial aggregates that are not clung to, Nibbāna with residue (saupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ) is spoken of. Vedanānaṃ nirodhā upasamāti by the cessation and stilling of feelings that are clung to. There, by taking feeling, the three aggregates connected with it are indeed taken, and also the aggregate of form by way of their base and object. Thus, with the non-occurrence of these five aggregates that are clung to, Nibbāna without residue (anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ) is spoken of. However, in the second method, by taking delight, the aggregate of volitional activities is taken; by taking becoming, the aggregate of form known as rebirth-becoming; and by taking perception, etc., the three aggregates are taken with their own form. Thus, with the non-occurrence of these five aggregates, Nibbāna is said to be, it should be understood. And the Elder of the Four Nikāya Reciters approves of this very method. Thus, the Blessed One concludes the teaching with only Nibbāna.

Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nimokkhasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

3. Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā

3.Tatiyeupanīyatīti parikkhīyati nirujjhati, upagacchati vā, anupubbena maraṇaṃ upetīti attho. Yathā vā gopālena gogaṇo nīyati, evaṃ jarāya maraṇasantikaṃ upanīyatīti attho.Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ.Appanti parittaṃ thokaṃ. Tassa dvīhākārehi parittatā veditabbā sarasaparittatāya ca khaṇaparittatāya ca. Sarasaparittatāyapi hi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.7; saṃ. ni. 2.143) vacanato parittaṃ. Khaṇaparittatāyapi. Paramatthato hi atiparitto sattānaṃ jīvitakkhaṇo ekacittappavattimattoyeva. Yathā nāma rathacakkaṃ pavattamānampi ekeneva nemippadesena pavattati, tiṭṭhamānampi ekeneva tiṭṭhati, evamevaṃ ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ, tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatte satto niruddhoti vuccati. Yathāha – atīte cittakkhaṇe jīvittha na jīvati na jīvissati, anāgate cittakkhaṇe jīvissati na jīvati na jīvittha, paccuppanne cittakkhaṇe jīvati na jīvittha na jīvissati.

3.In the third, upanīyatīti is exhausted, ceases, or approaches, or gradually approaches death, is the meaning. Or, just as a herd of cows is led by a cowherd, so it is led to the presence of old age and death, is the meaning. Jīvitanti the life faculty. Appanti little, scant. Its scantiness should be understood in two ways: scantiness of essence and scantiness of duration. For even in scantiness of essence, it is scant because of the saying, "He who lives long, monks, lives a hundred years or a little more" (dī. ni. 2.7; saṃ. ni. 2.143). Also in scantiness of duration. For in the ultimate sense, the moment of life for beings is extremely scant, being only the duration of one thought-moment. Just as a chariot wheel, even when moving, moves with only one part of the rim, and even when standing, stands with only one part, even so, the life of beings is one thought-moment, and as soon as that thought ceases, a being is said to have ceased. As it was said—in a past thought-moment, he lived, he does not live, he will not live; in a future thought-moment, he will live, he does not live, he did not live; in a present thought-moment, he lives, he did not live, he will not live.

‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā;

"Life and individuality,
Pleasure and pain entirely;
United with a single thought,
Fleetingly the moment passes.

‘‘Ye niruddhā marantassa, tiṭṭhamānassa vā idha;

"Those who have ceased at death,
Or those who stand here;
All aggregates are similar,
Gone, without rebirth.

‘‘Anibbattena na jāto, paccuppannena jīvati;

"Not yet arisen, not born,
He lives in the present;
The world dies with the breaking of thought,
A concept in the ultimate sense" (mahāni. 10);

Jarūpanītassāti jaraṃ upagatassa, jarāya vā maraṇasantikaṃ upanītassa.Na santi tāṇāti tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ saraṇaṃ bhavituṃ samatthā nāma keci natthi.Etaṃ bhayanti etaṃ jīvitindriyassa maraṇūpagamanaṃ, āyuparittatā, jarūpanītassa tāṇābhāvoti tividhaṃ bhayaṃ bhayavatthu bhayakāraṇanti attho.Puññāni kayirātha sukhāvahānīti viññū puriso sukhāvahāni sukhadāyakāni puññāni kareyya. Iti devatā rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ sandhāya pubbacetanaṃ aparacetanaṃ muñcacetanañca gahetvā bahuvacanavasena ‘‘puññānī’’ti āha. Jhānassādaṃ jhānanikantiṃ jhānasukhañca gahetvā ‘‘sukhāvahānī’’ti āha. Tassā kira devatāya sayaṃ dīghāyukaṭṭhāne brahmaloke nibbattattā heṭṭhā kāmāvacaradevesu parittāyukaṭṭhāne cavamāne upapajjamāne ca thullaphusitake vuṭṭhipātasadise satte disvā etadahosi ‘‘ahovatime sattā jhānaṃ bhāvetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke ekakappa-dvekappa-catukappa-aṭṭhakappa-soḷasakappa-dvattiṃsakappa-catusaṭṭhikappappamāṇaṃ addhānaṃ tiṭṭheyyu’’nti. Tasmā evamāha.

Jarūpanītassāti to one who has approached old age, or who has been led by old age to the presence of death. Na santi tāṇāti there are no protectors able to be a refuge, shelter, or sanctuary. Etaṃ bhayanti this fear—the approach of the life faculty to death, the scantiness of life, the absence of protection for one led to old age—means threefold fear, a cause for fear, a reason for fear. Puññāni kayirātha sukhāvahānīti a wise person should do meritorious deeds that bring happiness, that give happiness. Thus, the deity, referring to rūpāvacara jhāna, having taken prior intention, subsequent intention, and freeing intention, and in the sense of plural, said "puññānī". Taking the taste of jhāna, delight in jhāna, and happiness of jhāna, he said "sukhāvahānī". It seems that the deity himself, having been reborn in the long-lived state of the Brahma world, saw beings in the lower sensuous realms who were falling and arising in the place of little life, like a thick, soft rain, and this occurred to him: "Oh, these beings, having cultivated jhāna, not having declined from jhāna, having made an end of their life, would remain in the Brahma world for a period of one aeon, two aeons, four aeons, eight aeons, sixteen aeons, thirty-two aeons, sixty-four aeons." Therefore he speaks thus.

lokāmisanti dve lokāmisā pariyāyena ca nippariyāyena ca. Pariyāyena tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ lokāmisaṃ, nippariyāyena cattāro paccayā. Idha pariyāyalokāmisaṃ adhippetaṃ. Nippariyāyalokāmisampi vaṭṭatiyeva.Santipekkhoti nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ accantasantiṃ pekkhanto icchanto patthayantoti.

lokāmisanti two worldly baits (lokāmisa)—by way of expression and without expression. By way of expression, the three-planed cycle (vaṭṭa) is the worldly bait; without expression, the four requisites. Here, the worldly bait by way of expression is intended. The worldly bait without expression is also fitting. Santipekkhoti looking to, desiring, longing for the ultimate peace known as Nibbāna.

Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Upanīyasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

4. Accentisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Accentisuttavaṇṇanā

4.Catuttheaccentīti atikkamanti.Kālāti purebhattādayo kālā.Tarayanti rattiyoti rattiyo atikkamamānā puggalaṃ maraṇūpagamanāya tarayanti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gamayanti.Vayoguṇāti paṭhamamajjhimapacchimavayānaṃ guṇā, rāsayoti attho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṃ vatthānaṃ diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭi’’nti (mahāva. 348) ettha hi paṭalaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. ‘‘Sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.379) ettha ānisaṃsaṭṭho. ‘‘Antaṃ antaguṇa’’nti ettha koṭṭhāsaṭṭho. ‘‘Kayirā mālāguṇe bahū’’ti (dha. pa. 53) ettha rāsaṭṭho. ‘‘Pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti ettha bandhanaṭṭho. Idha pana rāsaṭṭho guṇaṭṭho. Tasmāvayoguṇāti vayorāsayo veditabbā.Anupubbaṃjahantīti anupaṭipāṭiyā puggalaṃ jahanti. Majjhimavaye ṭhitaṃ hi paṭhamavayo jahati, pacchimavaye ṭhitaṃ dve paṭhamamajjhimā jahanti, maraṇakkhaṇe pana tayopi vayā jahanteva.Etaṃ bhayanti etaṃ kālānaṃ atikkamanaṃ, rattidivānaṃ taritabhāvo, vayoguṇānaṃ jahanabhāvoti tividhaṃ bhayaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.

4.In the fourth, accentīti pass by. Kālāti times such as before meal, etc. Tarayanti rattiyoti the nights, passing by, hasten a person to approaching death, they go quickly, quickly. Vayoguṇāti the qualities of the first, middle, and last ages, the masses, is the meaning. For here, in "I allow, monks, a double-layered robe of unsewn cloths" (mahāva. 348), guṇa means a fold. In "A donation of a hundredfold should be expected" (ma. ni. 3.379), it means benefit. In "End to end-section," it means a portion. In "He should make many garlands" (dha. pa. 53), it means a heap. In "The five strands of sense-pleasure," it means a bond. Here, however, guṇa means a heap. Therefore, vayoguṇāti should be understood as heaps of age. Anupubbaṃjahantīti gradually abandon the person. For the first age abandons one standing in the middle age, the first two, the first and middle ages, abandon one standing in the last age, however at the moment of death, all three ages abandon one. Etaṃ bhayanti this fear—the passing by of times, the hastening nature of nights and days, the abandoning nature of heaps of age—means threefold fear. The rest is just like the previous.

Accentisuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Accentisuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

5. Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā

5.Pañcamekati chindeti chindanto kati chindeyya. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca ‘‘chinde jahe’’ti atthato ekaṃ. Gāthābandhassa pana maṭṭhabhāvatthaṃ ayaṃ devatā saddapunaruttiṃ vajjayantī evamāha.Kati saṅgātigoti kati saṅge atigato, atikkantoti attho. Saṅgātikotipi pāṭho, ayameva attho.Pañca chindeti chindanto pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni chindeyya.Pañca jaheti jahanto pañcuddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni jaheyya. Idhāpi chindanañca jahanañca atthato ekameva, bhagavā pana devatāya āropitavacanānurūpeneva evamāha. Atha vā pādesu baddhapāsasakuṇo viya pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni heṭṭhā ākaḍḍhamānākārāni honti, tāni anāgāmimaggena chindeyyāti vadati. Hatthehi gahitarukkhasākhā viya pañcuddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni upari ākaḍḍhamānākārāni honti, tāni arahattamaggena jaheyyāti vadati.Pañca cuttari bhāvayeti etesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ chindanatthāya ceva pahānatthāya ca uttari atirekaṃ visesaṃ bhāvento saddhāpañcamāni indriyāni bhāveyyāti attho.Pañca saṅgātigoti rāgasaṅgo dosasaṅgo mohasaṅgo mānasaṅgo diṭṭhisaṅgoti ime pañca saṅge atikkanto.Oghatiṇṇoti vuccatīti caturoghatiṇṇoti kathīyati. Imāya pana gāthāya pañcindriyāni lokiyalokuttarāni kathitānīti.

5.In the fifth, kati chindeti how many should one cut when cutting. This same method applies to the remaining words. And here, "chinde jahe" (should cut, should abandon) are the same in meaning. However, for the sake of the smooth flow of the verse, this deity, avoiding repetition of words, speaks thus. Kati saṅgātigoti how many attachments has he overcome, transgressed, is the meaning. Saṅgātikopi is also a reading, this is the meaning. Pañca chindeti when cutting, he should cut the five lower fetters. Pañca jaheti when abandoning, he should abandon the five higher fetters. Here too, cutting and abandoning are the same in meaning, however the Blessed One speaks thus only in accordance with the speech attributed to the deity. Or, like a bird tied with a noose on its feet, the five lower fetters have a way of pulling down, he says that they should be cut with the path of non-returning. Like a tree branch held by the hands, the five higher fetters have a way of pulling upwards, he says that they should be abandoned with the path of arahantship. Pañca cuttari bhāvayeti cultivating further, in addition, especially, for the sake of cutting and abandoning these fetters, he should cultivate the faculties, with faith as the fifth, is the meaning. Pañca saṅgātigoti he has overcome the five attachments—attachment to lust, attachment to hatred, attachment to delusion, attachment to conceit, and attachment to views. Oghatiṇṇoti vuccatīti he is called one who has crossed the four floods. However, in this verse, the five faculties, mundane and supramundane, are spoken of.

Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Katichindasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

6. Jāgarasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Jāgarasuttavaṇṇanā

6.Chaṭṭhejāgaratanti jāgarantānaṃ.Pañca jāgaratanti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ pana saddhādīsu pañcasu indriyesu jāgarantesu pañca nīvaraṇā suttā nāma. Kasmā? Yasmā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo yattha katthaci nisinno vā ṭhito vā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapentopi pamādatāya akusalasamaṅgitāya sutto nāma hoti. Evaṃ suttesu pañcasu nīvaraṇesu pañcindriyāni jāgarāni nāma. Kasmā? Yasmā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo yattha katthaci nipajjitvā niddāyantopi appamādatāya kusalasamaṅgitāya jāgaro nāma hoti. Pañcahi pana nīvaraṇeheva kilesarajaṃ ādiyati gaṇhāti parāmasati. Purimā hi kāmacchandādayo pacchimānaṃ paccayā hontīti pañcahi indriyehi parisujjhatīti ayamattho veditabbo. Idhāpi pañcindriyāni lokiyalokuttarāneva kathitānīti.

6. In the sixth, jāgarata means those who are awake. Pañca jāgarata in the distribution verse, when the five faculties such as faith are awake, the five hindrances are said to be asleep. Why? Because a person endowed with that, whether sitting or standing anywhere, even awakening at dawn, is called asleep due to negligence and being associated with unwholesomeness. Thus, when the five hindrances are asleep, the five faculties are said to be awake. Why? Because a person endowed with that, even lying down and sleeping anywhere, is called awake due to diligence and being associated with wholesomeness. Furthermore, one accumulates, grasps, and clings to the dust of defilements with just the five hindrances. Indeed, the former, such as sensual desire, are conditions for the latter, so it should be understood that one is purified by the five faculties. Here also, only the mundane and supramundane five faculties are discussed.

Jāgarasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Jāgara Sutta is finished.

7. Appaṭividitasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Appaṭividita Sutta

7.Sattamedhammāti catusaccadhammā.Appaṭividitāti ñāṇena appaṭividdhā.Paravādesūti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavādesu. Te hi ito paresaṃ titthiyānaṃ vādattā paravādā nāma.Nīyareti attano dhammatāyapi gacchanti, parenapi nīyanti. Tattha sayameva sassatādīni gaṇhantā gacchanti nāma, parassa vacanena tāni gaṇhantā nīyanti nāma.Kālo tesaṃ pabujjhitunti tesaṃ puggalānaṃ pabujjhituṃ ayaṃ kālo. Lokasmiñhi buddho uppanno, dhammo desiyati, saṅgho suppaṭipanno, paṭipadā bhaddikā, ime ca pana mahājanā vaṭṭe suttā nappabujjhantīti devatā āha.Sambuddhāti sammā hetunā kāraṇena buddhā. Cattāro hi buddhā – sabbaññubuddho, paccekabuddho, catusaccabuddho, sutabuddhoti. Tattha samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ patto sabbaññubuddho nāma. Kappasatasahassādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā sayambhutaṃ patto paccekabuddho nāma. Avasesā khīṇāsavā catusaccabuddhā nāma. Bahussuto sutabuddho nāma. Imasmiṃ atthe tayopi purimā vaṭṭanti.Sammadaññāti sammā hetunā kāraṇena jānitvā.Caranti visame samanti visame vā lokasannivāse visame vā sattanikāye visame vā kilesajāte samaṃ carantīti.

7. In the seventh, dhammā means the Four Noble Truths. Appaṭividitā means not penetrated by knowledge. Paravādesū means in the arguments of the sixty-two kinds of views. Indeed, because they are the arguments of others, of the non-Buddhists, they are called paravādā. Nīyare means they go according to their own nature, and they are led by others. There, going means taking up eternalism and so on by themselves; being led means taking them up by the word of another. Kālo tesaṃ pabujjhituṃ means this is the time for those individuals to awaken. Indeed, in the world, a Buddha has arisen, the Dhamma is taught, the Saṅgha is practicing well, the practice is excellent, but these great masses, asleep in the cycle [of rebirth], do not awaken, so says the deity. Sambuddhā means rightly awakened due to a reason or cause. Indeed, there are four Buddhas: the All-Enlightened Buddha (sabbaññubuddho), the Private Buddha (paccekabuddho), the Truth-Enlightened Buddha (catusaccabuddho), and the Learned Buddha (sutabuddho). There, the All-Enlightened Buddha is the one who attained complete self-awakening (sammāsambodhi) after fulfilling the thirty perfections. The Private Buddha is the one who attained self-existence (sayambhuta) after fulfilling the perfections for more than two incalculable periods and one hundred thousand eons. The remaining arahants are called Truth-Enlightened Buddhas. The very learned one is called the Learned Buddha. In this context, the former three are applicable. Sammadaññā means having rightly known due to a reason or cause. Caranti visame samaṃ means they conduct themselves evenly in an uneven world, in an uneven collection of beings, or in an uneven mass of defilements.

Appaṭividitasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Appaṭividita Sutta is finished.

8. Susammuṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Susammuṭṭha Sutta

8.Aṭṭhamesusammuṭṭhāti paññāya appaṭividdhabhāveneva sunaṭṭhā. Yathā hi dve khettāni kasitvā, ekaṃ vapitvā, bahudhaññaṃ adhigatassa avāpitakhettato aladdhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘bahuṃ me dhaññaṃ naṭṭha’’nti vadanto aladdhameva ‘‘naṭṭha’’nti vadati, evamidhāpi appaṭividitāva susammuṭṭhā nāma.Asammuṭṭhāti paññāya paṭividdhabhāveneva anaṭṭhā. Sesaṃ purimasadisamevāti.

8. In the eighth, susammuṭṭhā means well-destroyed, precisely because of being unpenetrated by wisdom. Just as, having cultivated two fields, and having sown in one, a person who has obtained much grain, referring to what was not obtained from the unsown field, says, "Much of my grain is lost," thus he says "lost" only of what was not obtained. So here too, only what is unpenetrated is called well-destroyed. Asammuṭṭhā means not destroyed precisely because of being penetrated by wisdom. The rest is just like the previous.

Susammuṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Susammuṭṭha Sutta is finished.

9. Mānakāmasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Mānakāma Sutta

9.Navamemānakāmassāti mānaṃ kāmentassa icchantassa.Damoti evarūpassa puggalassa samādhipakkhiko damo natthīti vadati. ‘‘Saccena danto damasā upeto, vedantagū vusitabrahmacariyo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.195) ettha hi indriyasaṃvaro damoti vutto. ‘‘Yadi saccā damā cāgā, khantyā bhiyyodha vijjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 191) ettha paññā. ‘‘Dānena damena saṃyamena saccavajjena atthi puññaṃ, atthi puññassa āgamo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.365) ettha uposathakammaṃ. ‘‘Sakkhissasi kho tvaṃ, puṇṇa, iminā damūpasamena samannāgato sunāparantasmiṃ janapade viharitu’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.88; ma. ni. 3.396) ettha adhivāsanakhanti. Imasmiṃ pana sutte damoti samādhipakkhikadhammānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘na monamatthi asamāhitassā’’ti. Tatthamonanti catumaggañāṇaṃ, tañhi munātīti monaṃ, catusaccadhamme jānātīti attho.Maccudheyyassāti tebhūmakavaṭṭassa. Tañhi maccuno patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena maccudheyyanti vuccati.Pāranti tasseva pāraṃ nibbānaṃ.Tareyyāti paṭivijjheyya pāpuṇeyya vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – eko araññe viharanto pamatto puggalo maccudheyyassa pāraṃ na tareyya na paṭivijjheyya na pāpuṇeyyāti.

9. In the ninth, mānakāmassāti means to one who desires and craves conceit. Damo means for such a person, there is no discipline pertaining to concentration. For here, "controlled by truth, endowed with discipline, one who has reached the end of the Vedas, one who has lived the holy life" (SN 1.195), sense restraint is said to be discipline. "If there is more truthfulness, discipline, generosity, and patience" (SN 1.246; Sn 191), here it is wisdom. "By giving, discipline, restraint, and speaking the truth, there is merit, there is an increase of merit" (SN 4.365), here it is the observance of the uposatha. "Surely, Puṇṇa, you will be able, endowed with this taming and calming, to live in the Sunāparanta region" (SN 4.88; MN 3.396), here it is patience in enduring. But in this sutta, damo is a name for the qualities pertaining to concentration. Therefore he said, "There is no silence for one who is not concentrated." There, mona means the knowledge of the four paths; indeed, because it knows (munāti), it is mona, meaning it knows the Four Noble Truths. Maccudheyyassā means to the threefold cycle of existence, for indeed, because it is the support (patiṭṭhāna) of death, it is called maccudheyya. Pāraṃ means the further shore of that, which is Nibbāna. Tareyyā means one should cross over, attain, or reach. This is what is said: a negligent person living in the forest would not cross over, would not penetrate, would not reach the further shore of the realm of death.

Mānaṃ pahāyāti arahattamaggena navavidhamānaṃ pajahitvā.Susamāhitattoti upacārappanāsamādhīhi suṭṭhu samāhitatto.Sucetasoti ñāṇasampayuttatāya sundaracitto. Ñāṇavippayuttacittena hi sucetasoti na vuccati, tasmā ñāṇasampayuttena sucetaso hutvāti attho.Sabbadhi vippamuttoti sabbesu khandhāyatanādīsu vippamutto hutvā.Tareyyāti ettha tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ samatikkamanto nibbānaṃ paṭivijjhanto taratīti paṭivedhataraṇaṃ nāma vuttaṃ. Iti imāya gāthāya tisso sikkhā kathitā honti. Kathaṃ – māno nāmāyaṃ sīlabhedano, tasmā ‘‘mānaṃ pahāyā’’ti iminā adhisīlasikkhā kathitā hoti. ‘‘Susamāhitatto’’ti iminā adhicittasikkhā. ‘‘Sucetaso’’ti ettha cittena paññā dassitā, tasmā iminā adhipaññāsikkhā kathitā. Adhisīlañca nāma sīle sati hoti, adhicittaṃ citte sati, adhipaññā paññāya sati. Tasmā sīlaṃ nāma pañcapi dasapi sīlāni, pātimokkhasaṃvaro adhisīlaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittaṃ, vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ adhicittaṃ. Kammassakatañāṇaṃ paññā, vipassanā adhipaññā. Anuppannepi hi buddhuppāde pavattatīti pañcasīlaṃ dasasīlaṃ sīlameva, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ buddhuppādeyeva pavattatīti adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayo. Apica nibbānaṃ patthayantena samādinnaṃ pañcasīlampi dasasīlampi adhisīlameva. Samāpannā aṭṭha samāpattiyopi adhicittameva. Sabbampi vā lokiyasīlaṃ sīlameva, lokuttaraṃ adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayoti. Iti imāya gāthāya samodhānetvā tisso sikkhā sakalasāsanaṃ kathitaṃ hotīti.

Mānaṃ pahāyā means having abandoned the nine kinds of conceit with the path of arahantship. Susamāhitatto means one whose mind is well-concentrated with access and absorption concentration. Sucetaso means one with a beautiful mind because it is associated with knowledge. Indeed, one is not called sucetaso with a mind disassociated with knowledge; therefore, it means having become sucetaso associated with knowledge. Sabbadhi vippamutto means having become freed in all aggregates, sense bases, and so on. Tareyyā Here, crossing over the threefold cycle of existence and penetrating Nibbāna, he crosses over, so it is called crossing over through penetration. Thus, in this verse, the three trainings are spoken of. How? This conceit is a destroyer of virtue, therefore, with "having abandoned conceit," the higher training in virtue is spoken of. With "well-concentrated in mind," the higher training in mind. With "beautiful-minded," knowledge is shown by the mind, therefore, with this the higher training in wisdom is spoken of. And the higher virtue exists when there is virtue, the higher mind when there is mind, the higher wisdom when there is wisdom. Therefore, virtue is called both the five and ten precepts, restraint in accordance with the pātimokkha is called higher virtue. The eight attainments are the mind, the jhāna that is the basis for insight is the higher mind. Knowledge of owning one's actions is wisdom, insight is higher wisdom. Indeed, even when a Buddha has not arisen, the five precepts and ten precepts exist as virtue itself, the virtue of pātimokkha restraint exists only when a Buddha has arisen, so it is higher virtue. The same method applies to mind and wisdom. Furthermore, the five precepts and the ten precepts undertaken by one desiring Nibbāna are higher virtue. The eight attainments attained are also higher mind. Or all mundane virtue is virtue, supramundane is higher virtue. The same method applies to mind and wisdom. Thus, by combining in this verse, the three trainings, the entire teaching, is spoken of.

Mānakāmasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Mānakāma Sutta is finished.

10. Araññasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Arañña Sutta

10.Dasamesantānanti santakilesānaṃ, paṇḍitānaṃ vā. ‘‘Santo have sabbhi pavedayanti (jā. 2.21.413), dūre santo pakāsantī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 304) hi paṇḍitāpi santoti vuttā.Brahmacārinanti seṭṭhacārīnaṃ maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ.Kena vaṇṇo pasīdatīti kena kāraṇena chavivaṇṇo pasīdatīti pucchati. Kasmā panesā evaṃ pucchati? Esā kira vanasaṇḍavāsikā bhummadevatā āraññake bhikkhū pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkante araññaṃ pavisitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinne passati. Tesañca evaṃ nisinnānaṃ balavacittekaggatā uppajjati. Tato visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati okkamati, cittaṃ pasīdati. Citte pasanne lohitaṃ pasīdati, cittasamuṭṭhānāni upādārūpāni parisuddhāni honti, vaṇṭā pamuttatālaphalassa viya mukhassa vaṇṇo hoti. Taṃ disvā devatā cintesi – ‘‘sarīravaṇṇo nāmāyaṃ paṇītāni rasasampannāni bhojanāni sukhasamphassāni nivāsanapāpuraṇasayanāni utusukhe tebhūmikādibhede ca pāsāde mālāgandhavilepanādīni ca labhantānaṃ pasīdati, ime pana bhikkhū piṇḍāya caritvā missakabhattaṃ bhuñjanti, viraḷamañcake vā phalake vā silāya vā sayanāni kappenti, rukkhamūlādīsu vā abbhokāse vā vasanti, kena nu kho kāraṇena etesaṃ vaṇṇo pasīdatī’’ti. Tasmā pucchi.

10. In the tenth, santānaṃ means those whose defilements are stilled, or the wise. For in "The peaceful ones are known by all, the peaceful shine from afar," and so on (Ja. 2.21.413; Dhp. 304), the wise are also said to be peaceful. Brahmacārinaṃ means those living the excellent life, living the holy life of the path. Kena vaṇṇo pasīdatīti means by what cause does the complexion become clear? Why does she ask this? It seems that this earth deity dwelling in the forest grove sees monks living in the forest, after the meal, after returning from alms, entering the forest, taking up a root meditation subject in their daytime and nighttime dwellings and sitting down. And for those sitting thus, a strong one-pointedness of mind arises. Then dissimilar continuities subside, similar continuities take hold, and the mind becomes clear. When the mind is clear, the blood becomes clear, and the dependent matter produced by the mind becomes purified, and the complexion of the face is like that of a mango fallen from its stalk. Seeing that, the deity thought, "Indeed, bodily complexion becomes clear for those who obtain fine, delicious foods, pleasant tactile sensations, dwellings, coverings, beds, pleasant seasons, and palaces of the threefold sphere, and garlands, perfumes, ointments, and so on. But these monks, having gone for alms, eat mixed food, arrange their beds on a sparse cot or a plank or a stone, or live at the foot of a tree or in the open air. By what cause does their complexion become clear?" Therefore she asked.

atītanti atīte asuko nāma rājā dhammiko ahosi, so amhākaṃ paṇīte paccaye adāsi. Ācariyupajjhāyā lābhino ahesuṃ. Atha mayaṃ evarūpāni bhojanāni bhuñjimhā, cīvarāni pārupimhāti evaṃ ekacce paccayabāhullikā viya ime bhikkhū atītaṃ nānusocanti.Nappajappanti nāgatanti anāgate dhammiko rājā bhavissati, phītā janapadā bhavissanti, bahūni sappinavanītādīni uppajjissanti, ‘‘khādatha bhuñjathā’’ti tattha tattha vattāro bhavissanti, tadā mayaṃ evarūpāni bhojanāni bhuñjissāma, cīvarāni pārupissāmāti evaṃ anāgataṃ na patthenti.Paccuppannenāti yena kenaci taṅkhaṇe laddhena yāpenti.Tenāti tena tividhenāpi kāraṇena.

Atītaṃ means in the past, such and such a righteous king existed, he gave us fine requisites. The teachers and preceptors were gainful. Then we ate such foods, wore such robes, thus these monks do not grieve over the past like some who are abundant in requisites. Nappajappanti nāgataṃ means they do not long for the future, thinking, "In the future, there will be a righteous king, the countrysides will be prosperous, many delicacies like ghee and butter will arise, and there will be those saying 'eat and enjoy' everywhere, then we will eat such foods, we will wear such robes." Paccuppannenā means they maintain themselves with whatever they have obtained at that moment. Tenā means by that threefold reason.

anāgatappajappāyāti anāgatassa patthanāya.Etenāti etena kāraṇadvayena.Naḷova harito lutoti yathā harito naḷo lāyitvā uṇhapāsāṇe pakkhitto sussati, evaṃ sussantīti.

Anāgatappajappāya means longing for the future. Etenā means by these two reasons. Naḷova harito luto means just as a green reed, cut and thrown on a hot rock, withers, so they wither.

Araññasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā. Naḷavaggo paṭhamo.

Explanation of the Arañña Sutta is finished. The Naḷa Vagga is the first.

2. Nandanavaggo

2. The Nandana Vagga

1. Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Nandana Sutta

11.Nandanavaggassa paṭhametatrāti tasmiṃ ārāme.Khoti byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasena nipātamattaṃ.Bhikkhū āmantesīti parisajeṭṭhake bhikkhū jānāpesi.Bhikkhavoti tesaṃ āmantanākāradīpanaṃ.Bhadanteti pativacanadānaṃ.Te bhikkhūti ye tattha sammukhībhūtā dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū.Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato vacanaṃ patiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsūti attho.Etadavocāti etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘bhūtapubba’’ntiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthatāvatiṃsakāyikāti tāvatiṃsakāye nibbattā. Tāvatiṃsakāyo nāma dutiyadevaloko vuccati. Maghena māṇavena saddhiṃ macalagāme kālaṃ katvā tattha uppanne tettiṃsa devaputte upādāya kira tassa devalokassa ayaṃ paṇṇatti jātāti vadanti. Yasmā pana sesacakkavāḷesupi cha kāmāvacaradevalokā atthi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ sahassaṃ tāvatiṃsāna’’nti (a. ni. 10.29), tasmā nāmapaṇṇattiyevesā tassa devalokassāti veditabbā. Evañhi niddosaṃ padaṃ hoti.

11. In the first of the Nandana Vagga, tatrā means in that grove. Kho is merely a particle in the sense of emphasizing the phrase. Bhikkhū āmantesī means he informed the senior monks in the assembly. Bhikkhavo shows the manner of addressing them. Bhadante means giving a reply. Te bhikkhū means those monks who were present and receptive to the Dhamma. Bhagavato paccassosuṃ means they listened to the Buddha's word, they listened attentively and accepted it, this is the meaning. Etadavocā means he spoke this statement beginning with "bhūtapubba". There, tāvatiṃsakāyikā means born in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. The Tāvatiṃsa heaven is called the second heaven of sensual desire. It is said that this designation of that heaven arose with the thirty-three divine sons who, having died in Macala village with Magha the man, were born there. However, since there are six heavens of sensual desire in other world-systems as well, and it was also said that "a thousand of the Cātumahārājika heaven, a thousand of the Tāvatiṃsa heaven" (AN 10.29), therefore it should be understood that this is merely a designation for that heaven. Indeed, thus the phrase is faultless.

Nandane vaneti ettha taṃ vanaṃ paviṭṭhe paviṭṭhe nandayati tosetīti nandanaṃ. Pañcasu hi maraṇanimittesu uppannesu ‘‘sampattiṃ pahāya cavissāmā’’ti paridevamānā devatā sakko devānamindo ‘‘mā paridevittha, abhijjanadhammā nāma saṅkhārā natthī’’ti ovaditvā tattha pavesāpeti. Tāsaṃ aññāhi devatāhi bāhāsu gahetvā pavesitānampi tassa sampattiṃ disvāva maraṇasoko vūpasammati, pītipāmojjameva uppajjati. Atha tasmiṃ kīḷamānā eva uṇhasantatto himapiṇḍo viya vilīyanti, vātāpahatadīpasikhā viya vijjhāyantīti evaṃ yaṃkiñci anto paviṭṭhaṃ nandayati tosetiyevāti nandanaṃ, tasmiṃ nandane.Accharāsaṅghaparivutātiaccharāti devadhītānaṃ nāmaṃ, tāsaṃ samūhena parivutā.

Nandane vane here, that forest delights and pleases as one enters it, thus it is Nandana. Indeed, when the five signs of death arise, deities lamenting "we will pass away leaving our prosperity," Sakka, the king of the gods, admonishes them saying "do not lament, conditioned things are subject to decay," and leads them into it. Even for those led in by other deities holding their arms, their sorrow of death subsides upon seeing its prosperity, and only joy and delight arise. Then, sporting there, they melt away like a lump of ice heated by the sun, they vanish like a flame struck by the wind, thus whatever enters delights and pleases, thus it is Nandana, in that Nandana. Accharāsaṅghaparivutā here, accharā is a name for divine daughters, surrounded by a group of them.

Dibbehīti devaloke nibbattehi.Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbasaṅkhātehi pañcahi kāmabandhanehi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi vā.Samappitāti upetā. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Paricārayamānāti ramamānā, tesu tesu vā rūpādīsu indriyāni sañcārayamānā.Tāyaṃ velāyanti tasmiṃ paricāraṇakāle. So panassa devaputtassa adhunā abhinibbattakālo veditabbo. Tassa hi paṭisandhikkhaṇeyeva rattasuvaṇṇakkhandho viya virocayamāno tigāvutappamāṇo attabhāvo nibbatti. So dibbavatthanivattho dibbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍito dibbamālāvilepanadharo dibbehi candanacuṇṇehi samaṃ vikiriyamāno dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi ovuto nivuto pariyonaddho lobhābhibhūto hutvā lobhanissaraṇaṃ nibbānaṃ apassanto āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsanto viya mahāsaddena ‘‘na te sukhaṃ pajānantī’’ti imaṃ gāthaṃ gāyamāno nandanavane vicari. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsī’’ti.

Dibbehī means with those born in the divine realm. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehī means with the five strands of sensual pleasure, known as the desirable forms, sounds, smells, tastes, and tactile objects, the bonds of sensual desire or the storehouse of sensual desire. Samappitā means endowed. The other is a synonym for that. Paricārayamānā means enjoying themselves, moving the senses in those various forms and so on. Tāyaṃ velāyaṃ means at that time of enjoyment. Indeed, that time should be understood as the time when that divine son had newly arisen. Indeed, at the moment of his rebirth, an existence measuring three gāvutas arose, shining like a mass of red gold. He, clothed in divine garments, adorned with divine ornaments, wearing divine garlands and ointments, being sprinkled with divine sandalwood powder, surrounded, covered, and enveloped by the five divine strands of sensual pleasure, overcome by greed, not seeing Nibbāna which is the escape from greed, as if speaking an insolent word with a great sound, wandered about in the Nandana Grove singing this verse, "They do not know happiness." Therefore it was said, "At that time he spoke this verse."

Ye na passanti nandananti ye tatra pañcakāmaguṇānubhavanavasena nandanavanaṃ na passanti.Naradevānanti devanarānaṃ, devapurisānanti attho.Tidasānanti tikkhattuṃ dasannaṃ.Yasassinanti parivārasaṅkhātena yasena sampannānaṃ.

Ye na passanti nandana means those who do not see the Nandana Grove due to experiencing the five strands of sensual pleasure there. Naradevānaṃ means of divine men and of human deities. Tidasānaṃ means of the thirty-three. Yasassinaṃ means those who are endowed with glory consisting of retinue.

Aññatarā devatāti ekā ariyasāvikā devatā.Paccabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ bāladevatā imaṃ sampattiṃ niccaṃ acalaṃ maññati, nāssā chedanabhedanaviddhaṃsanadhammataṃ jānātī’’ti adhippāyaṃ vivaṭṭetvā dassentī ‘‘na tvaṃ bāle’’ti imāya gāthāya patiabhāsi.Yathā arahataṃ vacoti yathā arahantānaṃ vacanaṃ, tathā tvaṃ na jānāsīti. Evaṃ tassā adhippāyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā idāni arahantānaṃ vacanaṃ dassentīaniccātiādimāha. Tatthaaniccā vata saṅkhārāti sabbe tebhūmakasaṅkhārā hutvā abhāvatthena aniccā.Uppādavayadhamminoti uppādavayasabhāvā.Uppajjitvā nirujjhantīti idaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Yasmā vā uppajjitvā nirujjhanti, tasmā uppādavayadhamminoti. Uppādavayaggahaṇena cettha tadanantarā vemajjhaṭṭhānaṃ gahitameva hoti.Tesaṃ vūpasamo sukhoti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānameva sukhaṃ. Idaṃ arahataṃ vacoti.

Aññatarā devatā means one female deity who is an ariyasāvikā (noble female disciple). Paccabhāsī means, revealing the intention, "This foolish deity considers this attainment to be permanent and unchanging, and does not know its nature of being cut, broken, destroyed, and ruined," she replied with the verse "Na tvaṃ bāle (You fool)." Yathā arahataṃ vaco means, "You do not know as the words of the arahants are." Thus, rejecting her intention, now showing the words of the arahants, she said beginning with aniccā. There, aniccā vata saṅkhārā means all conditioned things of the three realms are impermanent because of their nature of becoming and disappearing. Uppādavayadhammino means having the nature of arising and passing away. Uppajjitvā nirujjhantī this is a synonym of the previous one. Or because they arise and cease, therefore, they are of the nature of arising and passing away. By the mentioning of arising and passing away, the intermediate state between them is also included here. Tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho means the stilling of those conditioned things, which is called Nibbāna, is happiness. This is the word of the arahants.

Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

2. Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā

12.Dutiyenandatīti tussati attamano hoti.Puttimāti bahuputto. Tassa hi ekacce puttā kasikammaṃ katvā dhaññassa koṭṭhe pūrenti, ekacce vaṇijjaṃ katvā hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ āharanti, ekacce rājānaṃ upaṭṭhahitvā yānavāhanagāmanigamādīni labhanti. Atha tesaṃ ānubhāvasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ anubhavamānā mātā vā pitā vā nandati. Chaṇadivasādīsu vā maṇḍitapasādhite putte sampattiṃ anubhavamāne disvā nandatīti, ‘‘nandati puttehi puttimā’’ti āha.Gohi tathevāti yathā puttimā puttehi, tathā gosāmikopi sampannaṃ gomaṇḍalaṃ disvā gāvo nissāya gorasasampattiṃ anubhavamāno gohi nandati.Upadhī hi narassa nandanāti, etthaupadhīti cattāro upadhī – kāmūpadhi, khandhūpadhi, kilesūpadhi, abhisaṅkhārūpadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.166) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ‘‘upadhiyati ettha sukha’’nti iminā vacanatthena upadhīti vuccati. Khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvatoti. Idha pana kāmūpadhi adhippeto. Pañca hi kāmaguṇā tebhūmikādipāsāda-uḷārasayana-vatthālaṅkāra-nāṭakaparivārādivasena paccupaṭṭhitā pītisomanassaṃ upasaṃharamānā naraṃ nandayanti. Tasmā yathā puttā ca gāvo ca, evaṃ imepi upadhī hi narassa nandanāti veditabbā.Na hi so nandati yo nirūpadhīti yo kāmaguṇasampattirahito daliddo dullabhaghāsacchādano, na hi so nandati. Evarūpo manussapeto ca manussanerayiko ca kiṃ nandissati bhagavāti āha.

12. In the second, nandati means rejoices, is delighted. Puttimā means having many sons. For some of his sons, after doing farming, fill the granaries with grain; some, after doing trade, bring gold and silver; some, after attending to the king, obtain vehicles, conveyances, villages, towns, etc. Then, the mother or father, experiencing the glory consisting of their influence, rejoices. Or, on festival days, seeing the sons adorned and embellished enjoying prosperity, rejoices, thus he said, "nandati puttehi puttimā (the one with sons rejoices with sons)." Gohi tathevā means just as the one with sons rejoices with sons, so too the owner of cattle, seeing a prosperous herd of cows, enjoying the prosperity of milk products relying on the cows, rejoices with cows. Upadhī hi narassa nandanā here upadhī means the four upadhis: the upadhi of sensual desire (kāmūpadhi), the upadhi of aggregates (khandhūpadhi), the upadhi of defilements (kilesūpadhi), and the upadhi of volitional formations (abhisaṅkhārūpadhī). For even sensual desires, because of being the basis of happiness said thus, "whatever happiness and joy arise dependent on the five strands of sense pleasure, this is the allure of sensual pleasures" (ma. ni. 1.166), are called upadhi by the meaning of the word "happiness adheres here." The aggregates, too, because of being the basis of suffering rooted in the aggregates; the defilements, too, because of being the basis of suffering in the lower realms; the volitional formations, too, because of being the basis of suffering in existence. Here, however, the upadhi of sensual desire is intended. For the five strands of sense pleasure, being present in the form of palatial buildings of the three realms, luxurious beds, clothes, ornaments, drama, retinue, etc., bringing about joy and gladness, delight a person. Therefore, just as sons and cows, so too, these upadhis are known to be a source of delight for a person. Na hi so nandati yo nirūpadhī means the one who is without the wealth of sensual pleasures, poor, and with scarce food and clothing, does not rejoice. What will such a human ghost and human hell-being rejoice in, said the Blessed One.

socatīti āha. Tatthasocati puttehīti videsagamanādivasena puttesu naṭṭhesupi nassantesupi idāni nassissantīti nāsasaṅkīpi socati, tathā matesupi marantesupi corehi rājapurisehi gahitesu vā paccatthikānaṃ hatthaṃ upagatesu vā maraṇasaṅkīpi hutvā socati. Rukkhapabbatādīhi patitvā hatthapādādīnaṃ bhedavasena bhinnesupi bhijjantesupi bhedasaṅkīpi hutvā socati. Yathā ca puttehi puttimā, gosāmikopi tatheva navahākārehi gohi socati.Upadhī hi narassa socanāti yathā ca puttagāvo, evaṃ pañca kāmaguṇopadhīpi –

socatī means grieves. There, socati puttehī means he grieves even when sons are lost or are perishing due to going abroad, etc., and anticipating their perishing in the future; similarly, he grieves when they are dead or dying, or when they are seized by thieves or royal officials, or when they have fallen into the hands of adversaries, fearing death. He grieves even when arms and legs, etc., are broken due to falling from trees or mountains, anticipating breakage while they are being broken. And just as the one with sons grieves for sons, so too the owner of cattle grieves for cows in nine ways. Upadhī hi narassa socanā means just as sons and cows, so too the five upadhis of sensual pleasure—

‘‘Tassa ce kāmayānassa, chandajātassa jantuno;

"When those sensual pleasures of a being who desires, who is born with craving,
decline, he is pierced by a dart, and he suffers." (su. ni. 773) –

Na hi so socati, yo nirūpadhīti yassa pana catubbidhāpete upadhiyo natthi, so nirupadhi mahākhīṇāsavo kiṃ socissati, na socati devateti.

Na hi so socati, yo nirūpadhī means but the one who has none of these four kinds of upadhis, that great arahant whose taints are destroyed, what will he grieve about? He does not grieve, O deity.

Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

3. Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā

13.Tatiyenatthi puttasamaṃ pemanti virūpepi hi attano puttake suvaṇṇabimbakaṃ viya maññanti, mālāguḷe viya sīsādīsu katvā pariharamānā tehi ohaditāpi omuttikāpi gandhavilepanapatitā viya somanassaṃ āpajjanti. Tenāha – ‘‘natthi puttasamaṃ pema’’nti. Puttapemasamaṃ pemaṃ nāma natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.Gosamitaṃ dhananti gohi samaṃ godhanasamaṃ godhanasadisaṃ aññaṃ dhanaṃ nāma natthi bhagavāti āha.Sūriyasamā ābhāti sūriyābhāya samā aññā ābhā nāma natthīti dasseti.Samuddaparamāti ye keci aññe sarā nāma, sabbe te samuddaparamā, samuddo tesaṃ uttamo, samuddasadisaṃ aññaṃ udakanidhānaṃ nāma natthi, bhagavāti.

13. In the third, natthi puttasamaṃ pema means even an ugly child of their own they regard like a golden statue; adorning them on their heads, etc., like a garland, they experience joy even when they are soiled by them, as if sprinkled with fragrant ointment. Therefore, he said, "natthi puttasamaṃ pema (there is no affection equal to that for a son)." It is said that there is no affection equal to the affection for a son. Gosamitaṃ dhana means there is no other wealth equal to cows, similar to the wealth of cows, said the Blessed One. Sūriyasamā ābhā shows that there is no other radiance equal to the radiance of the sun. Samuddaparamā means whatever other lakes there are, all of them are surpassed by the ocean; the ocean is supreme to them; there is no other water reservoir similar to the ocean, O Blessed One.

natthi attasamaṃ pemantiādimāhāti.

natthi attasamaṃ pema and so on, he said.

Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Natthiputtasamasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

4. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā

14.Catutthekhattiyo dvipadanti dvipadānaṃ rājā seṭṭho.Komārīti kumārikāle gahitā. Ayaṃ sesabhariyānaṃ seṭṭhāti vadati.Pubbajoti paṭhamaṃ jāto kāṇo vāpi hotu kuṇiādīnaṃ vā aññataro, yo paṭhamaṃ jāto, ayameva putto imissā devatāya vāde seṭṭho nāma hoti. Yasmā pana dvipadādīnaṃ buddhādayo seṭṭhā, tasmā bhagavā paṭigāthaṃ āha. Tattha kiñcāpi bhagavā sabbesaṃyeva apadādibhedānaṃ sattānaṃ seṭṭho, uppajjamāno panesa sabbasattaseṭṭho dvipadesuyeva uppajjati, tasmāsambuddho dvipadaṃ seṭṭhoti āha. Dvipadesu uppannassa cassa sabbasattaseṭṭhabhāvo appaṭihatova hoti.Ājānīyoti hatthī vā hotu assādīsu aññataro vā, yo kāraṇaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ ājānīyova catuppadānaṃ seṭṭhoti attho. Kūṭakaṇṇarañño guḷavaṇṇaasso viya. Rājā kira pācīnadvārena nikkhamitvā cetiyapabbataṃ gamissāmīti kalambanadītīraṃ sampatto, asso tīre ṭhatvā udakaṃ otarituṃ na icchati, rājā assācariyaṃ āmantetvā, ‘‘aho vata tayā asso sikkhāpito udakaṃ otarituṃ na icchatī’’ti āha. Ācariyo ‘‘susikkhāpito deva asso, etassa hi cittaṃ – ‘sacāhaṃ udakaṃ otarissāmi, vālaṃ temissati, vāle tinte rañño aṅge udakaṃ pāteyyā’ti, evaṃ tumhākaṃ sarīre udakapātanabhayena na otarati, vālaṃ gaṇhāpethā’’ti āha. Rājā tathā kāresi. Asso vegena otaritvā pāraṃ gato.Sussūsāti sussūsamānā. Kumārikāle vā gahitā hotu pacchā vā, surūpā vā virūpā vā, yā sāmikaṃ sussūsati paricarati toseti, sā bhariyānaṃ seṭṭhā.Assavoti āsuṇamāno. Jeṭṭho vā hi hotu kaniṭṭho vā, yo mātāpitūnaṃ vacanaṃ suṇāti, sampaṭicchati, ovādapaṭikaro hoti, ayaṃ puttānaṃ seṭṭho, aññehi sandhicchedakādicorehi puttehi ko attho devateti.

14. In the fourth, khattiyo dvipada means the khattiya (warrior) is the best of bipeds. Komārī means taken in her maidenhood. This one says is the best of the remaining wives. Pubbajo means the first-born, even if he is blind or one of the hunchbacked, etc., the one who is born first, this very son is the best in this deity's view. However, because the Buddhas, etc., are the best of bipeds, etc., therefore, the Blessed One spoke the counter-verse. There, although the Blessed One is the best of all beings with different characteristics such as footless, etc., when arising, he arises as the best of all beings only among bipeds, therefore, he said, sambuddho dvipadaṃ seṭṭho (the Fully Enlightened One is the best of bipeds). And his being the best of all beings, having arisen among bipeds, is unimpeded. Ājānīyo means either an elephant or another among horses, etc., who knows the reason, this very ājānīya (thoroughbred) is the best of quadrupeds, is the meaning. Like the Guḷavaṇṇa horse of King Kūṭakaṇṇa. It seems the king, after going out through the eastern gate, was going to Cetiyapabbata. Reaching the bank of the Kalamba river, the horse, standing on the bank, did not want to go down into the water. The king, addressing the horse trainer, said, "Alas, the horse trained by you does not want to go down into the water." The trainer said, "The horse is well-trained, O King, for its thought is: ‘If I go down into the water, it will wet the tail, and with the tail wet, water may drip on the king's body.’ Thus, fearing to drip water on your body, it does not go down; let it grasp the tail." The king had it done so. The horse quickly went down and crossed over. Sussūsā means obedient. Whether taken in her maidenhood or later, whether beautiful or ugly, the one who is obedient to her husband, attends to him, and pleases him, is the best of wives. Assavo means obedient. Whether the eldest or the youngest, the one who listens to the words of his parents, accepts them, and acts according to their advice, this son is the best; what is the use of other sons who are breakers of alliances and thieves, O deity?

Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Khattiyasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

5. Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā

15.Pañcameṭhite majjhanhiketi ṭhitamajjhanhike.Sannisīvesūti yathā phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ upagantvā sannisinnesu vissamamānesu. Ṭhitamajjhanhikakālo nāmesa sabbasattānaṃ iriyāpathadubbalyakālo. Idha pana pakkhīnaṃyeva vasena dassito.Saṇatevāti saṇati viya mahāviravaṃ viya muccati. Saṇamānameva cettha ‘‘saṇatevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tappaṭibhāgaṃ nāmetaṃ. Nidāghasamayasmiñhi ṭhitamajjhanhikakāle catuppadagaṇesu ceva pakkhīgaṇesu ca sannisinnesu vātapūritānaṃ susirarukkhānañceva chiddaveṇupabbānañca khandhena khandhaṃ sākhāya sākhaṃ saṅghaṭṭayantānaṃ pādapānañca araññamajjhe mahāsaddo uppajjati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Taṃ bhayaṃ paṭibhāti manti taṃ evarūpe kāle mahāaraññassa saṇamānaṃ mayhaṃ bhayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Dandhapaññā kiresā devatā tasmiṃ khaṇe attano nisajjaphāsukaṃ kathāphāsukaṃ dutiyakaṃ alabhantī evamāha. Yasmā pana tādise kāle piṇḍapātapaṭikkantassa vivitte araññāyatane kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno anappakaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –

15. In the fifth, ṭhite majjhanhike means at the time of the standing midday. Sannisīvesū means as if sitting together, resting, having approached a comfortable place. This time of standing midday is the time of weakness of posture for all beings. Here, however, it is shown only in terms of birds. Saṇatevā means as if sounding, as if uttering a great roar. Here, "saṇatevā" is said for the very saṇamāna (roaring). This is a replica of that. For in the hot season, at the time of standing midday, among the herds of quadrupeds and flocks of birds, and in the middle of the forest, a great sound arises from the hollow trees filled with wind and the bamboo joints with holes, striking branch against branch and trunk against trunk. Referring to that, this was said. Taṃ bhayaṃ paṭibhāti ma means at such a time, the roaring of the great forest appears to me as fear. It seems that deity, being of slow wisdom, not obtaining a comfortable seat or a suitable topic of conversation at that moment, said this. However, because at such a time, a bhikkhu who has returned from his alms round and is sitting in a secluded forest dwelling, taking up a meditation subject, experiences no small amount of happiness, referring to which it was said –

‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno;

"For a bhikkhu who has entered an empty dwelling,
whose mind is peaceful,
there is superhuman delight,
rightly contemplating the Dhamma," (dha. pa. 373) and,

‘‘Purato pacchato vāpi, aparo ce na vijjati;

"Whether in front or behind,
if no one else is found,
it is exceedingly comfortable,
living alone in the forest." (theragā. 537) and;

sā rati paṭibhāti manti yā evarūpe kāle ekakassa nisajjā nāma, sā rati mayhaṃ upaṭṭhātīti attho. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti.

sā rati paṭibhāti ma means whatever is the sitting alone at such a time, that delight appears to me, is the meaning. The rest is just the same.

Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Saṇamānasuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

6. Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā

16.Chaṭṭheniddāti, ‘‘abhijānāmahaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) evarūpāya abyākataniddāya pubbabhāgāparabhāgesu sekhaputhujjanānaṃ sasaṅkhārikaakusale citte uppannaṃ thinamiddhaṃ.Tandīti aticchātātisītādikālesu uppannaṃ āgantukaṃ ālasiyaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamā tandī? Yā tandī tandiyanā tandimanatā ālasyaṃ ālasyāyanā ālasyāyitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati tandī’’ti (vibha. 857).Vijambhitāti kāyavijambhanā.Aratīti akusalapakkhā ukkaṇṭhitatā.Bhattasammadoti bhattamucchā bhattakilamatho. Vitthāro pana tesaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamā vijambhitā? Yā kāyassa jambhanā vijambhanā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme āgatova.Etenāti etena niddādinā upakkilesena upakkiliṭṭho nivāritapātubhāvo.Nappakāsatīti na jotati, na pātubhavatīti attho.Ariyamaggoti lokuttaramaggo.Idhāti imasmiṃ loke.Pāṇinanti sattānaṃ.Vīriyenāti maggasahajātavīriyena.Naṃ paṇāmetvāti etaṃ kilesajātaṃ nīharitvā.Ariyamaggoti lokiyalokuttaramaggo. Iti maggeneva upakkilese nīharitvā maggassa visuddhi vuttāti.

16. In the sixth, niddā means the drowsiness and dullness (thīnamiddha) that arises in the unwholesome mind with prompting (sasaṅkhārika) of the trainees (sekha) and ordinary people (puthujjana) in the earlier and later parts of the indeterminate (abyākata) sleep of such a kind as, "I recall, Aggivessana, falling asleep in the last month of summer" (ma. ni. 1.387). Tandī means the adventitious laziness that arises in times of excessive hunger, excessive cold, etc. And this was said, "there, what is tandī? What is tandī, the state of being lazy, laziness, the state of being inclined to laziness, the condition of being lazy, this is called tandī" (vibha. 857). Vijambhitā means bodily yawning. Aratī means discontentedness on the side of unwholesome qualities. Bhattasammado means food coma, food weariness. But their detailed explanation, beginning with, "there, what is vijambhitā? What is the yawning, the stretching of the body," has already come in the Abhidhamma in the manner. Etenā means by this defilement of drowsiness, etc., its manifestation is hindered. Nappakāsatī means does not shine, does not appear. Ariyamaggo means the supramundane path. Idhā means in this world. Pāṇina means of beings. Vīriyenā means by the energy (viriya) associated with the path. Naṃ paṇāmetvā means after removing that collection of defilements. Ariyamaggo means the mundane and supramundane path. Thus, it is said that the purification of the path is through the removal of defilements by the path itself.

Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Niddātandīsuttavaṇṇanā is finished.

7. Dukkarasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Dukkarasuttavaṇṇanā

17.Sattameduttitikkhanti dukkhamaṃ duadhivāsiyaṃ.Abyattenāti bālena.Sāmaññanti samaṇadhammo. Iminā devatā idaṃ dasseti – yaṃ paṇḍitā kulaputtā dasapi vassāni vīsatipi saṭṭhipi vassāni dante abhidantamādhāya jivhāya tāluṃ āhaccapi cetasā cittaṃ abhiniggaṇhitvāpi ekāsanaṃ ekabhattaṃ paṭisevamānā āpāṇakoṭikaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantā sāmaññaṃ karonti. Taṃ bhagavā bālo abyatto kātuṃ na sakkotīti.Bahū hi tattha sambādhāti tasmiṃ sāmaññasaṅkhāte ariyamagge bahū sambādhā maggādhigamāya paṭipannassa pubbabhāge bahū parissayāti dasseti.

17. In the seventh, duttitikkha means difficult to endure, difficult to bear. Abyattenā means by a fool. Sāmañña means the life of a recluse (samaṇadhamma). By this, the deity shows this: The samañña (life of a recluse) that wise sons of good families practice for ten years, or twenty years, or sixty years, enduring the pain of grinding their teeth, pressing their tongue against the palate, and restraining their minds with their minds, and undertaking the practice of living on one seat and eating one meal, living the holy life until the end of their lives. The Blessed One, being foolish and unwise, cannot do that. Bahū hi tattha sambādhā means in that ariy ম্যাগga called sāmañña (life of a recluse), there are many hindrances, many difficulties in the preliminary part for one who has set out to attain the path.

Cittañce na nivārayeti yadi ayoniso uppannaṃ cittaṃ na nivāreyya, kati ahāni sāmaññaṃ careyya? Ekadivasampi na careyya. Cittavasiko hi samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti.Pade padeti ārammaṇe ārammaṇe. Ārammaṇañhi idha padanti adhippetaṃ. Yasmiṃ yasmiṃ hi ārammaṇe kileso uppajjati, tattha tattha bālo visīdati nāma. Iriyāpathapadampi vaṭṭati. Gamanādīsu hi yattha yattha kileso uppajjati, tattha tattheva visīdati nāma.Saṅkappānanti kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ.

Cittañce na nivāraye means if one does not restrain the mind that has arisen unwisely, how many days could he practice the samañña (life of a recluse)? He could not practice even for one day. For one who is controlled by his mind is unable to practice the life of a recluse. Pade pade means in each object, in each object. For here, object (ārammaṇa) is intended as pada (step). For in whatever object defilement arises, in that very place the fool is said to perish. Iriyāpatha (posture) pada (step) also applies. For in walking, etc., wherever defilement arises, in that very place he is said to perish. Saṅkappāna means of thoughts of sensual desire, etc.

Kummo vāti kacchapo viya.Aṅgānīti gīvapañcamāni aṅgāni.Samodahanti samodahanto, samodahitvā vā.Manovitakketi manamhi uppannavitakke. Ettāvatā idaṃ dasseti – yathā kummo soṇḍipañcamāni aṅgāni sake kapāle samodahanto siṅgālassa otāraṃ na deti, samodahitvā cassa appasayhataṃ āpajjati, evamevaṃ bhikkhu manamhi uppannavitakke sake ārammaṇakapāle samodahaṃ mārassa otāraṃ na deti, samodahitvā cassa appasayhataṃ āpajjatīti.Anissitoti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayehi anissito hutvā.Aheṭhayānoti avihiṃsamāno.Parinibbutoti kilesanibbānena parinibbuto.Nūpavadeyya kañcīti yaṃkiñci puggalaṃ ācāravipattiādīsu yāya kāyaci maṅkuṃ kātukāmo hutvā na vadeyya, ‘‘kālena vakkhāmi no akālenā’’tiādayo pana pañca dhamme ajjhattaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena kāruññataṃ paṭicca vadeyyāti.

Kummo vā means like a tortoise. Aṅgānī means the limbs, with the neck as the fifth. Samodahanti means gathering together, or having gathered together. Manovitakke means thoughts arisen in the mind. This much shows this: just as a tortoise, gathering its limbs, with the neck as the fifth, into its own shell, does not give an opportunity to Siṅgāla, and having gathered them, becomes unassailable to him, even so, a bhikkhu, gathering thoughts arisen in the mind into his own object-shell, does not give an opportunity to Māra, and having gathered them, becomes unassailable to him. Anissito means being independent of the supports of craving and wrong view, etc. Aheṭhayāno means not harming. Parinibbuto means completely extinguished by the extinction of defilements. Nūpavadeyya kañcī means he should not speak ill of any person whatsoever, desiring to find fault with them in matters of misconduct, etc., but having established internally the five things beginning with "I will speak at the right time, not at the wrong time," with a mind established in the nature of uprooting, he should speak with compassion.

Dukkarasuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Dukkarasutta Commentary is finished.

8. Hirīsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Hirīsutta Commentary

18.Aṭṭhamehirīnisedhoti hiriyā akusale dhamme nisedhetīti hirīnisedho.Koci lokasmiṃvijjatīti koci evarūpo vijjatīti pucchati.Yo nindaṃ apabodhatīti yo garahaṃ apaharanto bujjhati.Asso bhadro kasāmivāti yathā bhadro assājānīyo kasaṃ apaharanto bujjhati, patodacchāyaṃ disvā saṃvijjhanto viya kasāya attani nipātaṃ na deti, evameva yo bhikkhu bhūtassa dasaakkosavatthuno attani nipātaṃ adadanto nindaṃ apabodhati apaharanto bujjhati, evarūpo koci khīṇāsavo vijjatīti pucchati. Abhūtakkosena pana parimutto nāma natthi.Tanuyāti tanukā, hiriyā akusale dhamme nisedhetvā carantā khīṇāsavā nāma appakāti attho.Sadā satāti niccakālaṃ sativepullena samannāgatā.Antaṃ dukkhassa pappuyyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa koṭiṃ antabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇitvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.

18. In the eighth, hirīnisedho means the restraint of conscience from unwholesome things. Koci lokasmiṃ vijjatīti asks, "Does anyone like this exist in the world?" Yo nindaṃ apabodhatīti means, "Who understands, warding off blame." Asso bhadro kasāmivāti means, "Like a noble thoroughbred horse with a whip," just as a noble, thoroughbred horse understands, warding off the whip, not allowing the falling of the whip on itself, as if being pierced seeing the shadow of the goad, even so, who, not giving the falling of true accusations on himself, understands, warding off blame, does such a khīṇāsava exist? But there is no one who is free from untrue accusations. Tanuyāti means few; khīṇāsavas, acting by restraining conscience from unwholesome things, are few, is the meaning. Sadā satāti means those constantly endowed with fullness of mindfulness. Antaṃ dukkhassa pappuyyāti means having attained Nibbāna, the end, the limit of round of suffering. The rest is as previously stated.

Hirīsuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Hirīsutta Commentary is finished.

9. Kuṭikāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Kuṭikāsutta Commentary

19.Navamekacci te kuṭikāti ayaṃ devatā dasa māse antovasanaṭṭhānaṭṭhena mātaraṃ kuṭikaṃ katvā, yathā sakuṇā divasaṃ gocarapasutā rattiṃ kulāvakaṃ allīyanti, evamevaṃ sattā tattha tattha gantvāpi mātugāmassa santikaṃ āgacchanti, ālayavasena bhariyaṃ kulāvakaṃ katvā. Kulapaveṇiṃ santānakaṭṭhena putte santānake katvā, taṇhaṃ bandhanaṃ katvā, gāthābandhanena ime pañhe samodhānetvā bhagavantaṃ pucchi, bhagavāpissā vissajjentotagghātiādimāha. Tatthatagghāti ekaṃsavacane nipāto.Natthīti pahāya pabbajitattā vaṭṭasmiṃ vā puna mātukucchivāsassa dārabharaṇassa puttanibbattiyā vā abhāvato natthi.

19. In the ninth, kacci te kuṭikāti, this deva, having made his mother a kuṭikā in the sense of a place of dwelling inside for ten months, just as birds, devoted to foraging during the day, cling to their nests at night, even so, beings, having gone here and there, come to the presence of the mother, having made the wife a nest by way of attachment. Having made sons offspring by way of perpetuating the family lineage, having made craving a bond, having composed these questions with a binding of verses, he asked the Blessed One, and the Blessed One, answering him, said tagghāti, etc. There, tagghāti is a particle in the sense of agreement. Natthīti, because of having gone forth abandoning, or because of the absence of dwelling again in the mother's womb in the round, or of maintaining a wife, or of producing sons, there is not.

kintāhantiādimāha. Tatthakintāhanti kiṃ te ahaṃ. Athassā bhagavā ācikkhantomātarantiādimāha.Sāhu teti gāthāya anumoditvā sampahaṃsitvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā attano devaṭṭhānameva gatāti.

kintāhanti etc. He said. There, kintāhanti means what am I to you? Then the Blessed One, explaining to him, said mātaranti etc. Sāhu teti, having approved of the verse, having rejoiced, having paid homage to the Blessed One, having honored him with perfumes and garlands, etc., he went to his own deva-abode.

Kuṭikāsuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Kuṭikāsutta Commentary is finished.

10. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Samiddhisutta Commentary

20.Dasametapodārāmeti tapodassa tattodakassa rahadassa vasena evaṃ laddhanāme ārāme. Vebhārapabbatassa kira heṭṭhā bhummaṭṭhakanāgānaṃ pañcayojanasatikaṃ nāgabhavanaṃ devalokasadisaṃ maṇimayena talena ārāmuyyānehi ca samannāgataṃ. Tattha nāgānaṃ kīḷanaṭṭhāne mahāudakarahado, tato tapodā nāma nadī sandati kuthitā uṇhodakā. Kasmā panesā edisā? Rājagahaṃ kira parivāretvā mahāpetaloko tiṭṭhati, tattha dvinnaṃ mahālohakumbhinirayānaṃ antarena ayaṃ tapodā āgacchati, tasmā kuthitā sandati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

20. In the tenth, tapodārāmeti, in the monastery named thus because of the hot water lake of Tapoda. It seems that beneath Mount Vebhāra, there is a Nāga-abode of five hundred yojanas belonging to the earth-dwelling Nāgas, endowed with a floor of jewels like the deva-world and with parks and gardens. There, in the Nāgas' place of play, is a great water-lake, from which flows a river named Tapodā, boiling with hot water. Why is it like this? It seems that a great petaloka stands surrounding Rājagaha, and the Tapodā comes between two great iron-cauldron hells, therefore it flows boiling. This was said:

‘‘Yatāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā sandati, so daho acchodako sītodako sātodako setodako suppatittho ramaṇīyo pahūtamacchakacchapo, cakkamattāni ca padumāni pupphanti. Apicāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchati, tenāyaṃ tapodā kuthitā sandatī’’ti (pārā. 231).

"Bhikkhus, where this Tapodā flows, that lake is clear-watered, cool-watered, pleasant-watered, soothing-watered, with good landing places, delightful, full of fish and turtles, and lotuses the size of wheels bloom. Moreover, bhikkhus, this Tapodā comes between two great hells, therefore this Tapodā flows boiling" (pārā. 231).

Imassa pana ārāmassa abhimukhaṭṭhāne tato mahāudakarahado jāto, tassa vasenāyaṃ vihāro ‘‘tapodārāmo’’ti vuccati.

In front of this monastery, a great water-lake arose from it, because of that this monastery is called "Tapodārāma."

Samiddhīti tassa kira therassa attabhāvo samiddho abhirūpo pāsādiko, tasmā ‘‘samiddhī’’tveva saṅkhaṃ gato.Gattāni parisiñcitunti padhānikatthero esa, balavapaccūse uṭṭhāyāsanā sarīraṃ utuṃ gāhāpetvā bahi saṭṭhihatthamatte mahācaṅkame aparāparaṃ caṅkamitvā ‘‘sedagahitehi gattehi paribhuñjamānaṃ senāsanaṃ kilissatī’’ti maññamāno gattāni parisiñcanatthaṃ sarīradhovanatthaṃ upasaṅkami.Ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsīti nivāsanaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ hatthena gahetvā aṭṭhāsi.

Samiddhīti, it seems that the body of that Thera was successful, beautiful, and pleasing, therefore he went to reckoning as "Samiddhi." Gattāni parisiñcitunti, this was a diligent Thera, having risen from his seat very early in the morning and having heated his body, and having walked back and forth again and again in the great cloister sixty cubits away, thinking, "The dwelling I use becomes soiled with sweat-drenched limbs," he approached for the purpose of sprinkling his limbs, for the purpose of washing his body. Ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsīti, having put on his lower robe, having tied his waistband, having taken his robe in his hand, he stood.

Gattāni pubbāpayamānoti gattāni pubbasadisāni vodakāni kurumāno. Allasarīre pārutaṃ hi cīvaraṃ kilissati duggandhaṃ hoti, na cetaṃ vattaṃ. Thero pana vattasampanno, tasmā vatte ṭhitova nhāyitvā paccuttaritvā aṭṭhāsi. Tattha idaṃ nhānavattaṃ – udakatitthaṃ gantvā yattha katthaci cīvarāni nikkhipitvā vegena ṭhitakeneva na otaritabbaṃ, sabbadisā pana oloketvā vivittabhāvaṃ ñatvā khāṇugumbalatādīni vavatthapetvā tikkhattuṃ ukkāsitvā avakujja ṭhitena uttarāsaṅgacīvaraṃ apanetvā pasāretabbaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ mocetvā cīvarapiṭṭheyeva ṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace udakasāṭikā natthi, udakante ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā nivāsanaṃ mocetvā sace sinnaṭṭhānaṃ atthi, pasāretabbaṃ. No ce atthi, saṃharitvā ṭhapetabbaṃ. Udakaṃ otarantena saṇikaṃ nābhippamāṇamattaṃ otaritvā vīciṃ anuṭṭhāpentena saddaṃ akarontena nivattitvā āgatadisābhimukhena nimujjitabbaṃ, evaṃ cīvaraṃ rakkhitaṃ hoti. Ummujjantenapi saddaṃ akarontena saṇikaṃ ummujjitvā nhānapariyosāne udakante ukkuṭikena nisīditvā nivāsanaṃ parikkhipitvā uṭṭhāya suparimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ apārupitvāva ṭhātabbanti.

Gattāni pubbāpayamānoti, making his limbs like pubba-flowers, watery. Indeed, a robe wrapped around a wet body becomes soiled and smells bad, and this is not proper conduct. But the Thera was endowed with proper conduct, therefore, standing in proper conduct, he bathed and came back and stood. Here is the bathing-proper conduct: having gone to a water-place, having put the robes down anywhere, one should not go down quickly just as one is standing, but having looked in all directions, having known the state of being secluded, having pushed away stumps, bushes, and vines, etc., having cleared one's throat three times, the upper robe should be removed and spread out standing upside down, the waistband should be loosened and placed on the back of the robe. If there is no bathing cloth, sitting on one's heels at the water's edge, the lower robe should be loosened, and if there is a wet spot, it should be spread out. If there is not, it should be folded and placed down. One going down into the water should go down slowly only navel-high, not raising waves, not making a sound, having turned around, one should dive facing the direction from which one came, thus the robe is protected. One coming up should also come up slowly without making a sound, and at the end of the bath, sitting on one's heels at the water's edge, having wrapped the lower robe around oneself, having risen, having put it on very roundly, having tied the waistband, having draped the robe over oneself, one should stand.

Theropi tathā nhāyitvā paccuttaritvā vigacchamānaudakaṃ kāyaṃ olokayamāno aṭṭhāsi. Tassa pakatiyāpi pāsādikassa paccūsasamaye sammā pariṇatāhārassa uṇhodakena nhātassa ativiya mukhavaṇṇo viroci, bandhanā pavuttatālaphalaṃ viya pabhāsampanno puṇṇacando viya taṅkhaṇavikasitapadumaṃ viya mukhaṃ sassirikaṃ ahosi, sarīravaṇṇopi vippasīdi. Tasmiṃ samaye vanasaṇḍe adhivatthā bhummadevatā pāsādikaṃ bhikkhuṃ olokayamānā samanaṃ niggahetuṃ asakkontī kāmapariḷāhābhibhūtā hutvā, ‘‘theraṃ palobhessāmī’’ti attabhāvaṃ uḷārena alaṅkārena alaṅkaritvā sahassavaṭṭipadīpaṃ pajjalamānā viya candaṃ uṭṭhāpayamānā viya sakalārāmaṃ ekobhāsaṃ katvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā avanditvāva vehāse ṭhitā gāthaṃ abhāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho aññatarā devatā…pe… ajjhabhāsī’’ti.

The Thera also, having bathed like that, having come back, looking at his body from which the water was dripping, stood. His complexion, naturally pleasing, at dawn, having digested the food well, having bathed in hot water, shone exceedingly; his face, with its radiance, was like a palmyra fruit released from its stalk, like the full moon, like a lotus that had just blossomed, and his bodily complexion became clear. At that time, a earth-deva dwelling in the woodland, looking at the pleasing bhikkhu, being unable to rebuke the ascetic, being overcome by the heat of desire, thinking, "I will entice the Thera," having adorned her body with great adornment, as if lighting a thousand-wick lamp, as if raising the moon, having made the entire monastery one mass of light, having approached the Thera, without paying homage, standing in the sky, spoke a verse. Therefore it was said, "Then a certain deva… spoke to him…"

Abhutvāti pañca kāmaguṇe aparibhuñjitvā.Bhikkhasīti piṇḍāya carasi.Mā taṃ kālo upaccagāti ettha kālo nāma pañcakāmaguṇapaṭisevanakkhamo daharayobbanakālo. Jarājiṇṇena hi obhaggena daṇḍaparāyaṇena pavedhamānena kāsasāsābhibhūtena na sakkā kāme paribhuñjituṃ. Iti imaṃ kālaṃ sandhāya devatā ‘‘mā taṃ kālo upaccagā’’ti āha. Tatthamā upaccagāti mā atikkami.

Abhutvāti, without enjoying the five strands of sensual pleasure. Bhikkhasīti, you go for alms. Mā taṃ kālo upaccagāti, here, kāla means the time of youthful age, fit for enjoying the five strands of sensual pleasure. Indeed, one who is old, broken down, dependent on a staff, trembling, overcome by coughing and asthma, is not able to enjoy sensual pleasures. Thus, with reference to this time, the deva said, "May time not pass you by." There, mā upaccagāti means may it not pass.

Kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmīti etthavoti nipātamattaṃ.Kālaṃ na jānāmīti maraṇakālaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sattānañhi –

Kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmīti, here, voti is merely a particle. Kālaṃ na jānāmīti speaks with reference to the time of death. Indeed, for beings:

‘‘Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca, dehanikkhepanaṃ gati;

"Life, sickness, time, the laying down of the body, and destination;
These five are unheralded, not known in the world of the living."

jīvitaṃtāva ‘‘ettakameva, na ito para’’nti vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Kalalakālepi hi sattā maranti, abbuda-pesi-ghana-aḍḍhamāsa-ekamāsa-dvemāsa-temāsa-catumāsapañcamāsa…pe… dasamāsakālepi, kucchito nikkhantasamayepi, tato paraṃ vassasatassa antopi bahipi marantiyeva.Byādhipi ‘‘imināva byādhinā sattā maranti, na aññenā’’ti vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Cakkhurogenapi hi sattā maranti sotarogādīnaṃ aññatarenapi.Kālopi, ‘‘imasmiṃ yeva kāle maritabbaṃ, na aññasmi’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animitto. Pubbaṇhepi hi sattā maranti majjhanhikādīnaṃ aññatarasmimpi.Dehanikkhepanampi, ‘‘idheva mīyamānānaṃ dehena patitabbaṃ, na aññatthā’’ti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittaṃ. Antogāme jātānañhi bahigāmepi attabhāvo patati, bahigāmepi jātānaṃ antogāmepi. Tathā thalajānaṃ jale, jalajānaṃ thaleti anekappakārato vitthāretabbaṃ.Gatipi, ‘‘ito cutena idha nibbattitabba’’nti evaṃ vavatthānābhāvato animittā. Devalokato hi cutā manussesupi nibbattanti, manussalokato cutā devalokādīnaṃ yattha katthaci nibbattantīti evaṃ yante yuttagoṇo viya gatipañcake loko samparivattati. Tassevaṃ samparivattato ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma kāle maraṇaṃ bhavissatī’’ti imaṃ maraṇassa kālaṃ vohaṃ na jānāmi.

Jīvitaṃ (life) is unheralded because of the absence of certainty that "it is only this much, not more than this." Indeed, beings die even in the kalala stage, even in the abbuda, pesi, ghana, aḍḍhamāsa, ekamāsa, dvemāsa, temāsa, catumāsa, pañcamāsa…pe… tenth month stage, even at the time of coming out of the womb, and after that, even at the end of a hundred years or more, they die. Byādhi (sickness) is also unheralded because of the absence of certainty that "beings die only from this sickness, not from another." Indeed, beings die even from eye disease, or from any one of ear disease, etc. Kālo (time) is also unheralded because of the absence of certainty that "one must die only at this time, not at another." Indeed, beings die even in the morning, or at any one of midday, etc. Dehanikkhepanaṃ (the laying down of the body) is also unheralded because of the absence of certainty that "the body of those dying must fall here, not elsewhere." Indeed, the body of those born inside a village falls even outside the village, and of those born outside a village, even inside the village. Thus, for those of the land in the water, for those of the water on the land, it should be expanded in many ways. Gati (destination) is also unheralded because of the absence of certainty that "having passed away from here, one must be reborn here." Indeed, those who pass away from the deva-world are reborn even among humans, those who pass away from the human world are reborn in the deva-world, etc., thus the world revolves in the five destinations like a yoked ox on a wheel. Since it revolves thus, "I do not know the time of death, that death will be at this time."

Channo kālo na dissatīti ayaṃ kālo mayhaṃ paṭicchanno avibhūto na paññāyati.Tasmāti yasmā ayaṃ kālo paṭicchanno na paññāyati, tasmā pañca kāmaguṇe abhutvāva bhikkhāmi.Mā maṃ kālo upaccagāti ettha samaṇadhammakaraṇakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kālo’’ti āha. Ayañhi samaṇadhammo nāma pacchime kāle tisso vayosīmā atikkantena obhaggena daṇḍaparāyaṇena pavedhamānena kāsasāsābhibhūtena na sakkā kātuṃ. Tadā hi na sakkā hoti icchiticchitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ vā gaṇhituṃ, dhutaṅgaṃ vā paribhuñjituṃ, araññavāsaṃ vā vasituṃ, icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpattiṃ vā samāpajjituṃ, padabhāṇa-sarabhaññadhammakathā-anumodanādīni vā kātuṃ, taruṇayobbanakāle panetaṃ sabbaṃ sakkā kātunti ayaṃ samaṇadhammakaraṇassa kālo mā maṃ upaccagā, yāva maṃ nātikkamati, tāva kāme abhutvāva samaṇadhammaṃ karomīti āha.

Channo kālo na dissatīti, this time is hidden, unmanifested, and not perceived by me. Tasmāti, since this time is hidden and not perceived, therefore I go for alms without enjoying the five strands of sensual pleasure. Mā maṃ kālo upaccagāti, here, with reference to the time of doing the ascetic life, he said "time." Indeed, this ascetic life is not able to be done in old age by one who has passed the three age limits, who is broken down, dependent on a staff, trembling, overcome by coughing and asthma. Then, one is not able to grasp the Buddha's word as one wishes, or to practice dhutaṅgas, or to live in the forest, or to attain meditative absorption at the moment one wishes, or to do recitation of texts, chanting, teaching of the Dhamma, approval, etc., but all of this is able to be done in youthful age, therefore may this time for doing the ascetic life not pass me by, as long as it does not pass me by, I will do the ascetic life without enjoying sensual pleasures, he said.

Pathaviyaṃpatiṭṭhahitvāti sā kira devatā – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu samaṇadhammakaraṇassa kālaṃ nāma katheti, akālaṃ nāma katheti, sahetukaṃ katheti sānisaṃsa’’nti ettāvatāva there lajjaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā mahābrahmaṃ viya aggikkhandhaṃ viya ca naṃ maññamānā gāravajātā ākāsā oruyha pathaviyaṃ aṭṭhāsi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi pathaviyaṃ ṭhitā, yena panatthena āgatā, punapi tameva gahetvādaharo tvantiādimāha. Tatthasusūti taruṇo.Kāḷakesoti suṭṭhu kāḷakeso.Bhadrenāti bhaddakena. Ekacco hi daharopi samāno kāṇo vā hoti kuṇiādīnaṃ vā aññataro, so bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato nāma na hoti. Yo pana abhirūpo hoti dassanīyo pāsādiko sabbasampattisampanno, yaṃ yadeva alaṅkāraparihāraṃ icchati, tena tena alaṅkato devaputto viya carati, ayaṃ bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato nāma hoti. Thero ca uttamarūpasampanno, tena naṃ evamāha.

Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvāti, it seems that the deva, thinking, "This bhikkhu speaks of the time for doing the ascetic life, speaks of the improper time, speaks with a cause, with a benefit," just by this much, having established shame in the Thera, considering him like Mahābrahmā, like a mass of fire, because of respect, having descended from the sky, she stood on the earth, with reference to that this was said. Although she stood on the earth, by whatever condition she came, again taking that same condition, she said daharo tvanti etc. There, susūti means young. Kāḷakesoti means with very black hair. Bhadrenāti means with good. Indeed, even though one is young, one is blind or one of the crippled, etc., he is not reckoned as endowed with good youth. But one who is beautiful, pleasing, and agreeable, endowed with all good fortune, adorned with whatever adornment he wishes, walks like a deva-son, he is reckoned as endowed with good youth. And the Thera was endowed with excellent form, therefore she said this to him.

Anikkīḷitāvīkāmesūti kāmesu akīḷitakīḷo abhuttāvī, akatakāmakīḷoti attho.Mā sandiṭṭhikaṃ hitvāti yebhuyyena hi tā adiṭṭhasaccā avītarāgā aparacittavidūniyo devatā bhikkhū dasapi vassāni vīsatimpi…pe… saṭṭhimpi vassāni parisuddhaṃ akhaṇḍaṃ brahmacariyaṃ caramāne disvā – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mānusake pañca kāmaguṇe pahāya dibbe kāme patthayantā samaṇadhammaṃ karontī’’ti saññaṃ uppādenti, ayampi tattheva uppādesi. Tasmā mānusake kāme sandiṭṭhike, dibbe ca kālike katvā evamāha.

Anikkīḷitāvī kāmesūti, not having played in sensual pleasures, not having enjoyed, not having done sensual play is the meaning. Mā sandiṭṭhikaṃ hitvāti, for the most part, those devas who have not seen the truth, who are without lust, not knowing the minds of others, seeing bhikkhus living the pure, unbroken Brahmacariya for ten years, twenty years…pe… sixty years, create the perception that "these bhikkhus, having abandoned the human five strands of sensual pleasure, desiring the divine sensual pleasures, do the ascetic life," this one also created it there. Therefore, having made the human sensual pleasures visible and the divine ones temporal, she said this.

Na kho ahaṃ, āvusoti, āvuso, ahaṃ sandiṭṭhike kāme hitvā kālike kāme na anudhāvāmi na patthemi na pihemi.Kalikañca kho ahaṃ, āvusoti ahaṃ kho, āvuso, kālikaṃ kāmaṃ hitvā sandiṭṭhikaṃ lokuttaradhammaṃ anudhāvāmi. Iti thero cittānantaraṃ aladdhabbatāya dibbepi mānusakepi pañca kāmaguṇekālikāti akāsi, cittānantaraṃ laddhabbatāya lokuttaradhammaṃsandiṭṭhikanti. Pañcakāmaguṇesu samohitesupi sampannakāmassāpi kāmino cittānantaraṃ icchiticchitārammaṇānubhavanaṃ na sampajjati. Cakkhudvāre iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ anubhavitukāmena hi cittakārapotthakārarūpakārādayo pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma sajjethā’’ti vattabbaṃ hoti. Etthantare anekakoṭisatasahassāni cittāni uppajjitvā nirujjhanti. Atha pacchā taṃ ārammaṇaṃ sampāpuṇāti. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo. Sotāpattimaggānantaraṃ pana sotāpattiphalameva uppajjati, antarā aññassa cittassa vāro natthi. Sesaphalesupi eseva nayoti.

"Indeed, friend," meaning, friend, I, having abandoned immediate pleasures, do not pursue, desire, or crave for future pleasures. "But indeed, friend," meaning, friend, I, having abandoned future pleasures, pursue the immediate supramundane Dhamma. Thus, immediately after the thought, the elder, not having attained [arahantship], regarded even divine and human five strands of sense pleasures as "future"; immediately after the thought, having attained [arahantship], [he regarded] the supramundane Dhamma as "immediate." Even when one is infatuated with the five strands of sense pleasures, the enjoyment of desired objects does not occur immediately for one who possesses sense pleasures. For one who wishes to experience a desirable object through the eye-door, it is necessary to summon painters, sculptors, and artisans, saying, "Prepare this particular thing." In the meantime, hundreds of thousands of millions of thoughts arise and cease. Then afterwards, that object is obtained. The same method applies to the remaining sense-doors. However, immediately after the path of Stream-entry, only the fruit of Stream-entry arises; there is no opportunity for another thought in between. The same method applies to the remaining fruits.

kālikā hi, āvusotiādimāha. Tatthakālikāti vuttanayena samohitasampattināpi kālantare pattabbā.Bahudukkhāti pañca kāmaguṇe nissāya pattabbadukkhassa bahutāya bahudukkhā. Taṃvatthukasseva upāyāsassa bahutāyabahupāyāsā. Ādīnavo ettha bhiyyoti pañca kāmaguṇe nissāya laddhabbasukhato ādīnavo bhiyyo, dukkhameva bahutaranti attho.Sandiṭṭhiko ayaṃ dhammoti ayaṃ lokuttaradhammo yena yena adhigato hoti, tena tena parasaddhāya gantabbataṃ hitvā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena sayaṃ daṭṭhabbotisandiṭṭhiko. Attano phaladānaṃ sandhāya nāssa kāloti akālo, akāloyevaakāliko. Yo ettha ariyamaggadhammo, so attano pavattisamanantarameva phalaṃ detīti attho. ‘‘Ehi passa imaṃ dhamma’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehipassavidhiṃ arahatītiehipassiko. Ādittaṃ celaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi bhāvanāvasena attano citte upanayaṃ arahatītiopaneyyiko. Sabbehi ugghaṭitaññūādīhi viññūhi ‘‘bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṃ phalaṃ, sacchikato nirodho’’ti attani attani veditabbotipaccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panavisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.146 ādayo) dhammānussativaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto.

He spoke beginning with, "Future, indeed, friend." There, "future" [means] obtainable at a later time, even with assembled resources, in the manner stated. "Full of suffering" [means] full of suffering, due to the abundance of suffering to be experienced relying on the five strands of sense pleasures. "Full of tribulation" [means] full of tribulation, due to the abundance of effort for that same basis. "More danger is here" [means] the danger is greater than the pleasure to be gained relying on the five strands of sense pleasures; suffering is indeed far greater, is the meaning. "This Dhamma is immediate" [means] this supramundane Dhamma is "immediate" because, by whomever it is attained, it is to be seen by oneself with the knowledge of reflection, abandoning the need to go on the faith of another. Not having a time in reference to its fruit-giving, it is timeless, indeed "timeless." That Ariya path-Dhamma here gives its fruit immediately after its arising, is the meaning. "Come, see this Dhamma" [means] being worthy of the invitation, "Come, see," which is thus initiated, it is "inviting one to come and see." Being worthy of being brought into one's own mind through cultivation, even while disregarding burning clothes or one's head, it is "leading onwards." It is to be known by each and every wise person—those who understand quickly and so on—in oneself, [saying,] "The path is cultivated by me, the fruit is attained, cessation is realized," thus it is "to be personally experienced by the wise." This is the summary here, but the detailed explanation is stated in the section on recollection of the Dhamma in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.146 ff.).

kathañca bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tatthakathañcātipadassa ‘‘kathañca bhikkhu kālikā kāmā vuttā bhagavatā, kathaṃ bahudukkhā, kathaṃ bahupāyāsā’’ti? Evaṃ sabbapadehi sambandho veditabbo.

He spoke beginning with, "And how, bhikkhus?" There, the word "and how?" should be understood in connection with all the words: "And how are future pleasures said by the Blessed One? How are they full of suffering? How are they full of tribulation?"

Navoti aparipuṇṇapañcavasso hi bhikkhu navo nāma hoti, pañcavassato paṭṭhāya majjhimo, dasavassato paṭṭhāya thero. Aparo nayo – aparipuṇṇadasavasso navo, dasavassato paṭṭhāya majjhimo, vīsativassato paṭṭhāya thero. Tesaṃ ahaṃ navoti vadati.

"New" [means] a bhikkhu who is not yet fully five years [ordained] is called new; from five years onwards, [he is] intermediate; from ten years onwards, [he is] an elder. Another method: one not yet fully ten years [ordained] is new; from ten years onwards, [he is] intermediate; from twenty years onwards, [he is] an elder. "I am new among them," he says.

Imaṃ dhammavinayanti imaṃ dhammañca vinayañca. Ubhayampetaṃ sāsanasseva nāmaṃ. Dhammena hettha dve piṭakāni vuttāni, vinayena vinayapiṭakaṃ, iti tīhi piṭakehi pakāsitaṃ paṭipattiṃ adhunā āgatomhīti vadati.

"This Dhamma-Vinaya" [means] this Dhamma and Vinaya. Both of these are names for the dispensation itself. By "Dhamma" here, the two Piṭakas are stated; by "Vinaya," the Vinaya Piṭaka. "I have now come to the practice proclaimed by these three Piṭakas," he says.

Mahesakkhāhīti mahāparivārāhi. Ekekassa hi devarañño koṭisatampi koṭisahassampi parivāro hoti, te attānaṃ mahante ṭhāne ṭhapetvā tathāgataṃ passanti. Tattha amhādisānaṃ appesakkhānaṃ mātugāmajātikānaṃ kuto okāsoti dasseti.

"Of great power" [means] with a large retinue. For each deva-king has a retinue of hundreds of millions or thousands of millions; they, placing themselves in a great position, see the Tathāgata. "Where is there opportunity for those like us, of little power, born as women?" he shows.

Mayampiāgaccheyyāmāti idaṃ sā devatā ‘‘sacepi cakkavāḷaṃ pūretvā parisā nisinnā hoti, mahatiyā buddhavīthiyā satthu santikaṃ gantuṃ labhatī’’ti ñatvā āha.Puccha bhikkhu, puccha bhikkhūti thirakaraṇavasena āmeḍitaṃ kataṃ.

"May we also come" [means] that devatā spoke, knowing that "even if the assembly were seated filling a world-system, one can go to the Teacher by a great Buddha-street." "Ask, bhikkhu, ask, bhikkhus" [means] it was done as a repetition for the sake of firm confirmation.

Akkheyyasaññinoti ettha ‘‘devo, manusso, gahaṭṭho, pabbajito, satto, puggalo, tisso, phusso’’tiādinā nayena akkheyyato sabbesaṃ akkhānānaṃ sabbāsaṃ kathānaṃ vatthubhūtato pañcakkhandhā ‘‘akkheyyā’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Satto naro poso puggalo itthī puriso’’ti evaṃ saññā etesaṃ atthīti saññino, akkheyyesveva saññinotiakkheyyasaññino,pañcasu khandhesu sattapuggalādisaññinoti attho.Akkheyyasmiṃ patiṭṭhitāti pañcasu khandhesu aṭṭhahākārehi patiṭṭhitā. Ratto hi rāgavasena patiṭṭhito hoti, duṭṭho dosavasena, mūḷho mohavasena, parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasena, thāmagato anusayavasena, vinibaddho mānavasena, aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasena, vikkhepagato uddhaccavasena patiṭṭhito hoti.Akkheyyaṃ apariññāyāti pañcakkhandhe tīhi pariññāhi aparijānitvā.Yogamāyanti maccunoti maccuno yogaṃ payogaṃ pakkhepaṃ upakkhepaṃ upakkamaṃ abbhantaraṃ āgacchanti, maraṇavasaṃ gacchantīti attho. Evamimāya gāthāya kālikā kāmā kathitā.

"Regarding as nameable" There, the five khandhas are called "nameable" because they are the basis for all designations and all discussions in the way of "deva, human, householder, renunciate, being, person, Tissa, Phussa," etc. They have the designation of "being, man, person, individual, woman, man," etc.; thus they are designated, [they are] "regarding as nameable," meaning, regarding beings, persons, etc., in the five khandhas. "Established in the nameable" [means] established in the five khandhas in eight ways. For the passionate one is established by way of passion, the hateful one by way of hatred, the deluded one by way of delusion, the attached one by way of views, the conceited one by way of latent tendencies, the bound one by way of conceit, the uncertain one by way of doubt, the distracted one by way of restlessness. "Not understanding the nameable" [means] not understanding the five khandhas with the three kinds of understanding. "Go to the realm of Death" [means] they go to the realm, the application, the placement, the close placement, the approach, the interior, of Death; they go to the control of death, is the meaning. Thus, in this verse, future pleasures are described.

Pariññāyāti ñātapariññā, tīraṇapariññā, pahānapariññāti imāhi tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Tattha katamāñātapariññā?Pañcakkhandhe parijānāti – ‘‘ayaṃ rūpakkhandho, ayaṃ vedanākkhandho, ayaṃ saññākkhandho, ayaṃ saṅkhārakkhandho, ayaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, imāni tesaṃ lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānī’’ti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā. Katamātīraṇapariññā?Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā pañcakkhandhe tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi. Ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Katamāpahānapariññā?Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena pañcasu khandhesu chandarāgaṃ pajahati. Ayaṃ pahānapariññā.

"By understanding" [means] by the understanding of knowing, the understanding of scrutinizing, the understanding of abandoning—by these three kinds of understanding. There, what is the understanding of knowing? One understands the five khandhas: "This is the rūpa-khandha, this is the vedanā-khandha, this is the saññā-khandha, this is the saṅkhāra-khandha, this is the viññāṇa-khandha; these are their characteristics, function, manifestation, and proximate cause"—this is the understanding of knowing. What is the understanding of scrutinizing? Having thus known, one scrutinizes the five khandhas as impermanent, as suffering, as a disease, in forty-two ways. This is the understanding of scrutinizing. What is the understanding of abandoning? Having thus scrutinized, one abandons passion and lust in the five khandhas with the supreme path. This is the understanding of abandoning.

Akkhātāraṃ na maññatīti evaṃ tīhi pariññāhi pañcakkhandhe parijānitvā khīṇāsavo bhikkhu akkhātāraṃ puggalaṃ na maññati.Akkhātāranti kammavasena kāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, akkhātabbaṃ kathetabbaṃ puggalaṃ na maññati, na passatīti attho. Kinti akkhātabbanti? ‘‘Tisso’’ti vā ‘‘phusso’’ti vā evaṃ yena kenaci nāmena vā gottena vā pakāsetabbaṃ.Tañhi tassa na hotīti taṃ tassa khīṇāsavassa na hoti.Yena naṃ vajjāti yena naṃ ‘‘rāgena ratto’’ti vā ‘‘dosena duṭṭho’’ti vā ‘‘mohena mūḷho’’ti vāti koci vadeyya, taṃ kāraṇaṃ tassa khīṇāsavassa natthi.

"Does not consider the designator" [means] having thus understood the five khandhas with the three kinds of understanding, a khīṇāsava bhikkhu does not consider the designator, the person. "Designator" [means] the cause should be understood by way of action; he does not consider, does not see the person to be designated and spoken of. What is to be designated? What is to be expressed by any name or clan whatsoever, such as "Tissa" or "Phussa." "For that does not exist for him" [means] that does not exist for that khīṇāsava. "By which one might speak of him" [means] whatever anyone might say of him, such as "passionate due to passion," "hateful due to hatred," or "deluded due to delusion"—that cause does not exist for that khīṇāsava.

Sace vijānāsi vadehīti sace evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ jānāsi, ‘‘jānāmī’’ti vadehi. No ce jānāsi, atha ‘‘na jānāmī’’ti vadehi.Yakkhāti devataṃ ālapanto āha. Iti imāya gāthāya sandiṭṭhiko navavidho lokuttaradhammo kathito.Sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto.

"If you know, speak" [means] if you know a khīṇāsava of such a kind, speak, "I know." But if you do not know, then speak, "I do not know." "Yakkha" [means] addressing the devatā, he spoke. Thus, in this verse, the immediate ninefold supramundane Dhamma is described. "Sādhu" [means] a particle in the sense of entreaty.

Yo maññatīti yo attānaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ samo’’ti vā ‘‘visesī’’ti vā ‘‘nihīno’’ti vā maññati. Etena ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādayo tayo mānā gahitāva. Tesu gahitesu nava mānā gahitāva honti.So vivadetha tenāti so puggalo teneva mānena yena kenaci puggalena saddhiṃ – ‘‘kena maṃ tvaṃ pāpuṇāsi, kiṃ jātiyā pāpuṇāsi, udāhu gottena, kulapadesena, vaṇṇapokkharatāya, bāhusaccena, dhutaguṇenā’’ti evaṃ vivadeyya. Iti imāyapi upaḍḍhagāthāya kālikā kāmā kathitā.

"Who considers" [means] whoever considers himself "I am equal," "I am superior," or "I am inferior." By this, the three conceits beginning with "I am better" are taken. When those are taken, the nine conceits are taken. "He argues thereby" [means] that person might argue with anyone by that very conceit—"By what do you attain me? Do you attain me by birth? Or by clan, family descent, excellence of complexion, great learning, or ascetic qualities?" Thus, he might argue. Thus, in this half-verse also, future pleasures are described.

Tīsu vidhāsūti tīsu mānesu. ‘‘Ekavidhena rūpasaṅgaho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 584) hi koṭṭhāso ‘‘vidho’’ti vutto. ‘‘Kathaṃvidhaṃ sīlavantaṃ vadanti, kathaṃvidhaṃ paññavantaṃ vadantī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.95) ākāro. ‘‘Tisso imā, bhikkhave, vidhā. Katamā tisso? Seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.162) māno ‘‘vidhā’’ti vutto. Idhāpi mānova. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tīsu vidhāsūti tīsu mānesū’’ti.Avikampamānoti so puggalo etesu saṅkhepato tīsu, vitthārato navasu mānesu na kampati, na calati.Samo visesīti na tassa hotīti tassa pahīnamānassa khīṇāsavassa ‘‘ahaṃ sadiso’’ti vā ‘‘seyyo’’ti vā ‘‘hīno’’ti vā na hotīti dasseti. Pacchimapadaṃ vuttanayameva. Iti imāyapi upaḍḍhagāthāya navavidho sandiṭṭhiko lokuttaradhammo kathito.

"In the three aspects" [means] in the three conceits. For in the section beginning with "One aspect is the aggregation of rūpa," the division is called "aspect." In sections beginning with "How do they describe a virtuous one, how do they describe a wise one?", the condition is [called aspect]. In sections beginning with "There are these three aspects, bhikkhus. Which three? The aspect 'I am better,' the aspect 'I am equal,' the aspect 'I am inferior,'" the conceit is called "aspect." Here also, it is conceit. Therefore, it was said, "In the three aspects means in the three conceits." "Not wavering" [means] that person does not waver, does not move in these three conceits in brief, or nine conceits in detail. "Equal or superior, that does not exist for him" [means] he shows that "I am equal," "I am superior," or "I am inferior" does not exist for that khīṇāsava who has abandoned conceit. The last phrase is in the manner already stated. Thus, in this half-verse also, the ninefold immediate supramundane Dhamma is described.

Pahāsisaṅkhanti, ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṃ āhāretī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.120, 239) paññā ‘‘saṅkhā’’ti āgatā. ‘‘Atthi te koci gaṇako vā muddiko vā saṅkhāyako vā, yo pahoti gaṅgāya vālukaṃ gaṇetu’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.410) ettha gaṇanā. ‘‘Saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 880) koṭṭhāso. ‘‘Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā’’ti (dha. sa. 1313-1315) ettha paṇṇatti ‘‘saṅkhā’’ti āgatā. Idhāpi ayameva adhippetā.Pahāsi saṅkhanti padassa hi ayamevattho – ratto duṭṭho mūḷho iti imaṃ paṇṇattiṃ khīṇāsavo pahāsi jahi pajahīti.

"He abandoned reckoning" [means] in sections beginning with "He partakes of nutriment with wise reflection," wisdom has come as "reckoning." Here, the calculation [is meant when it says], "Is there any calculator, accountant, or reckoner who is capable of counting the grains of sand in the Ganges?" In sections beginning with "Proliferation-reckonings are caused by perception," the division is. In sections beginning with "That which is the reckoning, the designation of those various phenomena," here the concept has come as "reckoning." Here also, this same is intended. The meaning of the phrase "He abandoned reckoning" is just this: the khīṇāsava abandoned, relinquished, discarded this concept that "he is passionate, hateful, deluded."

Na vimānamajjhagāti navabhedaṃ tividhamānaṃ na upagato. Nivāsaṭṭhena vā mātukucchi ‘‘vimāna’’nti vuccati, taṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhivasena na upagacchītipi attho. Anāgatatthe atītavacanaṃ.Acchecchīti chindi.Chinnaganthanti cattāro ganthe chinditvā ṭhitaṃ.Anīghanti niddukkhaṃ.Nirāsanti nittaṇhaṃ.Pariyesamānāti olokayamānā.Nājjhagamunti na adhigacchanti na vindanti na passanti. Vattamānatthe atītavacanaṃ.Idha vā huraṃ vāti idhaloke vā paraloke vā.Sabbanivesanesūti tayo bhavā, catasso yoniyo, pañca gatiyo, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, nava sattāvāsā, iti imesupi sabbesu sattanivesanesu evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ kāyassa bhedā uppajjamānaṃ vā uppannaṃ vā na passantīti attho. Imāya gāthāya sandiṭṭhikaṃ lokuttaradhammameva kathesi.

"Did not go to a state of loss" [means] he did not approach the threefold conceit with its nine distinctions. Or, the mother's womb is called "state of loss" in the sense of dwelling; he did not approach that again by way of rebirth, is also the meaning. The past tense is used in the sense of the future. "Cut off" [means] he severed. "With bonds severed" [means] one who stands having severed the four bonds. "Without anguish" [means] without suffering. "Without longing" [means] without craving. "Seeking" [means] looking around. "Did not find" [means] they do not attain, do not find, do not see. The past tense is used in the sense of the present. "Here or hereafter" [means] in this world or in the next world. "In all dwelling places" [means] in these all abodes of beings, such a khīṇāsava is not seen arising or having arisen at the breaking up of the body in the three existences, the four wombs, the five destinations, the seven stations of consciousness, and the nine abodes of beings, is the meaning. In this verse, he described only the immediate supramundane Dhamma.

imassa khvāhaṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthapāpaṃ na kayirāti gāthāya dasakusalakammapathavasenapi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati aṭṭhaṅgikamaggavasenapi. Dasakusalakammapathavasena tāvavacasāti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ gahitaṃ.Manasāti tividhaṃ manosucaritaṃ gahitaṃ.Kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloketi tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ gahitaṃ. Ime tāva dasakusalakammapathadhammā honti.Kāme pahāyāti iminā pana kāmasukhallikānuyogo paṭikkhitto.Satimā sampajānoti iminā dasakusalakammapathakāraṇaṃ satisampajaññaṃ gahitaṃ.Dukkhaṃ na sevetha anatthasaṃhitanti iminā attakilamathānuyogo paṭisiddho. Iti devatā ‘‘ubho ante vivajjetvā kāraṇehi satisampajaññehi saddhiṃ dasakusalakammapathadhamme tumhehi kathite ājānāmi bhagavā’’ti vadati.

He spoke beginning with "Indeed, venerable sir, of this." There, in the verse "He would not do evil," it is fitting to speak in terms of the ten wholesome courses of action, or in terms of the Noble Eightfold Path. First, in terms of the ten wholesome courses of action, "by speech" [means] the fourfold verbal good conduct is taken. "By mind" [means] the threefold mental good conduct is taken. "Or by body, anything in all the world" [means] the threefold bodily good conduct is taken. These, then, are the ten wholesome courses of action. But by "having abandoned sensual pleasures," indulgence in sensual pleasure is rejected. "Mindful, fully aware" [means] by this, mindfulness and full awareness, the cause of the ten wholesome courses of action, is taken. "He would not pursue suffering, connected with non-benefit" [means] by this, indulgence in self-mortification is rejected. Thus, the devatā speaks, "Having avoided both extremes, I understand, Blessed One, the ten wholesome courses of action described by you together with the causes, mindfulness and full awareness."

vacasāti sammāvācā gahitā, mano pana aṅgaṃ na hotītimanasāti maggasampayuttakaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ.Kāyena vā kiñcana sabbaloketi sammākammanto gahito, ājīvo pana vācākammantapakkhikattā gahitova hoti.Satimāti iminā vāyāmasatisamādhayo gahitā.Sampajānotipadena sammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappā.Kāme pahāya, dukkhaṃ na sevethātipadadvayena antadvayavajjanaṃ. Iti ime dve ante anupagamma majjhimaṃ paṭipadaṃ tumhehi kathitaṃ, ājānāmi bhagavāti vatvā tathāgataṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.

"By speech" [means] right speech is taken; "by mind" [means] the mind associated with the path is taken, since the mind is not a limb. "Or by body, anything in all the world" [means] right action is taken; but livelihood is already taken, being on the side of speech and action. "Mindful" [means] by this, effort, mindfulness, and concentration are taken. By the word "fully aware," right view and right thought [are taken]. By the two phrases "having abandoned sensual pleasures, he would not pursue suffering," the avoidance of the two extremes [is taken]. Thus, having said, "I understand that the Middle Way has been described by you, not approaching these two extremes," the devatā, having honored the Tathāgata with garlands of flowers and so on, departed, keeping him on the right side.

Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Samiddhi Sutta Commentary is finished.

Nandanavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter, Nandana, is finished.

3. Sattivaggo

3. Satti Chapter

1. Sattisuttavaṇṇanā
1. Satti Sutta Commentary

21.Sattivaggassa paṭhamesattiyāti desanāsīsametaṃ. Ekatokhārādinā satthenāti attho.Omaṭṭhoti pahato. Cattāro hi pahārā omaṭṭho ummaṭṭho maṭṭho vimaṭṭhoti. Tattha upari ṭhatvā adhomukhaṃ dinnapahāro omaṭṭho nāma; heṭṭhā ṭhatvā uddhaṃmukhaṃ dinno ummaṭṭho nāma; aggaḷasūci viya vinivijjhitvā gato maṭṭho nāma; seso sabbopi vimaṭṭho nāma. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne omaṭṭho gahito. So hi sabbadāruṇo duruddharasallo duttikiccho antodoso antopubbalohitova hoti, pubbalohitaṃ anikkhamitvā vaṇamukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati. Pubbalohitaṃ niharitukāmehi mañcena saddhiṃ bandhitvā adhosiro kātabbo hoti, maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ pāpuṇāti.Paribbajeti vihareyya.

21. In the first of the Sattivagga, sattiyā means with a desanā (teaching) headed by satti. It means with a dart or weapon beginning with ekatokhārā. Omaṭṭho means struck. For there are four kinds of striking: omaṭṭho, ummaṭṭho, maṭṭho, and vimaṭṭho. Among these, a strike given from above, face down, is called omaṭṭho; one given from below, face up, is called ummaṭṭho; one that pierces through like the pin of a door bolt is called maṭṭho; and all the rest are called vimaṭṭho. But in this context, omaṭṭho is taken. For that is always a cruel, difficult-to-extract dart, difficult to treat, with internal corruption, like pus and blood inside; the pus and blood, without coming out, close over the mouth of the wound and remain. Those who wish to extract the pus and blood must bind it together with a bed and make the head hang down, or they will attain death or suffering equal to death. Paribbaje means should live.

Imāya gāthāya kiṃ katheti? Yathā sattiyā omaṭṭho puriso sallubbahana-vaṇatikicchanānaṃ atthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati, payogaṃ karoti parakkamati. Yathā ca ḍayhamāno matthake ādittasīso tassa nibbāpanatthāya vīriyaṃ ārabhati, payogaṃ karoti parakkamati, evameva bhikkhu kāmarāgaṃ pahānāya sato appamatto hutvā vihareyya bhagavāti kathesi.

What does he say with this verse? Just as a man struck by a dart exerts effort, makes an attempt, and strives for the sake of extracting the dart and treating the wound, and just as one whose head is burning, whose head is ablaze, exerts effort, makes an attempt, and strives for the sake of extinguishing it, even so should a bhikkhu, mindful and diligent, live for the sake of abandoning sensual lust, so the Blessed One said.

Atha bhagavā cintesi – imāya devatāya upamā tāva daḷhaṃ katvā ānītā, atthaṃ pana parittakaṃ gahetvā ṭhitā, punappunaṃ kathentīpi hesā kāmarāgassa vikkhambhanapahānameva katheyya. Yāva ca kāmarāgo maggena na samugghāṭiyati, tāva anubaddhova hoti. Iti tameva opammaṃ gahetvā paṭhamamaggavasena desanaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā desento dutiyaṃ gāthamāha. Tassattho purimānusāreneva veditabboti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Then the Blessed One thought: "Indeed, this deity has brought the simile forth strongly, but has grasped only a little of the meaning, and even if she were to speak again and again, she would speak only of the suppression and abandonment of sensual lust. And as long as sensual lust is not uprooted by the Path, it remains attached." Thus, taking that same simile, turning the teaching towards the way of the Path, while teaching, he spoke the second verse. Its meaning should be understood in accordance with the previous one. The first.

2. Phusatisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Phusatisuttavaṇṇanā

22.Dutiyenāphusantaṃ phusatīti kammaṃ aphusantaṃ vipāko na phusati, kammameva vā aphusantaṃ kammaṃ na phusati. Kammañhi nākaroto kariyati.Phusantañca tatophuseti kammaṃ phusantaṃ vipāko phusati, kammameva vā phusati. Kammañhi karoto kariyati.Tasmā phusantaṃ phusati, appaduṭṭhapadosinanti yasmā na aphusantaṃ phusati, phusantañca phusati, ayaṃ kammavipākānaṃ dhammatā, tasmā yo ‘‘appaduṭṭhassa narassa dussati, suddhassa posassa anaṅgaṇassā’’ti evaṃ vutto appaduṭṭhapadosī puggalo, taṃ puggalaṃ kammaṃ phusantameva kammaṃ phusati, vipāko vā phusati. So hi parassa upaghātaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti vā mā vā, attā panānena catūsu apāyesu ṭhapito nāma hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘tameva bālaṃ pacceti pāpaṃ, sukhumo rajo paṭivātaṃva khitto’’ti. Dutiyaṃ.

22. In the second, nāphusantaṃ phusatīti the result does not touch the action that does not touch; or the action itself does not touch the action that does not touch. For action is not done by one who does not do it. Phusantañca tato phuse means the result touches the action that touches; or the action itself touches. For action is done by one who does it. Tasmā phusantaṃ phusati, appaduṭṭhapadosinanti since what does not touch does not touch, and what touches does touch, this is the nature of the results of actions, therefore, that person who is said to be "appaduṭṭhapadosī," one who harms the innocent, who wrongs the pure and blameless, that action touches that person, or the result touches. For he may or may not be able to harm another, but by this he is considered to have placed himself in the four woeful states. Therefore, the Blessed One said, "Evil recoils upon that fool, like fine dust thrown against the wind." The second.

3. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā

23.Tatiyeantojaṭāti gāthāyaṃjaṭāti taṇhāya jāliniyā adhivacanaṃ. Sā hi rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu heṭṭhupariyavasena punappunaṃ uppajjanato saṃsibbanaṭṭhena veḷugumbādīnaṃ sākhājālasaṅkhātā jaṭā viyāti jaṭā. Sā panesā sakaparikkhāraparaparikkhāresu sakaattabhāva-paraattabhāvesu ajjhattikāyatana-bāhirāyatanesu ca uppajjanatoantojaṭā bahijaṭāti vuccati. Tāya evaṃ uppajjamānāyajaṭāya jaṭitā pajā. Yathā nāma veḷujaṭādīhi veḷuādayo, evaṃ tāya taṇhājaṭāya sabbāpi ayaṃ sattanikāyasaṅkhātā pajā jaṭitā vinaddhā, saṃsibbitāti attho. Yasmā ca evaṃ jaṭitā,taṃ taṃ gotama pucchāmīti tasmā taṃ pucchāmi.Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.Ko imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti imaṃ evaṃ tedhātukaṃ jaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ jaṭaṃ ko vijaṭeyya, vijaṭetuṃ ko samatthoti pucchati.

23. In the third, in the verse antojaṭā, jaṭā is a designation for craving's net. For it is a jaṭā (tangle), like a network of branches of bamboo clumps, etc., due to arising again and again in sense objects such as forms, in a downward and upward manner, in the sense of intertwining. That, arising in connection with one's requisites and belongings, in connection with one's own existence and the existence of others, and in connection with internal and external sense bases, is called antojaṭā bahijaṭā. As that arises thus, jaṭāya jaṭitā pajā: just as bamboo, etc., are tangled by bamboo tangles, etc., so all this populace, reckoned as groups of beings, is tangled, bound, intertwined by that craving tangle, is the meaning. And since they are thus tangled, taṃ taṃ gotama pucchāmīti therefore, I ask that. Gotamā is addressing the Blessed One by his clan name. Ko imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti who would disentangle, who is able to disentangle this tangle that has thus tangled and stands tangled in the triple world?

sīle patiṭṭhāyātiādimāha. Tatthasīle patiṭṭhāyāti catupārisuddhisīle ṭhatvā. Ettha ca bhagavā jaṭāvijaṭanaṃ pucchito sīlaṃ ārabhanto na ‘‘aññaṃ puṭṭho aññaṃ kathetī’’ti veditabbo. Jaṭāvijaṭakassa hi patiṭṭhādassanatthamettha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ.

He said, beginning with sīle patiṭṭhāyā. Therein, sīle patiṭṭhāyāti means standing in the fourfold purified morality. Here, when the Blessed One, being asked about disentangling the tangle, begins with morality, it should not be understood that he "answers something else when asked something else." For morality is spoken of here to show the foundation for one who disentangles the tangle.

Naroti satto.Sapaññoti kammajatihetukapaṭisandhipaññāya paññavā.Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayanti samādhiñceva vipassanañca bhāvayamāno. Cittasīsena hettha aṭṭha samāpattiyo kathitā, paññānāmena vipassanā.Ātāpīti vīriyavā. Vīriyañhi kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena ‘‘ātāpo’’ti vuccati, tadassa atthīti ātāpī.Nipakoti nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatoti attho. Iminā padena pārihāriyapaññaṃ dasseti.Pārihāriyapaññānāma ‘‘ayaṃ kālo uddesassa, ayaṃ kālo paripucchāyā’’tiādinā nayena sabbattha kārāpitā pariharitabbapaññā. Imasmiñhi pañhābyākaraṇe tikkhattuṃ paññā āgatā. Tattha paṭhamā jātipaññā, dutiyā vipassanāpaññā, tatiyā sabbakiccapariṇāyikā pārihāriyapaññā.

Naro means a being. Sapañño means wise with the wisdom of rebirth due to action. Cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayanti cultivating both concentration and insight. Here, with concentration as the heading, the eight attainments are spoken of, and by the name of wisdom, insight. Ātāpī means energetic. For energy, in the sense of heating and tormenting the defilements, is called "ātāpo," one who has that is ātāpī. Nipako means wisdom is called nepakkaṃ, one endowed with that is the meaning. By this word, he shows the wisdom of resourcefulness. Pārihāriyapaññā means the wisdom that is to be exercised, arranged everywhere in the manner of "this is the time for recitation, this is the time for questioning," and so on. For in this question and answer, wisdom has come three times. Therein, the first is the wisdom of birth, the second is the wisdom of insight, and the third is the wisdom of resourcefulness that encompasses all tasks.

Soimaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti so imehi sīlādīhi samannāgato bhikkhu. Yathā nāma puriso pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya sunisitaṃ satthaṃ ukkhipitvā mahantaṃ veḷugumbaṃ vijaṭeyya, evamevaṃ sīle patiṭṭhāya samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ vipassanāpaññāsatthaṃ vīriyabalapaggahitena pārihāriyapaññāhatthena ukkhipitvā sabbampi taṃ attano santāne patitaṃ taṇhājaṭaṃ vijaṭeyya sañchindeyya sampadāleyyāti.

So imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭanti that bhikkhu endowed with these qualities beginning with morality. Just as a man, standing on the ground, lifting up a well-sharpened knife, would disentangle a large bamboo clump, even so, standing on morality, lifting up the well-sharpened knife of insight wisdom with the strength of concentration, with the hand of resourceful wisdom propelled by the power of energy, he would disentangle, cut through, completely destroy all that craving tangle that has fallen into his own being.

yesantiādimāha. Evaṃ jaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ṭhitaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetvā puna jaṭāya vijaṭanokāsaṃ dassentoyattha nāmañcātiādimāha. Tatthanāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā.Paṭighaṃ rūpasaññā cāti ettha paṭighasaññāvasena kāmabhavo gahito, rūpasaññāvasena rūpabhavo. Tesu dvīsu gahitesu arūpabhavo gahitova hoti bhavasaṅkhepenāti.Etthesā chijjate jaṭāti ettha tebhūmakavaṭṭassa pariyādiyanaṭṭhāne esā jaṭā chijjati, nibbānaṃ āgamma chijjati nirujjhatīti ayaṃ attho dassito hoti. Tatiyaṃ.

He said, beginning with yesaṃ. Having shown the khīṇāsava who stands disentangled from the tangle in this way, again showing the opportunity for disentangling the tangle, he said, beginning with yattha nāmañcā. Therein, nāmanti means the four immaterial aggregates. Paṭighaṃ rūpasaññā cāti here, by way of the perception of aversion, the sensual existence is taken, and by way of the perception of form, the form existence. With these two taken, the formless existence is also taken, for existence is condensed. Etthesā chijjate jaṭāti here, at the place where the round of three realms comes to an end, this tangle is cut off; coming to nibbāna, it is cut off, it ceases, this meaning is shown. The third.

4. Manonivāraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Manonivāraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

24.Catuttheyato yatoti pāpato vā kalyāṇato vā. Ayaṃ kira devatā ‘‘yaṃkiñci kusalādibhedaṃ lokiyaṃ vā lokuttaraṃ vā mano, taṃ nivāretabbameva, na uppādetabba’’nti evaṃladdhikā.Sa sabbatoti so sabbato. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā aniyyānikakathaṃ katheti, mano nāma nivāretabbampi atthi bhāvetabbampi, vibhajitvā namassā dassessāmī’’ti cintetvā dutiyagāthaṃ āha. Tatthana mano saṃyatattamāgatanti, yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na sabbato mano nivāraye’’ti, kataraṃ taṃ mano, yaṃ taṃ sabbato na nivāretabbanti ce. Mano saṃyatattaṃ āgataṃ, yaṃ mano yattha saṃyatabhāvaṃ āgataṃ, ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmi, sīlaṃ rakkhissāmī’’tiādinā nayena uppannaṃ, etaṃ mano na nivāretabbaṃ, aññadatthu brūhetabbaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ.Yato yato ca pāpakanti yato yato akusalaṃ uppajjati, tato tato ca taṃ nivāretabbanti. Catutthaṃ.

24. In the fourth, yato yatoti from what is bad or from what is good. It seems that this deity is of the view that "whatever mind, of any kind, whether mundane or supramundane, should be restrained, not produced." Sa sabbatoti he from everything. Then the Blessed One, thinking, "This deity is speaking a non-emancipating talk; there is a mind that should be restrained and also one that should be cultivated; I will explain it by dividing it," spoke the second verse. Therein, na mano saṃyatattamāgatanti, if it is said, "one should not restrain the mind from everything," which mind is that which should not be restrained from everything? The mind has come to restraint, the mind that has come to a state of restraint, that has arisen in the manner of "I will give alms, I will keep the precepts," etc., that mind should not be restrained, rather, it should be developed, increased. Yato yato ca pāpakanti from whatever unwholesome arises, from that it should be restrained. The fourth.

5. Arahantasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Arahantasuttavaṇṇanā

25.Pañcamekatāvīti catūhi maggehi katakicco.Ahaṃ vadāmīti ayaṃ devatā vanasaṇḍavāsinī, sā āraññakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ bhuñjāmi, ahaṃ nisīdāmi, mama patto, mama cīvara’’ntiādikathāvohāraṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ ime bhikkhū ‘khīṇāsavā’ti maññāmi, khīṇāsavānañca nāma evarūpā attupaladdhinissitakathā hoti, na hoti nu kho’’ti jānanatthaṃ evaṃ pucchati.

25. In the fifth, katāvīti one who has done his duty by the four paths. Ahaṃ vadāmīti this deity dwells in a forest grove. She, hearing the talk of the forest-dwelling bhikkhus, such as "I eat, I sit, this is my bowl, this is my robe," thought, "I consider these bhikkhus to be khīṇāsavas, but do khīṇāsavas have such talk based on self-regard, or do they not?" To know this, she asks thus.

Sāmaññanti lokaniruttiṃ lokavohāraṃ.Kusaloti khandhādīsu kusalo.Vohāramattenāti upaladdhinissitakathaṃ hitvā vohārabhedaṃ akaronto ‘‘ahaṃ, mamā’’ti vadeyya. ‘‘Khandhā bhuñjanti, khandhā nisīdanti, khandhānaṃ patto, khandhānaṃ cīvara’’nti hi vutte vohārabhedo hoti, na koci jānāti. Tasmā evaṃ avatvā lokavohārena voharatīti.

Sāmaññanti worldly expression, worldly usage. Kusaloti skilled in the aggregates, etc. Vohāramattenāti without abandoning the talk based on self-regard, without making a distinction in usage, he would say "I, mine." For if it were said, "The aggregates eat, the aggregates sit, the bowl is for the aggregates, the robe is for the aggregates," there would be a distinction in usage, no one would understand. Therefore, without saying thus, he uses worldly usage.

yo hotīti pucchi. Tatthamānaṃ nu khoti so bhikkhu mānaṃ upagantvā mānavasena vadeyya nu khoti. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ayaṃ devatā khīṇāsavaṃ samānaṃ viya karotī’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘khīṇāsavassa navavidhopi māno pahīno’’ti dassento paṭigāthaṃ āha. Tatthavidhūpitāti vidhamitā.Mānaganthassāti mānā ca ganthā ca assa.Maññatanti maññanaṃ. Tividhampi taṇhā-diṭṭhi-māna-maññanaṃ so vītivatto, atikkantoti attho. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.

yo hotīti he asked. Therein, mānaṃ nu khoti would that bhikkhu, approaching conceit, speak on the basis of conceit? Then the Blessed One, thinking, "This deity is making the khīṇāsava similar to an ordinary person," showing that "the khīṇāsava has abandoned even the nine kinds of conceit," spoke the counter-verse. Therein, vidhūpitāti scattered. Mānaganthassāti conceit and fetters are his. Maññatanti conceiving. He has gone beyond, surpassed the threefold craving, views, conceit, and conceiving. The rest is easy to understand. The fifth.

6. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā

26.Chaṭṭhepuṭṭhunti pucchituṃ.Kathaṃ jānemūti kathaṃ jāneyyāma.Divārattinti divā ca rattiñca.Tattha tatthāti yattha yattheva pajjalito hoti, tattha tattha.Esā ābhāti esā buddhābhā. Katamā pana sāti? Ñāṇāloko vā hotu pītiāloko vā pasādāloko vā dhammakathāāloko vā, sabbopi buddhānaṃ pātubhāvā uppanno ālokobuddhābhānāma. Ayaṃ anuttarā sabbaseṭṭhā asadisāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

26. In the sixth, puṭṭhunti to ask. Kathaṃ jānemūti how would we know. Divārattinti day and night. Tattha tatthāti wherever it is blazing, there. Esā ābhāti this is the Buddha's radiance. But what is that? Whether it is the light of knowledge, or the light of joy, or the light of faith, or the light of the dhamma talk, all the light that has arisen from the manifestation of the Buddhas is called buddhābhā. This is unsurpassed, the best of all, incomparable. The sixth.

7. Sarasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Sarasuttavaṇṇanā

27.Sattamekuto sarā nivattantīti ime saṃsārasarā kuto nivattanti, kiṃ āgamma nappavattantīti attho.Na gādhatīti na patiṭṭhāti.Atoti ato nibbānato. Sesaṃ uttānatthamevāti. Sattamaṃ.

27. In the seventh, kuto sarā nivattantīti from where do these streams of saṃsāra turn back, what do they come to, not continuing, is the meaning. Na gādhatīti does not establish. Atoti from that nibbāna. The rest is easy to understand. The seventh.

8. Mahaddhanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Mahaddhanasuttavaṇṇanā

28.Aṭṭhame nidhānagataṃ muttasārādi mahantaṃ dhanametesantimahaddhanā. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādi mahābhogo etesantimahābhogā. Aññamaññābhigijjhantīti aññamaññaṃ abhigijjhanti patthenti pihenti.Analaṅkatāti atittā apariyattajātā.Ussukkajātesūti nānākiccajātesu anuppannānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ uppādanatthāya uppannānaṃ anubhavanatthāya ussukkesu.Bhavasotānusārīsūti vaṭṭasotaṃ anusarantesu.Anussukāti avāvaṭā.Agāranti mātugāmena saddhiṃ gehaṃ.Virājiyāti virājetvā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

28. In the eighth, mahaddhanā means they have great wealth, such as pearls and gems, hidden away. Mahābhogā means they have great possessions, such as vessels of gold and silver. Aññamaññābhigijjhantīti they crave, desire, long for each other. Analaṅkatāti not satisfied, not having attained sufficiency. Ussukkajātesūti in eagerness in various kinds of activities, for the sake of producing forms and so on that have not arisen, for the sake of experiencing those that have arisen. Bhavasotānusārīsūti following the stream of the round. Anussukāti not agitated. Agāranti a house with a woman. Virājiyāti having renounced. The rest is easy to understand. The eighth.

9. Catucakkasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Catucakkasuttavaṇṇanā

29.Navamecatucakkanti catuiriyāpathaṃ. Iriyāpatho hi idha cakkanti adhippeto.Navadvāranti navahi vaṇamukhehi navadvāraṃ.Puṇṇanti asucipūraṃ.Lobhena saṃyutanti taṇhāya saṃyuttaṃ.Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatīti etassa evarūpassa sarīrassa kathaṃ niggamanaṃ bhavissati, kathaṃ mutti parimutti samatikkamo bhavissatīti pucchati.Naddhinti upanāhaṃ, pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāhoti evaṃ pavattaṃ balavakodhanti attho.Varattanti ‘‘chetvā naddhi varattañca, sandānaṃ sahanukkama’’nti gāthāya (dha. pa. 398; su. ni. 627) taṇhāvarattā,diṭṭhisandānaṃnāma jātaṃ. Idha pana pāḷiniddiṭṭhe kilese ṭhapetvā avasesā ‘‘varattā’’ti veditabbā, iti kilesavarattañca chetvāti attho.Icchā lobhanti ekoyeva dhammo icchanaṭṭhena icchā, lubbhanaṭṭhena lobhoti vutto. Paṭhamuppattikā vā dubbalā icchā, aparāparuppattiko balavā lobho. Aladdhapatthanā vā icchā, paṭiladdhavatthumhi lobho.Samūlaṃ taṇhanti avijjāmūlena samūlakaṃ taṇhaṃ.Abbuyhāti aggamaggena uppāṭetvā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Navamaṃ.

29. In the ninth, catucakkanti the four postures. For posture is intended here as a wheel. Navadvāranti the nine-gated, with nine wound-openings. Puṇṇanti full of impurity. Lobhena saṃyutanti bound by craving. Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatīti how will there be an escape from this kind of body, how will there be release, complete release, overcoming? he asks. Naddhinti animosity, anger in the past, animosity in the future, thus the meaning is strong anger that arises. Varattanti in the verse "cutting off the naddhi and varattañca, the sandānaṃ together with what follows" (dha. pa. 398; su. ni. 627), craving is varattā, views are called sandānaṃ. Here, however, setting aside the defilements specified in the Pāḷi, the remaining ones should be understood as "varattā," thus it means cutting off the defilement varattañca. Icchā lobhanti the same thing is called desire in the sense of desiring, and craving in the sense of coveting. Or, the initial weak arising is desire, and the later strong arising is craving. Or, desire is longing for what has not been obtained, and craving is longing for an object that has been obtained. Samūlaṃ taṇhanti craving together with its root, with ignorance as its root. Abbuyhāti having uprooted with the highest path. The rest is easy to understand. The ninth.

10. Eṇijaṅghasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Eṇijaṅghasuttavaṇṇanā

30.Dasameeṇijaṅghanti eṇimigassa viya suvaṭṭitajaṅghaṃ.Kisanti athūlaṃ samasarīraṃ. Atha vā ātapena milātaṃ mālāgandhavilepanehi anupabrūhitasarīrantipi attho.Vīranti vīriyavantaṃ.Appāhāranti bhojane mattaññutāya mitāhāraṃ, vikālabhojanapaṭikkhepavasena vā parittāhāraṃ.Alolupanti catūsu paccayesu loluppavirahitaṃ. Rasataṇhāpaṭikkhepo vā esa.Sīhaṃvekacaraṃ nāganti ekacaraṃ sīhaṃ viya, ekacaraṃ nāgaṃ viya. Gaṇavāsino hi pamattā honti, ekacarā appamattā, tasmā ekacarāva gahitāti.Paveditāti pakāsitā kathitā.Etthāti etasmiṃ nāmarūpe. Pañcakāmaguṇavasena hi rūpaṃ gahitaṃ, manena nāmaṃ, ubhayehi pana avinibhuttadhamme gahetvā pañcakkhandhādivasenapettha bhummaṃ yojetabbanti. Dasamaṃ.

30. In the tenth, eṇijaṅgha means having calves as shapely as those of a blackbuck. Kisa means not stout, having a balanced body. Or alternatively, it means having a body withered by the sun, unreplenished by garlands, perfumes, and unguents. Vīra means energetic. Appāhāra means eating moderately due to knowing the right amount in food, or eating sparingly by abstaining from untimely meals. Alolupa means being without greed for the four requisites. Or this is the rejection of craving for taste. Sīhaṃvekacaraṃ nāga means wandering alone like a lion, wandering alone like an elephant. Those who live in groups are negligent, those who wander alone are diligent; therefore, only those who wander alone are taken here. Paveditā means declared, spoken. Etthā means in this name and form. Here, form is taken in terms of the five strands of sense pleasure, and name by mind; but having taken the inseparable states in both, one should connect the aggregate with the five aggregates, etc. Tenth.

Sattivaggo tatiyo.

The Chapter on Steadfastness, the Third.

4. Satullapakāyikavaggo

4. The Chapter on Those Whose Bodies are Full of Steadfastness

1. Sabbhisuttavaṇṇanā
1. The Discourse on the Good

31.Satullapakāyikavaggassa paṭhamesatullapakāyikāti sataṃ dhammaṃ samādānavasena ullapetvā sagge nibbattāti satullapakāyikā. Tatridaṃ vatthu – sambahulā kira samuddavāṇijā nāvāya samuddaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Tesaṃ khittasaravegena gacchantiyā nāvāya sattame divase samuddamajjhe mahantaṃ uppātikaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, mahāūmiyo uṭṭhahitvā nāvaṃ udakassa pūrenti. Nāvāya nimujjamānāya mahājano attano attano devatānaṃ nāmāni gahetvā āyācanādīni karonto paridevi. Tesaṃ majjhe eko puriso – ‘‘atthi nu kho me evarūpe bhaye patiṭṭhā’’ti āvajjento attano parisuddhāni saraṇāni ceva sīlāni ca disvā yogī viya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisīdi. Tamenaṃ itare sabhayakāraṇaṃ pucchiṃsu. So tesaṃ kathesi – ‘‘ambho ahaṃ nāvaṃ abhirūhanadivase bhikkhusaṅghassa dānaṃ datvā saraṇāni ceva sīlāni ca aggahesiṃ, tena me bhayaṃ natthī’’ti. Kiṃ pana sāmi etāni aññesampi vattantīti? Āma vattantīti tena hi amhākampi dethāti. So te manusse sataṃ sataṃ katvā satta koṭṭhāse akāsi, tato pañcasīlāni adāsi. Tesu paṭhamaṃ jaṅghasataṃ gopphakamatte udake ṭhitaṃ aggahesi, dutiyaṃ jāṇumatte, tatiyaṃ kaṭimatte, catutthaṃ nābhimatte, pañcamaṃ thanamatte, chaṭṭhaṃ galappamāṇe, sattamaṃ mukhena loṇodake pavisante aggahesi. So tesaṃ sīlāni datvā – ‘‘aññaṃ tumhākaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ natthi, sīlameva āvajjethā’’ti ugghosesi. Tāni sattapi jaṅghasatāni tattha kālaṃ katvā āsannakāle gahitasīlaṃ nissāya tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbattiṃsu, tesaṃ ghaṭāvaseneva vimānāni nibbattiṃsu. Sabbesaṃ majjhe ācariyassa yojanasatikaṃ suvaṇṇavimānaṃ nibbatti, avasenāni tassa parivārāni hutvā sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ dvādasayojanikaṃ ahosi. Te nibbattakkhaṇeyeva kammaṃ āvajjentā ācariyaṃ nissāya sampattilābhaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘gacchāma tāva, dasabalassa santike amhākaṃ ācariyassa vaṇṇaṃ katheyyāmā’’ti majjhimayāmasamanantare bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu, tā devatā ācariyassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ ekekaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsiṃsu.

31. In the first of the chapter on those whose bodies are full of steadfastness, satullapakāyikā means those who, by taking up the Dhamma of the good, are reborn in heaven, hence they are full of steadfastness. Here is the story: A large number of sea traders set sail on a ship. On the seventh day, as the ship was traveling at the speed of an arrow, a great calamity arose in the middle of the ocean: huge waves arose, filling the ship with water. As the ship was sinking, the people lamented, calling out the names of their respective deities and making supplications. Among them, one man, reflecting, "Is there any refuge for me in such a danger?" saw his own pure refuges and precepts, and sat down cross-legged like a yogi. The others asked him the reason for his fearlessness. He told them, "Friends, on the day I boarded the ship, I gave alms to the Sangha of monks and took the refuges and precepts; therefore, I have no fear." "Sir, are these effective for others as well?" "Yes, they are." "Then give them to us as well." So he divided those people into seven groups of one hundred each, and then gave them the five precepts. The first group of one hundred, standing in water up to their ankles, took them; the second, up to their knees; the third, up to their hips; the fourth, up to their navels; the fifth, up to their chests; the sixth, up to their necks; the seventh, while ingesting salt water with their mouths. After giving them the precepts, he proclaimed, "There is no other refuge for you; reflect on the precepts themselves!" All seven groups, having died there, were reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven due to the precepts taken near the time of death; mansions arose for them like pots. Among them all, a golden mansion one hundred yojanas in extent arose for the teacher; the remaining ones became his retinue, the lowest of them being twelve yojanas in extent. At the moment of their rebirth, reflecting on their deeds and knowing that they had attained this fortune because of their teacher, they approached the Blessed One in the middle watch of the night, thinking, "Let us go and speak of the virtues of our teacher in the presence of the Ten-Powered One." These deities each recited a verse for the purpose of praising their teacher.

sabbhirevāti paṇḍitehi, sappurisehi eva. Ra-kāro padasandhikaro.Samāsethāti saha nisīdeyya. Desanāsīsameva cetaṃ, sabbairiyāpathe sabbhireva saha kubbeyyāti attho.Kubbethāti kareyya.Santhavanti mittasanthavaṃ. Taṇhāsanthavo pana na kenaci saddhiṃ kātabbo, mittasanthavo buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakehi saha kātabbo. Idaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Satanti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ.Saddhammanti pañcasīladasasīlacatusatipaṭṭhānādibhedaṃ saddhammaṃ, idha pana pañcasīlaṃ adhippetaṃ.Seyyo hotīti vaḍḍhi hoti.Na pāpiyoti lāmakaṃ kiñci na hoti.Nāññatoti vālikādīhi telādīni viya aññato andhabālato paññā nāma na labbhati, tilādīhi pana telādīni viya sataṃ dhammaṃ ñatvā paṇḍitameva sevanto bhajanto labhatīti.Sokamajjheti sokavatthūnaṃ sokānugatānaṃ vā sattānaṃ majjhagato na socati bandhulamallasenāpatissa upāsikā viya, pañcannaṃ corasatānaṃ majjhe dhammasenāpatissa saddhivihāriko saṃkiccasāmaṇero viya ca.

sabbhirevā means with the wise, with good persons. The letter "ra" joins the words. Samāsethā means should associate. This refers to the seat of teaching; it means one should do everything in every posture with the good. Kubbethā means should do. Santhava means friendly association. But association based on craving should not be made with anyone; friendly association should be made with Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and disciples of the Buddha. This is said with that in mind. Sata means of the good persons, such as Buddhas. Saddhamma means the true Dhamma, which is divided into the five precepts, the ten precepts, the four foundations of mindfulness, etc.; here, however, the five precepts are intended. Seyyo hotī means there is increase. Na pāpiyo means nothing inferior occurs. Nāññato means from another, like oil from sand, wisdom is not obtained from a blind fool; but like oil from sesame seeds, one obtains it by knowing the Dhamma of the good, attending on and serving the wise. Sokamajjhe means being in the midst of objects of sorrow or beings subject to sorrow, one does not grieve, like the female lay disciple of Bandhula Mallān সেনাপতি, or like the novice Saṃkicca, a co-resident of the Dhamma সেনাপতি in the midst of five hundred thieves.

Ñātimajjhe virocatīti ñātigaṇamajjhe saṃkiccatherassa saddhivihāriko adhimuttakasāmaṇero viya sobhati. So kira therassa bhāgineyyo hoti, atha naṃ thero āha – ‘‘sāmaṇera, mahallakosi jāto, gaccha, vassāni pucchitvā ehi, upasampādessāmi ta’’nti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti theraṃ vanditvā pattacīvaramādāya coraaṭaviyā orabhāge bhaginigāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya cari, taṃ bhaginī disvā vanditvā gehe nisīdāpetvā bhojesi. So katabhattakicco vassāni pucchi. Sā ‘‘ahaṃ na jānāmi, mātā me jānātī’’ti āha. Atha so ‘‘tiṭṭhatha tumhe, ahaṃ mātusantikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti aṭaviṃ otiṇṇo. Tamenaṃ dūratova corapuriso disvā corānaṃ ārocesi. Corā ‘‘sāmaṇero kireko aṭaviṃ otiṇṇo, gacchatha naṃ ānethā’’ti āṇāpetvā ekacce ‘‘mārema na’’nti āhaṃsu, ekacce vissajjemāti. Sāmaṇero cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ sekho sakaraṇīyo, imehi saddhiṃ mantetvā sotthimattānaṃ karissāmī’’ti corajeṭṭhakaṃ āmantetvā, ‘‘upamaṃ te, āvuso, karissāmī’’ti imā gāthā abhāsi –

Ñātimajjhe virocatī means shines among a group of relatives, like the novice Adhimutta, a co-resident of Saṃkicca Thera. It seems he was the nephew of the Thera, who said to him, "Novice, you have become old, go, ask about your years and come back, I will ordain you." He said, "Good," and, paying homage to the Thera, taking his bowl and robes, he went to his sister's village in the outskirts of a robber forest for alms. His sister, seeing him, paid homage, seated him in her house, and fed him. After he had finished his meal, he asked about his years. She said, "I do not know, my mother knows." Then he thought, "Wait here, I will go to my mother," and he entered the forest. A robber saw him from afar and announced it to the robbers. The robbers ordered, "A novice has entered the forest, go and bring him here." Some said, "Let us kill him," others, "Let us release him." The novice thought, "I am a learner, I have duties to perform; having consulted with these, I will secure my safety," and addressing the chief robber, he spoke these verses, "I will give you a simile, friend"—

‘‘Ahu atītamaddhānaṃ, araññasmiṃ brahāvane;

"There was in the past, in a desolate forest,
Ceto felled the stakes, and then killed a hare.

‘‘Sasakañca mataṃ disvā, ubbiggā migapakkhino;

"Seeing the hare dead, the birds and beasts were terrified;
For one night they fled, 'Improper conduct prevails here.'

‘‘Tatheva samaṇaṃ hantvā, adhimuttaṃ akiñcanaṃ;

"Likewise, having killed the ascetic Adhimutta, who owns nothing,
Travelers will not come, wealth will be lost."

‘‘Saccaṃ kho samaṇo āha, adhimutto akiñcano;

"The ascetic speaks the truth, Adhimutta owns nothing;
Travelers will not come, wealth will be lost.

‘‘Sace paṭipathe disvā, nārocessasi kassaci;

"If, having seen him on the road, you do not inform anyone,
Protecting your truthfulness, go, venerable sir, as you please."

So tehi corehi vissajjito gacchanto ñātayopi disvā tesampi na ārocesi. Atha te anuppatte corā gahetvā viheṭhayiṃsu, uraṃ paharitvā paridevamānañcassa mātaraṃ corā etadavocuṃ –

Being released by those robbers, as he was going, even relatives who saw him did not inform them. Then the robbers, arriving, seized and harassed them, and the robbers said this to his mother, who was beating her chest and lamenting—

‘‘Kiṃ te hoti adhimutto, udare vasiko asi;

"What is Adhimutta to you, a resident of your womb?
Asked by me, mother, tell us, how shall we know him?"

‘‘Adhimuttassa ahaṃ mātā, ayañca janako pitā;

"I am Adhimutta's mother, and this is his father;
Sister and brothers too, all here are relatives.

‘‘Akiccakārī adhimutto, yaṃ disvā na nivāraye;

"Adhimutta does what is improper, seeing whom he does not prevent;
This, indeed, is the practice of ascetics, of noble ones who live by the Dhamma.

‘‘Saccavādī adhimutto, yaṃ disvā na nivāraye;

"Adhimutta is truthful, seeing whom he does not prevent;
By the good conduct of Adhimutta, the truthful monk,
May all relatives attain safety, may they go in peace."

Evaṃ te corehi vissajjitā gantvā adhimuttaṃ āhaṃsu –

Thus, being released by those robbers, they went and said to Adhimutta—

‘‘Tava tāta suciṇṇena, saccavādissa bhikkhuno;

"By your good conduct, father, the truthful monk,
All have attained safety, we have returned in peace."

Tepi pañcasatā corā pasādaṃ āpajjitvā adhimuttassa sāmaṇerassa santike pabbajiṃsu. So te ādāya upajjhāyassa santikaṃ gantvā paṭhamaṃ attanā upasampanno pacchā te pañcasate attano antevāsike katvā upasampādesi. Te adhimuttatherassa ovāde ṭhitā sabbe aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Imamatthaṃ gahetvā devatā ‘‘sataṃ saddhammamaññāya ñātimajjhe virocatī’’ti āha.

Those five hundred robbers, having gained faith, went forth in the presence of the novice Adhimutta. Taking them to his preceptor, he first became fully ordained himself, then he made those five hundred his pupils and had them fully ordained. Established in the advice of Adhimutta Thera, all attained the highest fruit of arahantship. Taking this meaning, the deity said, "Knowing the good Dhamma, he shines among his relatives."

Sātatanti satataṃ sukhaṃ vā ciraṃ tiṭṭhantīti vadati.Sabbāsaṃ voti sabbāsaṃ tumhākaṃ.Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena.Sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti, na kevalaṃ seyyova hoti, na ca kevalaṃ paññaṃ labhati, sokamajjhe na socati, ñātimajjhe virocati, sugatiyaṃ nibbattati, ciraṃ sukhaṃ tiṭṭhati, sakalasmā pana vaṭṭadukkhāpi muccatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Sātata means constantly, it says that happiness endures for a long time. Sabbāsaṃ vo means of all of you. Pariyāyenā means by reason. Sabbadukkhā pamuccatī means, not only does he increase, and not only does he gain wisdom, he does not grieve in the midst of sorrow, he shines among his relatives, he is reborn in a happy destination, happiness endures for a long time, but he is also freed from all the suffering of the round. First.

2. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
2. The Discourse on Stinginess

32.Dutiyemaccherā ca pamādā cāti attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇena maccherena ceva sativippavāsalakkhaṇena pamādena ca. Ekacco hi ‘idaṃ me dentassa parikkhayaṃ gamissati, mayhaṃ vā gharamānusakānaṃ vā na bhavissatī’’ti macchariyena dānaṃ na deti. Ekacco khiḍḍādipasutattā ‘dānaṃ dātabba’’nti cittampi na uppādeti.Evaṃ dānaṃ na dīyatīti evametaṃ yasadāyakaṃ sirīdāyakaṃ sampattidāyakaṃ sukhadāyakaṃ dānaṃ nāma na dīyatītiādinā kāraṇaṃ kathesi.Puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānenāti pubbacetanādibhedaṃ puññaṃ icchamānena.Deyyaṃ hoti vijānatāti atthi dānassa phalanti jānantena dātabbamevāti vadati.

32. In the second, maccherā ca pamādā cā means by stinginess, which has the characteristic of concealing one's own attainments, and by negligence, which has the characteristic of loss of mindfulness. For one, out of stinginess, does not give alms, thinking, "If I give this, it will be exhausted; it will not be for me or for the people in my house." Another, being devoted to play, etc., does not even generate the thought, "Alms should be given." Evaṃ dānaṃ na dīyatī means thus this alms-giving, which gives fame, gives prosperity, gives success, gives happiness, is not given; thus he told the reason. Puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānenā means by one desiring merit, which is divided into prior intention, etc. Deyyaṃ hoti vijānatā means knowing that there is a result of giving, one should certainly give.

Tameva bālaṃ phusatīti taṃyeva bālaṃ idhalokaparalokesu jighacchā ca pipāsā ca phusati anubandhati na vijahati.Tasmāti yasmā tameva phusati, tasmā.Vineyya maccheranti maccheramalaṃ vinetvā.Dajjā dānaṃ malābhibhūti malābhibhū hutvā taṃ maccheramalaṃ abhibhavitvā dānaṃ dadeyya.

Tameva bālaṃ phusatī means hunger and thirst touch, follow, and do not leave that fool in this world and the next. Tasmā means because it touches that same one, therefore. Vineyya macchera means having removed the stain of stinginess. Dajjā dānaṃ malābhibhū means having overcome the stain, having overcome that stain of stinginess, one should give alms.

Te matesu na mīyantīti adānasīlatāya maraṇena matesu na mīyanti. Yathā hi mato samparivāretvā ṭhapite bahumhipi annapānādimhi ‘‘idaṃ imassa hotu, idaṃ imassā’’ti uṭṭhahitvā saṃvibhāgaṃ na karoti, evaṃ adānasīlopīti matakassa ca adānasīlassa ca bhogā samasamā nāma honti. Tena dānasīlā evarūpesu matesu na mīyantīti attho.Panthānaṃva saha vajaṃ, appasmiṃ ye pavecchantīti yathā addhānaṃ kantāramaggaṃ saha vajantā pathikā saha vajantānaṃ pathikānaṃ appasmiṃ pātheyye saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā pavecchanti dadantiyeva, evamevaṃ ye pana anamataggaṃ saṃsārakantāraṃ saha vajantā saha vajantānaṃ appasmimpi deyyadhamme saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā dadantiyeva, te matesu na mīyanti.

Te matesu na mīyantī means they do not diminish among the dead due to non-giving. Just as a dead person, even with much food and drink arranged around him, does not get up and share it, saying, "Let this be for him, let this be for her," so too is the non-giver; the wealth of the dead person and the non-giver are equal. Therefore, those who are generous do not diminish in such deaths. Panthānaṃva saha vajaṃ, appasmiṃ ye pavecchantī means just as travelers going together on a long, arduous road share and give from their meager provisions to the travelers going with them, so too, those who, while traveling together through the beginningless Saṃsāra, share and give even from meager things that should be given to those traveling with them, do not diminish among the dead.

Esa dhammo sanantanoti esa porāṇako dhammo, sanantanānaṃ vā paṇḍitānaṃ esa dhammoti.Appasmeketi appasmiṃ deyyadhamme eke.Pavecchantīti dadanti.Bahuneke na dicchareti bahunāpi bhogena samannāgatā ekacce na dadanti.Sahassena samaṃ mitāti sahassena saddhiṃ mitā, sahassa dānasadisā hoti.

Esa dhammo sanantano means this is an ancient Dhamma, or this is the Dhamma of the eternal wise ones. Appasmeke means some give from meager things to be given. Pavecchantī means they give. Bahuneke na dicchare means some, even though endowed with much wealth, do not give. Sahassena samaṃ mitā means measured with a thousand, it is equal to a thousand gifts.

Duranvayoti duranugamano, duppūroti attho.Dhammaṃ careti dasakusalakammapathadhammaṃ carati.Yopi samuñjakañcareti yo api khalamaṇḍalādisodhanapalālapoṭhanādivasena samuñjakañcarati.Dārañca posanti dārañca posanto.Dadaṃ appakasminti appakasmiṃ paṇṇasākamattasmimpi saṃvibhāgaṃ katvā dadantova so dhammaṃ carati.Sataṃ sahassānanti sahassaṃ sahassaṃ katvā gaṇitānaṃ purisānaṃ sataṃ, satasahassanti attho.Sahassayāginanti bhikkhusahassassa vā yāgo kahāpaṇasahassena vā nibbattito yāgopi sahassayāgo. So etesaṃ atthīti sahassayāgino, tesaṃ sahassayāginaṃ. Etena dasannaṃ vā bhikkhukoṭīnaṃ dasannaṃ vā kahāpaṇakoṭīnaṃ piṇḍapāto dassito hoti. Ye ettakaṃ dadanti, te kalampi nagghanti tathāvidhassāti āha. Yvāyaṃ samuñjakaṃ carantopi dhammaṃ carati, dāraṃ posentopi, appakasmiṃ dadantopi, tathāvidhassa ete sahassayāgino kalampi nagghanti. Yaṃ tena daliddena ekapaṭivīsakamattampi salākabhattamattampi vā dinnaṃ, tassa dānassa sabbesampi tesaṃ dānaṃ kalaṃ nagghatīti.Kalaṃnāma soḷasabhāgopi satabhāgopi sahassabhāgopi. Idha satabhāgo gahito. Yaṃ tena dānaṃ dinnaṃ, tasmiṃ satadhā vibhatte itaresaṃ dasakoṭisahassadānaṃ tato ekakoṭṭhāsampi nagghatīti āha.

Duranvayo means difficult to follow, difficult to fulfill. Dhammaṃ care means he lives the Dhamma of the ten wholesome courses of action. Yopi samuñjakañcare means even one who sweeps, sweeping in terms of sweeping the threshing floor, etc., scattering the chaff. Dārañca posa means and supports a wife. Dadaṃ appakasmi means even in a very small amount, dividing even a handful of greens, he lives the Dhamma. Sataṃ sahassāna means a hundred of thousands, having counted a thousand a thousand times, a hundred, a hundred thousand is the meaning. Sahassayāgina means a sacrifice for a thousand monks, or a sacrifice made with a thousand coins is also a thousand sacrifices. Those who have that are sahassayāgino, of those who are sahassayāgino. By this, the offering of alms to ten koṭis of monks or to the value of ten koṭis of coins is shown. Those who give so much, they are not worth a fraction of such a one, he says. Even this one who sweeps lives the Dhamma, and supporting a wife, even giving from a small amount, these sahassayāgino are not worth a fraction of such a one. The alms given by that poor man, even just a plateful or a ticket meal, all their giving is not worth a fraction of that gift. Kalaṃ means a sixteenth part, a hundredth part, or a thousandth part. Here, a hundredth part is taken. The gift given by him, dividing it into a hundred parts, the ten koṭis of thousands of gifts of the others are not worth even one part of that, he says.

kenāti kena kāraṇena.Mahaggatoti mahattaṃ gato, vipulassetaṃ vevacanaṃ.Samena dinnassāti samena dinnassa dānassa. Athassā bhagavā dānaṃ vibhajitvā dassentodadanti heketiādimāha. Tatthavisame niviṭṭhāti visame kāyavacīmanokamme patiṭṭhitā hutvā.Chetvāti pothetvā.Vadhitvāti māretvā.Socayitvāti paraṃ sokasamappitaṃ katvā.Assumukhāti assumukhasammissā. Paraṃ rodāpetvā dinnadānañhi assumukhadānanti vuccati.Sadaṇḍāti daṇḍena tajjetvā paharitvā dinnadakkhiṇā sadaṇḍāti vuccati.Evanti nāhaṃ sammāsambuddhatāya mahādānaṃ gahetvā appaphalaṃ nāma kātuṃ sakkomi parittakadānaṃ vā mahapphalaṃ nāma. Idaṃ pana mahādānaṃ attano uppattiyā aparisuddhatāya evaṃ appaphalaṃ nāma hoti, itaraṃ parittadānaṃ attano uppattiyā parisuddhatāya evaṃ mahapphalaṃ nāmāti imamatthaṃ dassentoevantiādimāhāti. Dutiyaṃ.

kenāti: By what reason? Mahaggatoti: Gone to greatness; this is a synonym for vastness. Samena dinnassāti: Of a gift given evenly. Then, the Blessed One, showing how he distributes the gift, said beginning with "dadanti heke." There, visame niviṭṭhāti: Having become established in uneven bodily, verbal, and mental action. Chetvāti: Having struck. Vadhitvāti: Having killed. Socayitvāti: Having made another endowed with sorrow. Assumukhāti: Mixed with tears. Indeed, a gift given after making another weep is called a tearful gift. Sadaṇḍāti: A donation given after threatening and striking with a stick is called sadaṇḍā. Evanti: Indeed, I am not able to take a great gift and make it of little fruit, in accordance with perfect enlightenment, nor a small gift of great fruit. But showing that this great gift becomes of little fruit because of the impurity of its origin, and that the other small gift becomes of great fruit because of the purity of its origin, he said beginning with "evanti." The second.

3. Sādhusuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sādhusuttavaṇṇanā

33.Tatiyeudānaṃ udānesīti udāhāraṃ udāhari. Yathā hi yaṃ telaṃ mānaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti vissanditvā gacchati, taṃ avasesakoti vuccati. Yañca jalaṃ taḷākaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, ajjhottharitvā gacchati, taṃ oghoti vuccati, evamevaṃ yaṃ pītivacanaṃ hadayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, adhikaṃ hutvā anto asaṇṭhahitvā bahi nikkhamati, taṃudānanti vuccati. Evarūpaṃ pītimayaṃ vacanaṃ nicchāresīti attho.Saddhāyapi sāhu dānanti kammañca kammaphalañca saddahitvāpi dinnadānaṃ sāhu laddhakaṃ bhaddakameva.Āhūti kathenti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ubhayaṃ samaṃ nāma hotīti? Jīvitabhīruko hi yujjhituṃ na sakkoti, khayabhīruko dātuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Jīvitañca rakkhissāmi yujjhissāmi cā’’ti hi vadanto na yujjhati. Jīvite pana ālayaṃ vissajjetvā, ‘‘chejjaṃ vā hotu maraṇaṃ vā, gaṇhissāmetaṃ issariya’’nti ussahantova yujjhati. ‘‘Bhoge ca rakkhissāmi, dānañca dassāmī’’ti vadanto na dadāti. Bhogesu pana ālayaṃ vissajjetvā mahādānaṃ dassāmīti ussahantova deti. Evaṃ dānañca yuddhañca samaṃ hoti. Kiñca bhiyyo?Appāpi santā bahuke jinantīti yathā ca yuddhe appakāpi vīrapurisā bahuke bhīrupurise jinanti, evaṃ saddhādisampanno appakampi dānaṃ dadanto bahumaccheraṃ maddati, bahuñca dānavipākaṃ adhigacchati. Evampi dānañca yuddhañca samānaṃ. Tenevāha –

33.In the third, udānaṃ udānesīti: He uttered an exclamation. Just as oil that cannot be contained in a measure flows away, that is called avasesa; and just as water that cannot be contained in a lake overflows, that is called ogha; in the same way, speech of joy that the heart cannot contain, becoming excessive and not staying inside, comes out, that is called udāna. The meaning is that he uttered such joyous words. Saddhāyapi sāhu dānanti: Giving a gift after having faith in both action and the fruit of action, that gift is indeed well-obtained, auspicious. Āhūti: They say. But how can these two be equal? One who fears for his life cannot fight; one who fears loss cannot give. For one who says, "I will protect my life and I will fight," does not fight. But having abandoned attachment to life, one who strives, saying, "Let it be cut off or let it be death, I will seize this sovereignty," fights. One who says, "I will protect my wealth and I will give a gift," does not give. But having abandoned attachment to wealth, one who strives, saying, "I will give a great gift," gives. Thus, giving and fighting are equal. Moreover, what else? Appāpi santā bahuke jinantīti: Just as in battle, even a few brave men conquer many cowardly men, so too, one who gives even a small gift endowed with faith etc., crushes much stinginess and obtains much fruit of giving. Thus also, giving and fighting are equal. Therefore, he said:

‘‘Appampi ce saddahāno dadāti,

‘‘Appampi ce saddahāno dadāti,
Teneva so hoti sukhī paratthā’’ti.

Imassa ca panatthassa pakāsanatthaṃ ekasāṭakabrāhmaṇavatthu ca aṅkuravatthu ca vitthāretabbaṃ.

And to reveal the meaning of this, the story of the brahmin with one cloak and the story of Aṅkura should be elaborated.

Dhammaladdhassāti dhammena samena laddhassa bhogassa dhammaladdhassa ca puggalassa. Ettha puggalo laddhadhammo nāma adhigatadhammo ariyapuggalo. Iti yaṃ dhammaladdhassa bhogassa dānaṃ dhammaladdhassa ariyapuggalassa dīyati, tampi sādhūti attho.Yo dhammaladdhassāti imasmimpi gāthāpade ayameva attho.Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatassāti uṭṭhānena ca vīriyena ca adhigatassa bhogassa.Vetaraṇinti desanāsīsamattametaṃ. Yamassa pana vetaraṇimpi sañjīvakāḷasuttādayopi ekatiṃsamahānirayepi sabbasova atikkamitvāti attho.

Dhammaladdhassāti: Of wealth rightly obtained by Dhamma, and of a person rightly obtained by Dhamma. Here, a person called laddhadhammo (obtained by Dhamma) is an ariyapuggala (noble person) who has attained the Dhamma. Thus, the meaning is that a gift given from wealth rightly obtained to a noble person rightly obtained is also good. Yo dhammaladdhassāti: In this verse-foot as well, this is the meaning. Uṭṭhānavīriyādhigatassāti: Of wealth obtained by effort and energy. Vetaraṇinti: This is merely the pinnacle of the teaching. But it means having transgressed even Vetaraṇi of Yama, Sañjīva, Kāḷasutta, and all the thirty-one great hells.

Viceyya dānanti vicinitvā dinnadānaṃ. Tattha dve vicinanā dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ dakkhiṇeyyavicinanañca. Tesu lāmakalāmake paccaye apanetvā paṇītapaṇīte vicinitvā tesaṃ dānaṃ dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ nāma. Vipannasīle ito bahiddhā pañcanavutipāsaṇḍabhede vā dakkhiṇeyye pahāya sīlādiguṇasampannānaṃ sāsane pabbajitānaṃ dānaṃ dakkhiṇeyyavicinanaṃ nāma. Evaṃ dvīhākārehi viceyya dānaṃ.Sugatappasatthanti sugatena vaṇṇitaṃ. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyavicinanaṃ dassentoye dakkhiṇeyyātiādimāha.Bījāni vuttāni yathāti iminā pana dakkhiṇāvicinanaṃ āha. Avipannabījasadisā hi vicinitvā gahitā paṇītapaṇītā deyyadhammāti.

Viceyya dānanti: A gift given after examining. There are two kinds of examination: examination of the offering and examination of those worthy of offerings. Among these, after removing inferior items and examining choice items, giving them as a gift is called examination of the offering. Rejecting those of ruined virtue or the ninety-five sects outside of this, giving to those who have gone forth into the Dispensation, endowed with qualities of virtue etc., is called examination of those worthy of offerings. Thus, a gift given after examining in these two ways is Sugatappasatthanti: Praised by the Sugata. There, showing the examination of those worthy of offerings, he said beginning with ye dakkhiṇeyyāti. With bījāni vuttāni yathāti, he spoke of the examination of the offering. For the choice items of offerings, having been examined and taken, are like seeds that are not spoiled.

Pāṇesupi sādhu saṃyamoti pāṇesu saṃyatabhāvopi bhaddako. Ayaṃ devatā itarāhi kathitaṃ dānānisaṃsaṃ atikkamitvā sīlānisaṃsaṃ kathetumāraddhā.Aheṭhayaṃ caranti avihiṃsanto caramāno.Parūpavādāti parassa upavādabhayena.Bhayāti upavādabhayā.Dānā ca kho dhammapadaṃva seyyoti dānato nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ dhammapadameva seyyo.Pubbe ca hi pubbatare ca santoti pubbe ca kassapabuddhādikāle pubbatare ca koṇāgamanabuddhādikāle, sabbepi vā ete pubbe ca pubbatare ca santo nāmāti. Tatiyaṃ.

Pāṇesupi sādhu saṃyamoti: Restraint towards living beings is also auspicious. This deity, having surpassed the benefits of giving spoken by the others, began to speak of the benefits of virtue. Aheṭhayaṃ caranti: One who goes about without harming. Parūpavādāti: For fear of others' reproach. Bhayāti: Because of fear of reproach. Dānā ca kho dhammapadaṃva seyyoti: But indeed, the state of Dhamma, which is Nibbāna, is better than giving. Pubbe ca hi pubbatare ca santoti: Those who were at the time of the former Kassapa Buddha and at the time of the more former Koṇāgamana Buddha, or all of these are called those who were at the former and more former times. The third.

4. Nasantisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Nasantisuttavaṇṇanā

34.Catutthekamanīyānīti rūpādīni iṭṭhārammaṇāni.Apunāgamanaṃ anāgantā puriso maccudheyyāti tebhūmakavaṭṭasaṅkhātā maccudheyyā apunāgamanasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ anāgantā. Nibbānañhi sattā na punāgacchanti, tasmā taṃ apunāgamananti vuccati. Taṃ kāmesu baddho ca pamatto ca anāgantā nāma hoti, so taṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā evamāha.Chandajanti taṇhāchandato jātaṃ.Aghanti pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Chandavinayā aghavinayoti taṇhāvinayena pañcakkhandhavinayo.Aghavinayā dukkhavinayoti pañcakkhandhavinayena vaṭṭadukkhaṃ vinītameva hoti.Citrānīti ārammaṇacittāni.Saṅkapparāgoti saṅkappitarāgo. Evamettha vatthukāmaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kilesakāmo kāmoti vutto. Ayaṃ panatthopasūrasuttena(su. ni. 830 ādayo) vibhāvetabbo. Pasūraparibbājako hi therena ‘‘saṅkapparāgo purisassa kāmo’’ti vutte –

34.In the fourth, kamanīyānīti: Forms etc., desirable objects. Apunāgamanaṃ anāgantā puriso maccudheyyāti: One who does not go to Nibbāna, which is called apunāgamana (non-return), from maccudheyyā (death's domain), which is the triple world. For beings do not return to Nibbāna; therefore, it is called apunāgamana. One who is attached to sensual pleasures and is heedless does not go to that; he is not able to attain that; therefore, he said thus. Chandajanti: Born of the desire of craving. Aghanti: The suffering of the five aggregates. The second word is a synonym of that same. Chandavinayā aghavinayoti: By the subduing of craving, the subduing of the five aggregates. Aghavinayā dukkhavinayoti: By the subduing of the five aggregates, suffering of the round is indeed subdued. Citrānīti: Mind-objects. Saṅkapparāgoti: Imagined lust. Thus, here, having rejected material desire, defilement-desire is called desire. This meaning should be elucidated by the Pasūrasutta(su. ni. 830 ff). For when the wanderer Pasūra was told by the Elder, "Imagined lust is a person's desire" –

‘‘Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke,

‘‘Na te kāmā yāni citrāni loke,
Saṅkapparāgañca vadesi kāmaṃ;
Saṅkappayaṃ akusale vitakke,
Bhikkhūpi te hehinti kāmabhogī’’ti. –

Āha. Atha naṃ thero avoca –

He said. Then the Elder said to him –

‘‘Te ce kāmā yāni citrāni loke,

‘‘Te ce kāmā yāni citrāni loke,
Saṅkapparāgaṃ na vadesi kāmaṃ;
Passanto rūpāni manoramāni,
Satthāpi te hehiti kāmabhogī.

Suṇanto saddāni, ghāyanto gandhāni;

Suṇanto saddāni, ghāyanto gandhāni;
Sāyanto rasāni, phusanto phassāni manoramāni;
Satthāpi te hehiti kāmabhogī’’ti.

Athettha dhīrāti atha etesu ārammaṇesu paṇḍitā chandarāgaṃ vinayanti.Saṃyojanaṃ sabbanti dasavidhampi saṃyojanaṃ.Akiñcananti rāgakiñcanādivirahitaṃ.Nānupatanti dukkhāti vaṭṭadukkhā pana tassa upari na patanti.Iccāyasmāmogharājāti, ‘‘pahāsi saṅkha’’nti gāthaṃ sutvā tassaṃ parisati anusandhikusalo mogharājā nāma thero ‘‘imissā gāthāya attho na yathānusandhiṃ gato’’ti cintetvā yathānusandhiṃ ghaṭento evamāha. Tatthaidha vā huraṃ vāti idhaloke vā paraloke vā.Naruttamaṃ atthacaraṃ narānanti kiñcāpi sabbe khīṇāsavā naruttamā ceva atthacarā ca narānaṃ, thero pana dasabalaṃ sandhāyevamāha.Ye taṃ namassanti pasaṃsiyā teti yadi tathāvimuttaṃ devamanussā namassanti, atha ye taṃ bhagavantaṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā anupaṭipattiyā vā namassanti, te kiṃ pasaṃsiyā, udāhu apasaṃsiyāti.Bhikkhūtimogharājattheraṃ ālapati.Aññāya dhammanti catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvā.Saṅgātigā tepi bhavantīti ye taṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā anupaṭipattiyā vā namassanti. Te catusaccadhammaṃ aññāya vicikicchaṃ pahāya saṅgātigāpi honti, pasaṃsiyāpi hontīti. Catutthaṃ.

Athettha dhīrāti: Then, in these objects, the wise subdue lust and passion. Saṃyojanaṃ sabbanti: All ten kinds of fetters. Akiñcananti: Without any possessions of lust etc. Nānupatanti dukkhāti: But suffering of the round does not befall him. Iccāyasmāmogharājāti: "Having abandoned reckoning," after hearing this verse, Moggharājā by name, a Thera skilled in connecting, in that assembly, thinking "the meaning of this verse has not gone in accordance with connection," combining it in accordance with connection, said thus. There, idha vā huraṃ vāti: In this world or in the next world. Naruttamaṃ atthacaraṃ narānanti: Although all the arahants are the best of men and those who fare for the benefit of men, the Elder spoke thus having in mind the one with the ten powers. Ye taṃ namassanti pasaṃsiyā teti: If gods and humans worship one thus liberated, then are those who worship that Blessed One with body or speech or by improper practice praiseworthy or blameworthy? Bhikkhūti: He addresses the Thera Moggharājā. Aññāya dhammanti: Having known the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths. Saṅgātigā tepi bhavantīti: Those who worship him with body or speech or by improper practice, having known the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths, having abandoned doubt, they too become those who have transcended attachment and are praiseworthy. The fourth.

5. Ujjhānasaññisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Ujjhānasaññisuttavaṇṇanā

35.Pañcameujjhānasaññikāti ujjhānasaññī devaloko nāma pāṭiyekko natthi, imā pana devatā tathāgatassa catupaccayaparibhogaṃ nissāya ujjhāyamānā āgatā. Tāsaṃ kira evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo bhikkhūnaṃ paṃsukūlacīvara-piṇḍiyālopa-rukkhamūlasenāsanapūtimuttabhesajjehi santosasseva pariyantakāritaṃ vaṇṇeti, sayaṃ pana pattuṇṇadukūla khomādīni paṇītacīvarāni dhāreti, rājārahaṃ uttamaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjati, devavimānakappāya gandhakuṭiyā varasayane sayati, sappinavanītādīni bhesajjāni paṭisevati, divasaṃ mahājanassa dhammaṃ deseti, vacanamassa aññato gacchati, kiriyā aññato’’ti ujjhāyamānā āgamiṃsu. Tena tāsaṃ dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ‘‘ujjhānasaññikā’’ti nāmaṃ gahitaṃ.

35.In the fifth, ujjhānasaññikāti: There is no particular deva-world named Ujjhānasaññī (those having the perception of murmuring); but these deities, relying on the Tathāgata's use of the four requisites, came murmuring. It seems they thought thus: "The ascetic Gotama praises limitation only to those monks content with rag-robes, morsel-food, dwelling at the foot of a tree, and medicine of stale urine; but he himself wears fine robes of silk and linen etc., eats the best food fit for a king, lies on an excellent couch in a perfumed chamber like a deva-mansion, partakes of medicines of ghee and butter etc., teaches Dhamma to a great crowd by day; his word goes one way, his action another," murmuring thus, they came. Therefore, by the Elders who compiled the Dhamma, the name "Ujjhānasaññikā" was taken.

Aññathā santanti aññenākārena bhūtaṃ.Nikaccāti nikatiyā vañcanāya, vañcetvāti attho.Kitavassevāti kitavo vuccati sākuṇiko. So hi agumbova samāno sākhapaṇṇādipaṭicchādanena gumbavaṇṇaṃ dassetvā upagate moratittirādayo sakuṇe māretvā dārabharaṇaṃ karoti. Iti tassa kitavassa imāya vañcanāya evaṃ vañcetvā sakuṇamaṃsabhojanaṃ viya kuhakassāpi paṃsukūlena attānaṃ paṭicchādetvā kathāchekatāya mahājanaṃ vañcetvā khādamānassa vicarato.Bhuttaṃ theyyena tassa tanti sabbopi tassa catupaccayaparibhogo theyyena paribhutto nāma hotīti devatā bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati.Parijānanti paṇḍitāti ayaṃ kārako vā akārako vāti paṇḍitā jānanti. Iti tā devatā ‘‘tathāgatāpi mayameva paṇḍitā’’ti maññamānā evamāhaṃsu.

Aññathā santanti: Being in another manner. Nikaccāti: By deception, fraud; the meaning is having deceived. Kitavassevāti: Kitava (deceiver) is said of a fowler. For just as he, being as if without a thicket, shows the appearance of a thicket by covering with branches and leaves, killing birds such as peacocks and partridges that have approached, and makes a living, so too, like the eating of bird meat by that deceiver with this deception, of one concealing himself with rag-robes and cheating the great crowd by cleverness of speech and wandering about eating. Bhuttaṃ theyyena tassa tanti: All of his use of the four requisites is indeed used by theft, so the deities speak regarding the Blessed One. Parijānanti paṇḍitāti: The wise know whether this one is a doer or a non-doer. So these deities, thinking "Tathāgatas are also wise like ourselves," spoke thus.

nayidantiādimāha. Tatthayāyaṃ paṭipadā daḷhāti ayaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipadā daḷhā thirā. Yāya paṭipadāya dhīrā paṇḍitā ārammaṇūpanijjhānena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena cāti dvīhi jhānehi jhāyino mārabandhanā pamuccanti, taṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāsitamattena vā savanamattena vā okkamituṃ paṭipajjituṃ na sakkāti attho.Na ve dhīrā pakubbantīti dhīrā paṇḍitā viditvā lokapariyāyaṃ saṅkhāralokassa udayabbayaṃ ñatvā catusaccadhammañca aññāya kilesanibbānena nibbutā loke visattikaṃ tiṇṇā evaṃ na kubbanti, mayaṃ evarūpāni na kathemāti attho.

nayidanti etc. There, yāyaṃ paṭipadā daḷhāti: This practice in accordance with the Dhamma is firm, steadfast. The meaning is that the path by which the wise, meditators meditating with two meditations, meditation on objects and meditation on characteristics, are released from Māra's bondage, that path cannot be entered and practiced merely by speaking or merely by hearing. Na ve dhīrā pakubbantīti: The wise, having known the cycle of the world, having known the rise and fall of the world of formations, and having known the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths, having extinguished themselves with defilement-Nibbāna, having crossed over attachment in the world, indeed do not do thus; the meaning is that we do not speak of such things.

Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvāti ‘‘ayuttaṃ amhehi kataṃ, akārakameva mayaṃ kārakavādena samudācarimhā’’ti lajjamānā mahābrahmani viya bhagavati gāravaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā aggikkhandhaṃ viya bhagavantaṃ durāsadaṃ katvā passamānā ākāsato otaritvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvāti attho.Accayoti aparādho.No, bhante, accāgamāti amhe atikkamma abhibhavitvā pavatto.Āsādetabbanti ghaṭṭayitabbaṃ. Tā kira devatā bhagavantaṃ kāyena vācāyāti dvīhipi ghaṭṭayiṃsu. Tathāgataṃ avanditvā ākāse patiṭṭhamānā kāyena ghaṭṭayiṃsu, kitavopamaṃ āharitvā nānappakārakaṃ asabbhivādaṃ vadamānā vācāya ghaṭṭayiṃsu. Tasmā āsādetabbaṃ amaññimhāti āhaṃsu.Paṭiggaṇhātūti khamatu.Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti anāgate saṃvaraṇatthāya, puna evarūpassa aparādhassa dosassa akaraṇatthāya.

Pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvāti: "We have done wrongly; indeed, we have conducted ourselves with non-doing as if it were doing," being ashamed, having established respect towards the Blessed One like Mahābrahmā, seeing the Blessed One as difficult to approach, like a mass of fire, having descended from the sky, standing on the earth, is the meaning. Accayoti: Offense. No, bhante, accāgamāti: It has proceeded having transgressed and overwhelmed us. Āsādetabbanti: To be touched. It seems those deities touched the Blessed One in two ways, with body and with speech. Without venerating the Tathāgata, standing in the sky, they touched with their bodies; bringing the simile of the deceiver, speaking various kinds of unrighteous speech, they touched with their speech. Therefore, they said, "We considered it to be touched." Paṭiggaṇhātūti: May he forgive. Āyatiṃ saṃvarāyāti: For restraint in the future, for the non-doing of such an offense and fault again.

Sitaṃpātvākāsīti aggadante dassento pahaṭṭhākāraṃ dassesi. Kasmā? Tā kira devatā na sabhāvena khamāpenti, lokiyamahājanañca sadevake loke aggapuggalaṃ tathāgatañca ekasadisaṃ karonti. Atha bhagavā ‘‘parato kathāya uppannāya buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā pacchā khamissāmī’’ti sitaṃ pātvākāsi.Bhiyyoso mattāyāti atirekappamāṇena.Imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsīti kupito esa amhākanti maññamānā abhāsi.

Sitaṃpātvākāsīti: Showing his front teeth, he showed a joyful appearance. Why? It seems those deities do not ask for forgiveness out of their own nature, and they make the foremost person in the world with its devas, the Tathāgata, like one and the same with ordinary people. Then the Blessed One, thinking, "After revealing the Buddha-power when a talk arises from another, then I will forgive," showed a smile. Bhiyyoso mattāyāti: With an excessive measure. Imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsīti: Thinking "This one is angry with us," he spoke.

Na paṭigaṇhatīti na khamati nādhivāseti.Kopantaroti abbhantare uppannakopo.Dosagarūti dosaṃ garuṃ katvā ādāya viharanto.Sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatīti so evarūpo gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya taṃ veraṃ attani paṭimuñcati ṭhapeti, na paṭinissajjatīti attho.Accayo ce na vijjethāti sace accāyikakammaṃ na bhaveyya.No cidhāpagataṃ siyāti yadi aparādho nāma na bhāveyya.Kenīdha kusalo siyāti yadi verāni na sammeyyuṃ, kena kāraṇena kusalo bhaveyya.

Na paṭigaṇhatīti: Does not accept, does not consent. Kopantaroti: Anger arisen within. Dosagarūti: Living taking anger seriously. Sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatīti: Such a one, like one untying a knot, fastens and establishes that enmity in himself; he does not relinquish it, is the meaning. Accayo ce na vijjethāti: If there were no transgression. No cidhāpagataṃ siyāti: If an offense were not to be cultivated. Kenīdha kusalo siyāti: If enmities were not calmed, by what reason would one be skillful?

Kassaccayāti gāthāya kassa atikkamo natthi? Kassa aparādho natthi? Ko sammohaṃ nāpajjati? Ko niccameva paṇḍito nāmāti attho? Imaṃ kira gāthaṃ bhaṇāpanatthaṃ bhagavato sitapātukammaṃ. Tasmā idāni devatānaṃ buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā khamissāmītitathāgatassa buddhassātiādimāha. Tatthatathāgatassāti tathā āgatoti evamādīhi kāraṇehi tathāgatassa.Buddhassāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhattādīhi kāraṇehi vimokkhantikapaṇṇattivasena evaṃ laddhanāmassa.Accayaṃ desayantīnanti yaṃ vuttaṃ tumhehi ‘‘accayaṃ desayantīnaṃ…pe… sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatī’’ti, taṃ sādhu vuttaṃ, ahaṃ pana taṃ veraṃ nābhinandāmi na patthayāmīti attho.Paṭiggaṇhāmi voccayanti tumhākaṃ aparādhaṃ khamāmīti. Pañcamaṃ.

Kassaccayāti In the verse "kassa accayā," whose transgression is absent? Whose offense is absent? Who does not fall into delusion? Who is always truly wise? This verse, it seems, caused the Blessed One to smile. Therefore, now revealing the Buddha's power to the deities, and seeking forgiveness, he spoke the verse beginning with tathāgatassa buddhassā. Herein, tathāgatassā refers to the Tathāgata due to reasons such as "tathā āgato" (thus come). Buddhassā refers to the one who has attained enlightenment of the four noble truths, thus having attained the name, in the manner of the exposition ending in liberation. Accayaṃ desayantīnanti As for what you said, "accayaṃ desayantīnaṃ…pe… sa veraṃ paṭimuñcatī" (those who reveal transgressions…release hatred), that is well said, but I do not rejoice in nor desire that hatred.Paṭiggaṇhāmi voccayanti I forgive your offense. Fifth.

6. Saddhāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Saddhāsuttavaṇṇanā

36.Chaṭṭhesaddhā dutiyā purisassa hotīti purisassa devaloke manussaloke ceva nibbānañca gacchantassa saddhā dutiyā hoti, sahāyakiccaṃ sādheti.No ce assaddhiyaṃ avatiṭṭhatīti yadi assaddhiyaṃ na tiṭṭhati.Yasoti parivāro.Kittīti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ.Tatvassa hotīti tato assa hoti.Nānupatanti saṅgāti rāgasaṅgādayo pañca saṅgā na anupatanti.Pamādamanuyuñjantīti ye pamādaṃ karonti nibbattenti, te taṃ anuyuñjanti nāma.Dhanaṃ seṭṭhaṃva rakkhatīti muttāmaṇisārādiuttamadhanaṃ viya rakkhati.Jhāyantoti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena ca ārammaṇūpanijjhānena ca jhāyanto. Tatthalakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃnāma vipassanāmaggaphalāni. Vipassanā hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Maggo vipassanāya āgatakiccaṃ sādhetīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Phalaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo pana kasiṇārammaṇassa upanijjhāyanatoārammaṇūpanijjhānanti veditabbā.Paramaṃnāma arahattasukhaṃ adhippetanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

36. In the sixth, saddhā dutiyā purisassa hotīti faith is a person's second (companion), for a person going to the heavens, the human world, and also to Nibbāna; faith accomplishes the function of a companion. No ce assaddhiyaṃ avatiṭṭhatīti if he does not stand in faithlessness. Yasoti retinue. Kittīti fame, the recounting of virtues. Tatvassa hotīti from that, it belongs to him. Nānupatanti saṅgāti the five fetters, such as the fetter of lust, do not follow after him. Pamādamanuyuñjantīti those who practice and cultivate negligence, they are following that. Dhanaṃ seṭṭhaṃva rakkhatīti he protects it like the finest wealth, such as pearls, gems, or essence. Jhāyantoti meditating with both lakkhaṇūpanijjhāna and ārammaṇūpanijjhāna. Here, lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ means the insight path and its fruits. For insight contemplates the three characteristics, thus it is lakkhaṇūpanijjhāna. The path accomplishes the function that has come with insight, thus it is lakkhaṇūpanijjhāna. The fruit contemplates the characteristic of the cessation of suffering, thus it is lakkhaṇūpanijjhāna. However, the eight attainments are known as ārammaṇūpanijjhāna because of contemplating the kasiṇa object. Paramaṃnāma means he intends the supreme bliss of Arahantship. Sixth.

7. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Samayasuttavaṇṇanā

37.Sattamesakkesūti ‘‘sakyā vata, bho kumārā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.267) udānaṃ paṭicca sakkāti laddhanāmānaṃ rājakumārānaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado rūḷhīsaddena sakkāti vuccati. Tasmiṃ sakkesu janapade.Mahāvaneti sayaṃjāte aropime himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhe mahati vane.Sabbeheva arahantehīti imaṃ suttaṃ kathitadivaseyeva pattaarahantehi.

37. In the seventh, sakkesūti Upon the utterance, "Sakyā vata, bho kumārā" (Indeed, Sakyan princes!), the abode of the princes who obtained the name Sakya is known as Sakka through established usage, even though it is one district. In that Sakyan district. Mahāvaneti in the great forest, self-grown, unplanted, connected with the Himalayas. Sabbeheva arahantehīti with all the arahants who attained arahantship on the very day this sutta was spoken.

Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – sākiyakoliyā hi kira kapilavatthunagarassa ca koliyanagarassa ca antare rohiṇiṃ nāma nadiṃ ekeneva āvaraṇena bandhāpetvā sassāni kārenti. Atha jeṭṭhamūlamāse sassesu milāyantesu ubhayanagaravāsīnampi kammakārā sannipatiṃsu. Tattha koliyanagaravāsino āhaṃsu – ‘‘idaṃ udakaṃ ubhayato āhariyamānaṃ na tumhākaṃ, na amhākaṃ pahossati, amhākaṃ pana sassaṃ ekena udakeneva nipphajjissati, idaṃ udakaṃ amhākaṃ dethā’’ti. Kapilavatthuvāsino āhaṃsu – ‘‘tumhesu koṭṭhe pūretvā ṭhitesu mayaṃ rattasuvaṇṇanīlamaṇikāḷakahāpaṇe ca gahetvā pacchipasibbakādihatthā na sakkhissāma tumhākaṃ gharadvāre vicarituṃ, amhākampi sassaṃ ekeneva udakena nipphajjissati, idaṃ udakaṃ amhākaṃ dethā’’ti. ‘‘Na mayaṃ dassāmā’’ti. ‘‘Mayampi na dassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ kathaṃ vaḍḍhetvā eko uṭṭhāya ekassa pahāraṃ adāsi, sopi aññassāti evaṃ aññamaññaṃ paharitvā rājakulānaṃ jātiṃ ghaṭṭetvā kalahaṃ vaḍḍhayiṃsu.

Herein is the preliminary story: It is said that the Sakyas and Koliyas, having dammed the Rohiṇī River between Kapilavatthu and Koliyanagara with a single dam, were cultivating crops. Then, in the month of Jeṭṭhamūla, when the crops were withering, laborers from both cities gathered. There, the residents of Koliyanagara said, "This water, if drawn by both, will not suffice for either you or us. But our crop will be produced with this one watering; give this water to us." The residents of Kapilavatthu said, "When your storehouses are filled, we, taking red gold, sapphires, and black kahāpaṇas, with baskets and sacks in hand, will not be able to walk through your doorways. Our crop, too, will be produced with one watering; give this water to us." "We will not give it," they said. "Neither will we," they said. Thus, increasing the talk, one rose up and struck another; he, too, struck another, and so on, striking one another, they touched upon the lineages of the royal families and escalated the quarrel.

Koliyakammakārā vadanti – ‘‘tumhe kapilavatthuvāsike gahetvā gajjatha, ye soṇasiṅgālādayo viya attano bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvasiṃsu, etesaṃ hatthino ca assā ca phalakāvudhāni ca amhākaṃ kiṃ karissantī’’ti? Sākiyakammakārā vadanti – ‘‘tumhe dāni kuṭṭhino dārake gahetvā gajjatha, ye anāthā niggatikā tiracchānā viya kolarukkhe vasiṃsu, etesaṃ hatthino ca assā ca phalakāvudhāni ca amhākaṃ kiṃ karissantī’’ti? Te gantvā tasmiṃ kamme niyuttaamaccānaṃ kathesuṃ, amaccā rājakulānaṃ kathesuṃ. Tato sākiyā – ‘‘bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvasitakānaṃ thāmañca balañca dassessāmā’’ti yuddhasajjā nikkhamiṃsu. Koliyāpi – ‘‘kolarukkhavāsīnaṃ thāmañca balañca dassessāmā’’ti yuddhasajjā nikkhamiṃsu.

The Koliya laborers said, "You, taking the residents of Kapilavatthu, roar, those who live together with their own sisters like jackals. What will their elephants, horses, shields, and weapons do to us?" The Sakyan laborers said, "You now, taking the lepers, roar, those who are without protection, without refuge, who live in koli trees like animals. What will their elephants, horses, shields, and weapons do to us?" They went and told the ministers appointed to that task, and the ministers told the royal families. Then, the Sakyas, thinking "We will show the strength and power of those who live with their sisters," went out arrayed for battle. The Koliyas, too, thinking "We will show the strength and power of those who live in koli trees," went out arrayed for battle.

attadaṇḍasuttaṃdesessāmi. Desanaṃ sutvā ubhayanagaravāsinopi aḍḍhatiyāni aḍḍhatiyāni kumārasatāni dassanti, ahaṃ te pabbājessāmi, tadā mahāsamāgamo bhavissatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ akāsi. Tasmā imesu yuddhasajjesu nikkhamantesu kassaci anārocetvā sayameva pattacīvaramādāya gantvā dvinnaṃ senānaṃ antare ākāse pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjetvā nisīdi.

attadaṇḍasuttaṃdesessāmi. "I will teach the Attadaṇḍa Sutta." Hearing the teaching, the residents of both cities will give half and half hundreds of princes, and I will ordain them; then, there will be a great assembly," he made a resolution. Therefore, as these were going out arrayed for battle, without announcing it to anyone, he himself, taking his robe and bowl, went and sat in the sky between the two armies, folding his legs in the lotus position, emitting six-colored rays.

Kapilavatthuvāsino bhagavantaṃ disvāva, ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātiseṭṭho satthā āgato. Diṭṭho nu kho tena amhākaṃ kalahakaraṇabhāvo’’ti cintetvā, ‘‘na kho pana sakkā bhagavati āgate amhehi parassa sarīre satthaṃ pātetuṃ. Koliyanagaravāsino amhe hanantu vā bajjhantu vā’’ti. Āvudhāni chaḍḍetvā, bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, nisīdiṃsu. Koliyanagaravāsinopi tatheva cintetvā āvudhāni chaḍḍetvā, bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, nisīdiṃsu.

The residents of Kapilavatthu, seeing the Blessed One, thought, "Our kinsman, the best of teachers, has come. Has he seen our quarreling?" and, "It is not possible for us to strike the body of another with a weapon in the presence of the Blessed One. Let the residents of Koliyanagara kill or imprison us." Throwing away their weapons, they venerated the Blessed One and sat down. The residents of Koliyanagara, too, thinking likewise, threw away their weapons, venerated the Blessed One, and sat down.

phandanajātakaṃ(jā. 1.13.14 ādayo) kathesi’’. Tato ‘‘parapattiyena nāma, mahārāja, na bhavitabbaṃ. Parapattiyā hutvā hi ekassa sasakassa kathāya tiyojanasahassavitthate himavante catuppadagaṇā mahāsamuddaṃ pakkhandino ahesuṃ. Tasmā parapattiyena na bhavitabba’’nti vatvā,pathavīundriyajātakaṃkathesi. Tato ‘‘kadāci, mahārāja, dubbalopi mahābalassa randhaṃ vivaraṃ passati, kadāci mahābalo dubbalassa. Laṭukikāpi hi sakuṇikā hatthināgaṃ ghātesī’’tilaṭukikajātakaṃ(jā. 1.5.39 ādayo) kathesi. Evaṃ kalahavūpasamanatthāya tīṇi jātakāni kathetvā sāmaggiparidīpanatthāya dve jātakāni kathesi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Samaggānañhi, mahārāja, koci otāraṃ nāma passituṃ na sakkotīti vatvā,rukkhadhammajātakaṃ(jā. 1.1.74) kathesi. Tato ‘‘samaggānaṃ, mahārāja, koci vivaraṃ dassituṃ na sakkhi. Yadā pana aññamaññaṃ vivādamakaṃsu, atha te nesādaputto jīvitā voropetvā ādāya gatoti vivāde assādo nāma natthī’’ti vatvā,vaṭṭakajātakaṃ(jā. 1.1.118) kathesi. Evaṃ imāni pañca jātakāni kathetvā avasāneattadaṇḍasuttaṃ(su. ni. 941 ādayo) kathesi.

phandanajātakaṃ(jā. 1.13.14 ādayo) kathesi’’. Then he said, "One should not be influenced by the words of others, O Great King. By being influenced by the words of others, the four-footed creatures in the three-thousand-league-wide Himalayas fled to the great ocean because of the words of a single hare. Therefore, one should not be influenced by the words of others," and told the pathavīundriyajātakaṃ. Then he said, "Sometimes, O Great King, even the weak see an opening in the strong; sometimes, the strong see an opening in the weak. Even a quail killed an elephant," and told the laṭukikajātakaṃ(jā. 1.5.39 ādayo). Thus, having told three Jātakas to pacify the quarrel, he told two Jātakas to illuminate concord. How? "Indeed, O Great King, no one is able to find an opportunity among those who are in concord," saying this, he told the rukkhadhammajātakaṃ(jā. 1.1.74). Then he said, "O Great King, no one was able to show a split among those who were in concord. But when they disputed with one another, then the hunter's son killed them and took them away. Thus, there is no pleasure in discord," saying this, he told the vaṭṭakajātakaṃ(jā. 1.1.118). Thus, having told these five Jātakas, at the end, he told the attadaṇḍasuttaṃ(su. ni. 941 ādayo).

Rājāno pasannā – ‘‘sace satthā nāgamissa, mayaṃ sahatthā aññamaññaṃ vadhitvā lohitanadiṃ pavattayissāma. Amhākaṃ puttabhātaro ca gehadvāre na passeyyāma, sāsanapaṭisāsanampi no āharaṇako nābhavissa. Satthāraṃ nissāya no jīvitaṃ laddhaṃ. Sace pana satthā āgāraṃ ajjhāvasissa dīpasahassadvayaparivāraṃ catumahādīparajjamassa hatthagataṃ abhavissa, atirekasahassaṃ kho panassa puttā abhavissaṃsu, tato khattiyaparivāro avicarissa. Taṃ kho panesa sampattiṃ pahāya nikkhamitvā sambodhiṃ patto. Idānipi khattiyaparivāroyeva vicaratū’’ti ubhayanagaravāsino aḍḍhatiyāni aḍḍhatiyāni kumārasatāni adaṃsu. Bhagavāpi te pabbājetvā mahāvanaṃ agamāsi. Tesaṃ garugāravena na attano ruciyā pabbajitānaṃ anabhirati uppajji. Purāṇadutiyikāyopi tesaṃ – ‘‘ayyaputtā ukkaṇṭhantu, gharāvāso na saṇṭhātī’’tiādīni vatvā sāsanaṃ pesenti. Te ca atirekataraṃ ukkaṇṭhiṃsu.

The kings, being pleased, thought, "If the Teacher had not come, we would have killed one another with our own hands, causing a river of blood to flow. Our sons and brothers would not see the doors of our homes, and there would be no one to bring us advice or instruction. It is by relying on the Teacher that we have gained life. If the Teacher were to remain in the household life, the sovereignty of the four great continents, surrounded by two thousand islands, would be in his hand; moreover, he would have more than a thousand sons, and then a retinue of warriors would wander about. But he, having abandoned that prosperity, attained enlightenment. Even now, let a retinue of warriors wander about," and the residents of both cities gave half and half hundreds of princes. The Blessed One, having ordained them, went to the great forest. Due to their great respect, no dissatisfaction arose in those who were ordained not by their own inclination. Their former wives sent messages saying, "May the sons of noble families long for home; household life is not stable," and so on. And they longed for home even more.

Bhagavā āvajjento tesaṃ anabhiratibhāvaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mādisena buddhena saddhiṃ ekato vasantā ukkaṇṭhanti, handa nesaṃ kuṇāladahassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā tattha netvā anabhiratiṃ vinodemī’’ti kuṇāladahassa vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Te taṃ daṭṭhukāmā ahesuṃ. Daṭṭhukāmattha, bhikkhave, kuṇāladahanti? Āma bhagavāti. Yadi evaṃ etha gacchāmāti. Iddhimantānaṃ bhagavā gamanaṭṭhānaṃ mayaṃ kathaṃ gamissāmāti. Tumhe gantukāmā hotha, ahaṃ mamānubhāvena gahetvā gamissāmīti. Sādhu, bhanteti. Bhagavā pañca bhikkhusatāni gahetvā ākāse uppatitvā kuṇāladahe patiṭṭhāya te bhikkhū āha – ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ kuṇāladahe yesaṃ macchānaṃ nāmaṃ na jānātha mamaṃ pucchathā’’ti.

The Blessed One, reflecting, knew their state of dissatisfaction and thought, "These monks, living together with a Buddha like me, are longing for home. Now, having described the beauty of Kuṇālada Lake, having led them there, I will dispel their dissatisfaction," and he described the beauty of Kuṇālada Lake. They desired to see it. "Do you desire to see Kuṇālada Lake, monks?" "Yes, Blessed One." "If so, let us go." "For those with psychic powers, Blessed One, the place of going is easy, how shall we go?" "If you are willing to go, I will take you by my power." "Good, Venerable One." The Blessed One, taking five hundred monks, rose into the sky and, landing at Kuṇālada Lake, said to the monks, "Monks, ask me the names of the fish in this Kuṇālada Lake whose names you do not know."

kuṇālajātakaṃ(jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) kathento anabhiratiṃ vinodesi. Desanāpariyosāne sabbepi sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, maggeneva ca nesaṃ iddhipi āgatā. Bhagavā ‘‘hotu tāva ettakaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūna’’nti ākāse uppatitvā mahāvanameva agamāsi. Tepi bhikkhū gamanakāle dasabalassa ānubhāvena gantvā āgamanakāle attano ānubhāvena bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā mahāvane otariṃsu.

kuṇālajātakaṃ(jā. 2.21.kuṇālajātaka) kathento anabhiratiṃ vinodesi. Telling the Kuṇāla Jātaka, he dispelled their dissatisfaction. At the end of the discourse, all were established in the fruit of stream-entry, and with the path, psychic power came to them. The Blessed One, thinking, "Let this much be enough for those monks," rose into the sky and went to the great forest. Those monks, too, going by the power of the Ten-Powered One on the way, and coming by their own power on the return, surrounded the Blessed One and descended into the great forest.

Bhagavā paññattāsane nisīditvā te bhikkhū āmantetvā – ‘‘etha, bhikkhave, nisīdatha. Uparimaggattayavajjhānaṃ vo kilesānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathessāmī’’ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘bhagavā amhākaṃ anabhiratabhāvaṃ ñatvā kuṇāladahaṃ netvā anabhiratiṃ vinodesi, tattha sotāpattiphalaṃ pattānaṃ no idāni idha tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi, na kho pana amhehi ‘sotāpannā maya’nti vītināmetuṃ vaṭṭati, purisapurisehi no bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti te dasabalassa pāde vanditvā uṭṭhāya nisīdanaṃ papphoṭetvā visuṃ visuṃ pabbhārarukkhamūlesu nisīdiṃsu.

The Blessed One, sitting on the prepared seat, addressed the monks and said, "Come, monks, sit down. I will tell you the meditation subject for the defilements that are to be abandoned by the three higher paths," and he told the meditation subject. The monks thought, "The Blessed One, knowing our state of dissatisfaction, having taken us to Kuṇālada Lake, dispelled our dissatisfaction. There, for us who have attained the fruit of stream-entry, he has now given the meditation subject for the three paths. It is not fitting for us to pass the time thinking, 'We are stream-enterers.' It is fitting for us to become the best of men." They venerated the feet of the Ten-Powered One, rose, shook out their robes, and sat down separately at the foot of various rock-crevices.

Bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū pakatiyāpi avissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā, laddhupāyassa pana bhikkhuno kilamanakāraṇaṃ nāma natthi. Gacchantā gacchantā ca vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ patvā ‘attanā paṭividdhaguṇaṃ ārocessāmā’ti mama santikaṃ āgamissanti. Etesu āgatesu dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā ekacakkavāḷe sannipatissanti, mahāsamayo bhavissati, vivitte okāse mayā nisīdituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tato vivitte okāse buddhāsanaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdi.

The Blessed One thought, "These monks are by nature not lacking in meditation subjects, and for a monk who has obtained the means, there is no cause for weariness. While going, they will increase insight and, having attained Arahantship, will come to me to announce the qualities realized by themselves. When these come, deities from ten thousand world-systems will gather in one world-system; there will be a great assembly. It is fitting for me to sit in a secluded place," and then, in a secluded place, he prepared the Buddha's seat and sat down.

Tato aparo tato aparoti pañcasatāpi paduminiyaṃ padumāni viya vikasiṃsu. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ arahattaṃ pattabhikkhu ‘‘bhagavato ārocessāmī’’ti pallaṅkaṃ vinibbhujitvā nisīdanaṃ papphoṭetvā uṭṭhāya dasabalābhimukho ahosi.Evaṃ aparopi aparopīti pañcasatā bhattasālaṃ pavisantā viya paṭipāṭiyāva āgamiṃsu. Paṭhamaṃ āgato vanditvā nisīdanaṃ paññāpetvā, ekamantaṃ nisīditvā, paṭividdhaguṇaṃ ārocetukāmo ‘‘atthi nu kho añño koci? Natthī’’ti nivattitvā āgatamaggaṃ olokento aparampi addasa aparampi addasayevāti sabbepi te āgantvā ekamantaṃ nisīditvā, ayaṃ imassa harāyamāno na kathesi, ayaṃ imassa harāyamāno na kathesi. Khīṇāsavānaṃ kira dve ākārā honti – ‘‘aho vata mayā paṭividdhaguṇaṃ sadevako loko khippameva paṭivijjheyyā’’ti cittaṃ uppajjati. Paṭividdhabhāvaṃ pana nidhiladdhapuriso viya na aññassa ārocetukāmā honti.

Tato aparo tato aparoti Five hundred monks blossomed like lotuses in a lotus pond. The monk who first attained Arahantship, thinking, "I will announce it to the Blessed One," stretched out his legs, shook out his robe, rose, and turned towards the Ten-Powered One. Evaṃ aparopi aparopīti In this way, another and another, five hundred came in order, just as they would enter a refectory. The first to come, having venerated, prepared a seat, sat down to one side, and, wanting to announce the qualities realized, looked back along the way he had come, thinking, "Is there anyone else? No?" and saw another and another. All those who came sat down to one side, and this one did not speak out of respect for that one, and that one did not speak out of respect for this one. It seems that there are two ways for those with extinguished defilements: "Oh, may the world with its deities quickly realize the qualities realized by me!" arises in the mind. But they do not want to announce the fact of realization to another, like a man who has found a treasure.

Evaṃ osaṭamatte pana tasmiṃ ariyamaṇḍale pācīnayugandharaparikkhepato abbhā mahikā dhūmo rajo rāhūti, imehi upakkilesehi vippamuttaṃ buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitassa lokassa rāmaṇeyyakadassanatthaṃ pācīnadisāya ukkhittarajatamayamahāādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya, nemivaṭṭiyaṃ gahetvā, parivattiyamānarajatacakkasassirikaṃ puṇṇacandamaṇḍalaṃ ullaṅghitvā, anilapathaṃ paṭipajjittha. Iti evarūpe khaṇe laye muhutte bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ mahāvane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehi.

However, at the moment it was removed, in that assembly of noble ones, from the surrounding area of the eastern Yugandhara, clouds, mist, smoke, dust, and Rāhu arose. For the sake of showing the beauty of the world adorned with the arising of a Buddha, freed from these defilements, it was like a great mirror of worked silver raised from the eastern direction, like a full moon rotated on the rim of a wheel, passing through the path of the wind. Thus, at such a moment, in a trice, the Blessed One was dwelling among the Sakyans in Kapilavatthu, in the great forest, with a great community of monks, with five hundred monks, all of whom were Arahants.

Tattha bhagavāpi mahāsammatassa vaṃse uppanno, tepi pañcasatā bhikkhū mahāsammatassa kule uppannā. Bhagavāpi khattiyagabbhe jāto, tepi khattiyagabbhe jātā. Bhagavāpi rājapabbajito, tepi rājapabbajitā. Bhagavāpi setacchattaṃ pahāya hatthagataṃ cakkavattirajjaṃ nissajjitvā pabbajito, tepi setacchattaṃ pahāya hatthagatāni rajjāni vissajjitvā pabbajitā. Iti bhagavā parisuddhe okāse, parisuddhe rattibhāge, sayaṃ parisuddho parisuddhaparivāro, vītarāgo vītarāgaparivāro, vītadoso vītadosaparivāro, vītamoho vītamohaparivāro, nittaṇho nittaṇhaparivāro, nikkileso nikkilesaparivāro, santo santaparivāro, danto dantaparivāro, mutto muttaparivāro, ativiya virocatīti. Vaṇṇabhūmi nāmesā, yattakaṃ sakkoti, tattakaṃ vattabbaṃ. Iti ime bhikkhū sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehī’’ti.

There, the Blessed One was also born in the lineage of Mahā Sammata, and those five hundred monks were also born in the family of Mahā Sammata. The Blessed One was born in a royal womb, and they too were born in royal wombs. The Blessed One also renounced as a king, and they too renounced as kings. The Blessed One, having abandoned the white umbrella and relinquished the sovereignty of a wheel-turning king that had come into his hand, went forth; they too, having abandoned the white umbrella and relinquished sovereignties that had come into their hands, went forth. Thus, the Blessed One, in a pure space, in a pure part of the night, himself pure, with a pure retinue, without attachment, with a retinue without attachment, without aversion, with a retinue without aversion, without delusion, with a retinue without delusion, without craving, with a retinue without craving, without defilement, with a retinue without defilement, peaceful, with a peaceful retinue, tamed, with a tamed retinue, liberated, with a liberated retinue, shone exceedingly. This is called the ground for praise; as much as one can, so much should be said. Thus, referring to these monks, it was said, "with a company of five hundred monks, all of them Arahants."

Yebhuyyenāti bahutarā sannipatitā, mandā na sannipatitā asaññī arūpāvacaradevatā samāpannadevatāyo ca. Tatrāyaṃ sannipātakkamo – mahāvanassa kira sāmantā devatā caliṃsu, ‘‘āyāma bho! Buddhadassanaṃ nāma bahūpakāraṃ, dhammassavanaṃ bahūpakāraṃ, bhikkhusaṅghadassanaṃ bahūpakāraṃ. Āyāma āyāmā’’ti! Mahāsaddaṃ kurumānā āgantvā bhagavantañca taṃmuhuttaṃ arahattappattakhīṇāsave ca vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Eteneva upāyena tāsaṃ tāsaṃ saddaṃ sutvā saddantaraaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanādivasena tiyojanasahassavitthate himavante, tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassesu, navanavutiyā doṇamukhasatasahassesu, chanavutiyā paṭṭanakoṭisatasahassesu, chapaṇṇāsāya ratanākaresūti sakalajambudīpe, pubbavidehe, aparagoyāne, uttarakurumhi, dvīsu parittadīpasahassesūti sakalacakkavāḷe, tato dutiyatatiyacakkavāḷeti evaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devatā sannipatitāti veditabbā. Dasasahassacakkavāḷañhi idha dasalokadhātuyoti adhippetaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā yebhuyyena sannipatitā hontī’’ti.

Yebhuyyena: for the most part, the majority assembled; the dull did not assemble, nor did the non-percipient and the deities of the Formless Realm, nor the deities absorbed in attainment. Here is the order of assembly: It is said that the deities around the Great Wood stirred, saying, "Come, friends! Seeing the Buddha is very beneficial, hearing the Dhamma is very beneficial, seeing the Sangha of monks is very beneficial. Come, come!" Making a great sound, they came and, having paid homage to the Blessed One and to the Khīṇāsavas who had attained Arahantship at that moment, stood to one side. In this same way, hearing that sound, in stages of half a gāvuta, a gāvuta, one and a half yojanas, a yojana, in the three-thousand-yojana-wide Himalayas, three times in sixty-three thousand cities, in ninety-nine hundred-thousand doṇamukhas, in ninety-six hundred-thousand paṭṭana-koṭis, in fifty-six jewel mines, in all Jambudīpa, in Pubbavideha, Aparagoyāna, Uttarakuru, in two thousand small islands, in the entire world-system, and then in the second and third world-systems, thus deities assembled in ten-thousand world-systems, it should be understood. For here, "ten-thousand world-systems" is intended to mean the ten world-elements. Therefore, it was said, "and deities from ten world-elements assembled for the most part."

Evaṃ sannipatitāhi devatāhi sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ yāva brahmalokā sūcighare nirantaraṃ pakkhittasūcīhi viya paripuṇṇaṃ hoti. Tattha brahmalokassa evaṃ uccattanaṃ veditabbaṃ – lohapāsāde kira sattakūṭāgārasamo pāsāṇo brahmaloke ṭhatvā adho khitto catūhi māsehi pathaviṃ pāpuṇāti. Evaṃ mahante okāse yathā heṭṭhā ṭhatvā khittāni pupphāni vā dhūmo vā upari gantuṃ, upari vā ṭhatvā khittasāsapā heṭṭhā otarituṃ antaraṃ na labhanti, evaṃ nirantarā devatā ahesuṃ. Yathā kho pana cakkavattirañño nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ asambādhaṃ hoti, āgatāgatā mahesakkhā khattiyā okāsaṃ labhantiyeva, parato parato pana atisambādhaṃ hoti. Evameva bhagavato nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ asambādhaṃ, āgatāgatā mahesakkhā devā ca brahmāno ca okāsaṃ labhantiyeva. Api sudaṃ bhagavato āsannāsannaṭṭhāne vālagganittudanamatte padese dasapi vīsatipi devā sukhume attabhāve māpetvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Sabbaparato saṭṭhi saṭṭhi devatā aṭṭhaṃsu.

With the deities thus assembled, the interior of the entire world-system, up to the Brahma realm, was full as if packed continuously with needles thrown into a needle case. Here, the elevation of the Brahma realm should be understood thus: It is said that a stone equal to a seven-storied peak in a palace, placed in the Brahma realm and thrown downwards, reaches the earth in four months. In such a large space, just as flowers or smoke thrown from below cannot go upwards, or mustard seeds thrown from above cannot descend downwards, they do not find space; similarly, the deities were continuous. However, just as the place where a wheel-turning king sits is not crowded, and the great and powerful Khattiyas who come always find space, but beyond that, it is very crowded. Just so, the place where the Blessed One sat was not crowded, and the great and powerful devas and Brahmas who came always found space. Indeed, in a space as small as the point of a hair near the Blessed One, ten or twenty devas, having manifested subtle bodies, stood. Beyond all, sixty or sixty deities stood.

Suddhāvāsakāyikānanti suddhāvāsavāsīnaṃ. Suddhāvāsā nāma suddhānaṃ anāgāmikhīṇāsavānaṃ āvāsā pañca brahmalokā.Etadahosīti kasmā ahosi? Te kira brahmāno samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā yathā paricchedena vuṭṭhitā brahmabhavanaṃ olokentā pacchābhatte bhattagehaṃ viya suññataṃ addasaṃsu. Tato ‘‘kuhiṃ brahmāno gatā’’ti āvajjantā mahāsamāgamaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘ayaṃ samāgamo mahā, mayaṃ ohīnā, ohīnakānaṃ pana okāso dullabho hoti, tasmā gacchantā atucchahatthā hutvā ekekaṃ gāthaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā gacchāma. Tāya mahāsamāgame ca attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpessāma, dasabalassa ca vaṇṇaṃ bhāsissāmā’’ti. Iti tesaṃ samāpattito uṭṭhāya āvajjitattā etadahosi.

Suddhāvāsakāyikānaṃ: of those residing in the Suddhāvāsa. Suddhāvāsa means the five Brahma realms that are the dwellings of the pure, the Anāgāmins and the Khīṇāsavas. Etadahosi: Why did this occur? It is said that those Brahmas, having attained to a samāpatti, looking at their Brahma-abode after arising from it in stages, saw it as empty, like a dining hall after the meal. Then, wondering, "Where have the Brahmas gone?" and reflecting, they knew of the great assembly and thought, "This assembly is great, and we are left out; but it is difficult for those left out to find space. Therefore, as we go, let us not go empty-handed, but compose a single verse each. By that, we will make known our coming to that great assembly, and we will speak in praise of the Ten-Powered One." Thus, because they reflected after arising from their samāpatti, this occurred.

Bhagavato purato pāturahesunti pāḷiyaṃ bhagavato santike abhimukhaṭṭhāneyeva otiṇṇā viya katvā vuttā, na kho panettha evaṃ attho veditabbo. Te pana brahmaloke ṭhitāyeva gāthā abhisaṅkharitvā eko puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otari, eko dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ, eko pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ, eko uttaracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otari. Tato puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā nīlarasmiyo vissajjetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ maṇivammaṃ paṭimuñcanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā buddhavīthi nāma kenaci uttarituṃ na sakkā, tasmā mahatiyā buddhavīthiyāva āgantvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhito kho attanā abhisaṅkhataṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi.

Bhagavato purato pāturahesuṃ: in the Pali, it is said as if they descended into the presence of the Blessed One, into a place facing him, but here, the meaning should not be understood in that way. But those Brahmas, remaining in the Brahma realm itself, having composed verses, one descended at the eastern world-system's entrance, one at the southern world-system's entrance, one at the western world-system's entrance, one at the northern world-system's entrance. Then, the Brahma who descended at the eastern world-system's entrance, having attained to the blue kasiṇa, emitting blue rays, as if fastening a jeweled armor onto the deities of the ten-thousand world-systems, making known his coming, came by the Buddha-path—for no one can ascend by it—by the great Buddha-path, greeted the Blessed One, and stood to one side. Standing to one side, he spoke the verse that he had composed.

Dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā pītakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā suvaṇṇapabhaṃ muñcitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi. Pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā lohitakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā lohitakarasmiyo muñcitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ rattavarakambalena parikkhipanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi. Uttaracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ otiṇṇabrahmā odātakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā odātarasmiyo vissajjetvā dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatānaṃ sumanakusumapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā tatheva akāsi.

The Brahma who descended at the southern world-system's entrance, having attained to the yellow kasiṇa, emitting a golden light, as if draping a golden cloth onto the deities of the ten-thousand world-systems, making known his coming, did likewise. The Brahma who descended at the western world-system's entrance, having attained to the red kasiṇa, emitting red rays, as if surrounding the deities of the ten-thousand world-systems with a red woolen blanket, making known his coming, did likewise. The Brahma who descended at the northern world-system's entrance, having attained to the white kasiṇa, emitting white rays, as if draping a sumana-flower cloth onto the deities of the ten-thousand world-systems, making known his coming, did likewise.

bhagavato purato pāturahesuṃ. Atha kho tā devatā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsūti evaṃ ekakkhaṇe viya purato pātubhāvo ca abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhitabhāvo ca vutto, so iminā anukkamena ahosi, ekato katvā pana dassito. Gāthābhāsanaṃ pana pāḷiyampi visuṃ visuṃyeva vuttaṃ.

bhagavato purato pāturahesuṃ. Atha kho tā devatā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsū: Thus, the appearance in front and the standing to one side after greeting, which are stated as if in a single moment, occurred in this sequence, but are shown having been combined. However, the speaking of the verses is stated separately, distinctly, even in the Pali.

mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho.Pavanaṃvuccati vanasaṇḍo. Ubhayenapi bhagavā ‘‘imasmiṃ pana vanasaṇḍe ajja mahāsamūho sannipāto’’ti āha. Tato yesaṃ so sannipāto, te dassetuṃdevakāyā samāgatāti āha. Tatthadevakāyāti devaghaṭā.Āgatamha imaṃ dhammasamayanti evaṃ samāgate devakāye disvā mayampi imaṃ dhammasamūhaṃ āgatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā?Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅghanti kenaci aparājitaṃ ajjeva tayo māre madditvā vijitasaṅgāmaṃ imaṃ aparājitasaṅghaṃ dassanatthāya āgatamhāti attho. So pana, brahmā, imaṃ gāthaṃ bhāsitvā, bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā, puratthimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃyeva aṭṭhāsi.

Mahāsamayo: a great gathering. Pavanaṃ is said to be a grove of trees. By both, the Blessed One said, "In this grove of trees today, there is a great gathering, an assembly." Then, to show those for whom that assembly was, he said, devakāyā samāgatā. There, devakāyā means groups of devas. Āgatamha imaṃ dhammasamayaṃ: Having seen the groups of devas thus assembled, we too have come to this Dhamma-assembly. For what reason? Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅghaṃ: We have come to see this unconquered Sangha, unconquered by anyone, having crushed the three Māras today, a Sangha victorious in battle. That Brahma, having spoken this verse, greeted the Blessed One, and stood at the eastern world-system's entrance itself.

tatra bhikkhavoti tasmiṃ sannipātaṭṭhāne bhikkhū.Samādahaṃsūti samādhinā yojesuṃ.Cittamattano ujukaṃ akaṃsūti attano citte sabbe vaṅkakuṭilajimhabhāve haritvā ujukaṃ akariṃsu.Sārathīva nettāni gahetvāti yathā samappavattesu sindhavesu odhastapatodo sārathī sabbayottāni gahetvā acodento avārento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgatā guttadvārā sabbepete pañcasatā bhikkhū indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā, ete daṭṭhuṃ idhāgatamhā bhagavāti, sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi.

Tatra bhikkhavo: There, in that place of assembly, the monks. Samādahaṃsū: Joined with samādhi. Cittamattano ujukaṃ akaṃsū: Having removed all crookedness, dishonesty, and deceit from their minds, they made their minds upright. Sārathīva nettāni gahetvā: Just as a charioteer, with an excellent goad, stands holding all the reins of well-trained Sindh horses, neither urging them on nor restraining them, so these five hundred monks, endowed with six-factored equanimity, with guarded doors, protect their senses; we have come here to see these wise ones, O Blessed One. He too went and stood in his respective place.

chetvā khīlanti rāgadosamohakhīlaṃ chinditvā.Palighanti rāgadosamohapalighameva.Indakhīlanti rāgadosamohaindakhīlameva.Ūhacca manejāti ete taṇhāejāya anejā bhikkhū indakhīlaṃ ūhacca samūhanitvā catūsu disāsu appaṭihatacārikaṃ caranti.Suddhāti nirupakkilesā.Vimalāti nimmalā. Idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Cakkhumatāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantena.Sudantāti cakkhutopi dantā sotatopi ghānatopi jivhātopi kāyatopi manatopi dantā.Susunāgāti taruṇanāgā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – chandādīhi na gacchantītināgā,tena tena maggena pahīne kilese na āgacchantīti nāgā, nānappakāraṃ āguṃ na karontīti nāgā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana mahāniddese (mahāni. 80) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

Chetvā khīlaṃ: Having cut off the stake of attachment, aversion, and delusion. Palighaṃ: The very bar of attachment, aversion, and delusion. Indakhīlaṃ: The very Inda-stake of attachment, aversion, and delusion. Ūhacca manejā: These monks, without craving, without agitation, without craving for existence, having uprooted the Inda-stake, having removed it entirely, wander with unobstructed movement in the four directions. Suddhā: Without defilements. Vimalā: Immaculate. This is a synonym of that. Cakkhumatā: By the one endowed with vision, with the five kinds of vision. Sudantā: Well-tamed even in regard to the eye, and also to the ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind. Susunāgā: Young nāgas. Here, this is the meaning of the word: Because they do not go by way of desire and so on, they are nāgas; because they do not come to defilements abandoned by that path, they are nāgas; because they do not do various kinds of evil, they are nāgas. This is the summary here, but the detailed explanation should be understood in the manner stated in the Great Niddesa (mahāni. 80).

Apica –

Moreover—

‘‘Āguṃ na karoti kiñci loke,

"He does no evil whatever in the world,
Having abandoned all connections and bonds;
He is not attached anywhere, he is liberated,
Such a one is called a Nāga, because of his truthfulness."

Susunāgāti susū nāgā, susunāgabhāvasampattiṃ pattāti attho. Te evarūpe anuttarena yoggācariyena damite taruṇanāge dassanāya āgatamha bhagavāti. Sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi.

Susunāgā: Very young nāgas, having attained the accomplishment of being very young nāgas, is the meaning. We have come, O Blessed One, to see such young nāgas tamed by an unsurpassed trainer.

gatāseti nibbematikasaraṇagamanena gatā. Sopi gantvā yathāṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsīti. Sattamaṃ.

Gatāse: Having gone with dispelled-doubt refuge-going. He too went and stood in his respective place. Seventh.

8. Sakalikasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Sakalika Sutta

38.Aṭṭhamemaddakucchisminti evaṃnāmake uyyāne. Tañhi ajātasattumhi kucchigate tassa mātarā – ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ kucchigato gabbho rañño sattu bhavissati. Kiṃ me iminā’’ti? Gabbhapātanatthaṃ kucchi maddāpitā. Tasmā ‘‘maddakucchī’’ti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Migānaṃ pana abhayavāsatthāya dinnattāmigadāyoti vuccati.

38.In the eighth, maddakucchismiṃ: in a park named thus. For when Ajātasattu was in the womb, his mother thought, "This embryo in my womb will be an enemy to the king. What is the use of me with this?" and had her womb massaged to cause an abortion. Therefore, it went by the name "Maddakucchi." However, because it was given for the safe dwelling of deer, it is called Migadāya.

Tena kho pana samayenāti ettha ayaṃ anupubbikathā – devadatto hi ajātasattuṃ nissāya dhanuggahe ca dhanapālakañca payojetvāpi tathāgatassa jīvitantarāyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto ‘‘sahattheneva māressāmī’’ti gijjhakūṭapabbataṃ abhiruhitvā mahantaṃ kūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ silaṃ ukkhipitvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo cuṇṇavicuṇṇo hotū’’ti pavijjhi. Mahāthāmavā kiresa pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhāreti. Aṭṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, yaṃ buddhānaṃ parūpakkamena jīvitantarāyo bhaveyyāti taṃ tathāgatassa sarīrābhimukhaṃ āgacchantaṃ ākāse aññā silā uṭṭhahitvā sampaṭicchi. Dvinnaṃ silānaṃ sampahārena mahanto pāsāṇassa sakalikā uṭṭhahitvā bhagavato piṭṭhipādapariyantaṃ abhihani, pādo mahāpharasunā pahato viya samuggatalohitena lākhārasamakkhito viya ahosi. Bhagavā uddhaṃ ulloketvā devadattaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘bahu tayā moghapurisa, apuññaṃ pasutaṃ, yo tvaṃ paduṭṭhacitto vadhakacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādesī’’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya bhagavato aphāsu jātaṃ. Bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘ayaṃ vihāro ujjaṅgalo visamo, bahūnaṃ khattiyādīnañceva pabbajitānañca anokāso’’ti. Te tathāgataṃ mañcasivikāya ādāya maddakucchiṃ nayiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavato pādo sakalikāya khato hotī’’ti.

Tena kho pana samayena: Here is the connected story: Devadatta, relying on Ajātasattu, even employing archers and Dhanapālaka, unable to cause an interruption to the life of the Tathāgata, thinking, "I will kill him with my own hand," climbed the Gijjhakūṭa mountain, lifted up a large rock the size of a storied dwelling, and hurled it, thinking, "May the ascetic Gotama be crushed to powder." It is said that he was very strong, possessing the strength of five elephants. However, it is impossible that an interruption to the life of Buddhas could occur through the actions of another. As that was coming towards the body of the Tathāgata, another rock rose up in the sky and intercepted it. By the impact of the two rocks, a large splinter of stone arose and struck the Blessed One's back near his foot; the foot was like being struck by a great axe, like being smeared with red lac due to the blood that had welled up. The Blessed One, looking upwards, said this to Devadatta: "Much unmerit has been produced by you, foolish man, because, with a corrupted mind, with a murderous mind, you caused the blood of a Tathāgata to flow." From then on, discomfort arose in the Blessed One. The monks thought, "This monastery is isolated, uneven, and not suitable for many Khattiyas and those gone forth." They took the Tathāgata on a palanquin and brought him to Maddakucchi. Therefore, it was said, "At that time, the Blessed One's foot was injured by a splinter."

Bhusāti balavatiyo.Sudanti nipātamattaṃ.Dukkhanti sukhapaṭikkhepo.Tibbāti bahalā.Kharāti pharusā.Kaṭukāti tikhiṇā.Asātāti amadhurā. Na tāsu mano appeti, na tā manaṃ appāyanti vaḍḍhentītiamanāpā. Sato sampajānoti vedanādhivāsanasatisampajaññena samannāgato hutvā.Avihaññamānoti apīḷiyamāno, samparivattasāyitāya vedanānaṃ vasaṃ agacchanto.

Bhusā: Strong. Suda: A mere particle. Dukkha: The opposite of happiness. Tibbā: Intense. Kharā: Harsh. Kaṭukā: Sharp. Asātā: Unpleasant. He does not apply his mind to them, nor do they apply his mind or increase it; therefore, amanāpā: disagreeable. Sato sampajāno: Being endowed with mindfulness and full awareness, through the mindfulness and full awareness of enduring feelings. Avihaññamāno: Not being afflicted, not going under the power of feelings because of lying down turning from side to side.

Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogiseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā. Tattha ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī sattā vāmena passena sentī’’ti ayaṃ kāmabhogiseyyā. Tesu hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi. ‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti ayaṃ petaseyyā. Appamaṃsalohitattā hi aṭṭhisaṅghāṭajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti. ‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, sīho migarājā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi anupakkhipitvā dakkhiṇena passena setī’’ti ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, ‘pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati, divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na utrasanto pabujjhati, sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādādīnaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti’. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā, na sūrabhāvassa anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā ca sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati. Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana ‘‘tathāgataseyyā’’ti vuccati. Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma.

Sīhaseyyanti: Here, there are four types of lying down: lying down indulging in sensual pleasures, lying down as a ghost, lying down like a lion, and lying down like the Tathāgata. Among these, "Generally, monks, beings who indulge in sensual pleasures lie down on their left side"—this is lying down indulging in sensual pleasures. For among them, there is practically no one who lies down on their right side. "Generally, monks, ghosts lie flat on their backs"—this is lying down as a ghost. Because of having little flesh and blood, being emaciated with only bones, they cannot lie on one side, but only flat on their backs. "Generally, monks, the lion, the king of beasts, lies down on its right side without placing its tail between its thighs"—this is lying down like a lion. Because of the abundance of energy, the lion, the king of beasts, places its two front paws in one place, the hind paws in another, puts its tail between its thighs, considers the space where the front paws, hind paws, and tail are situated, places its head on top of the two front paws, and lies down. Even when it awakens after lying down for the whole day, it does not awaken startled. Instead, it lifts its head and considers the space where the front paws, etc., are situated. If it has moved from its place, it becomes displeased, thinking, "This is not befitting of your birth, nor of your bravery," and lies down there again, not going out for food. But if it has not moved from its place, it becomes delighted and joyful, thinking, "This is befitting of your birth and of your bravery," rises, stretches in a lion-like stretch, shakes its mane, roars the lion's roar three times, and then goes out for food. However, lying down in the fourth jhāna is called "lying down like the Tathāgata." Among these, here, lying down like a lion is mentioned. This is considered the best way of lying down because of the energetic posture.

Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ.Accādhāyāti atiādhāya, īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā. Gopphakena hi gopphake jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā na saṅghaṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsu hoti. Tasmā evaṃ nipajji.Sato sampajānoti sayanapariggāhakasatisampajaññena samannāgato. ‘‘Uṭṭhānasañña’’nti panettha na vuttaṃ, gilānaseyyā hesā tathāgatassa.

Pāde pādanti: Foot on foot means placing the left foot on the right foot.Accādhāyāti: Placing one over the other, placing it slightly overlapping. For if ankle rubs against ankle, or knee against knee, pain frequently arises, the mind is not concentrated, and lying down is uncomfortable. When it is placed overlapping in such a way that they do not rub, pain does not arise, the mind is concentrated, and lying down is comfortable. Therefore, he lay down in this way.Sato sampajānoti: Endowed with mindfulness and clear comprehension regarding the posture of lying down. "Mindful of rising" is not mentioned here, because this is the Tathāgata's sickbed posture.

Sattasatāti imasmiṃ sutte sabbāpi tā devatā gilānaseyyaṭṭhānaṃ āgatā.Udānaṃ udānesīti gilānaseyyaṃ āgatānaṃ domanassena bhavitabbaṃ siyā. Imāsaṃ pana tathāgatassa vedanādhivāsanaṃ disvā, ‘‘aho buddhānaṃ mahānubhāvatā! Evarūpāsu nāma vedanāsu vattamānāsu vikāramattampi natthi, sirīsayane alaṅkaritvā ṭhapitasuvaṇṇarūpakaṃ viya aniñjamānena kāyena nipanno, idānissa adhikataraṃ mukhavaṇṇo virocati, ābhāsampanno puṇṇacando viya sampati vikasitaṃ viya ca aravindaṃ assa mukhaṃ sobhati, kāyepi vaṇṇāyatanaṃ idāni susammaṭṭhakañcanaṃ viya vippasīdatī’’ti udānaṃ udapādi.

Sattasatāti: In this sutta, all those deities came to the sickbed.Udānaṃ udānesīti: It would be expected that those who came to the sickbed would be saddened. But upon seeing the Tathāgata's endurance of pain, an exclamation arose in them: "How great is the power of the Buddhas! Even while experiencing such pains, there is not even a slight change in him. He lies down with his body motionless, like a golden statue placed in a decorated bed. Now his complexion shines even more, his face is as radiant as the full moon, and his face is as beautiful as a fully blossomed lotus. Now even the color of his body is as clear as well-polished gold."

Nāgovata bhoti, etthabhoti dhammālapanaṃ. Balavantaṭṭhenanāgo. Nāgavatāti nāgabhāvena.Sīho vatātiādīsu asantāsanaṭṭhenasīho. Byattaparicayaṭṭhena kāraṇākāraṇajānanena vāājānīyo. Appaṭisamaṭṭhenanisabho. Gavasatajeṭṭhako hi usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, gavasatasahassajeṭṭhako nisabhoti vuccati. Bhagavā pana appaṭisamaṭṭhena āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti. Tenevatthena idha ‘‘nisabho’’ti vutto. Dhuravāhaṭṭhenadhorayho. Nibbisevanaṭṭhenadanto.

Nāgovata bhoti: Here, bho is an exclamation of dhamma. Nāgo: A nāga because of his strength. Nāgavatāti: By nāga-nature.Sīho vatāti: A sīho because of being fearless. Ājānīyo: Because of being skilled, or knowing causes and non-causes. Nisabho: Because of being without equal. For an usabha is chief of one hundred cows, a vasabha is chief of one thousand cows, and a nisabha is chief of one hundred thousand cows. But the Blessed One claims the place of āsabha by being without equal. Therefore, he is called "nisabha" here in that sense. Dhorayho: Because of bearing the burden. Danto: Because of being tamed.

Passāti aniyamitāṇatti.Samādhinti arahattaphalasamādhiṃ.Suvimuttanti phalavimuttiyā suvimuttaṃ. Rāgānugataṃ pana cittaṃ abhinataṃ nāma hoti, dosānugataṃ apanataṃ. Tadubhayapaṭikkhepenana cābhinataṃ na cāpanatanti āha.Na ca sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatanti na sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilese niggahetvā vāritavataṃ, kilesānaṃ pana chinnattā vataṃ phalasamādhinā samāhitanti attho.Atikkamitabbanti viheṭhetabbaṃ ghaṭṭetabbaṃ.Adassanāti aññāṇā. Aññāṇī hi andhabālova evarūpe satthari aparajjheyyāti devadattaṃ ghaṭṭayamānā vadanti.

Passāti: Without fixed measure or decree.Samādhinti: The samādhi of arahatship.Suvimuttanti: Well-liberated by the liberation of fruition. However, a mind influenced by desire is called inclined; a mind influenced by aversion is called disinclined. Rejecting both of these, he says, na cābhinataṃ na cāpanatanti: "Neither inclined nor disinclined."Na ca sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatanti: Not one who has restrained or warded off defilements with effort and exertion, but because the defilements are cut off, his mind is concentrated by the samādhi of fruition.Atikkamitabbanti: Should be offended, should be harassed.Adassanāti: Through ignorance. For an ignorant person, like a blind fool, might offend such a teacher, so they say, harassing Devadatta.

Pañcavedāti itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedānaṃ dhārakā.Sataṃ samanti vassasataṃ.Tapassīti tapanissitakā hutvā.Caranti carantā.Na sammāvimuttanti sacepi evarūpā brāhmaṇā vassasataṃ caranti, cittañca nesaṃ sammā vimuttaṃ na hoti.Hīnattarūpā na pāraṃ gamā teti hīnattasabhāvā te nibbānaṅgamā na honti. ‘‘Hīnattharūpā’’tipi pāṭho, hīnatthajātikā parihīnatthāti attho.Taṇhādhipannāti taṇhāya ajjhotthaṭā.Vatasīlabaddhāti ajavatakukkuravatādīhi ca vatehi tādiseheva ca sīlehi baddhā.Lūkhaṃ tapanti pañcātapatāpanaṃ kaṇṭakaseyyādikaṃ tapaṃ. Idāni sā devatā sāsanassa niyyānikabhāvaṃ kathentīna mānakāmassātiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Pañcavedāti: Holders of the five Vedas, with history as the fifth.Sataṃ samanti: For a hundred years.Tapassīti: Being those who rely on austerity.Caranti: Practicing.Na sammāvimuttanti: Even if such brahmins practice for a hundred years, their minds are not rightly liberated.Hīnattarūpā na pāraṃ gamā teti: Those of inferior nature do not go to the beyond. "Hīnattharūpā" is also a reading, meaning those of inferior birth, having inferior aims.Taṇhādhipannāti: Overcome by craving.Vatasīlabaddhāti: Bound by observances such as the goat observance and the dog observance, and by similar rules of conduct.Lūkhaṃ tapanti: Harsh asceticism, such as scorching in the five-fold heat and lying on thorns. Now, that deity, speaking of the liberating nature of the Teaching, says na mānakāmassāti, etc. The meaning of that has already been stated. The eighth.

9. Paṭhamapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā

39.Navamepajjunnassa dhītāti pajjunnassa nāma vassavalāhakadevarañño cātumahārājikassa dhītā.Abhivandeti bhagavā tumhākaṃ pāde vandāmi.Cakkhumatāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumantena tathāgatena.Dhammo anubuddhoti, ‘‘idaṃ mayā pubbe paresaṃ santike kevalaṃ sutaṃyeva āsī’’ti vadati.Sāhaṃ dānīti, sā ahaṃ idāni.Sakkhi jānāmīti, paṭivedhavasena paccakkhameva jānāmi.Vigarahantāti, ‘‘hīnakkharapadabyañjano’’ti vā ‘‘aniyyāniko’’ti vā evaṃ garahantā.Roruvanti, dve roruvā – dhūmaroruvo ca jālaroruvo ca. Tattha dhūmaroruvo visuṃ hoti, jālaroruvoti pana avīcimahānirayassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tattha hi sattā aggimhi jalante jalante punappunaṃ ravaṃ ravanti, tasmā so ‘‘roruvo’’ti vuccati.Ghoranti dāruṇaṃ.Khantiyā upasamena upetāti ruccitvā khamāpetvā gahaṇakhantiyā ca rāgādiupasamena ca upetāti. Navamaṃ.

39.In the ninth, pajjunnassa dhītāti: The daughter of Pajjunna, the rain-cloud deva-king of the realm of the Four Great Kings.Abhivandeti: I bow to the feet of the Blessed One.Cakkhumatāti: By the Tathāgata, the one with vision, endowed with the five eyes.Dhammo anubuddhoti: "This was previously only heard by me from the presence of others," she says.Sāhaṃ dānīti: I now.Sakkhi jānāmīti: I know directly, by way of penetration.Vigarahantāti: Those who criticize, saying "the letters, words, and phrases are inferior," or "it is not liberating."Roruvanti: There are two roruva hells—Dhūmaroruva and Jālaroruva. Among these, Dhūmaroruva is distinct, but Jālaroruva is another name for Avīci Great Hell. For there, beings cry out again and again while burning in the fire, therefore it is called "Roruva."Ghoranti: Terrible.Khantiyā upasamena upetāti: Endowed with patience born of pleasing acceptance and with the calming of passion, etc. The ninth.

10. Dutiyapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiyapajjunnadhītusuttavaṇṇanā

40.Dasamedhammañcāti ca saddena saṅghañca, iti tīṇi ratanāni namassamānā idhāgatāti vadati.Atthavatīti, atthavatiyo.Bahunāpi kho tanti yaṃ dhammaṃ sā abhāsi, taṃ dhammaṃ bahunāpi pariyāyena ahaṃ vibhajeyyaṃ.Tādiso dhammoti, tādiso hi ayaṃ bhagavā dhammo, taṃsaṇṭhito tappaṭibhāgo bahūhi pariyāyehi vibhajitabbayuttakoti dasseti.Lapayissāmīti, kathayissāmi.Yāvatā me manasā pariyattanti yattakaṃ mayā manasā pariyāpuṭaṃ, tassatthaṃ divasaṃ avatvā madhupaṭalaṃ pīḷentī viya muhutteneva saṃkhittena kathessāmi. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Dasamaṃ.

40.In the tenth, dhammañcāti: And the Sangha by the word "ca;" thus, she says, "having come here venerating the Triple Gem."Atthavatīti: Meaningful.Bahunāpi kho tanti: That dhamma which she spoke, that dhamma I could analyze in many ways.Tādiso dhammoti: Such indeed is this Dhamma of the Blessed One, showing that it is befitting and proper to analyze it in many ways.Lapayissāmīti: I will speak.Yāvatā me manasā pariyattanti: As much as is grasped by my mind; without speaking of the meaning for a day, I will speak briefly in a moment, as if squeezing honey from a honeycomb. The rest is self-explanatory. The tenth.

Satullapakāyikavaggo catuttho.

The Satullapakāyika Vagga, the fourth.

5. Ādittavaggo

5. Āditta Vagga

1. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā

41.Ādittavaggassa paṭhamejarāya maraṇena cāti desanāsīsametaṃ, rāgādīhi pana ekādasahi aggīhi loko ādittova.Dānenāti dānacetanāya.Dinnaṃ hoti sunīhatanti dānapuññacetanāhi dāyakasseva hoti gharasāmikassa viya nīhatabhaṇḍakaṃ, tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Corā harantīti adinne bhoge corāpi haranti rājānopi, aggipi ḍahati, ṭhapitaṭṭhānepi nassanti.Antenāti maraṇena.Sarīraṃ sapariggahanti sarīrañceva corādīnaṃ vasena avinaṭṭhabhoge ca.Saggamupetīti vessantaramahārājādayo viya sagge nibbattatīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

41.In the first sutta of the Āditta Vagga, jarāya maraṇena cāti: This is the heading of the discourse, but the world is ablaze with the eleven fires beginning with passion.Dānenāti: By the intention of giving.Dinnaṃ hoti sunīhatanti: The meritorious intention of giving belongs to the giver alone, like goods taken out by the householder; therefore, this was said.Corā harantīti: Thieves steal wealth not given, and kings also, fire burns it, and it is destroyed even in the place where it is kept.Antenāti: By death.Sarīraṃ sapariggahanti: Both the body and the wealth not destroyed by thieves, etc.Saggamupetīti: He is reborn in heaven, like King Vessantara and others. The first.

2. Kiṃdadasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Kiṃdadasuttavaṇṇanā

42.Dutiyeannadoti yasmā atibalavāpi dve tīṇi bhattāni abhutvā uṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, bhutvā pana dubbalopi hutvā balasampanno hoti, tasmā ‘‘annado balado’’ti āha.Vatthadoti yasmā surūpopi duccoḷo vā acoḷo vā virūpo hoti ohīḷito duddasiko, vatthacchanno devaputto viya sobhati, tasmā ‘‘vatthado hoti vaṇṇado’’ti āha.Yānadoti hatthiyānādīnaṃ dāyako. Tesu pana –

42.In the second, annadoti: Because even the very strong cannot rise without eating two or three meals, but having eaten, even the weak become strong, therefore he said, "The giver of food is the giver of strength."Vatthadoti: Because even the handsome becomes ugly if he is poorly clothed or unclothed, despised and unpleasant to see, but clothed, he shines like a deva's son, therefore he said, "The giver of cloth is the giver of beauty."Yānadoti: The giver of elephant-vehicles, etc. Concerning these:

‘‘Na hatthiyānaṃ samaṇassa kappati,

‘‘An elephant vehicle is not suitable for a renunciate,
Nor a horse vehicle, nor traveling by chariot;
This vehicle is suitable for a renunciate,
Sandals protecting the aggregate of virtue.’’

Sukhado hotīti yānassa sukhāvahanato sukhado nāma hoti.Cakkhudoti andhakāre cakkhumantānampi rūpadassanābhāvato dīpado cakkhudo nāma hoti, anuruddhatthero viya dibbacakkhu sampadampi labhati.

Sukhado hotīti: He is called the giver of happiness because a vehicle brings happiness.Cakkhudoti: He is called the giver of sight because in the darkness there is no seeing of forms even for those with eyes; the giver of lamps obtains the accomplishment of the divine eye, like the Elder Anuruddha.

Sabbadado hotītisabbesaṃyeva balādīnaṃ dāyako hoti. Dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassāpi sītalāya pokkharaṇiyā nhāyitvā patissayaṃ pavisitvā muhuttaṃ mañce nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa hi kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇāyatanaṃ vātātapehi jhāyati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nipannassa ca visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati okkamati, vaṇṇāyatanaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa pāde kaṇṭako vijjhati, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayo ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, patissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nipannassa sabbete parissayā na honti, dhammaṃ sajjhāyantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhaṃ uppajjati. Tathā bahi vicarantassa ca sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe kūpe otiṇṇo viya hoti, mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyanti. Muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvārakavāṭavātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘so ca sabbadado hoti, yo dadāti upassaya’’nti.

Sabbadado hotīti: He is the giver of all things, such as strength, etc. For even if one has gone for alms in two or three villages and returned without getting anything, having bathed in a cool pond, entered his lodging, lain down on the bed for a moment, and then gotten up and sat down, it is as if strength has been brought into his body and put there. And the complexion of one wandering outside is scorched by the wind and sun, but having entered his lodging, closed the door, and lain down for a moment, the unfavorable sequence ceases, and the favorable sequence arises; it is as if his complexion has been brought back and put there. For one wandering outside, a thorn pierces his foot, a stump strikes him, there is danger from snakes and other creatures, and fear of thieves; but having entered his lodging, closed the door, and lain down, all these dangers are not present. While reciting the Dhamma, the joy and happiness of the Dhamma arise; while attending to a meditation subject, the happiness of serenity arises. Also, for one wandering outside, sweat breaks out, his eyes twitch, but when he enters his dwelling, it is as if he has descended into a well, and couches, chairs, etc., are not apparent. But for one who has sat down for a moment, it is as if the clarity of his eyes has been brought back and put there, and doors, windows, couches, chairs, etc., are apparent. Therefore, it was said, "He is the giver of all things who gives a dwelling."

Amataṃdado ca so hotīti paṇītabhojanassa pattaṃ pūrento viya amaraṇadānaṃ nāma deti.Yo dhammamanusāsatīti yo dhammaṃ anusāsati, aṭṭhakathaṃ katheti, pāḷiṃ vāceti, pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhati, dhammassavanaṃ karoti, sabbopesa dhammaṃ anusāsati nāma. Sabbadānānañca idaṃ dhammadānameva agganti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Amataṃdado ca so hotīti: He gives the gift of non-death, as if filling a bowl with fine food.Yo dhammamanusāsatīti: He who instructs in the Dhamma, speaks the commentary, recites the Pāḷi, answers questions that are asked, explains the meditation subject, or arranges for the hearing of the Dhamma—all of these instruct in the Dhamma. And it should be known that this gift of the Dhamma is the chief of all gifts. For it was said:

‘‘Sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jināti,

‘‘The gift of Dhamma conquers all gifts,
The taste of Dhamma conquers all tastes;
The delight in Dhamma conquers all delights,
The destruction of craving conquers all suffering.’’ (dha. pa. 354); The second;

3. Annasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Annasuttavaṇṇanā

43.Tatiyeabhinandantīti patthenti.Bhajatīti upagacchati, cittagahapatisīvalittherādike viya pacchato anubandhati.Tasmāti yasmā idhaloke paraloke ca annadāyakameva anugacchati, tasmā. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Tatiyaṃ.

43.In the third, abhinandantīti: They desire.Bhajatīti: He approaches, he follows behind, like Cittagahapati, Sīvali Thera, and others.Tasmāti: Because the giver of food alone follows him in this world and the next, therefore. The rest is self-explanatory. The third.

4. Ekamūlasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Ekamūlasuttavaṇṇanā

44.Catuttheekamūlanti avijjā taṇhāya mūlaṃ, taṇhā avijjāya. Idha pana taṇhā adhippetā. Dvīhi sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi āvaṭṭatītidvirāvaṭṭā. Sā ca rāgādīhi tīhi malehitimalā. Tatrāssā moho sahajātakoṭiyā malaṃ hoti, rāgadosā upanissayakoṭiyā. Pañca pana kāmaguṇā assā pattharaṇaṭṭhānā, tesu sā pattharatītipañcapattharā. Sā ca apūraṇīyaṭṭhenasamuddo. Ajjhattikabāhiresu panesā dvādasāyatanesu āvaṭṭati parivaṭṭatītidvādasāvaṭṭā. Apatiṭṭhaṭṭhena panapātāloti vuccatīti. Ekamūlaṃ…pe… pātālaṃ, atari isi, uttari samatikkamīti attho. Catutthaṃ.

44.In the fourth, ekamūlanti: Ignorance is the root of craving, and craving is the root of ignorance. Here, however, craving is intended. Dvirāvaṭṭā: Because it revolves with the two views of eternalism and annihilationism. And it is timalā: Defiled by the three defilements of passion, etc. Among these, its defilement is delusion, in the sense of a co-nascent condition; passion and aversion, in the sense of a support condition. However, the five sense pleasures are its spreading places; it spreads among them, therefore it is pañcapattharā. And it is samuddo: The ocean, in the sense of being unfillable. And it revolves and turns in the twelve internal and external sense bases, therefore it is dvādasāvaṭṭā. However, it is called pātālo: The nether world, in the sense of having no support. Ekamūlaṃ…pe… pātālaṃ, atari isi: He crossed, he overcame. The fourth.

5. Anomasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Anomasuttavaṇṇanā

45.Pañcameanomanāmanti sabbaguṇasamannāgatattā avekallanāmaṃ, paripūranāmanti attho.Nipuṇatthadassinti bhagavā saṇhasukhume khandhantarādayo atthe passatīti nipuṇatthadassī.Paññādadanti anvayapaññādhigamāya paṭipadaṃ kathanavasena paññāya dāyakaṃ.Kāmālaye asattanti pañcakāmaguṇālaye alaggaṃ.Kamamānanti bhagavā mahābodhimaṇḍeyeva ariyamaggena gato, na idāni gacchati, atītaṃ pana upādāya idaṃ vuttaṃ.Mahesinti mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esitāraṃ pariyesitāranti. Pañcamaṃ.

45. In the fifth, anomanāma means having an immaculate name because of being endowed with all virtues, meaning a perfect name. Nipuṇatthadassi means the Blessed One sees subtle and delicate things, such as the aggregates and elements; therefore, he is one who sees subtle meanings. Paññādada means giving wisdom by way of explaining the practice for the attainment of discernment-wisdom. Kāmālaye asatta means not attached to the dwelling place of the five strands of sense pleasure. Kamamāna means the Blessed One went by the Noble Path right at the Great Bodhi-mandala; he does not go now, but this is said in reference to the past. Mahesi means a seeker and searcher of great qualities such as the aggregates of virtue. The fifth is concluded.

6. Accharāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Accharāsutta Commentary

46.Chaṭṭheaccharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭhanti ayaṃ kira devaputto satthusāsane pabbajitvā vattapaṭipattiṃ pūrayamāno pañcavassakāle pavāretvā dvemātikaṃ paguṇaṃ katvā kammākammaṃ uggahetvā cittarucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhitvā sallahukavuttiko araññaṃ pavisitvā yo bhagavatā majjhimayāmo sayanassa koṭṭhāsoti anuññāto. Tasmimpi sampatte ‘‘pamādassa bhāyāmī’’ti mañcakaṃ ukkhipitvā rattiñca divā ca nirāhāro kammaṭṭhānameva manasākāsi.

46. In the sixth, accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭha means: it seems that this young deva, having gone forth in the Dispensation of the Teacher, fulfilling the practices, after five years, having concluded the Pavāraṇā ceremony, making the two mātikās proficient, learning what is allowable and unallowable, learning a meditation subject according to his liking, leading a simple life, entered the forest. The part of the night that the Blessed One allowed was the middle watch as a part of his sleeping arrangement. Even then, thinking, "I am afraid of negligence," he lifted up the cot, and both day and night, without food, he only focused on the meditation subject.

Athassa abbhantare satthakavātā uppajjitvā jīvitaṃ pariyādiyiṃsu. So dhurasmiṃyeva kālamakāsi. Yo hi koci bhikkhu caṅkame caṅkamamāno vā ālambanatthambhaṃ nissāya ṭhito vā caṅkamakoṭiyaṃ cīvaraṃ sīse ṭhapetvā nisinno vā nipanno vā parisamajjhe alaṅkatadhammāsane dhammaṃ desento vā kālaṃ karoti, sabbo so dhurasmiṃ kālaṃ karoti nāma. Iti ayaṃ caṅkamane kālaṃ katvā upanissayamandatāya āsavakkhayaṃ appatto tāvatiṃsabhavane mahāvimānadvāre niddāyitvā pabujjhanto viya paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Tāvadevassa suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya tigāvuto attabhāvo nibbatti.

Then, internal wind disorders arose in him, consuming his life. He passed away right on the task. Indeed, any bhikkhu who, while walking meditation, or standing leaning against a support pillar, or sitting with the robe on his head at the edge of the walking meditation path, or lying down, or teaching the Dhamma on a decorated Dhamma seat amidst the assembly, passes away, all of them pass away on the task. Thus, having passed away during walking meditation, not attaining the destruction of the āsavas due to the weakness of the supporting conditions, he took rebirth in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven as if awakening from sleep at the great mansion's gate. Immediately, his form, spanning three leagues, arose like a golden archway.

Antovimāne sahassamattā accharā taṃ disvā, ‘‘vimānasāmiko devaputto āgato, ramayissāma na’’nti tūriyāni gahetvā parivārayiṃsu. Devaputto na tāva cutabhāvaṃ jānāti, pabbajitasaññīyeva accharā oloketvā vihāracārikaṃ āgataṃ mātugāmaṃ disvā lajjī. Paṃsukūliko viya upari ṭhitaṃ ghanadukūlaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karonto aṃsakūṭaṃ paṭicchādetvā indriyāni okkhipitvā adhomukho aṭṭhāsi. Tassa kāyavikāreneva tā devatā ‘‘samaṇadevaputto aya’’nti ñatvā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘ayya, devaputta, devaloko nāmāyaṃ, na samaṇadhammassa karaṇokāso, sampattiṃ anubhavanokāso’’ti. So tatheva aṭṭhāsi. Devatā ‘‘na tāvāyaṃ sallakkhetī’’ti tūriyāni paggaṇhiṃsu. So tathāpi anolokentova aṭṭhāsi.

Inside the mansion, about a thousand celestial nymphs, seeing him, thinking, "The young deva, the owner of the mansion, has arrived; we shall delight him," took up musical instruments and surrounded him. The young deva did not yet know of his passing away, and still with the perception of one gone forth, looking at the celestial nymphs, he felt ashamed as if seeing a woman who had come to the monastery. Like a rag-robe wearer, covering the shoulder joint, making the fine cloth on top one-sided, restraining his senses, he stood with his face down. Just by the change in his demeanor, those devatās, knowing, "This is a samaṇa-deva-son," said this to him: "Venerable deva-son, this is the deva-world, not a place for practicing the samaṇa-Dhamma, it is a place for experiencing prosperity." He stood just like that. The devatās, thinking, "He does not yet consider it," picked up the musical instruments. Still, he stood without looking.

Athassa sabbakāyikaṃ ādāsaṃ purato ṭhapayiṃsu. So chāyaṃ disvā cutabhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘na mayā imaṃ ṭhānaṃ patthetvā samaṇadhammo kato, uttamatthaṃ arahattaṃ patthetvā kato’’ti sampattiyā vippaṭisārī ahosi, ‘‘suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ paṭilabhissāmī’’ti takkayitvā yuddhaṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇamallo mūlakamuṭṭhiṃ labhitvā viya. So – ‘‘ayaṃ saggasampatti nāma sulabhā, buddhānaṃ pātubhāvo dullabho’’ti cintetvā vimānaṃ apavisitvāva asambhinneneva sīlena accharāsaṅghaparivuto dasabalassa santikaṃ āgamma abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhito imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi.

Then they placed a full-body mirror in front of him. Seeing the reflection, realizing his passing away, he felt remorseful for the prosperity, thinking, "I did not practice the samaṇa-Dhamma desiring this place, I practiced it desiring the supreme goal of Arahatship," like a wrestler descending into the wrestling arena thinking, "I shall obtain a golden plate," and obtaining the root grip. He, thinking, "This heavenly prosperity is easily obtained, the arising of Buddhas is difficult to obtain," having entered the mansion, surrounded by the group of nymphs with undefiled virtue, having come to the presence of the Ten-Powered One, having paid homage, standing to one side, spoke this verse.

accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭhanti accharāgaṇena gītavāditasaddehi saṅghositaṃ.Pisācagaṇasevitanti tameva accharāgaṇaṃ pisācagaṇaṃ katvā vadati.Vananti nandanavanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Ayañhi niyāmacittatāya attano garubhāvena devagaṇaṃ ‘‘devagaṇo’’ti vattuṃ na roceti. ‘‘Pisācagaṇo’’ti vadati. Nandanavanañca ‘‘nandana’’nti avatvā ‘‘mohana’’nti vadati.Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatīti kathaṃ niggamanaṃ bhavissati, kathaṃ atikkamo bhavissati, arahattassa me padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vipassanaṃ ācikkhatha bhagavāti vadati.

accharāgaṇasaṅghuṭṭha means resounded with the sound of singing and musical instruments by a group of nymphs. Pisācagaṇasevita means he speaks of that same group of nymphs, considering them a group of goblins. Vana means he speaks referring to the Nandana Grove. Indeed, due to his disciplined mind, he does not like to call the group of devas a "deva-group" because of his respect. He calls them a "goblin-group." And he does not say "Nandana" for Nandana Grove, but says "Mohana." Kathaṃ yātrā bhavissatī means how will there be an exit, how will there be an overcoming? Show me the Vipassanā, the foundation for my Arahatship, Blessed One, is what he says.

ujuko nāmātiādimāha.

He spoke beginning with ujuko nāmā.

ujukoti kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ abhāvato aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo ujuko nāma.Abhayā nāma sā disāti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tasmiṃ hi kiñci bhayaṃ natthi, taṃ vā pattassa bhayaṃ natthīti ‘‘abhayā nāma sā disā’’ti vuttaṃ.Ratho akūjanoti aṭṭhaṅgiko maggova adhippeto. Yathā hi pākatikaratho akkhe vā anabbhañjite atirekesu vā manussesu abhiruḷhesu kūjati viravati, na evaṃ ariyamaggo. So hi ekappahārena caturāsītiyāpi pāṇasahassesu abhiruhantesu na kūjati na viravati. Tasmā ‘‘akūjano’’ti vutto.Dhammacakkehi saṃyutoti kāyikacetasikavīriyasaṅkhātehi dhammacakkehi saṃyutto.

ujuko means the eightfold path is straight because of the absence of bodily crookedness, etc. Abhayā nāma sā disā means he speaks referring to Nibbāna. Indeed, there is no fear in that, or there is no fear for one who has attained it, therefore it is said, "Abhayā nāma sā disā." Ratho akūjano means the eightfold path is intended. Just as an ordinary chariot creaks and makes noise when the axle is not well-fitted or when too many people have climbed on, so the Noble Path does not. Indeed, it does not creak or make noise even when eighty-four thousand beings climb on it with one blow. Therefore, it is called "akūjano." Dhammacakkehi saṃyuto means connected with the Dhamma wheels consisting of bodily and mental effort.

Hirīti ettha hiriggahaṇena ottappampi gahitameva hoti.Tassa apālamboti yathā bāhirakarathassa rathe ṭhitānaṃ yodhānaṃ apatanatthāya dārumayaṃ apālambanaṃ hoti, evaṃ imassa maggarathassa ajjhattabahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ hirottappaṃ apālambanaṃ.Satyassaparivāraṇanti rathassa sīhacammādiparivāro viya imassāpi maggarathassa sampayuttā sati parivāraṇaṃ.Dhammanti lokuttaramaggaṃ.Sammādiṭṭhipurejavanti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhipurejavā assa pubbayāyikāti sammādiṭṭhipurejavo, taṃ sammādiṭṭhipurejavaṃ. Yathā hi paṭhamataraṃ rājapurisehi kāṇakuṇiādīnaṃ****nīharaṇena magge sodhite pacchā rājā nikkhamati, evamevaṃ vipassanā sammādiṭṭhiyā aniccādivasena khandhādīsu sodhitesu pacchā bhūmiladdhavaṭṭaṃ parijānamānā maggasammādiṭṭhi uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammāhaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi, sammādiṭṭhipurejava’’nti.

Hirī: here, by the inclusion of moral shame (hirī), moral dread (ottappa) is also included. Tassa apālambo means just as there is a wooden support for the warriors standing in an external chariot to prevent them from falling, so for this path-chariot, moral shame and moral dread, arising internally and externally, are the support. Satyassa parivāraṇa means mindfulness associated with this path-chariot is a surrounding like the lion skin or other coverings of a chariot. Dhamma means the supramundane path. Sammādiṭṭhipurejava means for him, the right view of insight (vipassanā-sammādiṭṭhi) is foremost, it goes before; therefore, it is sammādiṭṭhipurejava, that sammādiṭṭhipurejava. Just as a king comes out later after the road has been cleared by royal officials removing the blind and hunchbacks first, so too, after the aggregates and elements have been cleared by insight right view (vipassanā-sammādiṭṭhi) in terms of impermanence, etc., the path right view (magga-sammādiṭṭhi) arises, fully understanding the round once the ground has been obtained. Therefore, it was said, "Dhamma ahaṃ sārathiṃ brūmi, sammādiṭṭhipurejava."

Iti bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā avasāne cattāri saccāni dīpesi. Desanāpariyosāne devaputto sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Yathā hi rañño bhojanakāle attano mukhappamāṇe kabaḷe ukkhitte aṅke nisinno putto attano mukhappamāṇeneva tato kabaḷaṃ karoti, evamevaṃ bhagavati arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ desentepi sattā attano upanissayānurūpena sotāpattiphalādīni pāpuṇanti. Ayampi devaputto sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā bhagavantaṃ gandhādīhi pūjetvā pakkāmīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Thus, the Blessed One, having completed the teaching, at the end revealed the Four Noble Truths. At the end of the teaching, the young deva was established in the fruit of stream-entry. Just as when the king is eating, when a morsel of the size of his mouth is raised, the son sitting on his lap makes a morsel of the same size from that, so too, even when the Blessed One teaches with the peak of Arahatship, beings attain the fruits of stream-entry, etc., according to their supporting conditions. This young deva too, having attained the fruit of stream-entry, having honored the Blessed One with scents, etc., departed. The sixth is concluded.

7. Vanaropasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Vanaropasutta Commentary

47.Sattamedhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannāti ke dhammaṭṭhā, ke sīlasampannāti pucchati. Bhagavā imaṃ pañhaṃ thāvaravatthunā dīpentoārāmaropātiādimāha. Tatthaārāmaropāti pupphārāmaphalārāmaropakā.Vanaropāti sayaṃjāte aropimavane sīmaṃ parikkhipitvā cetiyabodhicaṅkamanamaṇḍapakuṭileṇarattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānānaṃ kārakā chāyūpage rukkhe ropetvā dadamānāpi vanaropāyeva nāma.Setukārakāti visame setuṃ karonti, udake nāvaṃ paṭiyādenti.Papanti pānīyadānasālaṃ.Udapānanti yaṃkiñci pokkharaṇītaḷākādiṃ.Upassayanti vāsāgāraṃ. ‘‘Upāsaya’’ntipi pāṭho.

47. In the seventh, dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannā means: who are established in the Dhamma, who are endowed with virtue? The Blessed One, clarifying this question with a permanent object, spoke beginning with ārāmaropā. There, ārāmaropā means planters of flower gardens and fruit gardens. Vanaropā means those who plant and give shady trees, surrounding the naturally grown forest with a boundary, constructing shrines, Bodhi trees, walking meditation paths, pavilions, huts, lodgings for the night and day; they too are called vanaropā. Setukārakā means those who build bridges in uneven places, prepare boats in the water. Papa means a water-giving hall. Udapāna means any pond, lake, etc. Upassaya means a dwelling place. There is also a reading "upāsaya."

Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti na akusalavitakkaṃ vā vitakkentassa niddāyantassa vā pavaḍḍhati. Yadā yadā pana anussarati, tadā tadā tassa vaḍḍhati. Imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti vuttaṃ.Dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannāti tasmiṃ dhamme ṭhitattā tenapi sīlena sampannattā dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannā. Atha vā evarūpāni puññāni karontānaṃ dasa kusalā dhammā pūrenti, tesu ṭhitattā dhammaṭṭhā. Teneva ca sīlena sampannattā sīlasampannāti. Sattamaṃ.

Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī means it does not increase for one who is thinking unwholesome thoughts or for one who is sleeping. But whenever he recollects it, then and then it increases for him. Referring to this meaning, it is said, "Sadā puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī." Dhammaṭṭhā sīlasampannā means they are established in the Dhamma and endowed with virtue because of being established in that Dhamma and endowed with that virtue. Or, when such meritorious deeds are done, the ten wholesome Dhammas are fulfilled for those who do them; they are dhammaṭṭhā because of being established in them. And they are sīlasampannā because of being endowed with that virtue. The seventh is concluded.

8. Jetavanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Jetavanasutta Commentary

48.Aṭṭhameidaṃ hi taṃ jetavananti anāthapiṇḍiko devaputto jetavanassa ceva buddhādīnañca vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ āgato evamāha.Isisaṅghanisevitanti bhikkhusaṅghanisevitaṃ.

48. In the eighth, idaṃ hi taṃ jetavana means Anāthapiṇḍika deva-son, having come for the purpose of praising the Jetavana and the Buddha, etc., spoke thus. Isisaṅghanisevita means frequented by the community of bhikkhus.

kammaṃ vijjātiādimāha. Tatthakammanti maggacetanā.Vijjāti maggapaññā.Dhammoti samādhipakkhikā dhammā.Sīlaṃ jīvitamuttamanti sīle patiṭṭhitassa jīvitaṃ uttamanti dasseti. Atha vāvijjāti diṭṭhisaṅkappā.Dhammoti vāyāmasatisamādhayo.Sīlanti vācākammantājīvā.Jīvitamuttamanti etasmiṃ sīle ṭhitassa jīvitaṃ nāma uttamaṃ.Etena maccā sujjhantīti etena aṭṭhaṅgikamaggena sattā visujjhanti.

He spoke beginning with kammaṃ vijjā. There, kamma means path-intention. Vijjā means path-wisdom. Dhammo means Dhammas belonging to the side of concentration. Sīlaṃ jīvitamuttama means he shows that life is supreme for one established in virtue. Or, vijjā means views and thoughts. Dhammo means effort, mindfulness, and concentration. Sīla means speech, action, and livelihood. Jīvitamuttama means life is supreme for one established in this virtue. Etena maccā sujjhantī means beings are purified by this eightfold path.

Tasmāti yasmā maggena sujjhanti, na gottadhanehi, tasmā.Yoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena samādhipakkhiyadhammaṃ vicineyya.Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tasmiṃ ariyamagge visujjhati. Atha vāyoniso vicine dhammanti upāyena pañcakkhandhadhammaṃ vicineyya.Evaṃ tattha visujjhatīti evaṃ tesu catūsu saccesu visujjhati.

Tasmā means because they are purified by the path, not by lineage and wealth, therefore. Yoniso vicine dhamma means one should investigate the Dhammas belonging to the side of concentration by way of skillful means. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatī means thus one is purified in that Noble Path. Or, yoniso vicine dhamma means one should investigate the five aggregates Dhamma by way of skillful means. Evaṃ tattha visujjhatī means thus one is purified in those four truths.

sāriputtovātiādimāha. Tatthasāriputtovāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, etehi paññādīhi sāriputtova seyyoti vadati.Upasamenāti kilesaupasamena.Pāraṃ gatoti nibbānaṃ gato. Yo koci nibbānaṃ patto bhikkhu, soetāvaparamo siyā,na therena uttaritaro nāma atthīti vadati. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

sāriputtovā means it is a term of determination; he says that Sāriputta is superior with these wisdoms, etc. Upasamenā means by the calming of defilements. Pāraṃ gato means gone to Nibbāna. Whatever bhikkhu has attained Nibbāna, etāvaparamo siyā, he says that there is no one superior to that Thera. The rest is clear in meaning. The eighth is concluded.

9. Maccharisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Maccharisutta Commentary

49.Navamemaccharinoti maccherena samannāgatā. Ekacco hi attano vasanaṭṭhāne bhikkhuṃ hatthaṃ pasāretvāpi na vandati, aññattha gato vihāraṃ pavisitvā sakkaccaṃ vanditvā madhurapaṭisanthāraṃ karoti – ‘‘bhante, amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ nāgacchatha, sampanno padeso, paṭibalā mayaṃ ayyānaṃ yāgubhattādīhi upaṭṭhānaṃ kātu’’nti. Bhikkhū ‘‘saddho ayaṃ upāsako’’ti yāgubhattādīhi saṅgaṇhanti. Atheko thero tassa gāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya carati. So taṃ disvā aññena vā gacchati, gharaṃ vā pavisati. Sacepi sammukhībhāvaṃ āgacchati, hatthena vanditvā – ‘‘ayyassa bhikkhaṃ detha, ahaṃ ekena kammena gacchāmī’’ti pakkamati. Thero sakalagāmaṃ caritvā tucchapattova nikkhamati. Idaṃ tāva mudumacchariyaṃ nāma, yena samannāgato adāyakopi dāyako viya paññāyati. Idha pana thaddhamacchariyaṃ adhippetaṃ, yena samannāgato bhikkhūsu piṇḍāya paviṭṭhesu, ‘‘therā ṭhitā’’ti vutte, ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ pādā rujjantī’’tiādīni vatvā silāthambho viya khāṇuko viya ca thaddho hutvā tiṭṭhati, sāmīcimpi na karoti.Kadariyāti idaṃ maccharinoti padasseva vevacanaṃ. Mudukampi hi macchariyaṃ ‘‘macchariya’’nteva vuccati, thaddhaṃ pana kadariyaṃ nāma.Paribhāsakāti bhikkhū gharadvāre ṭhite disvā, ‘‘kiṃ tumhe kasitvā āgatā, vapitvā, lāyitvā? Mayaṃ attanopi na labhāma, kuto tumhākaṃ, sīghaṃ nikkhamathā’’tiādīhi saṃtajjakā.Antarāyakarāti dāyakassa saggantarāyo, paṭiggāhakānaṃ lābhantarāyo, attano upaghātoti imesaṃ antarāyānaṃ kārakā.

49. In the ninth, maccharino means those endowed with stinginess. Indeed, some, even extending their hand, do not pay homage to a bhikkhu in their dwelling place, but having gone elsewhere, having entered a monastery, respectfully pay homage and make sweet conversation: "Venerable Sir, you do not come to our dwelling place; it is a prosperous area, we are capable of attending to the venerable ones with rice-gruel, etc." The bhikkhus accept them with rice-gruel, etc., thinking, "This upāsaka is faithful." Then a certain Thera goes to his village for alms. Seeing him, he goes another way or enters the house. Even if he comes face to face, having paid homage with his hand, he departs, saying, "Give alms to the venerable one; I am going on some business." The Thera, having walked through the entire village, comes out with an empty bowl. This is called mild stinginess, by which one endowed appears to be a giver even though he is not a giver. But here, rigid stinginess is intended, by which, when bhikkhus have entered for alms, when it is said, "The Theras are standing," he stands rigidly like a stone pillar or a post, saying things like, "Are my feet hurting?" He does not even do what is proper. Kadariyā is another word for maccharino. Even mild stinginess is called "macchariya," but rigid stinginess is called kadariya. Paribhāsakā means those who scold, seeing bhikkhus standing at the doorway, saying things like, "Did you come after plowing, sowing, planting? We ourselves do not get enough, where will you get it from? Get out quickly." Antarāyakarā means they are the cause of obstacles, obstacles to heaven for the giver, obstacles to gain for the recipients, and harm to oneself.

Samparāyoti paraloko.Ratīti pañcakāmaguṇarati.Khiḍḍāti kāyikakhiḍḍādikā tividhā khiḍḍā.Diṭṭhe dhammesa vipākoti tasmiṃ nibbattabhavane diṭṭhe dhamme esa vipāko.Samparāye ca duggatīti ‘‘yamalokaṃ upapajjare’’ti vutte samparāye ca duggati.

Samparāyo means the next world. Ratī means sensual pleasure in the five strands of sense pleasure. Khiḍḍā means the three kinds of play, bodily play, etc. Diṭṭhe dhammesa vipāko means this is the result in this very life in that reborn existence. Samparāye ca duggatī means in the next life, there is a bad destination, as stated, "they go to the realm of Yama."

Vadaññūti bhikkhū gharadvāre ṭhitā kiñcāpi tuṇhīva honti, atthato pana – ‘‘bhikkhaṃ dethā’’ti vadanti nāma. Tatra ye ‘‘mayaṃ pacāma, ime pana na pacanti, pacamāne patvā alabhantā kuhiṃ labhissantī’’ti? Deyyadhammaṃ saṃvibhajanti, te vadaññū nāma.Pakāsantīti vimānappabhāya jotanti.Parasambhatesūti parehi sampiṇḍitesu.Samparāye ca suggatīti, ‘‘ete saggā’’ti evaṃ vuttasamparāye sugati. Ubhinnampi vā etesaṃ tato cavitvā puna samparāyepi duggatisugatiyeva hotīti. Navamaṃ.

Vadaññū means even though bhikkhus are silent when standing at the doorway, in meaning, they are saying, "Give alms." Among them, those who share the alms-food, thinking, "We cook, but these ones do not cook; where will they get it if they do not get it when we are cooking?", they are called vadaññū. Pakāsantī means they shine with the light of the mansion. Parasambhatesū means among those collected by others. Samparāye ca suggatī means in the next life, there is a good destination, in the next life that was spoken of as "these heavens." Or, for both of these, having passed away from there, there is indeed a bad or good destination again in the next life. The ninth is concluded.

10. Ghaṭīkārasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Ghaṭīkārasutta Commentary

50.Dasameupapannāseti nibbattivasena upagatā.Vimuttāti avihābrahmalokasmiṃ upapattisamanantarameva arahattaphalavimuttiyā vimuttā.Mānusaṃ dehanti idha pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni eva vuttāni.Dibbayoganti pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni.Upaccagunti atikkamiṃsu.Upakotiādīni tesaṃ therānaṃ nāmāni.Kusalī bhāsasī tesanti, ‘‘kusala’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ imassa atthītikusalī,tesaṃ therānaṃ tvaṃ kusalaṃ anavajjaṃ bhāsasi, thomesi pasaṃsasi, paṇḍitosi devaputtāti vadati.Taṃ te dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti te therā taṃ dhammaṃ idha tumhākaṃ sāsane jānitvā.Gambhīranti gambhīratthaṃ.Brahmacārī nirāmisoti nirāmisabrahmacārī nāma anāgāmī, anāgāmī ahosinti attho.Ahuvāti ahosi.Sagāmeyyoti ekagāmavāsī. Pariyosānagāthā saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitāti. Dasamaṃ.

50.In the tenth, upapannāse means those who have approached in the manner of rebirth. Vimuttā means liberated with the liberation of the fruit of arahantship immediately upon arising in the Avihā Brahma world. Mānusaṃ dehaṃ here refers to the five lower fetters (orambhāgiya-saṃyojana). Dibbayogaṃ means the five higher fetters (uddhambhāgiya-saṃyojana). Upaccagū means they have transcended. Upako etc. are the names of those elders (theras). Kusalī bhāsasī tesaṃ means, kusalī here implies, one who possesses this quality, therefore kusalī; you speak well, without fault, of those elders, you praise and commend them, you are wise, O son of the gods. Taṃ te dhammaṃ idhaññāya means those elders, having known that Dhamma here in your Dispensation. Gambhīraṃ means profound in meaning. Brahmacārī nirāmiso means a Brahmacārī without sensual pleasures, namely, a Non-Returner (anāgāmī); the meaning is that he became a Non-Returner. Ahuvā means he became. Sagāmeyyo means one who lives in the same village. The concluding verse was placed there by those who compiled the teachings (saṅgītikāras). The tenth.

Ādittavaggo pañcamo.

The Āditta Chapter, the fifth.

6. Jarāvaggo

6. The Jarā Chapter

1. Jarāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Jarā Sutta Commentary

51.Jarāvaggassa paṭhamesādhūti laddhakaṃ bhaddakaṃ.Sīlaṃ yāva jarāti iminā idaṃ dasseti – yathā muttāmaṇirattavatthādīni ābharaṇāni taruṇakāleyeva sobhanti, jarājiṇṇakāle tāni dhārento ‘‘ayaṃ ajjāpi bālabhāvaṃ pattheti, ummattako maññe’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, na evaṃ sīlaṃ. Sīlañhi niccakālaṃ sobhati. Bālakālepi hi sīlaṃ rakkhantaṃ ‘‘kiṃ imassa sīlenā’’ti? Vattāro natthi. Majjhimakālepi mahallakakālepīti.

51.In the first of the Jarā Chapter, sādhu means what is obtained is auspicious. Sīlaṃ yāva jarā by this, it shows this: just as ornaments such as pearls, gems, and red clothes are beautiful only in youth, but if one wears them when old and decrepit, one becomes liable to be said, "This one still desires youth, I think he is crazy," but it is not so with sīla. For sīla is always beautiful. For even if one protects sīla in childhood, there are none who say, "What is the use of sīla to him?" [It is beautiful] in middle age and old age as well.

Saddhāsādhu patiṭṭhitāti hatthāḷavakacittagahapatiādīnaṃ viya maggena āgatā patiṭṭhitasaddhā nāma sādhu.Paññā narānaṃ ratananti ettha cittīkataṭṭhādīhi ratanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Saddhā sādhu patiṭṭhitā means, like Hatthāḷavaka and Cittagahapati and others, established saddhā that has come by the path is truly good. Paññā narānaṃ ratanaṃ here, ratanaṃ should be understood as something that is esteemed. This was said:

‘‘Yadi cittīkatanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā cittīkato purisasīho, ye ca loke cittīkatā, tesaṃ cittīkato bhagavā. Yadi ratikaranti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā ratikaro purisasīho, tassa vacanena carantā jhānaratisukhena abhiramanti. Yadi atulyanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā atulo purisasīho. Na hi sakkā tuletuṃ guṇehi guṇapāramiṃ gato. Yadi dullabhanti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā dullabho purisasīho. Yadi anomasattaparibhoganti ratanaṃ, nanu bhagavā anomo sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanenā’’ti.

"If what is esteemed is a jewel, surely the Blessed One is esteemed, the lion of men; and of those esteemed in the world, the Blessed One is the one who is esteemed. If what gives delight is a jewel, surely the Blessed One is the giver of delight, the lion of men; those who live according to his word delight in the pleasure of jhāna. If what is incomparable is a jewel, surely the Blessed One is incomparable, the lion of men. Indeed, it is not possible to compare him, who has gone to the perfection of qualities, with qualities. If what is rare is a jewel, surely the Blessed One is rare, the lion of men. If what is enjoyed by a non-inferior being is a jewel, surely the Blessed One is non-inferior in sīla, samādhi, paññā, vimutti, and the knowledge and vision of vimutti."

Puññanti puññacetanā, sā hi arūpattā pariharituṃ na sakkāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Puññaṃ means the volition of merit (puññacetanā), for indeed, being formless, it is not possible to remove. The first.

2. Ajarasāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ajarasā Sutta Commentary

52.Dutiyeajarasāti ajīraṇena, avipattiyāti attho. Sīlañhi avipannameva sādhu hoti, vipannasīlaṃ ācariyupajjhāyādayopi na saṅgaṇhanti, gatagataṭṭhāne niddhamitabbova hotīti. Dutiyaṃ.

52.In the second, ajarasā means without decay, without failure. For sīla is truly good only when it does not fail; even teachers and preceptors do not accept sīla that has failed; one should be expelled from every place one goes. The second.

3. Mittasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Mitta Sutta Commentary

53.Tatiyesatthoti saddhiṃcaro, jaṅghasattho vā sakaṭasattho vā.Mittanti roge uppanne pāṭaṅkiyā vā aññena vā yānena haritvā khemantasampāpanena mittaṃ.Sake ghareti attano gehe. Tathārūpe roge jāte puttabhariyādayo jigucchanti, mātā pana asucimpi candanaṃ viya maññati. Tasmā sā sake ghare mittaṃ.Sahāyo atthajātassāti uppannakiccassa yo taṃ kiccaṃ vahati nittharati, so kiccesu saha ayanabhāvena sahāyo mittaṃ, surāpānādisahāyā pana na mittā.Samparāyikanti samparāyahitaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.

53.In the third, sattha means a fellow traveler, whether a caravan on foot or a caravan of carts. Mittaṃ means, when disease has arisen, conveying [one] to a place of safety by means of a palanquin or other vehicle. Sake ghare means in one's own home. When such a disease arises, children and wives despise [one], but a mother considers even the impurity as sandalwood. Therefore, she is a friend in one's own home. Sahāyo atthajātassa means, one who carries out and completes that task that has arisen, that one is a friend in tasks due to being of mutual benefit; companions in drinking alcohol and so on are not friends. Samparāyikaṃ means beneficial for the future life. The third.

4. Vatthusuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vatthu Sutta Commentary

54.Catuttheputtā vatthūti mahallakakāle paṭijagganaṭṭhena puttā patiṭṭhā.Paramoti aññesaṃ akathetabbassapi guyhassa kathetabbayuttatāya bhariyā paramo sakhā nāma. Catutthaṃ.

54.In the fourth, puttā vatthū means sons are a support in old age in the sense of taking care of one. Paramo means the wife is the best friend, since it is appropriate to tell her even secrets that should not be told to others. The fourth.

5-7. Paṭhamajanasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-7. First Janā Sutta, etc., Commentary

55.Pañcamevidhāvatīti parasamuddādigamanavasena ito cito ca vidhāvati. Pañcamaṃ.

55.In the fifth, vidhāvatī means it runs here and there, going to the ocean and so on. The fifth.

56.Chaṭṭhedukkhāti vaṭṭadukkhato. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

56.In the sixth, dukkhā means from the round of suffering (vaṭṭadukkha). The sixth.

57.Sattameparāyaṇanti nipphatti avassayo. Sattamaṃ.

57.In the seventh, parāyaṇaṃ means final destination, refuge. The seventh.

8. Uppathasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Uppatha Sutta Commentary

58.Aṭṭhamerāgo uppathoti sugatiñca nibbānañca gacchantassa amaggo.Rattindivakkhayoti rattidivehi, rattidivesu vā khīyati.Itthī malanti sesaṃ bāhiramalaṃ bhasmakhārādīhi dhovitvā sakkā sodhetuṃ, mātugāmamalena duṭṭho pana na sakkā suddho nāma kātunti itthī ‘‘mala’’nti vuttā.Etthāti ettha itthiyaṃ pajā sajjati.Tapoti indriyasaṃvaradhutaṅgaguṇavīriyadukkarakārikānaṃ nāmaṃ, idha pana ṭhapetvā dukkarakārikaṃ sabbāpi kilesasantāpikā paṭipadā vaṭṭati.Brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

58.In the eighth, rāgo uppatho means an incorrect path for one going to a good destination (sugati) and Nibbāna. Rattindivakkhayo means it wastes away by nights and days, or in nights and days. Itthī malaṃ means the remaining external impurities can be cleansed by washing with ashes, lye, and so on, but one who is corrupted by the impurity of womankind cannot be made pure, therefore woman is called "impurity." Ettha means in this woman, the populace is attached. Tapo means the name of the qualities of sense restraint, the dhutaṅgas, energy, and difficult practices; but here, setting aside the difficult practices, all practices that torment the defilements are suitable. Brahmacariyaṃ means abstinence from sexual intercourse. The eighth.

9. Dutiyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Second Sutta Commentary

59.Navamekissa cābhiratoti kismiṃ abhirato.Dutiyāti sugatiñceva nibbānañca gacchantassa dutiyikā.Paññā cenaṃ pasāsatīti paññā etaṃ purisaṃ ‘‘idaṃ karohi, idaṃ mākarī’’ti anusāsati. Navamaṃ.

59.In the ninth, kissa cābhirato means in what is he delighted? Dutiyā means a second [path] for one going to a good destination and Nibbāna. Paññā cenaṃ pasāsatī means wisdom instructs this person, "Do this, do not do that." The ninth.

10. Kavisuttavaṇṇanā
10. Kavi Sutta Commentary

60.Dasamechando nidānanti gāyattiādiko chando gāthānaṃ nidānaṃ. Pubbapaṭṭhāpanagāthā ārabhanto hi ‘‘kataracchandena hotū’’ti ārabhati.Viyañjananti jananaṃ. Akkharaṃ hi padaṃ janeti, padaṃ gāthaṃ janeti, gāthā atthaṃ pakāsetīti.Nāmasannissitāti samuddādipaṇṇattinissitā. Gāthā ārabhanto hi samuddaṃ vā pathaviṃ vā yaṃ kiñci nāmaṃ nissayitvāva ārabhati.Āsayoti patiṭṭhā. Kavito hi gāthā pavattanti. So tāsaṃ patiṭṭhā hotīti. Dasamaṃ.

60.In the tenth, chando nidānaṃ means the meter, such as the gāyattrī, is the basis of the verses. For when beginning to compose a preliminary verse, one begins, "In which meter should it be?" Viyañjanaṃ means generation. For a letter generates a word, a word generates a verse, and a verse reveals the meaning. Nāmasannissitā means based on designation, such as ocean, etc. For when beginning a verse, one begins relying on some name, whether it be the ocean or the earth. Āsayo means foundation. For verses proceed from the poet. He is their foundation. The tenth.

Jarāvaggo chaṭṭho.

The Jarā Chapter, the sixth.

7. Addhavaggo

7. The Addhā Chapter

1. Nāmasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Nāma Sutta Commentary

61.Addhavaggassa paṭhamenāmaṃ sabbaṃ addhabhavīti nāmaṃ sabbaṃ abhibhavati anupatati. Opapātikena vā hi kittimena vā nāmena mutto satto vā saṅkhāro vā natthi. Yassapi hi rukkhassa vā pāsāṇassa vā ‘‘idaṃ nāma nāma’’nti na jānanti, anāmakotveva tassa nāmaṃ hoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

61.In the first of the Addhā Chapter, nāmaṃ sabbaṃ addhabhavī means name overcomes all, pervades all. For there is no being or person or formation that is free from a name, whether it is spontaneously born or conventionally named. For even if they do not know "this is the name" of a tree or a stone, it has the name "unnamed." The first.

2-3. Cittasuttādivaṇṇanā
2-3. Citta Sutta, etc., Commentary

62.Dutiyesabbeva vasamanvagūti ye cittassa vasaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃyeva anavasesapariyādānametaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.

62.In the second, sabbeva vasamanvagū means this is the complete totality only of those who go under the control of the mind. The second.

63.Tatiyepi eseva nayo. Tatiyaṃ.

63.In the third, the method is the same. The third.

4-5. Saṃyojanasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-5. Saṃyojana Sutta, etc., Commentary

64.Catutthekiṃ su saṃyojanoti kiṃ saṃyojano kiṃ bandhano?Vicāraṇanti vicaraṇā pādāni. Bahuvacane ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.Vitakkassa vicāraṇanti vitakko tassa pādā. Catutthaṃ.

64.In the fourth, kiṃ su saṃyojano means what is the fetter, what is the bond? Vicāraṇaṃ means the bases for examination. The singular is made into the plural. Vitakkassa vicāraṇaṃ means thought is the basis for it. The fourth.

65.Pañcamepi eseva nayo. Pañcamaṃ.

65.In the fifth, the method is the same. The fifth.

6. Attahatasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Attahata Sutta Commentary

66.Chaṭṭhekenassubbhāhatoti kena abbhāhato. Su-kāro nipātamattaṃ.Icchādhūpāyitoti icchāya āditto. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

66.In the sixth, kenassubbhāhato means by what is he struck down? Su- is merely an expletive. Icchādhūpāyito means inflamed by desire. The sixth.

7-9. Uḍḍitasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-9. Uḍḍita Sutta, etc., Commentary

67.Sattametaṇhāya uḍḍitoti taṇhāya ullaṅghito. Cakkhuñhi taṇhārajjunā āvunitvā rūpanāgadante uḍḍitaṃ, sotādīni saddādīsūti taṇhāya uḍḍito loko.Maccunā pihitoti anantare attabhāve kataṃ kammaṃ na dūraṃ ekacittantaraṃ, balavatiyā pana māraṇantikavedanāya pabbatena viya otthaṭattā sattā taṃ na bujjhantīti ‘‘maccunā pihito loko’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattamaṃ.

67.In the seventh, taṇhāya uḍḍito means raised up by craving. For having wrapped the eye with the rope of craving, [the world] is raised up in the teeth of the form-serpent; the ear and so on [are raised up] in sounds and so on; [therefore] the world is raised up by craving. Maccunā pihito means the karma done in the immediately preceding existence is not far, [only] one mind-moment away, but because beings are covered over, as if by a mountain, by the powerful death-producing pain, they do not realize it; therefore, it is said, "The world is covered by death." The seventh.

68.Aṭṭhame sveva pañho devatāya heṭṭhupariyāyavasena pucchito. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

68.In the eighth, the same question was asked by the deity in an inverted manner. The eighth.

69.Navame sabbaṃ uttānameva. Navamaṃ.

69.In the ninth, everything is clear in meaning. The ninth.

10. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Loka Sutta Commentary

70.Dasamekismiṃ loko samuppannoti kismiṃ uppanne loko uppannoti pucchati.Chasūti chasu ajjhattikesu āyatanesu uppannesu uppannoti vuccati.Chasu kubbatīti tesuyeva chasu santhavaṃ karoti.Upādāyāti tāniyeva ca upādāya āgamma paṭicca pavattati.Vihaññatīti tesuyeva chasu vihaññati pīḷiyati. Iti ajjhattikāyatanavasena ayaṃ pañho āgato, ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ pana vasena āharituṃ vaṭṭati. Chasu hi ajjhattikāyatanesu uppannesu ayaṃ uppanno nāma hoti, chasu bāhiresu santhavaṃ karoti, channaṃ ajjhattikānaṃ upādāya chasu bāhiresu vihaññatīti. Dasamaṃ.

70.In the tenth, kismiṃ loko samuppanno means, in what arising does the world arise? Chasu means when the six internal sense bases have arisen, it is said to have arisen. Chasu kubbatī means he makes intimacy with those same six. Upādāyā means relying on and depending on those very [bases], it proceeds. Vihaññatī means in those same six, it is afflicted and harmed. Thus, this question has come in terms of the internal sense bases, but it is appropriate to bring it in terms of the internal and external [bases]. For when the six internal sense bases have arisen, this one is said to have arisen; he makes intimacy with the six external ones; relying on the six internal ones, he is afflicted in the six external ones. The tenth.

Addhavaggo sattamo.

The Addhā Chapter, the seventh.

8. Chetvāvaggo

8. The Chetvā Chapter

1. Chetvāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Chetvā Sutta Commentary

71.Chetvāvaggassa paṭhamechetvāti vadhitvā.Sukhaṃ setīti kodhapariḷāhena aparidayhamānattā sukhaṃ sayati.Na socatīti kodhavināsena vinaṭṭhadomanassattā na socati.Visamūlassāti dukkhavipākassa.Madhuraggassāti kuddhassa paṭikujjhitvā, akkuṭṭhassa paccakkositvā, pahaṭassa ca paṭipaharitvā sukhaṃ uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya madhuraggoti vutto. Imasmiṃ hi ṭhāne pariyosānaṃ agganti vuttaṃ.Ariyāti buddhādayo. Paṭhamaṃ.

71.In the first of the Chetvā Chapter, chetvā means having killed. Sukhaṃ setī means he sleeps happily because he is not burned by the heat of anger. Na socatī means he does not grieve because the mental pain has vanished with the destruction of anger. Visamūlassā means of painful result. Madhuraggassā means to one who is angry, pleasure arises from retaliating, from answering back to one who scolds, and from striking back at one who strikes; referring to that, it is said "sweet at the tip." In this place, the end is called the tip. Ariyā means the Buddhas, etc. The first.

2. Rathasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ratha Sutta Commentary

72.Dutiye paññāyati etenātipaññāṇaṃ. Dhajo rathassāti mahantasmiṃ hi saṅgāmasīse dūratova dhajaṃ disvā ‘‘asukarañño nāma ayaṃ ratho’’ti ratho pākaṭo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dhajo rathassa paññāṇa’’nti.Aggipi dūratova dhūmena paññāyati. Coḷaraṭṭhaṃ paṇḍuraṭṭhanti evaṃraṭṭhampi raññā paññāyati. Cakkavattirañño dhītāpi panaitthī‘‘asukassa nāma bhariyā’’ti bhattāraṃ patvāva paññāyati. Tasmādhūmo paññāṇamagginotiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.

72.In the second, paññāṇaṃ means that by which something is known. Dhajo rathassa means in a great battlefield, the chariot becomes known from afar by seeing the flag, [and knowing] "this is the chariot of such-and-such a king." Therefore, it was said, "The flag is the mark of the chariot." Aggi is also known from afar by the smoke. Even the country is known by the king, such as the Coḷa country and the Paṇḍu country. But even a daughter, the woman, of a wheel-turning monarch (cakkavattirāja) becomes known only after attaining a husband, [and known as] "the wife of so-and-so." Therefore, it was said, "dhūmo paññāṇamaggino," etc. The second.

3. Vittasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Vitta Sutta Commentary

73.Tatiyesaddhīdha vittanti yasmā saddho saddhāya muttamaṇiādīnipi vittāni labhati, tissopi kulasampadā, cha kāmasaggāni, nava brahmaloke patvā pariyosāne amatamahānibbānadassanampi labhati, tasmā maṇimuttādīhi vittehi saddhāvittameva seṭṭhaṃ.Dhammoti dasakusalakammapatho.Sukhamāvahatīti sabbampi sāsavānāsavaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhasukhaṃ āvahati.Sādutaranti lokasmiṃ loṇambilādīnaṃ sabbarasānaṃ saccameva madhurataraṃ. Saccasmiṃ hi ṭhitā sīghavegaṃ nadimpi nivattenti, visampi nimmaddenti, aggimpi paṭibāhanti, devampi vassāpenti, tasmā taṃ sabbarasānaṃ madhurataranti vuttaṃ.Paññājīviṃ jīvitamāhu seṭṭhanti yo paññājīvī gahaṭṭho samāno pañcasu sīlesu patiṭṭhāya salākabhattādīni paṭṭhapetvā paññāya jīvati, pabbajito vā pana dhammena uppanne paccaye ‘‘idamattha’’nti paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ ādāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ariyaphalādhigamavasena paññāya jīvati, taṃ paññājīviṃ puggalaṃ seṭṭhaṃ jīvitaṃ jīvatīti āhu. Tatiyaṃ.

73.In the third, saddhīdha vittaṃ means since one who has saddhā obtains wealth, such as excellent jewels, by saddhā; even the wealth of a good family, the six sensual heavens, the nine Brahma worlds, and in the end, the sight of deathless great Nibbāna, therefore, of all wealth, such as jewels and pearls, the wealth of saddhā is the best. Dhammo means the ten paths of wholesome action. Sukhamāvahatī means it brings all happiness, both with and without āsavas, both defiled and undefiled. Sādutaraṃ means in the world, of all tastes such as salt and vinegar, truth is the sweetest. For those who stand in truth can even turn back a swift river, neutralize poison, repel fire, and cause the gods to rain; therefore, it is said that it is the sweetest of all tastes. Paññājīviṃ jīvitamāhu seṭṭhaṃ means those who live by wisdom, if they are householders, they establish themselves in the five precepts and live by wisdom by setting up offerings of food distributed by ticket (salākabhatta) and so on; or if they are monks, they reflect before using the requisites that have arisen through Dhamma, thinking "this is for such and such a purpose," take up a meditation subject, establish insight (vipassanā), and live by wisdom through the attainment of the noble fruits; they say that person who lives by wisdom lives the best life. The third.

4. Vuṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vuṭṭhi Sutta Commentary

74.Catutthebījanti uppatantānaṃ sattavidhaṃ dhaññabījaṃ seṭṭhaṃ. Tasmiñhi uggate janapado khemo hoti subhikkho.Nipatatanti nipatantānaṃ meghavuṭṭhi seṭṭhā. Meghavuṭṭhiyañhi sati vividhāni sassāni uppajjanti, janapadā phītā honti khemā subhikkhā.Pavajamānānanti jaṅgamānaṃ padasā caramānānaṃ gāvo seṭṭhā. Tā nissāya hi sattā pañca gorase paribhuñjamānā sukhaṃ viharanti.Pavadatanti rājakulamajjhādīsu vadantānaṃ putto varo. So hi mātāpitūnaṃ anatthāvahaṃ na vadati.

74.In the fourth, bījaṃ means the seven kinds of grain seed are the best of what sprouts. For when that sprouts, the country is secure and prosperous. Nipatataṃ means the rain cloud is the best of what falls. For when there is rain, various crops arise, and the countries are thriving, secure, and prosperous. Pavajamānānaṃ means cows are the best of those who wander on foot. For relying on them, beings live happily enjoying the five products of the cow. Pavadataṃ means a son is the best of those who speak in the royal court and so on. For he does not speak what is harmful to his parents.

Vijjāuppatataṃ seṭṭhāti purimapañhe kira sutvā samīpe ṭhitā ekā devatā ‘‘devate, kasmā tvaṃ etaṃ pañhaṃ dasabalaṃ pucchasi? Ahaṃ te kathessāmī’’ti attano khantiyā laddhiyā pañhaṃ kathesi. Atha naṃ itarā devatā āha – ‘‘yāva padhaṃsī vadesi devate yāva pagabbhā mukharā, ahaṃ buddhaṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchāmi. Tvaṃ mayhaṃ kasmā kathesī’’ti? Nivattetvā tadeva pañhaṃ dasabalaṃ pucchi. Athassā satthā vissajjentovijjā uppatatantiādimāha. Tatthavijjāti catumaggavijjā. Sā hi uppatamānā sabbākusaladhamme samugghāteti. Tasmā ‘‘uppatataṃ seṭṭhā’’ti vuttā.Avijjāti vaṭṭamūlakamahāavijjā. Sā hi nipatantānaṃ osīdantānaṃ varā.Pavajamānānanti padasā caramānānaṃ jaṅgamānaṃ anomapuññakkhettabhūto saṅgho varo. Tañhi tattha tattha disvā pasannacittā sattā sotthiṃ pāpuṇanti.Buddhoti yādiso putto vā hotu añño vā, yesaṃ kesañci vadamānānaṃ buddho varo. Tassa hi dhammadesanaṃ āgamma anekasatasahassānaṃ pāṇānaṃ bandhanamokkho hotīti. Catutthaṃ.

Vijjā uppatataṃ seṭṭhā—it is said that upon hearing the initial question, a deity standing nearby thought, "Why do you ask the Ten-Powered One this question? I will tell you," and explained the question according to their own understanding. Then the other deity said to them, "As long as you speak destructively, deity, as long as you are bold and talkative, I will ask the Buddha, the Blessed One. Why are you telling me?" Having dismissed them, they asked the Ten-Powered One the same question. Then, the Teacher, answering them, said, starting with vijjā uppatataṃ. There, vijjā means the knowledge of the four paths. For as it arises, it eradicates all unwholesome states. Therefore, it is said to be "the best of what arises." Avijjā means the great ignorance that is the root of the cycle of existence. For it is best for those who are falling and sinking. Pavajamānāna means for the Sangha, who are walking and moving from place to place, a field of incomparable merit, is the best. For seeing them in various places, beings with serene minds attain well-being. Buddho means for anyone who speaks of them, whether they are a son or someone else, the Buddha is the best. For coming to hear his teaching, the bondage of hundreds of thousands of beings is released. The fourth.

5. Bhītāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Bhītāsutta Commentary

75.Pañcamekiṃsūdha bhītāti kiṃ bhītā?Maggo canekāyatanappavuttoti aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇavasena anekehi kāraṇehi kathito. Evaṃ sante kissa bhītā hutvā ayaṃ janatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo aggahesīti vadati.Bhūripaññāti bahupañña ussannapañña.Paralokaṃ na bhāyeti imasmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyeyya.Paṇidhāyāti ṭhapetvā.Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasantoti anāthapiṇḍikādayo viya bahvannapāne ghare vasanto.Saṃvibhāgīti accharāya gahitampi nakhena phāletvā parassa datvāva bhuñjanasīlo.Vadaññūti vuttatthameva.

75.In the fifth, kiṃ sūdha bhītā—what are they afraid of? Maggo ca nekāyatanappavutto—the path is taught with various causes, in terms of the thirty-eight objects. Since this is so, why, being afraid of what, did these people embrace the sixty-two views? Bhūripaññā—abundant in wisdom, excelling in wisdom. Paralokaṃ na bhāye—one should not fear going to the next world from this world. Paṇidhāya—having established. Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto—living at home with plenty of food and drink, like Anāthapiṇḍika and others. Saṃvibhāgī—accustomed to eating only after breaking off even what is held in the fingernail and giving it to others. Vadaññū—the meaning already stated.

Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasantoti iminā yaññaupakkharo gahito.Saddhoti ekamaṅgaṃ,mudūti ekaṃ,saṃvibhāgīti ekaṃ,vadaññūti ekaṃ. Iti imāni cattāri aṅgāni sandhāya ‘‘etesu dhammesu ṭhito catūsū’’ti āha.

Bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto—with this, the requisites for sacrifice are included. Saddho—one factor, mudū—one, saṃvibhāgī—one, vadaññū—one. Thus, referring to these four factors, he said, "Standing in these four qualities."

Aparopi pariyāyo – vācantiādīni tīṇi aṅgāni, bahvannapānanti iminā yaññaupakkharova gahito, saddho mudū saṃvibhāgī vadaññūti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ. Aparo dukanayo nāma hoti. ‘‘Vācaṃ manañcā’’ti idamekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno, bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saddho mudū’’ti ekaṃ, ‘‘saṃvibhāgī vadaññū’’ti ekaṃ. Etesu catūsu dhammesu ṭhito dhamme ṭhito nāma hoti. So ito paralokaṃ gacchanto na bhāyati. Pañcamaṃ.

Another way: vācaṃ and the following three are factors; with bahvannapānaṃ, just the requisites for sacrifice are included; saddho mudū saṃvibhāgī vadaññū—one factor. Another is called the dyad. "Vācaṃ manañca"—this is one factor; "kāyena pāpāni akubbamāno, bahvannapānaṃ gharamāvasanto"—one; "saddho mudū"—one; "saṃvibhāgī vadaññū"—one. Standing in these four qualities, he is said to stand in the Dhamma. He does not fear going from here to the next world. The fifth.

6. Najīratisuttavaṇṇanā
6. Najīratisutta Commentary

76.Chaṭṭhenāmagottaṃ na jīratīti atītabuddhānaṃ yāvajjadivasā nāmagottaṃ kathiyati, tasmā na jīratīti vuccati. Porāṇā pana ‘‘addhāne gacchante na paññāyissati, jīraṇasabhāvo pana na hotiyevā’’ti vadanti.Ālasyanti ālasiyaṃ, yena ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhitova, nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnova hoti, telepi uttarante ṭhitiṃ na karoti.Pamādoti niddāya vā kilesavasena vā pamādo.Anuṭṭhānanti kammasamaye kammakaraṇavīriyābhāvo.Asaṃyamoti sīlasaññamābhāvo vissaṭṭhācāratā.Niddāti soppabahulatā. Tāya gacchantopi ṭhitopi nisinnopi niddāyati, pageva nipanno.Tandīti aticchātādivasena āgantukālasiyaṃ.Te chiddeti tāni cha chiddāni vivarāni.Sabbasoti sabbākārena.Tanti nipātamattaṃ.Vivajjayeti vajjeyya jaheyya. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

76.In the sixth, nāmagottaṃ na jīratī—the name and clan of past Buddhas are spoken of until this very day; therefore, it is said not to decay. However, the ancients say, "It will not appear when going on the road; indeed, there is no nature of decay." Ālasya—laziness, by which one stays in the place where one is standing, stays in the place where one is sitting; one does not even make an effort to cross over the Teliya River. Pamādo—negligence due to sleep or defilements. Anuṭṭhāna—lack of energy to do work at the time of work. Asaṃyamo—lack of restraint in morality, unrestrained conduct. Niddā—excessive sleepiness. Due to that, one sleeps while walking, standing, or sitting, let alone lying down. Tandī—imported laziness due to overeating, etc. Te chidde—those six holes, openings. Sabbaso—in every way. Ta—just an expletive. Vivajjaye—should avoid, should abandon. The sixth.

7. Issariyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Issariyasutta Commentary

77.Sattamesatthamalanti malaggahitasatthaṃ.Kiṃ su harantaṃ vārentīti kaṃ harantaṃ nisedhenti.Vasoti āṇāpavattanaṃ.Itthīti avissajjanīyabhaṇḍattā ‘‘itthī bhaṇḍānamuttamaṃ, varabhaṇḍa’’nti āha. Atha vā sabbepi bodhisattā ca cakkavattino ca mātukucchiyaṃyeva nibbattantīti ‘‘itthī bhaṇḍānamuttama’’nti āha.Kodho satthamalanti kodho malaggahitasatthasadiso, paññāsatthassa vā malanti satthamalaṃ.Abbudanti vināsakāraṇaṃ, corā lokasmiṃ vināsakāti attho.Harantoti salākabhattādīni gahetvā gacchanto. Salākabhattādīni hi paṭṭhapitakāleyeva manussehi pariccattāni. Tesaṃ tāni haranto samaṇo piyo hoti, anāharante puññahāniṃ nissāya vippaṭisārino honti. Sattamaṃ.

77.In the seventh, satthamala—wealth accompanied by stinginess. Kiṃ su harantaṃ vārentī—what do they prevent from being taken away? Vaso—the exercise of authority. Itthī—because it is property that should not be given away, he said, "Woman is the best of possessions, a choice possession." Or, since all Bodhisattas and Wheel-Turning Kings are born in the mother's womb, he said, "Woman is the best of possessions." Kodho satthamala—anger is like wealth accompanied by stinginess, or it is said that anger is a poison, a bane to wisdom. Abbuda—a cause of destruction; thieves are destructive in the world, this is the meaning. Haranto—going taking alms-food etc. For alms-food, etc., are abandoned by people at the very time they are offered. A monk who takes these is dear; those who do not offer them are remorseful due to the loss of merit. The seventh.

8. Kāmasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Kāmasutta Commentary

78.Aṭṭhameattānaṃ na dadeti parassa dāsaṃ katvā attānaṃ na dadeyya ṭhapetvā sabbabodhisatteti vuttaṃ.Na pariccajeti sīhabyagghādīnaṃ na pariccajeyya sabbabodhisatte ṭhapetvāyevāti vuttaṃ.Kalyāṇanti saṇhaṃ mudukaṃ.Pāpikanti pharusaṃ vācaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

78.In the eighth, attānaṃ na dade—one should not give oneself by making oneself a slave to another, except for all Bodhisattas, it is said. Na pariccaje—one should not abandon oneself to lions, tigers, etc., except for all Bodhisattas, it is said. Kalyāṇa—gentle, soft. Pāpika—harsh speech. The eighth.

9. Pātheyyasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Pātheyyasutta Commentary

79.Navamesaddhā bandhati pātheyyanti saddhaṃ uppādetvā dānaṃ deti, sīlaṃ rakkhati, uposathakammaṃ karoti, tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Sirīti issariyaṃ.Āsayoti vasanaṭṭhānaṃ. Issariye hi abhimukhībhūte thalatopi jalatopi bhogā āgacchantiyeva. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Parikassatīti parikaḍḍhati. Navamaṃ.

79.In the ninth, saddhā bandhati pātheyya—having generated faith, one gives alms, observes morality, performs the Uposatha observance; therefore, this is said. Sirī—glory, majesty. Āsayo—dwelling place. For when glory is present, wealth comes both from land and water. Therefore, this is said. Parikassatī—draws around. The ninth.

10. Pajjotasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Pajjotasutta Commentary

80.Dasamepajjototi padīpo viya hoti.Jāgaroti jāgarabrāhmaṇo viya hoti.Gāvo kamme sajīvānanti kammena saha jīvantānaṃ gāvova kamme kammasahāyā kammadutiyakā nāma honti. Gomaṇḍalehi saddhiṃ kasikammādīni nipphajjanti.Sītassa iriyāpathoti sītaṃ assa sattakāyassa iriyāpatho jīvitavutti.Sītanti naṅgalaṃ. Yassa hi naṅgalehi khettaṃ appamattakampi kaṭṭhaṃ na hoti, so kathaṃ jīvissatīti vadati. Dasamaṃ.

80.In the tenth, pajjoto—is like a lamp. Jāgaro—is like a watchful Brahmin. Gāvo kamme sajīvāna—cows are companions in work, secondary to work, for those who live together with work. Agricultural work, etc., are accomplished together with herds of cattle. Sītassa iriyāpatho—the livelihood of one who has little. Sīta—plow. For he says, how will one live if one does not have even a small amount of wood to make a plow?

11. Araṇasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Araṇasutta Commentary

81.Ekādasamearaṇāti nikkilesā.Vusitanti vusitavāso.Bhojissiyanti adāsabhāvo.Samaṇāti khīṇāsavasamaṇā. Te hi ekantena araṇā nāma.Vusitaṃ na nassatīti tesaṃ ariyamaggavāso na nassati.Parijānantīti puthujjanakalyāṇakato paṭṭhāya sekhā lokiyalokuttarāya pariññāya parijānanti.Bhojissiyanti khīṇāsavasamaṇānaṃyeva niccaṃ bhujissabhāvo nāma.Vandantīti pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya vandanti.Patiṭṭhitanti sīle patiṭṭhitaṃ.Samaṇīdhāti samaṇaṃ idha.Jātihīnanti api caṇḍālakulā pabbajitaṃ.Khattiyāti na kevalaṃ khattiyāva, devāpi sīlasampannaṃ samaṇaṃ vandantiyevāti. Ekādasamaṃ.

81.In the eleventh, araṇā—without defilements. Vusita—lived the monastic life. Bhojissiya—not being a slave. Samaṇā—monks who are arahants. For they are entirely without defilements. Vusitaṃ na nassatī—their monastic life of the Noble Path does not perish. Parijānantī—from the time of a virtuous ordinary person, the trainees understand with mundane and supramundane knowledge. Bhojissiya—for monks who are arahants, there is always freedom from slavery. Vandantī—they venerate from the day of ordination onwards. Patiṭṭhita—established in morality. Samaṇīdhā—a monk here. Jātihīna—even one ordained from a Candala family. Khattiyā—not only nobles, but even gods venerate a monk who is accomplished in morality. The eleventh.

Chetvāvaggo aṭṭhamo.

The Eighth Chapter, "Cutting Off," is completed.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus in the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary to the Saṃyutta Nikāya,

2. Devaputtasaṃyuttaṃ

2. Devaputtasaṃyutta

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. First Chapter

1. Paṭhamakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Paṭhamakassapasutta Commentary

82.Devaputtasaṃyuttassa paṭhamedevaputtoti devānañhi aṅke nibbattā purisā devaputtā nāma, itthiyo devadhītaro nāma honti. Nāmavasena apākaṭāva ‘‘aññatarā devatā’’ti vuccati, pākaṭo ‘‘itthannāmo devaputto’’ti. Tasmā heṭṭhā ‘‘aññatarā devatā’’ti vatvā idha ‘‘devaputto’’ti vuttaṃ.Anusāsanti anusiṭṭhiṃ. Ayaṃ kira devaputto bhagavatā sambodhito sattame vasse yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā tidasapure vassaṃ upagamma abhidhammaṃ desentena jhānavibhaṅge – ‘‘bhikkhūti samaññāya bhikkhu, paṭiññāya bhikkhū’’ti (vibha. 510). Evaṃ bhikkhuniddesaṃ kathiyamānaṃ assosi. ‘‘Evaṃ vitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayittha, evaṃ manasikarotha, mā evaṃ manasākattha. Idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathā’’ti (pārā. 19). Evarūpaṃ pana bhikkhuovādaṃ bhikkhuanusāsanaṃ na assosi. So taṃ sandhāya – ‘‘bhikkhuṃ bhagavā pakāsesi, no ca bhikkhuno anusāsa’’nti āha.

82.In the first of the Devaputtasaṃyutta, devaputto—men born in the laps of gods are called devaputtas, and women are called devadhītaras. Because they are not well-known by name, they are called "a certain deity," but when they are well-known, they are called "a devaputta named so-and-so." Therefore, having said "a certain deity" below, here it says "devaputta." Anusāsa—instruction. It is said that this devaputta, having been awakened by the Blessed One in the seventh year, after performing the Twin Miracle and spending the rainy season in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, heard the Abhidhamma being taught, in the Analysis of Jhāna—"A bhikkhu is a bhikkhu by designation, a bhikkhu by profession" (Vibha. 510). Thus, he heard the exposition of bhikkhu being spoken. "Think like this, do not think like this, pay attention like this, do not pay attention like this. Abandon this, attain this and abide" (Pārā. 19). But he did not hear such instruction to bhikkhus, instruction for bhikkhus. Referring to that, he said, "The Blessed One reveals the bhikkhu, but does not instruct the bhikkhu."

Tena hīti yasmā mayā bhikkhuno anusiṭṭhi na pakāsitāti vadasi, tasmā.Taññevettha paṭibhātūti tuyhevesā anusiṭṭhipakāsanā upaṭṭhātūti. Yo hi pañhaṃ kathetukāmo hoti, na ca sakkoti sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā kathetuṃ. Yo vā na kathetukāmo hoti, sakkoti pana kathetuṃ. Yo vā neva kathetukāmo hoti, kathetuṃ na ca sakkoti. Sabbesampi tesaṃ bhagavā pañhaṃ bhāraṃ na karoti. Ayaṃ pana devaputto kathetukāmo ceva, sakkoti ca kathetuṃ. Tasmā tasseva bhāraṃ karonto bhagavā evamāha. Sopi pañhaṃ kathesi.

Tena hī—since you say that instruction to the bhikkhu was not revealed by me, therefore. Taññevettha paṭibhātū—may the revealing of that very instruction occur to you. For one who wants to speak a question, but is not able, is able to speak after consulting with the knowledge of the All-Knowing One. Or one who does not want to speak, but is able to speak. Or one who neither wants to speak nor is able to speak. The Blessed One does not burden any of them with a question. But this devaputta both wants to speak and is able to speak. Therefore, the Blessed One, placing the burden on him, said this. That one also spoke the question.

subhāsitassa sikkhethāti subhāsitaṃ sikkheyya, catusaccanissitaṃ dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyanissitaṃ catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritameva sikkheyya.Samaṇūpāsanassa cāti samaṇehi upāsitabbaṃ samaṇūpāsanaṃ nāma aṭṭhatiṃsabhedaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, tampi sikkheyya bhāveyyāti attho. Bahussutānaṃ vā bhikkhūnaṃ upāsanampi samaṇūpāsanaṃ. Tampi ‘kiṃ, bhante, kusala’’ntiādinā pañhapucchanena paññāvuddhatthaṃ sikkheyya.Cittavūpasamassa cāti aṭṭhasamāpattivasena cittavūpasamaṃ sikkheyya. Iti devaputtena tisso sikkhā kathitā honti. Purimapadena hi adhisīlasikkhā kathitā, dutiyapadena adhipaññāsikkhā, cittavūpasamena adhicittasikkhāti evaṃ imāya gāthāya sakalampi sāsanaṃ pakāsitameva hoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Subhāsitassa sikkhethā—one should train in good speech; one should train in the four kinds of verbal good conduct that are based on the Four Noble Truths, based on the ten bases of discussion, based on the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment. Samaṇūpāsanassa cā—samaṇūpāsana is the cultivation that should be cultivated by Samaṇas; one should train in that too, develop it, this is the meaning. Or, attending upon bhikkhus who are learned is also samaṇūpāsana. One should train in that too, for the increase of wisdom, by asking questions such as, "What, venerable sir, is skillful?" Cittavūpasamassa cā—one should train in the calming of the mind in terms of the eight attainments. Thus, the devaputta spoke of three trainings. By the first word, the training in higher morality is spoken of; by the second word, the training in higher wisdom; by the calming of the mind, the training in higher mind. Thus, by this verse, the entire Dispensation is revealed. The first.

2. Dutiyakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Dutiyakassapasutta Commentary

83.Dutiyejhāyīti dvīhi jhānehi jhāyī.Vimuttacittoti kammaṭṭhānavimuttiyā vimuttacitto.Hadayassānupattinti arahattaṃ.Lokassāti saṅkhāralokassa.Anissitoti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi anissito, taṇhādiṭṭhiyo vā anissito.Tadānisaṃsoti arahattānisaṃso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – arahattānisaṃso bhikkhu arahattaṃ patthento jhāyī bhaveyya, suvimuttacitto bhaveyya, lokassa udayabbayaṃ ñatvā anissito bhaveyya. Tantidhammo pana imasmiṃ sāsane pubbabhāgoti. Dutiyaṃ.

83.In the second, jhāyī—one who meditates with two jhānas. Vimuttacitto—one whose mind is liberated by the liberation of the meditation subject. Hadayassānupatti—arahantship. Lokassā—of the world of conditioned phenomena. Anissito—not dependent on craving and views, or free from craving and views. Tadānisaṃso—the benefit of arahatship. This is what is said—a bhikkhu who desires the benefit of arahatship should be meditative, have a well-liberated mind, know the arising and passing away of the world, and be independent. But this Dhamma is a preliminary part in this Dispensation. The second.

3-4. Māghasuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Māghasutta Commentary

84.Tatiyemāghoti sakkassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sveva vattena aññe abhibhavitvā devissariyaṃ pattotivatrabhū,vatranāmakaṃ vā asuraṃ abhibhavatīti vatrabhū. Tatiyaṃ.

84.In the third, māgho—this is Sakka's name. He attained the lordship of the gods by overcoming others with his vow; therefore, he is vatrabhū, or he overcomes an asura named Vatra. The third.

85.Catutthaṃ vuttatthameva. Catutthaṃ.

85.The fourth is the same as stated above. The fourth.

5. Dāmalisuttavaṇṇanā
5. Dāmalisutta Commentary

86.Pañcamena tenāsīsate bhavanti tena kāraṇena yaṃ kiñci bhavaṃ na pattheti. Āyatapaggaho nāmesa devaputto, khīṇāsavassa kiccavosānaṃ natthi. Khīṇāsavena hi ādito arahattappattiyā vīriyaṃ kataṃ, aparabhāge mayā arahattaṃ pattanti mā tuṇhī bhavatu, tatheva vīriyaṃ daḷhaṃ karotu parakkamatūti cintetvā evamāha.

86.In the fifth, na tenāsīsate bhava—for that reason, he does not desire any existence whatsoever. Āyatapaggaha is the name of that devaputta; there is no completion of duty for an arahant. For the arahant made effort from the beginning for the attainment of arahatship; in the later part, thinking "Let him not be silent, thinking that I have attained arahatship; let him strengthen his effort and strive further in the same way," he said this:

natthi kiccantiādimāha. Tīsu kira piṭakesu ayaṃ gāthā asaṃkiṇṇā. Bhagavatā hi aññattha vīriyassa doso nāma dassito natthi. Idha pana imaṃ devaputtaṃ paṭibāhitvā ‘‘khīṇāsavena pubbabhāge āsavakkhayatthāya araññe vasantena kammaṭṭhānaṃ ādāya vīriyaṃ kataṃ, aparabhāge sace icchati, karotu, no ce icchati, yathāsukhaṃ viharatū’’ti khīṇāsavassa kiccavosānadassanatthaṃ evamāha. Tatthagādhanti patiṭṭhaṃ. Pañcamaṃ.

natthi kicca—and so on. It is said that in the three baskets, this verse is unmixed. For the Blessed One has shown no fault of effort elsewhere. But here, having refuted this devaputta, he said this to show the completion of duty for an arahant: "In the earlier part, the arahant, dwelling in the forest for the sake of the destruction of the āsavas, made effort by undertaking a meditation subject; in the later part, if he wishes, let him do so; if he does not wish, let him live at ease." There, gādha—foothold. The fifth.

6. Kāmadasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kāmadasutta Commentary

87.Chaṭṭhedukkaranti ayaṃ kira devaputto pubbayogāvacaro bahalakilesatāya sappayogena kilese vikkhambhento samaṇadhammaṃ katvā pubbūpanissayamandatāya ariyabhūmiṃ appatvāva kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatto. So ‘‘tathāgatassa santikaṃ gantvā dukkarabhāvaṃ ārocessāmī’’ti āgantvā evamāha. Tatthadukkaranti dasapi vassāni…pe… saṭṭhipi yadetaṃ ekantaparisuddhassa samaṇadhammassa karaṇaṃ nāma, taṃ dukkaraṃ.Sekhāti satta sekhā.Sīlasamāhitāti sīlena samāhitā samupetā.Ṭhitattāti patiṭṭhitasabhāvā. Evaṃ pucchitapañhaṃ vissajjetvā idāni uparipañhasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃanagāriyupetassātiādimāha. Tatthaanagāriyupetassāti anagāriyaṃ niggehabhāvaṃ upetassa. Sattabhūmikepi hi pāsāde vasanto bhikkhu vuḍḍhatarena āgantvā ‘‘mayhaṃ idaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti vutte pattacīvaraṃ ādāya nikkhamateva. Tasmā ‘‘anagāriyupeto’’ti vuccati.Tuṭṭhīti catupaccayasantoso.Bhāvanāyāti cittavūpasamabhāvanāya.

87. In the sixth, dukkara means: it seems that this deva-son, who had formerly practiced yoga, suppressed his defilements through persistent effort due to the abundance of his defilements, performed the ascetic life, and having died without attaining the noble state due to the weakness of his former support, was reborn in the deva-world. He came, thinking, "I will announce the difficulty to the Tathāgata," and said this. Here, dukkara means even ten years...pe... even sixty years, that which is called the performance of the ascetic life that is utterly pure, that is difficult. Sekhā means the seven sekhas. Sīlasamāhitā means endowed with sīla and samādhi. Ṭhitattā means having a stable nature. Having answered the question asked in this way, now, to raise a further question, he said beginning with anagāriyupetassā. There, anagāriyupetassā means one who has undertaken homelessness, the state of being without a household. For even a bhikkhu living in a seven-storied palace, if an elder comes and says, "This belongs to me," he leaves, taking only his bowl and robe. Therefore, he is called "one who has undertaken homelessness." Tuṭṭhī means contentment with the four requisites. Bhāvanāya means by the cultivation of the appeasement of the mind.

Te chetvā maccuno jālanti ye rattindivaṃ indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ cittaṃ samādahanti. Ye ca samāhitacittā, te catupaccayasantosaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye santuṭṭhā, te sīlaṃ pūrentā na kilamanti. Ye sīle patiṭṭhitā satta sekhā, te ariyā maccuno jālasaṅkhātaṃ kilesajālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti.Duggamoti ‘‘saccametaṃ, bhante, ye indriyūpasame ratā, te dussamādahaṃ samādahanti…pe… ye sīle patiṭṭhitā, te maccuno jālaṃ chinditvā gacchanti’’. Kiṃ na gacchissanti? Ayaṃ pana duggamo bhagavā visamo maggoti āha. Tattha kiñcāpi ariyamaggo neva duggamo na visamo, pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya panassa bahū parissayā honti. Tasmā evaṃ vutto.Avaṃsirāti ñāṇasirena adhosirā hutvā papatanti. Ariyamaggaṃ ārohituṃ asamatthatāyeva ca te anariyamagge papatantīti ca vuccanti.Ariyānaṃ samo maggoti sveva maggo ariyānaṃ samo hoti.Visame samāti visamepi sattakāye samāyeva. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Te chetvā maccuno jāla means: those who are devoted to the calming of the senses day and night, they concentrate the mind that is difficult to concentrate. And those whose minds are concentrated, they are not weary as they fulfill contentment with the four requisites. Those who are content, they are not weary as they fulfill sīla. Those seven sekhas who are established in sīla, those noble ones, having cut the net of defilements that is called the net of death, go forth. Duggamo means, "Indeed, venerable sir, those who are devoted to the calming of the senses, they concentrate the mind that is difficult to concentrate...pe... those who are established in sīla, they, having cut the net of death, go forth." Will they not go? This, however, is the difficult, the uneven path, said the Blessed One. There, although the noble path is neither difficult nor uneven, there are many difficulties in the preliminary practice. Therefore, it is said in this way. Avaṃsirā means falling headlong with the head of wisdom downward. And because of their inability to ascend the noble path, they are said to fall into the ignoble path. Ariyānaṃ samo maggo means that very path is even for the noble ones. Visame samā means even among the uneven beings, it is even. The sixth.

7. Pañcālacaṇḍasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Pañcālacaṇḍasuttavaṇṇanā

88.Sattamesambādheti nīvaraṇasambādhaṃ kāmaguṇasambādhanti dve sambādhā. Tesu idha nīvaraṇasambādhaṃ adhippetaṃ.Okāsanti jhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Paṭilīnanisabhoti paṭilīnaseṭṭho. Paṭilīno nāma pahīnamāno vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu paṭilīno hoti. Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno asmimāno pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’’ti (a. ni. 4.38; mahāni. 87).Paccalatthaṃsūti paṭilabhiṃsu.Sammā teti ye nibbānapattiyā satiṃ paṭilabhiṃsu, te lokuttarasamādhināpi susamāhitāti missakajjhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Sattamaṃ.

88. In the seventh, sambādhe means two kinds of crowding: the crowding of the hindrances and the crowding of the sense pleasures. Of these, here, the crowding of the hindrances is intended. Okāsa is a name for jhāna. Paṭilīnanisabho means the best in seclusion. Paṭilīna means abandoned pride. As it was said, "And how, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu secluded? Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu's conceit is abandoned, cut off at the root, made like a palm stump, made non-existent, not liable to arise in the future" (A. Ni. 4.38; Mahāni. 87). Paccalatthaṃsū means they regained. Sammā te means those who regained mindfulness for the attainment of Nibbāna, they are also well-concentrated by supramundane samādhi; mixed jhāna is spoken of. The seventh.

8. Tāyanasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Tāyanasuttavaṇṇanā

89.Aṭṭhamepurāṇatitthakaroti pubbe titthakaro. Ettha ca titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo, titthakaro nāma tāsaṃ uppādako satthā. Seyyathidaṃ nando, vaccho, kiso, saṃkicco. Purāṇādayo pana titthiyā nāma. Ayaṃ pana diṭṭhiṃ uppādetvā kathaṃ sagge nibbattoti? Kammavāditāya. Esa kira uposathabhattādīni adāsi, anāthānaṃ vattaṃ paṭṭhapesi, patissaye akāsi, pokkharaṇiyo khaṇāpesi, aññampi bahuṃ kalyāṇaṃ akāsi. So tassa nissandena sagge nibbatto, sāsanassa pana niyyānikabhāvaṃ jānāti. So tathāgatassa santikaṃ gantvā sāsanānucchavikā vīriyappaṭisaṃyuttā gāthā vakkhāmīti āgantvāchinda sotantiādimāha.

89. In the eighth, purāṇatitthakaro means a former founder of a doctrine. Here, tittha means the sixty-two views, titthakaro means the teacher who originates them. Such as Nanda, Vaccha, Kisa, Saṃkicca. Purāṇa, etc., however, are called heretics. But how was he, having originated a view, reborn in heaven? Because of his belief in action. It seems he gave uposatha meals, etc., established services for the helpless, built rest houses, dug ponds, and did many other good deeds. He was reborn in heaven as a result of that, but he knows the nature of the Teaching that leads to liberation. Having gone to the presence of the Tathāgata, thinking, "I will speak verses that are in accordance with the Teaching and connected with effort," he came and said beginning with chinda sota.

chindāti aniyamitaāṇatti.Sotanti taṇhāsotaṃ.Parakkammāti parakkamitvā vīriyaṃ katvā.Kāmeti kilesakāmepi vatthukāmepi.Panudāti nīhara.Ekattanti jhānaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kāme ajahitvā muni jhānaṃ na upapajjati, na paṭilabhatīti attho.Kayirā ce kayirāthenanti yadi vīriyaṃ kareyya, kareyyātha, taṃ vīriyaṃ na osakkeyya.Daḷhamenaṃ parakkameti daḷhaṃ enaṃ kareyya.Sithilo hi paribbājoti sithilagahitā pabbajjā.Bhiyyo ākirate rajanti atirekaṃ upari kilesarajaṃ ākirati.Akataṃ dukkaṭaṃ seyyoti dukkaṭaṃ akatameva seyyo.Yaṃ kiñcīti na kevalaṃ dukkaṭaṃ katvā katasāmaññameva, aññampi yaṃ kiñci sithilaṃ kataṃ evarūpameva hoti.Saṃkiliṭṭhanti dukkarakārikavataṃ. Imasmiṃ hi sāsane paccayahetu samādinnadhutaṅgavataṃ saṃkiliṭṭhameva.Saṅkassaranti saṅkāya saritaṃ, ‘‘idampi iminā kataṃ bhavissati, idampi iminā’’ti evaṃ āsaṅkitaparisaṅkitaṃ.Ādibrahmacariyikāti maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtā pubbapadhānabhūtā. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

chindā is an unrestricted command. Sota means the stream of craving. Parakkammā means having exerted effort, having made energy. Kāme means both defilement-desires and object-desires. Panudā means remove. Ekatta means jhāna. This is what is said: without abandoning desires, a muni does not attain jhāna, does not gain it, is the meaning. Kayirā ce kayirāthena means if one should do effort, let one do it, one should not slacken that effort. Daḷhamenaṃ parakkame means one should make it firm. Sithilo hi paribbājo means an ascetic life that is loosely taken up. Bhiyyo ākirate raja means one scatters even more defilement-dust upon oneself. Akataṃ dukkaṭaṃ seyyo means it is better not to do a wrong deed. Yaṃ kiñcī means not only having done a wrong deed that has the appearance of good, but anything else that is done loosely is just like that. Saṃkiliṭṭha means a vow of difficult practices. For in this Teaching, vows of dhutaṅga undertaken for the sake of requisites are indeed defiled. Saṅkassara means flowing with doubt, "This also will be done by him, this also by him," thus suspected and feared. Ādibrahmacariyikā means the foremost, the preliminary to the path of the holy life. The eighth.

9. Candimasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Candimasuttavaṇṇanā

90.Navamecandimāti candavimānavāsī devaputto.Sabbadhīti sabbesu khandhaāyatanādīsu.Lokānukampakāti tuyhampi etassapi tādisā eva.Santaramānovāti turito viya.Pamuñcasīti atītatthe vattamānavacanaṃ. Navamaṃ.

90. In the ninth, candimā means the deva-son dwelling in the moon-mansion. Sabbadhī means in all the aggregates, sense-bases, etc. Lokānukampakā means you too are just like that. Santaramānovā means as if hurrying. Pamuñcasī is a present-tense word used in the past sense. The ninth.

10. Sūriyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Sūriyasuttavaṇṇanā

91.Dasamesūriyoti sūriyavimānavāsī devaputto.Andhakāreti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇena andhabhāvakaraṇe. Virocatītiverocano. Maṇḍalīti maṇḍalasaṇṭhāno.Mā, rāhu, gilī caramantalikkheti antalikkhe caraṃ sūriyaṃ, rāhu, mā gilīti vadati. Kiṃ panesa taṃ gilatīti? Āma, gilati. Rāhussa hi attabhāvo mahā, uccattanena aṭṭhayojanasatādhikāni cattāri yojanasahassāni, bāhantaramassa dvādasayojanasatāni, bahalattena cha yojanasatāni, sīsaṃ nava yojanasataṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasataṃ, bhamukantaraṃ paṇṇāsayojanaṃ, mukhaṃ dviyojanasataṃ, ghānaṃ tiyojanasataṃ, mukhādhānaṃ tiyojanasatagambhīraṃ hatthatalapādatalāni puthulato dviyojanasatāni. Aṅgulipabbāni paṇṇāsa yojanāni. So candimasūriye virocamāne disvā issāpakato tesaṃ gamanavīthiṃ otaritvā mukhaṃ vivaritvā tiṭṭhati. Candavimānaṃ sūriyavimānaṃ vā tiyojanasatike mahānarake pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Vimāne adhivatthā devatā maraṇabhayatajjitā ekappahāreneva viravanti. So pana vimānaṃ kadāci hatthena chādeti, kadāci hanukassa heṭṭhā pakkhipati, kadāci jivhāya parimajjati, kadāci avagaṇḍakārakaṃ bhuñjanto viya kapolantare ṭhapeti. Vegaṃ pana vāretuṃ na sakkoti. Sace vāressāmīti gaṇḍakaṃ katvā tiṭṭheyya, matthakaṃ tassa bhinditvā nikkhameyya, ākaḍḍhitvā vā naṃ onameyya. Tasmā vimānena saheva gacchati.Pajaṃ mamanti candimasūriyā kira dvepi devaputtā mahāsamayasuttakathanadivase sotāpattiphalaṃ pattā. Tena bhagavā ‘‘pajaṃ mama’’nti āha, putto mama esoti attho. Dasamaṃ.

91. In the tenth, sūriyo means the deva-son dwelling in the sun-mansion. Andhakāre means causing darkness by preventing the arising of eye-consciousness. Verocano means shining. Maṇḍalī means having a circular shape. Mā, rāhu, gilī caramantalikkhe means, "Rāhu, do not swallow the sun that moves in the sky." But does he swallow it? Yes, he swallows it. For Rāhu's body is large, in height four thousand and eight hundred yojanas, the extent of his arms is twelve hundred yojanas, in thickness six hundred yojanas, his head is nine hundred yojanas, his forehead is three hundred yojanas, the space between his eyebrows is fifty yojanas, his mouth is two hundred yojanas, his nose is three hundred yojanas, the depth of his mouth is three hundred yojanas, the palms of his hands and soles of his feet are two hundred yojanas wide. The segments of his fingers are fifty yojanas. Seeing the moon and sun shining, overcome with envy, he descends into their path, opens his mouth, and stands. The moon-mansion or sun-mansion is like being thrown into a great hell three hundred yojanas deep. The deities dwelling in the mansions, terrified by the fear of death, cry out with a single cry. Sometimes he covers the mansion with his hand, sometimes he puts it under his jaw, sometimes he rubs it with his tongue, sometimes he keeps it in his cheek as if eating avagaṇḍaka. But he cannot stop the force. If he were to stop it and remain making a lump, it would break his head and come out, or he would pull it down. Therefore, he goes along with the mansion. Pajaṃ mama means both the moon and sun deva-sons attained the fruit of stream-entry on the day of the Mahāsamaya Sutta discourse. Therefore, the Blessed One said "my offspring," meaning he is my son. The tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

The first chapter.

2. Anāthapiṇḍikavaggo

2. Anāthapiṇḍikavaggo

1. Candimasasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Candimasasuttavaṇṇanā

92.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamekacchevāti kacche viya.Kaccheti pabbatakacchepi nadīkacchepi.Ekodi nipakāti ekaggacittā ceva paññānepakkena ca samannāgatā.Satāti satimanto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ye jhānāni labhitvā ekodī nipakā satā viharanti, te amakase pabbatakacche vā nadīkacche vā magā viya sotthiṃ gamissantīti.Pāranti nibbānaṃ.Ambujoti maccho.Raṇañjahāti kilesañjahā. Yepi jhānāni labhitvā appamattā kilese jahanti, te suttajālaṃ bhinditvā macchā viya nibbānaṃ gamissantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

92. In the first of the second chapter, kacchevā means like a thicket. Kacche means both a mountain thicket and a river thicket. Ekodi nipakā means endowed with both one-pointedness of mind and wisdom. Satā means mindful. This is what is said: those who, having attained jhānas, dwell with one-pointedness, wisdom, and mindfulness, they will go safely like deer in a mountain thicket or a river thicket. Pāra means Nibbāna. Ambujo means a fish. Raṇañjahā means abandoning defilements. It is said that those who, having attained jhānas, diligently abandon defilements, they will go to Nibbāna like fish breaking through a net. The first.

2. Veṇḍusuttavaṇṇanā
2. Veṇḍusuttavaṇṇanā

93.Dutiyeveṇḍūti tassa devaputtassa nāmaṃ.Payirupāsiyāti parirupāsitvā.Anusikkhareti sikkhanti.Siṭṭhipadeti anusiṭṭhipade.Kāle te appamajjantāti kāle te appamādaṃ karontā. Dutiyaṃ.

93. In the second, veṇḍū is the name of that deva-son. Payirupāsiyā means having attended upon. Anusikkhare means they train. Siṭṭhipade means in the teaching, in the word of instruction. Kāle te appamajjantā means at the right time, they do not neglect. The second.

3. Dīghalaṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā
3. Dīghalaṭṭhisuttavaṇṇanā

94.Tatiyedīghalaṭṭhīti devaloke sabbe samappamāṇā tigāvutikāva honti, manussaloke panassa dīghattabhāvatāya evaṃnāmaṃ ahosi. So puññāni katvā devaloke nibbattopi tatheva paññāyi. Tatiyaṃ.

94. In the third, dīghalaṭṭhī means in the deva-world, all are of equal measure, three gāvutas in height, but in the human world, because of his tall stature, he had such a name. Having done meritorious deeds, he was reborn in the deva-world and was still known as such. The third.

4. Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Nandanasuttavaṇṇanā

95.Catutthegotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.Anāvaṭanti tathāgatassa hi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pesentassa rukkho vā pabbato vā āvarituṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tenāha ‘‘anāvaṭa’’nti. Iti tathāgataṃ thometvā devaloke abhisaṅkhatapañhaṃ pucchantokathaṃvidhantiādimāha. Tatthadukkhamaticca iriyatīti dukkhaṃ atikkamitvā viharati.Sīlavāti lokiyalokuttarena sīlena samannāgato khīṇāsavo.Paññādayopi missakāyeva veditabbā.Pūjayantīti gandhapupphādīhi pūjenti. Catutthaṃ.

95. In the fourth, gotamā means he addresses the Blessed One by his clan name. Anāvaṭa means for the Tathāgata, there is nothing that is able to obstruct his all-knowing wisdom as it proceeds, neither a tree nor a mountain. Therefore, he says "unobstructed." Thus, having praised the Tathāgata, asking a question concerning the deva-world, he said beginning with kathaṃvidha. There, dukkhamaticca iriyatī means he dwells having overcome suffering. Sīlavā means a khīṇāsava endowed with mundane and supramundane sīla. Paññā and the others should also be understood as mixed. Pūjayantī means they honor with incense, flowers, etc. The fourth.

5-6. Candanasuttādivaṇṇanā
5-6. Candanasuttādivaṇṇanā

96.Pañcameappatiṭṭhe anālambeti heṭṭhā apatiṭṭhe upari anālambane.Susamāhitoti appanāyapi upacārenapi suṭṭhu samāhito.Pahitattoti pesitatto.Nandīrāgaparikkhīṇoti parikkhīṇanandīrāgo. Nandīrāgo nāma tayo kammābhisaṅkhārā. Iti imāya gāthāya kāmasaññāgahaṇena pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni, rūpasaṃyojanagahaṇena pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni, nandīrāgena tayo kammābhisaṅkhārā gahitā. Evaṃ yassa dasa saṃyojanāni tayo ca kammābhisaṅkhārā pahīnā, so gambhīre mahoghe na sīdatīti. Kāmasaññāya vā kāmabhavo, rūpasaṃyojanena rūpabhavo gahito, tesaṃ gahaṇena arūpabhavo gahitova, nandīrāgena tayo kammābhisaṅkhārā gahitāti evaṃ yassa tīsu bhavesu tayo saṅkhārā natthi, so gambhīre na sīdatītipi dasseti. Pañcamaṃ.

96. In the fifth, appatiṭṭhe anālambe means without support below, without clinging above. Susamāhito means well-concentrated in both attainment and access. Pahitatto means one who has sent forth his self. Nandīrāgaparikkhīṇo means one whose delight and lust are destroyed. Nandīrāga means the three karma-formations. Thus, in this verse, by the taking up of sense-desire, the five lower fetters, by the taking up of the form-fetters, the five higher fetters, and by nandīrāga, the three karma-formations are taken up. Thus, he whose ten fetters and three karma-formations are abandoned, he does not sink in the deep flood. Or, by sense-desire, the sense-existence is taken up, by the form-fetters, the form-existence is taken up; by their being taken up, the formless-existence is also taken up, by nandīrāga the three karma-formations are taken up; thus it shows that he in whom there are no three formations in the three existences, he does not sink in the deep flood. The fifth.

97.Chaṭṭhaṃ vuttatthameva. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

97. The sixth has the meaning already stated. The sixth.

7. Subrahmasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Subrahmasuttavaṇṇanā

98.Sattamesubrahmāti so kira devaputto accharāsaṅghaparivuto nandanakīḷikaṃ gantvā pāricchattakamūle paññattāsane nisīdi. Taṃ pañcasatā devadhītaro parivāretvā nisinnā, pañcasatā rukkhaṃ abhiruḷhā. Nanu ca devatānaṃ cittavasena yojanasatikopi rukkho onamitvā hatthaṃ āgacchati, kasmā tā abhiruḷhāti. Khiḍḍāpasutatāya. Abhiruyha pana madhurassarena gāyitvā gāyitvā pupphāni pātenti, tāni gahetvā itarā ekatovaṇṭikamālādivasena ganthenti. Atha rukkhaṃ abhiruḷhā upacchedakakammavasena ekappahāreneva kālaṃ katvā avīcimhi nibbattā mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanti.

98. In the seventh, subrahmā means that deva-son, surrounded by a company of celestial nymphs, went to the Nandana grove and sat on a seat prepared at the foot of the coral tree. Five hundred deva-daughters sat surrounding him, five hundred climbed the tree. But since the deities can make a tree even a hundred yojanas tall bend down and come to their hand according to their mind, why did they climb? Because they were intent on playing. Having climbed, they sang in sweet voices and showered flowers, which the others gathered and strung together into garlands. Then, those who had climbed the tree, because of their cutting-off karma, died suddenly and were reborn in Avīci, experiencing great suffering.

niccaṃ utrastanti gāthamāha.

niccaṃ utrastanti gāthamāha.

idanti attano cittaṃ dasseti. Dutiyapadaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ.Niccanti ca padassa devaloke nibbattakālato paṭṭhāyāti attho na gahetabbo, sokuppattikālato pana paṭṭhāya niccanti veditabbaṃ.Anuppannesu kicchesūti ito sattāhaccayena yāni dukkhāni uppajjissanti, tesu.Atho uppatitesu cāti yāni pañcasatānaṃ accharānaṃ niraye nibbattānaṃ diṭṭhāni, tesu cāti evaṃ imesu uppannānuppannesu dukkhesu niccaṃ mama utrastaṃ cittaṃ, abbhantare ḍayhamāno viya homi bhagavāti dasseti.

ida means he shows his own mind. The second line is a synonym of the first. The meaning of the word nicca should not be taken as from the time of rebirth in the deva-world, but it should be understood as nicca from the time of the arising of sorrow. Anuppannesu kicchesū means in those sufferings that will arise after seven days. Atho uppatitesu cā means and in those that were seen by the five hundred nymphs who were reborn in hell; thus he shows, "In these arisen and unarisen sufferings, my mind is constantly trembling, I am burning inside, venerable sir."

Nāññatrabojjhā tapasāti bojjhaṅgabhāvanañca tapoguṇañca aññatra muñcitvā sotthiṃ na passāmīti attho.Sabbanissaggāti nibbānato. Ettha kiñcāpi bojjhaṅgabhāvanā paṭhamaṃ gahitā, indriyasaṃvaro pacchā, atthato pana indriyasaṃvarova paṭhamaṃ veditabbo. Indiyasaṃvare hi gahite catupārisuddhisīlaṃ gahitaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ patiṭṭhito bhikkhu nissayamuttako dhutaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ tapoguṇaṃ samādāya araññaṃ pavisitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvento saha vipassanāya bojjhaṅge bhāveti. Tassa ariyamaggo yaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjati, so ‘‘sabbanissaggo’’ti bhagavā catusaccavasena desanaṃ vinivattesi. Devaputto desanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahīti. Sattamaṃ.

Nāññatrabojjhā tapasā means apart from the cultivation of the bojjhaṅgas and the quality of asceticism, I do not see safety. Sabbanissaggā means from Nibbāna. Here, although the cultivation of the bojjhaṅgas is taken up first, sense restraint should be understood as first in meaning. For when sense restraint is taken up, the fourfold purity of sīla is taken up. A bhikkhu established in that, free from dependence, taking up the ascetic quality that is called the dhutaṅgas, enters the forest and, developing the meditation subject, cultivates the bojjhaṅgas together with insight. The noble path arises for him, taking Nibbāna as its object; the Blessed One turned back the discourse as the four truths, which is "the complete letting go". The deva-son was established in the fruit of stream-entry at the end of the discourse. The seventh.

8-10. Kakudhasuttādivaṇṇanā
8-10. Kakudhasuttādivaṇṇanā

99.Aṭṭhamekakudho devaputtoti ayaṃ kira kolanagare mahāmoggallānattherassa upaṭṭhākaputto daharakāleyeva therassa santike vasanto jhānaṃ nibbattetvā kālaṅkato, brahmaloke uppajji. Tatrāpi naṃ kakudho brahmātveva sañjānanti.Nandasīti tussasi.Kiṃ laddhāti tuṭṭhi nāma kiñci manāpaṃ labhitvā hoti, tasmā evamāha.Kiṃ jīyitthāti yassa hi kiñci manāpaṃ cīvarādivatthu jiṇṇaṃ hoti, so socati, tasmā evamāha.Aratī nābhikīratīti ukkaṇṭhitā nābhibhavati.Aghajātassāti dukkhajātassa, vaṭṭadukkhe ṭhitassāti attho.Nandījātassāti jātataṇhassa.Aghanti evarūpassa hi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ āgatameva hoti. ‘‘Dukkhī sukhaṃ patthayatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Iti aghajātassa nandī hoti, sukhavipariṇāmena dukkhaṃ āgatamevāti nandījātassa aghaṃ hoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

99. In the eighth, Kakudha the devaputta; it seems that this one, in Kolanagara, was the attendant's son of Mahāmoggallānatthera. Even as a young boy, living near the Thera, he developed jhāna and died, being reborn in the Brahma world. There, they recognized him as Kakudha Brahma. Nandasī means you delight. Kiṃ laddhā; delight comes from obtaining something pleasing, therefore he said this. Kiṃ jīyitthā; indeed, someone whose pleasing thing, such as a robe, wears out, that one sorrows, therefore he said this. Aratī nābhikīratī; discontent does not overwhelm. Aghajātassā; to one born of suffering, meaning one situated in the round of suffering. Nandījātassā; to one born of craving. Agha; indeed, for such a one, the round of suffering is sure to come. It is said, "The suffering one desires happiness." Thus, for one born of suffering, there is delight; through the change of happiness, suffering is sure to come; for one born of delight, there is suffering. The eighth.

100.Navamaṃ vuttatthameva. Navamaṃ.

100.The ninth is the same as what was said. The ninth.

101.Dasame ānandattherassa anumānabuddhiyā ānubhāvappakāsanatthaṃaññataroti āha. Dasamaṃ.

101.In the tenth, to reveal the power of Ānandatthera's inferential wisdom, he said aññataro (another). The tenth.

Dutiyo vaggo.

The second chapter.

3. Nānātitthiyavaggo

3. Nānātitthiyavaggo (Chapter on Various Sectarians)

1-2. Sivasuttādivaṇṇanā
1-2. Sivasuttādi-vaṇṇanā (Description of the Sivasutta, etc.)

102.Tatiyavaggassa paṭhamaṃ vuttatthameva. Paṭhamaṃ.

102.The first of the third chapter is the same as what was said. The first.

103.Dutiyepaṭikaccevāti paṭhamaṃyeva.Akkhacchinnovajhāyatīti akkhacchinno avajhāyati, balavacintanaṃ cinteti. Dutiyagāthāyaakkhacchinnovāti akkhacchinno viya. Dutiyaṃ.

103.In the second, paṭikaccevā means right from the start. Akkhacchinnovajhāyatī; one whose axle is broken contemplates, thinks with intense thought. In the second verse, akkhacchinnovā means as if one whose axle is broken. The second.

3-4. Serīsuttādivaṇṇanā
3-4. Serīsuttādi-vaṇṇanā (Description of the Serīsutta, etc.)

104.Tatiyedāyakoti dānasīlo.Dānapatīti yaṃ dānaṃ demi, tassa pati hutvā demi, na dāso na sahāyo. Yo hi attanā madhuraṃ bhuñjati, paresaṃ amadhuraṃ deti, so dānasaṅkhātassa deyyadhammassa dāso hutvā deti. Yo yaṃ attanā bhuñjati, tadeva deti, so sahāyo hutvā deti. Yo pana attanā yena tena yāpeti, paresaṃ madhuraṃ deti, so pati jeṭṭhako sāmi hutvā deti. Ahaṃ ‘‘tādiso ahosi’’nti vadati.

104.In the third, dāyako means one who is generous by nature. Dānapatī; I give as the master of the gift, not as a slave, not as a friend. Indeed, one who eats sweet things himself but gives unsavory things to others, that one gives as a slave of the gift, which is called the thing to be given. One who eats what he himself eats and gives the same, that one gives as a friend. But one who sustains himself with whatever, but gives sweet things to others, that one gives as a master, a superior, a lord. He says, "I was such."

Catūsu dvāresuti tassa kira rañño sindhavaraṭṭhaṃ sodhivākaraṭṭhanti dve raṭṭhāni ahesuṃ, nagaraṃ roruvaṃ nāma. Tassa ekekasmiṃ dvāre devasikaṃ satasahassaṃ uppajjati, antonagare vinicchayaṭṭhāne satasahassaṃ. So bahuhiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ rāsibhūtaṃ disvā kammassakatañāṇaṃ uppādetvā catūsu dvāresu dānasālāyo kāretvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ dvāre uṭṭhitaāyena dānaṃ dethāti amacce ṭhapesi. Tenāha – ‘‘catūsu dvāresu dānaṃ dīyitthā’’ti.

Catūsu dvāresu (at the four gates); it seems that king had two kingdoms, Sindhuraṭṭha and Sodhivākaraṭṭha, and the city was named Roruva. At each of its gates, a hundred thousand (coins) arose daily, and a hundred thousand at the judgment place inside the city. Seeing a great heap of gold and silver, he generated the knowledge of the result of actions and, having built donation halls at the four gates, he appointed ministers, saying, "Give donations with the income arising at each gate." Therefore, he said, "catūsu dvāresu dānaṃ dīyitthā" (donations were given at the four gates).

Samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānanti etthasamaṇāti pabbajjūpagatā.Brāhmaṇāti bhovādino. Samitapāpabāhitapāpe pana samaṇabrāhmaṇe esa nālattha.Kapaṇāti duggatā daliddamanussā kāṇakuṇiādayo.Addhikāti pathāvino.Vanibbakāti ye ‘‘iṭṭhaṃ, dinnaṃ, kantaṃ, manāpaṃ, kālena, anavajjaṃ dinnaṃ, dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādeyya, gacchatu bhavaṃ brahmaloka’’ntiādinā nayena dānassa vaṇṇaṃ thomayamānā vicaranti.Yācakāti ye ‘‘pasatamattaṃ detha, sarāvamattaṃ dethā’’tiādīni ca vatvā yācamānā vicaranti.Itthāgārassa dānaṃ dīyitthāti paṭhamadvārassa laddhattā tattha uppajjanakasatasahasse aññampi dhanaṃ pakkhipitvā rañño amacce hāretvā attano amacce ṭhapetvā raññā dinnadānato rājitthiyo mahantataraṃ dānaṃ adaṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Mama dānaṃ paṭikkamīti yaṃ mama dānaṃ tattha dīyittha, taṃ paṭinivatti. Sesadvāresupi eseva nayo.Kocīti katthaci.Dīgharattanti asītivassasahassāni. Ettakaṃ kira kālaṃ tassa rañño dānaṃ dīyittha. Tatiyaṃ.

Samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānaṃ (to ascetics, brahmins, the poor, travelers, mendicants, and beggars); here, samaṇā means those who have gone forth into homelessness. Brāhmaṇā means those who use the term "bho." But these do not refer to Samaṇa-Brāhmaṇas who have stilled evil and banished evil. Kapaṇā means the wretched, poor people, the blind, the crippled, and so on. Addhikā means travelers. Vanibbakā means those who wander around praising the virtues of giving, saying, "It is given, it is offered, it is pleasing, it is delightful, it is given in time, it is given blamelessly; giving, one should gladden the mind; may the venerable one go to the Brahma world," and so on. Yācakā means those who wander around begging, saying, "Give a handful, give a potsherd," and so on. Itthāgārassa dānaṃ dīyitthā (donations were given to the women's quarters); having obtained (the income) from the first gate, they added more wealth to the hundred thousand that arose there, defeated the king's ministers, and appointed their own ministers. The royal women gave a donation that was greater than the donation given by the king. Referring to that, he said, "Mama dānaṃ paṭikkamī" (my donation was surpassed); the donation that was given by me there was turned back. The same method applies to the remaining gates. Kocī means anywhere. Dīgharattaṃ (for a long time) means eighty thousand years. It seems that the king's donation was given for such a long time. The third.

105.Catutthaṃ vuttatthameva. Catutthaṃ.

105.The fourth is the same as what was said. The fourth.

5. Jantusuttavaṇṇanā
5. Jantusuttavaṇṇanā (Description of the Jantusutta)

106.Pañcamekosalesu viharantīti bhagavato santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā tattha gantvā viharanti.Uddhatāti akappiye kappiyasaññitāya ca kappiye akappiyasaññitāya ca anavajje sāvajjasaññitāya ca sāvajje anavajjasaññitāya ca uddhaccapakatikā hutvā.Unnaḷāti uggatanaḷā, uṭṭhitatucchamānāti vuttaṃ hoti.Capalāti pattacīvaramaṇḍanādinā cāpallena yuttā.Mukharāti mukhakharā, kharavacanāti vuttaṃ hoti.Vikiṇṇavācāti asaṃyatavacanā, divasampi niratthakavacanapalāpino.Muṭṭhassatinoti naṭṭhassatino sativirahitā, idha kataṃ ettha pamussanti.Asampajānāti nippaññā.Asamāhitāti appanāupacārasamādhirahitā, caṇḍasote baddhanāvāsadisā.Vibbhantacittāti anavaṭṭhitacittā, panthāruḷhabālamigasadisā.Pākatindriyāti saṃvarābhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭaindriyā.

106.In the fifth, kosalesu viharantī (dwelling in Kosala) means taking a meditation subject from the Blessed One and going there to dwell. Uddhatā (arrogant) means being of an arrogant nature, perceiving what is not allowable as allowable and what is allowable as not allowable, perceiving what is blameless as blameworthy and what is blameworthy as blameless. Unnaḷā means with raised eyebrows, it is said to mean with uplifted empty conceit. Capalā (fickle) means endowed with fickleness through adorning robes and bowls, etc. Mukharā (garrulous) means harsh-mouthed, it is said to mean harsh-spoken. Vikiṇṇavācā (scattered in speech) means unrestrained in speech, chattering meaninglessly even during the day. Muṭṭhassatino (of confused mindfulness) means with lost mindfulness, devoid of mindfulness, forgetting what was done here. Asampajānā (without clear comprehension) means without wisdom. Asamāhitā (unconcentrated) means without appanā and upacāra samādhi, like a boat tied in a swift current. Vibbhantacittā (with bewildered minds) means with unsteady minds, like a young deer on a path. Pākatindriyā (with undisciplined senses) means with senses wide open, as in the lay life, due to the absence of restraint.

Jantūti evaṃnāmako devaputto.Tadahuposatheti tasmiṃ ahu uposathe, uposathadivaseti attho.Pannaraseti cātuddasikādipaṭikkhepo.Upasaṅkamīti codanatthāya upagato. So kira cintesi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nikkhantā, idāni pamattā viharanti, na kho panete pāṭiyekkaṃ nisinnaṭṭhāne codiyamānā kathaṃ gaṇhissanti, samāgamanakāle codissāmī’’ti uposathadivase tesaṃ sannipatitabhāvaṃ ñatvā upasaṅkami.Gāthāhi ajjhabhāsīti sabbesaṃ majjhe ṭhatvā gāthā abhāsi.

Jantū is the name of a devaputta. Tadahuposathe means on that uposatha, meaning on the uposatha day. Pannarase (on the fifteenth) is a rejection of the fourteenth, etc. Upasaṅkamī means approached for the purpose of urging. It seems that he thought, "These monks, having gone forth taking a meditation subject from the Teacher, now dwell heedlessly. How will they take it if I urge them individually in their sitting places? I will urge them at the time of assembly," knowing that they had gathered on the uposatha day, he approached. Gāthāhi ajjhabhāsī (addressed in verses) means standing in the midst of all, he spoke verses.

sukhajīvino pure āsuntiādimāha. Tatthasukhajīvino pure āsunti pubbe bhikkhū supposā subharā ahesuṃ, uccanīcakulesu sapadānaṃ caritvā laddhena missakapiṇḍena yāpesunti adhippāyena evamāha.Anicchāti nittaṇhā hutvā.

He said, beginning with sukhajīvino pure āsuṃ (formerly they lived happily). Here, sukhajīvino pure āsuṃ means formerly the monks were well-nourished, well-fed; he said this with the intention that they lived by means of mixed alms obtained by wandering for alms in high and low families. Anicchā means being without craving.

dupposantiādimāha. Tatthagāme gāmaṇikā viyāti yathā gāme gāmakuṭā nānappakārena janaṃ pīḷetvā khīradadhitaṇḍulādīni āharāpetvā bhuñjanti, evaṃ tumhepi anesanāya ṭhitā tumhākaṃ jīvikaṃ kappethāti adhippāyena vadati.Nipajjantīti uddesaparipucchāmanasikārehi anatthikā hutvā sayanamhi hatthapāde vissajjetvā nipajjanti.Parāgāresūti paragehesu, kulasuṇhādīsūti attho.Mucchitāti kilesamucchāya mucchitā.

He said, beginning with dupposā (difficult to support). Here, gāme gāmaṇikā viyā (like village headmen in a village) means just as village headmen in a village oppress people in various ways, forcing them to bring milk, curds, rice, etc., and eat it, so you, standing on wrong livelihood, maintain your lives. He speaks with this intention. Nipajjantī (they lie down) means they lie down, releasing their arms and legs on the bed, without interest in learning, questioning, and reflection. Parāgāresū (in others' houses) means in others' houses, in kula-suṇhādisu (in-laws etc.) is the meaning. Mucchitā (infatuated) means infatuated with the infatuation of defilements.

Ekacceti vattabbayuttakeyeva.Apaviddhāti chaḍḍitakā.Anāthāti apatiṭṭhā.Petāti susāne chaḍḍitā kālaṅkatamanussā. Yathā hi susāne chaḍḍitā nānāsakuṇādīhi khajjanti, ñātakāpi nesaṃ nāthakiccaṃ na karonti, na rakkhanti, na gopayanti, evamevaṃ evarūpāpi ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ santikā ovādānusāsaniṃ na labhantīti apaviddhā anāthā, yathā petā, tatheva honti. Pañcamaṃ.

Ekacce (some) means only those who are fit to be spoken to. Apaviddhā (rejected) means abandoned. Anāthā (helpless) means without support. Petā (ghosts) means dead people thrown in the charnel ground. Just as those thrown in the charnel ground are eaten by various birds, etc., and relatives do not do their duties of protection for them, do not guard them, do not protect them; in the same way, these do not receive instruction and guidance from teachers and preceptors, therefore they are rejected, helpless, like ghosts, they are just like that. The fifth.

6. Rohitassasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Rohitassasuttavaṇṇanā (Description of the Rohitassasutta)

107.Chaṭṭheyatthāti cakkavāḷalokassa ekokāse bhummaṃ.Na cavati na upapajjatīti idaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena gahitaṃ.Gamanenāti padagamanena.Nāhaṃ taṃ lokassa antanti satthā saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ sandhāya vadati.Ñāteyyantiādīsu ñātabbaṃ, daṭṭhabbaṃ, pattabbanti attho.

107.In the sixth, yattha (where) means the ground in one place of the universe. Na cavati na upapajjatī (neither passes away nor is reborn) means this is taken in the sense of successive death and rebirth. Gamanena (by going) means by foot travel. Nāhaṃ taṃ lokassa antaṃ (I do not say that the end of the world) means the Teacher speaks referring to the end of the world of formations. In ñāteyyaṃ, etc., it means it should be known, it should be seen, it should be attained.

acchariyantiādimāha.

He said, beginning with acchariyaṃ (wonderful).

Daḷhadhammoti daḷhadhanu, uttamappamāṇena dhanunā samannāgato.Dhanuggahoti dhanuācariyo.Susikkhitoti dasa dvādasa vassāni dhanusippaṃ sikkhito.Katahatthoti usabhappamāṇepi vālaggaṃ vijjhituṃ samatthabhāvena katahattho.Katūpāsanoti katasarakkhepo dassitasippo.Asanenāti kaṇḍena.Atipāteyyāti atikkameyya. Yāvatā so tālacchāyaṃ atikkameyya, tāvatā kālena ekacakkavāḷaṃ atikkamāmīti attano javasampattiṃ dasseti.

Daḷhadhammo (Daḷhadhamma) means Daḷhadhanu (Firm Bow), endowed with an excellent, standard bow. Dhanuggaho (archer) means an archery teacher. Susikkhito (well-trained) means trained in the art of archery for ten or twelve years. Katahattho (skilled) means with skilled hands, capable of piercing even a hair's breadth with the standard of an ox. Katūpāsano (having practiced) means having practiced shooting arrows, having demonstrated skill. Asanenā (with an arrow) means with an arrow. Atipāteyyā (would surpass) means would exceed. He demonstrates his swiftness, saying that he can cross one universe in the time it takes to surpass the shadow of a palm tree.

Puratthimā samuddā pacchimoti yathā puratthimasamuddā pacchimasamuddo dūre, evaṃ me dūre padavītihāro ahosīti vadati. So kira pācīnacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ ṭhito pādaṃ pasāretvā pacchimacakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ akkamati, puna dutiyaṃ pādaṃ pasāretvā paracakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ akkamati.Icchāgatanti icchā eva.Aññatrevāti nippapañcataṃ dasseti. Bhikkhācārakāle kiresa nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotatte mukhaṃ dhovitvā kāle sampatte uttarakurumhi piṇḍāya caritvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ nisinno bhattakiccaṃ karoti, tattha muhuttaṃ vissamitvā puna javati.Vassasatāyukoti tadā dīghāyukakālo hoti, ayaṃ pana vassasatāvasiṭṭhe āyumhi gamanaṃ ārabhi.Vassasatajīvīti taṃ vassasataṃ anantarāyena jīvanto.Antarāva kālaṅkatoti cakkavāḷalokassa antaṃ appatvā antarāva mato. So pana tattha kālaṃ katvāpi āgantvā imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe nibbatti.Appatvāti saṅkhāralokassa antaṃ appatvā.Dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa.Antakiriyanti pariyantakaraṇaṃ.Kaḷevareti attabhāve.Sasaññimhi samanaketi sasaññe sacitte.Lokanti dukkhasaccaṃ.Lokasamudayanti samudayasaccaṃ.Lokanirodhanti nirodhasaccaṃ.Paṭipadanti maggasaccaṃ. Iti – ‘‘nāhaṃ, āvuso, imāni cattāri saccāni tiṇakaṭṭhādīsu paññapemi, imasmiṃ pana cātumahābhūtike kāyasmiṃ yeva paññapemī’’ti dasseti.Samitāvīti samitapāpo.Nāsīsatīti na pattheti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Puratthimā samuddā pacchimo (the eastern sea, the western sea) means just as the eastern sea is far from the western sea, so my foot journey was far. It seems that he stands at the mouth circle of the eastern universe, stretches out his foot, and steps on the mouth circle of the western universe; then he stretches out his second foot and steps on the mouth circle of another universe. Icchāgataṃ (by wish) means merely by wish. Aññatrevā (elsewhere) shows the state of being without proliferation. It seems that during the alms-round, he chews a nāgalatā tooth stick, washes his mouth in Anotatta, and when the time comes, he goes for alms in Uttarakuru and, sitting at the mouth circle of the universe, performs the meal duty; resting there for a moment, he speeds off again. Vassasatāyuko (one who lives for a hundred years) means at that time the lifespan was long; but this one began the journey with a lifespan of a hundred years remaining. Vassasatajīvī (living for a hundred years) means living that hundred years without interruption. Antarāva kālaṅkato (died in between) means he died in between, without reaching the end of the universe. But having died there, he was reborn in this universe itself. Appatvā (without reaching) means without reaching the end of the world of formations. Dukkhassā (of suffering) means of the round of suffering. Antakiriyaṃ (the making of an end) means the making of an end. Kaḷevare (in this body) means in this existence. Sasaññimhi samanake (in this conscious, animate) means in this conscious, animate (body). Lokaṃ (the world) means the truth of suffering. Lokasamudayaṃ (the origin of the world) means the truth of origin. Lokanirodhaṃ (the cessation of the world) means the truth of cessation. Paṭipadaṃ (the path) means the truth of the path. Thus, he shows, "I do not declare these four truths in grass, sticks, etc., but in this body consisting of the four great elements." Samitāvī (one who has stilled) means one who has stilled evil. Nāsīsatī (does not hope) means does not desire. The sixth.

108-109.Sattamaṭṭhamāni vuttatthāneva. Sattamaṃ, aṭṭhamaṃ.

108-109.The seventh and eighth are the same as what was said. The seventh, the eighth.

9. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā (Description of the Susimasutta)

110.Navametuyhampi no, ānanda, sāriputto ruccatīti satthā therassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetukāmo, vaṇṇo ca nāmesa visabhāgapuggalassa santike kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tassa santike kathito hi matthakaṃ na pāpuṇāti. So hi ‘‘asuko nāma bhikkhu sīlavā’’ti vutte. ‘‘Kiṃ tassa sīlaṃ? Gorūpasīlo so. Kiṃ tayā añño sīlavā na diṭṭhapubbo’’ti vā? ‘‘Paññavā’’ti vutte, ‘‘kiṃ pañño so? Kiṃ tayā añño paññavā na diṭṭhapubbo’’ti? Vā, ādīni vatvā vaṇṇakathāya antarāyaṃ karoti. Ānandatthero pana sāriputtattherassa sabhāgo, paṇītāni labhitvā therassa deti, attano upaṭṭhākadārake pabbājetvā therassa santike upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpeti, upasampādeti. Sāriputtattheropi ānandattherassa tatheva karoti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Aññamaññassa guṇesu pasīditvā. Ānandatthero hi – ‘‘amhākaṃ jeṭṭhabhātiko ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ satasahassañca kappe pāramiyo pūretvā soḷasavidhaṃ paññaṃ paṭivijjhitvā dhammasenāpatiṭṭhāne ṭhito’’ti therassa guṇesu pasīditvāva theraṃ mamāyati. Sāriputtattheropi – ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa mayā kattabbaṃ mukhodakadānādikiccaṃ sabbaṃ ānando karoti. Ānandaṃ nissāya ahaṃ icchiticchitaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ labhāmī’’ti āyasmato ānandassa guṇesu pasīditvāva taṃ mamāyati. Tasmā bhagavā sāriputtattherassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetukāmo ānandattherassa santike kathetuṃ āraddho.

110.In the ninth, tuyhampi no, ānanda, sāriputto ruccatī (does Sāriputta please you, Ānanda?) The Teacher, wishing to speak in praise of the Thera, and praise is not fitting to speak in the presence of a person of opposite disposition. Indeed, praise spoken in his presence does not reach its peak. If it is said, "So-and-so monk is virtuous," he would say, "What is his virtue? He is virtuous like a cow. Have you never seen another virtuous one before?" Or if it is said, "He is wise," he would say, "What is his wisdom? Have you never seen another wise one before?" and so on, creating an obstacle to the talk of praise. But Ānandatthera is of the same disposition as Sāriputtatthera; having obtained excellent things, he gives them to the Thera, and having ordained his own attendant boys, he has them take ordination and higher ordination with the Thera. Sāriputtatthera also does the same for Ānandatthera. What is the reason? Being pleased with each other's qualities. Indeed, Ānandatthera cherishes the Thera, being pleased with the Thera's qualities, thinking, "Our elder brother, having fulfilled the perfections for one incalculable and a hundred thousand aeons, having penetrated the sixteen kinds of wisdom, stands in the position of commander of the Dhamma." Sāriputtatthera also cherishes Ānandatthera, being pleased with the qualities of venerable Ānanda, thinking, "Ānanda does all the duties that I should do for the perfectly enlightened Buddha, such as offering face-washing water. Relying on Ānanda, I am able to attain any attainment I wish." Therefore, the Blessed One, wishing to speak in praise of Sāriputtatthera, began to speak in the presence of Ānandatthera.

tuyhampīti sampiṇḍanattho pi-kāro. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ānanda, sāriputtassa ācāro gocaro vihāro abhikkamo paṭikkamo ālokitavilokitaṃ samiñjitapasāraṇaṃ mayhaṃ ruccati, asītimahātherānaṃ ruccati, sadevakassa lokassa ruccati. Tuyhampi ruccatī’’ti?

Tuyhampī (to you too); the pi-particle has the meaning of inclusion. This is what is said: "Ānanda, Sāriputta's conduct, range, dwelling, going forward, going back, looking, glancing, contracting, and stretching please me, please the eighty great Theras, please the world with its devas. Does it please you too?"

kassa hi nāma, bhante, abālassātiādimāha. Bālo hi bālatāya, duṭṭho dosatāya, mūḷho mohena, vipallatthacitto ummattako cittavipallāsena vaṇṇaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇo’’ti vā avaṇṇaṃ ‘‘avaṇṇe’’ti vā, ‘‘ayaṃ buddho, ayaṃ sāvako’’ti vā na jānāti. Abālādayo pana jānanti, tasmāabālassātiādimāha.Na rucceyyāti bālādīnaṃyeva hi so na rucceyya, na aññassa kassaci na rucceyya.

He said, beginning with kassa hi nāma, bhante, abālassā (venerable sir, to whom would it not please, if not to a fool?). Indeed, a fool, due to foolishness; a wicked person, due to wickedness; a deluded person, due to delusion; an insane person, with a deranged mind, does not know praise as "praise" or blame as "blame," or "this is a Buddha, this is a disciple." But those who are not foolish know, therefore he said, abālassā (if not to a fool). Na rucceyyā (would not please) means indeed, it would not please only a fool, not anyone else.

paṇḍito, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthapaṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato, catūsu kosallesu ṭhitassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti āyatanakusalo ca paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca, ettāvatā kho, ānanda, ‘paṇḍito bhikkhū’ti alaṃ vacanāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124).Mahāpaññotiādīsu mahāpaññādīhi samannāgatoti attho. Tatridaṃ mahāpaññādīnaṃ nānattaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.4) – katamāmahāpaññā? Mahante sīlakkhandhe pariggaṇhātīti mahāpaññā, mahante samādhikkhandhe, paññākkhandhe, vimuttikkhandhe, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhe pariggaṇhātīti mahāpaññā. Mahantāni ṭhānāṭṭhānāni, mahāvihārasamāpattiyo, mahantāni ariyasaccāni, mahante satipaṭṭhāne, sammappadhāne, iddhipāde, mahantāni indriyāni, balāni, bojjhaṅgāni, mahante ariyamagge, mahantāni sāmaññaphalāni, mahāabhiññāyo, mahantaṃ paramatthaṃ nibbānaṃ pariggaṇhātīti mahāpaññā.

He said, "Venerable sir, [he is] wise" and so on. Therein, wise (paṇḍito) means endowed with wisdom; this is a name for one established in the four kinds of skill (kosalla). It was said: "When, Ānanda, a bhikkhu is skilled in elements (dhātu), skilled in sense bases (āyatana), skilled in dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppāda), and skilled in what is possible and impossible, to that extent, Ānanda, it is fitting to say, 'A bhikkhu is wise'" (Majjhima Nikāya 3.124). In of great wisdom (mahāpañño) and so on, the meaning is endowed with great wisdom, etc. Here, this is the distinction of great wisdom, etc. (Paṭisambhidāmagga 3.4): What is great wisdom (mahāpaññā)? Great wisdom takes up a great aggregate of virtue (sīlakkhandha); great wisdom takes up a great aggregate of concentration (samādhikkhandha), an aggregate of wisdom (paññākkhandha), an aggregate of liberation (vimuttikkhandha), an aggregate of the knowledge and vision of liberation (vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandha). What is possible and impossible are great; the attainments of great dwelling (mahāvihārasamāpatti) are great; the Noble Truths (ariyasacca) are great; great are the mindfulness practices (satipaṭṭhāna), the right efforts (sammappadhāna), the bases of spiritual power (iddhipāda); great are the faculties (indriya), the powers (bala), the factors of enlightenment (bojjhaṅga); great is the Noble Path (ariyamagga); great are the fruits of recluseship (sāmaññaphala); the great super-knowledges (abhiññā) are great; great is the ultimate meaning, Nibbāna; great wisdom takes up Nibbāna.

Sā pana therassa devorohanaṃ katvā saṅkassanagaradvāre ṭhitena satthārā puthujjanapañcake pañhe pucchite taṃ vissajjentassa pākaṭā jātā.

But that [wisdom] of the Elder became apparent when the Teacher, after descending from the heavens and standing at the gate of Saṅkassa city, asked questions to the five ordinary individuals, and he answered them.

puthupaññā? Puthu nānākhandhesu, (ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti puthupaññā.) Puthu nānādhātūsu, puthu nānāāyatanesu, puthu nānāpaṭiccasamuppādesu, puthu nānāsuññatamanupalabbhesu, puthu nānāatthesu, dhammesu niruttīsu paṭibhānesu, puthu nānāsīlakkhandhesu, puthu nānāsamādhi-paññāvimutti-vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhesu, puthu nānāṭhānāṭṭhānesu, puthu nānāvihārasamāpattīsu, puthu nānāariyasaccesu, puthu nānāsatipaṭṭhānesu, sammappadhānesu, iddhipādesu, indriyesu, balesu, bojjhaṅgesu, puthu nānāariyamaggesu, sāmaññaphalesu, abhiññāsu, puthu nānājanasādhāraṇe dhamme samatikkamma paramatthe nibbāne ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti puthupaññā.

extensive wisdom (puthupaññā)? Wisdom proceeds diversely (puthu) in various aggregates. (Wisdom proceeds, therefore [it is] extensive wisdom.) Diversely in various elements (dhātu), diversely in various sense bases (āyatana), diversely in various instances of dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppāda), diversely in various unperceived voids, diversely in various meanings, in doctrines (dhamma), in expressions (nirutti), in eloquence (paṭibhāna), diversely in various aggregates of virtue (sīlakkhandha), diversely in various aggregates of concentration (samādhi), wisdom (paññā), liberation (vimutti), knowledge and vision of liberation (vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandha), diversely in what is possible and impossible, diversely in various attainments of dwelling (vihārasamāpatti), diversely in various Noble Truths (ariyasacca), diversely in various mindfulness practices (satipaṭṭhāna), right efforts (sammappadhāna), bases of spiritual power (iddhipāda), faculties (indriya), powers (bala), factors of enlightenment (bojjhaṅga), diversely in various Noble Paths (ariyamagga), fruits of recluseship (sāmaññaphala), super-knowledges (abhiññā); extensive wisdom proceeds past commonly shared conditions of various people to the ultimate meaning, Nibbāna.

hāsapaññā? Idhekacco hāsabahulo vedabahulo tuṭṭhibahulo pāmojjabahulo sīlaṃ paripūreti, indriyasaṃvaraṃ paripūreti, bhojane mattaññutaṃ, jāgariyānuyogaṃ, sīlakkhandhaṃ, samādhikkhandhaṃ, paññākkhandhaṃ, vimuttikkhandhaṃ, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhaṃ paripūretīti, hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo pāmojjabahulo ṭhānāṭṭhānaṃ paṭivijjhatīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo vihārasamāpattiyo paripūretīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati. Satipaṭṭhāne, sammappadhāne, iddhipāde, indriyāni, balāni, bojjhaṅgāni, ariyamaggaṃ bhāvetīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo sāmaññaphalāni sacchikaroti, abhiññāyo paṭivijjhatīti hāsapaññā, hāsabahulo vedatuṭṭhipāmojjabahulo paramatthaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarotīti hāsapaññā.

joyful wisdom (hāsapaññā)? Here, someone is abundant in joy (hāsa), abundant in gladness (veda), abundant in satisfaction (tuṭṭhi), abundant in delight (pāmojja), fulfills virtue (sīla), fulfills sense restraint (indriyasaṃvara), moderation in eating (bhojane mattaññuta), devotion to wakefulness (jāgariyānuyoga), fulfills the aggregate of virtue (sīlakkhandha), the aggregate of concentration (samādhikkhandha), the aggregate of wisdom (paññākkhandha), the aggregate of liberation (vimuttikkhandha), the aggregate of the knowledge and vision of liberation (vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandha); [this is] joyful wisdom. Abundant in joy and delight, he penetrates what is possible and impossible; [this is] joyful wisdom. Abundant in joy, he fulfills the attainments of dwelling (vihārasamāpatti); [this is] joyful wisdom. Abundant in joy, he penetrates the Noble Truths (ariyasacca). He develops the mindfulness practices (satipaṭṭhāna), the right efforts (sammappadhāna), the bases of spiritual power (iddhipāda), the faculties (indriya), the powers (bala), the factors of enlightenment (bojjhaṅga), the Noble Path (ariyamagga); [this is] joyful wisdom. Abundant in joy, he realizes the fruits of recluseship (sāmaññaphala), he penetrates the super-knowledges (abhiññā); [this is] joyful wisdom; abundant in joy, gladness and delight, he realizes the ultimate meaning, Nibbāna; [this is] joyful wisdom.

Thero ca sarado nāma tāpaso hutvā anomadassissa bhagavato pādamūle aggasāvakapatthanaṃ paṭṭhapesi. Taṃkālato paṭṭhāya hāsabahulo sīlaparipūraṇādīni akāsīti hāsapañño.

And the Elder, having been a hermit named Sarada, established the aspiration to be the foremost disciple at the foot of Anomadassi Buddha. From that time onward, he performed the fulfillment of virtue, being abundant in joy, etc.; therefore, he [is] of joyful wisdom.

javanapaññā? Yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ…pe… yaṃ dūre santike vā, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ aniccato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Dukkhato khippaṃ, anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Yā kāci vedanā…pe… yā kāci saññā… ye keci saṅkhārā… yaṃkiñci viññāṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ…pe… sabbaṃ viññāṇaṃ aniccato, dukkhato, anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccato, dukkhato, anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena, dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhena, anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti tulayitvā tīrayitvā vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā rūpanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Vedanā… saññā… saṅkhārā… viññāṇaṃ… cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena…pe… vibhūtaṃ katvā jarāmaraṇanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ. Cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ khayadhammaṃ vayadhammaṃ virāgadhammaṃ nirodhadhammanti tulayitvā tīrayitvā vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā jarāmaraṇanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā.

swift wisdom (javanapaññā)? Whatever form, past, future, or present… all form swiftly passes away as impermanent; [this is] swift wisdom. Swiftly, as suffering; swiftly, as not-self, it passes away; [this is] swift wisdom. Whatever feeling… whatever perception… whatever volitional formations… whatever consciousness, past, future, or present… all consciousness swiftly passes away as impermanent, as suffering, as not-self; [this is] swift wisdom. The eye… old age and death, past, future, or present, swiftly passes away as impermanent, as suffering, as not-self; [this is] swift wisdom. Form, past, future, or present, is impermanent in the sense of destruction (khayaṭṭha), suffering in the sense of fear (bhayaṭṭha), not-self in the sense of insubstantiality (asārakaṭṭhena); having weighed it, having judged it, having clarified it, having made it manifest, in the cessation of form, in Nibbāna, it swiftly passes away; [this is] swift wisdom. Feeling… perception… volitional formations… consciousness… the eye… old age and death, past, future, or present, is impermanent in the sense of destruction… having made it manifest, in the cessation of old age and death, in Nibbāna, it swiftly passes away; [this is] swift wisdom. Form, past, future, or present… consciousness. The eye… old age and death is impermanent, conditioned, dependently originated, subject to decay, subject to passing away, subject to fading away, subject to cessation; having weighed it, having judged it, having clarified it, having made it manifest, in the cessation of old age and death, in Nibbāna, it swiftly passes away; [this is] swift wisdom.

tikkhapaññā? Khippaṃ kilese chindatīti tikkhapaññā. Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti, uppannaṃ byāpādavitakkaṃ… uppannaṃ vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ… uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme… uppannaṃ rāgaṃ… dosaṃ… mohaṃ… kodhaṃ… upanāhaṃ… makkhaṃ… paḷāsaṃ… issaṃ… macchariyaṃ… māyaṃ… sāṭheyyaṃ… thambhaṃ… sārambhaṃ… mānaṃ… atimānaṃ… madaṃ… pamādaṃ… sabbe kilese… sabbe duccarite… sabbe abhisaṅkhāre… sabbe bhavagāmikamme nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti, byantīkaroti, anabhāvaṃ gametīti tikkhapaññā. Ekasmiṃ āsane cattāro ca ariyamaggā, cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni, catasso ca paṭisambhidāyo, cha ca abhiññāyo adhigatā honti sacchikatā phassitā paññāyāti tikkhapaññā.

sharp wisdom (tikkhapaññā)? Sharp wisdom swiftly cuts off defilements (kilesa). He does not tolerate an arisen thought of sensual desire, an arisen thought of ill-will… an arisen thought of harmfulness… arisen unwholesome evil states… arisen lust (rāga)… hatred (dosa)… delusion (moha)… anger (kodha)… resentment (upanāha)… contempt (makkha)… insolence (paḷāsa)… envy (issa)… stinginess (macchariya)… deceit (māyā)… fraud (sāṭheyya)… obstinacy (thambha)… presumption (sārambha)… conceit (māna)… arrogance (atimāna)… intoxication (mada)… negligence (pamāda)… all defilements… all misconduct… all karmic formations (abhisaṅkhāra)… all deeds leading to rebirth; he does not tolerate them, he abandons them, he dispels them, he eliminates them, he causes them to not exist; [this is] sharp wisdom. In one seat, the four Noble Paths (ariyamagga) are attained, the four fruits of recluseship (sāmaññaphala), the four analytical knowledges (paṭisambhidā), and the six super-knowledges (abhiññā) are attained, realized, experienced with wisdom; [this is] sharp wisdom.

Thero ca bhāgineyyassa dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasutte desiyamāne ṭhitakova sabbakilese chinditvā sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ paṭividdhakālato paṭṭhāya tikkhapañño nāma jāto. Tenāha – ‘‘tikkhapañño, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto’’ti.

And the Elder, while the Discourse on the Grasping of Feeling (vedanāpariggahasutta) was being taught to his nephew, the wanderer Dīghanakha, while standing there, cutting off all defilements, from the time he penetrated the knowledge of a disciple of perfected qualities (sāvakapāramiñāṇa), he became known as sharp wisdom. Therefore, he said, "Venerable sir, the venerable Sāriputta [is] of sharp wisdom."

nibbedhikapaññā? Idhekacco sabbasaṅkhāresu ubbegabahulo hoti uttāsabahulo ukkaṇṭhanabahulo aratibahulo anabhiratibahulo bahimukho na ramati sabbasaṅkhāresu, anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti nibbedhikapaññā. Anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ… mohakkhandhaṃ… kodhaṃ… upanāhaṃ…pe… sabbe bhavagāmikamme nibbijjhati padāletīti nibbedhikapaññā.

penetrative wisdom (nibbedhikapaññā)? Here, someone is abundant in revulsion towards all conditioned things (saṅkhāra), abundant in dismay, abundant in loathing, abundant in aversion, abundant in non-delight, turned away, does not delight in all conditioned things; he penetrates and breaks apart the aggregate of greed (lobhakkhandha) never before penetrated, never before broken apart; [this is] penetrative wisdom. He penetrates and breaks apart the aggregate of hatred (dosakkhandha)… the aggregate of delusion (mohakkhandha)… anger… resentment… all deeds leading to rebirth never before penetrated, never before broken apart; [this is] penetrative wisdom.

Appicchoti santaguṇaniguhanatā, paccayapaṭiggahaṇe ca mattaññutā, etaṃ appicchalakkhaṇanti iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgato.Santuṭṭhoti catūsu paccayesu yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathāsāruppasantosoti, imehi tīhi santosehi samannāgato.Pavivittoti kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ, cittaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattānaṃ, upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatānanti, imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ lābhī.Asaṃsaṭṭhoti dassanasaṃsaggo savanasaṃsaggo samullapanasaṃsaggo paribhogasaṃsaggo kāyasaṃsaggoti, imehi pañcahi saṃsaggehi virahito. Ayañca pañcavidho saṃsaggo rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi upāsakehi upasikāhi bhikkhūhi bhikkhunīhīti aṭṭhahi puggalehi saddhiṃ jāyati, so sabbopi therassa natthīti asaṃsaṭṭho.

of few desires (appiccho) means not displaying qualities of contentment and knowing moderation in receiving requisites; this is the characteristic of few desires; endowed with this characteristic. content (santuṭṭho) means content with whatever is obtained among the four requisites, content with one's strength, content with what is suitable; endowed with these three kinds of contentment. secluded (pavivitto) means possessing three kinds of seclusion: physical seclusion (kāyaviveka) for those delighting in renunciation (nekkhammābhiratānaṃ) whose bodies are fit for seclusion (vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ); mental seclusion (cittaviveka) for those of purified minds (parisuddhacittānaṃ) who have attained supreme purity (paramavodānappattānaṃ); and seclusion from the basis of existence (upadhiviveka) for those individuals without a basis of existence (nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ) who have attained the unconditioned (visaṅkhāragatānaṃ). unassociated (asaṃsaṭṭho) means without five kinds of association: association by sight (dassanasaṃsaggo), association by hearing (savanasaṃsaggo), association by conversation (samullapanasaṃsaggo), association by use of resources (paribhoggasaṃsaggo), and association by physical contact (kāyasaṃsaggo). And this fivefold association arises with eight kinds of individuals: kings, royal ministers, sectarians, disciples of sectarians, laymen, laywomen, monks, and nuns; all of that is absent in the Elder; therefore, [he is] unassociated.

Āraddhavīriyoti paggahitavīriyo paripuṇṇavīriyo. Tattha āraddhavīriyo bhikkhu gamane uppannakilesassa ṭhānaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na deti, ṭhāne uppannassa nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya uppannassa seyyaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na deti, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ tattha tattheva niggaṇhāti. Thero pana catucattālīsa vassāni mañce piṭṭhiṃ na pasāreti. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘āraddhavīriyo’’ti āha.Vattāti odhunanavattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhācāraṃ disvā ‘‘ajja kathessāmi, sve kathessāmī’’ti kathāvavatthānaṃ na karoti, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ yeva ṭhāne ovadati anusāsatīti attho.

aroused in energy (āraddhavīriyo) means with energy exerted, with energy fulfilled. Therein, a bhikkhu aroused in energy does not allow arisen defilements during walking to reach the state of standing, nor arisen [defilements] during standing to [reach] sitting, nor arisen [defilements] during sitting to [reach] lying down; he restrains what has arisen in each and every posture right there. But the Elder does not rest his back on a couch for forty-four years. Referring to that, he said, "aroused in energy." a speaker (vattā) means a speaker who exhorts. Seeing misconduct among the bhikkhus, he does not postpone admonishment saying, "Today I will speak, tomorrow I will speak," but he advises and instructs in that very place.

Vacanakkhamoti vacanaṃ khamati. Eko hi parassa ovādaṃ deti, sayaṃ pana aññena ovadiyamāno kujjhati. Thero pana parassapi ovādaṃ deti, sayaṃ ovadiyamānopi sirasā sampaṭicchati. Ekadivasaṃ kira sāriputtattheraṃ sattavassiko sāmaṇero – ‘‘bhante, sāriputta, tumhākaṃ nivāsanakaṇṇo olambatī’’ti āha. Thero kiñci avatvāva ekamantaṃ gantvā parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā āgamma ‘‘ettakaṃ vaṭṭati ācariyā’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha aṭṭhāsi.

capable of being spoken to (vacanakkhamo) means he tolerates speech. For one gives advice to another, but when he himself is advised by another, he gets angry. But the Elder gives advice to others and when he himself is advised, he accepts it with his head. It is said that one day, a novice of seven years said to the Elder Sāriputta, "Venerable Sāriputta, the hem of your lower robe is hanging down." The Elder, without saying anything, went to one side, neatly arranged his lower robe, and returning, raising his joined hands, stood and said, "This much is appropriate, teacher."

‘‘Tadahu pabbajito santo, jātiyā sattavassiko;

"When I was ordained, I was seven years old by birth;
Even if he should instruct me,
I would accept it on my head." (Majjhima Nikāya 6.4.8) –

Āha.

He said.

Codakoti vatthusmiṃ otiṇṇe vā anotiṇṇe vā vītikkamaṃ disvā – ‘‘āvuso, bhikkhunā nāma evaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ, evaṃ pārupitabbaṃ, evaṃ gantabbaṃ, evaṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, evaṃ nisīditabbaṃ, evaṃ khāditabbaṃ, evaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti tantivasena anusiṭṭhiṃ deti.

an instigator (codako) means seeing a transgression whether it has occurred regarding a thing or not, he gives instruction according to the Teaching, saying, "Friend, a bhikkhu should wear the lower robe in this way, wear the outer robe in this way, walk in this way, stand in this way, sit in this way, eat in this way, consume in this way."

Pāpagarahīti pāpapuggale na passe, na tesaṃ vacanaṃ suṇe, tehi saddhiṃ ekacakkavāḷepi na vaseyyaṃ.

one who despises evil (pāpagarahī) means he does not see evil individuals, does not listen to their words, he would not live with them even in the same world-system.

‘‘Mā me kadāci pāpiccho, kusīto hīnavīriyo;

"May I never associate anywhere
With one who desires evil, is lazy, of diminished energy,
Unlearned, and disrespectful." –

Evaṃ pāpapuggalepi garahati, ‘‘samaṇena nāma rāgavasikena dosamohavasikena na hotabbaṃ, uppanno rāgo doso moho pahātabbo’’ti evaṃ pāpadhammepi garahatīti dvīhi kāraṇehi ‘‘pāpagarahī, bhante, āyasmā sāriputto’’ti vadati.

Thus, he despises even evil individuals; "A monk should not be under the control of lust, under the control of hatred, under the control of delusion; arisen lust, hatred, and delusion should be abandoned." Thus, he despises even evil things; therefore, he says, "Venerable sir, the venerable Sāriputta [is] one who despises evil" for two reasons.

evametantiādimāha.

He said, "so it is (evametaṃ)," and so on.

atha kho susīmotiādi vuttaṃ.

It was said, "Then Susīma (atha kho susīmo)," and so on.

Uccāvacāti aññesu ṭhānesu paṇītaṃ uccaṃ vuccati, hīnaṃ avacaṃ. Idha pana uccāvacāti nānāvidhā vaṇṇanibhā. Tassā kira devaparisāya nīlaṭṭhānaṃ atinīlaṃ, pītakaṭṭhānaṃ atipītakaṃ, lohitaṭṭhānaṃ atilohitaṃ, odātaṭṭhānaṃ accodātanti, catubbidhā vaṇṇanibhā pātubhavi. Tenevaseyyathāpi nāmāti catasso upamā āgatā. Tatthasubhoti sundaro.Jātimāti jātisampanno.Suparikammakatoti dhovanādiparikammena suṭṭhu parikammakato.Paṇḍukambale nikkhittoti rattakambale ṭhapito.Evamevanti rattakambale nikkhittamaṇi viya sabbā ekappahāreneva virocituṃ āraddhā.Nikkhanti atirekapañcasuvaṇṇena katapiḷandhanaṃ. Tañhi ghaṭṭanamajjanakkhamaṃ hoti.Jambonadanti mahājambusākhāya pavattanadiyaṃ nibbattaṃ, mahājambuphalarase vā pathaviyaṃ paviṭṭhe suvaṇṇaṅkurā uṭṭhahanti, tena suvaṇṇena katapiḷandhanantipi attho.Dakkhakammāraputtaukkāmukhasukusalasampahaṭṭhanti sukusalena kammāraputtena ukkāmukhe pacitvā sampahaṭṭhaṃ. Dhātuvibhaṅge (ma. ni. 3.357 ādayo) akatabhaṇḍaṃ gahitaṃ, idha pana katabhaṇḍaṃ.

varied (uccāvacā) means in other places, exquisite is called high (ucca), inferior is called low (avaca). But here, varied means various kinds of hues and shades. It seems that in that assembly of gods, the blue area was exceedingly blue, the yellow area exceedingly yellow, the red area exceedingly red, and the white area exceedingly white; four kinds of hues and shades appeared. Therefore, just as (seyyathāpi nāma), four similes have come. Therein, beautiful (subho) means lovely. well-born (jātimā) means of good birth. well-worked (suparikammakato) means well-worked by the process of washing, etc. laid on a woolen blanket (paṇḍukambale nikkhitto) means placed on a red blanket. just so (evameva) means like a jewel placed on a red blanket, they all began to shine with a single burst. Nikkha means an ornament made with more than five [measures of] gold. For that is capable of being rubbed and washed. Jambonada means produced in the river flowing from the great jambu branch, or when the juice of the great jambu fruit enters the earth, shoots of gold arise; therefore, it also means an ornament made of that gold. well-hammered by a skilled goldsmith's son at the mouth of a forge (dakkhakammāraputtaukkāmukhasukusalasampahaṭṭhaṃ) means well-hammered by a skilled goldsmith's son, having heated [it] at the mouth of a forge. In the Analysis of Elements (Dhātuvibhaṅga, Majjhima Nikāya 3.357 ff.), unmade goods are taken; here, however, made goods [are taken].

Viddheti dūrībhūte.Deveti ākāse.Nabhaṃ abbhussakkamānoti ākāsaṃ abhilaṅghanto. Iminā taruṇasūriyabhāvo dassito.Soratoti soraccena samannāgato.Dantoti nibbisevano.Satthuvaṇṇābhatoti satthārā ābhatavaṇṇo. Satthā hi aṭṭhaparisamajjhe nisīditvā ‘‘sevatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.371) nayena therassa vaṇṇaṃ āharīti thero ābhatavaṇṇo nāma hoti.Kālaṃ kaṅkhatīti parinibbānakālaṃ pattheti. Khīṇāsavo hi neva maraṇaṃ abhinandati, na jīvitaṃ pattheti, divasasaṅkhepaṃ vetanaṃ gahetvā ṭhitapuriso viya kālaṃ pana pattheti, olokento tiṭṭhatīti attho. Tenevāha –

distant (viddhe) means far away. in the sky (deve) means in the heavens. overcoming the sky (nabhaṃ abbhussakkamāno) means surpassing the sky. By this, the state of the young sun is shown. gentle (sorato) means endowed with gentleness. controlled (danto) means without attachment. praised by the Teacher (satthuvaṇṇābhato) means praised with praise brought by the Teacher. For the Teacher, sitting in the midst of the eight assemblies, praised the Elder by the method beginning with "Cultivate, bhikkhus, Sāriputta and Moggallāna," (Majjhima Nikāya 3.371); therefore, the Elder is said to be praised with praise brought. awaits his time (kālaṃ kaṅkhatī) means he desires the time of final passing away (parinibbāna). For a perfected one with taints destroyed (khīṇāsava) neither rejoices in death nor desires life, but like a man standing having received his wages for the duration of the day, he desires the time and stands watching. Therefore, he said –

‘‘Nābhinandāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhinandāmi jīvitaṃ;

"I do not rejoice in death, I do not rejoice in life;
I await my time, like a worker for his wage." (Theragāthā 1001-1002); Ninth.

10. Nānātitthiyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of the Discourse on the Disciples of Various Sectarians

111.Dasamenānātitthiyasāvakāti te kira kammavādino ahesuṃ, tasmā dānādīni puññāni katvā sagge nibbattā, te ‘‘attano attano satthari pasādena nibbattamhā’’ti saññino hutvā ‘‘gacchāma dasabalassa santike ṭhatvā amhākaṃ satthārānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathessāmā’’ti āgantvā paccekagāthāhi kathayiṃsu. Tatthachinditamāriteti chindite ca mārite ca.Hatajānīsūti pothane ca dhanajānīsu ca.Puññaṃ vā panāti attano puññampi na samanupassati, saṅkhepato puññāpuññānaṃ vipāko natthīti vadati.Sa ve vissāsamācikkhīti so – ‘‘evaṃ katapāpānampi katapuññānampi vipāko natthī’’ti vadanto sattānaṃ vissāsaṃ avassayaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ ācikkhati, tasmā mānanaṃ vandanaṃ pūjanaṃ arahatīti vadati.

111. In the tenth, nānātitthiyasāvakā (followers of various sects): They were followers of the doctrine of karma, and having performed meritorious deeds such as giving alms, they were reborn in heaven. Thinking, "We were reborn through faith in our respective teachers," they came, intending to stand before the Ten-Powered One and praise their teachers, and spoke in individual verses. Here, chinditamārite: in cutting and killing. Hatajānīsū: in striking and on the knees. Puññaṃ vā panā: he does not even recognize his own merit, and in short, he says there is no result of merit or demerit. Sa ve vissāsamācikkhī: he, saying "there is no result for those who have done evil deeds or those who have done meritorious deeds," declares confidence, a support, a foundation for beings; therefore, he says he deserves respect, reverence, and veneration.

Tapojigucchāyāti kāyakilamathatapena pāpajigucchanena.Susaṃvutattoti samannāgato pihito vā.Jegucchīti tapena pāpajigucchako.Nipakoti paṇḍito.Cātuyāmasusaṃvutoti cātuyāmena susaṃvuto. Cātuyāmo nāma sabbavārivārito ca hoti sabbavāriyutto ca sabbavāridhuto ca sabbavāriphuṭo cāti ime cattāro koṭṭhāsā. Tatthasabbavārivāritoti vāritasabbaudako, paṭikkhittasabbasītodakoti attho. So kira sītodake sattasaññī hoti, tasmā taṃ na valañjeti.Sabbavāriyuttoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena yuto.Sabbavāridhutoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena dhutapāpo.Sabbavāriphuṭoti sabbena pāpavāraṇena phuṭṭho.Diṭṭhaṃ sutañca ācikkhanti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ me’’ti sutaṃ ‘‘sutaṃ me’’ti ācikkhanto, na niguhanto.Na hi nūna kibbisīti evarūpo satthā kibbisakārako nāma na hoti.

Tapojigucchāyā: by austerity of bodily mortification and abhorrence of evil. Susaṃvutatto: well-restrained, or guarded. Jegucchī: one who abhors evil through austerity. Nipako: wise. Cātuyāmasusaṃvuto: well-restrained by the four restraints. The four restraints are: being restrained from all water, endowed with all water, cleansed by all water, and purified by all water. Here, sabbavārivārito: restrained from all water, meaning rejecting all cold water. It seems he perceived a being in cold water, therefore he does not use it. Sabbavāriyutto: endowed with all the warding off of evil. Sabbavāridhuto: with evil dispelled by all the warding off of evil. Sabbavāriphuṭo: purified by all the warding off of evil. Diṭṭhaṃ sutañca ācikkha: declaring what is seen as "I have seen," and what is heard as "I have heard," not concealing it. Na hi nūna kibbisī: a teacher of such a kind is surely not a doer of evil.

Nānātitthiyeti so kira nānātitthiyānaṃyeva upaṭṭhāko, tasmā te ārabbha vadati.Pakudhako kātiyānoti pakudho kaccāyano.Nigaṇṭhoti nāṭaputto.Makkhalipūraṇāseti makkhali ca pūraṇo ca.Sāmaññappattāti samaṇadhamme koṭippattā.Na hi nūna teti sappurisehi na dūre, teyeva loke sappurisāti vadati.Paccabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ ākoṭako imesaṃ nagganissirikānaṃ dasabalassa santike ṭhatvā vaṇṇaṃ kathetīti tesaṃ avaṇṇaṃ kathessāmī’’ti patiabhāsīti.

Nānātitthiye: he is indeed a supporter of various sects; therefore, he speaks regarding them. Pakudhako kātiyāno: Pakudha Kaccāyana. Nigaṇṭho: Nāṭaputta. Makkhalipūraṇāse: Makkhali and Pūraṇa. Sāmaññappattā: having reached the peak in the ascetic life. Na hi nūna te: not far from good people; he says they themselves are the good people in the world. Paccabhāsī: "This Ākoṭaka is standing before the Ten-Powered One and praising these naked ascetics, so I will speak disparagingly of them," he spoke back.

sahācaritenāti saha caritamattena.Chavo sigāloti lāmako kālasigālo.Kotthukoti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Saṅkassarācāroti āsaṅkitasamācāro.Na sataṃ sarikkhoti paṇḍitānaṃ sappurisānaṃ sadiso na hoti, kiṃ tvaṃ kālasigālasadise titthiye sīhe karosīti?

sahācaritenā: merely by associating. Chavo sigālo: a despicable jackal. Kotthuko: a synonym for that. Saṅkassarācāro: one whose conduct is suspect. Na sataṃ sarikkho: he is not similar to wise, good people. Why do you praise the Tirthikas, who are like jackals, as lions?

Anvāvisitvāti ‘‘ayaṃ evarūpānaṃ satthārānaṃ avaṇṇaṃ katheti, teneva naṃ mukhena vaṇṇaṃ kathāpessāmī’’ti cintetvā tassa sarīre anuāvisi adhimucci, evaṃ anvāvisitvā.Āyuttāti tapojigucchane yuttapayuttā.Pālayaṃ pavivekiyanti pavivekaṃ pālayantā. Te kira ‘‘nhāpitapavivekaṃ pālessāmā’’ti sayaṃ kese luñcanti. ‘‘Cīvarapavivekaṃ pātessāmā’’ti naggā vicaranti. ‘‘Piṇḍapātapavivekaṃ pālessāmā’’ti sunakhā viya bhūmiyaṃ vā bhuñjanti hatthesu vā. ‘‘Senāsanapavivekaṃ pālessāmā’’ti kaṇṭakaseyyādīni kappenti.Rūpe niviṭṭhāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi rūpe patiṭṭhitā.Devalokābhinandinoti devalokapatthanakāmā.Mātiyāti maccā, te ve maccā paralokatthāya sammā anusāsantīti vadati.

Anvāvisitvā: thinking, "This one speaks disparagingly of such teachers, so I will make him speak praises with that same mouth," he entered into his body, possessed him; having thus entered. Āyuttā: engaged and dedicated to austerity and abhorrence. Pālayaṃ pavivekiya: maintaining seclusion. They, thinking, "We will maintain bathing seclusion," pluck out their own hair. "We will obtain robe seclusion," they wander naked. "We will maintain alms-food seclusion," they eat on the ground or in their hands like dogs. "We will maintain dwelling seclusion," they prepare thorn beds, etc. Rūpe niviṭṭhā: established in forms by craving and wrong view. Devalokābhinandino: desiring the heavenly realm. Mātiyā: mortals; he says they truly instruct mortals well for the sake of the next world.

Itividitvāti ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamaṃ etesaṃ avaṇṇaṃ kathetvā idāni vaṇṇaṃ katheti, ko nu kho eso’’ti āvajjento jānitvāva.Ye cantalikkhasmiṃ pabhāsavaṇṇāti ye antalikkhe candobhāsasūriyobhāsasañjhārāgaindadhanutārakarūpānaṃ pabhāsavaṇṇā.Sabbeva te teti sabbeva te tayā.Namucīti māraṃ ālapati.Āmisaṃva macchānaṃ vadhāya khittāti yathā macchānaṃ vadhatthāya baḷisalaggaṃ āmisaṃ khipati, evaṃ tayā pasaṃsamānena ete rūpā sattānaṃ vadhāya khittāti vadati.

Iti viditvā: having known, "This one first spoke disparagingly of these, and now speaks praises; who could this be?" by considering it. Ye cantalikkhasmiṃ pabhāsavaṇṇā: the radiant forms in the sky, such as the light of the moon, the light of the sun, twilight, rainbows, and stars. Sabbeva te te: all those are yours. Namucī: he addresses Māra. Āmisaṃva macchānaṃ vadhāya khittā: just as one throws bait attached to a hook for the killing of fish, so too, by praising, you have thrown these forms for the killing of beings, he says.

Māṇavagāmiyoti ayaṃ kira devaputto buddhupaṭṭhāko.Rājagahīyānanti rājagahapabbatānaṃ.Setoti kelāso.Aghagāminanti ākāsagāmīnaṃ.Udadhinanti udakanidhānānaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā rājagahīyānaṃ pabbatānaṃ vipulo seṭṭho, himavantapabbatānaṃ kelāso, ākāsagāmīnaṃ ādicco, udakanidhānānaṃ samuddo, nakkhattānaṃ cando, evaṃ sadevakassa lokassa buddho seṭṭhoti. Dasamaṃ.

Māṇavagāmiyo: This deva's son was an attendant of the Buddha. Rājagahīyāna: of the mountains of Rājagaha. Seto: Kelāsa. Aghagāmina: of those who travel in the sky. Udadhina: of the reservoirs of water. This is what was said: Just as of the mountains of Rājagaha, the great and best is Seto; of the Himavant mountains, Kelāsa; of those who travel in the sky, the sun; of the reservoirs of water, the ocean; of the stars, the moon; so too, the Buddha is the best of the world with its devas. The tenth.

Nānātitthiyavaggo tatiyo.

Nānātitthiyavaggo the third.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus in the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary to the Saṃyutta Nikāya,

3. Kosalasaṃyuttaṃ

3. Kosala Saṃyutta

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. Paṭhama Vagga

1. Daharasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Daharasutta-Vaṇṇanā

112.Kosalasaṃyuttassa paṭhamebhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi. Sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca – ‘‘kacci, bho gotama, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto ca gotamassa sāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato casammodanīyaṃ,atthabyañjanamadhuratāya cirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato casāraṇīyaṃ. Suyyamānasukhato ca sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato sāraṇīyaṃ. Tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhapetvā ito pubbe tathāgatassa adiṭṭhattā guṇāguṇavasena gambhīrabhāvaṃ vā uttānabhāvaṃ vā ajānanto ekamantaṃ nisīdi, ekamantaṃ nisinno kho yaṃ ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā āgato lokanissaraṇabhavokkantipañhaṃ satthu sammāsambuddhataṃ pucchituṃbhavampi notiādimāha.

112. In the first of the Kosala Saṃyutta, bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodī: just as the Blessed One conversed with him asking about his well-being, etc., so too he had a completely pleasant conversation with the Blessed One. Like cold water mixed with hot water, they became unified. And with whatever talk he conversed, such as, "Is it well with you, Gotama? Are you able to subsist? Are you and the disciples of Gotama free from illness, free from disease, of light শরীর, strong, and living comfortably?"—since it generated delight and joy, it is sammodanīyaṃ, and because it is fitting to converse. And because it is sweet in meaning and expression, and because it is worthy to be remembered as constantly conducive to prolonging it for a long time, it is sāraṇīyaṃ. And because it is pleasant to hear, it is sammodanīyaṃ, and because it is pleasant to recollect, it is sāraṇīyaṃ. Thus, in many ways, because it is pure in expression, it is sammodanīyaṃ, and because it is pure in meaning, it is sāraṇīyaṃ. Having completely finished and concluded such pleasant and memorable talk, since he had not seen the Tathāgata before and did not know his profoundness or shallowness in terms of qualities and faults, he sat down to one side. Having sat down to one side, in order to ask the Teacher about his perfect enlightenment regarding the question of escape from the world and the end of existence, which he had come prepared to ask, he said bhavampi no, etc.

bhavampīti pi-kāro sampiṇḍanatthe nipāto, tena ca cha satthāre sampiṇḍeti. Yathā pūraṇādayo ‘‘sammāsambuddhamhā’’ti paṭijānanti, evaṃ bhavampi nu paṭijānātīti attho. Idaṃ pana rājā na attano laddhiyā, loke mahājanena gahitapaṭiññāvasena pucchati. Atha bhagavā buddhasīhanādaṃ nadantoyaṃ hi taṃ mahārājātiādimāha. Tatthaahaṃ hi mahārājāti anuttaraṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ sammāsambodhiṃ ahaṃ abhisambuddhoti attho.Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjūpagamanena samaṇā, jātivasena brāhmaṇā.Saṅghinotiādīsu pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho etesaṃ atthītisaṅghino. Sveva gaṇo etesaṃ atthītigaṇino. Ācārasikkhāpanavasena tassa gaṇassa ācariyātigaṇācariyā. Ñātāti paññātā pākaṭā. ‘‘Appicchā santuṭṭhā appicchatāya vatthampi na nivāsentī’’ti evaṃ samuggato yaso etesaṃ atthītiyasassino. Titthakarāti laddhikarā.Sādhusammatāti ‘‘santo sappurisā’’ti evaṃ sammatā.Bahujanassāti assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassa.Pūraṇotiādīni tesaṃ nāmagottāni.Pūraṇoti hi nāmameva. Tathā,makkhalīti. So pana gosālāya jātattāgosāloti vutto.Nāṭaputtoti nāṭassa putto.Belaṭṭhaputtoti belaṭṭhassa putto.Kaccāyanoti pakudhassa gottaṃ. Kesakambalassa dhāraṇatoajito kesakambaloti vutto.

bhavampī: the particle "pi" is a nipāta (particle) in the sense of combination, and by that he combines the six teachers. Just as Pūraṇa and others claim "we are perfectly enlightened," does Bhava also claim that? This, however, the king does not ask according to his own view, but according to the claim taken up by the general public in the world. Then the Blessed One, roaring the lion's roar of a Buddha, said yaṃ hi taṃ mahārājā, etc. Here, ahaṃ hi mahārājā: I have perfectly awakened to the unsurpassed, the best of all, the perfect complete enlightenment known as omniscient knowledge. Samaṇabrāhmaṇā: ascetics by way of going forth, and brahmins by birth. Among saṅghino, etc., those who have a sangha, known as an assembly of renunciants, are saṅghino. Those who have their own group are gaṇino. He is the teacher of that group by way of teaching conduct and training, hence gaṇācariyā. Ñātā: known, famous. Those who have fame arisen in such a way that "they are content with little, satisfied, and do not even wear clothing due to their desire for little" are yasassino. Titthakarā: founders of schools of thought. Sādhusammatā: esteemed as "good and virtuous people." Bahujanassā: of the unlearned, blind, ignorant common people. Pūraṇo, etc., are their names and clans. Pūraṇo is indeed just a name. Likewise, makkhalī. He was called gosālo because he was born in a cowshed. Nāṭaputto: the son of Nāṭa. Belaṭṭhaputto: the son of Belaṭṭha. Kaccāyano: the clan of Pakudha. Because he wore a garment of hair, he was called ajito kesakambalo.

Tepi mayāti kappakolāhalaṃ buddhakolāhalaṃ cakkavattikolāhalanti tīṇi kolāhalāni. Tattha ‘‘vassasatasahassamatthake kappuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti kappakolāhalaṃ nāma hoti – ‘‘ito vassasatasahassamatthake loko vinassissati, mettaṃ mārisā, bhāvetha, karuṇaṃ muditaṃ upekkha’’nti manussappathe devatā ghosentiyo vicaranti. ‘‘Vassasahassamatthake pana buddho uppajjissatī’’ti buddhakolāhalaṃ nāma hoti – ‘‘ito vassasahassamatthake buddho uppajjitvā dhammānudhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannena saṅgharatanena parivārito dhammaṃ desento vicarissatī’’ti devatā ugghosenti. ‘‘Vassasatamatthake pana cakkavattī uppajjissatī’’ti cakkavattikolāhalaṃ nāma hoti – ‘‘ito vassasatamatthake sattaratanasampanno catuddīpissaro sahassa puttaparivāro vehāsaṅgamo cakkavattirājā uppajjissatī’’ti devatā ugghosenti.

Tepi mayā: there are three disturbances: the disturbance of the aeon, the disturbance of the Buddha, and the disturbance of the wheel-turning monarch. Among these, the disturbance of the aeon occurs when there is talk that "at the end of a hundred thousand years, there will be a destruction of the aeon"—"in a hundred thousand years, the world will be destroyed; develop loving-kindness, compassion, sympathetic joy, and equanimity, good sirs"—deities wander along the paths of humans, announcing this. The disturbance of the Buddha occurs when there is talk that "in a thousand years, a Buddha will arise"—"in a thousand years, a Buddha will arise and wander teaching the Dhamma, surrounded by the Sangha jewel, practicing the Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma"—deities proclaim this. The disturbance of the wheel-turning monarch occurs when there is talk that "in a hundred years, a wheel-turning monarch will arise"—"in a hundred years, a wheel-turning monarch, endowed with the seven jewels, lord of the four continents, surrounded by a thousand sons, a wheel-turning monarch who travels through the sky, will arise"—deities proclaim this.

Imesu tīsu kolāhalesu ime cha satthāro buddhakolāhalaṃ sutvā ācariye payirupāsitvā cintāmāṇivijjādīni uggaṇhitvā – ‘‘mayaṃ buddhamhā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā mahājanaparivutā janapadaṃ vicarantā anupubbena sāvatthiyaṃ pattā. Tesaṃ upaṭṭhākā rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘mahārāja, pūraṇo kassapo…pe… ajito kesakambalo buddho kira sabbaññū kirā’’ti ārocesuṃ. Rājā ‘‘tumheva ne nimantetvā ānethā’’ti āha. Te gantvā tehi, ‘‘rājā vo nimanteti. Rañño gehe bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vuttā gantuṃ na ussahanti, punappunaṃ vuccamānā upaṭṭhākānaṃ cittānurakkhaṇatthāya adhivāsetvā sabbe ekatova agamaṃsu. Rājā āsanāni paññāpetvā ‘‘nisīdantū’’ti āha. Nigguṇānaṃ attabhāve rājusmā nāma pharati, te mahārahesu āsanesu nisīdituṃ asakkontā phalakesu ceva bhūmiyaṃ ca nisīdiṃsu.

Among these three disturbances, having heard the disturbance of the Buddha, these six teachers studied the magic gem and other skills by attending upon their teachers, and having made the claim, "we are Buddhas," and wandering through the country surrounded by a great crowd, they gradually reached Sāvatthi. Their attendants approached the king and announced, "Great King, Pūraṇa Kassapa… Ajita Kesakambala is said to be a Buddha, an all-knowing one." The king said, "Invite them and bring them here yourselves." They went and, being told by them, "The king invites you. Take alms at the king's house," they were not able to go, but being repeatedly told, they consented to go all together in order to protect the minds of their attendants. The king, having prepared seats, said, "Be seated." The king's glory affects those who have no virtues, and since they were unable to sit on the valuable seats, they sat on planks and on the ground.

kiṃ pana bhavaṃ gotamo daharo ceva jātiyā, navo ca pabbajjāyāti idaṃ attano paṭiññaṃ gahetvā vadati. Tatthakinti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Ete jātimahallakā ca cirapabbajitā ca ‘‘buddhamhā’’ti na paṭijānanti, bhavaṃ gotamo jātiyā ca daharo pabbajjāya ca navo kiṃ paṭijānāti? Mā paṭijānāhīti attho.

kiṃ pana bhavaṃ gotamo daharo ceva jātiyā, navo ca pabbajjāyā: He speaks this after taking up his own claim. Here, kiṃ is a word of rejection. These, being old in birth and long-ordained, do not claim "we are Buddhas"; Bhava Gotama, young in birth and new to ordination, what do you claim? Do not claim that, is the meaning.

Na uññātabbāti na avajānitabbā.Na paribhotabbāti na paribhavitabbā.Katame cattāroti kathetukamyatāpucchā.Khattiyoti rājakumāro.Uragoti āsīviso.Aggīti aggiyeva.Bhikkhūti imasmiṃ pana pade desanākusalatāya attānaṃ abbhantaraṃ katvā sīlavantaṃ pabbajitaṃ dasseti. Ettha ca daharaṃ rājakumāraṃ disvā, ukkamitvā maggaṃ adento, pārupanaṃ anapanento, nisinnāsanato anuṭṭhahanto, hatthipiṭṭhādīhi anotaranto, heṭṭhā katvā maññanavasena aññampi evarūpaṃ anācāraṃ karonto khattiyaṃ avajānāti nāma. ‘‘Bhaddako vatāyaṃ rājakumāro, mahākaṇḍo mahodaro – kiṃ nāma yaṃkiñci corūpaddavaṃ vūpasametuṃ yattha katthaci ṭhāne rajjaṃ anusāsituṃ sakkhissatī’’tiādīni vadanto paribhoti nāma. Añjanisalākamattampi āsīvisapotakaṃ kaṇṇādīsu piḷandhanto aṅgulimpi jivhampi ḍaṃsāpento uragaṃ avajānāti nāma. ‘‘Bhaddako vatāyaṃ āsīviso udakadeḍḍubho viya kiṃ nāma kiñcideva ḍaṃsituṃ kassacideva kāye visaṃ pharituṃ sakkhissatī’’tiādīni vadanto paribhoti nāma. Khajjopanakamattampi aggiṃ gahetvā hatthena kīḷanto bhaṇḍukkhalikāya khipanto cūḷāya vā sayanapiṭṭhasāṭakapasibbakādīsu vā ṭhapento aggiṃ avajānāti nāma. ‘‘Bhaddako vatāyaṃ aggi kataraṃ nu kho yāgubhattaṃ pacissati, kataraṃ macchamaṃsaṃ, kassa sītaṃ vinodessatī’’tiādīni vadanto paribhoti nāma. Daharasāmaṇerampi pana disvā ukkamitvā maggaṃ adentoti rājakumāre vuttaṃ anācāraṃ karonto bhikkhuṃ avajānāti nāma. ‘‘Bhaddako vatāyaṃ sāmaṇero mahākaṇṭho mahodaro yaṃkiñci buddhavacanaṃ uggahetuṃ yaṃkiñci araññaṃ ajjhogāhetvā vasituṃ sakkhissati, saṅghattherakāle manāpo bhavissatī’’tiādīni vadanto paribhoti nāma. Taṃ sabbampi na kātabbanti dassentona uññātabbo na paribhotabboti āha.

Na uññātabbā: should not be despised. Na paribhotabbā: should not be disparaged. Katame cattāro: a question expressing a desire to speak. Khattiyo: a prince. Urago: a venomous snake. Aggī: fire itself. Bhikkhū: in this instance, by skill in teaching, he includes himself and shows a virtuous renunciant. Here, seeing a young prince, not giving way by moving aside, not removing his covering, not rising from his seat, not dismounting from the back of an elephant, etc., and looking down on him, one despises a Khattiya. Saying things like, "This prince is indeed well-behaved, with a big neck and a big belly—how will he be able to quell any disturbance of thieves and rule the kingdom in any place?" one disparages him. Even a small snake the size of an eye-ointment stick, wearing it in the ears, etc., and making it bite his finger and tongue, one despises a snake. Saying things like, "This snake is indeed well-behaved, like a water snake—how will it be able to bite anything and spread poison in anyone's body?" one disparages it. Taking even a firefly-sized piece of fire and playing with it in his hand, throwing it into a pot, or placing it in his hair, on his bed, robe, or bag, one despises fire. Saying things like, "This fire is indeed well-behaved—which rice gruel will it cook, which fish and meat, whose cold will it dispel?" one disparages it. Likewise, seeing a young novice, not giving way by moving aside, one despises a bhikkhu by doing the uncivil behavior mentioned regarding the prince. Saying things like, "This novice is indeed well-behaved, with a big neck and a big belly—how will he be able to learn any word of the Buddha, enter any forest and dwell there, and be pleasing in the time of the elder monks?" one disparages him. Showing that all of that should not be done, he said, na uññātabbo na paribhotabbo.

Etadavocāti etaṃ gāthābandhaṃ avoca. Gāthā ca nāmetā tadatthadīpanāpi honti visesatthadīpanāpi, tatrimā tadatthampi visesatthampi dīpentiyeva. Tatthakhattiyanti khettānaṃ adhipatiṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘khettānaṃ adhipatīti kho, vāseṭṭha, ‘khattiyo khattiyo’tveva dutiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.131).Jātisampannanti tāyeva khattiyajātiyā jātisampannaṃ.Abhijātanti tīṇi kulāni atikkamitvā jātaṃ.

Etadavocāti: he spoke this verse. And verses are for indicating the meaning, and also for indicating a special meaning; in this case, they indicate both the meaning and a special meaning. Therein, khattiya means the lord of the fields. It was said, "Because he is the lord of the fields, Vāseṭṭha, the second syllable ‘khattiyo khattiyo’ originated" (Dī. Ni. 3.131). Jātisampanna means endowed with that same khattiya lineage. Abhijāta means born having transcended three families.

Ṭhānaṃ hīti kāraṇaṃ vijjati.Manujindoti manussajeṭṭhako.Rājadaṇḍenāti rañño uddhaṭadaṇḍena, so appako nāma na hoti, dasasahassavīsatisahassappamāṇo hotiyeva.Tasmiṃ pakkamate bhusanti tasmiṃ puggale balavaupakkamaṃ upakkamati.Rakkhaṃ jīvitamattanoti attano jīvitaṃ rakkhamāno taṃ khattiyaṃ parivajjeyya na ghaṭṭeyya.

Ṭhānaṃ hīti: there exists a reason. Manujindoti: the foremost of men. Rājadaṇḍenāti: with the king's raised rod; that is not small, it would be about ten or twenty thousand in extent. Tasmiṃ pakkamate bhusanti: against that person, he makes a strong attack. Rakkhaṃ jīvitamattanoti: protecting his own life, he should avoid that khattiya, he should not clash with him.

Uccāvacehīti nānāvidhehi.Vaṇṇehīti saṇṭhānehi. Yena yena hi vaṇṇena caranto gocaraṃ labhati, yadi sappavaṇṇena, yadi deḍḍubhavaṇṇena, yadi dhamanivaṇṇena, antamaso kalandakavaṇṇenapi caratiyeva.Āsajjāti patvā.Bālanti yena bālena ghaṭṭito, taṃ bālaṃ naraṃ vā nāriṃ vā ḍaṃseyya.

Uccāvacehīti: by various means. Vaṇṇehīti: by guises. For by whatever guise he goes, he obtains his range, whether by the guise of a snake, or by the guise of a deḍḍubha, or by the guise of a bloodsucker, or even by the guise of a squirrel. Āsajjāti: having approached. Bālanti: whatever fool is clashed with, that fool, whether man or woman, it might bite.

Pahūtabhakkhanti bahubhakkhaṃ. Aggissa hi abhakkhaṃ nāma natthi.Jālinanti jālavantaṃ.Pāvakanti aggiṃ. Pāvagantipi pāṭho.Kaṇhavattaninti vattanīti maggo, agginā gatamaggo kaṇho hoti kāḷako, tasmā ‘‘kaṇhavattanī’’ti vuccati.

Pahūtabhakkhanti: with much fuel. For there is nothing that is not fuel for fire. Jālinanti: possessing flames. Pāvakanti: fire. Pāvagantipi is also a reading. Kaṇhavattaninti: vattanī means path; the path gone by fire is black, dark; therefore it is called "kaṇhavattanī".

Mahā hutvānāti mahanto hutvā. Aggi hi ekadā yāvabrahmalokappamāṇopi hoti.Jāyantitattha pārohāti tattha agginā daḍḍhavane pārohā jāyanti.Pārohāti tiṇarukkhādayo vuccanti. Te hi agginā daḍḍhaṭṭhāne mūlamattepi avasiṭṭhe pādato rohanti jāyanti vaḍḍhanti, tasmā ‘‘pārohā’’ti vuccanti. Puna rohanatthena vāpārohā. Ahorattānamaccayeti rattindivānaṃ atikkame. Nidāghepi deve vuṭṭhamatte jāyanti.

Mahā hutvānāti: having become great. For fire is sometimes even as great as the Brahma world. Jāyanti tattha pārohāti: in that forest burned by fire, shoots arise. Pārohāti: it means grass, trees, and so on. For even if only the root remains in a place burned by fire, they sprout, are born, and grow from the foot; therefore they are called "pārohā". Or, by the meaning of growing again, pārohā. Ahorattānamaccayeti: at the passing of days and nights. Even in the hot season, they arise when the gods have rained.

Bhikkhu ḍahati tejasāti ettha akkosantaṃ paccakkosanto bhaṇḍantaṃ paṭibhaṇḍanto paharantaṃ paṭipaharanto bhikkhu nāma kiñci bhikkhutejasā ḍahituṃ na sakkoti. Yo pana akkosantaṃ na paccakkosati, bhaṇḍantaṃ na paṭibhaṇḍati. Paharantaṃ na paṭipaharati, tasmiṃ vippaṭipanno tassa sīlatejena ḍayhati. Tenevetaṃ vuttaṃ.Na tassa puttā pasavoti tassa puttadhītaropi gomahiṃsakukkuṭasūkarādayo pasavopi na bhavanti, vinassantīti attho.Dāyādā vindare dhananti tassa dāyādāpi dhanaṃ na vindanti.Tālāvatthū bhavanti teti te bhikkhutejasā daḍḍhā vatthumattāvasiṭṭho matthakacchinnatālo viya bhavanti, puttadhītādivasena na vaḍḍhantīti attho.

Bhikkhu ḍahati tejasāti: here, a bhikkhu cannot burn in any way with bhikkhu power one who is scolding, scolding back, arguing, arguing back, striking, or striking back. But one who does not scold back one who is scolding, does not argue back one who is arguing, does not strike back one who is striking, one who is acting contrary to him is burnt by the power of his virtue. Therefore, this was said: Na tassa puttā pasavoti: his sons and daughters, and even offspring such as cows, buffaloes, chickens, and pigs, do not exist; it means they are destroyed. Dāyādā vindare dhananti: even his heirs do not obtain wealth. Tālāvatthū bhavanti teti: those burnt by the bhikkhu's power become like a palm tree with its top cut off, only a stump remaining; they do not grow in the way of sons and daughters, etc.; this is the meaning.

Tasmāti yasmā samaṇatejena daḍḍhā matthakacchinnatālo viya aviruḷhidhammā bhavanti, tasmā.Sammadeva samācareti sammā samācareyya. Sammā samācarantena pana kiṃ kātabbanti? Khattiyaṃ tāva nissāya laddhabbaṃ gāmanigamayānavāhanādiānisaṃsaṃ, uragaṃ nissāya tassa kīḷāpanena laddhabbaṃ vatthahiraññasuvaṇṇādiānisaṃsaṃ aggiṃ nissāya tassānubhāvena pattabbaṃ yāgubhattapacanasītavinodanādiānisaṃsaṃ, bhikkhuṃ nissāya tassa vasena pattabbaṃ asutasavanasutapariyodapana-saggamaggādhigamādiānisaṃsaṃ sampassamānena ‘‘ete nissāya pubbe vuttappakāro ādīnavo atthi. Kiṃ imehī’’ti? Na sabbaso pahātabbā. Issariyatthikena pana vuttappakāraṃ avajānanañca paribhavanañca akatvā pubbuṭṭhāyipacchānipātitādīhi upāyehi khattiyakumāro tosetabbo, evaṃ tato issariyaṃ adhigamissati. Ahituṇḍikena urage vissāsaṃ akatvā nāgavijjaṃ parivattetvā ajapadena daṇḍena gīvāya gahetvā visaharena mūlena dāṭhā dhovitvā peḷāyaṃ pakkhipitvā kīḷāpentena caritabbaṃ. Evaṃ taṃ nissāya ghāsacchādanādīni labhissati. Yāgupacanādīni kattukāmena aggiṃ vissāsena bhaṇḍukkhalikādīsu apakkhipitvā hatthehi anāmasantena gomayacuṇṇādīhi jāletvā yāgupacanādīni kattabbāni, evaṃ taṃ nissāya ānisaṃsaṃ labhissati. Asutasavanādīni patthayantenapi bhikkhuṃ ativissāsena vejjakammanavakammādīsu ayojetvā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhātabbo, evaṃ taṃ nissāya asutapubbaṃ buddhavacanaṃ asutapubbaṃ pañhāvinicchayaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ tisso kulasampattiyo cha kāmasaggāni nava ca brahmaloke patvā amatamahānibbānadassanampi labhissatīti imamatthaṃ sandhāyasammadeva samācareti āha.

Tasmāti: because those burnt by the power of a samaṇa become like a palm tree with its top cut off, not growing again, therefore, Sammadeva samācareti: he should conduct himself rightly. But what should one who is conducting himself rightly do? One should consider the benefits to be gained from relying on a khattiya, such as villages, towns, conveyances, and vehicles; the benefits to be gained from relying on a snake, such as cloth, silver, gold, etc., to be gained by making it perform; the benefits to be gained from relying on fire, such as the attainment of cooked rice gruel, cooking, and relief from the cold, by its power; the benefits to be gained from relying on a bhikkhu, such as hearing what has not been heard, purifying what has been heard, and attaining the path to heaven, by his influence. Considering, "What is the use of these, since there is a previously stated danger in relying on these?", they should not be completely abandoned. But one who desires power should please the khattiya prince by means such as being the first to rise and the last to retire, without disregarding or despising him in the way described above; in this way, he will attain power from him. The snake charmer, without placing trust in the snake, should recite snake charms, grab it by the neck with a stick in the manner of a goat, wash its fangs with poison-removing herbs, put it in a basket, and wander about making it perform. In this way, he will obtain food and clothing, etc., by relying on it. One who desires to make rice gruel, etc., should confidently put the fire in pots and pans, etc., without touching it with his hands, and kindle it with cow dung powder, etc., and make rice gruel, etc.; in this way, he will obtain benefits by relying on it. One who desires to hear what has not been heard, etc., should not employ the bhikkhu with excessive trust in medical work, construction work, etc., but should respectfully attend to him with the four requisites; in this way, by relying on him, he will hear the Buddha's word which has not been heard before, make decisions about questions which have not been heard before, attain the benefit in this life and the next, the three kinds of family prosperity, the six sensual heavens, and the nine Brahma worlds, and also obtain the sight of the great deathless Nibbāna. With this meaning in mind, he said, sammadeva samācareti.

Etadavocāti dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pasanno pasādaṃ āvikaronto etaṃ ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthaabhikkantanti abhikantaṃ atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ, atisundaranti attho. Ettha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bhante, yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanā’’ti. Ekena attano pasādaṃ ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bhante, yadidaṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādo’’ti.

Etadavocāti: having heard the teaching of the Dhamma, being pleased, expressing his pleasure, he spoke this statement beginning with "abhikkantaṃ". Therein, abhikkantanti: attractive, very pleasing, very delightful, very beautiful; this is the meaning. Here, with one word abhikkantaṃ, he praises the teaching, "Attractive, venerable sir, is this teaching of the Blessed One." With one, his own pleasure, "Attractive, venerable sir, is the pleasure that has arisen in me after coming to this teaching of the Blessed One."

nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā.Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya.Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ.Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya.Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa.Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya.Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharattaghanavanasaṇḍa meghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tame. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena, yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena, yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggapaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ āvikarontena, yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotaṃ dhārentena mayhaṃ bhagavatā etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.

Nikkujjitanti: placed face down, or born with the face down. Ukkujjeyyāti: he would turn it face up. Paṭicchannanti: covered with grass, leaves, etc. Vivareyyāti: he would uncover it. Mūḷhassāti: to one who is lost as to direction. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti: taking him by the hand, he would say, "This is the path." Andhakāreti: on the fourteenth night of the dark fortnight, at midnight, in a dense forest grove, in fourfold darkness with clouds. This is what was said: Just as someone might turn face up what is face down, so too, by causing me to rise up from the asaddhamma, who was turned away from the saddhamma and fallen into the asaddhamma; just as someone might uncover what is covered, so too, by uncovering the teaching covered by the thicket of wrong view since the disappearance of the dispensation of the Blessed One Kassapa; just as someone might show the path to one who is lost, so too, by revealing to me, who was practicing the wrong path and the false path, the path to heaven and liberation; just as someone might hold up an oil lamp in the darkness, so too, by holding up the lamp of teaching that dispels the darkness of delusion for me, who was submerged in the darkness of delusion and did not see the forms of the Buddha and other gems, the Blessed One has made it known in these ways, the Dhamma has been made known in many ways.

esāhantiādimāha. Tatthaesāhanti eso ahaṃ.Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti bhagavantañca dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti imaṃ ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi.Upāsakaṃ maṃ, bhante, bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘upāsako aya’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho.Ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvā. Ajjadaggeti vā pāṭho, da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho.Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya sāmaññaphalasutte sabbākārena vuttoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

esāhanti, etc. he said. Therein, esāhanti: this I. Bhagavantaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti: I go for refuge to the Blessed One, the Dhamma, and the Saṅgha of bhikkhus; I go for refuge to this triple gem. Upāsakaṃ maṃ, bhante, bhagavā dhāretūti: may the Blessed One regard me as ‘this is an upāsaka,’ may he know me, this is the meaning. Ajjataggeti: beginning from today. Ajjadaggeti is also a reading; the da-sound is a euphonic link, it means having made today the beginning. Pāṇupetanti: endowed with life, as long as my life lasts, endowed until then, without another teacher, gone for refuge with the three refuges, may the Blessed One regard me as an upāsaka, a suitable attendant; this is the summary here, but the full explanation has been stated in every way in the Sāmaññaphala Sutta of the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, the commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya. The first.

2. Purisasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Purisasutta Vaṇṇanā

113.Dutiyeabhivādetvāti purimasutte saraṇagatattā idha abhivādesi.Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ, attano santāne uppajjantīti attho.Lobhādīsu lubbhanalakkhaṇo lobho, dussanalakkhaṇo doso, muyhanalakkhaṇo mohoti.Hiṃsantīti viheṭhenti nāsenti vināsenti.Attasambhūtāti attani sambhūtā.Tacasāraṃva samphalanti yathā tacasāraṃ veḷuṃ vā naḷaṃ vā attano phalaṃ hiṃsati vināseti, evaṃ hiṃsanti vināsentīti. Dutiyaṃ.

113. In the second, abhivādetvāti: because he had gone for refuge in the previous sutta, here he greets him. Ajjhattanti: his own internal state; arising in his own being, this is the meaning. In lobhādi, lobha is characterized by greed, dosa is characterized by aversion, moha is characterized by delusion. Hiṃsantīti: they injure, destroy, ruin. Attasambhūtāti: born of oneself. Tacasāraṃva samphalanti: just as the pith of bamboo or reed injures and destroys its own fruit, so too they injure and destroy. The second.

3. Jarāmaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Jarāmaraṇasutta Vaṇṇanā

114.Tatiyeaññatra jarāmaraṇāti jarāmaraṇato mutto nāma atthīti vuccati.Khattiyamahāsālāti khattiyamahāsālā nāma mahāsārappattā khattiyā. Yesaṃ hi khattiyānaṃ heṭṭhimantena koṭisataṃ nidhānagataṃ hoti, tayo kahāpaṇakumbhā valañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapitā honti, tekhattiyamahāsālānāma. Yesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ asītikoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, diyaḍḍho kahāpaṇakumbho valañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, tebrāhmaṇamahāsālānāma. Yesaṃ gahapatīnaṃ cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, kahāpaṇakumbho valañjanatthāya gehamajjhe rāsiṃ katvā ṭhapito hoti, tegahapatimahāsālānāma.

114. In the third, aññatra jarāmaraṇāti: it is said that there is no one who is free from old age and death. Khattiyamahāsālāti: khattiyamahāsālā means khattiyas who have attained great wealth. For those khattiyas who have a hundred crores of wealth stored beneath, and three pots of kahāpaṇas piled up in the middle of the house for use as currency, are called khattiyamahāsālā. Those Brahmins who have eighty crores of wealth stored up, and one and a half pots of kahāpaṇas piled up in the middle of the house for use as currency, are called brāhmaṇamahāsālā. Those householders who have forty crores of wealth stored up, and a pot of kahāpaṇas piled up in the middle of the house for use as currency, are called gahapatimahāsālā.

Aḍḍhāti issarā. Nidhānagatadhanassa mahantatāyamahaddhanā. Suvaṇṇarajatabhājanādīnaṃ upabhogabhaṇḍānaṃ mahantatāyamahābhogā. Anidhānagatassa jātarūparajatassa pahūtatāya,pahūtajātarūparajatā. Vittūpakaraṇassa tuṭṭhikaraṇassa pahūtatāyapahūtavittūpakaraṇā. Godhanādīnañca sattavidhadhaññānañca pahūtatāyapahūtadhanadhaññā. Tesampi jātānaṃ natthi aññatra jarāmaraṇāti tesampi evaṃ issarānaṃ jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ natthi aññatra jarāmaraṇā, jātattāyeva jarāmaraṇato mokkho nāma natthi, antojarāmaraṇeyeva hoti.

Aḍḍhāti: rich. Because of the greatness of their stored wealth, mahaddhanā: very wealthy. Because of the greatness of the goods for consumption, such as gold and silver vessels, mahābhogā: of great possessions. Because of the abundance of gold and silver not stored up, pahūtajātarūparajatā: possessing abundant gold and silver. Because of the abundance of the wherewithal for enjoyment and the means for contentment, pahūtavittūpakaraṇā: possessing abundant wealth and equipment. And because of the abundance of herds of cattle and the seven kinds of grain, pahūtadhanadhaññā: possessing abundant wealth and grain. Tesampi jātānaṃ natthi aññatra jarāmaraṇāti: even for those who are born in this way, for those who have come into being as the rich, there is no escape from old age and death; because of being born, there is no liberation from old age and death, they are only within old age and death.

Arahantotiādīsu ārakā kilesehīti arahanto. Khīṇā etesaṃ cattāro āsavātikhīṇāsavā. Brahmacariyavāsaṃ vuṭṭhā pariniṭṭhitavāsātivusitavanto. Catūhi maggehi karaṇīyaṃ etesaṃ katantikatakaraṇīyā. Khandhabhāro kilesabhāro abhisaṅkhārabhāro kāmaguṇabhāroti, ime ohitā bhārā etesantiohitabhārā. Anuppatto arahattasaṅkhāto sako attho etesantianuppattasadatthā. Dasavidhampi parikkhīṇaṃ bhavasaṃyojanaṃ etesantiparikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanā. Sammā kāraṇehi jānitvā vimuttātisammadaññāvimuttā. Maggapaññāya catusaccadhammaṃ ñatvā phalavimuttiyā vimuttāti attho.Bhedanadhammoti bhijjanasabhāvo.Nikkhepanadhammoti nikkhipitabbasabhāvo. Khīṇāsavassa hi ajīraṇadhammopi atthi, ārammaṇato paṭividdhaṃ nibbānaṃ, taṃ hi na jīrati. Idha panassa jīraṇadhammaṃ dassento evamāha. Atthuppattiko kirassa suttassa nikkhepo. Sivikasālāya nisīditvā kathitanti vadanti. Tattha bhagavā citrāni rathayānādīni disvā diṭṭhameva upamaṃ katvā, ‘‘jīranti ve rājarathā’’ti gāthamāha.

In Arahantotiādi, arahanto because they are far from defilements. Khīṇāsavā: those whose four āsavas are destroyed. Vusitavanto: those who have lived the holy life, completed the life of purity, katakaraṇīyā: they have done what was to be done by the four paths. Ohitabhārā: the burden of the aggregates, the burden of defilements, the burden of preparations, the burden of sense pleasures, these burdens are laid down by them. Anuppattasadatthā: they have attained their own goal, which is arahatship. Parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojanā: their bonds of existence are completely destroyed in ten ways. Sammadaññāvimuttā: rightly knowing, they are liberated. Knowing the four noble truths by the path knowledge, they are liberated by the liberation of the fruit; this is the meaning. Bhedanadhammoti: of the nature of breaking up. Nikkhepanadhammoti: of the nature of being laid down. For even the state of not decaying exists for the one whose āsavas are destroyed; Nibbāna is known as an object, and it does not decay. But here, showing its nature of decaying, he said this. It is said that the laying down of the sutta was due to the arising of a matter. They say it was spoken while sitting in the Sivika Hall. There, the Blessed One, having seen various chariots and vehicles, and having made the seen thing the simile, spoke the verse, "Even royal chariots wear out."

jīrantīti jaraṃ pāpuṇanti.Rājarathāti rañño abhirūhanarathā.Sucittāti suvaṇṇarajatādīhi suṭṭhu cittitā.Atho sarīrampi jaraṃ upetīti evarūpesu anupādiṇṇakesu sāradārumayesu rathesu jīrantesu imasmiṃ ajjhattike upādiṇṇake maṃsalohitādimaye sarīre kiṃ vattabbaṃ? Sarīrampi jaraṃ upetiyevāti attho.Santo have sabbhi pavedayantīti santo sabbhīhi saddhiṃ sataṃ dhammo na jaraṃ upetīti evaṃ pavedayanti. ‘‘Sataṃ dhammo nāma nibbānaṃ, taṃ na jīrati, ajaraṃ amatanti evaṃ kathentī’’ti attho. Yasmā vā nibbānaṃ āgamma sīdanasabhāvā kilesā bhijjanti, tasmā taṃ sabbhīti vuccati. Iti purimapadassa kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘santo have sabbhi pavedayantī’’ti āha. Idaṃ hi vuttaṃ hoti – sataṃ dhammo na jaraṃ upeti, tasmā santo sabbhi pavedayanti. Ajaraṃ nibbānaṃ sataṃ dhammoti ācikkhantīti attho. Sundarādhivacanaṃ vā etaṃ sabbhīti. Yaṃ sabbhidhammabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ santo pavedayanti kathayanti, so sataṃ dhammo na jaraṃ upetītipi attho. Tatiyaṃ.

jīrantīti: they attain old age. Rājarathāti: chariots for the king to ride. Sucittāti: beautifully decorated with gold, silver, etc. Atho sarīrampi jaraṃ upetīti: when such chariots, made of heartwood, without taking up, wear out, what should be said about this internal body, made of flesh and blood, which takes up? The body also attains old age; this is the meaning. Santo have sabbhi pavedayantīti: the virtuous ones, together with the good, proclaim that the Dhamma of the virtuous does not attain old age. "The Dhamma of the virtuous is Nibbāna, and it does not decay, it is deathless, ageless," this is the meaning of what they say. Or, because defilements, having come to Nibbāna, break down due to their nature of subsiding, therefore it is called virtuous. Thus, showing the reason for the previous word, he said, "Santo have sabbhi pavedayantī." This is what was said: The Dhamma of the virtuous does not attain old age, therefore the virtuous proclaim it with the good. They declare that the deathless Nibbāna is the Dhamma of the virtuous; this is the meaning. Or, sabbhīti is a word for beautiful. The virtuous ones proclaim and speak of that Nibbāna, which is of the nature of the Dhamma of the virtuous; that Dhamma of the virtuous does not attain old age; this is also the meaning. The third.

4. Piyasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Piyasutta Vaṇṇanā

115.Catuttherahogatassāti rahasi gatassa.Paṭisallīnassāti nilīnassa ekībhūtassa.Evametaṃ, mahārājāti idha bhagavā imaṃ suttaṃ sabbaññubhāsitaṃ karonto āha.Antakenādhipannassāti maraṇena ajjhotthaṭassa. Catutthaṃ.

115. In the fourth, rahogatassāti: of one who has gone into seclusion. Paṭisallīnassāti: of one who is withdrawn, solitary. Evametaṃ, mahārājāti: here, the Blessed One, making this sutta spoken by the All-knowing One, said this. Antakenādhipannassāti: of one who is overcome by death. The fourth.

5. Attarakkhitasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Attarakkhitasutta Vaṇṇanā

116.Pañcamehatthikāyoti hatthighaṭā. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Saṃvaroti pidahanaṃ.Sādhu sabbattha saṃvaroti iminā kammapathabhedaṃ apattassa kammassa saṃvaraṃ dasseti.Lajjīti hirimā. Lajjīgahaṇena cettha ottappampi gahitameva hoti. Pañcamaṃ.

116. In the fifth, hatthikāyo means a group of elephants. The same method applies to the rest as well. Saṃvaro means restraint. Sādhu sabbattha saṃvaro indicates the restraint from the divisions of the paths of action (kammapatha) that constitute an offense (āpatti). Lajjī means one who has moral shame (hiri). By including lajjī, moral dread (ottappa) is also included here. Fifth.

6. Appakasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Appakasuttavaṇṇanā

117.Chaṭṭheuḷāre uḷāreti paṇīte ca bahuke ca.Majjantīti mānamajjanena majjanti.Atisāranti atikkamaṃ.Kūṭanti pāsaṃ.Pacchāsanti pacchā tesaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

117. In the sixth, uḷāre uḷāre means both excellent and abundant. Majjantī means they are intoxicated by the intoxication of conceit (māna). Atisāra means transgression. Kūṭa means a trap. Pacchāsa means after them. Sixth.

7. Aḍḍakaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Aḍḍakaraṇasuttavaṇṇanā

118.Sattamekāmahetūti kāmamūlakaṃ.Kāmanidānanti kāmapaccayā.Kāmādhikaraṇanti kāmakāraṇā. Sabbāni hetāni aññamaññavevacanāneva.Bhadramukhoti sundaramukho. Ekadivasaṃ kira rājā aḍḍakaraṇe nisīdi. Tattha paṭhamataraṃ lañjaṃ gahetvā nisinnā amaccā assāmikepi sāmike kariṃsu. Rājā taṃ ñatvā – ‘‘mayhaṃ tāva pathavissarassa sammukhāpete evaṃ karonti, parammukhā kiṃ nāma na karissanti? Paññāyissati dāni viṭaṭūbho senāpati sakena rajjena, kiṃ mayhaṃ evarūpehi lañjakhādakehi musāvādīhi saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāne nisajjāyā’’ti cintesi. Tasmā evamāha.Khippaṃva oḍḍitanti kuminaṃ viya oḍḍitaṃ. Yathā macchā oḍḍitaṃ kuminaṃ pavisantā na jānanti, evaṃ sattā kilesakāmena vatthukāmaṃ vītikkamantā na jānantīti attho. Sattamaṃ.

118. In the seventh, kāmahetū means rooted in sensual desire. Kāmanidāna means caused by sensual desire. Kāmādhikaraṇa means due to sensual desire. All these reasons are synonymous with each other. Bhadramukho means one with a beautiful face. It seems that one day the king was sitting in judgment (aḍḍakaraṇa). There, ministers who had taken bribes beforehand would declare those without owners as owners. The king, knowing this, thought, "If they do this in front of me, the lord of the earth, what will they not do behind my back? The corrupt Senāpati will now become apparent with his own kingdom. Why should I sit in the same place with these bribe-takers and liars?" Therefore, he said this. Khippaṃva oḍḍita means caught like in a fish trap (kumina). Just as fish entering a baited fish trap do not know, so beings transgressing in sensual desire for the sake of material desire do not know, is the meaning. Seventh.

8. Mallikāsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Mallikāsuttavaṇṇanā

119.Aṭṭhameatthi nu kho te malliketi kasmā pucchati? Ayaṃ kira mallikā duggatamālākārassa dhītā, ekadivasaṃ āpaṇato pūvaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mālārāmaṃ gantvāva khādissāmī’’ti gacchantī paṭipathe bhikkhusaṅghaparivāraṃ bhagavantaṃ bhikkhācāraṃ pavisantaṃ disvā pasannacittā taṃ bhagavato adāsi. Satthā nisīdanākāraṃ dassesi. Ānandatthero cīvaraṃ paññāpetvā adāsi. Bhagavā tattha nisīditvā taṃ pūvaṃ paribhuñjitvā mukhaṃ vikkhāletvā sitaṃ pātvākāsi. Thero ‘‘imissā, bhante, ko vipāko bhavissatī’’ti pucchi. Ānanda, ajjesā tathāgatassa paṭhamabhojanaṃ adāsi, ajjeva kosalarañño aggamahesī bhavissatīti. Taṃdivasameva ca rājā kāsigāme bhāgineyyena yuddhena parājito palāyitvā nagaraṃ āgacchanto mālārāmaṃ pavisitvā balakāyassa āgamanaṃ āgamesi. Tassa sā vattaṃ akāsi. So tāya vatte pasīditvā taṃ antepūraṃ atihārāpetvā taṃ aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi.

119. In the eighth, atthi nu kho te mallike, why does he ask? It seems that this Mallikā was the daughter of a poor gardener. One day, having taken a cake from the market and thinking, "I will eat it only after going to the flower garden," she saw the Blessed One, surrounded by the Saṅgha of monks, entering for alms. With a delighted mind, she gave it to the Blessed One. The Teacher indicated a place to sit. Ānanda Thera spread out his robe and gave it. The Blessed One sat there, ate the cake, rinsed his mouth, and displayed a smile. The Thera asked, "What will be the result of this, Venerable Sir?" Ānanda, today she has given the first meal to the Tathāgata, and today itself she will become the chief queen of King Kosala. On that very day, the king, defeated in battle at Kāsigāma by his nephew, fled and entered the city, entering the flower garden to await the arrival of his army. She served him. Pleased with her service, he took her into the inner palace and placed her in the position of chief queen.

Nevajjhagāti nādhigacchati.Evaṃ piyo puthu attā paresanti yathā ekassa attā piyo, evaṃ paresaṃ puthusattānampi attā piyoti attho. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Nevajjhagā means does not attain. Evaṃ piyo puthu attā paresanti means just as one's own self is dear to oneself, so too is the self dear to other separate beings. Eighth.

9. Yaññasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Yaññasuttavaṇṇanā

120.Navamethūṇūpanītānīti thūṇaṃ upanītāni, thūṇāya baddhāni honti.Parikammāni karontīti ettāvatā tehi bhikkhūhi rañño āraddhayañño tathāgatassa ārocito. Kasmā pana raññā ayaṃ yañño āraddho? Dussupinapaṭighātāya. Ekadivasaṃ kira rājā sabbālaṅkārappaṭimaṇḍito hatthikkhandhavaragato nagaraṃ anusañcaranto vātapānaṃ vivaritvā olokayamānaṃ ekaṃ itthiṃ disvā tassā paṭibaddhacitto tatova paṭinivattitvā antepuraṃ pavisitvā ekassa purisassa tamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘gaccha tassā sassāmikabhāvaṃ vā assāmikabhāvaṃ vā jānāhī’’ti pesesi. So gantvā pucchi. Sā ‘‘eso me sāmiko āpaṇe nisinno’’ti dassesi. Rājapuriso rañño tamatthaṃ ācikkhi. Rājā taṃ purisaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘maṃ upaṭṭhahā’’ti āha. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, deva, upaṭṭhahituṃ jānāmī’’ti ca vutte ‘‘upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na ācariyassa santike uggahetabba’’nti balakkārena āvudhaphalakaṃ gāhāpetvā upaṭṭhākaṃ akāsi. Upaṭṭhahitvā gehaṃ gatamattameva ca naṃ puna pakkosāpetvā ‘‘upaṭṭhākena nāma rañño vacanaṃ kattabbaṃ, gaccha ito yojanamatte amhākaṃ sīsadhovanapokkharaṇī atthi, tato aruṇamattikañca lohituppalamālañca gaṇhitvā ehi. Sace ajjeva nāgacchasi, rājadaṇḍaṃ karissāmī’’ti vatvā pesesi. So rājabhayena nikkhamitvā gato.

120. In the ninth, thūṇūpanītānī means brought to the sacrificial post, they are tied to the post. Parikammāni karontīti, with this much, the sacrifice begun by the king was announced to the Tathāgata by those monks. But why was this sacrifice started by the king? To avert an evil dream. It seems that one day the king, adorned with all ornaments, was riding on the excellent neck of an elephant, going around the city, and seeing a woman looking out through an open window, with his mind attached to her, he turned back from there, entered the inner palace, and, announcing the matter to a certain man, sent him, saying, "Go and find out whether she has an owner or not." He went and asked. She showed him, saying, "This is my husband, sitting in the market." The king's man told the king about the matter. The king summoned that man and said, "Attend to me." When he said, "I do not know how to attend to you, Your Majesty," he forced him to take a weapon-shield, saying, "Attendance is not something to be learned at a teacher's side," and made him an attendant. As soon as he had attended and gone home, he summoned him again and said, "An attendant must carry out the king's word. Go, about a league from here, there is our bathing pond for washing the head. From there, take red clay and a red lotus garland and come. If you do not come today itself, I will inflict royal punishment," and sent him away. He, fearing the king, went out and left.

Rājāpi tasmiṃ gate dovārikaṃ pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘ajja sāyanheyeva dvāraṃ pidahitvā ‘ahaṃ rājadūto’ti vā ‘uparājadūto’ti vā bhaṇantānampi mā vivarī’’ti āha. So puriso mattikañca uppalāni ca gahetvā dvāre pihitamatte āgantvā bahuṃ vadantopi dvāraṃ alabhitvā parissayabhayena jetavanaṃ gato. Rājāpi rāgapariḷāhena abhibhūto kāle nisīdati, kāle tiṭṭhati, kāle nipajjati, sanniṭṭhānaṃ alabhanto yattha katthaci nisinnakova makkaṭaniddāya niddāyati.

The king also, when he had left, summoned the doorkeeper and said, "Today, as soon as evening falls, close the gate and do not open it even to those who say 'I am the king's messenger' or 'I am the viceroy's messenger.'" That man, having taken the clay and lotuses, came to the gate as soon as it was closed. Unable to obtain the gate despite much pleading, he went to Jetavana due to fear of danger. The king also, overcome by the burning of lust, sometimes sat, sometimes stood, sometimes lay down, and, unable to find a resolution, he slept the sleep of a monkey wherever he sat.

Pubbe ca tasmiṃyeva nagare cattāro seṭṭhiputtā paradārikakammaṃ katvā nandopanandāya nāma lohakumbhiyā nibbattiṃsu. Te pheṇuddehakaṃ paccamānā tiṃsavassasahassāni heṭṭhā gacchantā kumbhiyā talaṃ pāpuṇanti, tiṃsavassasahassāni upari gacchantā matthakaṃ pāpuṇanti. Te taṃ divasaṃ ālokaṃ oloketvā attano dukkaṭabhayena ekekaṃ gāthaṃ vattukāmā vattuṃ asakkontā ekekaṃ akkharameva āhaṃsu. Eko sa-kāraṃ, eko so-kāraṃ, eko na-kāraṃ, eko du-kāraṃ āha. Rājā tesaṃ nerayikasattānaṃ saddaṃ sutakālato paṭṭhāya sukhaṃ avindamānova taṃrattāvasesaṃ vītināmesi.

Previously, in that very city, four sons of wealthy men, having committed adultery, were born in a copper pot called Nanda and Upananda. Being cooked in foam, going down to the bottom of the pot for thirty thousand years, and going up to the top for thirty thousand years. On that day, seeing the light, due to fear of their own evil deeds, wanting to speak a verse each, unable to speak, they uttered only a single letter each. One said the letter "sa," one said the letter "so," one said the letter "na," one said the letter "du." From the time of hearing the sound of those hellish beings, the king, not finding happiness, spent the rest of that night.

Aruṇe uṭṭhite purohito āgantvā taṃ sukhaseyyaṃ pucchi. So ‘‘kuto me, ācariya, sukha’’nti? Vatvā, ‘‘supine evarūpe sadde assosi’’nti ācikkhi. Brāhmaṇo – ‘‘imassa rañño iminā supinena vuḍḍhi vā hāni vā natthi, apica kho pana yaṃ imassa gehe atthi, taṃ samaṇassa gotamassa hoti, gotamasāvakānaṃ hoti, brāhmaṇā kiñci na labhanti, brāhmaṇānaṃ bhikkhaṃ uppādessāmī’’ti, ‘‘bhāriyo ayaṃ, mahārāja, supino tīsu jānīsu ekā paññāyati, rajjantarāyo vā bhavissati jīvitantarāyo vā, devo vā na vassissatī’’ti āha. Kathaṃ sotthi bhaveyya ācariyāti? ‘‘Mantetvā ñātuṃ sakkā, mahārājāti. Gacchatha ācariyehi saddhiṃ mantetvā amhākaṃ sotthiṃ karothā’’ti.

When dawn arose, the chaplain came and inquired about his comfortable sleep. He said, "Where is happiness for me, teacher?" and, having said this, he reported, "I heard such a sound in a dream." The Brahmin said, "This king has neither growth nor decline from this dream. However, whatever is in this house belongs to the ascetic Gotama, belongs to the disciples of Gotama, the Brahmins gain nothing. I will cause alms to arise for the Brahmins." "This dream is heavy, Your Majesty, one of three things is foreseen: either there will be danger to the kingdom or danger to life, or the deity will not rain." How could there be safety, teacher? "It is possible to know by consulting, Your Majesty. Go, consult with the teachers and make safety for us."

So sivikasālāyaṃ brāhmaṇe sannipātetvā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā, ‘‘visuṃ visuṃ gantvā evaṃ vadathā’’ti tayo vagge akāsi. Brāhmaṇā pavisitvā rājānaṃ sukhaseyyaṃ pucchiṃsu. Rājā purohitassa kathitaniyāmeneva kathetvā ‘‘kathaṃ sotthi bhaveyyā’’ti pucchi. Mahābrāhmaṇā – ‘‘sabbapañcasataṃ yaññaṃ yajitvā etassa kammassa sotthi bhaveyya, evaṃ, mahārāja, ācariyā kathentī’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā tesaṃ sutvā anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā tuṇhī ahosi. Atha dutiyavaggabrāhmaṇāpi āgantvā tattheva kathesuṃ. Tathā tatiyavaggabrāhmaṇāpi. Atha rājā ‘‘yaññaṃ karontū’’ti āṇāpesi. Tato paṭṭhāya brāhmaṇā usabhādayo pāṇe āharāpesuṃ. Nagare mahāsaddo udapādi. Taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā mallikā rājānaṃ tathāgatassa santikaṃ pesesi. So gantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Atha naṃ bhagavā – ‘‘handa kuto nu tvaṃ, mahārāja, āgacchasi divādivassā’’ti āha. Rājā – ‘‘ajja me, bhante, supinake cattāro saddā sutā, sohaṃ brāhmaṇe pucchiṃ. Brāhmaṇā ‘bhāriyo, mahārāja, supino, sabbapañcasataṃ yaññaṃ yajitvā paṭikammaṃ karomāti āraddhā’’’ti āha. Kinti te, mahārāja, saddā sutāti. So yathāsutaṃ ārocesi. Atha naṃ bhagavā āha – pubbe, mahārāja, imasmiṃyeva nagare cattāro seṭṭhiputtā paradārikā hutvā nandopanandāya lohakumbhiyā nibbattā saṭṭhivassasahassamatthake uggacchiṃsu.

He gathered the Brahmins in the council hall, announced the matter, and made three groups, saying, "Go separately and say this." The Brahmins entered and inquired about the king's comfortable sleep. The king, just as the chaplain had told him, spoke and asked, "How could there be safety?" The great Brahmins said, "By sacrificing a complete five-hundred sacrifice, there could be safety from this action. Thus, Your Majesty, the teachers say." The king, hearing them, neither rejoiced nor rejected them, but remained silent. Then the Brahmins of the second group also came and spoke there. So also the Brahmins of the third group. Then the king ordered, "Let them perform the sacrifice." From then on, the Brahmins had bulls and other living beings brought in. A great sound arose in the city. Knowing that event, Mallikā sent the king to the presence of the Tathāgata. He went, paid homage to the Blessed One, and sat down to one side. Then the Blessed One said to him, "Well then, Your Majesty, where are you coming from at this time of day?" The king said, "Today, Venerable Sir, I heard four sounds in a dream. So I asked the Brahmins. The Brahmins said, 'The dream is heavy, Your Majesty, we have begun to perform a counteraction by sacrificing a complete five-hundred sacrifice.'" What sounds did you hear, Your Majesty? He reported as he had heard. Then the Blessed One said to him, "Previously, Your Majesty, in this very city, four sons of wealthy men, having been adulterers, were born in the copper pot of Nanda and Upananda, and rose to the top after sixty thousand years.

Tattha eko –

There, one -

‘‘Saṭṭhivassasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni sabbaso;

‘‘For sixty thousand years,
Completely full in every way;
Of those cooking in hell,
When will there be an end?’’ (pe. va. 802; jā. 1.4.54) –

Imaṃ gāthaṃ vatthukāmo ahosi. Dutiyo –

Wanted to speak this verse. The second -

‘‘Sohaṃ nūna ito gantvā, yoniṃ laddhāna mānusiṃ;

‘‘Surely, having gone from here,
And having obtained a human birth;
Generous, accomplished in virtue,
I will do much merit.’’ (pe. va. 805; jā. 1.4.56) –

Imaṃ gāthaṃ vatthukāmo ahosi. Tatiyo –

Wanted to speak this verse. The third -

‘‘Natthi anto kuto anto, na anto paṭidissati;

‘‘There is no end, from where an end?
An end is not to be seen;
Then the evil done,
By me and you, O friend!’’ (pe. va. 803; jā. 1.4.55) –

Imaṃ gāthaṃ vatthukāmo ahosi. Catuttho –

Wanted to speak this verse. The fourth -

‘‘Dujjīvitamajīvimhā, ye sante na dadamhase;

‘‘We lived a bad life,
We who did not give to the virtuous;
While possessions were available,
We did not make an island for ourselves.’’ (pe. va. 804; jā. 1.4.53) –

Imaṃ. Te imā gāthā vattuṃ asakkontā ekekaṃ akkharaṃ vatvā tattheva nimuggā. Iti, mahārāja, te nerayikasattā yathākammena viraviṃsu. Tassa saddassa sutapaccayā tuyhaṃ hāni vā vuḍḍhi vā natthi. Ettakānaṃ pana pasūnaṃ ghātanakammaṃ nāma bhāriyanti nirayabhayena tajjetvā dhammakathaṃ kathesi. Rājā dasabale pasīditvā, ‘‘muñcāmi, nesaṃ jīvitaṃ dadāmi, haritāni ceva tiṇāni khādantu, sītalāni ca pānīyāni pivantu, sīto ca nesaṃ vāto upavāyatū’’ti vatvā, ‘‘gacchatha hārethā’’ti manusse āṇāpesi. Te gantvā brāhmaṇe palāpetvā taṃ pāṇasaṅghaṃ bandhanato mocetvā nagare dhammabheriṃ carāpesuṃ.

This one. Unable to speak these verses, having spoken a single letter each, they sank there. Thus, Your Majesty, those hellish beings cried out in order. Because of hearing that sound, you have neither loss nor growth. But the act of killing so many animals is heavy," he threatened with the fear of hell and spoke a Dhamma talk. The king, having faith in the Ten-Powered One, said, "I release them, I give them life. Let them eat green grass and drink cool water, and let a cool breeze blow upon them," and, having said this, he ordered men, "Go and bring them." They went, drove away the Brahmins, released that group of living beings from their bonds, and had the drum of Dhamma paraded in the city.

Atha rājā dasabalassa santike nisinno āha – ‘‘bhante, ekaratti nāma tiyāmā hoti, mayhaṃ pana ajja dve rattiyo ekato ghaṭitā viya ahesu’’nti. Sopi puriso tattheva nisinno āha – ‘‘bhante, yojanaṃ nāma catugāvutaṃ hoti, mayhaṃ pana ajja dve yojanāni ekato katāni viya ahesu’’nti. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘jāgarassa tāva rattiyā dīghabhāvo pākaṭo, santassa yojanassa dīghabhāvo pākaṭo, vaṭṭapatitassa pana bālaputhujjanassa anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃ ekantadīghamevā’’ti rājānañca tañca purisaṃ nerayikasatte ca ārabbha dhammapade imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –

Then the king, sitting near the Ten-Powered One, said, "Venerable Sir, a single night is three watches, but today it seemed to me as if two nights were joined together." That man also, sitting there, said, "Venerable Sir, a league is four gāvutas, but today it seemed to me as if two leagues were made into one." Then the Blessed One, "The length of the night is evident to the one who is awake, the length of the league is evident to the one who is tired, but for the childish ordinary person who has fallen into the round, the round of saṃsāra without a discoverable beginning is exceedingly long," having begun with the king, that man, and the hellish beings, spoke this verse in the Dhammapada:

‘‘Dīghā jāgarato ratti, dīghaṃ santassa yojanaṃ;

‘‘Long is the night to one who is awake, long is the league to one who is weary;
Long is saṃsāra to fools who do not know the Good Dhamma.’’ (dha. pa. 60);

Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ jānitvā.

Etamatthaṃ viditvā means having known this cause.

Assamedhantiādīsu – porāṇarājakāle kira sassamedhaṃ purisamedhaṃ sammāpāsaṃ vācāpeyyanti cattāri saṅgahavatthūni ahesuṃ, yehi rājāno lokaṃ saṅgaṇhiṃsu. Tattha nipphannasassato dasamabhāgaggahaṇaṃsassamedhaṃnāma, sassasampādane medhāvitāti attho. Mahāyodhānaṃ chamāsikaṃ bhatta-vetanānuppadānaṃpurisamedhaṃnāma, purisasaṅgaṇhane medhāvitāti attho. Daliddamanussānaṃ hatthato lekhaṃ gahetvā tīṇi vassāni vināva vaḍḍhiyā sahassadvisahassamattadhanānuppadānaṃsammāpāsaṃnāma. Tañhi sammā manusse pāseti, hadaye bandhitvā viya ṭhapeti, tasmā sammāpāsanti vuccati. ‘‘Tāta mātulā’’tiādinā nayena saṇhavācābhaṇanaṃ vācāpeyyaṃ nāma, piyavācāti attho. Evaṃ catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi saṅgahitaṃ raṭṭhaṃ iddhañceva hoti phītañca pahūtaannapānaṃ khemaṃ nirabbudaṃ. Manussā mudā modamānā ure putte naccentā apārutagharadvārā viharanti. Idaṃ gharadvāresu aggaḷānaṃ abhāvatoniraggaḷanti vuccati. Ayaṃ porāṇikā paveṇī.

In Assamedha etc. - It seems that in ancient times there were four means of beneficence (saṅgahavatthūni): horse sacrifice (assamedha), human sacrifice (purisamedha), proper binding (sammāpāsa), and pleasant speech (vācāpeyya), by which kings would unite the world. There, the taking of a tenth part from the produced grain is called sassamedha, meaning skilled in producing grain. The giving of six-monthly food and wages to great warriors is called purisamedha, meaning skilled in uniting men. Giving money amounting to one or two thousand without interest for three years, having taken a document from the hands of poor people, is called sammāpāsa. For it properly binds people, keeps them as if bound in the heart, therefore it is called sammāpāsa. Speaking gentle words in the manner of "father, uncle" etc. is called vācāpeyya, meaning pleasant speech. A country united by these four means of beneficence is both prosperous and thriving, abundant in food and drink, safe, and without disturbance. People, delighted and rejoicing, dance with their children on their laps, and live with their house doors open. This is called niraggaḷa because of the absence of bolts on the house doors. This is an ancient tradition.

assamedho. Dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ekasmiṃ majjhimadivaseyeva sattanavutipañcapasusataghātabhiṃsanassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhantītipurisamedho. Catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsentītisammāpāso. Divase divase sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatinadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa satrayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vājamettha pivantītivājapeyyo. Ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beluvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷātiniraggaḷo. Navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā ca purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Mahārambhāti mahākiccā mahākaraṇīyā.Sammaggatāti sammā paṭipannā buddhādayo.Nirārambhāti appatthā appakiccā.Yajanti anukulanti anukulesu yajanti, yaṃ niccabhattādi pubbapurisehi paṭṭhapitaṃ, taṃ aparāparaṃ anupacchinnattā manussā dadantīti attho. Navamaṃ.

assamedho. This term refers to a sacrifice that requires performance with two boundaries, involves twenty-one sacrificial posts (yūpa), and on a single middle day, the terrifying slaughter of ninety-seven thousand animals, setting aside the land and humans, along with the remaining wealth and gifts.purisamedho signifies that humans are offered in the sacrifice. This term refers to a sacrifice that requires performance with four boundaries, along with the land and the wealth and gifts as described in the assamedha.sammāpāso means that offerings are scattered evenly. This term refers to a satrayāga sacrifice that requires performing a vedi (altar) in the location where the offerings fall, after scattering them evenly each day, and proceeding upstream from the location submerged by the Saraswati River, along with ritual implements like yūpa. vājapeyyo means that vāja is drunk in this sacrifice. This term refers to a sacrifice that requires performance with one boundary, offering seventeen animals and seventeen-fold gifts along with a beluvayūpa (a sacrificial post made of beluva wood). niraggaḷo means that there is no obstruction. This term refers to a variation of the assamedha sacrifice, which requires performance with nine boundaries, along with land and humans and the wealth and gifts as described in the assamedha, and is another name for all medha (sacrifice) procedures. Mahārambhā means those with great tasks and great duties. Sammaggatā means those who have rightly practiced, such as Buddhas. Nirārambhā means those with few endeavors and few duties. Yajanti anukula means they sacrifice in accordance with what is favorable; people give continuously because the regular offering of food etc., established by former generations, is uninterrupted. Ninth.

10. Bandhanasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bandhanasutta Vaṇṇanā

121.Dasameidha, bhante, raññāti idaṃ te bhikkhū tesu manussesu ānandattherassa sukatakāraṇaṃ ārocentā ārocesuṃ. Rañño kira sakkena kusarājassa dinno aṭṭhavaṅko maṇi paveṇiyā āgato. Rājā alaṅkaraṇakāle taṃ maṇiṃ āharathāti āha. Manussā ‘‘ṭhapitaṭṭhāne na passāmā’’ti ārocesuṃ. Rājā antogharacārino ‘‘maṇiṃ pariyesitvā dethā’’ti bandhāpesi. Ānandatthero te disvā maṇipaṭisāmakānaṃ ekaṃ upāyaṃ ācikkhi. Te rañño ārocesuṃ. Rājā ‘‘paṇḍito thero, therassa vacanaṃ karothā’’ti. Paṭisāmakamanussā rājaṅgaṇe udakacāṭiṃ ṭhapetvā sāṇiyā parikkhipāpetvā te manusse āhaṃsu – ‘‘sāṭakaṃ pārupitvā ettha gantvā hatthaṃ otārethā’’ti. Maṇicoro cintesi – ‘‘rājabhaṇḍaṃ vissajjetuṃ vā valañjetuṃ vā na sakkā’’ti. So gehaṃ gantvā maṇiṃ upakacchake ṭhapetvā sāṭakaṃ pārupitvā āgamma udakacāṭiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pakkāmi. Mahājane paṭikkante rājamanussā cāṭiyaṃ hatthaṃ otāretvā maṇiṃ disvā āharitvā rañño adaṃsu. ‘‘Ānandattherena kira dassitanayena maṇi diṭṭho’’ti mahājano kolāhalaṃ akāsi. Te bhikkhū taṃ kāraṇaṃ tathāgatassa ārocentā imaṃ pavattiṃ ārocesuṃ. Satthā – ‘‘anacchariyaṃ, bhikkhave, yaṃ ānando manussānaṃ hatthāruḷhamaṇiṃ āharāpeyya, yattha pubbe paṇḍitā attano ñāṇe ṭhatvā ahetukapaṭisandhiyaṃ nibbattānaṃ tiracchānagatānampi hatthāruḷhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āharāpetvā rañño adaṃsū’’ti vatvā –

121. In the tenth, "idha, bhante, raññā" means: these monks were relating to the Blessed One, the reason for Ānanda Thera's good deed among those people. It is said that the king had a jewel with eight bends, given by Sakka to King Kusarāja, which had come down through lineage. The king said, "Bring that jewel when decorating." The people reported, "We do not see it in the place where it was kept." The king ordered the palace attendants to be arrested, saying, "Search for the jewel and give it." Seeing them, Ānanda Thera suggested a plan to the jewel searchers. They reported to the king. The king said, "The Thera is wise, do as the Thera says." The searchers placed a water pot in the royal courtyard, covered it with a cloth, and said to the people, "Wearing a robe, go there and put your hand in." The jewel thief thought, "It is not possible to dispose of or consume royal property." So, he went home, placed the jewel in his armpit, put on a robe, came, dropped it into the water pot, and left. When the crowd had dispersed, the king's men put their hands into the pot, saw the jewel, took it, and gave it to the king. The crowd made a commotion, saying, "The jewel was found by the method shown by Ānanda Thera." Those monks, reporting that incident to the Tathāgata, related this event. The Teacher said, "It is not astonishing, monks, that Ānanda could have a jewel brought back from the hands of humans; in the past, wise men, standing in their wisdom, even had goods brought back from the hands of animals born in the realm of non-causal rebirth and gave them to the king," and having said that, he recited the Mahāsārajātaka (Jā. 1.1.92):

‘‘Ukkaṭṭhe sūramicchanti, mantīsu akutūhalaṃ;

"They desire a hero in disputes, one not curious among counselors;
And one who is dear at food and drink, and a wise one when a matter arises."

Mahāsārajātakaṃ kathesi.

Then he told the Mahāsārajātaka.

Na taṃ daḷhanti taṃ bandhanaṃ thiranti na kathenti.Yadāyasanti yaṃ āyasā kataṃ.Sārattarattāti suṭṭhu rattarattā, sārattena vā rattā sārattarattā, sāraṃ idanti maññanāya rattāti attho.Apekkhāti ālayo nikanti.Āhūti kathenti.Ohārinanti catūsu apāyesu ākaḍḍhanakaṃ.Sithilanti na āyasādibandhanaṃ viya iriyāpathaṃ nivāretvā ṭhitaṃ. Tena hi bandhanena baddhā paradesampi gacchantiyeva.Duppamuñcanti aññatra lokuttarañāṇena muñcituṃ asakkuṇeyyanti. Dasamaṃ.

Na taṃ daḷhanti, they do not say that bond is strong. Yadāyasanti, that which is made of iron. Sārattarattānti, very passionately attached; or attached with passion, because of thinking "this is the essence".Apekkhāti, attachment, longing. Āhūti, they say. Ohārinanti, dragging into the four woeful states. Sithilanti, not standing, preventing movement, like bonds of iron etc. Indeed, those bound by that bond still go to other countries. Duppamuñcanti, impossible to be released except by supramundane knowledge. Tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

First Vagga.

2. Dutiyavaggo

2. Dutiyavagga

1. Sattajaṭilasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sattajaṭila Sutta Vaṇṇanā

122.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamepubbārāme migāramātupāsādeti pubbārāmasaṅkhāte vihāre migāramātuyā pāsāde. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – atīte satasahassakappamatthake ekā upāsikā padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa satasahassadānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā – ‘‘anāgate tumhādisassa buddhassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā homī’’ti patthanaṃ akāsi. Sā kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ca manussesu ca saṃsaritvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle bhaddiyanagare meṇḍakaputtassa dhanañcayaseṭṭhino gehe sumanadeviyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātakāle cassā visākhāti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Sā yadā bhagavā bhaddiyanagaraṃ agamāsi, tadā pañcahi dārikāsatehi saddhiṃ bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ gatā paṭhamadassanamhiyeva sotāpannā ahosi. Aparabhāge sāvatthiyaṃ migāraseṭṭhiputtassa puṇṇavaḍḍhanakumārassa gehaṃ gatā. Tattha naṃ migāraseṭṭhi mātiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi, tasmā migāramātāti vuccati. Tāya kārite pāsāde.

122. In the first of the second vagga, pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde means: in the monastery known as Pubbārāma, in the mansion of Migāramātā. Here is the narrative sequence: in the past, one hundred thousand aeons ago, a female lay disciple invited the Buddha Padumuttara and, having given a great alms-giving to the Saṅgha of monks headed by the Buddha, she lay down at the feet of the Buddha and made a wish: "In the future, may I be the chief attendant of a Buddha like you." Having wandered for one hundred thousand aeons among gods and humans, in the time of our Blessed One, she took rebirth in Bhaddiyanagara in the womb of Sumanadevi, the wife of the wealthy merchant Meṇḍaka. At birth, she was named Visākhā. When the Blessed One went to Bhaddiyanagara, she went to greet the Blessed One along with five hundred girls and became a stream-enterer at the first sight. Later, she went to the house of Puṇṇavaḍḍhana, the son of the wealthy merchant Migāra, in Sāvatthi. There, the wealthy merchant Migāra placed her in the position of mother, therefore she is called Migāramātā. In the mansion built by her.

Bahi dvārakoṭṭhaketi pāsādadvārakoṭṭhakassa bahi, na vihāradvārakoṭṭhakassa. So kira pāsādo lohapāsādo viya samantā catudvārakoṭṭhakayuttena pākārena parikkhitto. Tesu pācīnadvārakoṭṭhakassa bahi pāsādacchāyāyaṃ pācīnalokadhātuṃ olokento paññatte varabuddhāsane nisinno hoti.

Bahi dvārakoṭṭhakenti, outside the gateway chamber of the mansion, not the gateway chamber of the monastery. It is said that the mansion was surrounded by a wall with four gateway chambers on all sides, like a Lohapāsāda (brazen palace). There, he was sitting on a fine Buddha seat prepared in the shade of the mansion, outside the eastern gateway chamber, looking towards the eastern world-realm.

Parūḷhakacchanakhalomāti parūḷhakacchā parūḷhanakhā parūḷhalomā, kacchādīsu dīghalomā dīghanakhā cāti attho.Khārivividhanti vividhakhāriṃ nānappakārakaṃ pabbajitaparikkhārabhaṇḍakaṃ.Avidūre atikkamantīti avidūramaggena nagaraṃ pavisanti.Rājāhaṃ,bhanteti ahaṃ, bhante, rājā pasenadi kosalo, mayhaṃ nāmaṃ tumhe jānāthāti. Kasmā pana rājā loke aggapuggalassa santike nisinno evarūpānaṃ naggabhogganissirikānaṃ añjaliṃ paggaṇhātīti. Saṅgaṇhanatthāya. Evaṃ hissa ahosi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ ettakampi etesaṃ na karissāmi, ‘mayaṃ puttadāraṃ pahāya etassatthāya dubbhojanadukkhaseyyādīni anubhoma, ayaṃ amhākaṃ añjalimattampi na karotī’ti attanā diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ paṭicchādetvā na katheyyuṃ. Evaṃ kate pana anigūhitvā kathessantī’’ti. Tasmā evamakāsi. Apica satthu ajjhāsayajānanatthaṃ evamakāsi.

Parūḷhakacchanakhalomāti, with overgrown armpit hair, overgrown nails, overgrown body hair; meaning, with long hair and long nails in the armpits etc. Khārivividhanti, a khāri of various kinds, a collection of diverse types of requisites for ascetics. Avidūre atikkamantīti, entering the city by a road not far away. Rājāhaṃ, bhanteti, "I, Venerable Sir, am King Pasenadi Kosala; do you know my name?" But why does the king, sitting in the presence of the foremost person in the world, raise his hands in Añjali to such naked, gluttonous, and wretched people? For the sake of acceptance. For it occurred to him thus: "If I do not do even this much for them, they might conceal what they have seen and heard and not speak, saying, 'We have abandoned wife and children for his sake and endure unpleasant food, painful beds, etc., but he does not even make a gesture of respect to us'; but if this is done, they will speak without concealing anything." Therefore, he did so. Moreover, he did so to ascertain the Teacher's intention.

Kāsikacandananti saṇhacandanaṃ.Mālāgandhavilepananti vaṇṇagandhatthāya mālaṃ, sugandhabhāvatthāya gandhaṃ, vaṇṇagandhatthāya vilepanañca dhārentena.

Kāsikacandananti, fine sandalwood. Mālāgandhavilepananti, wearing garlands for the sake of color, perfume for the sake of fragrance, and ointments for the sake of color and fragrance.

Saṃvāsenāti sahavāsena.Sīlaṃ veditabbanti ayaṃ susīlo vā dussīlo vāti saṃvasantena upasaṅkamantena jānitabbo.Tañca kho dīghena addhunā na ittaranti tañca sīlaṃ dīghena kālena veditabbaṃ, na ittarena. Dvīhatīhañhi saṃyatākāro ca saṃvutindriyākāro ca na sakkā dassetuṃ.Manasikarotāti sīlamassa pariggahessāmīti manasikarontena paccavekkhanteneva sakkā jānituṃ, na itarena.Paññavatāti tampi sappaññeneva paṇḍitena. Bālo hi manasikarontopi jānituṃ na sakkoti.

Saṃvāsenāti, by living together. Sīlaṃ veditabbanti, whether this person is virtuous or unvirtuous should be known by living with, by associating with. Tañca kho dīghena addhunā na ittaranti, and that virtue should be known by a long time, not a short time. For the behavior of restraint and the behavior of controlling the senses cannot be shown in two or three days. Manasikarotāti, it can be known only by one who attends, by one who considers, with the intention, "I will ascertain his virtue," not by another. Paññavatāti, and that too, only by a wise person, by an intelligent person. For even one who is attending cannot know if he is foolish.

Saṃvohārenāti kathanena.

Saṃvohārenāti, by conversation.

‘‘Yo hi koci manussesu, vohāraṃ upajīvati;

"For whoever among men lives by trading;
Thus, Vāseṭṭha, know that he is a merchant, not a Brahmin." (M. Ni. 2.457)

Ettha hi byavahāro vohāro nāma. ‘‘Cattāro ariyavohārā cattāro anariyavohārā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.313) ettha cetanā. ‘‘Saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro’’ti (dha. sa. 1313-1315) ettha paññatti. ‘‘Vohāramattena so vohareyyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.25) ettha kathā vohāro. Idhāpi esova adhippeto. Ekaccassa hi sammukhā kathā parammukhāya kathāya na sameti, parammukhā kathā ca sammukhāya kathāya, tathā purimakathā ca pacchimakathāya, pacchimakathā ca purimakathāya. So kathenteneva sakkā jānituṃ ‘‘asuci eso puggalo’’ti. Sucisīlassa pana purimaṃ pacchimena, pacchimañca purimena sameti, sammukhākathitaṃ parammukhākathitena, parammukhākathitañca sammukhākathitena, tasmā kathentena sakkā sucibhāvo jānitunti pakāsento evamāha.

Here, trading is called vohāra. "Four noble usages (ariyavohārā), four ignoble usages (anariyavohārā)" (Dī. Ni. 3.313), here, it means intention. "Saṅkhā (concept), samaññā (designation), paññatti (term), vohāro (usage)" (Dha. Sa. 1313-1315), here it means designation. "He might use mere terminology (vohāramattena)" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.25), here vohāra means speech. Here too, that is what is intended. For the speech of one person in front does not agree with the speech behind their back, and the speech behind their back does not agree with the speech in front; similarly, earlier speech does not agree with later speech, and later speech does not agree with earlier speech. Therefore, it can be known by his speech, "this person is impure." But for one with pure virtue, the earlier agrees with the later, and the later with the earlier, what is said in front agrees with what is said behind their back, and what is said behind their back agrees with what is said in front; therefore, proclaiming that purity can be known by his speech, he said thus.

Thāmoti ñāṇathāmo. Yassa hi ñāṇathāmo natthi, so uppannesu upaddavesu gahetabbaggahaṇaṃ katabbakiccaṃ apassanto advāragharaṃ paviṭṭho viya carati. Tenāhaāpadāsu kho, mahārāja, thāmo veditabboti.Sākacchāyāti saṃkathāya. Duppaññassa hi kathā udake geṇḍu viya uppalavati, paññavato kathentassa paṭibhānaṃ anantaraṃ hoti. Udakavipphanditeneva hi maccho khuddako vā mahanto vāti ñāyati.Ocarakāti heṭṭhācarakā.Carāhi pabbatamatthakena carantāpi heṭṭhā – carakāva honti.Ocaritvāti avacaritvā vīmaṃsitvā, taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvāti attho.Rajojallanti rajañca jallañca.Vaṇṇarūpenāti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānena.Ittaradassanenāti lahukadassanena.Viyañjanenāti parikkhārabhaṇḍakena.Patirūpako mattikākuṇḍalovāti suvaṇṇakuṇḍalapatirūpako mattikākuṇḍalova.Lohaḍḍhamāsoti lohaḍḍhamāsako. Paṭhamaṃ.

Thāmoti, strength of knowledge. For one who does not have strength of knowledge, not seeing what should be taken and what duty should be done when dangers arise, wanders as if having entered a doorless house. Therefore, he said, āpadāsu kho, mahārāja, thāmo veditabboti, strength should be known in times of adversity, O Great King. Sākacchāyāti, by discussion. For the speech of a foolish person floats on water like a ball, the eloquence of an intelligent person is continuous. Indeed, just as a fish, small or large, is known by the splash of water. Ocarakāti, those who go below. Carāhi pabbatamatthakena carantāpi heṭṭhācarākāva honti, even those who walk on the top of a mountain are those who go below. Ocaritvāti, having gone down, having investigated, having known that particular event, is the meaning. Rajojallanti, dust and dirt. Vaṇṇarūpenāti, by appearance and form. Ittaradassanenāti, by a superficial view. Viyañjanenāti, by the requisites. Patirūpako mattikākuṇḍalovāti, like an earthenware earring that is an imitation of a gold earring. Lohaḍḍhamāsoti, a half-māsa coin of metal. First.

2. Pañcarājasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Pañcarāja Sutta Vaṇṇanā

123.Dutiyerūpāti nīlapītādibhedaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ.Kāmānaṃ agganti etaṃ kāmānaṃ uttamaṃ seṭṭhanti rūpagaruko āha. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Yatoti yadā.Manāpapariyantanti manāpanipphattikaṃ manāpakoṭikaṃ. Tattha dve manāpāni puggalamanāpaṃ sammutimanāpañca. Puggalamanāpaṃ nāma yaṃ ekassa puggalassa iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ hoti, tadeva aññassa aniṭṭhaṃ akantaṃ. Paccantavāsīnañhi gaṇḍuppādāpi iṭṭhā honti kantā manāpā, majjhimadesavāsīnaṃ atijegucchā. Tesañca moramaṃsādīni iṭṭhāni honti, itaresaṃ tāni atijegucchāni. Idaṃ puggalamanāpaṃ. Itaraṃ sammutimanāpaṃ.

123. In the second, rūpāti, visual object distinguished by blue, yellow, etc. Kāmānaṃ agganti, this is the best, the finest of sensual pleasures, thus spoke the one who esteemed forms. The same method applies to the rest as well. Yatoti, when. Manāpapariyantanti, with a pleasing culmination, with a delightful limit. There, there are two pleasing things: pleasing to a person, and pleasing by convention. Pleasing to a person is what is liked and loved by one person, but the same thing is disliked and unloved by another. For, to those living in border regions, even earthworms are liked, loved, and pleasing, but to those living in the central region, they are extremely disgusting. And to them, peacock meat etc. is liked, but to others, those are extremely disgusting. This is pleasing to a person. The other is pleasing by convention.

te ca, mahārāja, rūpātiādimāha.

te ca, mahārāja, rūpātiādi, he spoke beginning with "those forms, O Great King".

Candanaṅgalikoti idaṃ tassa upāsakassa nāmaṃ.Paṭibhāti maṃ bhagavāti bhagavā mayhaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāti paññāyati. Tassa te pañca rājāno āmuttamaṇikuṇḍale sajjitāya āpānabhūmiyā nisinnavaseneva mahatā rājānubhāvena paramena issariyavibhavena āgantvāpi dasabalassa santike ṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya divā padīpe viya udakābhisitte aṅgāre viya sūriyuṭṭhāne khajjopanake viya ca hatappabhe hatasobhe taṃ tathāgatañca tehi sataguṇena sahassaguṇena virocamānaṃ disvā, ‘‘mahantā vata bho buddhā nāmā’’ti paṭibhānaṃ udapādi. Tasmā evamāha.

Candanaṅgalikoti, this was the name of that lay disciple. Paṭibhāti maṃ bhagavāti, the Blessed One occurs to me, appears to me as one reason. Those five kings, with jeweled earrings adorned, even having come with great royal power and supreme sovereignty and splendor, as if sitting in a drinking hall, from the time of standing near the Ten-Powered One, seeing that Tathāgata shining a hundredfold, a thousandfold more brilliantly than them, with their radiance and splendor diminished like a lamp in the daytime, like coals doused with water, like fireflies at sunrise, the thought arose in him, "Indeed, Buddhas are great." Therefore, he spoke thus.

Kokanadanti padumassevetaṃ vevacanaṃ.Pātoti kālasseva.Siyāti bhaveyya.Avītagandhanti avigatagandhaṃ.Aṅgīrasanti sammāsambuddhaṃ. Bhagavato hi aṅgato rasmiyo nikkhamanti, tasmā aṅgīrasoti vuccati. Yathā kokanadasaṅkhātaṃ padumaṃ pātova phullaṃ avītagandhaṃ siyā, evameva bhagavantaṃ aṅgīrasaṃ tapantaṃ ādiccamiva antalikkhe virocamānaṃ passāti ayamettha saṅkhepattho.Bhagavantaṃ acchādesīti bhagavato adāsīti attho. Lokavohārato panettha īdisaṃ vacanaṃ hoti. So kira upāsako – ‘‘ete tathāgatassa guṇesu pasīditvā mayhaṃ pañca uttarāsaṅge denti, ahampi te bhagavatova dassāmī’’ti cintetvā adāsi. Dutiyaṃ.

Kokanadanti, this is a synonym for a lotus. Pātoti, early in the morning. Siyāti, might be. Avītagandhanti, with undiminished fragrance. Aṅgīrasanti, the Perfectly Enlightened One. For rays of light emanate from the Blessed One's body (aṅga), therefore he is called Aṅgīrasa. Just as a lotus named Kokanada might be blooming early in the morning and have undiminished fragrance, even so, he sees the Blessed One, Aṅgīrasa, shining like the sun blazing in the sky; this is the meaning in brief here. Bhagavantaṃ acchādesīti, he gave to the Blessed One, is the meaning. In the language of the world, there is such a statement here. It is said that that lay disciple, thinking, "Having been pleased by the qualities of the Tathāgata, these five are giving me upper robes, I too will give them to the Blessed One," gave them. Second.

3. Doṇapākasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Doṇapāka Sutta Vaṇṇanā

124.Tatiyedoṇapākakuranti doṇapākaṃ kuraṃ, doṇassa taṇḍulānaṃ pakkabhattaṃ tadūpiyañca sūpabyañjanaṃ bhuñjatīti attho.Bhuttāvīti pubbe bhattasammadaṃ vinodetvā muhuttaṃ vissamitvā buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, taṃdivasaṃ pana bhuñjantova dasabalaṃ saritvā hatthe dhovitvā agamāsi.Mahassāsīti tassa gacchato balavā bhattaparīḷāho udapādi, tasmā mahantehi assāsehi assasati, gattatopissa sedabindūni muccanti, tamenaṃ ubhosu passesu ṭhatvā yamakatālavaṇṭehi bījanti, buddhagāravena pana nipajjituṃ na ussahatīti idaṃ sandhāya ‘‘mahassāsī’’ti vuttaṃ.Imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsīti, rājā bhojane amattaññutāya kilamati, phāsu vihāraṃ dānissa karissāmīti cintetvā abhāsi.Manujassāti sattassa.Kahāpaṇasatanti pātarāse paṇṇāsaṃ sāyamāse paṇṇāsanti evaṃ kahāpaṇasataṃ.Pariyāpuṇitvāti raññā saddhiṃ thokaṃ gantvā ‘‘imaṃ maṅgalaasiṃ kassa dammi, mahārājā’’ti? Asukassa nāma dehīti so taṃ asiṃ datvā dasabalassa santikaṃ āgamma vanditvā ṭhitakova ‘‘gāthaṃ vadatha, bho gotamā’’ti vatvā bhagavatā vuttaṃ pariyāpuṇitvāti attho.

124. Tatiye doṇapākakuran’ti means doṇapākaṃ kuraṃ, one who eats a doṇa-cooked meal of rice and suitable soup and curry. Bhuttāvīti, having previously dispelled the stupor of the meal and rested for a moment, he goes to attend upon the Buddha; on that day, however, while still eating, he remembered the Ten-Powered One, washed his hands, and departed. Mahassāsīti, as he was going, a strong meal-induced distress arose in him, therefore he breathes with great breaths; drops of sweat also fall from his body; they fan him standing on both sides with twin palm-leaf fans, but out of respect for the Buddha, he does not dare to lie down; referring to this, it is said "Mahassāsī". Imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsīti, the king suffers from not knowing moderation in food; thinking, "I will make the monastery comfortable for him," he spoke. Manujassāti, of a being. Kahāpaṇasatanti, fifty for breakfast, fifty for supper, thus a hundred kahāpaṇas. Pariyāpuṇitvāti, having gone a short distance with the king, he asks, "To whom shall I give this auspicious sword, Your Majesty?" The king says, "Give it to so-and-so." He, having given that sword and come to the presence of the Ten-Powered One, having paid homage and stood there, said, "Recite the verse, Venerable Gotama," meaning that he learned it as spoken by the Blessed One.

Bhattābhihāresudaṃ bhāsatīti kathaṃ bhāsati? Bhagavatā anusiṭṭhiniyāmena. Bhagavā hi naṃ evaṃ anusāsi – ‘‘māṇava, imaṃ gāthaṃ naṭo viya pattapattaṭṭhāne mā avaca, rañño bhuñjanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā paṭhamapiṇḍādīsupi avatvā vosānapiṇḍe gahite vadeyyāsi, rājā sutvāva bhattapiṇḍaṃ chaḍḍessati. Atha rañño hatthesu dhotesu pātiṃ apanetvā sitthāni gaṇetvā tadupiyaṃ byañjanaṃ ñatvā punadivase tāvatake taṇḍule hāreyyāsi, pātarāse ca vatvā sāyamāse mā vadeyyāsī’’ti. So sādhūti paṭissuṇitvā taṃdivasaṃ rañño pātarāsaṃ bhutvā gatattā sāyamāse bhagavato anusiṭṭhiniyāmena gāthaṃ abhāsi. Rājā dasabalassa vacanaṃ saritvā bhattapiṇḍaṃ pātiyaṃyeva chaḍḍesi. Rañño hatthesu dhotesu pātiṃ apanetvā sitthāni gaṇetvā tadupiyaṃ byañjanaṃ ñatvā punadivase tattake taṇḍule hariṃsu.

Bhattābhihāre sudaṃ bhāsatīti, how does he speak? According to the rule instructed by the Blessed One. For the Blessed One instructed him thus: "Young man, do not utter this verse like an actor in a play, standing in the alms hall of the king; do not utter it even at the first morsels, but utter it when the last morsel is taken; upon hearing it, the king will throw away the morsel of food. Then, when the king's hands are washed, remove the bowl, count the rice grains, and knowing the appropriate curry, reduce the rice by that much the next day; and speak at breakfast, but do not speak at supper." He, agreeing with "Very well," because he had eaten the king's breakfast that day, spoke the verse at supper according to the Blessed One's instruction. Remembering the words of the Ten-Powered One, the king threw the morsel of food into the bowl. When the king's hands were washed, they removed the bowl, counted the rice grains, and, knowing the appropriate curry, reduced the rice by that much the next day.

Nāḷikodanaparamatāya saṇṭhāsīti so kira māṇavo divase divase tathāgatassa santikaṃ gacchati, dasabalassa vissāsiko ahosi. Atha naṃ ekadivasaṃ pucchi ‘‘rājā kittakaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti? So ‘‘nāḷikodana’’nti āha. Vaṭṭissati ettāvatā purisabhāgo esa, ito paṭṭhāya gāthaṃ mā vadīti. Iti rājā tattheva saṇṭhāsi.Diṭṭhadhammikena ceva atthena samparāyikena cāti ettha sallikhitasarīratā diṭṭhadhammikattho nāma, sīlaṃ samparāyikattho. Bhojane mattaññutā hi sīlaṅgaṃ nāma hotīti. Tatiyaṃ.

Nāḷikodanaparamatāya saṇṭhāsīti, it seems that young man went to the Tathāgata every day and became intimate with the Ten-Powered One. Then one day he asked him, "How much does the king eat?" He said, "A nāḷika of rice." "That is enough, that is a man's portion; from now on, do not speak the verse." Thus, the king remained content there. Diṭṭhadhammikena ceva atthena samparāyikena cāti, here, having a lean body is called the immediate benefit, morality is the future benefit. For moderation in food is called a limb of morality. The third.

4. Paṭhamasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Paṭhamasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā

125.Catutthevedehiputtotivedehīti paṇḍitādhivacanametaṃ, paṇḍititthiyā puttoti attho.Caturaṅgininti hatthiassarathapattisaṅkhātehi catūhi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ.Sannayhitvāti cammapaṭimuñcanādīhi sannāhaṃ kāretvā.Saṅgāmesunti yujjhiṃsu. Kena kāraṇena? Mahākosalaraññā kira bimbisārassa dhītaraṃ dentena dvinnaṃ rajjānaṃ antare satasahassuṭṭhāno kāsigāmo nāma dhītu dinno. Ajātasattunā ca pitari mārite mātāpissa rañño viyogasokena nacirasseva matā. Tato rājā pasenadi kosalo – ‘‘ajātasattunā mātāpitaro māritā, mayhaṃ pitu santako gāmo’’ti tassatthāya aḍḍaṃ karoti. Ajātasattupi ‘‘mayhaṃ mātu santako’’ti tassa gāmassatthāya dvepi mātulabhāgineyyā yujjhiṃsu.

125. In the fourth, vedehiputtoti, vedehīti is a term for the wise; it means the son of a wise woman. Caturaṅginīti, complete with four parts, reckoned as elephants, horses, chariots, and infantry. Sannayhitvāti, having armed them with leather armor and so on. Saṅgāmesunti, they fought. Why? It seems that when King Mahākosala gave his daughter to Bimbisāra, he gave a Kāsī village worth a hundred thousand, located between the two kingdoms, to his daughter. And when Ajātasattu killed his father, his mother also died not long after due to grief over the king's loss. Then King Pasenadi Kosala said, "Ajātasattu has killed my parents; the village belonged to my father," and he made war for that. Ajātasattu also said, "It belonged to my mother," and the two maternal uncle and nephew fought for that village.

pāpamitto. Teyevassa sahāyātipāpasahāyo. Tesvevassa cittaṃ ninnaṃ sampavaṅkantipāpasampavaṅko. Pasenadissa sāriputtattherādīnaṃ vasena kalyāṇamittāditā veditabbā.Dukkhaṃ setīti jitāni hatthiādīni anusocanto dukkhaṃ sayissati. Idaṃ bhagavā puna tassa jayakāraṇaṃ disvā āha.Jayaṃ veraṃ pasavatīti jinanto veraṃ pasavati, veripuggalaṃ labhati. Catutthaṃ.

pāpamitto. Teyevassa sahāyāti pāpasahāyo. Tesvevassa cittaṃ ninnaṃ sampavaṅkanti pāpasampavaṅko. In the case of Pasenadi, good friendship etc., should be understood in terms of Sāriputta Thera and others. Dukkhaṃ setīti, lamenting over the elephants and other things that were lost, he will lie down in sorrow. Seeing that he will win again, the Blessed One said this. Jayaṃ veraṃ pasavatīti, one who conquers begets enmity, obtains a hostile person. The fourth.

5. Dutiyasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Dutiyasaṅgāmasuttavaṇṇanā

126.Pañcameabbhuyyāsīti parājaye garahappatto ‘‘ārāmaṃ gantvā bhikkhūnaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ suṇāthā’’ti rattibhāge buddharakkhitena nāma vuḍḍhapabbajitena dhammarakkhitassa vuḍḍhapabbajitassa ‘‘sace rājā imañca upāyaṃ katvā gaccheyya, puna jineyyā’’ti vuttajayakāraṇaṃ sutvā abhiuyyāsi.

126. In the fifth, abbhuyyāsīti, having been reproached for the defeat, he heard the cause of victory spoken by an elderly renunciate named Buddharakkhita to an elderly renunciate named Dhammarakkhita, "If the king were to make this effort and go, he would conquer again," after going to the monastery, "to listen to the conversation of the monks," in the night.

Yāvassa upakappatīti yāva tassa upakappati sayhaṃ hoti.Yadā caññeti yadā aññe.Vilumpantīti taṃ vilumpitvā ṭhitapuggalaṃ vilumpanti.Vilumpatīti vilumpiyati.Ṭhānaṃ hi maññatīti ‘‘kāraṇa’’nti hi maññati.Yadāti yasmiṃ kāle.Jetāraṃ labhate jayanti jayanto puggalo pacchā jetārampi labhati.Rosetāranti ghaṭṭetāraṃ.Rosakoti ghaṭṭako.Kammavivaṭṭenāti kammapariṇāmena, tassa vilumpanakammassa vipākadānena.So vilutto viluppatīti so vilumpako vilumpiyati. Pañcamaṃ.

Yāvassa upakappatīti, as much as is suitable, bearable for him. Yadā caññeti, when others. Vilumpantīti, they plunder the person who is standing, having plundered that. Vilumpatīti, he is plundered. Ṭhānaṃ hi maññatīti, he thinks it is a cause. Yadāti, at which time. Jetāraṃ labhate jayanti, a conquering person later obtains a conqueror. Rosetāranti, one who incites. Rosakoti, an inciter. Kammavivaṭṭenāti, by the result of the action, by the giving of the result of that plundering action. So vilutto viluppatīti, that plunderer is plundered. The fifth.

6. Mallikāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Mallikāsuttavaṇṇanā

127.Chaṭṭheupasaṅkamīti mallikāya deviyā gabbhavuṭṭhānakāle sūtigharaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā ārakkhaṃ datvā upasaṅkami.Anattamano ahosīti, ‘‘duggatakulassa me dhītu mahantaṃ issariyaṃ dinnaṃ, sace puttaṃ alabhissa, mahantaṃ sakkāraṃ adhigamissa, tato dāni parihīnā’’ti anattamano ahosi.Seyyāti dandhapaññasmā elamūgaputtato ekaccā itthīyeva seyyā.Posāti posehi.Janādhipāti janādhibhuṃ rājānaṃ ālapati.Sassudevāti sassusasuradevatā.Disampatīti disājeṭṭhakā.Tādisā subhagiyāti tādisāya subhariyāya. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

127. In the sixth, upasaṅkamīti, during the time of Mallikā Devi's confinement, having made arrangements for the lying-in room and provided protection, he approached. Anattamano ahosīti, he was unhappy, thinking, "A great lordship was given to my daughter from a poor family; if she had obtained a son, she would have gained great honor; now she is diminished." Seyyāti, a certain woman is better than a slow-witted, speechless son. Posāti, nourish. Janādhipāti, he addresses the lord of people, the king. Sassudevāti, mother-in-law and father-in-law deities. Disampatīti, lords of the directions. Tādisā subhagiyāti, to such a fortunate one. The sixth.

7. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Appamādasuttavaṇṇanā

128.Sattamesamadhiggayhāti samadhiggaṇhitvā, ādiyitvāti attho.Appamādoti kārāpakaappamādo.Samodhānanti samavadhānaṃ upakkhepaṃ.Evameva khoti hatthipadaṃ viya hi kārāpakaappamādo, sesapadajātāni viya avasesā catubhūmakā kusaladhammā. Te hatthipade sesapadāni viya appamāde samodhānaṃ gacchanti, appamādassa anto parivattanti. Yathā ca hatthipadaṃ sesapadānaṃ aggaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ appamādo sesadhammānanti dasseti. Mahaggatalokuttaradhammānampi hesa paṭilābhakaṭṭhena lokiyopi samāno aggova hoti.

128. In the seventh, samadhiggayhāti, having fully grasped, meaning having taken up. Appamādoti, diligence in doing good. Samodhānanti, convergence, approach. Evameva khoti, just as the footprint of an elephant, so is diligence in doing good, just as the other footprints, so are the remaining wholesome qualities of the four planes. These, like other footprints in the elephant's footprint, go to convergence, revolve within diligence. And just as the elephant's footprint is the chief and best of the other footprints, so diligence is the chief of the remaining qualities, he shows. And even among the great and supramundane qualities, being mundane in the sense of obtaining them, it is indeed the chief.

Appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti ‘‘etāni āyuādīni patthayantena appamādova kātabbo’’ti appamādameva pasaṃsanti. Yasmā vā puññakiriyāsu paṇḍitā appamādaṃ pasaṃsanti, tasmā āyuādīni patthayantena appamādova kātabboti attho.Atthābhisamayāti atthapaṭilābhā. Sattamaṃ.

Appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti, "Wishing for these things, such as long life, diligence should be done," thus they praise diligence itself. Or, because the wise praise diligence in meritorious actions, therefore, wishing for long life and so on, diligence itself should be done, is the meaning. Atthābhisamayāti, from the attainment of benefits. The seventh.

8. Kalyāṇamittasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Kalyāṇamittasuttavaṇṇanā

129.Aṭṭhameso ca kho kalyāṇamittassāti so cāyaṃ dhammo kalyāṇamittasseva svākkhāto nāma hoti, na pāpamittassāti. Kiñcāpi hi dhammo sabbesampi svākkhātova, kalyāṇamittassa pana sussūsantassa saddahantassa atthaṃ pūreti bhesajjaṃ viya vaḷañjantassa na itarassāti. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Dhammoti cettha desanādhammo veditabbo.

129. In the eighth, so ca kho kalyāṇamittassāti, and this Dhamma is well-proclaimed only for a good friend, not for a bad friend. Although the Dhamma is well-proclaimed for all, it fulfills the purpose for a good friend who is willing to listen and believe, like a medicine for one who is afflicted, but not for the other. Therefore this was said. Dhammoti here, the Dhamma of teaching should be understood.

Upaḍḍhamidanti thero kira rahogato cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇadhammo nāma ovādake anusāsake kalyāṇamitte sati paccattapurisakāre ṭhitassa sampajjati, upaḍḍhaṃ kalyāṇamittato hoti, upaḍḍhaṃ paccattapurisakārato’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ padesañāṇe ṭhito nippadesaṃ cintetuṃ na sakkomi, satthāraṃ pucchitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissāmī’’ti. Tasmā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā evamāha.Brahmacariyassāti ariyamaggassa.Yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti yā esā kalyāṇamittatā nāma, sā upaḍḍhaṃ, tato upaḍḍhaṃ āgacchatīti attho. Iti therena ‘‘upaḍḍhupaḍḍhā sammādiṭṭhiādayo kalyāṇamittato āgacchanti, upaḍḍhupaḍḍhā paccattapurisakārato’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi therassa ayaṃ manoratho, yathā pana bahūhi silāthambhe ussāpite, ‘‘ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ asukena ussāpitaṃ, ettakaṃ asukenā’’ti vinibbhogo natthi, yathā ca mātāpitaro nissāya uppannesu puttesu ‘‘ettakaṃ mātito nibbattaṃ, ettakaṃ pitito’’ti vinibbhogo natthi, evaṃ idhāpi avinibbhogadhammo hesa, ‘‘ettakaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ kalyāṇamittato nibbattaṃ, ettakaṃ paccattapurisakārato’’ti na sakkā laddhuṃ, kalyāṇamittatāya pana upaḍḍhaguṇo labbhatīti therassa ajjhāsayenaupaḍḍhaṃnāma jātaṃ, sakalaguṇo paṭilabbhatīti bhagavato ajjhāsayenasakalaṃnāma jātaṃ.Kalyāṇamittatāti cetaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭilābhaṅgaṃ nāmāti gahitaṃ. Atthato kalyāṇamittaṃ nissāya laddhā sīlasamādhivipassanāvasena cattāro khandhā. Saṅkhārakkhandhotipi vadantiyeva.

Upaḍḍhamidanti, it seems the Elder, being alone, thought, "This monastic life is accomplished for one who stands on his own effort when there is an advisor, an instructor, a good friend; half is from the good friend, half is from one's own effort." Then it occurred to him, "Standing on limited knowledge, I am not able to think of the unlimited; having asked the Teacher, I will become free from doubt." Therefore, having approached the Teacher, he said this. Brahmacariyassāti, of the Noble Path. Yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti, that which is this good friendship, half of it, half comes from that, is the meaning. Thus, the Elder said, "Half and half, right view and so on, come from a good friend, half and half from one's own effort." Although this was the Elder's intention, just as when many stone pillars have been raised, there is no distinction, "So much of this place was raised by so-and-so, so much by so-and-so," and just as in the sons born relying on their mother and father, there is no distinction, "So much was produced from the mother, so much from the father," so here also, this is an indistinguishable phenomenon, "So much of right view and so on was produced from a good friend, so much from one's own effort," it is not possible to obtain, but because of good friendship, half the quality is obtained, thus half arose from the Elder's intention, the whole quality is obtained, thus whole arose from the Blessed One's intention. Kalyāṇamittatāti, this is taken as the antecedent part of gaining. In meaning, relying on a good friend, the four khandha are obtained in terms of morality, concentration, and insight. They even say it is the saṅkhārakkhandha.

Mā hevaṃ, ānandāti, ānanda, mā evaṃ abhaṇi, bahussuto tvaṃ sekhapaṭisambhidappatto aṭṭha vare gahetvā maṃ upaṭṭhahasi, catūhi acchariyabbhutadhammehi samannāgato, tādisassa evaṃ kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati.Sakalameva hidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyaṃ, yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti idaṃ bhagavā – ‘‘cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni tisso vijjā cha abhiññā sabbaṃ kalyāṇamittamūlakameva hotī’’ti sandhāyāha. Idāni vacībhedeneva kāraṇaṃ dassentokalyāṇamittassetantiādimāha. Tatthapāṭikaṅkhanti pāṭikaṅkhitabbaṃ icchitabbaṃ, avassaṃbhāvīti attho.

Mā hevaṃ, ānandāti, Ānanda, do not speak thus, you are very learned, attained to the path of a learner, having taken eight boons, you attend upon me, complete with four wonderful and amazing qualities, it is not fitting for such as you to speak thus. Sakalameva hidaṃ, ānanda, brahmacariyaṃ, yadidaṃ kalyāṇamittatāti, here, the Blessed One said, intending, "The four paths, the four fruits, the three knowledges, the six superknowledges, all are rooted in good friendship." Now, showing the reason by a distinction in speech, he said, kalyāṇamittassetanti and so on. There, pāṭikaṅkhāti, should be expected, should be desired, it means certainly occurring.

Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāvetītiādīsu aṭṭhannaṃ ādipadānaṃyeva tāva ayaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahaṇalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodāpanalakkhaṇā sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi.

Idhāti, in this Dispensation. In sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāvetīti and so on, this is a summary explanation of just the first words of the eight: right view is characterized by right seeing. Right thought is characterized by right directing. Right speech is characterized by right grasping. Right action is characterized by right establishing. Right livelihood is characterized by right purifying. Right effort is characterized by right exertion. Right mindfulness is characterized by right establishing. Right concentration is characterized by right composing.

Tesu ekekassa tīṇi kiccāni honti. Seyyāthidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi tāva aññehipi attano paccanīkakilesehi saddhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati tappaṭicchādakamohavidhamanavasena asammohato. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi tatheva micchāsaṅkappādīni ca pajahanti, nirodhañca ārammaṇaṃ karonti. Visesato panettha sammādiṭṭhi sahajātadhamme sammā dasseti. Sammāsaṅkappo sahajātadhamme abhiniropeti, sammāvācā sammā pariggaṇhāti, sammākammanto sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, sammāājīvo sammā vodāpeti, sammāvāyāmo sammā paggaṇhāti, sammāsati sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, sammāsamādhi sammā dahati.

Among these, each has three functions. That is to say, right view, together with the other defilements that are opposed to it, abandons wrong view, makes cessation its object, and sees the associated qualities, being without delusion by means of destroying the delusion that obscures them. Right thought and so on also abandon wrong thought and so on, and make cessation their object. Here, especially, right view rightly sees the co-arisen qualities. Right thought directs the co-arisen qualities, right speech rightly grasps, right action rightly establishes, right livelihood rightly purifies, right effort rightly exerts, right mindfulness rightly establishes, right concentration rightly composes.

Apicesā sammādiṭṭhi nāma pubbabhāge nānākhaṇā nānārammaṇā hoti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Kiccato pana sammādiṭṭhi dukkhe ñāṇantiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi pubbabhāge nānākhaṇā nānārammaṇā honti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Tesu sammāsaṅkappo kiccato nekkhammasaṅkappotiādīni tīṇi nāmāni labhati. Sammāvācādayo tayo viratiyopi honti cetanāyopi, maggakkhaṇe pana viratiyova. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatīti idampi dvayaṃ kiccato sammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi sammāsamādhiyeva.

Moreover, this right view is of various moments and various objects in the preliminary stage, but of one moment and one object at the time of the path. But in terms of function, right view obtains four names: knowledge of suffering and so on. Right thought and so on are also of various moments and various objects in the preliminary stage, but of one moment and one object at the time of the path. Among these, right thought obtains three names in terms of function: thought of renunciation and so on. Right speech and the other two are abstinences and also intentions, but at the moment of the path, they are only abstinences. This pair, right effort and right mindfulness, also obtain four names in terms of function: right efforts and satipaṭṭhāna. Right concentration, however, is right concentration both in the preliminary stage and at the moment of the path.

bhāveti vivekanissitantiādīsu evaṃ ñātabbo.Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti, attano cittasantāne punappunaṃ janeti, abhinibbattetīti attho.Vivekanissitanti vivekaṃ nissitaṃ, viveke vā nissitanti vivekanissitaṃ.Vivekoti vivittatā. Vivittatā cāyaṃ tadaṅgaviveko, vikkhambhana-samuccheda-paṭippassaddhi-nissaraṇavivekoti pañcavidho. Evametasmiṃ pañcavidhe viveke.Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ samucchedavivekanissitaṃ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāvetīti ayamattho veditabbo. Tathā hi ayaṃ ariyamaggabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ, maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ bhāveti. Esa nayovirāganissitādīsu. Vivekatthā eva hi virāgādayo.

bhāveti vivekanissitanti, etc., should be understood as follows: Bhāveti means develops, repeatedly generates in one's own mind-stream, brings into existence; this is the meaning. Vivekanissitanti means dependent on viveka, or based on viveka; thus, vivekanissitaṃ. Viveka means seclusion. And this seclusion is fivefold: tadaṅga-viveka, vikkhambhana-viveka, samuccheda-viveka, paṭippassaddhi-viveka, and nissaraṇa-viveka. Thus, in this fivefold viveka, vivekanissitanti should be understood as developing right view dependent on tadaṅga-viveka, dependent on samuccheda-viveka, and dependent on nissaraṇa-viveka. For indeed, this yogi, engaged in the cultivation of the Noble Path, develops right view which, in the moment of insight (vipassanā), is dependent on tadaṅga-viveka in terms of function, and dependent on nissaraṇa-viveka in terms of disposition; but during the path moment, it is dependent on samuccheda-viveka in terms of function, and dependent on nissaraṇa-viveka in terms of object. The same method applies to virāganissitā, etc. For virāga and the others are indeed meanings of viveka.

pariccāgavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe ca tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe ca samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ.Pakkhandanavossaggoti vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe pana ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ, tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthavaṇṇanānaye vaṭṭati. Tathā hi ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhi yathāvuttena pakārena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbānañca pakkhandati.

pariccāgavossaggo means, in the moment of insight (vipassanā), the abandoning of defilements in terms of temporary suppression (tadaṅga), and in the path moment, the abandoning in terms of eradication (samuccheda). Pakkhandanavossaggo means, in the moment of insight (vipassanā), inclining towards that, and in the path moment, inclining towards Nibbāna by making it the object. Both of these apply in this method of explaining the meaning, which mixes the mundane and supramundane. Thus, this right view, in the manner stated, both abandons defilements and inclines towards Nibbāna.

Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana sakalena vacanena vossaggatthaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca, paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi ariyamaggabhāvanānuyutto bhikkhu yathā sammādiṭṭhi kilesapariccāgavossaggatthaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggatthañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakkā hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetīti. Esa nayo sesamaggaṅgesu.

Vossaggapariṇāminti, by this entire statement, it is said that it transforms into the meaning of relinquishment, having been transformed, maturing, and having matured. For indeed, this bhikkhu, engaged in the cultivation of the Noble Path, develops right view in such a way that it matures into the relinquishment of defilements and matures into inclining towards Nibbāna, and in such a way that it is matured. The same method applies to the remaining path factors.

Āgammāti ārabbha sandhāya paṭicca.Jātidhammāti jātisabhāvā jātipakatikā.Tasmāti yasmā sakalo ariyamaggopi kalyāṇamittaṃ nissāya labbhati, tasmā.Handāti vavassaggatthe nipāto.Appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti appamādaṃ vaṇṇayanti, tasmā appamādo kātabbo.Atthābhisamayāti atthapaṭilābhā. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Āgammāti means having approached, referring to, depending on. Jātidhammāti means having the nature of birth, having the characteristic of birth. Tasmāti, because the entire Noble Path is attained by relying on a kalyāṇamitta, therefore. Handāti is a particle in the sense of emphasis. Appamādaṃ pasaṃsantīti means they praise diligence; therefore, diligence should be done. Atthābhisamayāti means the attainment of the meaning. The eighth.

9. Paṭhamaaputtakasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭhamaaputtakasuttavaṇṇanā

130.Navamedivā divassāti divasassa divā, majjhanhikasamayeti attho.Sāpateyyanti dhanaṃ.Ko pana vādo rūpiyassāti suvaṇṇarajatatambalohakāḷalohaphālakacchapakādibhedassa ghanakatassa ceva paribhogabhājanādibhedassa ca rūpiyabhaṇḍassa pana ko vādo? ‘‘Ettakaṃ nāmā’’ti kā paricchedakathāti attho.Kaṇājakanti sakuṇḍakabhattaṃ.Bilaṅgadutiyanti kañjikadutiyaṃ.Sāṇanti sāṇavākamayaṃ.Tipakkhavasananti tīṇi khaṇḍāni dvīsu ṭhānesu sibbitvā katanivāsanaṃ.

130. In the ninth, divā divassāti means during the day of the day, at noon time. Sāpateyyanti means wealth. Ko pana vādo rūpiyassāti, but what to say of silver goods, which are of various kinds, such as gold, silver, copper, iron, black iron, and phālakacchapaka, and which are solid or of the nature of containers for use, etc.? What is the need to say, "It is so much"? This is the meaning. Kaṇājakanti means rice gruel. Bilaṅgadutiyanti means with kañjika as the second. Sāṇanti means made of hemp. Tipakkhavasananti means a garment made by sewing three pieces together in two places.

Asappurisoti lāmakapuriso.Uddhaggikantiādīsu uparūparibhūmīsu phaladānavasena uddhaṃ aggamassātiuddhaggikā. Saggassa hitā tatrupapattijananatotisovaggikā. Nibbattaṭṭhānesu sukho vipāko assātisukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu aggānaṃ dibbavaṇṇādīnaṃ visesānaṃ nibbattanatosaggasaṃvattanikā. Evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇadānaṃ na patiṭṭhāpetīti.

Asappurisoti means a base person. In uddhaggikanti etc., uddhaggikā means that which is high because it gives fruits in the higher and higher realms. Sovaggikā means conducive to heaven because it generates rebirth there. Sukhavipākā means that which has a pleasant result in the places of rebirth. Saggasaṃvattanikā means that which thoroughly brings about excellent distinctions such as divine beauty, etc. He does not establish such a giving of offerings.

Sātodakāti madhurodakā.Settodakāti vīcīnaṃ bhinnaṭṭhāne udakassa setatāya setodakā.Supatitthāti sundaratitthā.Taṃ janoti yena udakena sātodakā, taṃ udakaṃ jano bhājanāni pūretvā neva hareyya.Na yathāpaccayaṃ vā kareyyāti, yaṃ yaṃ udakena udakakiccaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ taṃ na kareyya.Tadapeyyamānanti taṃ apeyyamānaṃ.Kiccakaro ca hotīti attanā kattabbakiccakaro ceva kusalakiccakaro ca, bhuñjati ca, kammante ca payojeti, dānañca detīti attho. Navamaṃ.

Sātodakāti means having sweet water. Settodakāti means having white water because the water is white in the different places of the waves. Supatitthāti means having beautiful bathing places. Taṃ janoti, the water by which it is sweet, people would not fill vessels and carry that water away. Na yathāpaccayaṃ vā kareyyāti, whatever water task should be done with the water, they would not do that. Tadapeyyamānanti means that which is undrinkable. Kiccakaro ca hotīti means he is both a doer of tasks that should be done by himself and a doer of skillful tasks, and he enjoys, and he employs in work, and he gives gifts; this is the meaning. The ninth.

10. Dutiyaaputtakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Dutiyaaputtakasuttavaṇṇanā

131.Dasamepiṇḍapātena paṭipādesīti piṇḍapātena saddhiṃ saṃyojesi, piṇḍapātaṃ adāsīti attho.Pakkāmīti kenacideva rājupaṭṭhānādinā kiccena gato.Pacchā vippaṭisārī ahosīti so kira aññesupi divasesu taṃ paccekasambuddhaṃ passati, dātuṃ panassa cittaṃ na uppajjati. Tasmiṃ pana divase ayaṃ padumavatideviyā tatiyaputto taggarasikhī paccekabuddho gandhamādanapabbate phalasamāpattisukhena vītināmetvā pubbaṇhasamaye vuṭṭhāya anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā manosilātale nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā pattacīvaramādāya abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā iddhiyā vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā nagaradvāre oruyha cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattamādāya nagaravāsīnaṃ gharadvāresu sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ ṭhapento viya pāsādikehi abhikkantādīhi anupubbena seṭṭhino gharadvāraṃ sampatto. Taṃdivasañca seṭṭhi pātova uṭṭhāya paṇītabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā, gharadvārakoṭṭhake āsanaṃ paññāpetvā, dantantarāni sodhento nisinno hoti. So paccekabuddhaṃ disvā, taṃdivasaṃ pāto bhutvā nisinnattā dānacittaṃ uppādetvā, bhariyaṃ pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘imassa samaṇassa piṇḍapātaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā pakkāmi.

131. In the tenth, piṇḍapātena paṭipādesīti means he connected with almsfood, he gave almsfood; this is the meaning. Pakkāmīti means he went away due to some business such as royal service. Pacchā vippaṭisārī ahosīti, it seems that on other days as well he sees that paccekabuddha, but the thought of giving does not arise for him. On that day, however, the paccekabuddha named Taggara-sikhī, the third son of Padumavatī-devī, having spent the day on Gandhamādana Mountain in the bliss of fruition attainment (phalasamāpatti), arose in the early morning, washed his face in Anotatta Lake, arranged his robes on the manosilā stone, tied his girdle, took his bowl and robes, attained the fourth jhāna, which is the basis for supernormal power, rose into the sky by means of psychic power, descended at the city gate, put on his robe, took his bowl, and, like placing a thousand-piece ornament at the door of the houses of the city dwellers, gradually arrived at the door of the wealthy man with pleasing deportment, etc. And on that day, the wealthy man, having risen early in the morning, eaten fine food, sat having a seat prepared in the doorway booth, cleaning his teeth. Seeing that paccekabuddha, because he was sitting having eaten in the morning on that day, he generated the thought of giving, and having summoned his wife, he said, "Give almsfood to this ascetic," and departed.

Seṭṭhibhariyā cintesi – ‘‘mayā ettakena kālena imassa ‘dethā’ti vacanaṃ na sutapubbaṃ, dāpentopi ca ajja na yassa vā tassa vā dāpeti, vītarāgadosamohassa vantakilesassa ohitabhārassa paccekabuddhassa dāpeti, yaṃ vā taṃ vā adatvā paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ dassāmī’’ti, gharā nikkhamma paccekabuddhaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā pattaṃ ādāya antonivesane paññattāsane nisīdāpetvā suparisuddhehi sālitaṇḍulehi bhattaṃ sampādetvā tadanurūpaṃ khādanīyaṃ byañjanaṃ supeyyañca sallakkhetvā pattaṃ pūretvā bahi gandhehi samalaṅkaritvā paccekabuddhassa hatthesu patiṭṭhapetvā vandi. Paccekabuddho – ‘‘aññesampi paccekabuddhānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmī’’ti aparibhuñjitvāva anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sopi kho seṭṭhi bāhirato āgacchanto paccekabuddhaṃ disvā mayaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ dethā’’ti vatvā pakkantā, api vo laddhoti? Āma, seṭṭhi laddhoti. ‘‘Passāmī’’ti gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā olokesi. Athassa piṇḍapātagandho uṭṭhahitvā nāsāpuṭaṃ pahari. So cittaṃ saṃyametuṃ asakkonto pacchā vippaṭisārī āhosīti.

The wealthy man's wife thought, "I have never heard him say 'give' in such a long time. And today, when he has something given, he does not have it given to just anyone, but to a paccekabuddha who is free from lust, hatred, and delusion, who has cast off defilements, who has laid down the burden. Without giving just anything, I will give fine almsfood." Coming out of the house, she paid homage to the paccekabuddha with the fivefold prostration, took the bowl, had him sit on the prepared seat inside the inner chambers, prepared rice with thoroughly purified rice grains, considered suitable edibles and curries and soups, filled the bowl, decorated it outside with perfumes, placed it in the hands of the paccekabuddha, and paid homage. The paccekabuddha, thinking, "I will do a favor to other paccekabuddhas as well," gave thanks without even consuming it, and departed. And that wealthy man, coming from outside, saw the paccekabuddha and asked, "Did you receive the almsfood that we told you to give?" "Yes, wealthy man, I received it." "May I see it?" He stretched his neck and looked. Then the smell of the almsfood arose and struck his nostrils. Unable to restrain his mind, he later regretted it.

Varametantiādi vippaṭisārassa uppannākāradassanaṃ.Bhātu ca pana ekaputtakaṃ sāpateyyassa kāraṇā jīvitā voropesīti tadā kirassa avibhatteyeva kuṭumbe mātāpitaro ca jeṭṭhabhātā ca kālamakaṃsu. So bhātujāyāya saddhiṃyeva saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Bhātu panassa eko putto hoti, taṃ vīthiyā kīḷantaṃ manussā vadanti – ‘‘ayaṃ dāso ayaṃ dāsī idaṃ yānaṃ idaṃ dhanaṃ tava santaka’’nti. So tesaṃ kathaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘ayaṃ dāso mayhaṃ santaka’’ntiādīni katheti.

Varametantiādi is showing the manner of the arising of regret. Bhātu ca pana ekaputtakaṃ sāpateyyassa kāraṇā jīvitā voropesīti, it seems that at that time, while the family was still undivided, his parents and elder brother died. He lived in cohabitation with his brother's wife. But his brother had one son, whom people, playing in the street, would say, "This slave, this female slave, this vehicle, this wealth is yours." He, taking their words, would say, "This slave is mine," etc.

Sattakkhattunti sattavāre. Pubbapacchimacetanāvasena cettha attho veditabbo. Ekapiṇḍapātadānasmiñhi ekāva cetanā dve paṭisandhiyo na deti, pubbapacchimacetanāhi panesa sattakkhattuṃ sagge, sattakkhattuṃ seṭṭhikule nibbatto.Purāṇanti paccekasambuddhassa dinnapiṇḍapātacetanākammaṃ.

Sattakkhattunti means seven times. The meaning here should be understood in terms of the prior and subsequent intention. For in the giving of one almsfood, a single intention does not give two rebirths; but by the prior and subsequent intentions, he was reborn in heaven seven times, and in a wealthy family seven times. Purāṇanti means the karma of the intention of the almsfood given to the paccekabuddha.

Pariggahanti pariggahitavatthu.Anujīvinoti ekaṃ mahākulaṃ nissāya paṇṇāsampi saṭṭhipi kulāni jīvanti, te manusse sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Sabbaṃ nādāya gantabbanti sabbametaṃ na ādiyitvā gantabbaṃ.Sabbaṃ nikkhippagāminanti sabbametaṃ nikkhippasabhāvaṃ, pariccajitabbasabhāvamevāti attho. Dasamaṃ.

Pariggahanti means the object that has been taken hold of. Anujīvinoti, relying on one great family, even fifty or sixty families live; this is said referring to those people. Sabbaṃ nādāya gantabbanti means all of this should not be taken and gone. Sabbaṃ nikkhippagāminanti means all of this has the nature of being discarded, it has the very nature of being relinquished; this is the meaning. The tenth.

Dutiyo vaggo.

Dutiyo vaggo.

3. Tatiyavaggo

3. Tatiyavaggo

1. Puggalasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Puggalasuttavaṇṇanā

132.Tatiyavaggassa paṭhame ‘‘nīce kule paccājāto’’tiādikena tamena yuttotitamo. Kāyaduccaritādīhi puna nirayatamūpagamanatotamaparāyaṇo. Iti ubhayenapi khandhatamova kathito hoti. ‘‘Ucce kule paccājāto’’tiādikena jotinā yuttatojoti,ālokībhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyasucaritādīhi puna saggūpapattijotibhāvūpagamanatojotiparāyaṇo. Iminā nayena itarepi dve veditabbā.

132. In the first of the third section, tamo means endowed with darkness, etc., such as "born in a low family." Tamaparāyaṇo means again, because of going to the darkness of hell by way of bodily misconduct, etc. Thus, by both, only the darkness of the aggregates (khandha) has been spoken of. Joti means endowed with light, etc., such as "born in a high family," it is said to be luminous. Jotiparāyaṇo means again, because of going to the state of being light in the heavens by way of bodily good conduct, etc. The other two should be understood in this way.

Venakuleti vilīvakārakule.Nesādakuleti migaluddakādīnaṃ kule.Rathakārakuleti cammakārakule.Pukkusakuleti pupphachaḍḍakakule.Kasiravuttiketi dukkhavuttike.Dubbaṇṇoti paṃsupisācako viya jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo.Duddasikoti vijātamātuyāpi amanāpadassano.Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako.Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā.Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā.Khañjoti ekapādakhañjo vā ubhayapādakhañjo vā.Pakkhahatoti hatapakkho pīṭhasappī.Padīpeyyassāti telakapallakādino padīpaupakaraṇassa.Evaṃ kho, mahārājāti ettha eko puggalo bahiddhā ālokaṃ adisvā mātukucchismiṃyeva kālaṃ katvā apāyesu nibbattanto sakalaṃ kappampi saṃsarati, sopi tamotamaparāyaṇova. So pana kuhakapuggalo bhaveyya. Kuhakassa hi evarūpā nibbatti hotīti vuttaṃ.

Venakuleti means in a basket-weaver family. Nesādakuleti means in a family of hunters of wild animals, etc. Rathakārakuleti means in a leatherworker family. Pukkusakuleti means in a flower-sweeper family. Kasiravuttiketi means having a miserable livelihood. Dubbaṇṇoti means having the color of a withered stump, like a dust demon. Duddasikoti means unpleasant to see even by his mother who knows him. Okoṭimakoti means hunchbacked. Kāṇoti means blind in one eye or blind in both eyes. Kuṇīti means crippled in one hand or crippled in both hands. Khañjoti means lame in one foot or lame in both feet. Pakkhahatoti means having a broken wing, like a table pestle. Padīpeyyassāti means of the lamp equipment, such as an oil saucer, etc. Evaṃ kho, mahārājāti, here, one person, not seeing the light outside, perishes in the womb itself, wandering the entire kappa being reborn in the lower realms; that one is indeed devoted to darkness and darkness. That person might be a hypocritical person. For such a birth occurs for a hypocritical person; this is what is said.

Daliddetiādīhi pavattapaccayavipatti.Kasiravuttiketiādīhi ājīvupāyavipatti.Dubbaṇṇotiādīhi attabhāvavipatti.Bavhābādhotiādīhi dukkhakāraṇasamāyogo.Na lābhītiādīhi sukhakāraṇavipatti ceva upabhogavipatti ca.Kāyena duccaritantiādīhi tamaparāyaṇabhāvassa kāraṇasamāyogo.Kāyassa bhedātiādīhi samparāyikatamūpagamo. Sukkapakkho vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.

Daliddetiādīhi means the adversity of the resources for sustenance. Kasiravuttiketiādīhi means the adversity of the means of livelihood. Dubbaṇṇotiādīhi means the adversity of the individual existence. Bavhābādhotiādīhi means association with the causes of suffering. Na lābhītiādīhi means both the adversity of the causes of happiness and the adversity of enjoyment. Kāyena duccaritantiādīhi means association with the causes of being devoted to darkness. Kāyassa bhedātiādīhi means going to darkness in the next world. The bright side should be understood by the method opposite to what was said.

Akkosatīti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosati.Paribhāsatīti, ‘‘kasmā tiṭṭhatha? Kiṃ tumhehi amhākaṃ kasikammādīni katānī’’tiādīhi? Paribhavavacanehi paribhāsati.Rosakoti ghaṭṭako.Abyaggamanasoti ekaggacitto. Paṭhamaṃ.

Akkosatīti means he insults with the ten grounds for insult. Paribhāsatīti, does he reproach with words of contempt, saying, "Why are you standing? Have you done our farming, etc.?" Rosakoti means an irritant. Abyaggamanasoti means having a concentrated mind. The first.

2. Ayyikāsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Ayyikāsuttavaṇṇanā

133.Dutiyejiṇṇāti jarājiṇṇā.Vuḍḍhāti vayovuḍḍhā.Mahallikāti jātimahallikā.Addhagatāti addhaṃ cirakālaṃ atikkantā.Vayoanuppattāti pacchimavayaṃ sampattā.Piyā manāpāti rañño kira mātari matāya ayyikā mātuṭṭhāne ṭhatvā paṭijaggi, tenassa ayyikāya balavapemaṃ uppajji. Tasmā evamāha.Hatthiratanenāti satasahassagghanako hatthī satasahassagghanakena alaṅkārena alaṅkato hatthiratanaṃ nāma.Assaratanepieseva nayo.Gāmavaropi satasahassuṭṭhānakagāmova.Sabbāni tāni bhedanadhammānīti tesu hi kiñci kariyamānameva bhijjati, kiñci katapariyositaṃ cakkato anapanītameva, kiñci apanetvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitamattaṃ, kiñci tato paraṃ, evameva sattesupi koci paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā marati, koci mūḷhagabbhāya mātari mātukucchito anikkhantova, koci nikkhantamatto, koci tato paranti. Tasmā evamāha. Dutiyaṃ.

133. In the second, jiṇṇāti means old due to age. Vuḍḍhāti means old in years. Mahallikāti means old by birth. Addhagatāti means having passed half a long time. Vayoanuppattāti means having reached the last stage of life. Piyā manāpāti, it seems that when the king's mother died, the grandmother took her place and cared for him, so strong affection arose for him for his grandmother. Therefore, he says this. Hatthiratanenāti means an elephant jewel decorated with a hundred-thousand-worth ornament, the elephant is called elephant jewel. Assaratanepi the same method applies to the horse jewel as well. Gāmavaropi is a superior village worth a hundred thousand. Sabbāni tāni bhedanadhammānīti, for in those, something breaks even while being done, something breaks when it is finished but not yet removed from the wheel, something breaks when it is merely removed and placed on the ground, something breaks after that; in the same way, even among beings, someone dies having taken rebirth, someone dies as a premature baby not coming out of the womb of the mother, someone dies as soon as they come out, someone dies after that. Therefore, he says this. The second.

134.Tatiye sabbaṃ uttānameva. Tatiyaṃ.

134. In the third, everything is clear as it is. The third.

4. Issattasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Issattasuttavaṇṇanā

135.Catutthassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Bhagavato kira paṭhamabodhiyaṃ mahālābhasakkāro udapādi bhikkhusaṅghassa ca. Titthiyā hatalābhasakkārā hutvā kulesu evaṃ kanthentā vicaranti – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo evamāha, ‘mayhameva dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, na aññesaṃ dānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Mayhameva sāvakānaṃ dānaṃ dātabbaṃ, na aññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ dānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Mayhameva dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, na aññesaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ. Mayhameva sāvakānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, na aññesaṃ sāvakānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphala’nti. Yuttaṃ nu kho sayampi bhikkhācāranissitena paresaṃ bhikkhācāranissitānaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ antarāyaṃ kātuṃ, ayuttaṃ karoti ananucchavika’’nti. Sā kathā pattharamānā rājakulaṃ sampattā. Rājā sutvā cintesi – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ yaṃ tathāgato paresaṃ lābhantarāyaṃ kareyya. Ete tathāgatassa alābhāya ayasāya parisakkanti. Sacāhaṃ idheva ṭhatvā ‘mā evaṃ avocuttha, na satthā evaṃ kathetī’ti vadeyyaṃ, evaṃ sā kathā nijjhattiṃ na gaccheyya, imassa mahājanassa sannipatitakāleyeva naṃ nijjhāpessāmī’’ti ekaṃ chaṇadivasaṃ āgamento tuṇhī ahosi.

135. Explanation of the fourth, concerning eight occurrences. It is said that after the enlightenment of the Buddha, great gain and honor arose for him and the community of monks. The sectarians, deprived of gain and honor, went about among the families, lamenting thus: "The ascetic Gotama says this: ‘Only to me should gifts be given; gifts should not be given to others. Only to my disciples should gifts be given; gifts should not be given to other's disciples. Only what is given to me is of great fruit; what is given to others is not of great fruit. Only what is given to my disciples is of great fruit; what is given to other's disciples is not of great fruit.’ Is it fitting that he himself, relying on begging, should obstruct the four requisites of others who also rely on begging? It is unfitting; he does what is inappropriate." As this talk spread, it reached the royal family. The king, having heard it, thought: "This is untenable, that the Tathāgata would obstruct the gains of others. These people are striving for the Tathāgata's disadvantage and dishonor. If I were to stay here and say, ‘Do not say such things; the Teacher does not speak like that,’ the matter would not come to a conclusion. I will bring it to a conclusion at the very time when this great crowd has gathered," and awaiting a festive day, he remained silent.

kattha nu kho, bhante, dānaṃ dātabbanti āha.Yatthāti yasmiṃ puggale cittaṃ pasīdati, tasmiṃ dātabbaṃ, tassa vā dātabbanti attho.

He said, "Where, venerable sir, should a gift be given?" Where means: in whichever person the mind is pleased, to that person it should be given, or it should be given for that person.

Aññaṃ kho etanti, ‘‘mahārāja, aññaṃ tayā paṭhamaṃ pucchitaṃ, aññaṃ pacchā, sallakkhehi etaṃ, pañhākathanaṃ pana mayhaṃ bhāro’’ti vatvāsīlavato khotiādimāha. Tatthaidha tyassāti idha te assa.Samupabyūḷhoti rāsibhūto.Asikkhitoti dhanusippe asikkhito.Akatahatthoti muṭṭhibandhādivasena asampāditahattho.Akatayoggoti tiṇapuñjamattikāpuñjādīsu akataparicayo.Akatūpāsanoti rājarājamahāmattānaṃ adassitasarakkhepo.Chambhīti pavedhitakāyo.

This is something else: "Great king, what you asked first is something else, and what you asked later is something else; understand this. However, explaining the question is my responsibility," he said, and began with to one who is virtuous. There, idha tyassa means idha te assa (here they are). Samupabyūḷho means heaped up. Asikkhito means untrained in the craft of archery. Akatahattho means one whose hand is not prepared by means of fist-clenching, etc. Akatayoggo means one who is not accustomed to heaps of grass, heaps of clay, etc. Akatūpāsano means one who has not shown his own protection to kings, great kings, and high ministers. Chambhī means one whose body trembles.

Kāmacchando pahīnotiādīsu arahattamaggena kāmacchando pahīno hoti, anāgāmimaggena byāpādo, arahattamaggeneva thinamiddhaṃ, tathā uddhaccaṃ, tatiyeneva kukkuccaṃ, paṭhamamaggena vicikicchā pahīnā hoti.Asekkhenasīlakkhandhenāti asekkhassa sīlakkhandho asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma. Esa nayo sabbattha. Ettha ca purimehi catūhi padehi lokiyalokuttarasīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiyo kathitā. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti, taṃ lokiyameva.

In kāmacchando pahīno etc., sensual desire is abandoned by the path of arahantship, ill-will by the path of anāgāmi, sloth and torpor by the path of arahantship itself, likewise restlessness, regret by the third path, and doubt is abandoned by the first path. Asekkhena sīlakkhandhena means the unexcelled aggregate of virtue is called the unexcelled aggregate of virtue. This method applies everywhere. And here, by the first four terms, mundane and supramundane virtue, concentration, wisdom, and liberation are spoken of. Knowledge and vision of liberation is reviewing knowledge, and that is only mundane.

Issattanti ususippaṃ.Balavīriyanti ettha balaṃ nāma vāyodhātu,vīriyaṃkāyikacetasikavīriyameva.Bhareti bhareyya.Nāsūraṃ jātipaccayāti, ‘‘ayaṃ jātisampanno’’ti evaṃ jātikāraṇā asūraṃ na bhareyya.

Issatta means archery. Balavīriya—here, bala means the element of wind, and vīriya is physical and mental effort itself. Bhare means should support. Nāsūraṃ jātipaccayā means he should not support him out of regard for his birth, thinking, "He is endowed with such and such a birth."

Khantisoraccanti etthakhantīti adhivāsanakhanti,soraccanti arahattaṃ.Dhammāti ete dve dhammā.Assameti āvasathe.Vivaneti araññaṭṭhāne, nirudake araññe caturassapokkharaṇiādīni kārayeti attho.Duggeti visamaṭṭhāne.Saṅkamanānīti paṇṇāsahatthasaṭṭhihatthāni samokiṇṇaparisuddhavālikāni saṅkamanāni kareyya.

Khantisoracca—here, khantī means forbearance of acceptance, and soracca means arahantship. Dhammā means these two qualities. Assame means in a dwelling. Vivane means in a forest place; he should have square ponds and so on constructed in a waterless forest.

annaṃ pānantiādimāha. Tatthasenāsanānīti mañcapīṭhādīni.Vippasannenāti khīṇāsavassa dentopi sakaṅkhena kilesamalinena cittena adatvā vippasanneneva cittena dadeyya.Thanayanti gajjanto.Satakkakūti satasikharo, anekakūṭoti attho.Abhisaṅkhaccāti abhisaṅkharitvā samodhānetvā rāsiṃ katvā.

He said, beginning with food and drink. There, senāsanāni means couches, chairs, etc. Vippasannenā means even when giving to one whose defilements are exhausted, he should give with a very clear mind, not giving with a doubtful, defiled mind. Thanaya means thundering. Satakkakū means having a hundred peaks, meaning many peaks. Abhisaṅkhaccā means having intentionally collected and piled it up.

Āmodamānoti tuṭṭhamānaso hutvā.Pakiretīti dānagge vicirati, pakiranto viya vā dānaṃ deti.Puññadhārāti anekadānacetanāmayā puññadhārā.Dātāraṃ abhivassatīti yathā ākāse samuṭṭhitameghato nikkhantā udakadhārā pathaviṃ sinehayantī tementī kiledayantī abhivassati, evameva ayampi dāyakassa abbhantare uppannā puññadhārā tameva dātāraṃ anto sineheti pūreti abhisandeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dātāraṃ abhivassatī’’ti. Catutthaṃ.

Āmodamāno means being delighted in mind. Pakiretī means he roams about in the place of giving, or he gives a gift as if scattering. Puññadhārā means a stream of merit consisting of many intentions of giving. Dātāraṃ abhivassatī means just as a stream of water that has issued from a cloud arisen in the sky drenches, wets, and moistens the earth, so too, this stream of merit that has arisen within the giver moistens, fills, and saturates that very giver. Therefore it was said, "It drenches the giver." The fourth.

5. Pabbatūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Pabbatūpama Sutta

136.Pañcamemuddhāvasittānanti khattiyābhisekena muddhani avasittānaṃ katābhisekānaṃ.Kāmagedhapariyuṭṭhitānanti kāmesu gedhena pariyuṭṭhitānaṃ abhibhūtānaṃ.Janapadatthāvariyappattānanti janapade thirabhāvappattānaṃ.Rājakaraṇīyānīti rājakammāni rājūhi kattabbakiccāni.Tesu khvāhanti tesu ahaṃ.Usukkamāpannoti byāpāraṃ āpanno. Esa kira rājā divasassa tikkhattuṃ bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, antarāgamanāni bahūnipi honti. Tassa nibaddhaṃ gacchato balakāyo mahāpi hoti appopi. Athekadivasaṃ pañcasatā corā cintayiṃsu – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā avelāya appena balena samaṇassa gotamassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati, antarāmagge naṃ gahetvā rajjaṃ gaṇhissāmā’’ti. Te andhavane nilīyiṃsu. Rājāno ca nāma mahāpuññā honti. Atha tesaṃyeva abbhantarato eko puriso nikkhamitvā rañño ārocesi. Rājā mahantaṃ balakāyaṃ ādāya andhavanaṃ parivāretvā te sabbe gahetvā andhavanato yāva nagaradvārā maggassa ubhosu passesu yathā aññamaññaṃ cakkhunā cakkhuṃ upanibandhitvā olokenti, evaṃ āsannāni sūlāni ropāpetvā sūlesu uttāsesi. Idaṃ sandhāya evamāha.

136. In the fifth, muddhāvasittāna means those whose heads have been sprinkled in the ceremony of royal consecration, those who have been consecrated. Kāmagedhapariyuṭṭhitāna means those who are overwhelmed and overcome by greed for sensual pleasures. Janapadatthāvariyappattāna means those who have attained stability in the country. Rājakaraṇīyānī means royal duties, tasks to be done by kings. Tesu khvāha means among those, I. Usukkamāpanno means engaged in business. It is said that this king went to attend upon the Blessed One three times a day, and there were many intermediate visits as well. As he went constantly, his army was sometimes large and sometimes small. Then one day, five hundred thieves thought: "This king goes to attend on the ascetic Gotama at the wrong time with a small army; we will seize him on the way and take the kingdom." They hid in the dark forest. But kings are of great merit. Then a man from within their own ranks came out and informed the king. The king, taking a large army, surrounded the dark forest and, having seized them all, impaled them on stakes that had been planted close together on both sides of the road from the dark forest to the city gate, so that they looked at each other eye to eye. With this in mind, he said this.

taṃ kiṃ maññasītiādimāha. Tatthasaddhāyikoti saddhātabbo, yassa tvaṃ vacanaṃ saddahasīti attho.Paccayikoti tasseva vevacanaṃ, yassa vacanaṃ pattiyāyasīti attho.Abbhasamanti ākāsasamaṃ.Nippothento āgacchatīti pathavitalato yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā sabbe satte saṇhakaraṇīyaṃ tiṇacuṇṇaṃ viya karonto pisanto āgacchati.

He said, beginning with what do you think. There, saddhāyiko means worthy of faith, meaning whose word you believe. Paccayiko is a synonym for that, meaning whose word you trust. Abbhasama means like a cloud. Nippothento āgacchatī means coming crushing and grinding all beings from the surface of the earth to the Akaniṭṭha Brahma-world, making them like fine powder that should be crushed.

Aññatra dhammacariyāyāti ṭhapetvā dhammacariyaṃ aññaṃ kātabbaṃ natthi, dasakusalakammapathasaṅkhātā dhammacariyāva kattabbā, bhanteti –samacariyādīni tasseva vevacanāni.Ārocemīti ācikkhāmi.Paṭivedayāmīti jānāpemi.Adhivattatīti ajjhottharati.Hatthiyuddhānīti nāḷāgirisadise hemakappane nāge abhiruyha yujjhitabbayuddhāni.Gatīti nipphatti.Visayoti okāso, samatthabhāvo vā. Na hi sakkā tehi jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭibāhituṃ.Mantino mahāmattāti mantasampannā mahosadhavidhurapaṇḍitādisadisā mahāamaccā.Bhūmigatanti mahālohakumbhiyo pūretvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapitaṃ.Vehāsaṭṭhanti cammapasibbake pūretvā tulāsaṅghāṭādīsu laggetvā ceva niyyuhādīsu ca pūretvā ṭhapitaṃ.Upalāpetunti aññamaññaṃ bhindituṃ. Yathā dve janā ekena maggena na gacchanti evaṃ kātuṃ.

Aññatra dhammacariyāyā means setting aside conduct in accordance with the Dhamma, there is nothing else to be done; only conduct in accordance with the Dhamma, which is designated as the ten courses of wholesome action, should be done, venerable sir—samacariyā etc. are synonyms for that. Ārocemī means I announce. Paṭivedayāmī means I make known. Adhivattatī means it overwhelms. Hatthiyuddhānī means battles to be fought riding on elephants like Nāḷāgiri, adorned with gold ornaments. Gatī means attainment. Visayo means scope, or capability. For it is not possible to ward off old age and death with those things. Mantino mahāmattā means great ministers endowed with counsel, like Mahosadha, Vidhura, and Paṇḍita. Bhūmigata means those filled great iron pots and placed on the ground. Vehāsaṭṭha means those filled leather bags and attached to scales and beams, and also those filled in the Niyyūha, etc. Upalāpetu means to smash each other. To do it so that two people do not go by one road.

Nabhaṃ āhaccāti ākāsaṃ pūretvā.Evaṃ jarā ca maccu cāti idha dveyeva pabbatā gahitā, rājovāde pana ‘‘jarā āgacchati sabbayobbanaṃ vilumpamānā’’ti evaṃ jarā maraṇaṃ byādhi vipattīti cattāropete āgatāva.Tasmāti yasmā hatthiyuddhādīhi jarāmaraṇaṃ jinituṃ na sakkā, tasmā.Saddhaṃ nivesayeti saddhaṃ niveseyya, patiṭṭhāpeyyāti. Pañcamaṃ.

Nabhaṃ āhaccā means filling the sky. Evaṃ jarā ca maccu cā—here only two mountains are taken, but in the king's admonition, "Old age is coming, plundering all youth," thus old age, death, disease, and misfortune, these four have come. Tasmā means since it is not possible to conquer old age and death with elephant battles, etc., therefore. Saddhaṃ nivesaye means one should establish faith, one should ground it. The fifth.

Tatiyo vaggo.

The third chapter.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus in the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary on the Saṃyutta Nikāya,

4. Mārasaṃyuttaṃ

4. Māra Saṃyutta

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. First Chapter

1. Tapokammasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Tapokamma Sutta

137.Mārasaṃyuttassa paṭhameuruvelāyaṃ viharatīti paṭividdhasabbaññutaññāṇo uruvelagāmaṃ upanissāya viharati.Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti abhisambuddho hutvā paṭhamaṃ antosattāhasmiṃyeva.Dukkarakārikāyāti chabbassāni katāya dukkarakārikāya.Māro pāpimāti attano visayaṃ atikkamituṃ paṭipanne satte māretītimāro. Pāpe niyojeti, sayaṃ vā pāpe niyuttotipāpimā. Aññānipissa kaṇho, adhipati, vasavattī, antako, namuci, pamattabandhūtiādīni bahūni nāmāni, idha pana nāmadvayameva gahitaṃ.Upasaṅkamīti – ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo gotamo ‘muttosmī’ti maññati, amuttabhāvamassa kathessāmī’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami.

137. In the first of the Māra-saṃyutta, uruvelāyaṃ viharatī means having fully penetrated the knowledge of omniscience, he dwells depending on the village of Uruvelā. Paṭhamābhisambuddho means having become enlightened, in the very first seven days. Dukkarakārikāyā means by the arduous practices done for six years. Māro pāpimā—because he kills beings who are proceeding to transcend his domain, he is Māra. Because he employs them in evil, or because he himself is employed in evil, he is Pāpimā. Other names for him are Kaṇha, Adhipati, Vasavattī, Antaka, Namuci, Pamattabandhu, etc.; however, here only two names are taken. Upasaṅkamī means—thinking, "This ascetic Gotama thinks, 'I am liberated'; I will tell him of his non-liberated state," he approached.

Tapokammā apakkammāti tapokammato apakkamitvā.Aparaddhoti ‘‘dūre tvaṃ suddhimaggā’’ti vadati.Amaraṃ tapanti amaratapaṃ amarabhāvatthāya kataṃ lūkhatapaṃ, attakilamathānuyogo.Sabbānatthāvahaṃ hotīti, ‘‘sabbaṃ tapaṃ mayhaṃ atthāvahaṃ na bhavatī’’ti ñatvā.Phiyārittaṃva dhammanīti araññe thale phiyārittaṃ viya. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā araññe thale nāvaṃ ṭhapetvā bhaṇḍassa pūretvā mahājanā abhirūhitvā phiyārittaṃ gahetvā saṃkaḍḍheyyuṃ ceva uppīleyyuṃ ca, so mahājanassa vāyāmo ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattampi nāvāya gamanaṃ asādhento niratthako bhaveyya na anatthāvaho, evameva ahaṃ ‘sabbaṃ amaraṃ tapaṃ anatthāvahaṃ hotī’ti ñatvā vissajjesinti.

Tapokammā apakkammā means having withdrawn from ascetic practice. Aparaddho means he says, "You are far from the path of purity." Amaraṃ tapa means asceticism for the sake of the deathless state, harsh asceticism, indulgence in self-mortification. Sabbānatthāvahaṃ hotī means, having known that "all asceticism is not beneficial to me." Phiyārittaṃva dhammanī means like an empty boat on dry land in the forest. This is what is said: just as if, having placed a boat on dry land in the forest and filled it with goods, great crowds boarded it, and taking the phiyārittaṃ (a rope used to pull a boat), they dragged it and pushed it, that effort of the great crowd, not accomplishing even an inch or two of the boat's movement, would be useless, not beneficial, even so, I, having known that "all asceticism for the deathless state is not beneficial," abandoned it.

sīlantiādimāha. Tatthasīlanti vacanena sammāvācākammantājīvā gahitā,samādhināsammāvāyāmasatisamādhayo,paññāyasammādiṭṭhisaṅkappā.Maggaṃ bodhāya bhāvayanti imaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikameva ariyamaggaṃ bodhatthāya bhāvayanto. Ettha cabodhāyāti maggatthāya. Yathā hi yāgutthāya yāgumeva pacanti, pūvatthāya pūvameva pacanti, na aññaṃ kiñci karonti, evaṃ maggameva maggatthāya bhāveti. Tenāha ‘‘maggaṃ bodhāya bhāvaya’’nti.Paramaṃ suddhinti arahattaṃ.Nihatoti tvaṃ mayā nihato parājito. Paṭhamaṃ.

He said, beginning with virtue. There, sīla (virtue) is taken to mean right speech, action, and livelihood, samādhinā (concentration) right effort, mindfulness, and concentration, paññāya (wisdom) right view and intention. Maggaṃ bodhāya bhāvaya means cultivating this very eightfold Noble Path for the sake of enlightenment. Here, bodhāyā means for the sake of the path. Just as they cook gruel for the sake of gruel, they cook cakes for the sake of cakes, they do nothing else, so too, he cultivates the path for the sake of the path. Therefore he said, "Cultivate the path for the sake of enlightenment." Paramaṃ suddhi means arahantship. Nihato means you are struck down, defeated by me. The first.

2. Hatthirājavaṇṇasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Hatthirāja Vaṇṇa Sutta

138.Dutiyerattandhakāratimisāyanti rattiṃ andhabhāvakārake mahātame caturaṅge tamasi.Abbhokāse nisinno hotīti gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ pāsāṇaphalake mahācīvaraṃ sīse ṭhapetvā padhānaṃ pariggaṇhamāno nisinno hoti.

138. In the second, rattandhakāratimisāya means in the great darkness that causes blindness at night, in the fourfold darkness. Abbhokāse nisinno hotī means having come out of the Perfumed Chamber, he sits at the end of the promenade on a stone slab, determining the object of exertion, placing his great robe on his head.

Mahāti mahanto.Ariṭṭhakoti kāḷako.Maṇīti pāsāṇo.Evamassa sīsaṃ hotīti evarūpaṃ tassa kāḷavaṇṇaṃ kūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ mahāpāsāṇasadisaṃ sīsaṃ hoti.

Mahā means large. Ariṭṭhako means black crow. Maṇī means stone. Evamassa sīsaṃ hotī means such is his head, black in color, the size of a peaked house, like a great stone.

Subhāsubhanti dīghamaddhānaṃ saṃsaranto sundarāsundaraṃ vaṇṇaṃ katvā āgatosīti vadati. Atha vāsaṃsaranti saṃsaranto āgacchanto.Dīghamaddhānanti vasavattiṭṭhānato yāva uruvelāya dīghamaggaṃ, pure bodhāya vā chabbassāni dukkarakārikasamayasaṅkhātaṃ dīghakālaṃ.Vaṇṇaṃ katvā subhāsubhanti sundarañca asundarañca nānappakāraṃ vaṇṇaṃ katvā anekavāraṃ mama santikaṃ āgatosīti attho. So kira vaṇṇo nāma natthi, yena vaṇṇena māro vibhiṃsakatthāya bhagavato santikaṃ na āgatapubbo. Tena taṃ bhagavā evamāha.Alaṃ te tenāti alaṃ tuyhaṃ etena māravibhiṃsākāradassanabyāpārena. Dutiyaṃ.

Subhāsubha means he says, "Having wandered for a long time in saṃsāra, you have assumed beautiful and ugly forms." Or, saṃsara means wandering, coming. Dīghamaddhāna means a long way from the Vasavatti realm to Uruvelā, or previously for enlightenment, the long time designated as the period of six years of arduous practices. Vaṇṇaṃ katvā subhāsubha means having assumed beautiful and ugly forms of various kinds, you have come to my presence many times. It is said that there is no form by which Māra had not previously come to the Blessed One's presence to cause fright. Therefore, the Blessed One said this to him. Alaṃ te tenā means enough for you with that activity of showing the appearance of frightening Māra. The second.

3. Subhasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Subha Sutta Vaṇṇanā

139.Tatiyesusaṃvutāti supihitā.Na te māravasānugāti, māra, te tuyhaṃ vasānugā na honti.Na te mārassa baddhagūti te tuyhaṃ mārassa baddhacarā sissā antevāsikā na honti. Tatiyaṃ.

139. In the third, susaṃvutā means well-restrained. Na te māravasānugā means, Māra, they are not subject to your control. Na te mārassa baddhagū means they are not your bound wanderers, disciples, and pupils, Māra. The third.

4. Paṭhamamārapāsasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the First Māra-Pāsa Sutta

140.Catuttheyoniso manasikārāti upāyamanasikārena.Yoniso sammappadhānāti upāyavīriyena kāraṇavīriyena.Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ attanā vīriyaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patvāpi na tussati, idāni aññesampi ‘pāpuṇāthā’ti ussāhaṃ karoti, paṭibāhessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi.

140. In the fourth, yoniso manasikārā means by methodical attention. Yoniso sammappadhānā means by methodical effort, by causal effort. Vimuttī means the liberation of the fruit of arahantship. Ajjhabhāsī means thinking, "Even having attained arahantship by exerting himself, he is not content; now he encourages others too, saying, 'Attain it!' I will oppose him," he spoke.

Mārapāsenāti kilesapāsena.Ye dibbā ye ca mānusāti ye dibbā kāmaguṇasaṅkhātā mānusā kāmaguṇasaṅkhātā ca mārapāsā nāma atthi, sabbehi tehi tvaṃ baddhoti vadati.Mārabandhanabaddhoti mārabandhanena baddho, mārabandhane vā baddho.Na me samaṇa mokkhasīti samaṇa tvaṃ mama visayato na muccissasi. Catutthaṃ.

Mārapāsenā ti: With the snare of Māra, the defilements. Ye dibbā ye ca mānusā ti: Those divine, counted as objects of sensual pleasure, and those human, counted as objects of sensual pleasure—these are called the snares of Māra. He says, "You are bound by all of them." Mārabandhanabaddho ti: Bound by the bonds of Māra, or bound in the bonds of Māra. Na me samaṇa mokkhasī ti: "Ascetic, you will not escape from my domain." The fourth.

5. Dutiyamārapāsasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Second Mārapāsa Sutta

141.Pañcamemuttāhanti mutto ahaṃ. Purimaṃ suttaṃ antovasse vuttaṃ, idaṃ pana pavāretvā vuṭṭhavassakāle.Cārikanti anupubbagamanacārikaṃ. (Pavāretvā) divase divase yojanaparamaṃ gacchantā carathāti vadati.Mā ekena dveti ekamaggena dve janā mā agamittha. Evañhi gatesu ekasmiṃ dhammaṃ desente, ekena tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha.

141. In the fifth, muttāhaṃ ti: I am freed. The previous sutta was spoken during the rains retreat, but this one was spoken after the rains retreat, at the time of breaking the fast. Cārikaṃ ti: Wandering in due course. He says, "(Having broken the fast,) wander going a maximum of one yojana per day." Mā ekena dve ti: Do not two people go by one road. For if they go thus, when one is teaching the Dhamma, the other must remain silent. Therefore, he said this.

Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ sundaraṃ bhaddakaṃ. Tathā majjhapariyosānesu. Ādimajjhapariyosānañca nāmetaṃ sāsanassa ca desanāya ca vasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha sāsanassa sīlaṃ ādi, samathavipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhayo vā ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhivipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Desanāya pana catuppadikāya gāthāya tāva paṭhamapādo ādi, dutiyatatiyā majjhaṃ, catuttho pariyosānaṃ. Pañcapadachappadānaṃ paṭhamapādo ādi, avasānapādo pariyosānaṃ, avasesā majjhaṃ. Ekānusandhikasuttassa nidānaṃ ādi, ‘‘idamavocā’’ti pariyosānaṃ, sesaṃ majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa majjhe bahūpi anusandhi majjhameva, nidānaṃ ādi, ‘‘idamavocā’’ti pariyosānaṃ.

Ādikalyāṇaṃ ti: Beautiful, lovely, and auspicious in the beginning. Likewise, in the middle and at the end. And this beginning, middle, and end are twofold, according to the Dispensation and the teaching. Therein, for the Dispensation, morality is the beginning, samatha and vipassanā paths are the middle, and the fruits and Nibbāna are the end. Or, morality and concentration are the beginning, vipassanā paths are the middle, and the fruits and Nibbāna are the end. Or, morality, concentration, and vipassanā are the beginning, the path is the middle, and the fruits and Nibbāna are the end. But for the teaching, in a four-line verse, the first line is the beginning, the second and third are the middle, and the fourth is the end. For verses of five or six lines, the first line is the beginning, the last line is the end, and the rest is the middle. For a sutta with a single connection, the introduction is the beginning, "idamavocā" is the end, and the rest is the middle. For a sutta with multiple connections, even many connections in the middle are the middle, the introduction is the beginning, and "idamavocā" is the end.

Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desetha.Sabyañjananti byañjanehi ceva padehi ca paripūraṃ katvā desetha.Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ.Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ.Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ.Pakāsethāti āvikarotha.

Sātthaṃ ti: Teach it making it meaningful. Sabyañjanaṃ ti: Teach it making it complete with both expressions and words. Kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ ti: Completely perfect in every way. Parisuddhaṃ ti: Without defilement. Brahmacariyaṃ ti: The monastic life, encompassing the three trainings, the sāsana brahmacariya. Pakāsethā ti: Make manifest.

Apparajakkhajātikāti paññācakkhumhi appakilesarajasabhāvā, dukūlasāṇiyā paṭicchannā viya catuppadikagāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthā santīti attho.Assavanatāti assavanatāya.Parihāyantīti alābhaparihāniyā dhammato parihāyanti.Senānigamoti paṭhamakappikānaṃ senāya niviṭṭhokāse patiṭṭhitagāmo, sujātāya vā pitu senānī nāma nigamo.Tenupasaṅkamissāmīti nāhaṃ tumhe uyyojetvā pariveṇādīni kāretvā upaṭṭhākādīhi paricariyamāno viharissāmi, tiṇṇaṃ pana jaṭilānaṃ aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni dassetvā dhammameva desetuṃ upasaṅkamissāmīti.Tenupasaṅkamīti, ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo gotamo mahāyuddhaṃ vicārento viya, ‘mā ekena dve agamittha, dhammaṃ desethā’ti saṭṭhi jane uyyojeti, imasmiṃ pana ekasmimpi dhammaṃ desente mayhaṃ cittassādaṃ natthi, evaṃ bahūsu desentesu kuto bhavissati, paṭibāhāmi na’’nti cintetvā upasaṅkami. Pañcamaṃ.

Apparajakkhajātikā ti: Those of little dust of defilements in the eye of wisdom, like those covered by fine linen, are able to attain arahatta at the end of a four-line verse, is the meaning. Assavanatā ti: Because of not listening. Parihāyantī ti: They decline from the Dhamma due to decline of gain. Senānigamo ti: A village established in a place settled by an army from the first cycle, or a village named Senānī after Sujātā's father, the commander. Tenupasaṅkamissāmī ti: I will not live being served by attendants after sending you forth and having monasteries and the like built; rather, I will approach to teach the Dhamma itself after showing half a thousand miracles to each of the three ascetics. Tenupasaṅkamī ti: Thinking, "This ascetic Gotama, as if considering a great battle, sends forth sixty people, saying, 'Do not two go by one road, teach the Dhamma.' But even when teaching the Dhamma to this one, there is no taste for my mind; how will it be when teaching to many? I will defeat him," he approached. The fifth.

6. Sappasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Sappa Sutta

142.Chaṭṭhesoṇḍikākilañjanti surākārakānaṃ piṭṭhapattharaṇakakilañjaṃ.Kosalikā kaṃsapātīti kosalarañño rathacakkappamāṇā paribhogapāti.Gaḷagaḷāyanteti gajjante.Kammāragaggariyāti kammāruddhanapaṇāḷiyā.Dhamamānāyāti bhastavātena pūriyamānāya.Iti viditvāti – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo padhānamanuyutto sukhena nisinno, ghaṭṭayissāmi na’’nti vuttappakāraṃ attabhāvaṃ māpetvā niyāmabhūmiyaṃ ito cito ca sañcarantaṃ vijjulatālokena disvā, ‘‘ko nu kho eso satto’’ti? Āvajjento, ‘‘māro aya’’nti evaṃ viditvā.

142. In the sixth, soṇḍikākilañjaṃ ti: The stain of mash spread out by brewers. Kosalikā kaṃsapātī ti: A bowl for use the size of the wheel of a chariot of the Kosala king. Gaḷagaḷāyante ti: Roaring. Kammāragaggariyā ti: From the blacksmith's bellows. Dhamamānāyā ti: Being filled by the wind of the bellows. Iti viditvā ti: Having made the appearance previously described, thinking, "The ascetic Gotama is engaged in striving, sitting comfortably; I will disturb him," and seeing him wandering here and there in the fixed place by the light of lightning, he wondered, "Who is this being?" Considering, "This is Māra," thus knowing.

Suññagehānīti suññāgārāni.Seyyāti seyyatthāya. Ṭhassāmi caṅkamissāmi nisīdissāmi nipajjissāmīti etadatthāya yo suññāgārāni sevatīti attho.So muni attasaññatoti so buddhamuni hatthapādakukkuccābhāvena saṃyatattabhāvo.Vossajja careyya tattha soti so tasmiṃ attabhāve ālayaṃ nikantiṃ vossajjitvā pahāya careyya.Patirūpaṃ hi tathāvidhassa tanti tādisassa taṃsaṇṭhitassa buddhamunino taṃ attabhāve nikantiṃ vossajjitvā caraṇaṃ nāma patirūpaṃ yuttaṃ anucchavikaṃ.

Suññagehānī ti: Empty houses. Seyyā ti: For the sake of lying down. Meaning, he frequents empty houses for the purpose of standing, walking, sitting, and lying down. So muni attasaññato ti: That Buddha, a sage, with self-restraint due to the absence of hand and foot fidgeting. Vossajja careyya tattha so ti: He should give up attachment and craving in that existence and wander. Patirūpaṃ hi tathāvidhassa taṃ ti: For such a one, for that Buddha-sage of that constitution, giving up craving in that existence and wandering is fitting, suitable.

Carakāti sīhabyagghādikā sañcaraṇasattā.Bheravāti saviññāṇakaaviññāṇakabheravā. Tattha saviññāṇakā sīhabyagghādayo, aviññāṇakā rattibhāge khāṇuvammikādayo. Tepi hi tasmiṃ kāle yakkhā viya upaṭṭhahanti, rajjuvalliyādīni sabbāni sappā viya upaṭṭhahanti.Tatthāti tesu bheravesu suññāgāragato buddhamuni lomacalanamattakampi na karoti.

Carakā ti: Wandering beings such as lions and tigers. Bheravā ti: Terrors, both with consciousness and without consciousness. Therein, those with consciousness are lions, tigers, and the like; those without consciousness are stumps, anthills, and the like at night. For they appear like spirits at that time, and all ropes, vines, and the like appear like snakes. Tattha ti: In those terrors, the Buddha, a sage, in an empty house does not make even the slightest movement of hair.

nabhaṃ phaleyyātiādimāha. Tatthaphaleyyāti kākapadaṃ viya hīrahīraso phaleyya.Caleyyāti pokkharapatte vātāhato udakabindu viya caleyya.Sallampi ce urasi pakappayeyyunti tikhiṇasattisallaṃ cepi urasmiṃ cāreyeyyuṃ.Upadhīsūti khandhūpadhīsu.Tāṇaṃ na karontīti tikhiṇe salle urasmiṃ cāriyamāne bhayena gumbantarakandarādīni pavisantā tāṇaṃ karonti nāma. Buddhā pana samucchinnasabbabhayā evarūpaṃ tāṇaṃ nāma na karonti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

nabhaṃ phaleyyā ti: He began with that. Therein, phaleyyā ti: It would split like the footprint of a crow, hīrahīraso would split. Caleyyā ti: It would tremble like a drop of water struck by the wind on a lotus leaf. Sallampi ce urasi pakappayeyyuṃ ti: Even if they were to drive a sharp spear into his chest. Upadhīsū ti: In the aggregates of existence. Tāṇaṃ na karontī ti: They do not make protection by entering into caves and thickets out of fear when a sharp spear is being driven into their chest. But Buddhas, having completely eradicated all fear, do not make such protection. The sixth.

7. Supatisuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Supati Sutta

143.Sattamepāde pakkhāletvāti utugāhāpanatthaṃ dhovitvā. Buddhānaṃ pana sarīre rajojallaṃ na upalimpati, udakampi pokkharapatte pakkhittaṃ viya vivaṭṭitvā gacchati. Apica kho dhotapādake gehe pāde dhovitvā pavisanaṃ pabbajitānaṃ vattaṃ. Tattha buddhānaṃ vattabhedo nāma natthi, vattasīse pana ṭhatvā dhovanti. Sace hi tathāgato neva nhāyeyya, na pāde dhoveyya, ‘‘nāyaṃ manusso’’ti vadeyyuṃ. Tasmā manussakiriyaṃ amuñcanto dhovati.Sato sampajānoti soppapariggāhakena satisampajaññena samannāgato.Upasaṅkamīti samaṇo gotamo sabbarattiṃ abbhokāse caṅkamitvā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā niddāyati, ativiya sukhasayito bhavissati, ghaṭṭayissāmi nanti cintetvā upasaṅkami.

143. In the seventh, pāde pakkhāletvā ti: Having washed them for the purpose of receiving a guest. But dirt and grime do not stick to the bodies of Buddhas, and water departs, having been thrown on them, like water thrown on a lotus leaf. Moreover, washing feet and entering a house is the duty of renunciants. Therein, there is no difference in duty for Buddhas, but they wash while standing at the head of the duties. For if the Tathāgata were neither to bathe nor to wash his feet, they would say, "This is not a human being." Therefore, not abandoning human action, he washes. Sato sampajāno ti: Endowed with mindfulness and clear comprehension as a taker of ointments. Upasaṅkamī ti: Thinking, "The ascetic Gotama, having walked in the open air all night, enters the Perfumed Chamber and sleeps; he will be sleeping very comfortably, I will disturb him," he approached.

Kiṃ soppasīti kiṃ supasi, kiṃ soppaṃ nāmidaṃ tavāti vadati.Kiṃ nu soppasīti kasmā nu supasi?Dubbhago viyāti mato viya, visaññī viya ca.Suññamagāranti suññaṃ me gharaṃ laddhanti soppasīti vadati.Sūriye uggateti sūriyamhi uṭṭhite. Idāni hi aññe bhikkhū sammajjanti, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, bhikkhācāragamanasajjā bhavanti, tvaṃ kasmā soppasiyeva.

Kiṃ soppasī ti: Why do you sleep? What is this sleeping of yours? he says. Kiṃ nu soppasī ti: Why do you sleep? Dubbhago viyā ti: Like one dead, and like one unconscious. Suññamagāraṃ ti: He says, "Having obtained an empty house, I sleep." Sūriye uggate ti: When the sun has risen. For now other monks are sweeping, preparing drinking water, and getting ready to go for alms; why do you just sleep?

Jālinīti tayo bhave ajjhottharitvā ṭhitena ‘‘ajjhattikassupādāya aṭṭhārasataṇhāvicaritānī’’tiādinā (vibha. 842) tena tena attano koṭṭhāsabhūtena jālena jālinī.Visattikāti rūpādīsu tattha tattha visattatāya visamūlatāya visaparibhogatāya ca visattikā.Kuhiñci netaveti katthaci netuṃ.Sabbūpadhi parikkhayāti sabbesaṃ khandhakilesābhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇabhedānaṃ upadhīnaṃ parikkhayā.Kiṃ tavettha, mārāti, māra, tuyhaṃ kiṃ ettha? Kasmā tvaṃ uṇhayāguyaṃ nilīyituṃ asakkontī khuddakamakkhikā viya antanteneva ujjhāyanto āhiṇḍasīti. Sattamaṃ.

Jālinī ti: She has a net (jāla) which, having covered over the three existences, is her own portion, beginning with "the eighteen-hundred cravings are the wanderings of the internal clinging" (vibha. 842). Visattikā ti: She is Visattikā because of clinging here and there in forms, etc., because of being the root of poison, and because of partaking of poison. Kuhiñci netave ti: To lead anywhere. Sabbūpadhi parikkhayā ti: Because of the destruction of all the substrata of existence, which are the aggregates, defilements, volitional formations, and kinds of sensual pleasure. Kiṃ tavettha, mārā ti: Māra, what is yours here? Why do you wander around muttering to yourself like a small fly unable to hide in a hot gruel? The seventh.

8. Nandatisuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Nandati Sutta

144.Aṭṭhamaṃ devatāsaṃyutte vuttatthameva. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

144. The eighth has the same meaning as stated in the Devatā Saṃyutta. The eighth.

9. Paṭhamaāyusuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the First Āyu Sutta

145.Navameappaṃ vā bhiyyoti bhiyyo jīvanto aparaṃ vassasataṃ jīvituṃ na sakkoti, paṇṇāsaṃ vā saṭṭhi vā vassāni jīvati.Ajjhabhāsīti samaṇo gotamo ‘‘manussānaṃ appamāyū’’ti katheti, dīghabhāvamassa kathessāmīti paccanīkasātatāya abhibhavitvā abhāsi.

145. In the ninth, appaṃ vā bhiyyo ti: Whether living a long life, he cannot live another hundred years; he lives fifty or sixty years. Ajjhabhāsī ti: The ascetic Gotama says, "The life of humans is short"; thinking, "I will tell of its length," he addressed him, overwhelming him with the opposite assertion.

Nanaṃ hīḷeti taṃ āyuṃ ‘‘appakamida’’nti na hīḷeyya.Khīramatto vāti yathā daharo kumāro uttānaseyyako khīraṃ pivitvā dukūlacumbaṭake nipanno asaññī viya niddāyati, kassaci āyuṃ appaṃ vā dīghaṃ vāti na cinteti, evaṃ sappuriso.Careyyādittasīso vāti āyuṃ parittanti ñatvā pajjalitasīso viya careyya. Navamaṃ.

Na naṃ hīḷe ti: One should not despise that life, thinking, "This is short." Khīramatto vā ti: Just as a young child lying on its back, having drunk milk, lies asleep on a soft blanket, unconscious, not thinking whether someone's life is short or long, so is a good person. Careyyādittasīso vā ti: Knowing life to be limited, one should live as if one's head were on fire. The ninth.

10. Dutiyaāyusuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Second Āyu Sutta

146.Dasamenemīva rathakubbaranti yathā divasaṃ gacchantassa rathassa cakkanemi kubbaraṃ anupariyāyati na vijahati, evaṃ āyu anupariyāyatīti. Dasamaṃ.

146. In the tenth, nemīva rathakubbaraṃ ti: Just as the rim of a wheel goes around the axle of a chariot going during the day and does not leave it, so life goes around and around. The tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

The first chapter.

2. Dutiyavaggo

2. The Second Chapter

1. Pāsāṇasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Pāsāṇa Sutta

147.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamenisinnoti pubbe vuttanayeneva padhānaṃ pariggaṇhanto nisinno. Māropissa sukhanisinnabhāvaṃ ñatvā ghaṭṭayissāmīti upasaṅkamanto.Padālesīti pabbatapiṭṭhe ṭhatvā pavijjhi. Pāsāṇā nirantarā aññamaññaṃ abhihanantā patanti.Kevalanti sakalaṃ.Sabbanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ.

147. In the first of the second chapter, nisinno ti: Sitting, embracing striving in the way previously stated. Māra also, knowing his comfortable sitting, approaching thinking, "I will disturb him." Padālesī ti: Standing on the mountain top, he hurled them down. The stones fell continuously, striking each other. Kevalaṃ ti: Entire. Sabbaṃ ti: A synonym of that. The first.

2. Kinnusīhasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Kinnusīha Sutta

148.Dutiyevicakkhukammāyāti parisāya paññācakkhuṃ vināsetukamyatāya. Buddhānaṃ panesa paññācakkhuṃ vināsetuṃ na sakkoti, parisāya bheravārammaṇaṃ sāvento vā dassento vā sakkoti.Vijitāvī nu maññasīti kiṃ nu tvaṃ ‘‘vijitavijayo aha’’nti maññasi? Mā evaṃ maññi, natthi te jayo.Parisāsūti, aṭṭhasu parisāsu.Balappattāti dasabalappattā. Dutiyaṃ.

148. In the second, vicakkhukammāyā ti: With the desire to destroy the eye of wisdom of the assembly. But he is not able to destroy the eye of wisdom of the Buddhas; he is able to cause or show a terrifying object to the assembly. Vijitāvī nu maññasī ti: Do you think, "I am a conqueror in victory"? Do not think thus; there is no victory for you. Parisāsū ti: In the eight assemblies. Balappattā ti: Having attained the ten powers. The second.

3. Sakalikasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Sakalika Sutta

149.Tatiyemandiyā nūti mandabhāvena momūhabhāvena.Udāhu kāveyyamattoti udāhu yathā kavi kabbaṃ cintento tena kabbakaraṇena matto sayati, evaṃ sayasi.Sampacurāti bahavo.Kimidaṃ soppase vāti kasmā idaṃ soppaṃ soppasiyeva?Atthaṃ sameccāti atthaṃ samāgantvā pāpuṇitvā. Mayhaṃ hi asaṅgaho nāma saṅgahavipanno vā attho natthi.Sallanti tikhiṇaṃ sattisallaṃ.Jaggaṃ na saṅketi yathā ekacco sīhapathādīsu jagganto saṅkati, tathā ahaṃ jaggantopi na saṅkāmi.Napi bhemi sottunti yathā ekacco sīhapathādīsuyeva supituṃ bhāyati, evaṃ ahaṃ supitumpi na bhāyāmi.Nānutapanti māmanti yathā ācariyassa vā antevāsikassa vā aphāsuke jāte uddesaparipucchāya ṭhitattā antevāsiṃ rattindivā atikkamantā anutapanti, evaṃ maṃ nānutapanti. Na hi mayhaṃ kiñci apariniṭṭhitakammaṃ nāma atthi. Tenevāhahāniṃ na passāmi kuhiñci loketi. Tatiyaṃ.

149. In the third, mandiyā nū ti: Because of dullness, because of delusion. Udāhu kāveyyamatto ti: Or perhaps, just as a poet lies down drunk from making poetry, so you lie down. Sampacurā ti: Many. Kimidaṃ soppase vā ti: Why is this sleep, just sleeping? Atthaṃ sameccā ti: Having attained and reached the goal. For I have no goal called non-gathering or destroyed by gathering. Sallaṃ ti: A sharp spear. Jaggaṃ na saṅke ti: Just as one keeping watch in a lion's path and the like is apprehensive, so even keeping watch, I am not apprehensive. Napi bhemi sottuṃ ti: Just as one is afraid to sleep in a lion's path and the like, so I am not afraid even to sleep. Nānutapanti māmaṃ ti: Just as when discomfort arises for a teacher or a student, the students regret the passing of the days and nights because they are standing for learning and questioning, so they do not regret me. For I have nothing called unfinished business. Therefore, he said, hāniṃ na passāmi kuhiñci loke ti: I see no loss anywhere in the world. The third.

4. Patirūpasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Patirūpa Sutta

150.Catuttheanurodhavirodhesūti rāgapaṭighesu.Mā sajjittho tadācaranti evaṃ dhammakathaṃ ācaranto mā laggi. Dhammakathaṃ kathentassa hi ekacce sādhukāraṃ dadanti, tesu rāgo uppajjati. Ekacce asakkaccaṃ suṇanti, tesu paṭigho uppajjati. Iti dhammakathiko anurodhavirodhesu sajjati nāma. Tvaṃ evaṃ mā sajjitthoti vadati.Yadaññamanusāsatīti yaṃ aññaṃ anusāsati, taṃ. Sambuddho hitānukampī hitena anupakampati. Yasmā ca hitānukampī, tasmā anurodhavirodhehi vippamutto tathāgatoti. Catutthaṃ.

150. In the fourth, anurodhavirodhesu ti: In likes and dislikes. Mā sajjittho tadācaraṃ ti: Do not cling while practicing the Dhamma talk in that way. For when one gives a Dhamma talk, some give approval, and in them, liking arises. Some listen disrespectfully, and in them, aversion arises. Thus, the Dhamma speaker clings to likes and dislikes. He says, "Do not cling thus." Yadaññamanusāsatī ti: That which instructs another. The Buddha is compassionate for welfare, he is compassionate with welfare. And because he is compassionate for welfare, therefore, the Tathāgata is freed from likes and dislikes. The fourth.

5. Mānasasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Mānasa Sutta

151.Pañcame ākāse carantepi bandhatītiantalikkhacaro. Pāsoti rāgapāso.Mānasoti manasampayutto. Pañcamaṃ.

151. In the fifth, even one who travels in the sky binds, therefore, antalikkhacaro. Pāso ti: The snare of lust. Mānaso ti: Connected with the mind. The fifth.

6. Pattasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Patta Sutta

152.Chaṭṭhepañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ upādāyāti pañca upādānakkhandhe ādiyitvā, sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇavasena nānappakārato vibhajitvā dassento.Sandassetīti khandhānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇādīni dasseti.Samādapetīti gaṇhāpeti.Samuttejetīti samādānamhi ussāhaṃ janeti.Sampahaṃsetīti paṭividdhaguṇena vodāpeti jotāpeti.Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti atthikaṃ katvā, ‘‘ayaṃ no adhigantabbo attho’’ti evaṃ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā.Manasi katvāti citte ṭhapetvā.Sabbacetaso samannāharitvāti sabbena tena kammakārakacittena samannāharitvā.Ohitasotāti ṭhapitāsotā.Abbhokāse nikkhittāti otāpanatthāya ṭhapitā.

152. In the sixth, upādāya of the five aggregates subject to clinging means having taken up, having grasped the five aggregates subject to clinging, showing them by distinguishing them in various ways according to the characteristic of shared nature. Shows means shows the intrinsic characteristics and so on of the aggregates. Induces means causes to grasp. Encourages means generates enthusiasm in taking them up. Gladdens means purifies and illuminates with the quality of penetration. Having made it a matter of concern means having made it important, thinking, "This meaning must be attained by us," thus becoming concerned with that teaching. Having applied the mind means having placed it in the heart. Having brought it together with all one's heart means having brought it together with all that working mind. With attentive ears means with ears set in place. Placed in an open space means placed for the purpose of illumination.

Rūpaṃ vedayitaṃ saññānti, ete rūpādayo tayo khandhā.Yañca saṅkhatanti iminā saṅkhārakkhandho gahito.Evaṃ tattha virajjatīti ‘‘eso ahaṃ na homi, etaṃ mayhaṃ na hotī’’ti passanto evaṃ tesu khandhesu virajjati.Khemattanti khemībhūtaṃ attabhāvaṃ. Iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti.Anvesanti bhavayonigatiṭhitisattāvāsasaṅkhātesu sabbaṭṭhānesu pariyesamānā.Nājjhagāti na passīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Form, feeling, perception—these three, form, etc., are the aggregates. And whatever is conditioned—with this, the aggregate of mental formations is taken. Thus one becomes dispassionate there—seeing "I am not this, this is not mine," thus one becomes dispassionate towards those aggregates. Safety means an existence that has become safe. With this, he shows the characteristic of the fruit. Searching means searching in all places enumerated as existences, wombs, destinations, abodes, and dwelling places of beings. Did not find means did not see. The sixth.

7. Chaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Six Sense Bases Sutta

153.Sattamephassāyatanānanti sañjātisamosaraṇaṭṭhena chadvārikassa phassassa āyatanānaṃ.Bhayabheravaṃ saddanti meghadundubhiasanipātasaddasadisaṃ bhayajanakaṃ saddaṃ.Pathavī maññe undrīyatīti ayaṃ mahāpathavī paṭapaṭasaddaṃ kurumānā viya ahosi.Ettha loko vimucchitoti etesu chasu ārammaṇesu loko adhimucchito.Māradheyyanti mārassa ṭhānabhūtaṃ tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Sattamaṃ.

153. In the seventh, sense bases of contact means the bases of contact of the six doors, in the sense of origin and confluence. Fearful and terrifying sound means a fear-producing sound like the sound of thunderclouds, kettledrums, or lightning strikes. I think the earth is groaning means this great earth was as if making a cracking sound. Here the world is deeply attached means the world is deeply attached to these six objects. The realm of Māra means the triple world cycle, which is the domain of Māra. The seventh.

8. Piṇḍasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Alms Sutta

154.Aṭṭhamepāhunakāni bhavantīti tathārūpe nakkhatte tattha tattha pesetabbāni pāhunakāni bhavanti, āgantukapaṇṇākāradānāni vā. Sayaṃcaraṇadivase samavayajātigottā kumārakā tato tato sannipatanti. Kumārikāyopi attano attano vibhavānurūpena alaṅkatā tahaṃ tahaṃ vicaranti. Tatra kumārikāyopi yathārucikānaṃ kumārakānaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesenti, kumārakāpi kumārikānaṃ aññasmiṃ asati antamaso mālāguḷenapi parikkhipanti.Anvāviṭṭhāti anu āviṭṭhā. Taṃdivasaṃ kira pañcasatā kumārikāyo uyyānakīḷaṃ gacchantiyo paṭipathe satthāraṃ disvā chaṇapūvaṃ dadeyyuṃ. Satthā tāsaṃ dānānumodanatthaṃ pakiṇṇakadhammadesanaṃ deseyya, desanāpariyosāne sabbāpi sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhaheyyuṃ. Māro tāsaṃ sampattiyā antarāyaṃ karissāmīti anvāvisi. Pāḷiyaṃ panamā samaṇo gotamo piṇḍamalatthāti ettakaṃyeva vuttanti.

154. In the eighth, gifts are given means gifts to be sent here and there are given at such a festival, or gifts of tribute for visitors. On the day of the festival, young men of the same clan and lineage gather from here and there. Young women also, adorned according to their means, wander here and there. There, young women send tribute to the young men they like, and the young men surround the young women with at least a garland, if nothing else is available. Invaded means entered into. It is said that on that day, five hundred young women, going to a pleasure garden, saw the Teacher on the road and offered festival cakes. The Teacher would give a miscellaneous Dhamma talk to encourage their giving, and at the end of the talk, all would be established in the fruit of stream-entry. Māra invaded, thinking, "I will cause an obstruction to their attainment." However, in the Pali, it is said only 'May the ascetic Gotama not obtain alms'.

Kiṃ pana satthā mārāvaṭṭanaṃ ajānitvā paviṭṭhoti? Āma ajānitvā. Kasmā? Anāvajjanatāya. Buddhānañhi – ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne bhattaṃ labhissāma, na labhissāmā’’ti āvajjanaṃ na ananucchavikaṃ. Paviṭṭho pana manussānaṃ upacārabhedaṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti? Āvajjento ñatvā, ‘‘āmisatthaṃ mārāvaṭṭanaṃ bhindituṃ ananucchavika’’nti abhinditvāva nikkhanto.

But did the Teacher enter without knowing Māra's influence? Yes, without knowing. Why? Because of not considering. For Buddhas, considering—"In such a place, we will obtain food, we will not obtain it"—is not appropriate. But having entered and seeing the variety of people's behavior, considering, "What is this?" and knowing, "It is not appropriate to break Māra's influence for the sake of food," he left without breaking it.

Upasaṅkamīti amittavijayena viya tuṭṭho sakalagāme kaṭacchumattampi bhattaṃ alabhitvā gāmato nikkhamantaṃ bhagavantaṃ gāmiyamanussavesena upasaṅkami.Tathāhaṃ karissāmīti idaṃ so musā bhāsati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mayā evaṃ vutte puna pavisissati, atha naṃ gāmadārakā ‘sakalagāme caritvā kaṭacchubhikkhampi alabhitvā gāmato nikkhamma puna paviṭṭhosī’tiādīni vatvā uppaṇḍessantī’’ti. Bhagavā pana – ‘‘sacāyaṃ maṃ evaṃ viheṭhessati muddhamasseva sattadhā phalissatī’’ti tasmiṃ anukampāya apavisitvā gāthādvayamāha.

Approached means, as if pleased by the victory over an enemy, he approached the Blessed One with the words of a villager, as the Blessed One was leaving the village without obtaining even a spoonful of food in the entire village. Thus I will do—this he speaks falsely. For thus it occurred to him: "If I say this, he will enter again, then the village boys will mock him, saying, 'Having wandered through the entire village and not obtaining even a spoonful of alms, you have entered again,' and so on." But the Blessed One, thinking, "If he harasses me thus, his head will split into seven pieces," out of compassion for him, not entering, spoke these two verses.

pasavīti janesi nipphādesi.Āsajjāti āsādetvā ghaṭṭetvā.Na me pāpaṃ vipaccatīti mama pāpaṃ na paccati.Nipphalaṃ etanti kiṃ nu tvaṃ evaṃ maññasi? Mā evaṃ maññi, atthi tayā katassa pāpassa phalanti dīpeti.Kiñcananti maddituṃ samatthaṃ rāgakiñcanādi kilesajātaṃ.Ābhassarā yathāti yathā ābhassarā devā sappītikajjhānena yāpentā pītibhakkhā nāma honti, evaṃ bhavissāmāti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Begets means generates, produces. Having contacted means having encountered, having collided. Evil does not ripen for me means evil does not mature for me. This is fruitless—what, do you think thus? Do not think thus; he shows that there is a result of the evil done by you. Attachment means the mass of defilements such as lustful attachment, capable of crushing. Like the Ābhassara means just as the Ābhassara gods, living with sustained joy, are said to be nourished by joy, so we will become. The eighth.

9. Kassakasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Ploughman Sutta

155.Navamenibbānapaṭisaṃyuttāyāti nibbānaṃ apadisitvā pavattāya.Haṭahaṭakesoti purimakese pacchato, pacchimakese purato vāmapassakese dakkhiṇato, dakkhiṇapassakese vāmato pharitvā pharitvā vippakiṇṇakeso.Mama cakkhusamphassaviññāṇāyatananti cakkhuviññāṇena sampayutto cakkhusamphassopi viññāṇāyatanampi mamevāti. Ettha ca cakkhusamphassena viññāṇasampayuttakā dhammā gahitā, viññāṇāyatanena sabbānipi cakkhudvāre uppannāni āvajjanādiviññāṇāni. Sotadvārādīsupi eseva nayo. Manodvāre panamanoti sāvajjanakaṃ bhavaṅgacittaṃ.Dhammāti ārammaṇadhammā.Manosamphassoti sāvajjanena bhavaṅgena sampayuttaphasso.Viññāṇāyatananti javanacittaṃ tadārammaṇampi vaṭṭati.

155. In the ninth, connected with Nibbāna means proceeding with Nibbāna as its referent. With disheveled hair means with his hair scattered, having spread the front hairs to the back, or the back hairs to the front, the left side hairs to the right, the right side hairs to the left. My eye-contact consciousness base means both the eye-contact associated with eye-consciousness and the consciousness base are mine. And here, with eye-contact, the mental states associated with consciousness are taken, and with the consciousness base, all consciousnesses arising at the eye-door, such as attention, are taken. The same method applies to the ear-door, etc. But at the mind-door, mind means the subconscious mind with attention. Objects means object-states. Mind-contact means contact associated with the subconscious with attention. Consciousness base means the impulsion consciousness and its object are applicable.

Taveva pāpima, cakkhūti yaṃ loke timirakācādīhi upaddutaṃ anekarogāyatanaṃ upakkavipakkaṃ antamaso kāṇacakkhupi, sabbaṃ taṃ taveva bhavatu. Rūpādīsupi eseva nayo.

Yours, Evil One, is the eye means whatever in the world is afflicted by cataracts and other diseases, a source of many diseases, subject to decay and change, even a blind eye, let all that be yours. The same method applies to forms, etc.

Yaṃ vadantīti yaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ ‘‘mama ida’’nti vadanti.Ye vadanti mamanti cāti ye ca puggalā ‘‘mama’’nti vadanti.Ettha ce te mano atthīti etesu ca ṭhānesu yadi cittaṃ atthi.Na me samaṇa mokkhasīti samaṇa mayhaṃ visayato na muccissasi.Yaṃ vadantīti yaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ vadanti, na taṃ mayhaṃ.Ye vadantīti yepi puggalā evaṃ vadanti, na te ahaṃ.Na me maggampi dakkhasīti bhavayonigatiādīsu mayhaṃ gatamaggampi na passasi. Navamaṃ.

What they call means what possessions they call "this is mine." Those who say 'mine' means and those persons who say "mine." If mind exists in these means and if mind exists in these places. You will not escape me, ascetic means ascetic, you will not escape from my domain. What they call means what possessions they call, are not mine. Those who say means and those persons who say thus, I am not they. You will not see my path either means you will not see even the path gone by me in existences, wombs, destinations, etc. The ninth.

10. Rajjasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Kingdom Sutta

156.Dasameahanaṃ aghātayanti ahanantena aghātayantena.Ajinaṃ ajāpayanti parassa dhanajāniṃ akarontena akārāpentena.Asocaṃ asocāpayanti asocantena asocāpayantena. Iti bhagavā adhammikarājūnaṃ rajje vijite daṇḍakarapīḷite manusse disvā kāruññavasena evaṃ cintesi.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo ‘sakkā nu kho rajjaṃ kāretu’nti cintesi, rajjaṃ kāretukāmo bhavissati, rajjañca nāmetaṃ pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, rajjaṃ kārente sakkā otāraṃ labhituṃ, gacchāmi ussāhamassa janessāmī’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami.Iddhipādāti ijjhanakakoṭṭhāsā.Bhāvitāti vaḍḍhitā.Bahulīkatāti punappunaṃ katā.Yānīkatāti yuttayānaṃ viya katā.Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhaṭṭhenavatthukatā.Anuṭṭhitāti avijahitā niccānubaddhā.Paricitāti sātaccakiriyāya suparicitā katā issāsassa avirādhitavedhihattho viya.Susamāraddhāti suṭṭhu samāraddhā paripuṇṇabhāvanā.Adhimucceyyāti cinteyya.

156. In the tenth, not slaying, not causing to slay means not slaying with a weapon, not causing to slay. Not conquering, not causing to conquer means not causing the loss of another's wealth, not causing it to be done. Not grieving, not causing to grieve means not grieving, not causing to grieve. Thus, seeing the people oppressed by punishment and taxes in the kingdom of unjust kings, the Blessed One thought thus out of compassion. Approached means thinking, "The ascetic Gotama is thinking, 'Is it possible to rule a kingdom?' He will desire to rule a kingdom, and ruling a kingdom is a place of negligence. While ruling a kingdom, it is possible to find an opportunity. I will go and generate enthusiasm in him," he approached. Bases of power means components of success. Developed means cultivated. Made much of means repeatedly done. Made a vehicle means made like a yoked vehicle. Made a foundation means made a foundation in the sense of establishment. Not neglected means not abandoned, constantly pursued. Familiar means made very familiar by continuous action, like the unerring hand of an archer. Well begun means well begun, perfected development. Should resolve means should think.

Pabbatassāti pabbato bhaveyya.Dvittāvāti tiṭṭhatu eko pabbato, dvikkhattumpi tāva mahanto suvaṇṇapabbato ekassa nālaṃ, na pariyattoti attho.Iti vidvā samañcareti evaṃ jānanto samaṃ careyya.Yatonidānanti dukkhaṃ nāma pañcakāmaguṇanidānaṃ, taṃ yatonidānaṃ hoti, evaṃ yo adakkhi.Kathaṃ nameyyāti so jantu tesu dukkhassa nidānabhūtesu kāmesu kena kāraṇena nameyya.Upadhiṃ viditvāti kāmaguṇaupadhiṃ ‘‘saṅgo eso, lagganameta’’nti evaṃ viditvā.Tasseva jantu vinayāya sikkheti tasseva upadhissa vinayāya sikkheyya. Dasamaṃ.

Of a mountain means there might be a mountain. Even two means let one mountain remain, even a great golden mountain twice as large is not enough for one, it is not sufficient, is the meaning. Knowing thus, one should live justly means knowing thus, one should live equally. Whatever the source means suffering is rooted in the five strands of sense pleasure; he who has seen that this is the source of suffering. How should he incline means by what reason should that being incline to those sense pleasures which are the source of suffering? Knowing the attachment means knowing the attachment of sense pleasures as "this is clinging, this is attachment." For the sake of its abandoning, a being should train means for the sake of abandoning that very attachment, one should train. The tenth.

Dutiyo vaggo.

The second chapter.

3. Tatiyavaggo

3. The Third Chapter

1. Sambahulasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Sambahula Sutta

157.Tatiyavaggassa paṭhamejaṭaṇḍuvenāti jaṭācumbaṭakena.Ajinakkhipanivatthoti sakhuraṃ ajinacammaṃ ekaṃ nivattho ekaṃ pāruto.Udumbaradaṇḍanti appicchabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ īsakaṃ vaṅkaṃ udumbaradaṇḍaṃ gahetvā.Etadavocāti loke brāhmaṇassa vacanaṃ nāma sussūsanti, brāhmaṇesupi pabbajitassa, pabbajitesupi mahallakassāti mahallakabrāhmaṇassa pabbajitavesaṃ gahetvā padhānabhūmiyaṃ kammaṃ karonte te bhikkhū upasaṅkamitvā hatthaṃ ukkhipitvā etaṃ ‘‘daharā bhavanto’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.Okampetvāti hanukena uraṃ paharanto adhonataṃ katvā.Jivhaṃ nillāletvāti kabaramahājivhaṃ nīharitvā uddhamadho ubhayapassesu ca lāletvā.Tivisākhanti tisākhaṃ.Nalāṭikanti bhakuṭiṃ, nalāṭe uṭṭhitaṃ valittayanti attho.Pakkāmīti tumhe jānantānaṃ vacanaṃ akatvā attanova tele paccissathāti vatvā ekaṃ maggaṃ gahetvā gato. Paṭhamaṃ.

157. In the first of the third chapter, with matted hair means with a topknot of matted hair. Wearing a garment of a deerskin means with a single garment of rough deerskin, one worn as a lower garment and one as an upper garment. A staff of fig wood means taking a slightly crooked staff of fig wood to show lack of desire. Said this means thinking, "In the world, a Brahmin's word is listened to, especially that of a renunciate among Brahmins, and especially that of an elder among renunciates," having taken the guise of an elderly Brahmin renunciate and approaching those monks who were working in the main place of practice, raising his hand, he spoke this word, "You are young," and so on. Causing to tremble means causing the chest to strike with the jaw, making it bowed down. Having made the tongue loll means having brought out a rough, large tongue and causing it to loll up and down and on both sides. Three-pronged means three-branched. Forehead means a frown, meaning a wrinkle raised on the forehead. Departed means, saying, "Without doing what you know, you will cook in your own oil," taking one path, he left. The first.

2. Samiddhisuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Samiddhi Sutta

158.Dutiyelābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata meti evarūpassa satthu ceva dhammassa ca sabrahmacārīnañca laddhattā mayhaṃ lābhā mayhaṃ suladdhanti. So kirāyasmā pacchā mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasitvā ‘‘arahattaṃ gahessāmī’’ti pāsādikaṃ tāva kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇe āvajjetvā cittakallataṃ uppādetvā cittaṃ hāsetvā tosetvā nisinno. Tenassa evamahosi.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘ayaṃ samiddhi bhikkhu pāsādikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā nisinnasadiso, yāva mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā arahattaṃ na gaṇhāti, tāvassa antarāyaṃ karissāmī’’ti upasaṅkami.Gaccha tvanti satthā sakalajambudīpaṃ olokento ‘‘tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ sappāyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti addasa, tasmā evamāha.Satipaññā ca me buddhāti mayā sati ca paññā ca ñātā.Karassu rūpānīti bahūnipi vibhiṃsakārahāni rūpāni karassu.Neva maṃ byādhayissasīti maṃ neva vedhayissasi na kampassesi. Dutiyaṃ.

158. In the second, a gain it is for me, well gained it is for me means, having obtained such a Teacher, such a Dhamma, and such co-celibates, it is a gain for me, it is well gained for me. It is said that this Venerable One later, reflecting on the root meditation subject, thinking, "I will attain arahantship," having taken a pleasing meditation subject, generating mental fitness by focusing on the qualities of the Buddha, Dhamma, and Sangha, having gladdened and pleased his mind, was sitting. Thus, this occurred to him. Approached means thinking, "This Samiddhi monk is sitting as if having taken a pleasing meditation subject. As long as he does not take the root meditation subject and attain arahantship, I will cause an obstruction to him," he approached. Go away means the Teacher, looking at the entire Jambudīpa, saw, "In that very place, that meditation subject will be suitable for him," therefore he said this. Mindfulness and wisdom are known to me means mindfulness and wisdom are known by me. Create forms means create many forms that are causes of disturbance. You will not harm me means you will not pierce me, you will not shake me. The second.

3. Godhikasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Godhika Sutta

159.Tatiyeisigilipasseti isigilissa nāma pabbatassa passe.Kāḷasilāyanti kāḷavaṇṇāya silāyaṃ.Sāmayikaṃ cetovimuttinti appitappitakkhaṇe paccanīkadhammehi vimuccati, ārammaṇe ca adhimuccatīti lokiyasamāpatti sāmayikā cetovimutti nāma.Phusīti paṭilabhi.Parihāyīti kasmā yāva chaṭṭhaṃ parihāyi? Sābādhattā. Therassa kira vātapittasemhavasena anusāyiko ābādho atthi, tena samādhissa sappāye upakārakadhamme pūretuṃ na sakkoti, appitappitāya samāpattiyā parihāyati.

159. In the third, Isigili side means on the side of the mountain named Isigili. On a dark rock means on a rock of dark color. Temporary deliverance of mind means in the moment of applying and applying, he is freed from opposing states, and he is fixated on the object. That mundane attainment is called temporary deliverance of mind. Attained means obtained. Declined means why did he decline up to the sixth time? Because of illness. It is said that the Elder had a chronic illness due to wind, bile, and phlegm, so he was not able to fulfill the supporting conditions suitable for concentration, he declined from applied attainment.

Yaṃnūnāhaṃ satthaṃ āhareyyanti so kira cintesi, yasmā parihīnajjhānassa kālaṅkaroto anibaddhā gati hoti, aparihīnajjhānassa nibaddhā gati hoti, brahmaloke nibbattati, tasmā satthaṃ āharitukāmo ahosi.Upasaṅkamīti – ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo satthaṃ āharitukāmo, satthāharaṇañca nāmetaṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhassa hoti. Yo evaṃ kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkho hoti, so mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasitvā arahattampi gahetuṃ samattho hoti, mayā pana paṭibāhitopi esa na oramissati, satthārā paṭibāhito oramissatī’’ti therassa atthakāmo viya hutvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.

Should I use a knife means he thought, "Since one who dies having declined from jhāna has an unfixed destination, but one who dies without having declined from jhāna has a fixed destination and is reborn in the Brahma world, therefore, I will use a knife." Approached means—"This ascetic wants to use a knife, and using a knife is for one who has no regard for body and life. He who has no regard for body and life is capable of taking the root meditation subject and attaining arahantship. Even if I stop him, he will not desist, but if the Teacher stops him, he will desist"—as if desiring the Elder's welfare, he approached the Blessed One.

Jalāti jalamānā.Pāde vandāmi cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā tava pāde vandāmi.Jutindharāti ānubhāvadharā.Appattamānasoti appattaarahatto.Sekhoti sīlādīni sikkhamāno sakaraṇīyo.Jane sutāti jane vissutā.Satthaṃ āharitaṃ hotīti thero kira ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ iminā jīvitenā’’ti? Uttāno nipajjitvā satthena galanāḷiṃ chindi, dukkhā vedanā uppajjiṃsu. Thero vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā taṃyeva vedanaṃ pariggahetvā satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ sammasanto arahattaṃ patvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.Samasīsīnāma tividho hoti iriyāpathasamasīsī, rogasamasīsī, jīvitasamasīsīti.

iriyāpathasamasīsīnāma. Yo pana cakkhurogādīsu aññatarasmiṃ sati – ‘‘ito anuṭṭhitova arahattaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, athassa arahattappatti ca rogato vuṭṭhānañca ekappahāreneva hoti. Ayaṃrogasamasīsīnāma. Keci pana tasmiṃyeva iriyāpathe tasmiñca roge parinibbānavasenettha samasīsitaṃ paññāpenti. Yassa pana āsavakkhayo ca jīvitakkhayo ca ekappahāreneva hoti. Ayaṃjīvitasamasīsīnāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘yassa puggalassa apubbaṃ acarimaṃ āsavapariyādānañca hoti jīvitapariyādānañca, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samasīsī’’ti (pu. pa. 16).

pavattisīsaṃnāma jīvitindriyaṃ,kilesasīsaṃnāma avijjā. Tesu jīvitindriyaṃ cuticittaṃ khepeti, avijjā maggacittaṃ. Dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ ekato uppādo natthi. Maggānantaraṃ pana phalaṃ, phalānantaraṃ bhavaṅgaṃ, bhavaṅgato vuṭṭhāya paccavekkhaṇaṃ, taṃ paripuṇṇaṃ vā hoti aparipuṇṇaṃ vā. Tikhiṇena asinā sīse chijjantepi hi eko vā dve vā paccavekkhaṇavārā avassaṃ uppajjantiyeva, cittānaṃ pana lahuparivattitāya āsavakkhayo ca jīvitapariyādānañca ekakkhaṇe viya paññāyati.

Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyhāti avijjāmūlena samūlakaṃ taṇhaṃ arahattamaggena uppāṭetvā.Parinibbutoti anupādisesanibbānena parinibbuto.

Vivattakkhandhanti parivattakkhandhaṃ.Semānanti uttānaṃ hutvā sayitaṃ hoti. Thero pana kiñcāpi uttānako sayito, tathāpissa dakkhiṇena passena paricitasayanattā sīsaṃ dakkhiṇatova parivattitvā ṭhitaṃ.Dhūmāyitattanti dhūmāyitabhāvaṃ. Tasmiṃ hi khaṇe dhūmavalāhakā viya timiravalāhakā viya ca uṭṭhahiṃsu.Viññāṇaṃ samanvesatīti paṭisandhicittaṃ pariyesati.Appatiṭṭhitenāti paṭisandhiviññāṇena appatiṭṭhitena, appatiṭṭhitakāraṇāti attho.Beluvapaṇḍuvīṇanti beluvapakkaṃ viya paṇḍuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇamahāvīṇaṃ.Ādāyāti kacche ṭhapetvā.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘godhikattherassa nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ na jānāmi, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pucchitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissāmī’’ti khuddakadārakavaṇṇī hutvā upasaṅkami.Nādhigacchāmīti na passāmi.Sokaparetassāti sokena phuṭṭhassa.Abhassathāti pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ patitā. Tatiyaṃ.

4. Sattavassānubandhasuttavaṇṇanā

160.Catutthesatta vassānīti pure bodhiyā chabbassāni, bodhito pacchā ekaṃ vassaṃ.Otārāpekkhoti ‘‘sace samaṇassa gotamassa kāyadvārādīsu kiñcideva ananucchavikaṃ passāmi, codessāmi na’’nti evaṃ vivaraṃ apekkhamāno.Alabhamānoti rathareṇumattampi avakkhalitaṃ apassanto. Tenāha –

‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ;

Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘ajja samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ atigahetvā gamissāmī’’ti upasaṅkami.

Jhāyasīti jhāyanto avajjhāyanto nisinnosīti vadati.Vittaṃ nu jīnoti sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā jitosi nu.Āguṃ nu gāmasminti, kiṃ nu antogāme pamāṇātikkantaṃ pāpakammaṃ akāsi, yena aññesaṃ mukhaṃ oloketuṃ avisahanto araññe vicarasi?Sakkhinti mittabhāvaṃ.

Palikhāyāti khaṇitvā.Bhavalobhajappanti bhavalobhasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ.Anāsavo jhāyāmīti nittaṇho hutvā dvīhi jhānehi jhāyāmi.Pamattabandhūti māraṃ ālapati. So hi yekeci loke pamattā, tesaṃ bandhu.

Sace maggaṃ anubuddhanti yadi tayā maggo anubuddho.Apehīti apayāhi.Amaccudheyyanti maccuno anokāsabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ.Pāragāminoti yepi pāraṃ gatā, tepi pāragāmino. Yepi pāraṃ gacchissanti, yepi pāraṃ gantukāmā, tepi pāragāmino.

Visūkāyikānīti māravisūkāni.Visevitānīti viruddhasevitāni, ‘‘appamāyu manussānaṃ, accayanti ahorattā’’ti vutte. ‘‘Dīghamāyu manussānaṃ, nāccayanti ahorattā’’tiādīni paṭilomakāraṇāni.Vipphanditānīti, tamhi tamhi kāle hatthirājavaṇṇasappavaṇṇādidassanāni.Nibbejanīyāti ukkaṇṭhanīyā.

Anupariyagātiādīsu kiñcāpi atītavacanaṃ kataṃ, attho pana vikappavasena veditabbo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā medavaṇṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ vāyaso disvā – ‘‘api nāmettha muduṃ vindeyyāma, api assādo siyā’’ti anuparigaccheyya, atha so tattha assādaṃ alabhitvāva vāyaso etto apakkameyya, tato pāsāṇā apagaccheyya, evaṃ mayampi so kāko viya selaṃ gotamaṃ āsajja assādaṃ vā santhavaṃ vā alabhantā gotamā nibbinditvā apagacchāma. Catutthaṃ.

5. Māradhītusuttavaṇṇanā

161.Pañcameabhāsitvāti ettha a-kāro nipātamattaṃ, bhāsitvāti attho. Abhāsayitvātipi pāṭho.Upasaṅkamiṃsūti ‘‘gopālakadārakaṃ viya daṇḍakena bhūmiṃ lekhaṃ datvā ativiya dummano hutvā nisinno. ‘Kinnu kho kāraṇa’nti? Pucchitvā, jānissāmā’’ti upasaṅkamiṃsu.

Socasīti cintesi.Āraññamiva kuñjaranti yathā araññato pesitagaṇikārahatthiniyo āraññakaṃ kuñjaraṃ itthikuttadassanena palobhetvā bandhitvā ānayanti, evaṃ ānayissāma.Māradheyyanti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ.

Upasaṅkamiṃsūti – ‘‘tumhe thokaṃ adhivāsetha, mayaṃ taṃ ānessāmā’’ti pitaraṃ samassāsetvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.Uccāvacāti nānāvidhā.Ekasataṃ ekasatanti ekekaṃ sataṃ sataṃ katvā.Kumārivaṇṇasatanti iminā nayena kumāriattabhāvānaṃ sataṃ.

Atthassapattiṃ hadayassa santinti, dvīhipi padehi arahattameva kathesi.Senanti kilesasenaṃ. Sā hi piyarūpasātarūpā nāma.Ekāhaṃ jhāyanti eko ahaṃ jhāyanto.Sukhamanubodhinti arahattasukhaṃ anubujjhiṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ senaṃ jinitvā ahaṃ eko jhāyanto ‘‘atthassa pattiṃ hadayassa santi’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ arahattasukhaṃ anubujjhiṃ. Tasmā janena mittasanthavaṃ na karomi, teneva ca me kāraṇena kenaci saddhiṃ sakkhī na sampajjatīti.

Kathaṃvihārībahuloti katamena vihārena bahulaṃ viharanto.Aladdhāti alabhitvā.Yoti nipātamattaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – katamena jhānena bahulaṃ jhāyantaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ kāmasaññā alabhitvāva paribāhirā hontīti.

Passaddhakāyoti catutthajjhānena assāsapassāsakāyassa passaddhattā passaddhakāyo.Suvimuttacittoti arahattaphalavimuttiyā suṭṭhu vimuttacitto.Asaṅkharānoti tayo kammābhisaṅkhāre anabhisaṅkharonto.Anokoti anālayo.Aññāya dhammanti catusaccadhammaṃ jānitvā.Avitakkajhāyīti avitakkena catutthajjhānena jhāyanto.Na kuppatītiādīsu dosena na kuppati, rāgena na sarati, mohena na thīno. Imesu tīsu mūlakilesesu gahitesu diyaḍḍhakilesasahassaṃ gahitameva hoti. Paṭhamapadena vā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, dutiyena kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ, tatiyena thinaṃ ādiṃ katvā sesanīvaraṇāni. Iti iminā nīvaraṇappahānena khīṇāsavaṃ dasseti.

Pañcoghatiṇṇoti pañcadvārikaṃ kilesoghaṃ tiṇṇo.Chaṭṭhanti manodvārikampi chaṭṭhaṃ kilesoghaṃ atari. Pañcoghaggahaṇena vā pañcorambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni, chaṭṭhaggahaṇena pañcuddhambhāgiyāni veditabbāni.Gaṇasaṅghacārīti gaṇe ca saṅghe ca caratīti satthā gaṇasaṅghacārī nāma.Addhā carissantīti aññepi saddhā bahujanā ekaṃsena carissanti.Ayanti ayaṃ satthā.Anokoti anālayo.

Acchejjanessatīti acchinditvā nayissati, maccurājassa hatthato acchinditvā nibbānapāraṃ nayissatīti vuttaṃ hoti.Nayamānānanti nayamānesu.

Selaṃva sirasūhacca, pātāle gādhamesathāti mahantaṃ kūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ silaṃ sīse ṭhapetvā pātāle patiṭṭhagavesanaṃ viya.Khāṇuṃva urasāsajjāti urasi khāṇuṃ paharitvā viya.Apethāti apagacchatha. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne saṅgītikārā ‘‘idamavocā’’ti desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvādaddallamānāti gāthaṃ āhaṃsu. Tatthadaddallamānāti ativiya jalamānā sobhamānā.Āgañchunti āgatā.Panudīti nīhari.Tūlaṃ bhaṭṭhaṃva mālutoti yathā phalato bhaṭṭhaṃ simbalitūlaṃ vā poṭakitūlaṃ vā vāto panudati nīharati, evaṃ panudīti. Pañcamaṃ.

Tatiyo vaggo.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

5. Bhikkhunīsaṃyuttaṃ

1. Āḷavikāsuttavaṇṇanā

162.Bhikkhunīsaṃyuttassa paṭhameāḷavikāti āḷaviyaṃ jātā āḷavinagaratoyeva ca nikkhamma pabbajitā.Andhavananti kassapasammāsambuddhassa cetiye navakammatthāya dhanaṃ samādapetvā āgacchantassa yasodharassa nāma dhammabhāṇakassa ariyapuggalassa akkhīni uppāṭetvā tattheva akkhibhedappattehi pañcahi corasatehi nivutthattā tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘andhavana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ vanaṃ. Taṃ kira sāvatthito dakkhiṇapasse gāvutamatte hoti rājārakkhāya guttaṃ. Tattha pavivekakāmā bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca gacchanti. Tasmā ayampi kāyavivekatthinī yena taṃ vanaṃ, tenupasaṅkami.Nissaraṇanti nibbānaṃ.Paññāyāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena.Na tvaṃ jānāsi taṃ padanti tvaṃ etaṃ nibbānapadaṃ vā nibbānagāmimaggapadaṃ vā na jānāsi.Sattisūlūpamāti vinivijjhanatthena sattisūlasadisā.Khandhāsaṃ adhikuṭṭanāti khandhā tesaṃ adhikuṭṭanabhaṇḍikā. Paṭhamaṃ.

2. Somāsuttavaṇṇanā

163.Dutiyeṭhānanti arahattaṃ.Durabhisambhavanti duppasahaṃ.Dvaṅgulapaññāyāti parittapaññāya. Yasmā vā dvīhi aṅgulehi kappāsavaṭṭiṃ gahetvā suttaṃ kantanti, tasmā itthī ‘‘dvaṅgulapaññā’’ti vuccati.Ñāṇamhi vattamānamhīti phalasamāpattiñāṇe pavattamāne.Dhammaṃ vipassatoti catusaccadhammaṃ vipassantassa, pubbabhāge vā vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtaṃ khandhapañcakameva.Kiñci vā pana aññasmīti aññaṃ vā kiñci ‘‘ahaṃ asmī’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena yassa siyā. Dutiyaṃ.

3. Kisāgotamīsuttavaṇṇanā

164.Tatiyekisāgotamīti appamaṃsalohitatāya kisā, gotamīti panassā nāmaṃ. Pubbe kira sāvatthiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kule asītikoṭidhanaṃ sabbaṃ aṅgārāva jātaṃ. Kuṭumbiko aṅgārajātāni anīharitvā – ‘‘avassaṃ koci puññavā bhavissati, tassa puññena puna pākatikaṃ bhavissatī’’ti suvaṇṇahiraññassa cāṭiyo pūretvā āpaṇe ṭhapetvā samīpe nisīdi. Athekā duggatakulassa dhītā – ‘‘aḍḍhamāsakaṃ gahetvā dārusākaṃ āharissāmī’’ti vīthiṃ gatā taṃ disvā kuṭumbikaṃ āha – ‘‘āpaṇe tāva dhanaṃ ettakaṃ, gehe kittakaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Kiṃ disvā amma evaṃ kathesīti? Imaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇanti. So ‘‘puññavatī esā bhavissatī’’ti tassā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā āpaṇe bhaṇḍaṃ paṭisāmetvā tassā mātāpitaro upasaṅkamitvā evamāha – ‘‘amhākaṃ gehe vayappatto dārako atthi, tassetaṃ dārikaṃ dethā’’ti. Kiṃ sāmi duggatehi saddhiṃ keḷiṃ karosīti? Mittasanthavo nāma duggatehipi saddhiṃ hoti, detha naṃ, kuṭumbasāminī bhavissatīti naṃ gahetvā gharaṃ ānesi. Sā saṃvāsamanvāya puttaṃ vijātā. Putto padasā āhiṇḍanakāle kālamakāsi. Sā duggatakule uppajjitvā mahākulaṃ gantvāpi ‘‘puttavināsaṃ pattāmhī’’ti uppannabalavasokā puttassa sarīrakiccaṃ vāretvā taṃ matakaḷevaraṃ ādāya nagare vippalapantī carati.

164. In "Tatiyakisāgotamī," kisā means thin due to having little flesh and blood, and Gotamī is her name. It seems that in Sāvatthi, eighty crores of wealth turned into charcoal in one family. The householder, without removing the charcoal, thought, "Surely someone meritorious will come, and through their merit, it will return to normal." He filled pots with gold and silver, placed them in the market, and sat nearby. Then, a daughter from a poor family, intending to buy vegetables for half a māsaka, saw this while walking along the street and said to the householder, "If there is so much wealth in the market, how much more must there be at home?" "Why do you say that, my dear?" he asked. "Because of this gold and silver." He thought, "She will be a meritorious woman," and inquired about her dwelling place. After putting away the goods in the market, he approached her parents and said, "We have a son of marriageable age; give this girl to him." "What, sir, are you jesting with the poor?" "Friendship and acquaintance exist even with the poor; give her to me, she will be the mistress of the household." Taking her, he brought her home. After living together, she gave birth to a son. When the son was able to walk about, he died. Even after being born in a poor family and going to a wealthy one, overwhelmed with grief at the loss of her son, she neglected the funeral rites and wandered through the city, carrying the corpse and lamenting.

Ekadivasaṃ mahatiyā buddhavīthiyā dasabalassa santikaṃ gantvā – ‘‘puttassa me arogabhāvatthāya bhesajjaṃ detha bhagavā’’ti āha. Gaccha sāvatthiṃ āhiṇḍitvā yasmiṃ gehe matapubbo natthi, tato siddhatthakaṃ āhara, puttassa te bhesajjaṃ bhavissatīti. Sā nagaraṃ pavisitvā dhuragehato paṭṭhāya bhagavatā vuttanayena gantvā siddhatthakaṃ yācantī ghare ghare, ‘‘kuto tvaṃ evarūpaṃ gharaṃ passissasī’’ti vuttā katipayāni gehāni āhiṇḍitvā – ‘‘sabbesampi kirāyaṃ dhammatā, na mayhaṃ puttassevā’’ti sālāyaṃ chavaṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbajjaṃ yāci. Satthā ‘‘imaṃ pabbājetū’’ti bhikkhuniupassayaṃ pesesi. Sā khuraggeyeva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Imaṃ theriṃ sandhāya ‘‘atha kho kisāgotamī’’ti vuttaṃ.

One day, on the great Buddha street, she went to the Ten-Powered One and said, "Bhagavā, give me medicine for the health of my son." He said, "Go to Sāvatthi, wander through the city, and bring back a mustard seed from a house where no one has ever died; it will be medicine for your son." She entered the city, and starting from the royal palace, went from house to house as instructed by the Bhagavā, asking for mustard seeds. Being told, "How could you find such a house?", after wandering through a few houses, she realized, "This is the nature of all, not just my son's," and throwing the corpse in the charnel ground, she requested ordination. The Teacher sent her to the nun's residence, saying, "Let her be ordained." She attained Arahatship at the razor's edge. Concerning this Theri, it was said, "Then Kisāgotamī..."

Ekamāsīti ekā āsi.Rudammukhīti rudamānamukhī viya.Accantaṃ mataputtāmhīti ettha antaṃ atītaṃ accantaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakametaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā puttamaraṇaṃ antaṃ atītaṃ hoti, evaṃ mataputtā ahaṃ, idāni mama puna puttamaraṇaṃ nāma natthi.Purisā etadantikāti purisāpi me etadantikāva. Yo me puttamaraṇassa anto, purisānampi me esevanto, abhabbā ahaṃ idāni purisaṃ gavesitunti.Sabbattha vihatā nandīti sabbesu khandhāyatanadhātubhavayonigatiṭhitinivāsesu mama taṇhānandī vihatā.Tamokkhandhoti avijjākkhandho.Padālitoti ñāṇena bhinno. Tatiyaṃ.

Ekamāsī means one who had been a month. Rudammukhī means with a face as if weeping. Accantaṃ mataputtāmhī—here, antaṃ means past, accantaṃ is a neuter abstract noun. The meaning is: just as the death of a son is past, so I am one who has lost a son; now, for me, there is no further death of a son. Purisā etadantikā means men too are finished for me. Just as the death of a son is the end for me, so too is this the end for men; I am now incapable of seeking a man. Sabbattha vihatā nandī means in all the aggregates, sense bases, elements, realms of existence, destinies, abodes, my craving-delight is destroyed. Tamokkhandho means the mass of ignorance. Padālito means split by knowledge. The third.

4. Vijayāsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vijayāsutta Commentary

165.Catutthepañcaṅgikenāti ātataṃ vitataṃ ātatavitataṃ ghanaṃ susiranti evaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgatena.Niyyātayāmi tuyhevāti sabbe tuyhaṃyeva demi.Nāhaṃ tenatthikāti nāhaṃ tena atthikā.Pūtikāyenāti suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo niccaṃ uggharitapaggharitaṭṭhena pūtikāyova, tasmā evamāha.Bhindanenāti bhijjanasabhāvena.Pabhaṅgunāti cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ āpajjanadhammena.Aṭṭīyāmīti aṭṭā pīḷitā homi.Harāyāmīti lajjāmi.Santā samāpattīti aṭṭhavidhā lokiyasamāpatti ārammaṇasantatāya aṅgasantatāya ca santāti vuttā.Sabbatthāti sabbesu rūpārūpabhavesu, tesaṃ dvinnaṃ bhavānaṃ gahitattā gahite kāmabhave aṭṭhasu ca samāpattīsūti etesu sabbesu ṭhānesu mayhaṃ avijjātamo vihatoti vadati. Catutthaṃ.

165. In the fourth, pañcaṅgikena means endowed with five parts: ātataṃ, vitataṃ, ātatavitataṃ, ghanaṃ, susiraṃ. Niyyātayāmi tuyhevā means I give everything to you alone. Nāhaṃ tenatthikā means I do not need that. Pūtikāyenā—even though the body is golden in color, it is always foul due to constantly oozing and trickling, therefore she said this. Bhindanenā means with the nature of breaking. Pabhaṅgunā means with the quality of falling into dust and powder. Aṭṭīyāmī means I am oppressed, afflicted. Harāyāmī means I am ashamed. Santā samāpattī—the eight kinds of mundane attainments are called santā because of the continuity of the object and the continuity of the factors. Sabbattha means in all realms of form and formlessness, because those two realms are included, and also in the included realm of desire and in the eight attainments, in all these places my darkness of ignorance is destroyed, she says. The fourth.

5. Uppalavaṇṇāsuttavaṇṇanā
5. Uppalavaṇṇāsutta Commentary

166.Pañcamesupupphitagganti aggato paṭṭhāya suṭṭhu pupphitaṃ sālarukkhaṃ.Na catthi te dutiyā vaṇṇadhātūti tava vaṇṇadhātusadisā dutiyā vaṇṇadhātu natthi, tayā sadisā aññā bhikkhunī natthīti vadati.Idhāgatā tādisikā bhaveyyunti yathā tvaṃ idhāgatā kiñci santhavaṃ vā sinehaṃ vā na labhasi, evamevaṃ tepi tayāva sadisā bhaveyyuṃ.Pakhumantarikāyanti dvinnaṃ akkhīnaṃ majjhe nāsavaṃsepi tiṭṭhantiṃ maṃ na passasi.Vasībhūtamhīti vasībhūtā asmi. Pañcamaṃ.

166. In the fifth, supupphitagga means a Sāla tree well-flowered from the top. Na catthi te dutiyā vaṇṇadhātū means there is no second color element similar to your color element; there is no other bhikkhunī like you, she says. Idhāgatā tādisikā bhaveyyuṃ—just as you have come here and do not obtain any acquaintance or affection, just so may they be like you. Pakhumantarikāya means do you not see me standing on the bridge of the nose between the two eyes? Vasībhūtamhī means I am under control. The fifth.

6. Cālāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Cālāsutta Commentary

167.Chaṭṭheko nu taṃ idamādapayīti ko nu mandabuddhi bālo taṃ evaṃ gāhāpesi?Pariklesanti aññampi nānappakāraṃ upaddavaṃ. Idāni yaṃ māro āha – ‘‘ko nu taṃ idamādapayī’’ti, taṃ maddantī – ‘‘na maṃ andhabālo ādapesi, loke pana aggapuggalo satthā dhammaṃ desesī’’ti dassetuṃ,buddhotiādimāha. Tatthasacce nivesayīti paramatthasacce nibbāne nivesesi.Nirodhaṃ appajānantāti nirodhasaccaṃ ajānantā. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

167. In the sixth, ko nu taṃ idamādapayī means what foolish, stupid person made you understand this? Pariklesa means also other various kinds of troubles. Now, refuting what Māra said—"Who made you understand this?"—to show that "No blind fool made me understand, but the foremost person in the world, the Teacher, taught the Dhamma," she said buddho, etc. There, sacce nivesayī means he established me in the ultimate truth, Nibbāna. Nirodhaṃ appajānantā means those who do not know the truth of cessation. The sixth.

7. Upacālāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Upacālāsutta Commentary

168.Sattameenti māravasaṃ punāti punappunaṃ maraṇamārakilesamāradevaputtamārānaṃ vasaṃ āgacchanti.Padhūpitoti santāpito.Agati yattha mārassāti yattha tuyhaṃ mārassa agati.Tatthāti tasmiṃ nibbāne. Sattamaṃ.

168. In the seventh, enti māravasaṃ punā means they repeatedly come under the control of death-Māra, defilement-Māra, and deva-putra-Māra. Padhūpito means tormented. Agati yattha mārassā means where there is no access for you, Māra. Tatthā means in that Nibbāna. The seventh.

8. Sīsupacālāsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Sīsupacālāsutta Commentary

169.Aṭṭhamesamaṇī viya dissasīti samaṇisadisā dissasi.Kimiva carasi momūhāti kiṃ kāraṇā momūhā viya carasi?Ito bahiddhāti imamhā sāsanā bahi. Pāsaṃ ḍentītipāsaṇḍā,sattānaṃ cittesu diṭṭhipāsaṃ khipantīti attho. Sāsanaṃ pana pāse moceti, tasmā pāsaṇḍoti na vuccati, ito bahiddhāyeva pāsaṇḍā honti.Pasīdantīti saṃsīdanti lagganti.

169. In the eighth, samaṇī viya dissasī means you appear like a female ascetic. Kimiva carasi momūhā means why do you wander as if deluded? Ito bahiddhā means outside this Dispensation. Those who cast the snare (pāsa) are pāsaṇḍā, meaning those who cast the snare of views in the minds of beings. But the Dispensation releases from snares, therefore it is not called pāsaṇḍa; only those outside of it are pāsaṇḍā. Pasīdantī means they sink down, they cling.

atthi sakyakule jātotiādimāha. Tatthasabbābhibhūti sabbāni khandhāyatanadhātubhavayonigatiādīni abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Maraṇamārādayo nudi nīharītimāranudo. Sabbatthamaparājitoti sabbesu rāgādīsu vā mārayuddhe vā ajito.Sabbattha muttoti sabbesu khandhādīsu mutto.Asitoti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayena anissito.Sabbakammakkhayaṃ pattoti sabbakammakkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ patto.Upadhisaṅkhayeti upadhisaṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne ārammaṇato vimutto. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

She said, atthi sakyakule jāto, etc. There, sabbābhibhū means one who has overcome all aggregates, sense bases, elements, realms of existence, destinies, etc., and stands above them. He drives out or removes death-Māra, therefore he is māranudo. Sabbatthamaparājito means unvanquished in all, whether in regards to passion etc. or in the battle with Māra. Sabbattha mutto means released from all aggregates etc. Asito means not dependent on the support of craving and views. Sabbakammakkhayaṃ patto means attained Arahatship, which is the exhaustion of all kamma. Upadhisaṅkhaye means liberated from the perspective of object in Nibbāna, which is the ending of conditioned existence. The eighth.

9. Selāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Selāsutta Commentary

170.Navamekenidaṃ pakatanti kena idaṃ kataṃ.Bimbanti attabhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati.Aghanti dukkhapatiṭṭhānattā attabhāvameva vadati.Hetubhaṅgāti hetunirodhena paccayavekallena. Navamaṃ.

170. In the ninth, kenidaṃ pakatanti means by whom was this made? Bimbanti, he speaks referring to the individual existence. Aghanti, he speaks referring to the individual existence itself, because it is the basis of suffering. Hetubhaṅgānti, by the cessation of the cause, by the absence of conditions. The ninth.

10. Vajirāsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Vajirāsutta Commentary

171.Dasamenayidha sattupalabbhatīti imasmiṃ suddhasaṅkhārapuñje paramatthato satto nāma na upalabbhati.Khandhesu santesūti pañcasu khandhesu vijjamānesu tena tenākārena vavatthitesu.Sammutīti sattoti samaññāmattameva hoti.Dukkhanti pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ.Nāññatra dukkhāti ṭhapetvā dukkhaṃ añño neva sambhoti na nirujjhatīti. Dasamaṃ.

171. In the tenth, nayidha sattupalabbhatī means in this pure mass of conditioned phenomena, a being is not truly found. Khandhesu santesūti, when the five aggregates exist, discriminated in this and that way. Sammutīti, ‘being’ is merely a designation. Dukkhanti, the suffering of the five aggregates. Nāññatra dukkhāti, setting aside suffering, nothing else arises, nothing ceases. The tenth.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus ends the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary to the Saṃyutta Nikāya.

6. Brahmasaṃyuttaṃ

6. Brahmasaṃyutta

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. First Chapter

1. Brahmāyācanasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Brahmāyācanasutta Commentary

172.Brahmasaṃyuttassa paṭhameparivitakko udapādīti sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo ayaṃ cetaso vitakko udapādi. Kadā udapādīti? Buddhabhūtassa aṭṭhame sattāhe rājāyatanamūle sakkena devānamindena ābhataṃ dantakaṭṭhañca osadhaharītakañca khāditvā mukhaṃ dhovitvā catūhi lokapālehi upanīte paccagghe selamayapatte tapussabhallikānaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā puna paccāgantvā ajapālanigrodhe nisinnamattassa.

172. In the first of the Brahmasaṃyutta, parivitakko udapādī means this thought, which is customary and habitual for all Buddhas, arose in the mind. When did it arise? In the eighth week after becoming a Buddha, at the foot of the Rājāyatana tree, after eating the toothpick and medicinal myrobalan brought by Sakka, the King of the Gods, washing his face, consuming the alms-food offered by Tapussa and Bhallika in the newly-made stone bowl presented by the four Lokapālas, and returning to sit under the Ajapāla banyan tree.

Adhigatoti paṭividdho.Dhammoti catusaccadhammo.Gambhīroti uttānapaṭikkhepavacanametaṃ.Duddasoti gambhīrattāva duddaso dukkhena daṭṭhabbo, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Duddasattāvaduranubodhodukkhena avabujjhitabbo, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ.Santoti nibbuto.Paṇītoti atappako. Idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Atakkāvacaroti takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabbo.Nipuṇoti saṇho.Paṇḍitavedanīyoti sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi veditabbo.Ālayarāmāti sattā pañcasu kāmaguṇesu allīyanti, tasmā teālayāti vuccanti. Aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni vā allīyanti, tasmāpi ālayāti vuccanti. Tehi ālayehi ramantītiālayarāmā. Ālayesu ratātiālayaratā. Ālayesu suṭṭhu muditātiālayasammuditā. Yatheva hi susajjitaṃ pupphaphalabharitarukkhādisampannaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho rājā tāya tāya sampattiyā ramati, sammudito āmoditapamodito hoti, na ukkaṇṭhati, sāyampi nikkhamituṃ na icchati, evamimehipi kāmālayataṇhālayehi sattā ramanti, saṃsāravaṭṭe sammuditā anukkaṇṭhitā vasanti. Tena tesaṃ bhagavā duvidhaṃ ālayaṃ uyyānabhūmiṃ viya dassento ‘‘ālayarāmā’’tiādimāha.

Adhigato means realized. Dhammo means the Four Noble Truths. Gambhīro means this is a word of superficial rejection. Duddaso means difficult to see because it is profound; it must be seen with difficulty, it cannot be seen easily. Because it is difficult to see, it is duranubodho, difficult to understand; it must be understood with difficulty, it cannot be understood easily. Santo means peaceful, stilled. Paṇīto means excellent, not causing distress. These two are said referring only to the supramundane. Atakkāvacaro means it cannot be reached or fathomed by reasoning; it can only be reached by knowledge. Nipuṇo means subtle. Paṇḍitavedanīyo means it is to be known by the wise who have entered the right path. Ālayarāmā—beings cling to the five strands of sense pleasures, therefore they are called ālayā. Or the eight-hundred craving-thoughts cling, therefore they too are called ālaya. Those who delight in those clingings are ālayarāmā. Those who are fond of clingings are ālayaratā. Those who are exceedingly delighted in clingings are ālayasammuditā. Just as a king, entering a well-arranged garden abundant with trees laden with flowers and fruits, delights in each attainment, is delighted, pleased, and gladdened, and does not feel aversion, nor does he wish to leave, so too beings delight in these clinging-cravings, are delighted in the cycle of existence, and live without aversion. Therefore, showing them the twofold clinging-cravings as if a pleasure-garden, the Bhagavā said, "ālayarāmā," etc.

yadidanti nipāto, tassa ṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yaṃ ida’’nti, paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo aya’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayatā ca sā paṭiccasamuppādo cātiidappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. Saṅkhārādipaccayānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni samanti, vūpasammanti, tasmāsabbasaṅkhārasamathoti vuccati. Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā honti, sabbā taṇhā khīyanti, sabbe kilesarāgā virajjanti, sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmāsabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodhoti vuccati. Yā panesā taṇhā bhavena bhavaṃ, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvāvānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatotinibbānaṃ. So mamassa kilamathoti yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assa, sā mama vihesā assāti attho. Kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca assāti vuttaṃ hoti. Citte pana ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi.Apissūti anubrūhanatthe nipāto. So ‘‘na kevalaṃ ayaṃ parivitakko udapādi, imāpi gāthā paṭibhaṃsū’’ti dīpeti.Anacchariyāti anuacchariyā.Paṭibhaṃsūti paṭibhānasaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa gocarā ahesuṃ, parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.

Yadidanti is a particle; understanding its place, “yaṃ idaṃ” (that which), referring to dependent origination, “yo ayaṃ” (this which) should be understood, such is the meaning. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo—because of these conditions (paccayā), idappaccayā; idappaccayā itself is idappaccayatā, and that idappaccayatā is also dependent origination (paṭiccasamuppādo); hence, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādo. This is a designation for the conditions of formations, etc. Sabbasaṅkhārasamatho etc., all is Nibbāna. Since, by resorting to it, all the agitations of formations cease, are stilled, therefore it is called sabbasaṅkhārasamatho. And since, by resorting to it, all attachments are relinquished, all craving is exhausted, all defilement-passions are extinguished, all suffering ceases, therefore it is called sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho. Now, that craving which binds and sews together existence with existence, or kamma together with its fruit, is called vāna; release from that vāna is nibbānaṃ. So mamassa kilamatho—that teaching for those who do not know, that would be my weariness, that would be my affliction, is the meaning. Both physical weariness and physical affliction would be mine, is what was said. However, in the minds of the Buddhas, neither of these exists. Apissūti is a particle in the sense of amplification. He reveals that "not only did this thought arise, but these verses also flashed forth." Anacchariyā means not wonderful. Paṭibhaṃsū means they became objects of knowledge consisting of intuition; they became something to be reflected upon.

Kicchenāti dukkhena, na dukkhāya paṭipadāya. Buddhānaṃ hi cattāropi maggā sukhapaṭipadāva honti. Pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatāgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa aññāni ca khantivādisadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Halanti etthaha-kāro nipātamatto, alanti attho.Pakāsitunti desituṃ, evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa alaṃ desituṃ pariyattaṃ desituṃ. Ko attho desitenāti vuttaṃ hoti?Rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosaphuṭṭhehi rāgadosānugatehi vā.

Kicchenāti means with difficulty, not with a painful practice. For the Buddhas, all four paths are paths of ease. However, this was said referring to the practice that must be approached during the time of perfecting the pāramīs, when, while still possessing passion, aversion, and delusion, they gave to beggars who came again and again, slicing off their decorated and adorned heads, drawing out the blood from their necks, plucking out their beautifully anointed eyes, and giving their son, who was the lamp of their lineage, and their wife, who behaved according to their wishes, and when, in other existences like that of the Khantivādī, they endured cutting, piercing, etc. Halanti, here the letter ha is merely a particle, meaning enough. Pakāsitunti means to teach; enough, sufficient to teach that which was attained with such difficulty. What is the use of teaching? it is said. Rāgadosaparetehīti, by those touched by passion and aversion or those followed by passion and aversion.

Paṭisotagāminti niccādīnaṃ paṭisotaṃ, ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubha’’nti evaṃ gataṃ catusaccadhammaṃ.Rāgarattāti kāmarāgena bhavarāgena diṭṭhirāgena ca rattā.Na dakkhantīti aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti iminā sabhāvena na passissanti, te apassante ko sakkhissati evaṃ gāhāpetuṃ.Tamokhandhena āvuṭāti avijjārāsinā ajjhotthaṭā.

Paṭisotagāmi means against the stream of permanence, having gone towards the four noble truths in this way: "Impermanent, suffering, non-self, unattractive." Rāgarattā means stained with sensual lust, lust for existence, and lust for views. Na dakkhantī means they will not see with this nature of impermanence, suffering, non-self, unattractiveness. If they do not see, who will be able to make them grasp it thus? Tamokhandhena āvuṭā means covered by a mass of ignorance.

Appossukkatāyāti nirussukkabhāvena, adesetukāmatāyāti attho. Kasmā panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami? Nanu esa mutto mocessāmi, tiṇṇo tāressāmi –

Appossukkatāyā means with a lack of enthusiasm, meaning a lack of desire to teach. But why did his mind lean in this way? Surely, he is the liberated one who will liberate, the one who has crossed over who will help others cross over –

‘‘Kiṃ me aññātavesena, dhammaṃ sacchikatenidha;

‘‘What is the use of me making it known,
Having realized the Dhamma here myself?
Having attained omniscience,
I will deliver beings together with the gods.’’ (bu. vaṃ. 2.56) –

Patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ pattoti? Saccametaṃ, tadevaṃ paccavekkhaṇānubhāvena panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Tassa hi sabbaññutaṃ patvā sattānaṃ kilesagahanataṃ, dhammassa ca gambhīrataṃ paccavekkhantassa sattānaṃ kilesagahanatā ca dhammagambhīratā ca sabbākārena pākaṭā jātā. Athassa – ‘‘ime sattā kañjiyapuṇṇā lābu viya, takkabharitā cāṭi viya, vasātelapītapilotikā viya, añjanamakkhitahattho viya ca kilesabharitā atisaṃkiliṭṭhā rāgarattā dosaduṭṭhā mohamūḷhā, te kiṃ nāma paṭivijjhissantī’’ti? Cintayato kilesagahanapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenāpi evaṃ cittaṃ nami.

Having made the aspiration, fulfilled the perfections, and attained omniscience? This is true, but his mind leaned in this way due to the power of reflection. For, upon attaining omniscience and reflecting on the depth of beings' defilements and the profundity of the Dhamma, both the depth of beings' defilements and the profundity of the Dhamma became fully apparent in every way. Then it occurred to him, "These beings are filled with sediment like a bottle gourd filled with rice-gruel, like a bowl filled with whey, like a cloth stained with grease and oil, like a hand smeared with collyrium, filled with defilements, exceedingly stained, stained with lust, corrupted by hatred, deluded by delusion. How will they understand?" Thinking thus, his mind leaned due to the power of reflecting on the depth of defilements.

‘‘Ayañca dhammo pathavīsandhārakaudakakkhandho viya gambhīro, pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapito sāsapo viya duddaso, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipaṭipādanaṃ viya duranubodho. Nanu mayā hi imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantena adinnaṃ dānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ nāma natthi, aparipūritā kāci pāramī nāma natthi, tassa me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassāpi pathavī na kampittha, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantassāpi na kampittha, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhentassāpi na kampittha, pacchimayāme pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭivijjhantasseva me dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Iti mādisenāpi tikkhañāṇena kicchenevāyaṃ dhammo paṭividdho. Taṃ lokiyamahājanā kathaṃ paṭivijjhissantī’’ti? Dhammagambhīrapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenāpi evaṃ cittaṃ namīti veditabbaṃ.

"And this Dhamma is profound like the earth-supporting water mass, difficult to see like a mustard seed concealed by a mountain, difficult to understand like splitting the tip of a hair into a hundred pieces. Indeed, in striving to understand this Dhamma, there was no ungiven gift, no unprotected virtue, no unfulfilled perfection. Yet, even as I was dispelling the army of Māra without effort, the earth did not quake; even as I was recollecting past lives in the first watch of the night, it did not quake; even as I was purifying the divine eye in the middle watch of the night, it did not quake; but only as I was understanding dependent origination in the last watch of the night did the ten-thousand world system quake. Thus, this Dhamma has been understood with difficulty even by me, who has sharp wisdom. How will the ordinary people understand it?" It should be understood that his mind leaned due to the power of reflecting on the profundity of the Dhamma.

Apica brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyapissa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Jānāti hi bhagavā – ‘‘mama appossukkatāya citte namamāne maṃ mahābrahmā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, ime ca sattā brahmagarukā. Te ‘satthā kira dhammaṃ na desetukāmo ahosi. Atha naṃ mahābrahmā yācitvā desāpesi. Santo vata bho dhammo, paṇīto vata bho dhammo’ti maññamānā sussūsissantī’’ti. Idampissa kāraṇaṃ paṭicca appossukkatāya cittaṃ nami, no dhammadesanāyāti veditabbaṃ.

Moreover, his mind leaned in this way out of a desire to teach, because he was requested by Brahmā. For the Blessed One knows, "When my mind leans towards a lack of enthusiasm, Mahā Brahmā will request me to teach the Dhamma, and these beings have great respect for Brahmā. Thinking, ‘The Teacher was not inclined to teach the Dhamma. Then Mahā Brahmā requested and persuaded him to teach. Indeed, the Dhamma is peaceful; indeed, the Dhamma is excellent,’ they will listen attentively." It should be understood that his mind leaned due to this reason, not due to a lack of desire to teach the Dhamma.

Sahampatissāti so kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto. Tatra naṃ ‘‘sahampatibrahmā’’ti paṭisañjānanti. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’ti.Nassati vata bhoti so kira imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāresi, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sabbe sannipatiṃsu.Yatra hi nāmāti yasmiṃ nāma loke.Purato pāturahosīti tehi dasahi brahmasahassehi saddhiṃ pāturahosi.Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ evaṃsabhāvātiapparajakkhajātikā. Assavanatāti assavanatāya.Bhavissantīti purimabuddhesu dasapuññakiriyavasena katādhikārā paripākagatā padumāni viya sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ, dhammadesanaṃyeva ākaṅkhamānā catuppadikagāthāvasāne ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanārahā na eko, na dve, anekasatasahassā dhammassa aññātāro bhavissantīti dasseti.

Sahampatissā means that in the dispensation of Kassapa Buddha, there was a monk named Saha who developed the first jhāna and was reborn as a Brahmā with a lifespan of a kappa in the realm of the first jhāna. There, he is recognized as "Sahampati Brahmā." Referring to him, he said, "of Brahmā Sahampati." Nassati vata bho means that he uttered this sound in such a way that all the Brahmās in the ten-thousand world system heard and gathered together. Yatra hi nāmā means in whatever world. Purato pāturahosī means he appeared in front of them, together with those ten thousand Brahmās. Apparajakkhajātikā means those whose nature is such that there is little fine dust of lust, hatred, and delusion in their wisdom-eye. Assavanatā means for the sake of non-hearing. Bhavissantī means that those who have performed meritorious deeds in the past Buddhas, whose faculties are mature, like lotuses awaiting the touch of the sun's rays, longing only for the teaching of the Dhamma, worthy of attaining the noble state at the end of a four-line verse, not one, not two, but hundreds of thousands will be knowers of the Dhamma.

Pāturahosīti pātubhavi.Samalehi cintitoti samalehi chahi satthārehi cintito. Te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā sakalajambudīpe kaṇṭake pattharamānā viya, visaṃ siñcamānā viya ca samalaṃ micchādiṭṭhidhammaṃ desayiṃsu.Apāpuretanti vivaraṃ etaṃ.Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ.Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu tāva bhagavāti yācati.

Pāturahosī means appeared. Samalehi cintito means considered by the defiled six teachers. Having arisen earlier, they taught a defiled Dhamma of wrong view throughout Jambudīpa, as if spreading thorns, as if sprinkling poison. Apāpureta means to open that. Amatassa dvāra means the noble path, which is the door to Nibbāna, the immortal. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddha means, "Let these beings hear the four noble truths awakened to by the stainless Sammasambuddha, free from lust and other defilements." Thus, he requests the Blessed One.

Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhitoti selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova. Na hi tassa ṭhitassa dassanatthaṃ gīvukkhipanapasāraṇādikiccaṃ atthi.Tathūpamanti tappaṭibhāgaṃ selapabbatūpamaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā selapabbatamuddhani ṭhitova cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tathā tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutañāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtaṃ janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya upaparikkha. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā hi pabbatapāde samantā mahantaṃ khettaṃ katvā, tattha kedārapāḷīsu kuṭikāyo katvā rattiṃ aggiṃ jāleyyuṃ, caturaṅgasamannāgatañca andhakāraṃ assa, atha tassa pabbatassa matthake ṭhatvā cakkhumato purisassa bhūmiṃ olokayato neva khettaṃ na kedārapāḷiyo na kuṭiyo na tattha sayitamanussā paññāyeyyuṃ. Kuṭikāsu pana aggijālāmattakameva paññāyeyya, evaṃ dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha sattanikāyaṃ olokayato tathāgatassa ye te akatakalyāṇā sattā, te ekavihāre dakkhiṇajāṇupasse nisinnāpi buddhacakkhussa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti, rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Ye pana katakalyāṇā veneyyapuggalā, te evassa dūrepi ṭhitā āpāthaṃ āgacchanti so aggi viya himavantapabbato viya ca. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito means just as one standing on the peak of a rocky mountain. For one standing there, there is no need to crane the neck, stretch, or make any effort to see. Tathūpama means comparable to that, like a rocky mountain. The meaning here in brief is: Just as a man with sight, standing on the peak of a rocky mountain, might see the people all around, so too, O Sumedha, O wise one, the Blessed One, with the eye of omniscience, having ascended the palace of Dhamma, look upon the people afflicted with sorrow, overcome by birth and old age. Consider, examine closely. The implication here is: Just as at the foot of a mountain, having made a large field all around, and having built huts on the edges of the rice fields, they might light a fire at night, and there might be darkness with its four constituents, and when a man with sight, standing on the top of that mountain, looks down at the ground, neither the field nor the edges of the rice fields nor the huts nor the people lying there would appear. Only the flames in the huts would appear. Similarly, when the Tathāgata, having ascended the palace of Dhamma, looks upon the assembly of beings, those beings who have not done good, even if seated nearby in one dwelling, do not come into the range of the Buddha's eye; they are like arrows shot in the night. But those individuals capable of being guided who have done good, even if standing far away, come into the range of his vision, like that fire, like the Himalayan mountain. It has been said:

‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato;

‘‘The good make themselves known from afar,
Like the Himalayan mountain;
The wicked are not seen here,
Like arrows shot at night.’’ (dha. pa. 304);

Ajjhesananti yācanaṃ.Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesaṃ hi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassa ‘‘samantacakkhū’’ti, tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti.Apparajakkhetiādīsu yesaṃ vuttanayeneva paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ, teapparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ, temahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni, tetikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni, temudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā, tesvākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, tesuviññāpayā. Ye paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passanti, teparalokavajjabhayadassāvinonāma.

Ajjhesana means requesting. Buddhacakkhunā means with the knowledge of the superiority of the faculties of others and with the knowledge of inclinations and latent tendencies. For these two kinds of knowledge are called "Buddha-eye," omniscience is called "all-around eye," and the three kinds of path-knowledges are called "Dhamma-eye." In Apparajakkhe etc., those whose dust of lust etc. is little in the eye of wisdom, as described above, are apparajakkhā. Those whose dust is great are mahārajakkhā. Those whose faculties, such as faith, are sharp are tikkhindriyā. Those whose faculties are soft are mudindriyā. Those whose qualities, such as faith, are beautiful are svākārā. Those who consider the stated reason and are easily made to understand, are suviññāpayā. Those who see the danger in the next world and in wrongdoing are called paralokavajjabhayadassāvino.

Ayaṃ panettha pāḷi – ‘‘saddho puggalo apparajakkho, assaddho puggalo mahārajakkho. Āraddhavīriyo, kusīto. Upaṭṭhitassati, muṭṭhassati. Samāhito, asamāhito. Paññavā, duppañño puggalo mahārajakkho. Tathā saddho puggalo tikkhindriyo…pe… paññavā puggalo paralokavajjabhayadassāvī, duppañño puggalo na paralokavajjabhayadassāvī. Lokoti khandhaloko, āyatanaloko, dhātuloko, sampattibhavaloko, sampattisambhavaloko, vipattibhavaloko, vipattisambhavaloko. Eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā dvādasāyatanāni. Aṭṭhārasa lokā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo. Vajjanti sabbe kilesā vajjā, sabbe duccaritā vajjā, sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjā, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajjā, iti imasmiñca loke imasmiñca vajje tibbā bhayasaññā paccupaṭṭhitā hoti, seyyathāpi ukkhittāsike vadhake. Imehi paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānāti passati aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Idaṃ tathāgatassa indriyaparopariyatte ñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.112).

Here is the Pāḷi text: "A person with faith has little dust, a person without faith has much dust. Energetic, lazy. Mindful, unmindful. Concentrated, unconcentrated. Wise, unwise, a person has much dust. Similarly, a person with faith has sharp faculties…pe… a wise person sees the danger in the next world and in wrongdoing, an unwise person does not see the danger in the next world and in wrongdoing. The world means the world of aggregates, the world of sense bases, the world of elements, the world of fortunate existence, the world of fortunate becoming, the world of unfortunate existence, the world of unfortunate becoming. One world: all beings are sustained by food. Two worlds: name and form. Three worlds: three feelings. Four worlds: four foods. Five worlds: five aggregates subject to clinging. Six worlds: six internal sense bases. Seven worlds: seven stations of consciousness. Eight worlds: eight worldly conditions. Nine worlds: nine abodes of beings. Ten worlds: ten sense bases. Twelve worlds: twelve sense bases. Eighteen worlds: eighteen elements. Wrongdoing means all defilements are wrongdoing, all misconduct is wrongdoing, all volitional activities are wrongdoing, all kamma leading to existence is wrongdoing. Thus, in this world and in this wrongdoing, a strong sense of fear is present, just as a executioner with a raised sword. With these fifty aspects, he knows, sees, understands, and penetrates these five faculties. This is the Tathāgata's knowledge of the superiority of the faculties of others" (paṭi. ma. 1.112).

Uppaliniyanti uppalavane. Itaresupi eseva nayo.Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni anto nimuggāneva posiyanti.Udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitānīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhitāni. Tattha yāni accuggamma ṭhitāni, tāni sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni ṭhitāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni pana samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakānuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma atthi, yāni neva pupphissanti, macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷiṃ nāruḷhāni. Āharitvā pana dīpetabbānīti dīpitāni. Yatheva hi tāni catubbidhāni pupphāni, evamevaṃ ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā.

Uppaliniya means in a lotus grove. The same method applies to the others. Antonimuggaposīnī means those that are nourished only when submerged within. Udakaṃ accuggamma ṭhitānī means those standing having risen above the water. Among them, those that stand having risen above, standing awaiting the touch of the sun's rays, are ready to bloom today. But those that stand level with the water are ready to bloom tomorrow. Those submerged in the water, nourished within, are ready to bloom on the third day. But there are other water lilies that have not risen above the water, such as various water lilies afflicted with disease, which will never bloom, but will only be eaten by fish and turtles; these are not included in the Pāḷi. Having brought them, they should be explained, thus they are explained. Just as those flowers are of four kinds, so too there are four kinds of individuals: those who understand quickly, those who understand when explained, those who need guidance, and those who are bound by the words.

ugghaṭitaññū. Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalovipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggaloneyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalopadaparamo(pu. pa. 148-151). Tattha bhagavā uppalavanādisadisaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokento – ‘‘ajja pupphanakāni viya ugghaṭitaññū, sve pupphanakāni viya vipañcitaññū, tatiyadivase pupphanakāni viya neyyo, macchakacchapabhakkhāni pupphāni viya padaparamo’’ti addassa. Passanto ca ‘‘ettakā apparajakkhā, ettakā mahārajakkhā, tatrāpi ettakā ugghaṭitaññū’’ti evaṃ sabbākāratova addasa.

ugghaṭitaññū: That individual for whom, when the meaning of what is spoken in brief is analyzed in detail, there is an understanding of the Dhamma, this individual is called vipañcitaññū. That individual for whom, when asking questions, giving attention, associating with good friends, and gradually, there is an understanding of the Dhamma, this individual is called neyyo. That individual for whom, even when hearing much, speaking much, retaining much, and reciting much, there is no understanding of the Dhamma in that life, this individual is called padaparamo (pu. pa. 148-151). There, the Blessed One, looking at the ten-thousand world system like a lotus grove, saw, "Those ready to bloom today are like those who understand quickly, those ready to bloom tomorrow are like those who understand when explained, those ready to bloom on the third day are like those who need guidance, and those flowers eaten by fish and turtles are like those who are bound by the words." And seeing, "So many have little dust, so many have much dust, and among them so many understand quickly," thus he saw in every way.

Tattha tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imasmiṃyeva attabhāve bhagavato dhammadesanā atthaṃ sādheti. Padaparamānaṃ anāgatatthāya vāsanā hoti. Atha bhagavā imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ viditvā desetukamyataṃ uppādetvā puna sabbepi tīsu bhavesu satte bhabbābhabbavasena dve koṭṭhāse akāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘katame sattā abhabbā? Ye te sattā kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā kilesāvaraṇena samannāgatā vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatā assaddhā acchandikā duppaññā abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ, ime te sattā abhabbā. Katame sattā bhabbā? Ye te sattā na kammāvaraṇena…pe… ime te sattā bhabbā’’ti (vibha. 827; paṭi. ma. 1.115). Tattha sabbepi abhabbapuggale pahāya bhabbapuggaleyeva ñāṇena pariggahetvā, ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā ettakā dosa-mohacaritā vitakka-saddhā-buddhicaritā’’ti cha koṭṭhāse akāsi. Evaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintesi.

There, the Blessed One's teaching of the Dhamma accomplishes its purpose in this very existence for three kinds of individuals. For those who are bound by the words, there is potential for the future. Then the Blessed One, knowing the Dhamma teaching that brings benefit to these four kinds of individuals, having generated a desire to teach, again made all beings in the three realms into two categories based on potential and lack of potential. Referring to them, it was said, "Which beings are without potential? Those beings who are endowed with the obstruction of kamma, endowed with the obstruction of defilements, endowed with the obstruction of result, without faith, without desire, unwise, without potential to enter the fixed course of rightness in wholesome qualities, these beings are without potential. Which beings have potential? Those beings who are not endowed with the obstruction of kamma…pe… these beings have potential" (vibha. 827; paṭi. ma. 1.115). There, having abandoned all individuals without potential, having grasped only those with potential with his knowledge, he made six categories: "So many are characterized by lust, so many are characterized by hatred and delusion, thought, faith, and wisdom." Having done this, he thought, "I will teach the Dhamma."

Paccabhāsīti patiabhāsi.Apārutāti vivaṭā.Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ, so mayā vivaritvā ṭhapitoti dasseti.Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ pamuñcantu vissajjentu. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho – ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattitampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā na bhāsiṃ. Idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi tesaṃ saṅkappanti.

Paccabhāsī means replied. Apārutā means opened. Amatassa dvārā means the noble path. He shows that it is the door to Nibbāna, the immortal, and that it has been opened by him. Pamuñcantu saddha means, "Let all release and send forth their faith." In the last two lines, this is the meaning: "Indeed, I did not speak this excellent, supreme Dhamma, which is my own, well-established and refined, being one who felt bodily and verbal fatigue. But now let all people bring a vessel of faith; I will fill their intention."

Antaradhāyīti satthāraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā antarahito, sakaṭṭhānameva gatoti attho. Gate ca pana tasmiṃ bhagavā ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti? Āḷārudakānaṃ kālaṅkatabhāvaṃ, pañcavaggiyānañca bahūpakārabhāvaṃ ñatvā tesaṃ dhammaṃ desetukāmo bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatanaṃ gantvā dhammacakkaṃ pavattesīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Antaradhāyī means having paid homage to the Teacher with garlands and perfumes, he disappeared, meaning he went to his own abode. And when he had gone, the Blessed One, knowing that Āḷāra Kālāma and Uddaka Rāmaputta were deceased, and that the five monks had been of great help, desiring to teach them the Dhamma, went to Isipatana in Bārāṇasī and set in motion the wheel of the Dhamma. The first.

2. Gāravasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Gāravasuttavaṇṇanā

173.Dutiyeudapādīti ayaṃ vitakko pañcame sattāhe udapādi.Agāravoti aññasmiṃ gāravarahito, kañci garuṭṭhāne aṭṭhapetvāti attho.Appatissoti patissayarahito, kañci jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne aṭṭhapetvāti attho.

173. In the second, udapādī means this thought arose in the fifth week. Agāravo means without reverence for another, without placing anyone in a position of respect. Appatisso means without dependence, without placing anyone in a position of seniority.

Sadevaketiādīsu saddhiṃ devehisadevake. Devaggahaṇena cettha mārabrahmesu gahitesupi māro nāma vasavattī sabbesaṃ upari vasaṃ vatteti, brahmā nāma mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati. Dvīhi dvīsu…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasupi cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, so iminā sīlasampannataroti vattuṃ mā labhatūtisamārake sabrahmaketi visuṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā samaṇā nāma ekanikāyādivasena bahussutā sīlavanto paṇḍitā, brāhmaṇāpi vatthuvijjādivasena bahussutā paṇḍitā, te iminā sīlasampannatarāti vattuṃ mā labhantūtisassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāyāti vuttaṃ.Sadevamanussāyāti idaṃ pana nippadesato dassanatthaṃ gahitameva gahetvā vuttaṃ. Apicettha purimāni tīṇi padāni lokavasena vuttāni, pacchimāni dve pajāvasena.Sīlasampannataranti sīlena sampannataraṃ, adhikataranti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sīlādayo cattāro dhammā lokiyalokuttarā kathitā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ lokiyameva. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hetaṃ.

Sadevaketiādi: Sadevake, meaning with the devas. Although Māra and Brahmā are included when "devas" is mentioned here, Māra is Vasavattī, who wields power over all, and Brahmā is of great power, illuminating a thousand world-systems with one finger. With two fingers, he illuminates two thousand world-systems, and so on up to ten thousand world-systems with ten fingers. To prevent him from claiming, "I am superior in virtue," samārake sabrahmake is stated separately. Similarly, samaṇas are those of great learning, virtuous, and wise, based on various schools, and brāhmaṇas are also of great learning and wise, based on material sciences and so on. To prevent them from claiming, "I am superior in virtue," sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāyā is stated. Sadevamanussāyā is stated to show that it is taken completely without exception. Moreover, the first three terms are stated in terms of the world, while the last two are in terms of beings. Sīlasampannatara means more accomplished in virtue, more superior. The same method applies to the rest. Here, the four qualities of virtue, etc., are described as mundane and supramundane, while the knowledge and vision of liberation are mundane only. This is the reviewing knowledge (paccavekkhaṇañāṇa).

Pāturahosīti – ‘‘ayaṃ satthā avīcito yāva bhavaggā sīlādīhi attanā adhikataraṃ apassanto ‘mayā paṭividdhaṃ navalokuttaradhammameva sakkatvā garuṃ katvā upanissāya viharissāmī’ti cinteti, kāraṇaṃ bhagavā cinteti, atthaṃ vuḍḍhivisesaṃ cinteti, gacchāmissa ussāhaṃ janessāmī’’ti cintetvā purato pākaṭo ahosi, abhimukhe aṭṭhāsīti attho.

Pāturahosīti: "The Teacher, not seeing anyone more superior than himself in virtue, etc., from Avīci to the peak of existence, thinks, 'I will live honoring, respecting, and relying only on the supramundane Dhamma that I have realized.' Because the Blessed One thinks, considers the purpose, contemplates a special increase, I will go and generate enthusiasm," thinking thus, he appeared in front, stood face to face, is the meaning.

Viharanti cāti ettha yo vadeyya ‘‘viharantīti vacanato paccuppannepi bahū buddhā’’ti, so ‘‘bhagavāpi, bhante, etarahi arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā vacanena paṭibāhitabbo.

Viharanti cāti: If someone were to say here, "Because it says 'live,' there are many Buddhas in the present too," he should be refuted with this statement, "The Blessed One, O Bhante, is now an Arahant, a Fully Enlightened One."

‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati;

"I have no teacher, none equal to me exists;
In the world with its devas, there is no rival to me." (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285) –

Tasmāti yasmā sabbepi buddhā saddhammagaruno, tasmā.Mahattamabhikaṅkhatāti mahantabhāvaṃ patthayamānena.Saraṃ buddhāna-sāsananti buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ sarantena. Dutiyaṃ.

Tasmāti: Because all Buddhas honor the true Dhamma, therefore. Mahattamabhikaṅkhatāti: By one desiring greatness. Saraṃ buddhāna-sāsananti: By one who remembers the teaching of the Buddhas. The second (reason).

3. Brahmadevasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Brahmadeva Sutta Commentary

174.Tatiyeekoti ṭhānādīsu iriyāpathesu ekako, ekavihārīti attho.Vūpakaṭṭhoti kāyena vūpakaṭṭho nissaṭo.Appamattoti satiyā avippavāse ṭhito.Ātāpīti vīriyātāpena samannāgato.Pahitattoti pesitatto.Kulaputtāti ācārakulaputtā.Sammadevāti na iṇaṭṭā na bhayaṭṭā na jīvitapakatā hutvā, yathā vā tathā vā pabbajitāpi ye anulomapaṭipadaṃ pūrenti, te sammadeva agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajanti nāma.Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānabhūtaṃ ariyaphalaṃ.Diṭṭheva dhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve.Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti sāmaṃ jānitvā paccakkhaṃ katvā.Upasampajjāti paṭilabhitvā sampādetvā vihāsi. Evaṃ viharanto cakhīṇā jāti…pe… abbhaññāsīti. Etenassa paccavekkhaṇabhūmi dassitā.

174. In the third (sutta): Ekoti, meaning alone in terms of place, etc., and posture, living alone. Vūpakaṭṭhoti, meaning secluded in body, detached. Appamattoti, meaning established in unwavering mindfulness. Ātāpīti, meaning endowed with the heat of effort. Pahitattoti, meaning with a resolute mind. Kulaputtāti, meaning sons of families with good conduct. Sammadevāti, meaning those who have gone forth not due to debt, fear, or a means of living, but those who complete the appropriate practice, those are called sammadeva, going forth from home to homelessness. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti, meaning the noble fruit, which is the culmination of the Brahmacariya of the path. Diṭṭheva dhammeti, meaning in this very existence. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti, meaning having directly realized by knowing oneself. Upasampajjāti, meaning having attained, having accomplished, he lived. And living thus, khīṇā jāti…pe… abbhaññāsīti. By this, his ground of reviewing knowledge is shown.

Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Vuccate, na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā tattha vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā vijjamānattā. Maggassa pana abhāvitattā yā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti. Sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā. Taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā – ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotī’’ti jānanto jānāti.

But which of his births is ended, and how did he directly know it? It is said, certainly not his past birth is ended, because it was ended previously; not the future, because there is no effort there; not the present, because it exists. But due to the non-development of the path, the birth that would arise in one, four, or five-aggregate existences, the divisions of one, four, or five aggregates. That, due to the development of the path, becomes subject to non-arising, is ended. Knowing this, reviewing the abandoned defilements by the development of the path – "even if karma exists in the absence of defilements, it does not lead to rebirth in the future" – he knows.

Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho.Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ.Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyabhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho.Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya, evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā katamaggabhāvanā natthīti. Atha vāitthattāyāti itthattabhāvato, imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ natthi, ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlako rukkho viyāti abbhaññāsi.Aññataroti eko.Arahatanti arahantānaṃ, bhagavato sāvakānaṃ arahataṃ abbhantaro ahosi.

Vusitanti, meaning lived, completely lived, done, practiced, completed. Brahmacariyanti, meaning the Brahmacariya of the path. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti, meaning the sixteenfold task in the four truths, by way of understanding, abandoning, realizing, and developing with the four paths, is completed. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti, meaning now for a state like this again, for such a sixteenfold activity, or for the destruction of defilements, there is no further development of the path. Or, itthattāyāti, meaning from this state of suchness, from this present aggregate continuum, there is no other aggregate continuum now; but these five aggregates are understood, they stand like a tree with its roots cut off, he directly knew. Aññataroti, meaning one. Arahatanti, meaning among the Arahants, he became one of the Arahant disciples of the Blessed One.

Sapadānanti sapadānacāraṃ, sampattagharaṃ anukkamma paṭipāṭiyā caranto.Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkamanto. Mātā panassa puttaṃ disvāva gharā nikkhamma pattaṃ gahetvā antonivesanaṃ pavesetvā paññattāsane nisīdāpesi.

Sapadānanti, meaning walking for alms in order, going to each house in turn. Upasaṅkamīti, meaning approaching. Seeing her son, the mother came out of the house, took the bowl, brought him inside the residence, and had him sit on a prepared seat.

Āhutiṃ niccaṃ paggaṇhātīti niccakāle āhutipiṇḍaṃ paggaṇhāti. Taṃ divasaṃ pana tasmiṃ ghare bhūtabalikammaṃ hoti. Sabbagehaṃ haritupalittaṃ vippakiṇṇalājaṃ vanamālaparikkhittaṃ ussitaddhajapaṭākaṃ tattha tattha puṇṇaghare ṭhapetvā daṇḍadīpikā jāletvā gandhacuṇṇamālādīhi alaṅkataṃ, samantato sañchādiyamānā dhūmakaṭacchu ahosi. Sāpi brāhmaṇī kālasseva vuṭṭhāya soḷasahi gandhodakaghaṭehi nhāyitvā sabbālaṅkārena attabhāvaṃ alaṅkari. Sā tasmiṃ samaye mahākhīṇāsavaṃ nisīdāpetvā, yāguuḷuṅkamattampi adatvā, ‘‘mahābrahmaṃ bhojessāmī’’ti suvaṇṇapātiyaṃ pāyāsaṃ pūretvā sappimadhusakkharādīhi yojetvā nivesanassa pacchābhāge haritupalittabhāvādīhi alaṅkatā bhūtapīṭhikā atthi. Sā taṃ pātiṃ ādāya, tattha gantvā, catūsu koṇesu majjhe ca ekekaṃ pāyāsapiṇḍaṃ ṭhapetvā, ekaṃ piṇḍaṃ hatthena gahetvā, yāva kapparā sappinā paggharantena pathaviyaṃ jāṇumaṇḍalaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘bhuñjatu bhavaṃ mahābrahmā, sāyatu bhavaṃ mahābrahmā, tappetu bhavaṃ mahābrahmā’’ti vadamānā brahmānaṃ bhojeti.

Āhutiṃ niccaṃ paggaṇhātīti: Regularly, at the proper time, he accepts the offering of alms food. On that day, however, there was a sacrifice to spirits in that house. The entire house was plastered with green, scattered with parched grain, surrounded by garlands, raised with banners and streamers, with full pots placed here and there, oil lamps lit, and decorated with fragrant powders and garlands, resembling a cloud of smoke wafting everywhere. That brahmin woman, having risen early, bathed with sixteen pots of scented water and adorned herself with all ornaments. Having seated the great perfected one, without giving even a bit of rice gruel, filling a golden bowl with milk-rice mixed with ghee, honey, and sugar, thinking, "I will feed the Mahābrahmā," there was a spirit platform decorated with green plaster, etc., in the back of the residence. Taking that bowl, going there, placing one lump of milk-rice in each of the four corners and in the middle, taking one lump in her hand, squatting on her knees on the ground as the ghee dripped down, saying, "May the honored Mahābrahmā eat, may the honored Mahābrahmā taste, may the honored Mahābrahmā be satisfied," she was feeding Brahmā.

Etadahosīti mahākhīṇāsavassa sīlagandhaṃ chadevaloke ajjhottharitvā brahmalokaṃ upagataṃ ghāyamānassa etaṃ ahosi.Saṃvejeyyanti codeyyaṃ, sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ yojeyyaṃ. ‘Ayaṃ hi evarūpaṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyaṃ mahākhīṇāsavaṃ nisīdāpetvā yāguuḷuṅkamattampi adatvā, ‘‘mahābrahmaṃ bhojessāmī’’ti tulaṃ pahāya hatthena tulayantī viya, bheriṃ pahāya kucchiṃ vādentī viya, aggiṃ pahāya khajjopanakaṃ dhamamānā viya bhūtabaliṃ kurumānā āhiṇḍati. Gacchāmissā micchādassanaṃ bhinditvā apāyamaggato uddharitvā yathā asītikoṭidhanaṃ buddhasāsane vippakiritvā saggamaggaṃ ārohati, tathā karomīti vuttaṃ hoti.

Etadahosīti: This occurred to the great perfected one whose virtuous fragrance, pervading the six deva-worlds, reached up to the Brahmā-world. Saṃvejeyyanti: I should stir her, lead her to right practice. "Indeed, she, having seated such a supreme recipient of offerings, a great perfected one, without giving even a bit of rice gruel, thinking, "I will feed the Mahābrahmā," is behaving like weighing with her hand instead of using scales, like drumming on her belly instead of using a drum, like fanning a firefly instead of a fire, performing a sacrifice to spirits. I will go, shatter her wrong view, lift her from the path of misery, and enable her to scatter eighty crores of wealth in the Buddha's teaching and ascend to the path of heaven," is what is meant.

Dūre itoti imamhā ṭhānā dūre brahmaloko. Tato hi kūṭāgāramattā silā pātitā ekena ahorattena aṭṭhacattālīsayojanasahassāni khepayamānā catūhi māsehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhaheyya, sabbaheṭṭhimopi brahmaloko evaṃ dūre.Yassāhutinti yassa brahmuno āhutiṃ paggaṇhāsi, tassa brahmaloko dūreti attho.Brahmapathanti ettha brahmapatho nāma cattāri kusalajjhānāni, vipākajjhānāni pana nesaṃ jīvitapatho nāma, taṃ brahmapathaṃ ajānantī tvaṃ kiṃ jappasi vippalapasi? Brahmāno hi sappītikajjhānena yāpenti, na etaṃ tiṇabījāni pakkhipitvā randhaṃ goyūsaṃ khādanti, mā akāraṇā kilamasīti.

Dūre itoti: The Brahmā-world is far from this place. For a stone the size of a peaked house dropped from there, traveling forty-eight thousand yojanas in one day and night, would take four months to reach the earth; even the lowest Brahmā-world is so far. Yassāhutinti: The Brahmā-world of the Brahmā to whom she offers a sacrifice is far, is the meaning. Brahmapathanti: Here, the Brahmapatha means the four wholesome jhānas; the resultant jhānas are their path of life; not knowing that Brahmapatha, what do you babble, what do you prattle? For Brahmās live by means of jhāna with delight; they do not eat husked rice and greens after scattering seeds, do not needlessly exert yourself.

eso hi te brāhmaṇi brahmadevotiādimāha. Tatthanirūpadhikoti kilesābhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇopadhīhi virahito.Atidevapattoti devānaṃ atidevabhāvaṃ brahmānaṃ atibrahmabhāvaṃ patto.Anaññaposīti ṭhapetvā imaṃ attabhāvaṃ aññassa attabhāvassa vā puttadārassa vā aposanatāya anaññaposī.

eso hi te brāhmaṇi brahmadevotiādi he said. There, nirūpadhikoti, meaning devoid of the defilements, aggregates, sense pleasures, and attachments. Atidevapattoti, meaning having attained the state of being the over-deva of devas, the over-Brahmā of Brahmās. Anaññaposīti, meaning not nourishing another self or children or spouse, other than this very existence.

Āhuneyyoti āhunapiṇḍaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto.Vedagūti catumaggasaṅkhātehi vedehi dukkhassantaṃ gato.Bhāvitattoti attānaṃ bhāvetvā vaḍḍhetvā ṭhito.Anūpalittoti taṇhādīhi lepehi ālitto.Ghāsesanaṃ iriyatīti āhārapariyesanaṃ carati.

Āhuneyyoti, meaning worthy of receiving alms food. Vedagūti, meaning one who has gone to the end of suffering by means of the four paths. Bhāvitattoti, meaning one who has developed and increased himself. Anūpalittoti, meaning unsoiled by the stains of craving, etc. Ghāsesanaṃ iriyatīti, meaning he wanders in search of food.

Na tassa pacchā na puratthamatthīti pacchā vuccati atītaṃ, puratthaṃ vuccati anāgataṃ, atītānāgatesu khandhesu chandarāgavirahitassa pacchā vā puratthaṃ vā natthīti vadati.Santotiādīsu rāgādisantatāya santo. Kodhadhūmavigamāvidhūmo,dukkhābhāvāanīgho,kattaradaṇḍādīni gahetvā vicarantopi vadhakacetanāya abhāvānikkhittadaṇḍo. Tasathāvaresūti ettha pana puthujjanā tasā nāma, khīṇāsavā thāvarā nāma. Satta pana sekhā tasāti vattuṃ na sakkā, thāvarā na honti, bhajamānā pana thāvarapakkhameva bhajanti.So tyāhutinti so te āhutiṃ.

Na tassa pacchā na puratthamatthīti: Pacchā means the past, puratthaṃ means the future. He says that for one without desire and lust for the past and future aggregates, there is no past or future. Santotiādi: Among them, santo means peaceful due to the calming of passions, etc. Vidhūmo means without smoke due to the cessation of anger. Anīgho means without distress due to the absence of suffering. Nikkhittadaṇḍo means one who has laid down the stick, even wandering around holding knives, etc., due to the absence of the intention to kill. Tasathāvaresūti: Here, ordinary people are tasā, while perfected ones (khīṇāsava) are thāvarā. However, the seven trainees (sekha) cannot be called tasā, nor are they thāvarā, but they tend towards the side of thāvarā. So tyāhutinti: He is the one to whom you should offer.

Visenibhūtoti kilesasenāya viseno jāto.Anejoti nittaṇho.Susīloti khīṇāsavasīlena susīlo.Suvimuttacittoti phalavimuttiyā suṭṭhu vimuttacitto.Oghatiṇṇanti cattāro oghe tiṇṇaṃ. Ettakena kathāmaggena brahmā therassa vaṇṇaṃ kathento āyatane brāhmaṇiṃ niyojesi. Avasānagāthā pana saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitā.Patiṭṭhapesi dakkhiṇanti catupaccayadakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhapesi.Sukhamāyatikanti sukhāyatikaṃ āyatiṃ sukhavipākaṃ, sukhāvahanti attho. Tatiyaṃ.

Visenibhūtoti: One who has become without the army of defilements. Anejoti: Without craving. Susīloti: Of excellent virtue with the virtue of a perfected one. Suvimuttacittoti: With a mind well liberated by the liberation of fruition. Oghatiṇṇanti: One who has crossed the four floods. With this much discourse, Brahmā, describing the Thera's qualities, directed the brahmin woman to the appropriate offering. The final verse was placed by the compilers. Patiṭṭhapesi dakkhiṇanti: She established the four-requisite offering. Sukhamāyatikanti: With a happy result, with a happy ripening, meaning bringing happiness in the future. The third (sutta).

4. Bakabrahmasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bakabrahma Sutta Commentary

175.Catutthepāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti lāmikā sassatadiṭṭhi.Idaṃ niccanti idaṃ saha kāyena brahmaṭṭhānaṃ aniccaṃ ‘‘nicca’’nti vadati. Dhuvādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Tatthadhuvanti thiraṃ.Sassatanti sadā vijjamānaṃ.Kevalanti akhaṇḍaṃ sakalaṃ.Acavanadhammanti acavanasabhāvaṃ.Idaṃ hi na jāyatītiādīsu imasmiṃ ṭhāne koci jāyanako vā jīyanako vā mīyanako vā cavanako vā upapajjanako vā natthi, taṃ sandhāya vadati.Ito ca panaññanti ito sahakāyā brahmaṭṭhānā uttari aññaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma natthīti. Evamassa thāmagatā sassatadiṭṭhi uppannā hoti. Evaṃvādī ca pana so upari tisso jhānabhūmiyo cattāro magge cattāri phalāni nibbānanti sabbaṃ paṭibāhati. Kadā panassa sā diṭṭhi uppannāti? Paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattakāle. Dutiyajjhānabhūmiyanti eke.

175. In the fourth (sutta): Pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti: A base eternalist view (sassatadiṭṭhi). Idaṃ niccanti: He says that this Brahma-realm with the body is impermanent, but says "permanent." Dhuva, etc., are synonyms for the same. There, dhuvanti means stable. Sassatanti means eternally existing. Kevalanti means undivided, whole. Acavanadhammanti means of an unchanging nature. Idaṃ hi na jāyatītiādi: In this place, there is no one who is born, ages, dies, passes away, or is reborn; referring to that, he says. Ito ca panaññanti: Other than this Brahma-realm with the body, there is no other escape. Thus, he had an established eternalist view (sassatadiṭṭhi). Saying this, he rejects the three higher jhāna-planes, the four paths, the four fruits, and Nibbāna. When did this view arise for him? At the time of rebirth in the first jhāna-plane. Some say in the second jhāna-plane.

Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – heṭṭhupapattiko kiresa brahmā anuppanne buddhuppāde isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā catutthajjhānabhūmiyaṃ vehapphalabrahmaloke pañcakappasatikaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā heṭṭhupapattikaṃ katvā tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā subhakiṇhabrahmaloke catusaṭṭhikappaṃ āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha dutiyajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā ābhassare aṭṭha kappe āyuṃ gahetvā nibbatti. Tattha paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā, paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyuko hutvā nibbatti. So paṭhamakāle attanā katakammañca nibbattaṭṭhānañca aññāsi, kāle pana gacchante gacchante ubhayaṃ pamussitvā sassatadiṭṭhiṃ uppādesi.

Here is the sequential account: It is said that this Brahmā, reborn below, having gone forth as an ascetic when a Buddha had not yet arisen, having done the preliminary work for the kasiṇa, having developed the attainments, and without falling away from jhāna, at death, was reborn in the Vehapphala Brahma-world in the fourth jhāna-plane, with a lifespan of five hundred eons. Having stayed there for his entire lifespan, causing rebirth below, having developed the third jhāna, he was reborn in the Subhakiṇha Brahma-world with a lifespan of sixty-four eons. There, having developed the second jhāna, he was reborn in the Ābhassara world with a lifespan of eight eons. There, having developed the first jhāna, he was reborn in the first jhāna-plane with a lifespan of one eon. In the beginning, he knew the karma he had done and the place where he was reborn, but as time passed, forgetting both, he generated an eternalist view.

Avijjāgatoti avijjāya gato samannāgato aññāṇī andhībhūto.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.Vakkhatīti bhaṇati. ‘‘Yatrā’’ti nipātayogena pana anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ.

Avijjāgatoti: Gone to ignorance, endowed with ignorance, unknowing, blinded. Yatra hi nāmāti: Which indeed. Vakkhatīti: Will speak. However, by using the particle "yatra," it is made a future tense.

dvāsattatītiādimāha. Tassattho – bho gotama, mayaṃ dvāsattati janāpuññakammātena puññakammena idha nibbattā.Vasavattinosayaṃ aññesaṃ vase avattitvā pare attano vase vattema, jātiñca jarañca atītā, ayaṃ no vedehi gatattā ‘‘vedagū’’ti saṅkhaṃ gatā bhagavā antimā brahmupapatti.Asmābhijappanti janā anekāti anekajanā amhe abhijappanti. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho bhavaṃ brahmā, mahābrahmā, abhibhū, anabhibhūto, aññadatthudaso, vasavattī, issaro, kattā, nimmātā, seṭṭho, sajitā, vasī, pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti evaṃ patthenti pihentīti.

dvāsattatītiādi he said. Its meaning: O Gotama, we seventy-two people were reborn here by that meritorious karma. Vasavattino—without being subject to the power of others ourselves, we subject others to our power, having passed beyond birth and aging, we have gone to the state of being knowers of the Vedas, thus "vedagū" has gone to the count, the Blessed One is the last Brahma rebirth. Asmābhijappanti janā anekāti: Many people crave for us. "This venerable Brahmā is the Mahābrahmā, the conqueror, unconquered, all-seeing, omnipotent, lord, creator, maker, chief, victorious, disciplined, father of beings who have been and will be," thus they desire and yearn.

appaṃ hi etantiādimāha. Tatthaetanti yaṃ tvaṃ idha tava āyuṃ ‘‘dīgha’’nti maññasi, etaṃ appaṃ parittakaṃ.Sataṃ sahassānaṃ nirabbudānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassanirabbudānaṃ.Āyuṃ pajānāmīti, ‘‘idāni tava avasiṭṭhaṃ ettakaṃ āyū’’ti ahaṃ jānāmi.Anantadassī bhagavā hamasmīti, bhagavā, tumhe ‘‘ahaṃ anantadassī jātiādīni upātivatto’’ti vadatha.Kiṃ me purāṇanti, yadi tvaṃ anantadassī, evaṃ sante idaṃ me ācikkha, kiṃ mayhaṃ purāṇaṃ?Vatasīlavattanti sīlameva vuccati.Yamahaṃ vijaññāti yaṃ ahaṃ tayā kathitaṃ jāneyyaṃ, taṃ me ācikkhāti vadati.

appaṃ hi etantiādi (he said) etc. Herein, etanti (this) means what you here consider your lifespan as "long," that is short, limited. Sataṃ sahassānaṃ nirabbudānanti (a hundred thousand nirabbudas) means a hundred thousand nirabbudas according to the nirabbuda calculation. Āyuṃ pajānāmīti (I know the lifespan) means, "I know how much of your lifespan remains." Anantadassī bhagavā hamasmīti (I am the Blessed One, the seer of the endless) means, "Blessed One, you say 'I am the seer of the endless, having transcended birth and so on.'" Kiṃ me purāṇanti (What is my former deed?) means, "If you are the seer of the endless, then tell me this: what is my former deed?" Vatasīlavattanti (habitual virtue) is simply called virtue. Yamahaṃ vijaññāti (that I might know) means, "Tell me what I might know of what was spoken by you," he says.

yaṃ tvaṃ apāyesītiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – pubbe kiresa kulaghare nibbattitvā kāmesu ādīnavaṃ disvā – ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissāmī’’ti nikkhamma isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakajjhānassa lābhī hutvā gaṅgātīre paṇṇasālaṃ kāretvā jhānaratiyā vītināmeti. Tadā ca kālenakālaṃ satthavāhā pañcahi sakaṭasatehi marukantāraṃ paṭipajjanti. Marukantāre pana divā na sakkā gantuṃ, rattiṃ gamanaṃ hoti. Atha purimasakaṭassa aggayuge yuttabalibaddā gacchantā gacchantā nivattitvā āgatamaggābhimukhā ahesuṃ, sabbasakaṭāni tatheva nivattitvā aruṇe uggate nivattitabhāvaṃ jāniṃsu. Tesañca tadā kantāraṃ atikkamanadivaso ahosi. Sabbaṃ dārudakaṃ parikkhīṇaṃ – tasmā ‘‘natthi dāni amhākaṃ jīvita’’nti cintetvā, goṇe cakkesu bandhitvā, manussā sakaṭacchāyaṃ pavisitvā nipajjiṃsu.

yaṃ tvaṃ apāyesītiādi (what you relinquished) etc., he said. Herein, the meaning is this: it is said that formerly he was born in a family and, seeing the danger in sensual pleasures, thinking, "I will make an end to birth, aging, and death," he went forth into the ascetic life. Having developed the attainments, he became a master of the jhāna that is the basis for the higher knowledges. He had a leaf hut built on the bank of the Ganges and spent his time in the bliss of jhāna. At that time, caravans of five hundred carts would occasionally travel through the desert. In the desert, it is not possible to travel during the day; travel takes place at night. Then, the oxen yoked to the lead cart, while going along, turned back and faced the way they had come. All the carts likewise turned back, and at sunrise, they realized they had turned back. For them, that was the day to cross the desert. All the wood and water were depleted, so, thinking, "Now there is no life for us," they tied the oxen to the wheels, and the people lay down in the shade of the carts.

apāyesīti pāyesi. A-kāro nipātamattaṃ.Gammanīti gimhe.Sampareteti gimhātapena phuṭṭhe anugate.

apāyesīti (you relinquished) means relinquished. The a- is merely an expletive. Gammanīti (in the hot season) means in the summer. Sampareteti (scorched) means affected, overtaken by the heat of summer.

eṇikūlasminti gaṅgātīre.Gayhakaṃ nīyamānanti gahetvā nīyamānaṃ, karamaraṃ nīyamānantipi attho.

eṇikūlasminti (on the bank of the Ganges) means on the bank of the Ganges. Gayhakaṃ nīyamānanti (being led with a grip) means being led having been seized; it also means being led by the hand.

luddenāti dāruṇena.Manussakamyāti manussakāmatāya, manusse viheṭhetukāmatāyāti attho.

luddenāti (by the cruel one) means by the cruel one. Manussakamyāti (out of a desire to harm men) means out of a desire to harm men, out of a desire to injure people, is the meaning.

Aparasmimpi samaye esa isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā kesavo nāma tāpaso ahosi. Tena samayena amhākaṃ bodhisatto kappo nāma māṇavo kesavassa baddhacaro antevāsiko hutvā ācariyassa kiṃkārapaṭissāvī manāpacārī buddhisampanno atthacaro ahosi. Kesavo tena vinā vasituṃ na sakkoti, taṃ nissāyeva jīvikaṃ kappesi. Satthā idampi tassa pubbakammaṃ dassento catutthaṃ gāthamāha.

In another time, this same person, having gone forth into the ascetic life, became a hermit named Kesava. At that time, our Bodhisatta, as a young man named Kappa, became Kesava's devoted attendant, a disciple who fulfilled his teacher's needs, was agreeable, intelligent, and helpful. Kesava could not live without him; he maintained his livelihood relying on him. The Teacher, showing this former deed of his, spoke the fourth verse.

baddhacaroti antevāsiko, so pana jeṭṭhantevāsiko ahosi.Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññīti, ‘‘sammā buddhimā vatasampanno aya’’nti evaṃ maññamāno kappo tava antevāsiko ahosiṃ ahaṃ so tena samayenāti dasseti.Aññepi jānāsīti na kevalaṃ mayhaṃ āyumeva, aññepi tvaṃ jānāsiyeva.Tathā hi buddhoti tathā hi tvaṃ buddho, yasmā buddho, tasmā jānāsīti attho.Tathā hi tyāyaṃ jalitānubhāvoti yasmā ca tvaṃ buddho, tasmā te ayaṃ jalito ānubhāvo.Obhāsayaṃ tiṭṭhatīti sabbaṃ brahmalokaṃ obhāsayanto tiṭṭhati. Catutthaṃ.

baddhacaroti (devoted attendant) means a disciple; he was, however, a senior disciple. Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññīti (you regarded him as truly intelligent and virtuous) means, "Thinking, 'This Kappa is truly intelligent and virtuous,' Kappa was your attendant; I was he at that time," he shows. Aññepi jānāsīti (Do you also know other things?) means, "You know not only my lifespan but also other things." Tathā hi buddhoti (For you are a Buddha) means, "For you are a Buddha; because you are a Buddha, therefore you know," is the meaning. Tathā hi tyāyaṃ jalitānubhāvoti (For this radiant power is yours) means, "And because you are a Buddha, therefore this radiant power is yours." Obhāsayaṃ tiṭṭhatīti (stands illuminating) means stands illuminating the entire Brahma-world. The fourth [sutta].

5. Aññatarabrahmasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Discourse on Another Brahma

176.Pañcametejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvāti tejokasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya,‘‘sarīrato jālā nikkhamantū’’tiadhiṭṭhahanto adhiṭṭhānacittānubhāvena sakalasarīrato jālā nikkhamanti, evaṃ tejodhātuṃ samāpanno nāma hoti, tathā samāpajjitvā.Tasmiṃ brahmaloketi kasmā thero tattha agamāsi? Therassa kira tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā tassa brahmuno upari nisinnaṃ tathāgataṃ disvā ‘‘aṭṭhivedhī ayaṃ puggalo, mayāpettha gantabba’’nti ahosi, tasmā agamāsi. Sesānaṃ gamanepi eseva nayo. So hi brahmā tathāgatassa ceva tathāgatasāvakānañca ānubhāvaṃ adisvā abhabbo vinayaṃ upagantuṃ, tena so sannipāto ahosi. Tattha tathāgatassa sarīrato uggatajālā sakalabrahmalokaṃ atikkamitvā ajaṭākāse pakkhandā, tā ca pana chabbaṇṇā ahesuṃ, tathāgatassa sāvakānaṃ ābhā pakativaṇṇāva.

176. In the fifth [sutta], tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvāti (having attained the fire element) means having performed the preliminary work for the fire kasiṇa, having emerged from the jhāna that is the basis [for the higher knowledges], ‘‘sarīrato jālā nikkhamantū’’tiadhiṭṭhahanto (resolving, "Let flames issue from my body"), due to the power of the resolution-thought, flames issue from the entire body; thus, he is said to have attained the fire element. Having attained it thus. Tasmiṃ brahmaloketi (in that Brahma-world) means why did the Elder go there? It is said that the Elder, having attained the fire element and seeing the Tathāgata seated above that Brahma, thought, "This person is an eight-piercer; I must go there." Therefore, he went. The same method applies to the going of the others. For that Brahma, without seeing the power of the Tathāgata and the Tathāgata's disciples, is incapable of undertaking the Discipline. Therefore, that gathering took place. Therein, the flames that arose from the Tathāgata's body, having transcended the entire Brahma-world, spread in the open space. And those [flames] were six-colored; the aura of the Tathāgata's disciples, however, [was] of the natural color.

Passasi vītivattantanti imasmiṃ brahmaloke aññabrahmasarīravimānālaṅkārādīnaṃ pabhā atikkamamānaṃ buddhassa bhagavato pabhassaraṃ pabhaṃ passasīti pucchati.Na me, mārisa, sā diṭṭhīti yā mesā, ‘‘idhāgantuṃ samattho añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā natthī’’ti pure diṭṭhi, natthi me sā.Kathaṃ vajjanti kena kāraṇena vadeyyaṃ.Niccomhi sassatoti imassa kira brahmuno laddhidiṭṭhi sassatadiṭṭhi cāti dve diṭṭhiyo. Tatrāssa tathāgatañceva tathāgatasāvake ca passato laddhidiṭṭhi pahīnā. Bhagavā panettha mahantaṃ dhammadesanaṃ desesi. Brahmā desanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Itissa maggena sassatadiṭṭhi pahīnā, tasmā evamāha.

Passasi vītivattantanti (Do you see [my radiance] surpassing?) means, "In this Brahma-world, do you see the radiant aura of the Blessed Buddha surpassing the aura of other Brahma's bodies, mansions, ornaments, and so on?" he asks. Na me, mārisa, sā diṭṭhīti (That view is not mine, good sir) means, "That view of mine that [held that] 'there is no other ascetic or brahmin capable of coming here' is no more." Kathaṃ vajjanti (How could I say?) means, "For what reason should I say [that it still exists]?" Niccomhi sassatoti (I am permanent, eternal) means that Brahma had two views: the acquired view and the eternalist view. Therein, when he saw the Tathāgata and the Tathāgata's disciples, the acquired view was abandoned by him. In this context, the Blessed One delivered a great Dhamma talk. At the end of the talk, the Brahma was established in the fruit of stream-entry. With that path, the eternalist view was abandoned; therefore, he spoke thus.

Brahmapārisajjanti brahmapāricārikaṃ. Therānañhi bhaṇḍagāhakadaharā viya brahmānampi pārisajjā brahmāno nāma honti.Tenupasaṅkamāti kasmā therasseva santikaṃ pesesi? There kirassa tattakeneva kathāsallāpena vissāso udapādi, tasmā tasseva santikaṃ pesesiaññepīti yathā tumhe cattāro janā, kinnu kho evarūpā aññepi atthi, udāhu tumhe cattāro eva mahiddhikāti?Tevijjāti pubbenivāsadibbacakkhuāsavakkhayasaṅkhātāhi tīhi vijjāhi samannāgatā.Iddhipattāti iddhividhañāṇaṃ pattā.Cetopariyāyakovidāti paresaṃ cittācāre kusalā. Evamettha pañca abhiññāpi sarūpena vuttā. Dibbasotaṃ pana tāsaṃ vasena āgatameva hoti.Bahūti evarūpā chaḷabhiññā buddhasāvakā bahū gaṇanapathaṃ atikkantā, sakalaṃ jambudīpaṃ kāsāvapajjotaṃ katvā vicarantīti. Pañcamaṃ.

Brahmapārisajjanti (belonging to the retinue of Brahma) means like young servants who are custodians of goods, those belonging to the retinue of Brahma are also called Brahmas. Tenupasaṅkamāti (approach him) means why did he send [them] to the Elder's presence alone? It is said that trust arose in him through that brief conversation alone; therefore, he sent [them] to his presence alone. aññepīti (are there others too?) means, "Just as you are four people, are there others of this kind, or are you four alone greatly powerful?" Tevijjāti (possessing the three knowledges) means endowed with the three knowledges consisting of the knowledge of former abodes, the divine eye, and the destruction of the āsavas. Iddhipattāti (attained to psychic power) means attained to the knowledge of psychic power. Cetopariyāyakovidāti (skilled in the minds of others) means skilled in the mental conduct of others. Thus, here, even the five supernormal knowledges are spoken of in their own form. But the divine ear is included by way of their [the other knowledges'] nature. Bahūti (many) means, "Many disciples of the Buddha with the six supernormal knowledges are beyond counting, wandering making the entire Jambudīpa a blaze of saffron robes." The fifth [sutta].

6. Brahmalokasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Discourse on the Brahma-world

177.Chaṭṭhepaccekaṃ dvārabāhanti ekeko ekekaṃ dvārabāhaṃ nissāya dvārapālā viya aṭṭhaṃsu.Iddhoti jhānasukhena samiddho.Phītoti abhiññāpupphehi supupphito.Anadhivāsentoti asahanto.Etadavocāti etesaṃ nimmitabrahmānaṃ majjhe nisinno etaṃ ‘‘passasi me’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

177. In the sixth [sutta], paccekaṃ dvārabāhanti (each at a door-post) means they stood each relying on one door-post each, like doorkeepers. Iddhoti (prosperous) means prosperous with the bliss of jhāna. Phītoti (flourishing) means flourishing with the flowers of the higher knowledges. Anadhivāsentoti (not tolerating) means not enduring. Etadavocāti (said this) means seated amidst those created Brahmas, he spoke this statement beginning with "Do you see me?".

Tayo supaṇṇāti gāthāya pañcasatāti satapadaṃ rūpavasena vā pantivasena vā yojetabbaṃ. Rūpavasena tāvatayo supaṇṇāti tīṇi supaṇṇarūpasatāni.Caturo ca haṃsāti cattārihaṃsarūpasatāni.Bugghīnisā pañcasatāti byagghasadisā ekacce migā byagghīnisā nāma, tesaṃ byagghīnisārūpakānaṃ pañcasatāni, pantivasenatayo supaṇṇāti tīṇi supaṇṇapantisatāni,caturo haṃsāti cattāri haṃsapantisatāni.Byagghīnisā pañcasatāti pañca byagghīnisā pantisatāni.Jhāyinoti jhāyissa mayhaṃ vimāne ayaṃ vibhūtīti dasseti.Obhāsayanti obhāsayamānaṃ.Uttarassaṃ disāyanti taṃ kira kanakavimānaṃ tesaṃ mahābrahmānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato uttaradisāyaṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha. Ayaṃ panassa adhippāyo – evarūpe kanakavimāne vasanto ahaṃ kassa aññassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gamissāmīti.Rūpe raṇaṃ disvāti rūpamhi jātijarābhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ dosaṃ disvā.Sadā pavedhitanti sītādīhi ca niccaṃ pavedhitaṃ calitaṃ ghaṭṭitaṃ rūpaṃ disvā.Tasmā na rūpe ramati sumedhoti yasmā rūpe raṇaṃ passati, sadā pavedhitañca rūpaṃ passati, tasmā sumedho sundarapañño so satthā rūpe na ramatīti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Tayo supaṇṇāti (three Garuḍas) in the verse, the five hundred is to be connected to "hundreds of rows" or "according to form." According to form, tayo supaṇṇāti (three Garuḍas) [means] three hundred Garuḍa-forms. Caturo ca haṃsāti (and four swans) [means] four hundred swan-forms. Bugghīnisā pañcasatāti (five hundred tigresses) means certain animals similar to tigers are called tigresses; five hundred of those tigress-forms. According to rows, tayo supaṇṇāti (three Garuḍas) [means] three hundred rows of Garuḍas. Caturo haṃsāti (and four swans) [means] four hundred rows of swans. Byagghīnisā pañcasatāti (five hundred tigresses) [means] five hundred rows of tigresses. Jhāyinoti (of one who meditates) means he shows, "This splendor is in my mansion, who meditates." Obhāsayanti (illuminating) means illuminating. Uttarassaṃ disāyanti (in the northern direction) means it is said that golden mansion is in the northern direction from the place where those Great Brahmas were standing. Therefore, he spoke thus. However, his meaning is this: "Living in such a golden mansion, to whose patronage else should I go?" Rūpe raṇaṃ disvāti (having seen danger in form) means having seen the fault consisting of the breaking up of birth and aging in form. Sadā pavedhitanti (always shaken) means having seen that form is always shaken, moved, and agitated by cold and so on. Tasmā na rūpe ramati sumedhoti (Therefore, the wise one delights not in form) means, "Since he sees danger in form and sees that form is always shaken, therefore the wise one, the one with beautiful wisdom, that Teacher, delights not in form." The sixth [sutta].

7. Kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Kokālika Discourse

178.Sattameappameyyaṃ paminantoti appameyyaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalaṃ ‘‘ettakaṃ sīlaṃ, ettako samādhi, ettakā paññā’’ti evaṃ minanto.Kodhavidvā vikappayeti ko idha vidvā medhāvī vikappeyya, khīṇāsavova khīṇāsavaṃ minanto kappeyyāti dīpeti.Nivutaṃ taṃ maññeti yo pana puthujjano taṃ pametuṃ ārabhati, taṃ nivutaṃ avakujjapaññaṃ maññāmīti. Sattamaṃ.

178. In the seventh [sutta], appameyyaṃ paminantoti (measuring the immeasurable) means measuring the immeasurable person who is a perfected one, [saying] "his virtue is so much, his concentration is so much, his wisdom is so much." Kodhavidvā vikappayeti (what wise man would dispute?) means, "Here, what wise man, intelligent man, would dispute? Only a perfected one would measure a perfected one," he shows. Nivutaṃ taṃ maññeti (I deem him covered up) means, "However, I deem one who is a worldling and undertakes to measure that one to be covered up, to have inverted wisdom." The seventh [sutta].

8. Katamodakatissasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Katamodakatissa Discourse

179.Aṭṭhameakissavanti kissavā vuccati paññā, nippaññoti attho. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

179. In the eighth [sutta], akissavanti (without Kissava) means Kissava is called wisdom; without wisdom, is the meaning. The eighth [sutta].

9. Turūbrahmasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Turū Brahma Discourse

180.Navameābādhikoti ‘‘sāsapamattīhi pīḷakāhī’’tiādinā nayena anantarasutte āgatena ābādhena ābādhiko.Bāḷhagilānoti adhimattagilāno.Turūti kokālikassa upajjhāyo turutthero nāma anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā brahmaloke nibbatto. So bhūmaṭṭhakadevatā ādiṃ katvā, ‘‘ayuttaṃ kokālikena kataṃ aggasāvake antimavatthunā abbhācikkhantenā’’ti paramparāya brahmalokasampattaṃ kokālikassa pāpakammaṃ sutvā – ‘‘mā mayhaṃ passantasseva varāko nassi, ovadissāmi naṃ theresu cittapasādatthāyā’’ti āgantvā tassa purato aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘turū paccekabrahmā’’ti.Pesalāti piyasīlā.Kosi tvaṃ, āvusoti nipannakova kabarakkhīni ummīletvā evamāha.Passa yāvañca teti passa yattakaṃ tayā aparaddhaṃ, attano nalāṭe mahāgaṇḍaṃ apassanto sāsapamattāya pīḷakāya maṃ codetabbaṃ maññasīti āha.

180. In the ninth [sutta], ābādhikoti (afflicted) means afflicted with the affliction that comes in the immediately preceding discourse in the way beginning with "with pimples the size of mustard seeds." Bāḷhagilānoti (gravely ill) means excessively ill. Turūti (Turū) means the Elder Turū, Kokālika's preceptor, having attained the fruit of non-returning and having been reborn in the Brahma-world. He, beginning with the deities occupying the ground, having heard Kokālika's evil deed passed down through the lineage—[that he] accused the foremost disciples with an ultimate charge—[and thinking] "Lest the wretch perish before my very eyes, I will admonish him for the sake of inspiring confidence in the Elders," came and stood before him. Referring to that, it is said, "Turū, an individual Brahma." Pesalāti (amiable) means having loving virtue. Kosi tvaṃ, āvusoti (Who are you, friend?) means, while lying down, he opened his bloodshot eyes and spoke thus. Passa yāvañca teti (See how great [your fault] is) means, "See how much you have transgressed; not seeing the great boil on your own forehead, you think that you should rebuke me for a pimple the size of a mustard seed," he said.

purisassa hītiādimāha. Tatthakuṭhārīti kuṭhārisadisā pharusā vācā.Chindatīti kusalamūlasaṅkhāte mūleyeva nikantati.Nindiyanti ninditabbaṃ dussīlapuggalaṃ.Pasaṃsatīti uttamatthe sambhāvetvā khīṇāsavoti vadati.Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti, yo vā pasaṃsitabbo khīṇāsavo, taṃ antimavatthunā codento ‘‘dussīlo aya’’nti vadati.Vacināti mukhena so kalinti, so taṃ aparādhaṃ mukhena vicināti nāma.Kalinā tenāti tena aparādhena sukhaṃ na vindati. Nindiyapasaṃsāya hi pasaṃsiyanindāya ca samakova vipāko.

purisassa hītiādi (for a man) etc., he said. Herein, kuṭhārīti (axe) means speech that is rough like an axe. Chindatīti (cuts off) means it severs right at the root, the root consisting of wholesome roots. Nindiyanti (to be censured) means a person of bad virtue who should be censured. Pasaṃsatīti (he praises) means considering [him] in the highest sense, he says "he is a perfected one." Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti (or he censures one who should be praised) means or one who should be praised, a perfected one, accusing him with an ultimate charge, he says, "This one is of bad virtue." Vacināti mukhena so kalinti (he gathers demerit with his mouth) means he gathers that demerit with his mouth. Kalinā tenāti (through that demerit) means through that demerit, he does not find happiness. For the result is the same for censure of the censurable and for censure of the praiseworthy.

Sabbassāpisahāpi attanāti sabbena sakenapi attanāpi saddhiṃ yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo nāma, ayaṃ appamattako aparādho.Yosugatesūti yo pana sammaggatesu puggalesu cittaṃ padusseyya, ayaṃ cittapadosova tato kalito mahantataro kali.

Sabbassāpisahāpi attanāti (than all [losses] together with oneself) means, "The loss in gambling, together with all of one's own possessions, is a minor transgression." Yosugatesūti (whoever against the well-gone) means, "However, whoever should corrupt his mind against persons who have gone well, that mental corruption is a greater demerit than that."

sataṃ sahassānantiādimāha. Tatthasataṃ sahassānanti nirabbudagaṇanāya satasahassaṃ.Chattiṃsatīti aparāni chattiṃsati nirabbudāni.Pañca cāti abbudagaṇanāya pañca abbudāni.Yamariyagarahīti yaṃ ariye garahanto nirayaṃ upapajjati, tattha ettakaṃ āyuppamāṇanti. Navamaṃ.

sataṃ sahassānantiādi (a hundred thousand) etc., he said. Herein, sataṃ sahassānanti (a hundred thousand) means a hundred thousand according to the nirabbuda calculation. Chattiṃsatīti (thirty-six) means another thirty-six nirabbudas. Pañca cāti (and five) means five abbudas according to the abbuda calculation. Yamariyagarahīti (when one reviles an Ariyan) means, "When one reviling an Ariyan is reborn in hell, that is the extent of the lifespan there." The ninth [sutta].

10. Kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Kokālika Discourse

181.Dasamekokāliko bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti, ko ayaṃ kokāliko, kasmā ca upasaṅkami? Ayaṃ kira kokālikaraṭṭhe kokālikanagare kokālikaseṭṭhissa putto pabbajitvā pitarā kārāpite vihāre paṭivasati cūḷakokālikoti nāmena, na devadattassa sisso. So hi brāhmaṇaputto mahākokāliko nāma. Bhagavati pana sāvatthiyaṃ viharante dve aggasāvakā pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ janapadacārikaṃ caramānā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vivekāvāsaṃ vasitukāmā te bhikkhū uyyojetvā attano pattacīvaramādāya tasmiṃ janapade taṃ nagaraṃ patvā taṃ vihāraṃ agamaṃsu. Tattha nesaṃ kokāliko vattaṃ dassesi. Te tena saddhiṃ sammoditvā, ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ idha temāsaṃ vasissāma, mā kassaci ārocehī’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā vasiṃsu. Vasitvā pavāraṇādivase pavāretvā, ‘‘gacchāma mayaṃ, āvuso’’ti kokālikaṃ āpucchiṃsu. Kokāliko ‘‘ajjekadivasaṃ, āvuso, vasitvā sve gamissathā’’ti vatvā dutiyadivase nagaraṃ pavisitvā manusse āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso, tumhe aggasāvake idhāgantvā vasamānepi na jānātha, na ne koci paccayenāpi nimantetī’’ti. Nagaravāsino, ‘‘kahaṃ, bhante, therā, kasmā no na ārocayitthā’’ti? Kiṃ āvuso ārocitena, kiṃ na passatha dve bhikkhū therāsane nisīdante, ete aggasāvakāti. Te khippaṃ sannipatitvā sappiphāṇitādīni ceva cīvaradussāni ca saṃhariṃsu.

181. In the tenth [sutta], kokāliko bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti (the bhikkhu Kokālika approached the Blessed One) means who was this Kokālika, and why did he approach? It is said that this Kokālika, having gone forth—the son of the Kokālika millionaire in Kokālika city in the Kokālika country—resided in a monastery built by his father [and was known] by the name Cūḷakokālika; he was not a disciple of Devadatta. For the brahmin's son [who was Devadatta's disciple] was Mahākokālika by name. When the Blessed One was dwelling at Sāvatthi, two foremost disciples, wandering on tour in the country together with about five hundred bhikkhus, wishing to dwell in a secluded dwelling for the Observance of the Rains nearby, having sent those bhikkhus ahead, taking their own bowl and robes, reached that country, entered that city, and went to that monastery. There, Kokālika showed them their duties. Having exchanged greetings with them, they took the undertaking, "Friend, we will dwell here for three months; do not tell anyone," and resided [there]. Having dwelt [there], on the day of the Invitation, having invited [him], they said to Kokālika, "We are going, friend," and took leave of him. Kokālika, saying, "Stay for today, friend, and go tomorrow," on the second day, entered the city and addressed the people: "Friends, you do not even know that the foremost disciples came here and are dwelling [here]; no one invites them even with a small offering." The city-dwellers [asked], "Where are the Elders, venerable sir? Why did you not tell us?" "What is the use of telling [you], friends? Do you not see the two bhikkhus seated on the senior seat? These are the foremost disciples." They quickly gathered together ghee, molasses, and so on, as well as robes and cloths.

Kokāliko cintesi – ‘‘paramappicchā aggasāvakā payuttavācāya uppannaṃ lābhaṃ na sādiyissanti, asādiyantā ‘āvāsikassa dethā’ti vakkhantī’’ti. Taṃ taṃ lābhaṃ gāhāpetvā therānaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Therā disvāva ‘‘ime paccayā neva amhākaṃ, na kokālikassa kappantī’’ti paṭikkhipitvā pakkamiṃsu. Kokāliko ‘‘kathaṃ hi nāma attanā agaṇhantā mayhampi adāpetvā pakkamissantī’’ti? Āghātaṃ uppādesi. Tepi bhagavato santikaṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā puna attano parisaṃ ādāya janapadacārikaṃ carantā anupubbena tasmiṃ raṭṭhe tameva nagaraṃ paccāgamiṃsu. Nāgarā there sañjānitvā saha parikkhārehi dānaṃ sajjitvā nagaramajjhe maṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaṃ adaṃsu, therānañca parikkhāre upanāmesuṃ. Therā bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyādayiṃsu. Taṃ disvā kokāliko cintesi – ‘‘ime pubbe appicchā ahesuṃ, idāni pāpicchā jātā, pubbepi appicchasantuṭṭhapavivittasadisā maññe’’ti there upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘āvuso, tumhe pubbe appicchā viya, idāni pana pāpabhikkhū jātā’’ti vatvā ‘‘mūlaṭṭhāneyeva nesaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ bhindissāmī’’ti taramānarūpo nikkhamitvā sāvatthiṃ gantvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Ayameva kokāliko iminā ca kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti veditabbo.

Kokālika thought, "The foremost disciples with few desires will not approve of the gain that has arisen through persuasive speech; disapproving, they will say, 'Give it to the resident monks.'" Having had that gain accepted, he went to the elders. The elders, seeing him, rejected it, saying, "These requisites are suitable neither for us nor for Kokālika," and departed. Kokālika thought, "How can they, not accepting it themselves, depart after not even giving it to me?" He generated resentment. Those elders, after going to the Blessed One and paying homage to the Blessed One, again taking their company of monks, wandering on tour through the country, gradually returned to that same city in that country. The townspeople, recognizing the elders, prepared a donation with requisites, constructed a pavilion in the middle of the city, and gave the donation, offering requisites to the elders. The elders distributed it to the community of monks. Seeing that, Kokālika thought, "These ones were formerly of few desires; now they have become evil-desiring. Formerly too, I think they were similar to those with few desires, content, and secluded." Approaching the elders, he said, "Venerable ones, formerly you were like those with few desires, but now you have become evil monks," and thinking, "I will destroy their reputation right from its foundation," hurrying, he departed and went to Sāvatthi, to where the Blessed One was. It should be understood that this Kokālika approached for this reason.

mā hevanti tikkhattuṃ paṭisedhesi. Tatthamā hevanti mā evaṃ abhaṇi.Saddhāyikoti saddhāya ākaro pasādāvaho saddhātabbavacano vā.Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbavacano.

Mā heva: He forbade it three times. Here, mā heva means, do not speak thus. Saddhāyiko: an origin of faith, inducing confidence, or whose words should be believed. Paccayiko: whose words should be trusted.

Pakkāmīti kammānubhāvena codiyamāno pakkāmi. Okāsakataṃ hi kammaṃ na sakkā paṭibāhituṃ, taṃ tassa tattha ṭhātuṃ na adāsi.Acirapakkantassāti pakkantassa sato na cireneva.Sabbo kāyo phuṭoahosīti kesaggamattampi okāsaṃ āvajjetvā sakalasarīraṃ aṭṭhīni bhinditvā uggatāhi pīḷakāhi ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Yasmā pana buddhānubhāvena tathārūpaṃ kammaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve vipākaṃ na deti, dassanūpacāre vijahitamatte deti, tasmā tassa acirapakkantassa pīḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu.Kalāyamattiyoti caṇakamattiyo.Beluvasalāṭukamattiyoti taruṇabeluvamattiyo. (Billamattiyoti mahābeluvamattiyo.)Pabhijjiṃsūti bhijjiṃsu. Tāsu bhinnāsu sakalasarīraṃ panasapakkaṃ viya ahosi. So pakkena gattena jetavanadvārakoṭṭhake visagilito maccho viya kadalipattesu sayi. Atha dhammasavanatthaṃ āgatāgatā manussā – ‘‘dhi kokālika, dhi kokālika, ayuttamakāsi, attanoyeva mukhaṃ nissāya anayabyasanaṃ patto’’ti āhaṃsu. Tesaṃ sutvā ārakkhadevatā dhi-kāraṃ akaṃsu. Ārakkhakadevatānaṃ ākāsadevatāti iminā upāyena yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā ekadhikāro udapādi. Athassa upajjhāyo āgantvā ovādaṃ agaṇhantaṃ ñatvā garahitvā pakkāmi.

Pakkāmi: Driven by the result of his action, he departed. For an action that has been made an opportunity cannot be turned back; it did not allow him to stay there. Acirapakkantassa: to him having departed, not long after. Sabbo kāyo phuṭo ahosī: A boil arose covering his entire body, having considered even the extent of the tip of a hair as an opportunity, breaking the bones, and overwhelming him. However, since such an action, by the power of the Buddha, does not give its result in the presence of the Buddhas, it gives it as soon as the sight is avoided; therefore, boils arose on him not long after he had departed. Kalāyamattiyo: the size of chickpeas. Beluvasalāṭukamattiyo: the size of young beluva fruits. (Billamattiyo: the size of large beluva fruits.) Pabhijjiṃsū: they broke open. When those had broken open, his entire body was like a ripe jackfruit. He, with a festering body, lay on banana leaves like a fish wrongly swallowed at the gatehouse of Jetavana. Then people coming and going to hear the Dhamma said, "Alas, Kokālika, alas, Kokālika, he did what was not fitting; relying on his own mouth, he has met with misfortune and disaster." Hearing their words, the guardian deities made sounds of disgust. By this means, a single cry of disgust arose from the guardian deities as far as the Akaniṭṭha heavens. Then his preceptor came, and knowing that he did not accept his advice, rebuked him and departed.

Kālamakāsīti upajjhāye pakkante kālamakāsi.Padumaṃ nirayanti pāṭiyekko padumanirayo nāma natthi, avīcimahānirayamhiyeva pana padumagaṇanāya paccitabbe ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nibbatti.

Kālamakāsī: When his preceptor had departed, he died. Padumaṃ nirayaṃ: There is no separate Paduma hell by name; however, he was reborn in one place in Avīci, the great hell, which is to be experienced according to the reckoning of lotus flowers.

Vīsatikhārikoti māgadhakena patthena cattāro patthā kosalaraṭṭhe ekapattho hoti, tena patthena cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ, cattāri āḷhakāni doṇaṃ, catudoṇā mānikā, catumānikā khārī, tāya khāriyā vīsatikhāriko.Tilavāhoti māgadhakānaṃ sukhumatilānaṃ tilasakaṭaṃ.Abbudo nirayoti abbudo nāma pāṭiyekko nirayo natthi. Avīcimhiyeva pana abbudagaṇanāya paccitabbaṭṭhānassetaṃ nāmaṃ.Nirabbudādīsupi eseva nayo.

Vīsatikhāriko: By a Magadhan pattha, four patthas are one pattha in the Kosala country; by that pattha, four patthas are an āḷhaka, four āḷhakas are a doṇa, four doṇas are a mānika, four mānikas are a khārī, and twenty khārīs by that khārī. Tilavāho: A cartload of fine sesame seeds of the Magadhans. Abbudo nirayo: There is no separate hell called Abbuda. However, this is the name of a place in Avīci to be experienced according to the reckoning of abbudas. The same method applies in Nirabbudā and the others.

Vassagaṇanāpi panettha evaṃ veditabbā – yatheva hi sataṃ satasahassāni koṭi hoti, evaṃ sataṃ satasahassakoṭiyo pakoṭi nāma hoti, sataṃ satasahassapakoṭiyo koṭipakoṭi nāma, sataṃ satasahassakoṭipakoṭiyo nahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassanahutāni ninnahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassaninnahutāni ekaṃ abbudaṃ, tato vīsatiguṇaṃ nirabbudaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbatthāti. Dasamaṃ.

Here, the calculation of years should be understood thus: Just as a hundred thousand hundreds is a koṭi, so a hundred thousand koṭis is called a pakoṭi, a hundred thousand pakoṭis is a koṭipakoṭi, a hundred thousand koṭipakoṭis is a nahuta, a hundred thousand nahutas is a ninnahuta, a hundred thousand ninnahutas is an abbuda, then twenty times that is a nirabbuda. The same method applies everywhere. The tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

The First Chapter.

2. Dutiyavaggo

2. The Second Chapter

1. Sanaṅkumārasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Sanaṅkumārasutta Commentary

182.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamesappinītīreti sappinīnāmikāya nadiyā tīre.Sanaṅkumāroti so kira pañcasikhakumārakakāle jhānaṃ bhāvetvā brahmaloke nibbatto kumārakavaṇṇeneva vicarati. Tena naṃ ‘‘kumāro’’ti sañjānanti, porāṇakattā pana ‘‘sanaṅkumāro’’ti vuccati.Janetasminti janitasmiṃ, pajāyāti attho.Ye gottapaṭisārinoti ye janetasmiṃ gottaṃ paṭisaranti tesu loke gottapaṭisārīsu khattiyo seṭṭho.Vijjācaraṇasampannoti bhayabheravasuttapariyāyena (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) pubbenivāsādīhi vā tīhi, ambaṭṭhasuttapariyāyena (dī. ni. 1.278 ādayo) vipassanāñāṇaṃ manomayiddhi cha abhiññāyoti imāhi vā aṭṭhahi vijjāhi, sīlesu paripūrakāritā indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā jāgariyānuyogo satta saddhammā cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānānīti evaṃ pannarasadhammabhedena caraṇena ca samannāgato.So seṭṭho devamānuseti so khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo devesu ca manussesu ca seṭṭho uttamoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

182.In the first of the Second Chapter, sappinītīre: on the bank of the river named Sappinī. Sanaṅkumāro: It seems that he, having developed jhāna in the time of Pañcasikha Kumāra, having been reborn in the Brahma world, wanders around with the appearance of a youth. Therefore, they recognize him as "Kumāra," but because of his antiquity, he is called "Sanaṅkumāra." Janetasmiṃ: in those born, meaning in the populace. Ye gottapaṭisārino: Among those who, in those born, keep to their lineage, the Khattiya is the best among those who keep to their lineage in the world. Vijjācaraṇasampanno: endowed with knowledge and conduct by way of the Bhayabheravasutta (M.i.34 ff) or with the three knowledges such as the knowledge of former abodes, or by way of the Ambaṭṭhasutta (D.i.87 ff) with the eight knowledges, namely insight knowledge, the mind-made power and the six higher knowledges; and with conduct consisting of fifteen qualities such as being completely fulfilled in virtue, guarding the doors of the senses, moderation in eating, devotion to wakefulness, the seven good qualities and the four form jhānas. So seṭṭho devamānuse: That Brahmin, a arahant, is the best, the most excellent among gods and humans. The first.

2. Devadattasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Devadattasutta Commentary

183.Dutiyeacirapakkanteti saṅghaṃ bhinditvā nacirasseva veḷuvanato gayāsīsaṃ gate.Assatarinti gadrabhassa vaḷavāya jātaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.

183.In the second, acirapakkante: not long after having broken up the Sangha, having gone from Veḷuvana to Gayāsīsa. Assatarī: Born of a female donkey and a mare. The second.

3. Andhakavindasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Andhakavindasutta Commentary

184.Tatiyeandhakavindanti evaṃnāmakaṃ gāmaṃ.Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘satthā idānipi vīriyaṃ karoti padhānamanuyuñjati, gacchāmissa santike ṭhatvā sāsanānucchavikaṃ vīriyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ gāthaṃ vakkhāmī’’ti upasaṅkami.

184.In the third, andhakavindaṃ: to a village of that name. Upasaṅkamī: Thinking, "The Teacher still exerts energy, applies himself to striving; I will go to his presence, and standing there, I will speak a verse connected with energy, befitting the Teaching," he approached.

Pantānīti janataṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāre ṭhitāni.Saṃyojanavippamokkhāti tāni ca senāsanāni sevamāno na cīvarādīnaṃ atthāya seveyya, atha kho dasasaṃyojanavippamokkhatthāya careyya.Saṅghe vaseti tesu senāsanesu ratiṃ alabhanto upaṭṭhākādīnaṃ cittānurakkhaṇatthaṃ gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajaṃ viya uppatanto araññe acaritvā saṅghamajjhe vaseyya.Rakkhitatto satīmāti tattha ca vasanto sagavacaṇḍo goṇo viya sabrahmacārino avijjhanto aghaṭṭento rakkhitatto satipaṭṭhānaparāyaṇo hutvā vaseyya.

Pantānī: having gone beyond the populace, situated where humans do not frequent. Saṃyojanavippamokkhā: And while frequenting those lodgings, he should not frequent them for the sake of robes and so on, but rather he should conduct himself for the sake of release from the ten fetters. Saṅghe vase: Not finding pleasure in those lodgings, like dust on the back of a donkey, flitting about for the sake of protecting the minds of attendants and so on, without wandering in the forest, he should dwell in the midst of the Sangha. Rakkhitatto satīmā: And dwelling there, like a bull with a broken horn, not piercing or striking his fellow ব্রহ্মচারীs, guarding himself, intent on mindfulness, he should dwell.

kulākulantiādimāha. Tatthapiṇḍikāya carantoti piṇḍatthāya caramāno.Sevetha pantāni senāsanānīti saṅghamajjhaṃ otaritvā vasamānopi dhurapariveṇe tālanāḷikeraādīni ropetvā upaṭṭhākādisaṃsaṭṭho na vaseyya, cittakallataṃ pana janetvā cittaṃ hāsetvā tosetvā puna pantasenāsane vaseyyāti araññasseva vaṇṇaṃ katheti.Bhayāti vaṭṭabhayato.Abhayeti nibbāne.Vimuttoti adhimutto hutvā vaseyya.

kulākula is the beginning here. Here, piṇḍikāya caranto: wandering for alms. Sevetha pantāni senāsanānī: Even while dwelling having entered the midst of the Sangha, he should not dwell planting tāla, coconut and so on in the vicinity of his dwelling, being associated with attendants and so on, but generating mental fitness, gladdening the mind, pleasing the mind, he should again dwell in a secluded lodging, he speaks the praise of the forest itself. Bhayā: from the danger of the cycle. Abhaye: in Nibbāna. Vimutto: having been released, he should dwell.

Yattha bheravāti yasmiṃ ṭhāne bhayajanakā saviññāṇakā sīhabyagghādayo, aviññāṇakā rattibhāge khāṇuvalliādayo bahū atthi.Sarīsapāti dīghajātikādisarīsapā.Nisīdi tattha bhikkhūti tādise ṭhāne bhikkhu nisinno. Iminā idaṃ dīpeti – bhagavā yathā tumhe etarahi tatraṭṭhakabheravārammaṇāni ceva sarīsape ca vijjunicchāraṇādīni ca amanasikatvā nisinnā, evamevaṃ padhānamanuyuttā bhikkhū nisīdantīti.

Yattha bheravā: In whatever place there are many fear-generating sentient beings such as lions and tigers, and non-sentient things such as stumps and creepers at night. Sarīsapā: reptiles of the long kind and so on. Nisīdi tattha bhikkhū: A monk sat down in such a place. By this he indicates this: Just as you are now sitting not attending to fear-inducing objects there and to reptiles and to lightning flashes and so on, even so, monks applying themselves to striving sit down.

Jātu me diṭṭhanti ekaṃsena mayā diṭṭhaṃ.Na yidaṃ itihītihanti idaṃ itiha itihāti na takkahetu vā nayahetu vā piṭakasampadānena vā ahaṃ vadāmi.Ekasmiṃ brahmacariyasminti ekāya dhammadesanāya. Dhammadesanā hi idha brahmacariyanti adhippetā.Maccuhāyinanti maraṇapariccāginaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ.

Jātu me diṭṭhaṃ: Certainly I have seen. Na yidaṃ itihītihaṃ: I do not say this from tradition or because of tradition, nor because of reasoning or because of inference or by way of the transmission of the Piṭaka. Ekasmiṃ brahmacariyasmiṃ: In a single teaching of the Dhamma. For the teaching of the Dhamma is here intended as brahmacariya. Maccuhāyinaṃ: of the arahants who have abandoned death.

Dasā ca dasadhā dasāti etthadasāti daseva,dasadhā dasāti sataṃ, aññe ca dasuttaraṃ sekhasataṃ passāmīti vadati.Sotasamāpannāti maggasotaṃ samāpannā.Atiracchānagāminoti desanāmattametaṃ, avinipātadhammāti attho.Saṅkhātuṃ nopi sakkomīti musāvādabhayena ettakā nāma puññabhāgino sattāti gaṇetuṃ na sakkomīti bahuṃ brahmadhammadesanaṃ sandhāya evamāha. Tatiyaṃ.

Dasā ca dasadhā dasā: Here, dasā is ten itself, dasadhā dasā is a hundred, and he says, "I see another hundred sekhas more than ten." Sotasamāpannā: have attained the stream of the path. Atiracchānagāmino: this is merely an expression, meaning those who are not subject to downfall. Saṅkhātuṃ nopi sakkomī: Fearing to speak falsely, he says thus with reference to a great teaching of the Brahma Dhamma: "I am not able to count how many beings are sharers of merit." The third.

4. Aruṇavatīsuttavaṇṇanā
4. Aruṇavatīsutta Commentary

185.Catuttheabhibhūsambhavanti abhibhū ca sambhavo ca. Tesu abhibhūthero sāriputtatthero viya paññāya aggo, sambhavatthero mahāmoggallāno viya samādhinā aggo.Ujjhāyantīti avajjhāyanti, lāmakato vā cintenti.Khiyyantīti, kinnāmetaṃ kinnāmetanti? Aññamaññaṃ kathenti.Vipācentīti vitthārayantā punappunaṃ kathenti.Heṭṭhimena upaḍḍhakāyenāti nābhito paṭṭhāya heṭṭhimakāyena. Pāḷiyaṃ ettakameva āgataṃ. Thero pana ‘‘pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā nāgavaṇṇaṃ gahetvā dasseti, supaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ gahetvā vā dassetī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.13) nayena āgataṃ anekappakāraṃ iddhivikubbanaṃ dassesi.Imā gāthāyo abhāsīti thero kira cintesi – ‘‘kathaṃ desitā nu kho dhammadesanā sabbesaṃ piyā assa manāpā’’ti. Tato āvajjento – ‘‘sabbepi pāsaṇḍā sabbe devamanussā attano attano samaye purisakāraṃ vaṇṇayanti, vīriyassa avaṇṇavādī nāma natthi, vīriyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ katvā desessāmi, evaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā sabbesaṃ piyā bhavissati manāpā’’ti ñatvā tīsu piṭakesu vicinitvā imā gāthā abhāsi.

185.In the fourth, abhibhūsambhavaṃ: Abhibhū and Sambhava. Among them, Abhibhū Thera was foremost in wisdom like Sāriputta Thera, Sambhava Thera was foremost in concentration like Mahāmoggallāna. Ujjhāyantī: They do not reflect, or they think in a base way. Khiyyantī: What is this? What is this? They say to one another. Vipācentī: Spreading it abroad, they say it again and again. Heṭṭhimena upaḍḍhakāyenā: With the lower half of the body beginning from the navel. Only this much has come in the text. The Thera, however, showed various kinds of supernormal transformation that have come in the way beginning with "having abandoned his natural color, he shows a nāga color, or he shows a supaṇṇa color" (Pṭs.M.3.13).

ārambhathāti ārambhavīriyaṃ karotha.Nikkamathāti nikkamavīriyaṃ karotha.Yuñjathāti payogaṃ karotha parakkamatha.Maccuno senanti maccuno senā nāma kilesasenā, taṃ dhunātha.Jātisaṃsāranti jātiñca saṃsārañca, jātisaṅkhātaṃ vā saṃsāraṃ.Dukkhassantaṃ karissatīti vaṭṭadukkhassa paricchedaṃ karissati. Kiṃ pana katvā thero sahassilokadhātuṃ viññāpesīti? Nīlakasiṇaṃ tāva samāpajjitvā sabbattha ālokaṭṭhāne andhakāraṃ phari, odātakasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā andhakāraṭṭhāne obhāsaṃ. Tato ‘‘kimidaṃ andhakāra’’nti? Sattānaṃ ābhoge uppanne ālokaṃ dassesi. Ālokaṭṭhāne ālokakiccaṃ natthi, ‘‘kiṃ āloko aya’’nti? Vicinantānaṃ attānaṃ dassesi. Atha tesaṃ theroti vadantānaṃ imā gāthāyo abhāsi, sabbe osaṭāya parisāya majjhe nisīditvā dhammaṃ desentassa viya saddaṃ suṇiṃsu. Atthopi nesaṃ pākaṭo ahosi. Catutthaṃ.

Imā gāthāyo abhāsī: It seems the Thera thought, "How might a teaching of the Dhamma be dear and pleasing to all?" Then considering, "All sectarians, all gods and humans praise individual effort at their own time, there is no one who speaks disparagingly of energy, I will teach having made it connected with energy, thus this teaching of the Dhamma will be dear and pleasing to all," knowing thus, having searched through the three Piṭakas, he spoke these verses.

5. Parinibbānasuttavaṇṇanā

ārambhathā: make an effort of exertion. Nikkamathā: make an effort of going forth. Yuñjathā: make effort, strive. Maccuno senaṃ: The army of death is the army of defilements, shake that off. Jātisaṃsāraṃ: birth and the cycle of rebirths, or the cycle of rebirths known as birth. Dukkhassantaṃ karissatī: will make an end of the round of suffering. But what did the Thera do to make the thousandfold world system aware? Having attained to blue kasiṇa, he spread darkness in all places of light, having attained to white kasiṇa, he spread light in places of darkness. Then when the perception of beings arose, "What is this darkness?" he showed light. There is no need for light in a place of light, "What is this light?" While they were investigating, he showed himself. Then to those saying, "It is a Thera," they heard these verses as if he was sitting in the midst of an assembly that had come together. The meaning was also clear to them. The fourth.

186.Pañcameupavattane mallānaṃ sālavaneti yatheva hi kadambanadītīrato rājamātuvihāradvārena thūpārāmaṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, evaṃ hiraññavatikāya nāma nadiyā pārimatīrato sālavanaṃ uyyānaṃ. Yathā anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo, evaṃ taṃ kusinārāya hoti. Yathā thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivattati, evaṃ uyyānato sālapanti pācīnamukhā gantvā uttarena nivattā. Tasmā taṃ ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Tasmiṃ upavattane mallānaṃ sālavane.Antarenayamakasālānanti mūlakkhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbitvā ṭhitasālānaṃ antarikāya.Appamādena sampādethāti satiavippavāsena kattabbakiccāni sampādayatha. Iti bhagavā yathā nāma maraṇamañce nipanno mahaddhano kuṭumbiko puttānaṃ dhanasāraṃ ācikkheyya, evamevaṃ parinibbānamañce nipanno pañcacattālīsa vassāni dinnaṃ ovādaṃ sabbaṃ ekasmiṃ appamādapadeyeva pakkhipitvā abhāsi.Ayaṃ tathāgatassa pacchimā vācāti idaṃ pana saṅgītikārānaṃ vacanaṃ.

186.In the fifth, upavattane mallānaṃ sālavane: Just as one must go from the bank of the Kadamba river through the Rajamatu monastery gate to the Thūpārāma, so the Sālavana pleasure garden is on the farther bank of the river named Hiraññavatī. Just as the Thūpārāma is for Anurādhapura, so that is for Kusinārā. Just as the path from the Thūpārāma enters the city through the southern gate, goes eastward, and turns back to the north, so from the pleasure garden, the row of sal trees goes eastward and turns back to the north. Therefore, it is called "Upavattana." In that Upavattana, in the sal grove of the Mallas. Antarena yamakasālānaṃ: In the space between the sal trees that are standing intertwined with each other by means of root-trunks, branches and leaves. Appamādena sampādethā: Accomplish the tasks to be done by non-abandonment of mindfulness. Thus, just as a wealthy householder lying on his deathbed would declare the wealth inheritance to his sons, even so, the Blessed One, lying on his deathbed of final Nibbāna, having placed all the advice given for forty-five years in a single word "diligence," spoke.

atha kho bhagavā paṭhamaṃ jhānantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpanne bhagavati assāsapassāsānaṃ appavattiṃ disvā, ‘‘parinibbuto satthā’’ti saññāya devamanussā ekappahārena viraviṃsu, ānandattheropi – ‘‘parinibbuto nu kho, bhante, anuruddha bhagavā’’ti theraṃ pucchi. Thero ‘‘na kho, āvuso ānanda, tathāgato parinibbuto, apica saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti āha. Kathaṃ pana so aññāsi? Thero kira satthārā saddhiṃyeva taṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjanto yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanavuṭṭhānaṃ, tāva gantvā, ‘‘idāni bhagavā nirodhaṃ samāpanno, antonirodhe ca kālaṃkiriyā nāma natthī’’ti aññāsi.

atha kho bhagavā paṭhamaṃ jhānantiādi vuttaṃ. Here, regarding the statement "Then the Blessed One attained the first jhāna," when the Blessed One entered the cessation of perception and feeling (saññāvedayitanirodha), seeing that the in-breath and out-breath were not occurring, gods and humans cried out with one voice, thinking, "The Teacher has attained final Nirvana!" Even Ānanda Thera asked Anuruddha Thera, "Has the Blessed One attained final Nirvana, venerable sir?" The Thera replied, "No, friend Ānanda, the Tathāgata has not attained final Nirvana, but he has attained the cessation of perception and feeling." How did he know this? It seems that the Thera, along with the Teacher, entering each attainment, going up to the attainment of neither-perception-nor-non-perception (nevasaññānāsaññāyatana), knew that "Now the Blessed One has attained cessation, and in such cessation, there is no passing away."

Atha kho bhagavā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajji…pe… tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjīti ettha pana bhagavā catuvīsatiyā ṭhānesu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji, terasasu ṭhānesu dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ… tathā tatiyaṃ… pannarasasu ṭhānesu catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji. Kathaṃ? Dasasu asubhesu dvattiṃsākāre aṭṭhasu kasiṇesu mettākaruṇāmuditesu ānāpāne paricchedākāseti imesu tāva catuvīsatiyā ṭhānesu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji. Ṭhapetvā pana dvattiṃsākārañca dasa ca asubhāni sesesu terasasu dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ… tesuyeva tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji. Aṭṭhasu pana kasiṇesu upekkhābrahmavihāre ānāpāne paricchedākāse catūsu arūpesūti imesu pannarasasu ṭhānesu catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji. Ayampi ca saṅkhepakathāva. Nibbānapuraṃ pavisanto pana bhagavā dhammassāmi sabbāpi catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā samāpattiyo pavisitvā videsaṃ gacchanto ñātijanaṃ āliṅgetvā viya sabbasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavitvā paviṭṭho.

Atha kho bhagavā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajji…pe… tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjīti. Here, the Blessed One attained the first jhāna in twenty-four instances, the second jhāna in thirteen instances... likewise the third... and the fourth jhāna in fifteen instances. How so? He attained the first jhāna in these twenty-four instances: in the ten kinds of foulness (asubha), in the thirty-two parts of the body, in the eight kasina, in loving-kindness (mettā), compassion (karuṇā), and sympathetic joy (muditā), in mindfulness of breathing (ānāpāna), and in the limited space element (paricchedākāsa). However, excluding the thirty-two parts of the body and the ten kinds of foulness, he attained the second jhāna in the remaining thirteen instances... and the third jhāna in those same instances. But he attained the fourth jhāna in these fifteen instances: in the eight kasina, in equanimity (upekkhā), in mindfulness of breathing, in the limited space element, and in the four formless attainments (arūpa). This is merely a condensed account. But the Blessed One, the master of the Dhamma, entering the city of Nibbāna, having entered into all the one hundred and twenty-four million attainments, like embracing relatives when going abroad, entered after experiencing all the bliss of the attainments.

Catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyīti ettha ca jhānasamanantaraṃ paccavekkhaṇasamanantaranti, dve samanantarāni. Catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇassa tattheva parinibbānaṃjhānasamanantaraṃnāma, catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā puna jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇassa tattheva parinibbānaṃpaccavekkhaṇasamanantaraṃnāma. Imāni dvepi samanantarāneva. Bhagavā pana jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhitvā bhavaṅgacittena abyākatena dukkhasaccena parinibbāyi. Ye hi keci buddhā vā paccekabuddhā vā ariyasāvakā vā antamaso kunthakipillikaṃ upādāya sabbe bhavaṅgacitteneva abyākatena dukkhasaccena kālaṃ karonti.

Catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyīti. Here, there are two kinds of immediately succeeding states: immediately after the jhāna and immediately after reviewing. "Immediately after the jhāna" (jhānasamanantaraṃ) means attaining final Nibbāna in the life-continuum (bhavaṅga) immediately after rising from the fourth jhāna. "Immediately after reviewing" (paccavekkhaṇasamanantaraṃ) means attaining final Nibbāna in the life-continuum immediately after rising from the fourth jhāna and reviewing the factors of the jhāna. Both of these are immediate successions. However, the Blessed One, having attained jhāna, and having risen from jhāna, and having reviewed the factors of the jhāna, attained final Nibbāna with a life-continuum consciousness (bhavaṅgacitta) that was unwholesome and a truth of suffering (dukkhasacca). For all Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and noble disciples (ariyasāvakā), even including the smallest ant, pass away with a life-continuum consciousness that is unwholesome and a truth of suffering.

Bhūtāti sattā.Appaṭipuggaloti paṭibhāgapuggalavirahito.Balappattoti dasavidhaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ patto.Uppādavayadhamminoti uppādavayasabhāvā.Tesaṃ vūpasamoti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamo.Sukhoti asaṅkhataṃ nibbānameva sukhanti attho.Tadāsīti ‘‘saha parinibbānā mahābhūmicālo ahosī’’ti evaṃ mahāparinibbāne (dī. ni. 2.220) vuttaṃ bhūmicālaṃ sandhāyāha. So hi lomahaṃsanako ca bhiṃsanako ca āsi.Sabbākāravarūpeteti sabbākāravaraguṇūpete.Nāhu assāsapassāsoti na jāto assāsapassāso.Anejoti taṇhāsaṅkhātāya ejāya abhāvena anejo.Santimārabbhāti anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ ārabbha paṭicca sandhāya.Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā.Parinibbutoti khandhaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Asallīnenāti anallīnena asaṅkuṭitena suvikasiteneva cittena.Vedanaṃ ajjhavāsayīti vedanaṃ adhivāsesi, na vedanānuvattī hutvā ito cito samparivatti.Vimokkhoti kenaci dhammena anāvaraṇavimokkho sabbaso apaññattibhāvūpagamo pajjotanibbānasadiso jātoti. Pañcamaṃ.

Bhūtāti beings. Appaṭipuggaloti without an equal person. Balappattoti having attained the ten kinds of knowledge-powers (ñāṇabala). Uppādavayadhamminoti of the nature of arising and passing away. Tesaṃ vūpasamoti the subsiding of those formations (saṅkhāra). Sukhoti Nibbāna, the unconditioned, is happiness. Tadāsīti refers to the earthquake that occurred, as stated in the Mahāparinibbāna Sutta (dī. ni. 2.220): "At the final passing away, there was a great earthquake." It was both hair-raising and frightening. Sabbākāravarūpeteti endowed with all excellent qualities. Nāhu assāsapassāsoti there was no arising of in-breath and out-breath. Anejoti without agitation due to the absence of craving (taṇhā). Santimārabbhāti with reference to, conditioned by, and in relation to Nibbāna without remainder (anupādisesa). Cakkhumāti possessing the five kinds of eyes. Parinibbutoti attained final Nibbāna with the cessation of aggregates. Asallīnenāti with an uncontracted, unshrinking, well-developed mind. Vedanaṃ ajjhavāsayīti he endured the feeling (vedanā), not becoming a follower of feeling, wandering here and there. Vimokkhoti liberation, an un-obscured liberation by any Dhamma, a complete going to the state of non-proliferation, like the extinguishing of a lamp.

Dutiyo vaggo.

Dutiyo vaggo.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

7. Brāhmaṇasaṃyuttaṃ

7. Brāhmaṇasaṃyuttaṃ

1. Arahantavaggo

1. Arahantavaggo

1. Dhanañjānīsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Dhanañjānīsuttavaṇṇanā

187.Brāhmaṇasaṃyuttassa paṭhamedhanañjānīti dhanañjānigottā. Ukkaṭṭhagottā kiresā. Sesabrāhmaṇā kira brahmuno mukhato jātā, dhanañjānigottā matthakaṃ bhinditvā nikkhantāti tesaṃ laddhi.Udānaṃ udānesīti kasmā udānesi? So kira brāhmaṇo micchādiṭṭhiko ‘‘buddho dhammo saṅgho’’ti vutte kaṇṇe pidahati, thaddho khadirakhāṇusadiso. Brāhmaṇī pana sotāpannā ariyasāvikā. Brāhmaṇo dānaṃ dento pañcasatānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ appodakaṃ pāyāsaṃ deti, brāhmaṇī buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa nānārasabhojanaṃ. Brāhmaṇassa dānadivase brāhmaṇī tassa vasavattitāya pahīnamaccheratāya ca sahatthā parivisati. Brāhmaṇiyā pana dānadivase brāhmaṇo pātova gharā nikkhamitvā palāyati. Athekadivasaṃ brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇiyā saddhiṃ asammantetvā pañcasate brāhmaṇe nimantetvā brāhmaṇiṃ āha – ‘‘sve bhoti amhākaṃ ghare pañcasatā brāhmaṇā bhuñjissantī’’ti. Mayā kiṃ kātabbaṃ brāhmaṇāti? Tayā aññaṃ kiñci kātabbaṃ natthi, sabbaṃ pacanaparivesanaṃ aññe karissanti. Yaṃ pana tvaṃ ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi khipitvāpi ukkāsitvāpi ‘‘namo buddhassā’’ti tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa namakkāraṃ karosi, taṃ sve ekadivasamattaṃ mā akāsi. Taṃ hi sutvā brāhmaṇā anattamanā honti, mā maṃ brāhmaṇehi bhindasīti. Tvaṃ brāhmaṇehi vā bhijja devehi vā, ahaṃ pana satthāraṃ anussaritvā na sakkomi anamassamānā saṇṭhātunti. Bhoti kulasatike gāme gāmadvārampi tāva pidahituṃ vāyamanti, tvaṃ dvīhaṅgulehi pidahitabbaṃ mukhaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ bhojanakālamattaṃ pidahituṃ na sakkosīti. Evaṃ punappunaṃ kathetvāpi so nivāretuṃ asakkonto ussīsake ṭhapitaṃ maṇḍalaggakhaggaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘bhoti sace sve brāhmaṇesu nisinnesu taṃ muṇḍasamaṇakaṃ namassasi, iminā taṃ khaggena pādatalato paṭṭhāya yāva kesamatthakā kaḷīraṃ viya koṭṭetvā rāsiṃ karissāmī’’ti imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –

187.In the first of the Brāhmaṇa Saṃyutta, dhanañjānīti is from the Dhanañjānī clan. It seems they were of the highest clan. It is said that other Brahmins were born from the mouth of Brahma, but the Dhanañjānī clan emerged breaking through the crown of his head; such was their belief. Udānaṃ udānesīti Why did he utter an exclamation of joy (udāna)? It seems that the Brahmin was of wrong view (micchādiṭṭhiko). When "Buddha, Dhamma, Saṅgha" was spoken, he would cover his ears, stubborn like a stout post. But the Brahminī (female Brahmin) was a stream-enterer (sotāpannā), a noble female disciple (ariyasāvikā). The Brahmin, when giving alms, would give watered-down rice porridge to five hundred Brahmins, but the Brahminī would give food of various flavors to the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha. On the Brahmin's alms-giving day, the Brahminī, due to her husband's influence and her diminished stinginess, would serve with her own hands. But on the Brahminī's alms-giving day, the Brahmin would leave the house early and flee. Then one day, the Brahmin, without consulting with the Brahminī, invited five hundred Brahmins and said to the Brahminī, "Tomorrow, lady, five hundred Brahmins will be dining at our house." "What should I do, Brahmin?" "You don't need to do anything else; others will do all the cooking and serving. But for one day tomorrow, do not make that reverence to that shaven-headed ascetic, ‘Namo Buddhassa,’ whether standing, sitting, or snapping your fingers, or clearing your throat. The Brahmins become displeased when they hear that. Do not cause me to be divided from the Brahmins." "Whether you are divided from the Brahmins or from the gods, I cannot remain without revering the Teacher once I remember him." "Lady, even in a village of a hundred families, they try to close even the village gate. Can't you close your mouth, which can be closed with two fingers, for the duration of the Brahmins' meal?" Even after speaking repeatedly, he was unable to prevent her. Taking a sword with a decorated hilt that was kept at the head of the bed, he spoke this verse: "Lady, if you revere that shaven-headed ascetic while the Brahmins are seated, I will chop you up from the soles of your feet to the crown of your head like a bamboo shoot with this sword with a decorated hilt, and make a heap of you."

‘‘Iminā maṇḍalaggena, pādato yāva matthakā;

‘‘Iminā maṇḍalaggena, pādato yāva matthakā;
Kaḷīramiva chejjāmi, yadi micchaṃ na kāhasi.

‘‘Sace buddhoti bhaṇasi, sace dhammoti bhāsasi;

‘‘Sace buddhoti bhaṇasi, sace dhammoti bhāsasi;
Sace saṅghoti kittesi, jīvantī me nivesane’’ti.

Ariyasāvikā pana pathavī viya duppakampā, sineru viya dupparivattiyā. Sā tena naṃ evamāha –

But the noble female disciple was as unshakable as the earth, as unchangeable as Mount Sineru. She said to him:

‘‘Sace me aṅgamaṅgāni, kāmaṃ chejjasi brāhmaṇa;

‘‘Sace me aṅgamaṅgāni, kāmaṃ chejjasi brāhmaṇa;
Nevāhaṃ viramissāmi, buddhaseṭṭhassa sāsanā.

‘‘Nāhaṃ okkā varadharā, sakkā rodhayituṃ jinā;

‘‘Nāhaṃ okkā varadharā, sakkā rodhayituṃ jinā;
Dhītāhaṃ buddhaseṭṭhassa, chinda vā maṃ vadhassu vā’’ti.

Evaṃ dhanañjānigajjitaṃ nāma gajjantī pañca gāthāsatāni abhāsi. Brāhmaṇo brāhmaṇiṃ parāmasituṃ vā paharituṃ vā asakkonto ‘‘bhoti yaṃ te ruccati, taṃ karohī’’ti vatvā khaggaṃ sayane khipi. Punadivase gehaṃ haritupalittaṃ kārāpetvā lājāpuṇṇaghaṭamālāgandhādīhi tattha tattha alaṅkārāpetvā pañcannaṃ brāhmaṇasatānaṃ navasappisakkharamadhuyuttaṃ appodakapāyāsaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā kālaṃ ārocāpesi.

Thus, she spoke five hundred verses, roaring like Dhanañjānī. The Brahmin, unable to touch or strike the Brahminī, said, "Lady, do what pleases you," and threw the sword on the bed. The next day, having the house plastered with green clay, having decorations made with pots filled with parched grain, garlands, and scents here and there, having rice porridge prepared with fresh ghee, sugar, and honey without much water for the five hundred Brahmins, he announced the time.

Brāhmaṇīpi pātova gandhodakena sayaṃ nhāyitvā sahassagghanakaṃ ahatavatthaṃ nivāsetvā pañcasatagghanakaṃ ekaṃsaṃ katvā sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitā suvaṇṇakaṭacchuṃ gahetvā bhattagge brāhmaṇe parivisamānā tehi saddhiṃ ekapantiyaṃ nisinnassa tassa brāhmaṇassa bhattaṃ upasaṃharantī dunnikkhitte dārubhaṇḍe pakkhali. Pakkhalanaghaṭṭanāya dukkhā vedanā uppajji. Tasmiṃ samaye dasabalaṃ sari. Satisampannatāya pana pāyāsapātiṃ achaḍḍetvā saṇikaṃ otāretvā bhūmiyaṃ saṇṭhapetvā pañcannaṃ brāhmaṇasatānaṃ majjhe sirasi añjaliṃ ṭhapetvā yena veḷuvanaṃ, tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.

The Brahminī, too, having bathed in scented water early in the morning, having put on a new garment worth a thousand (kahāpaṇas), having made an upper garment worth five hundred, adorned with all ornaments, taking a golden ladle, serving the Brahmins in the dining hall, bringing food to that Brahmin who was seated in the same row with them, stumbled on a poorly placed wooden object. Painful feeling arose due to the stumbling and bumping. At that moment, she remembered the Ten-Powered One. But due to mindfulness and awareness, without throwing away the porridge bowl, carefully lowering it, placing it on the ground, placing her joined palms on her head in the midst of the five hundred Brahmins, inclining her joined palms toward the Bamboo Grove (Veḷuvana), she uttered this exclamation of joy (udāna).

Tasmiñca samaye tesu brāhmaṇesu keci bhuttā honti, keci bhuñjamānā, keci hatthe otāritamattā, kesañci bhojanaṃ purato ṭhapitamattaṃ hoti. Te taṃ saddaṃ sutvāva sinerumattena muggarena sīse pahaṭā viya kaṇṇesu sūlena viddhā viya dukkhadomanassaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamānā ‘‘iminā aññaladdhikena mayaṃ gharaṃ pavesitā’’ti kujjhitvā hatthe piṇḍaṃ chaḍḍetvā mukhena gahitaṃ niṭṭhubhitvā dhanuṃ disvā kākā viya brāhmaṇaṃ akkosamānā disāvidisā pakkamiṃsu. Brāhmaṇo evaṃ bhijjitvā gacchante brāhmaṇe disvā brāhmaṇiṃ sīsato paṭṭhāya oloketvā, ‘‘idameva bhayaṃ sampassamānā mayaṃ hiyyo paṭṭhāya bhotiṃ yācantā na labhimhā’’ti nānappakārehi brāhmaṇiṃ akkositvā, etaṃ ‘‘evamevaṃ panā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.

At that time, some of those Brahmins had already eaten, some were eating, some had just lowered (the food) to their hands, and for some, the food had just been placed in front of them. Hearing that sound, feeling pain and displeasure as if struck on the head with a great mallet the size of Mount Sineru, as if pierced in the ears with a spear, becoming angry, saying, "We have been brought into the house by someone of another belief," throwing away the morsels in their hands, spitting out what was in their mouths, like crows seeing a bow, scolding the Brahmin, they departed in various directions. The Brahmin, seeing the Brahmins scattering and leaving, looking at the Brahminī from head to toe, scolding the Brahminī in various ways, saying, "Seeing just this danger, we have been begging you since yesterday, lady, but could not get it," spoke these words beginning with "evamevaṃ panā".

Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo gāmanigamaraṭṭhapūjito, na sakkā gantvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā vatvā santajjetuṃ, ekameva naṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti gacchantova‘‘kiṃsu chetvā’’ti gāthaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā – ‘‘sace ‘asukassa nāma vadhaṃ rocemī’ti vakkhati, atha naṃ ‘ye tuyhaṃ na ruccanti, te māretukāmosi, lokavadhāya uppanno, kiṃ tuyhaṃ samaṇabhāvenā’ti? Niggahessāmi. Sace ‘na kassaci vadhaṃ rocemī’ti vakkhati, atha naṃ ‘tvaṃ rāgādīnampi vadhaṃ na icchasi. Kasmā samaṇo hutvā āhiṇḍasī’ti? Niggahessāmī. Iti imaṃ ubhatokoṭikaṃ pañhaṃ samaṇo gotamo neva gilituṃ na uggilituṃ sakkhissatī’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami.Sammodīti attano paṇḍitatāya kuddhabhāvaṃ adassetvā madhurakathaṃ kathento sammodi. Pañho devatāsaṃyutte kathito. Sesampi heṭṭhā vitthāritamevāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Upasaṅkamīti. He approached, thinking, "The ascetic Gotama is honored by villages, towns, and countries; it is not possible to go and threaten him by saying this or that. I will ask him only one question." While going, he composed the verse kiṃsu chetvāti, thinking: "If he says, 'I approve of the killing of so-and-so,' then I will rebuke him, saying, 'Do you want to kill those you don't like? You are born for the destruction of the world; what is the use of your asceticism?' If he says, 'I do not approve of the killing of anyone,' then I will rebuke him, saying, 'You don't even want the killing of defilements like lust, etc. Why do you wander around as an ascetic?'" Thinking, "The ascetic Gotama will not be able to either swallow or spit out this double-edged question," he approached. Sammodīti. He exchanged courteous greetings, speaking sweetly without showing his anger due to his own cleverness. The question has been explained in the Devatāsaṃyutta. The rest has already been explained below. This is the first.

2. Akkosasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Akkosasuttavaṇṇanā

188.Dutiyeakkosakabhāradvājoti bhāradvājova so, pañcamattehi pana gāthā satehi tathāgataṃ akkosanto āgatoti. ‘‘Akkosakabhāradvājo’’ti tassa saṅgītikārehi nāmaṃ gahitaṃ.Kupito anattamanoti ‘‘samaṇena gotamena mayhaṃ jeṭṭhakabhātaraṃ pabbājentena jāni katā, pakkho bhinno’’ti kodhena kupito domanassena ca anattamano hutvāti attho.Akkosatīti ‘‘corosi, bālosi, mūḷhosi, thenosi, oṭṭhosi, meṇḍosi, goṇosi, gadrabhosi, tiracchānagatosi, nerayikosī’’ti dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosati.Paribhāsatīti ‘‘hotu muṇḍakasamaṇaka, ‘adaṇḍo aha’nti karosi, idāni te rājakulaṃ gantvā daṇḍaṃ āropessāmī’’tiādīni vadanto paribhāsati nāma.

188.In the second, akkosakabhāradvājoti He was Bhāradvāja, but because he came abusing the Tathāgata with about five hundred verses, the compilers of the Saṃgīti named him "Abuser Bhāradvāja." Kupito anattamanoti. It means becoming angry with hatred and displeased with unhappiness, thinking, "The ascetic Gotama has done a wrong, splitting my side, by ordaining my elder brother." Akkosatīti He abuses with the ten grounds for abuse, saying, "You are a thief, a fool, an idiot, a trickster, a camel, a ram, an ox, a donkey, an animal, a hell-dweller." Paribhāsatīti. It means reviling, saying things like, "So be it, shaven-headed ascetic; you pretend 'I am without punishment', but now I will go to the royal court and impose a punishment on you."

Sambhuñjatīti ekato bhuñjati.Vītiharatīti katassa paṭikāraṃ karoti.Bhagavantaṃ kho, gotamanti kasmā evamāha? ‘‘Tavevetaṃ, brāhmaṇa, tavevetaṃ, brāhmaṇā’’ti kirassa sutvā. ‘‘Isayo nāma kupitā sapanaṃ denti kisavacchādayo viyā’’ti anussavavasena ‘‘sapati maṃ maññe samaṇo gotamo’’ti bhayaṃ uppajji. Tasmā evamāha.

Sambhuñjatīti eats together. Vītiharatīti repays what has been done. Bhagavantaṃ kho, gotamanti. Why did he say this? It seems that he heard, "This is yours, Brahmin, this is yours, Brahmin." Due to tradition, he became afraid, thinking, "The sages give curses when they are angry, like Kisavaccha and others," and "The ascetic Gotama thinks he will curse me." Therefore, he said this.

Dantassāti nibbisevanassa.Tādinoti tādilakkhaṇaṃ pattassa.Tasseva tena pāpiyoti tasseva puggalassa tena kodhena pāpaṃ hoti.Sato upasammatīti satiyā samannāgato hutvā adhivāseti.Ubhinnaṃ tikicchantānanti ubhinnaṃ tikicchantaṃ. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Yo puggalo sato upasammati, ubhinnamatthaṃ carati tikicchati sādheti, taṃ puggalaṃ janā bāloti maññanti. Kīdisā janā?Ye dhammassa akovidā. Dhammassāti pañcakkhandhadhammassa vā catusaccadhammassa vā.Akovidāti tasmiṃ dhamme akusalā andhabālaputhujjanā. Dutiyaṃ.

Dantassāti of one who is not attached. Tādinoti one who has attained such characteristics. Tasseva tena pāpiyoti. It is to that very person that evil comes from that anger. Sato upasammatīti. Having come together with mindfulness, he endures. Ubhinnaṃ tikicchantānanti one who treats both. Or this itself is the reading. People think that the person who, being mindful, calms down, practices and heals for the benefit of both, is a fool. What kind of people? Ye dhammassa akovidā. Dhammassāti of the Dhamma of the five aggregates or of the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths. Akovidāti unskillful, blind, foolish ordinary people in that Dhamma. The second.

3. Asurindakasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Asurindakasuttavaṇṇanā

189.Tatiyeasurindakabhāradvājoti akkosakabhāradvājassa kaniṭṭho.Kupitoti teneva kāraṇena kuddho.Jayañcevassa taṃ hotīti asseva taṃ jayaṃ hoti, so jayo hotīti attho. Katamassāti? Yā titikkhā vijānato adhivāsanāya guṇaṃ vijānantassa titikkhā adhivāsanā, ayaṃ tassa vijānatova jayo. Bālo pana pharusaṃ bhaṇanto ‘‘mayhaṃ jayo’’ti kevalaṃ jayaṃ maññati. Tatiyaṃ.

189. Tatiye asurindakabhāradvājo means the younger brother of Akkosaka Bhāradvāja. Kupito means angered by that very reason. Jayañcevassa taṃ hotī means that very victory is his, that victory belongs to him, this is the meaning. What victory? The patience, the endurance of one who understands, knowing the quality of forbearance, that endurance, that forbearance, this is the victory of one who understands. But the fool, speaking harshly, thinks it is merely a victory, saying, "Mine is the victory." The third.

4. Bilaṅgīkasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Bilaṅgīkasuttavaṇṇanā

190.Catutthebilaṅgikabhāradvājoti bhāradvājova so, nānappakāraṃ pana suddhañca sambhārayuttañca kañjikaṃ kāretvā vikkiṇāpento bahudhanaṃ saṅkharīti ‘‘bilaṅgikabhāradvājo’’ti tassa saṅgītikārehi nāmaṃ gahitaṃ.Tuṇhībhūtoti ‘‘tayo me jeṭṭhakabhātaro iminā pabbājitā’’ti ativiya kuddho kiñci vattuṃ asakkonto tuṇhībhūto aṭṭhāsi. Gāthā pana devatāsaṃyutte kathitāva. Catutthaṃ.

190. In the fourth, bilaṅgikabhāradvājo is simply Bhāradvāja; however, because he amassed much wealth by having various kinds of kañjika prepared, both pure and mixed with ingredients, and then selling it, the compilers of the Saṅgīti took the name "Bilaṅgika-bhāradvāja." Tuṇhībhūto means, "These three elder brothers of mine were ordained by this man," and being exceedingly angry and unable to say anything, he stood silently. But the verse has already been spoken in the Devatāsaṃyutta. The fourth.

5. Ahiṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Ahiṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā

191.Pañcameahiṃsakabhāradvājoti bhāradvājovesa, ahiṃsakapañhaṃ pana pucchi, tenassetaṃ saṅgītikārehi nāmaṃ gahitaṃ. Nāmena vā esa ahiṃsako, gottena bhāradvājo.Ahiṃsakāhanti ahiṃsako ahaṃ, iti me bhavaṃ gotamo jānātūti āha.Tathā cassāti tathā ce assa, bhaveyyāsīti attho.Na hiṃsatīti na viheṭheti na dukkhāpeti. Pañcamaṃ.

191. In the fifth, ahiṃsakabhāradvājo is indeed Bhāradvāja, but because he asked the question about non-harming (ahiṃsa), the compilers of the Saṅgīti gave him this name. Or, by name, he was Ahiṃsaka, by clan, Bhāradvāja. Ahiṃsakāhaṃ means, "I am Ahiṃsaka; may the esteemed Gotama know me thus," he said. Tathā cassā means, "If it is so, may it be so." Na hiṃsatī means he does not injure, does not cause suffering. The fifth.

6. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā
6. Jaṭāsuttavaṇṇanā

192.Chaṭṭhejaṭābhāradvājoti bhāradvājovesa, jaṭāpañhassa pana pucchitattā saṅgītikārehi evaṃ vutto. Sesaṃ devatāsaṃyutte kathitameva. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

192. In the sixth, jaṭābhāradvājo is indeed Bhāradvāja, but because he asked the question about the tangle (jaṭā), he was thus called by the compilers of the Saṅgīti. The rest has already been spoken in the Devatāsaṃyutta. The sixth.

7. Suddhikasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Suddhikasuttavaṇṇanā

193.Sattamesuddhikabhāradvājoti ayampi bhāradvājova, suddhikapañhassa pana pucchitattā saṅgītikārehi evaṃ vutto.Sīlavāpi tapokaranti sīlasampannopi tapokammaṃ karonto.Vijjācaraṇasampannoti etthavijjāti tayo vedā.Caraṇanti gottacaraṇaṃ.So sujjhati na aññā itarā pajāti so tevijjo brāhmaṇo sujjhati, ayaṃ pana aññā nāmikā pajā na sujjhatīti vadati.Bahumpi palapaṃ jappanti bahumpi palapaṃ jappanto, ‘‘brāhmaṇova sujjhatī’’ti evaṃ vacanasahassampi bhaṇantoti attho.Antokasambūti anto kilesapūtisabhāvena pūtiko.Saṃkiliṭṭhoti kiliṭṭhehi kāyakammādīhi samannāgato. Sattamaṃ.

193. In the seventh, suddhikabhāradvājo is also Bhāradvāja, but because he asked the question about purity (suddhi), he was thus called by the compilers of the Saṅgīti. Sīlavāpi tapokara means even one accomplished in virtue, performing ascetic practices. Vijjācaraṇasampanno: here, vijjā means the three Vedas. Caraṇa means lineage conduct. So sujjhati na aññā itarā pajā means that knower of the three Vedas, the Brahmin, is purified, but this other, inferior populace is not purified, thus he speaks. Bahumpi palapaṃ jappaṃ means even though babbling and muttering much, even uttering thousands of words saying, "Only the Brahmin is purified," this is the meaning. Antokasambū means rotten with the nature of inner defilement. Saṃkiliṭṭho means endowed with defiled bodily actions, etc. The seventh.

8. Aggikasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Aggikasuttavaṇṇanā

194.Aṭṭhameaggikabhāradvājoti ayampi bhāradvājova, aggi paricaraṇavasena panassa saṅgītikārehi etaṃ nāmaṃ gahitaṃ.Sannihito hotīti saṃyojito hoti.Aṭṭhāsīti kasmā tattha aṭṭhāsi? Bhagavā kira paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento imaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo evarūpaṃ aggapāyāsaṃ gahetvā ‘mahābrahmānaṃ bhojemī’ti aggimhi jhāpento aphalaṃ karoti apāyamaggaṃ okkamati, imaṃ laddhiṃ avissajjanto apāyapūrakova bhavissati, gacchāmissa dhammadesanāya, micchādiṭṭhiṃ bhinditvā pabbājetvā cattāro magge ceva cattāri ca phalāni demī’’ti, tasmā pubbaṇhasamaye rājagahaṃ pavisitvā tattha aṭṭhāsi.

194. In the eighth, aggikabhāradvājo is also Bhāradvāja, but this name was given to him by the compilers of the Saṅgīti because of his tending the fire. Sannihito hotī means he is associated with it. Aṭṭhāsī: why did he stand there? It seems that the Blessed One, surveying the world at dawn, saw this Brahmin and thought, "This Brahmin, taking such excellent milk-rice and burning it in the fire, thinking, 'I will feed Mahābrahmā,' is acting fruitlessly, treading the path to ruin. Without abandoning this view, he will surely fill a woeful destination. I will go to him with a teaching, break his wrong view, and after ordaining him, I will give him the four paths and the four fruits." Therefore, in the forenoon, having entered Rājagaha, he stood there.

Tīhi vijjāhīti tīhi vedehi.Jātimāti yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā parisuddhāya jātiyā samannāgato.Sutavā bahūti bahu nānappakāre ganthe sutavā.Somaṃ bhuñjeyyāti so tevijjo brāhmaṇo imaṃ pāyāsaṃ bhuñjituṃ yutto, tumhākaṃ panesa pāyāso ayuttoti vadati.

Tīhi vijjāhī means with the three Vedas. Jātimā means endowed with a lineage purified back to the seventh generation of ancestors. Sutavā bahū means having heard many various kinds of texts. Somaṃ bhuñjeyyā means that knower of the three Vedas, the Brahmin, is fit to eat this milk-rice, but this milk-rice is not fit for you, thus he speaks.

Vedīti pubbenivāsañāṇena jāni paṭivijjhi.Saggāpāyanti dibbena cakkhunā saggampi apāyampi passati.Jātikkhayanti arahattaṃ.Abhiññāvositoti jānitvā vositavosāno.Brāhmaṇobhavanti avīcito yāva bhavaggā bhotā gotamena sadiso jātisampanno khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo natthi, bhavaṃyeva brāhmaṇoti.

Vedī means knowing with knowledge of former abodes, he thoroughly understood. Saggāpāyaṃ means with the divine eye, he sees both heaven and the apāya-realms. Jātikkhayaṃ means arahantship. Abhiññāvosito means having known, he has completed what needs to be done. Brāhmaṇo bhavaṃ means there is no Brahmin born of such pure lineage, a khīṇāsava, like the esteemed Gotama, from Avīci to the peak of existence; the esteemed one alone is a Brahmin.

gāthābhigītaṃ metiādimāha. Tatthagāthābhigītanti gāthāhi abhigītaṃ.Abhojaneyyanti abhuñjitabbaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, mayhaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhikkhācāravattena ṭhitassa kaṭacchumattampi dātuṃ nāsakkhi, idāni pana mayā tuyhaṃ kilañjamhi tile vitthārentena viya sabbe buddhaguṇā pakāsitā, iti gāyanena gāyitvā laddhaṃ viya idaṃ bhojanaṃ hoti, tasmā idaṃ gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyyanti.Sampassataṃ, brāhmaṇa, nesa dhammoti, brāhmaṇa, atthañca dhammañca sampassantānaṃ ‘‘evarūpaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjitabba’’nti esa dhammo na hoti. Sudhābhojanampigāthābhigītaṃ panudanti buddhā,gāthāhi gāyitvā laddhaṃ buddhā nīharantiyeva.Dhamme sati, brāhmaṇa, vuttiresāti, brāhmaṇa, dhamme sati dhammaṃ apekkhitvā dhamme patiṭṭhāya jīvitaṃ kappentānaṃ esā vutti ayaṃ ājīvo – evarūpaṃ nīharitvā dhammaladdhameva bhuñjitabbanti.

gāthābhigītaṃ me etc. he said. There, gāthābhigītaṃ means sung with verses. Abhojaneyyaṃ means not to be eaten. This is what was said: "You, Brahmin, could not give me even a spoonful of food, though I stood for so long on alms-round; but now, all the Buddha's qualities have been revealed by me, like spreading sesame seeds on a kilañja, so this food is as if obtained by singing, by praising. Therefore, this food sung with verses is not to be eaten by me." Sampassataṃ, brāhmaṇa, nesa dhammo, means, "Brahmin, for those who see meaning and Dhamma, this is not the Dhamma—'such food should be eaten.'" Sudhābhojanampi gāthābhigītaṃ panudanti buddhā, means the Buddhas reject even nectar-food obtained by singing with verses. Dhamme sati, brāhmaṇa, vuttiresā, means, "Brahmin, for those who live relying on the Dhamma, depending on the Dhamma, established in the Dhamma, this is the livelihood: having rejected such food, they should eat only what is rightfully obtained by Dhamma."

aññena cātiādimāha. Tatthakukkuccavūpasantanti hatthakukkuccādīnaṃ vasena vūpasantakukkuccaṃ.Annena pānenāti desanāmattametaṃ. Ayaṃ panattho – aññehi tayā ‘‘pariccajissāmī’’ti sallakkhitehi cīvarādīhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahassu.Khettaṃ hi taṃ puññapekkhassa hotīti etaṃ tathāgatasāsanaṃ nāma puññapekkhassa puññatthikassa tuyhaṃ appepi bīje bahusassaphaladāyakaṃ sukhettaṃ viya paṭiyattaṃ hoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

aññena cā etc. he said. There, kukkuccavūpasantaṃ means free from scruples by way of hand-scruples, etc. Annena pānenā is merely an expression of teaching. But this is the meaning: You should attend to him with other requisites such as robes, etc., that you have designated as "I will give away." Khettaṃ hi taṃ puññapekkhassa hotī means that this dispensation of the Tathāgata is like a good field prepared for you, who desire merit, who seek merit, yielding abundant harvests even from a small seed. The eighth.

9. Sundarikasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Sundarikasuttavaṇṇanā

195.Navamesundarikabhāradvājoti sundarikāya nadiyā tīre aggijuhaṇena evaṃladdhanāmo.Sundarikāyāti evaṃnāmikāya nadiyā.Aggiṃjuhatīti āhutiṃ pakkhipanena jāleti.Aggihuttaṃ paricaratīti agyāyatanaṃ sammajjanupalepanabalikammādinā payirupāsati.Ko nu kho imaṃ habyasesaṃ bhuñjeyyāti so kira brāhmaṇo aggimhi hutāvasesaṃ pāyāsaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘aggimhi tāva pakkhittapāyāso mahābrahmunā bhutto, ayaṃ pana avaseso atthi, taṃ yadi brahmuno mukhato jātassa brāhmaṇassa dadeyyaṃ, evaṃ me pitarā saha puttopi santappito bhaveyya, suvisodhito cassa brahmalokagāmimaggo’’ti. So brāhmaṇassa dassanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā catuddisā anuvilokesi, ‘‘ko nu kho imaṃ habyasesaṃ bhuñjeyyā’’ti?

195. In the ninth, sundarikabhāradvājo is so named because of offering fire on the bank of the Sundarikā River. Sundarikāyā means on the bank of a river named thus. Aggiṃ juhatī means he kindles the fire by throwing offerings into it. Aggihuttaṃ paricaratī means he attends to the fire-ritual by sweeping, plastering, and performing the offering-rite at the fire-shrine. Ko nu kho imaṃ habyasesaṃ bhuñjeyyā: it seems that Brahmin, seeing the remaining milk-rice after offering it to the fire, thought, "The milk-rice thrown into the fire has been eaten by Mahābrahmā, but this remains. If I give it to a Brahmin born from the mouth of Brahmā, both I and my father will be satisfied, and the path leading to the Brahma-world will be well-purified for him." He rose from his seat to look for a Brahmin, surveying the four directions, thinking, "Who indeed should eat this remainder of the offering?"

Rukkhamūleti tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe jeṭṭhakarukkhassa mūle.Sasīsaṃ pārutaṃ nisinnanti saha sīsena pārutakāyaṃ nisinnaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā tattha nisīdi? Bhagavā kira paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento imaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ disvā cintesi – ayaṃ brāhmaṇo evarūpaṃ aggapāyāsaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mahābrahmānaṃ bhojemī’’ti aggimhi jhāpento aphalaṃ karoti…pe… cattāro magge ceva cattāri ca phalāni demīti. Tasmā kālasseva vuṭṭhāya sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya gantvā vuttanayena tasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīdi. Atha kasmā sasīsaṃ pārupīti? Himapātassa ca sītavātassa ca paṭibāhaṇatthaṃ, paṭibalova etaṃ tathāgato adhivāsetuṃ. Sace pana apārupitvā nisīdeyya, brāhmaṇo dūratova sañjānitvā nivatteyya, evaṃ sati kathā nappavatteyya. Iti bhagavā – ‘‘brāhmaṇe āgate sīsaṃ vivarissāmi, atha maṃ so disvā kathaṃ pavattessati, tassāhaṃ kathānusārena dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti kathāpavattanatthaṃ evamakāsi.

Rukkhamūle means at the foot of a large karu tree in that forest grove. Sasīsaṃ pārutaṃ nisinnaṃ means sitting with his body covered, including his head. Why did the Blessed One sit there? It seems the Blessed One, surveying the world at dawn, saw this Brahmin and thought, "This Brahmin, taking such excellent milk-rice and burning it in the fire, thinking, 'I will feed Mahābrahmā,' is acting fruitlessly... [as above] ...I will give him the four paths and the four fruits." Therefore, having risen early, attended to his bodily needs, taken his robes and bowl, he went and sat at the foot of that tree in the manner described. But why did he cover his head? To ward off the frost and the cold wind, though the Tathāgata was capable of enduring it. But if he had sat without covering himself, the Brahmin would have recognized him from afar and turned back, and thus no conversation would have taken place. Thus, the Blessed One did this, thinking, "When the Brahmin arrives, I will uncover my head, and when he sees me, he will start a conversation, and according to his conversation, I will teach him the Dhamma," to initiate a conversation.

Upasaṅkamīti brāhmaṇo – ‘‘ayaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā sabbarattiṃ padhānamanuyutto. Imassa dakkhiṇodakaṃ datvā imaṃ habyasesaṃ dassāmī’’ti, brāhmaṇasaññī hutvā upasaṅkami.Muṇḍo ayaṃ bhavaṃ, muṇḍako ayaṃ bhavanti sīse vivaritamatte nīcakesantaṃ disvā ‘‘muṇḍo’’ti āha. Tato suṭṭhutaraṃ olokento pavattamattampi sikhaṃ adisvā hīḷento ‘‘muṇḍako’’ti āha.Tatovāti yattha ṭhito addasa, tamhāva padesā.Muṇḍāpi hīti kenaci kāraṇena muṇḍitasīsāpi honti.

Upasaṅkamī: the Brahmin, thinking, "This one, covering his head, has been devoted to exertion all night. I will give him offering-water and this remaining food," approached him, regarding him as a Brahmin. Muṇḍo ayaṃ bhavaṃ, muṇḍako ayaṃ bhavaṃ: as soon as he uncovered his head, seeing his hair cut short, he said, "Bald!" Then, looking more closely and not seeing even a hair's breadth of a tuft, he scornfully said, "Shaveling!" Tatovā means from that very spot where he saw him. Muṇḍāpi hī means even those with shaven heads exist for some reason.

jātiṃ pucchāti yadi dānassa mahapphalataṃ paccāsīsasi, jātiṃ mā puccha. Akāraṇaṃ hi dakkhiṇeyyabhāvassa jāti.Caraṇañca pucchāti apica kho sīlādiguṇabhedaṃ caraṇaṃ puccha. Etaṃ hi dakkhiṇeyyabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ. Idānissa tamatthaṃ vibhāventokaṭṭhā have jāyati jātavedotiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ adhippāyo – idha kaṭṭhā aggi jāyati, na ca so sālādikaṭṭhā jātova aggikiccaṃ karoti, sāpāna-doṇiādikaṭṭhā jāto na karoti, attano pana acciyādiguṇasampattiyā yato vā tato vā jāto karotiyeva. Evaṃ na brāhmaṇakulādīsu jātova dakkhiṇeyyo hoti, caṇḍālakulādīsu jāto na hoti, apica kho nīcakulinopi uccakulinopi khīṇāsava-muni dhitimā hirīnisedho ājānīyo hoti. Imāya dhitihiripamokkhāya guṇasampattiyā jātimā uttamadakkhiṇeyyo hoti. So hi dhitiyā guṇe dhāreti, hiriyā dose nisedhetīti. Apicetthamunīti monadhammena samannāgato.Dhitimāti vīriyavā.Ājānīyoti kāraṇākāraṇajānanako.Hirīnisedhoti hiriyā pāpāni nisedhetvā ṭhito.

Mā jātiṃ pucchā means if you expect great fruit from a gift, do not ask about lineage. Lineage is not the cause of being worthy of offerings. Caraṇañca pucchā means but rather, inquire about conduct, the distinction of virtuous qualities such as morality. This is the cause of being worthy of offerings. Now, revealing that meaning to him, he said, kaṭṭhā have jāyati jātavedo etc. Here, the intention is this: Here, fire arises from wood, but fire born from sālādi wood does not alone perform the function of fire, nor does fire born from sāpāna-doṇiādi wood, but having the accomplishment of its own qualities such as flame, fire born from anywhere performs the function. Likewise, one born in a Brahmin family is not alone worthy of offerings, nor is one born in a caṇḍāla family unworthy, but rather, whether of low or high birth, the khīṇāsava sage, resolute, restrained by conscience, is noble. By this accomplishment of resolution and restraint of conscience, one of any birth is supremely worthy of offerings. For he maintains the quality of resolution, and restrains faults with conscience. Moreover, here munī means endowed with the state of silence (monadhamma). Dhitimā means energetic. Ājānīyo means knowing what is the cause and what is not. Hirīnisedho means standing having restrained evils with conscience.

Saccena dantoti paramatthasaccena danto.Damasā upetoti indriyadamena upeto.Vedantagūti catunnaṃ maggavedānaṃ antaṃ, catūhi vā maggavedehi kilesānaṃ antaṃ gato.Vusitabrahmacariyoti maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vuttho.Yaññopanītoti upanītayañño paṭiyāditayañño ca.Tamupavhayethāti yena yañño paṭiyādito, so taṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇaṃ avhayeyya. ‘‘Indamavhayāma, somamavhayāma, varuṇamavhayāma, īsānamavhayāma, yāmamavhayāmā’’ti idaṃ pana avhānaṃ niratthakaṃ.Kālenāti avhayanto ca ‘‘kālo, bhante, niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’’nti antomajjhanhikakāleyeva taṃ upavhayeyya.So juhati dakkhiṇeyyeti yo evaṃ kāle khīṇāsavaṃ āmantetvā tattha catupaccayadakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhapeti, so dakkhiṇeyye juhati nāma, na acetane aggimhi pakkhipanto.

Saccena danto means controlled by ultimate truth. Damasā upeto means endowed with self-control. Vedantagū means one who has gone to the end of the four paths as Vedas, or to the end of defilements by the four path-Vedas. Vusitabrahmacariyo means one who has lived the life of the path-Brahmacariya. Yaññopanīto means one who has prepared the initiated sacrifice. Tamupavhayethā means one who has prepared the sacrifice should invite that ultimate Brahmin. But this invitation, "We invite Indra, we invite Soma, we invite Varuṇa, we invite Īsāna, we invite Yama," is pointless. Kālenā means while inviting, one should invite him at the appropriate time, saying, "Venerable sir, the meal is ready," during the forenoon or midday. So juhati dakkhiṇeyye means one who invites a khīṇāsava in this way at the proper time and establishes the four requisites as offerings for him, that one offers to the worthy-of-offerings, not one who throws into an insentient fire.

addhā suyiṭṭhantiādimāha. Tassattho – addhā mama yidaṃ idāni suyiṭṭhañca suhutañca bhavissati, pubbe pana aggimhi jhāpitaṃ niratthakaṃ ahosīti.Añño janoti ‘‘ahaṃ brāhmaṇo, ahaṃ brāhmaṇo’’ti vadanto andhabālaputhujjano.Habyasesanti hutasesaṃ.Bhuñjatu bhavantiādi purimasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

addhā suyiṭṭhaṃ etc. he said. Its meaning is this: Surely this will now be well-sacrificed and well-offered by me, but previously, what was burnt in the fire was fruitless. Añño jano means the blind, foolish worldling who says, "I am a Brahmin, I am a Brahmin." Habyasesaṃ means the remainder of the offering. Bhuñjatu bhavaṃ etc. should be understood in the same way as stated in the previous sutta.

Na khvāhanti na kho ahaṃ. Kasmā panevamāhāti? Tasmiṃ kira bhojane upahaṭamatteva ‘‘satthā bhuñjissatī’’ti saññāya catūsu mahādīpesu dvīsu parittadīpasahassesu devatā pupphaphalādīni ceva sappinavanītatelamadhuphāṇitādīni ca ādāya madhupaṭalaṃ pīḷetvā madhuṃ gaṇhantiyo viya dibbānubhāvena nibbattitojameva gahetvā pakkhipiṃsu. Tena taṃ sukhumattaṃ gataṃ, manussānañca oḷārikaṃ vatthūti tesaṃ tāva oḷārikavatthutāya sammā pariṇāmaṃ na gacchati. Goyūse pana tilabījāni pakkhipitvā pakkattā oḷārikamissakaṃ jātaṃ, devānañca sukhumaṃ vatthūti tesaṃ sukhumavatthutāya sammā pariṇāmaṃ na gacchati. Sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavassāpi kucchiyaṃ na pariṇamati. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhīkhīṇāsavassa pana samāpattibalena pariṇāmeyya. Bhagavato pana pākatikeneva kammajatejena pariṇāmeyya.

Na khvāhaṃ means "Indeed, I do not." Why did he say this? It seems that as soon as that food was offered, with the thought, "The Teacher will eat it," deities from two of the four great continents and from thousands of smaller continents, taking flowers, fruits, ghee, butter, oil, honey, molasses, etc., and like one squeezing a honeycomb and taking honey, they poured in only the essence produced by their divine power. Therefore, it became very subtle, and since the objects of humans are gross, it does not transform properly due to the grossness of their objects. But if sesame seeds are thrown into whey, it becomes a gross mixture because of the grossness of the one who cooks it, and since the objects of the deities are subtle, it does not transform properly due to the subtlety of their objects. It does not transform even in the stomach of a khīṇāsava dry-insight meditator. But for a khīṇāsava who has attained the eight attainments, it might transform by the power of samāpatti. But for the Blessed One, it would transform naturally by his karma-produced energy.

Appahariteti aharite. Sace hi haritesu tiṇesu pakkhipeyya, siniddhapāyāsena tiṇāni pūtīni bhaveyyuṃ. Buddhā ca bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṃ na vītikkamanti, tasmā evamāha. Yattha pana galappamāṇāni mahātiṇāni, tādise ṭhāne pakkhipituṃ vaṭṭati.Appāṇaketi sappāṇakasmiṃ hi parittake udake pakkhitte pāṇakā maranti, tasmā evamāha. Yaṃ pana gambhīraṃ mahāudakaṃ hoti, pātisatepi pātisahassepi pakkhitte na āluḷati, tathārūpe udake vaṭṭati.Opilāpesīti suvaṇṇapātiyā saddhiṃyeva nimujjāpesi.Cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāyatīti evarūpaṃ saddaṃ karoti. Kiṃ panesa pāyāsassa ānubhāvo, udāhu tathāgatassāti? Tathāgatassa. Ayaṃ hi brāhmaṇo taṃ pāyāsaṃ opilāpetvā ummaggaṃ āruyha satthu santikaṃ anāgantvāva gaccheyya, atha bhagavā – ‘‘ettakaṃ acchariyaṃ disvā mama santikaṃ āgamissati. Athassāhaṃ dhammadesanāya micchādiṭṭhigahaṇaṃ bhinditvā sāsane otāretvā amatapānaṃ pāyessāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhānabalena evamakāsi.

Appaharite means un-harita. For if he were to throw them on green grass, the grass would become putrid with the greasy pāyāsa. And Buddhas do not transgress the rule about plants, therefore he said this. But in a place where there is tall grass as high as the neck, it is permissible to throw it there. Appāṇake means, for if it were thrown into a small amount of water with living beings, the beings would die, therefore he said this. But if it is deep, great water, it does not become disturbed even if a hundred or a thousand pātis are thrown in; in such water it is permissible. Opilāpesī means he sank it together with the golden bowl. Cicciṭāyati ciṭiciṭāyatī means it makes such a sound. But is this the power of the pāyāsa, or of the Tathāgata? Of the Tathāgata. For this Brahmin, having sunk that pāyāsa, might ascend another path and go without coming to the Teacher; then the Blessed One thought, "Having seen such a marvel, he will come to me. Then, by means of a Dhamma talk, I will break his adherence to wrong view, establish him in the Teaching, and give him the drink of immortality," and by the power of his determination, he did so.

Dārusamādahānoti dāruṃ jhāpayamāno.Bahiddhā hi etanti etaṃ dārujjhāpanaṃ nāma ariyadhammato bahiddhā. Yadi etena suddhi bhaveyya, ye davaḍāhakādayo bahūni dārūni jhāpenti, te paṭhamataraṃ sujjheyyuṃ.Kusalāti khandhādīsu kusalā.Ajjhattamevujjalayāmi jotinti niyakajjhatte attano santānasmiṃyeva ñāṇajotiṃ jālemi.Niccagginīti āvajjanapaṭibaddhena sabbaññutaññāṇena niccaṃ pajjalitaggi.Niccasamāhitattoti niccaṃ sammā ṭhapitacitto.Brahmacariyaṃ carāmīti bodhimaṇḍe caritaṃ brahmacariyaṃ gahetvā evaṃ vadati.

Dārusamādahāno means kindling wood. Bahiddhā hi eta means this kindling of wood is outside the Noble Dhamma. If purity were achieved by this, then those who burn many woods, such as those who start forest fires, would be purified first. Kusalā means skilled in the aggregates, etc. Ajjhattamevujjalayāmi joti means I kindle the flame of wisdom within myself, in my own being. Niccagginī means the fire that is always burning with the all-knowing wisdom bound by attention. Niccasamāhitatto means one whose mind is always well-established. Brahmacariyaṃ carāmī means having taken up the Brahmacariya that was practiced at the Bodhi-maṇḍa, he speaks thus.

Mānohi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāroti yathā khāribhāro khandhena vayhamāno upari ṭhitopi akkantakkantaṭṭhāne pathaviyā saddhiṃ phuseti, evameva jātigottakulādīni mānavatthūni nissāya ussāpito mānopi tattha tattha issaṃ uppādento catūsu apāyesu saṃsīdāpeti. Tenāha ‘‘māno hi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāro’’ti.Kodho dhūmoti tava ñāṇaggissa upakkilesaṭṭhena kodho dhumo. Tena hi te upakkiliṭṭho ñāṇaggi na virocati.Bhasmani mosavajjanti nirojaṭṭhena musāvādo chārikā nāma. Yathā hi chārikāya paṭicchanno aggi na joteti, evaṃ te musāvādena paṭicchannaṃ ñāṇanti dasseti.Jivhā sujāti yathā tuyhaṃ suvaṇṇarajatalohakaṭṭhamattikāsu aññataramayā yāgayajanatthāya sujā hoti, evaṃ mayhaṃ dhammayāgaṃ yajanatthāya pahūtajivhā sujāti vadati.Hadayaṃ jotiṭṭhānanti yathā tuyhaṃ nadītīre jotiṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ mayhaṃ dhammayāgassa yajanaṭṭhānatthena sattānaṃ hadayaṃ jotiṭṭhānaṃ.Attāti cittaṃ.

Mānohi te, brāhmaṇa, khāribhāro means just as a khāri-load, being carried on the shoulder, touches the earth at every step, even when it is raised up, so too, pride, elevated by relying on such things as birth, lineage, and family, causes jealousy here and there and makes one sink down in the four woeful states. Therefore he said, "Pride is a khāri-load for you, Brahmin." Kodho dhūmo means anger is smoke in the sense of being a defilement of your wisdom-fire. Therefore, your defiled wisdom-fire does not shine. Bhasmani mosavajjanti means false speech is ashes in the sense of being without brilliance. Just as a fire covered by ashes does not glow, so he shows that your wisdom is covered by false speech. Jivhā sujā means just as you have a ladle made of gold, silver, iron, wood, or clay for offering sacrifices, so I have an excellent tongue for offering the sacrifice of the Dhamma. Hadayaṃ jotiṭṭhānanti means just as you have a place for fire by the riverbank, so the hearts of beings are a place for light, as the place for offering the sacrifice of the Dhamma. Attā means mind.

Dhammo rahadoti yathā tvaṃ aggiṃ paricaritvā dhūmachārikasedakiliṭṭhasarīro sundarikaṃ nadiṃ otaritvā nhāyasi, evaṃ mayhaṃ sundarikāsadisena bāhirena rahadena attho natthi, aṭṭhaṅgikamaggadhammo pana mayhaṃ rahado, tatrāhaṃ pāṇasatampi pāṇasahassampi caturāsītipāṇasahassānipi ekappahārena nhāpemi.Sīlatitthoti tassa pana me dhammarahadassa catupārisuddhisīlaṃ titthanti dasseti.Anāviloti yathā tuyhaṃ sundarikā nadī catūhi pañcahi ekato nhāyantehi heṭṭhupariyavālikā āluḷā hoti, na evaṃ mayhaṃ rahado, anekasatasahassesupi pāṇesu otaritvā nhāyantesu so anāvilo vippasannova hoti.Sabbhi sataṃ pasatthoti paṇḍitehi paṇḍitānaṃ pasaṭṭho. Uttamatthena vā so sabbhīti vuccati, paṇḍitehi pasatthattā sataṃ pasattho.Taranti pāranti nibbānapāraṃ gacchanti.

Dhammo rahadoti means just as you bathe in the Sundarikā River, having tended the fire and having a body soiled with smoke, ashes, and sweat, so I have no need for an external lake like the Sundarikā; but the Noble Eightfold Path is my lake, and in it I bathe hundreds, thousands, even eighty-four thousand beings with a single plunge. Sīlatitthoti he shows that the fourfold purity of virtue is the bathing-ghat of that Dhamma-lake of mine. Anāviloti means just as your Sundarikā River is churned up by four or five people bathing together, stirring up the sand from above and below, so my lake is not like that; even when hundreds of thousands of beings descend and bathe in it, it is undisturbed and clear. Sabbhi sataṃ pasatthoti praised by the wise, praised among the wise. Or, in the highest sense, that is called 'sabbhi', because it is praised by the wise, it is praised by the good. Taranti pāranti they cross to the further shore of Nibbāna.

saccaṃ dhammotiādimāha. Tatthasaccanti vacīsaccaṃ.Dhammoti iminā diṭṭhisaṅkappavāyāmasatisamādhayo dasseti.Saṃyamoti iminā kammantājīvā gahitā.Saccanti vā iminā maggasaccaṃ gahitaṃ. Sā atthato sammādiṭṭhi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Sammādiṭṭhiyā pana gahitāya taggatikattā sammāsaṅkappo gahitova hoti.Dhammoti iminā vāyāmasatisamādhayo.Saṃyamoti iminā vācākammantājīvā. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo dassito hoti. Atha vāsaccanti paramatthasaccaṃ, taṃ atthato nibbānaṃ.Dhammotipadena diṭṭhi saṅkappo vāyāmo sati samādhīti pañcaṅgāni gahitāni.Saṃyamoti vācā kammanto ājīvoti tīṇi. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo dassito hoti.Brahmacariyanti etaṃ brahmacariyaṃ nāma.Majjhe sitāti sassatucchede vajjetvā majjhe nissitā.Brahmapattīti seṭṭhapatti.Sa tujjubhūtesu namo karohīti ettha ta-kāro padasandhikaro, sa tvaṃ ujubhūtesu khīṇāsavesu namo karohīti attho.Tamahaṃ naraṃ dhammasārīti brūmīti yo evaṃ paṭipajjati, tamahaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘dhammasārī eso dhammasāriyā paṭicchanno’’ti ca ‘‘kusaladhammehi akusaladhamme sāretvā ṭhito’’ti vāti vadāmīti. Navamaṃ.

saccaṃ dhammotiādi he said. There, saccanti means truthfulness of speech. Dhammoti with this he shows right view, thought, effort, mindfulness, and concentration. Saṃyamoti with this he has taken right action and livelihood. Or saccanti with this he has taken the path truth. That is, in meaning, right view. For it was said: “Right view is the path and also the cause.” (Dhs. 1039). But with the taking of right view, right thought is also taken, since it is of the same nature. Dhammoti with this, effort, mindfulness, and concentration. Saṃyamoti with this, speech, action, and livelihood. Thus also the Noble Eightfold Path is shown. Or again, saccanti the ultimate truth, that is, in meaning, Nibbāna. By the word Dhammo, the five factors: view, thought, effort, mindfulness, and concentration are taken. Saṃyamoti speech, action, and livelihood, these three. Thus also the Noble Eightfold Path is shown. Brahmacariyanti this is called the Brahmacariya. Majjhe sitāti based in the middle, avoiding annihilationism and eternalism. Brahmapattīti the best attainment. Sa tujjubhūtesu namo karohīti here the ta-kāra is a sandhi-joining letter; the meaning is, you should pay homage to those who are upright, the arahants. Tamahaṃ naraṃ dhammasārīti brūmīti whoever practices thus, that person I say is "one who lives according to the Dhamma, covered by living according to the Dhamma," and "one who stands having caused wholesome things to be established, and unwholesome things to be eliminated." Ninth.

10. Bahudhītarasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bahudhītarasuttavaṇṇanā

196.Dasameaññatarasmiṃ vanasaṇḍeti paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento tassa brāhmaṇassa arahattassa upanissayaṃ disvā ‘‘gacchāmissa saṅgahaṃ karissāmī’’ti gantvā tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe viharati.Naṭṭhā hontīti kasitvā vissaṭṭhā aṭavimukhā caramānā brāhmaṇe bhuñjituṃ gate palātā honti.Pallaṅkanti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ.Ābhujitvāti bandhitvā.Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā.Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ ṭhapayitvā, mukhasamīpe vā katvāti attho. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti (vibha. 537). Atha vā‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho.Mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho.Satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Tena vuccati parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti evaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā’’ti. Evaṃ nisīdanto ca pana chabbaṇṇā ghanabuddharasmiyo vissajjetvā nisīdi.Upasaṅkamīti domanassābhibhūto āhiṇḍanto, ‘‘sukhena vatāyaṃ samaṇo nisinno’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami.

196. In the tenth, aññatarasmiṃ vanasaṇḍeti seeing the supporting condition for arahatship in that Brahmin, as he surveyed the world at dawn, thinking, "I will go and help him," he went and stayed in that forest grove. Naṭṭhā hontīti having been plowed and abandoned, wandering away towards the wilderness, they flee when the Brahmin goes to eat. Pallaṅkanti a seat with the legs crossed all around. Ābhujitvāti having bound them. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti having set the upper body straight, aligning the eighteen vertebrae one above the other. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti having established mindfulness facing the meditation subject, or having it near the face, is the meaning. Therefore it was said in the Vibhaṅga: "This mindfulness is established, well-established, at the tip of the nose or at the image of the face; therefore it is said, 'having established mindfulness facing forward.'" (Vibh. 537). Or again, "parīti is in the sense of surrounding. Mukhanti is in the sense of exiting. Satīti is in the sense of establishing. Therefore it is said, 'having established mindfulness facing forward'"; in this way the meaning here should be understood according to the method stated in the Paṭisambhidāmagga (Paṭi. Ma. 1.164). Here is the summary: "Having made mindfulness the means of surrounding and exiting." And sitting thus, he sat emitting six-colored, dense Buddha-rays. Upasaṅkamīti overcome with displeasure, wandering about, thinking, "Indeed, this ascetic is sitting comfortably," he approached.

Ajjasaṭṭhiṃna dissantīti ajja chadivasamattakā paṭṭhāya na dissanti.Pāpakāti lāmakā tilakhāṇukā. Tena kira tilakhette vapite tadaheva devo vassitvā tile paṃsumhi osīdāpesi, pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā gahetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Yepi vaḍḍhiṃsu, tesaṃ upari pāṇakā patitvā paṇṇāni khādiṃsu, ekapaṇṇadupaṇṇā khāṇukā avasissiṃsu. Brāhmaṇo khettaṃ oloketuṃ gato te disvā – ‘‘vaḍḍhiyā me tilā gahitā, tepi naṭṭhā’’ti domanassajāto ahosi, taṃ gahetvā imaṃ gāthamāha.

Ajjasaṭṭhiṃna dissantīti from today, for about six days, they will not be seen. Pāpakāti wretched, with stalks like sesame plants. It seems that when sesame seeds were sown in the field, the deva rained down that very day and sank the sesame into the dust, and they were unable to gather flower or fruit. Those that grew, beings fell on them and ate the leaves, and only stalks with one or two leaves remained. The Brahmin, having gone to look at the field and seeing them, became displeased, thinking, "My sesame plants were ready to grow, and they too are ruined," and taking that, he spoke this verse.

Ussoḷhikāyāti ussāhena kaṇṇanaṅguṭṭhādīni ukkhipitvā vicarantā uppatanti. Tassa kira anupubbena bhogesu parikkhīṇesu pakkhipitabbassa abhāvena tucchakoṭṭhā ahesuṃ. Tassa ito cito ca sattahi gharehi āgatā mūsikā te tucchakoṭṭhe pavisitvā uyyānakīḷaṃ kīḷantā viya naccanti, taṃ gahetvā evamāha.

Ussoḷhikāyāti lifting up and wandering about with eager ears, corners of the mouth, etc., they jump around. It seems that gradually, as his wealth was depleted, his storehouses were empty due to the absence of anything to put in them. Mice, having come from here and there from seven houses, entered those empty storehouses and danced as if playing in a park, and taking that, he said this.

Uppāṭakehi sañchannoti uppāṭakapāṇakehi sañchanno. Tassa kira brāhmaṇassa sayanatthāya santhataṃ tiṇapaṇṇasanthāraṃ koci antarantarā paṭijagganto natthi. So divasaṃ araññe kammaṃ katvā sāyaṃ āgantvā tasmiṃ nipajjati. Athassa uppāṭakapāṇakā sarīraṃ ekacchannaṃ karontā khādanti, taṃ gahetvā evamāha.

Uppāṭakehi sañchannoti covered with uppāṭaka-creatures. It seems that there was no one who regularly renewed the bedding of grass and leaves that was spread for that Brahmin to lie on. Having worked in the forest during the day, he would come in the evening and lie down on it. Then uppāṭaka-creatures would cover his body and eat it, and taking that, he said this.

Vidhavāti matapatikā. Yāva kira tassa brāhmaṇassa gehe vibhavamattā ahosi, tāva tā vidhavāpi hutvā patikulesu vasituṃ labhiṃsu. Yadā pana so niddhano jāto, tadā tā ‘‘pitugharaṃ gacchathā’’ti sassusasurādīhi nikkaḍḍhitā tato tasseva gharaṃ āgantvā vasantiyo brāhmaṇassa bhojanakāle ‘‘gacchatha ayyakena saddhiṃ bhuñjathā’’ti putte pesenti, tehi pātiyaṃ hatthesu otāritesu brāhmaṇo hatthassa okāsaṃ na labhati. Taṃ gahetvā imaṃ gāthamāha.

Vidhavāti widows. As long as that Brahmin's house had some wealth, those widows were able to live in their husbands' families even after becoming widows. But when he became destitute, then they were driven out by their mothers-in-law and fathers-in-law, saying, "Go to your father's house," and coming back to his house and living there, at the Brahmin's mealtime they would send their sons, saying, "Go, eat with your grandfather," and when they put the bowl in their hands, the Brahmin would not find a place for his hand. Taking that, he spoke this verse.

Piṅgalāti kaḷārapiṅgalā.Tilakāhatāti kāḷasetādivaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagattā.Sottaṃ pādena bodhetīti niddaṃ okkantaṃ pādena paharitvā pabodheti. Ayaṃ kira brāhmaṇo mūsikasaddena ubbāḷho uppāṭakehi ca khajjamāno sabbarattiṃ niddaṃ alabhitvā paccūsakāle niddāyati. Atha naṃ akkhīsu nimmilitamattesveva – ‘‘kiṃ karosi, brāhmaṇa, pacchā ca pubbe ca gahitassa iṇassa? Vaḍḍhi matthakaṃ pattā, satta dhītaro posetabbā. Idāni iṇāyikā āgantvā gehaṃ parivāressanti, gaccha kammaṃ karohī’’ti pādena paharitvā pabodheti. Taṃ gahetvā imaṃ gāthamāha.

Piṅgalāti kaḷārapiṅgalā. Tilakāhatāti their bodies marked with black and white sesame-like marks. Sottaṃ pādena bodhetīti she awakens him from sleep by striking him with her foot. It seems that this Brahmin, disturbed by the sound of mice and eaten by uppāṭakas, did not get any sleep all night, and would fall asleep at dawn. Then, as soon as his eyes were closed, she would strike him with her foot and awaken him, saying, "What are you doing, Brahmin, about the debt you took out in the past and in the present? The interest has reached its peak, seven daughters must be supported. Now the creditors will come and surround the house, go and work!" Taking that, he spoke this verse.

Iṇāyikāti yesaṃ anena hatthato iṇaṃ gahitaṃ. So kira kassaci hatthato ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ kassaci dve kassaci dasa…pe… kassaci satanti evaṃ bahūnaṃ hatthato iṇaṃ aggahesi. Te divā brāhmaṇaṃ apassantā ‘‘gehato taṃ nikkhantameva gaṇhissāmā’’ti balavapaccūse gantvā codenti. Taṃ gahetvā imaṃ gāthamāha.

Iṇāyikāti those from whom he had taken a debt. It seems that he had taken a kahāpaṇa from one person, two from another, ten from another...pe...a hundred from another; in this way he took a debt from many people. Not seeing the Brahmin during the day, they would go very early in the morning, thinking, "We will catch him as soon as he leaves the house," and they would demand payment. Taking that, he spoke this verse.

evaṃ vutte bhāradvājagottotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaalatthāti labhi.

evaṃ vutte bhāradvājagottotiādi was said. There, alatthāti he obtained.

Tañca pana brāhmaṇaṃ bhagavā pabbājetvā ādāya jetavanaṃ gantvā punadivase tena therena pacchāsamaṇena kosalarañño gehadvāraṃ agamāsi. Rājā ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sutvā pāsādā oruyha vanditvā hatthato pattaṃ gahetvā tathāgataṃ uparipāsādaṃ āropetvā varāsane nisīdāpetvā gandhodakena pāde dhovitvā satapākatelena makkhetvā yāguṃ āharāpetvā rajatadaṇḍaṃ suvaṇṇakaṭacchuṃ gahetvā satthu upanāmesi. Satthā pattaṃ pidahi. Rājā tathāgatassa pādesu patitvā, ‘‘sace me, bhante, doso atthi, khamathā’’ti āha. Natthi, mahārājāti. Atha kasmā yāguṃ na gaṇhathāti? Palibodho atthi, mahārājāti. Kiṃ pana, bhante, yāguṃ agaṇhanteheva labhitabbo esa palibodho, paṭibalo ahaṃ palibodhaṃ dātuṃ, gaṇhatha, bhanteti. Satthā aggahesi. Mahallakattheropi dīgharattaṃ chāto yāvadatthaṃ yāguṃ pivi. Rājā khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ datvā bhattakiccāvasāne bhagavantaṃ vanditvā āha – ‘‘bhagavā tumhe paveṇiyā āgate okkākavaṃse uppajjitvā cakkavattisiriṃ pahāya pabbajitvā loke aggataṃ patto, ko nāma, bhante, tumhākaṃ palibodho’’ti? Mahārāja, etassa mahallakattherassa palibodho amhākaṃ palibodhasadisovāti.

And the Blessed One, having ordained that Brahmin, taking him with him, went to Jetavana, and on the following day, that Elder, as a junior monk, went to the gate of King Kosala's palace. The King, hearing that the Teacher had come, descended from the palace, paid homage, took the bowl from his hand, led the Tathāgata up to the upper palace, seated him on a fine seat, washed his feet with scented water, anointed them with oil boiled a hundred times, had rice-gruel brought, took a silver stick and a golden ladle, and offered it to the Teacher. The Teacher closed the bowl. The King fell at the Tathāgata's feet and said, "If there is any fault in me, Bhante, please forgive me." "There is none, great king." "Then why do you not accept the rice-gruel?" "There is an impediment, great king." "But, Bhante, is this impediment to be obtained only by not accepting the rice-gruel? I am capable of giving the impediment, please accept it, Bhante." The Teacher accepted it. The elderly Thera, being hungry for a long time, drank rice-gruel to his satisfaction. The King, having given solid and soft food, and having finished the meal, paid homage to the Blessed One and said, "Bhagavā, you were born into the Okkāka lineage that has come down through tradition, having renounced the glory of a Universal Monarch, you have attained the highest state in the world; what, Bhante, is your impediment?" "Great king, this elderly Thera's impediment is like our impediment."

Rājā theraṃ vanditvā – ‘‘ko, bhante, tumhākaṃ palibodho’’ti pucchi? Iṇapalibodho, mahārājāti. Kittako, bhanteti? Gaṇehi, mahārājāti. Rañño ‘‘ekaṃ dve sataṃ sahassa’’nti gaṇentassa aṅguliyo nappahonti. Athekaṃ purisaṃ pakkositvā, ‘‘gaccha, bhaṇe, nagare bheriṃ carāpehi ‘sabbe bahudhītikabrāhmaṇassa iṇāyikā rājaṅgaṇe sannipatantū’’ti. Manussā bheriṃ sutvā sannipatiṃsu. Rājā tesaṃ hatthato paṇṇāni āharāpetvā sabbesaṃ anūnaṃ dhanamadāsi. Tattha suvaṇṇameva satasahassagghanakaṃ ahosi. Puna rājā pucchi – ‘‘aññopi atthi, bhante, palibodho’’ti. Iṇaṃ nāma, mahārāja, datvā muccituṃ sakkā, etā pana satta dārikā mahāpalibodhā mayhanti. Rājā yānāni pesetvā tassa dhītaro āharāpetvā attano dhītaro katvā taṃ taṃ kulagharaṃ pesetvā, ‘‘aññopi, bhante, atthi palibodho’’ti pucchi? Brāhmaṇī, mahārājāti. Rājā yānaṃ pesetvā, tassa brāhmaṇiṃ āharāpetvā, ayyikaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā puna pucchi – ‘‘aññopi, bhante, atthi palibodho’’ti? Natthi, mahārājāti vutte rājāpi cīvaradussāni dāpetvā, ‘‘bhante, mama santakaṃ tumhākaṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ jānāthā’’ti āha. Āma, mahārājāti. Atha naṃ rājā āha – ‘‘bhante, cīvarapiṇḍapātādayopi sabbe paccayā amhākaṃ santakā bhavissanti. Tumhe tathāgatassa manaṃ gahetvā samaṇadhammaṃ karothā’’ti. Thero tatheva appamatto samaṇadhammaṃ karonto nacirasseva āsavakkhayaṃ pattoti. Dasamaṃ.

The king, after paying homage to the Thera, asked, "What is your impediment (palibodha), venerable sir?" "A debt impediment, your majesty." "How much, venerable sir?" "Calculate it, your majesty." As the king counted, "One, two, one hundred, one thousand," his fingers were not enough. Then he summoned a man and said, "Go, fellow, announce by drumbeat in the city, 'All creditors of the wealthy Dhitika Brahmin should gather in the royal courtyard.'" Hearing the drumbeat, the people gathered. The king had the promissory notes brought from their hands and gave everyone their due amount of wealth. There, the value of gold alone was one hundred thousand. Again, the king asked, "Is there any other impediment, venerable sir?" "A debt, your majesty, can be paid off and one can be freed, but these seven daughters are a great impediment for me." The king sent chariots, had his daughters brought, made them his own daughters, sent them to appropriate family homes, and then asked, "Is there any other impediment, venerable sir?" "The brahmin woman, your majesty." The king sent a chariot, had the brahmin woman brought, placed her in the position of a grandmother, and asked again, "Is there any other impediment, venerable sir?" When he said, "No, your majesty," the king also had robes and cloths given and said, "Venerable sir, you know that my possessions are available for your monkhood." "Yes, your majesty." Then the king said to him, "Venerable sir, all requisites, including robes and alms-food, will be available from us. Focusing your mind on the Tathagata, practice the life of a recluse." The Thera, thus being diligent in the life of a recluse, soon attained the destruction of the āsavas. The tenth [story is ended].

Paṭhamo vaggo.

The First Chapter.

2. Upāsakavaggo

2. The Upāsaka Chapter

1. Kasibhāradvājasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Kasibhāradvāja Sutta

197.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamemagadhesūti evaṃnāmake janapade.Dakkhiṇāgirisminti rājagahaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitassa girino dakkhiṇabhāge janapado atthi, tasmiṃ janapade, tattha vihārassāpi tadeva nāmaṃ.Ekanāḷāyaṃ brāhmaṇagāmeti ekanāḷāti tassa gāmassa nāmaṃ. Brāhmaṇā panettha sambahulā paṭivasanti, brāhmaṇabhogo eva vā so. Tasmā ‘‘brāhmaṇagāmo’’ti vuccati.

197. In the first [sutta] of the second chapter, in Magadha means in a country with that name. At Dakkhināgiri means in a country on the southern side of the mountain that surrounds Rajagaha; there, the monastery also has the same name. In the brahmin village of Ekanāḷa means Ekanāḷa is the name of that village. But here, many brahmins reside, or that is a brahmin estate. Therefore, it is called "brahmin village."

Tena kho pana samayenāti yaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā magadharaṭṭhe ekanāḷaṃ brāhmaṇagāmaṃ upanissāya dakkhiṇagirimahāvihāre brāhmaṇassa indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno viharati, tena samayena.Kasibhāradvājassāti so brāhmaṇo kasiṃ nissāya jīvati, bhāradvājoti cassa gottaṃ.Pañcamattānīti pañca pamāṇāni, anūnāni anadhikāni pañcanaṅgalasatānīti vuttaṃ hoti.Payuttānīti yojitāni, balībaddānaṃ khandhesu ṭhapetvā yuge yottehi yojitānīti attho.

At that time, means at the time when the Blessed One, staying near the brahmin village of Ekanāḷa in the Magadha country, was dwelling at the Dakkhināgiri Mahāvihāra, awaiting the ripening of the brahmin's faculties. Kasibhāradvāja means that the brahmin lived by means of agriculture, and Bhāradvāja was his clan name. Five hundred, means five measures; it means five hundred plows, neither less nor more. Were yoked, means they were harnessed, placed on the shoulders of the oxen and fastened with yokes and straps.

Vappakāleti vappanakāle bījanikkhepasamaye. Tattha dve vappāni kalalavappañca paṃsuvappañca. Paṃsuvappaṃ idha adhippetaṃ, tañca kho paṭhamadivase maṅgalavappaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ upakaraṇasampadā – tīṇi balibaddasahassāni upaṭṭhāpitāni honti, sabbesaṃ suvaṇṇamayāni siṅgāni paṭimukkāni, rajatamayā khurā, sabbe setamālāhi ceva gandhapañcaṅgulīhi ca alaṅkatā paripuṇṇapañcaṅgā sabbalakkhaṇasampannā, ekacce kāḷā añjanavaṇṇā, ekacce setā phalikavaṇṇā, ekacce rattā pavāḷavaṇṇā, ekacce kammāsā masāragallavaṇṇā. Evaṃ pañcasatā kassakā sabbe ahatasetavatthā gandhamālālaṅkatā dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭesu patiṭṭhitapupphacumbaṭakā haritālamanosilālañjanujjalagattā dasa dasa naṅgalā ekekagumbā hutvā gacchanti. Naṅgalānaṃ sīsañca yugañca patodā ca suvaṇṇakhacitā. Paṭhamanaṅgale aṭṭha balībaddā yuttā, sesesu cattāro cattāro, avasesā kilantaparivattanatthaṃ ānītā. Ekekagumbe ekekabījasakaṭaṃ ekeko kasati, ekeko vappati.

At the time of sowing means at the time of sowing, the time of scattering seeds. There are two types of sowing: sowing with mud and sowing with dust. Here, sowing with dust is intended, and that is the auspicious sowing on the first day. There, this is the abundance of equipment: three thousand oxen are prepared; the horns of all of them are adorned with gold, the hooves with silver; all are adorned with white garlands and five-fingered marks of scented paste, complete with all five features, possessing all auspicious marks; some are black, the color of añjana; some are white, the color of crystal; some are red, the color of coral; some are brownish, the color of emerald. Thus, five hundred farmers, all dressed in new white clothes, adorned with garlands and perfumes, with flower bouquets placed on their right shoulder joints, bodies shining with orpiment, realgar, and collyrium, go in groups of ten plows each. The head of the plows, the yoke, and the goads are inlaid with gold. Eight oxen are yoked to the first plow, and four to each of the rest; the remaining ones are brought for the purpose of changing them when they are tired. In each group, one cart carries the seeds, one plows, and one sows.

Brāhmaṇo pana pageva massukammaṃ kārāpetvā nhāyitvā sugandhagandhehi vilitto pañcasatagghanakaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā sahassagghanakaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā ekekissā aṅguliyā dve dveti vīsati aṅgulimuddikāyo kaṇṇesu sīhakuṇḍalāni sīse brahmaveṭhanaṃ paṭimuñcitvā suvaṇṇamālaṃ kaṇṭhe katvā brāhmaṇagaṇaparivuto kammantaṃ vosāsati. Athassa brāhmaṇī anekasatabhājanesu pāyāsaṃ pacāpetvā mahāsakaṭesu āropetvā gandhodakena nhāyitvā sabbālaṅkāravibhūsitā brāhmaṇīgaṇaparivutā kammantaṃ agamāsi. Gehampissa haritupalittaṃ vippakiṇṇalājaṃ puṇṇaghaṭakadalidhajapaṭākāhi alaṅkataṃ gandhapupphādīhi sukatabalikammaṃ, khettañca tesu tesu ṭhānesu samussitaddhajapaṭākaṃ ahosi. Parijanakammakārehi saddhiṃ osaṭaparisā aḍḍhateyyasahassā ahosi, sabbe ahatavatthā, sabbesaṃ pāyāsabhojanameva paṭiyattaṃ.

The brahmin, on the other hand, early in the morning, after having his hair and beard trimmed, having bathed, anointed with fragrant perfumes, having put on a garment worth five hundred [coins], having made an upper robe worth a thousand, having put on twenty finger-rings, two on each finger, having put on lion-earrings in his ears, having tied a Brahma-cord on his head, having put a golden garland around his neck, surrounded by a group of brahmins, oversees the work. Then his brahmin wife, having cooked milk-rice in many hundreds of dishes, having loaded it onto large carts, having bathed with scented water, adorned with all kinds of ornaments, surrounded by a group of brahmin women, went to the worksite. His house was plastered with green clay, scattered with parched rice, adorned with full water pots, banana trees, flags, and banners, and well-prepared with offerings of scents, flowers, etc.; and the field was raised with flags and banners in various places. Together with the family workers, the retinue was one thousand two hundred and fifty; all wore new clothes, and only milk-rice was prepared as food for all.

Atha brāhmaṇo suvaṇṇapātiṃ dhovāpetvā pāyāsassa pūretvā sappimadhuphāṇitehi abhisaṅkharitvā naṅgalabalikammaṃ kārāpesi. Brāhmaṇī pañcannaṃ kassakasatānaṃ suvaṇṇarajatakaṃsatambalohamayāni bhājanāni dāpetvā suvaṇṇakaṭacchuṃ gahetvā pāyāsena parivisantī gacchati. Brāhmaṇo pana balikammaṃ kāretvā rattabandhikāyo upāhanāyo ārohitvā rattasuvaṇṇadaṇḍakaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘idha pāyāsaṃ detha, idha sappiṃ detha, idha sakkharaṃ dethā’’ti vosāsamāno vicarati. Ayaṃ tāva kammante pavatti.

Then the brahmin, having had a golden bowl washed, filled it with milk-rice, mixed it with ghee, honey, and molasses, and had an offering made for the plows. The brahmin woman, having given golden, silver, copper, and bronze bowls to the five hundred farmers, took a golden ladle and went around serving the milk-rice. The brahmin, having had the offering made, put on red leather shoes, took a golden-handled stick, and wandered around overseeing, "Give milk-rice here, give ghee here, give sugar here." This, for now, is the activity at the worksite.

Vihāre pana yattha yattha buddhā vasanti, tattha tattha nesaṃ devasikaṃ pañca kiccāni bhavanti, seyyathidaṃ – purebhattakiccaṃ pacchābhattakiccaṃ purimayāmakiccaṃ majjhimayāmakiccaṃ pacchimayāmakiccanti.

In the monastery, wherever Buddhas dwell, they have five daily duties, namely, the duty before the meal, the duty after the meal, the duty in the first watch of the night, the duty in the middle watch of the night, and the duty in the last watch of the night.

Tatridaṃ purebhattakiccaṃ – bhagavā hi pātova uṭṭhāya upaṭṭhākānuggahatthaṃ sarīraphāsukatthañca mukhadhovanādiparikammaṃ katvā yāva bhikkhācāravelā, tāva vivittāsane vītināmetvā bhikkhācāravelāya nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattamādāya kadāci ekako kadāci bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisati kadāci pakatiyā, kadāci anekehi pāṭihāriyehi vattamānehi. Seyyathidaṃ – piṇḍāya pavisato lokanāthassa purato purato gantvā mudugatiyo vātā pathaviṃ sodhenti, valāhakā udakaphusitāni muñcantā magge reṇuṃ vūpasametvā upari vitānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanti, apare vātā pupphāni upaharitvā magge okiranti. Unnatā bhūmippadesā onamanti, onatā unnamanti. Pādanikkhepasamaye samāva bhūmi hoti, sukhasamphassāni padumapupphāni vā pāde sampaṭicchanti. Indakhīlassa anto ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde sarīrā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇarasasiñcanāni viya citrapaṭaparikkhittāni viya ca pāsādakūṭāgārādīni karontiyo ito cito ca vidhāvanti. Hatthiassavihaṅgādayo sakasakaṭṭhānesu ṭhitāyeva madhurenākārena saddaṃ karonti, tathā bherivīṇādīni tūriyāni manussānañca kāyūpagāni ābharaṇāni. Tena saññāṇena manussā jānanti ‘‘ajja bhagavā idha piṇḍāya paviṭṭho’’ti. Te sunivatthā supārutā gandhapupphādīni ādāya gharā nikkhamitvā antaravīthiṃ paṭipajjitvā bhagavantaṃ gandhapupphādīhi sakkaccaṃ pūjetvā vanditvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, dasa bhikkhū, amhākaṃ vīsati, amhākaṃ bhikkhusataṃ dethā’’ti yācitvā bhagavatopi pattaṃ gahetvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātena paṭimānenti.

Here, this is the duty before the meal: The Blessed One, indeed, getting up early in the morning, having done the preliminary tasks such as washing the face for the sake of assisting the attendants and for the comfort of the body, having spent [the time] in a secluded seat until the time for alms-gathering, then having dressed, tied the waistband, put on the robe, taken the bowl, sometimes alone, sometimes surrounded by the Sangha of monks, enters a village or town for alms, sometimes in the normal way, sometimes with many miracles occurring. Namely, as the World-Protector enters for alms, gentle winds blow in front, purifying the earth, clouds release showers of water, settling the dust on the road and standing overhead like a canopy; other winds bring flowers and scatter them on the road. Elevated ground sinks down, and sunken ground rises up. At the moment of placing the foot, the ground becomes level, and lotus flowers or pleasant touches receive the foot. When the right foot is placed just inside the threshold pillar, six-colored rays emanate from the body, running here and there like golden showers and making palatial buildings and peaked houses appear as if surrounded by painted cloths. Elephants, horses, and birds, standing in their respective places, make sounds in a sweet manner, as do drums, lutes, and other musical instruments, and the ornaments worn on the bodies of humans. By that sign, people know, "Today, the Blessed One has entered here for alms." They, well-dressed and well-robed, taking scents, flowers, etc., go out from their houses, enter the inner streets, respectfully worship the Blessed One with scents, flowers, etc., pay homage, and ask, "Venerable sir, give ten monks to us, twenty to us, a hundred monks to us," and, taking the bowl of the Blessed One as well, spread out a seat and respectfully satisfy [Him] with alms-food.

purebhattakiccaṃ.

duty before the meal.

‘‘bhikkhave, appamādena sampādetha, dullabho buddhuppādo lokasmiṃ, dullabho manussattapaṭilābho, dullabhā saddhāsampatti, dullabhā pabbajjā, dullabhaṃ saddhammassavana’’nti.Tattha keci bhagavantaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanti. Bhagavā tesaṃ attano cariyānurūpaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Tato sabbepi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni gacchanti, keci araññaṃ, keci rukkhamūlaṃ, keci pabbatādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, keci cātumahārājikabhavanaṃ…pe… keci vasavattibhavananti. Tato bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā sace ākaṅkhati, dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno muhuttaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti. Atha samassāsitakāyo uṭṭhahitvā dutiyabhāge lokaṃ voloketi. Tatiyabhāge yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati, tattha mahājano purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā pacchābhattaṃ sunivattho supāruto gandhapupphādīni ādāya vihāre sannipatati. Tato bhagavā sampattaparisāya anurūpena pāṭihāriyena gantvā dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisajja dhammaṃ deseti kālayuttaṃ samayayuttaṃ. Atha kālaṃ viditvā parisaṃ uyyojeti, manussā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkamanti. Idaṃpacchābhattakiccaṃ.

"Monks, accomplish [the goal] with diligence; rare is the arising of a Buddha in the world, rare is the attainment of human existence, rare is the attainment of faith, rare is the going forth, rare is the hearing of the true Dhamma." There, some ask the Blessed One for a meditation subject. The Blessed One gives them a meditation subject suitable to their character. Then all, having paid homage to the Blessed One, go to their respective places for staying at night and during the day, some to the forest, some to the foot of a tree, some to one of the mountains, etc., some to the Cātumahārājika heaven…pe…some to the Vasavatti heaven. Then the Blessed One enters the Perfumed Chamber and, if He wishes, lies down on the right side in the lion's posture, mindful and fully aware, for a moment. Then, having refreshed His body, He gets up and surveys the world in the second part [of the day]. In the third part, the great crowd, having given alms before the meal in the village or town where He is staying, well-dressed and well-robed after the meal, taking scents, flowers, etc., gathers at the monastery. Then the Blessed One, going to the assembly hall with a miracle appropriate to the assembly, sits on the excellent Buddha-seat prepared [there] and teaches the Dhamma, fitting the time and appropriate to the occasion. Then, knowing the [right] time, He dismisses the assembly; the people pay homage to the Blessed One and depart. This is the duty after the meal.

purimayāmakiccaṃ.

duty in the first watch of the night.

majjhimayāmakiccaṃ.

duty in the middle watch of the night.

pacchimayāmakiccaṃ.

duty in the last watch of the night.

atha kho bhagavātiādi vuttaṃ.

Then, the Blessed One, etc., has been said.

pubbaṇhasamayanti bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ, pubbaṇhasamayeti attho.Nivāsetvāti paridahitvā. Vihāracīvaraparivattanavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattaṃ hatthehi, cīvaraṃ kāyena ādiyitvā, sampaṭicchitvā dhāretvāti attho. Bhagavato kira piṇḍāya pavisitukāmassa bhamaro viya vikasitapadumadvayamajjhaṃ, indanīlamaṇivaṇṇaselamayapatto hatthadvayamajjhaṃ āgacchati. Taṃ evamāgataṃ pattaṃ hatthehi sampaṭicchitvā cīvarañca parimaṇḍalaṃ pārutaṃ kāyena dhāretvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Tenupasaṅkamīti yena maggena kammanto gantabbo, tena ekakova upasaṅkami. Kasmā pana naṃ bhikkhū nānubandhiṃsūti? Yadā hi bhagavā ekakova katthaci gantukāmo hoti, yāva bhikkhācāravelā dvāraṃ pidahitvā antogandhakuṭiyaṃ nisīdati. Bhikkhū tāya saññāya jānanti ‘‘ajja bhagavā ekakova piṇḍāya caritukāmo, addhā kañci eva vinetabbapuggalaṃ addasā’’ti. Te attano pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gandhakuṭiṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā vanditvā bhikkhācāraṃ gacchanti. Tadā ca bhagavā evamakāsi, tasmā bhikkhū nānubandhiṃsūti.

In the forenoon is a locative used in the sense of proximity; it means at the time of the forenoon. Having dressed means having put on. This is said with reference to changing the robes in the monastery. Taking His bowl and robe means having taken the bowl in His hands and the robe on His body, having received and worn them. It is said that when the Blessed One intends to enter for alms, a bowl resembling the middle of two blooming lotuses, made of indranīla gem-colored rock, comes into the middle of His two hands like a bee. It means having received in His hands that bowl that has come in this way, and having worn the robe, perfectly arranged, on His body. He approached him means He approached alone by the path by which the worksite was to be reached. But why did the monks not follow Him? When the Blessed One intends to go anywhere alone, He closes the door and sits inside the Perfumed Chamber until the time for alms-gathering. By that sign, the monks know, "Today, the Blessed One intends to go for alms alone; surely, He has seen someone who needs to be tamed." They take their own bowl and robe, circumambulate the Perfumed Chamber, pay homage, and go for alms. And at that time, the Blessed One did so; therefore, the monks did not follow Him.

Parivesanā vattatīti tesaṃ suvaṇṇabhājanādīni gahetvā nisinnānaṃ pañcasatānaṃ kassakānaṃ parivisanā vippakatā hoti.Ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsīti yattha ṭhitaṃ brāhmaṇo passati, tathārūpe dassanūpacāre kathāsavanaphāsuke uccaṭṭhāne aṭṭhāsi. Ṭhatvā ca rajatasuvaṇṇarasapiñjaraṃ candimasūriyānaṃ pabhaṃ atirocamānaṃ samantato sarīrappabhaṃ muñci, yāya ajjhotthaṭattā brāhmaṇassa kammantasālābhittirukkhakasitamattikapiṇḍādayo suvaṇṇamayā viya ahesuṃ. Atha manussā bhuñjantā ca kasantā ca sabbakiccāni pahāya asītianubyañjanaparivāraṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ sarīraṃ byāmappabhāparikkhepavibhūsitaṃ bāhuyugalaṃ jaṅgamaṃ viya padumasaraṃ, rasmijālasamujjalitatārāgaṇamiva gaganatalaṃ, vijjulatāvinaddhamiva ca kanakasikharaṃ siriyā jalamānaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ disvā hatthapāde dhovitvā añjaliṃ paggayha samparivāretvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Evaṃ tehi samparivāritaṃ addasā kho kasibhāradvājo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ piṇḍāya ṭhitaṃ, disvāna bhagavantaṃ etadavoca –ahaṃ kho, samaṇa, kasāmi ca vapāmi cāti.

The serving was in progress means the serving to the five hundred farmers who were sitting with their golden bowls etc. was disrupted. Stood to one side means He stood in a high place in such a way that the brahmin could see Him, in a place suitable for seeing, hearing the conversation, and [being within] reach. And standing there, He emitted a bodily radiance that outshone the shimmering light of silver, gold, and the sun and moon in all directions, by which the walls of the worksite hall, the trees, and the clods of broken earth appeared as if made of gold to the brahmin. Then the people, abandoning all activities such as eating and plowing, saw the perfectly enlightened Buddha standing to one side, His body adorned with the thirty-two marks of a great man surrounded by the eighty minor marks, His pair of arms beautified by the circumference of a fathom's-length of radiance, like a moving lotus pond, His two hands like a lotus, His body shining with glory, like the surface of the sky sparkling with a network of rays and a multitude of stars, like a golden peak intertwined with lightning, and having washed their hands and feet, raised their joined palms and stood surrounding Him. Thus, Kasibhāradvāja the brahmin saw the Blessed One standing for alms, surrounded by them, and having seen Him, said this to the Blessed One: "I, recluse, both plow and sow."

Kasmā panāyaṃ evamāha, kiṃ samantapāsādike pasādanīye uttamadamathasamathamanuppattepi tathāgate appasādena, udāhu aḍḍhatiyānaṃ janasahassānaṃ pāyāsaṃ paṭiyādetvāpi kaṭacchubhikkhāya maccherenāti? Ubhayathāpi no, bhagavato panassa dassanena atittaṃ nikkhittakammantaṃ janaṃ disvā ‘‘kammabhaṅgaṃ me kātuṃ āgato’’ti anattamanatā ahosi, tasmā evamāha. Bhagavato ca lakkhaṇasampattiṃ disvā – ‘‘sacāyaṃ kammante appayojayissa, sakalajambudīpe manussānaṃ sīse cūḷāmaṇi viya abhavissa, ko nāmassa attho na sampajjissati, evamevaṃ alasatāya kammante appayojetvā vappamaṅgalādīsu piṇḍāya caratī’’tipissa anattamanatā ahosi. Tenāha – ‘‘ahaṃ kho, samaṇa, kasāmi ca vapāmi ca, kasitvā ca vapitvā ca bhuñjāmī’’ti.

Why did he say this? Was it because he lacked faith in the Tathāgata, even though the Tathāgata possessed qualities that inspire faith, being endowed with the ultimate Dhamma and perfect serenity; or was it because he was miserly, even after preparing pāyāsa for a hundred and fifty thousand people, offering it with a ladle? In neither way was it so. But upon seeing the people abandoning their work when the Blessed One appeared, he was displeased, thinking, "He has come to ruin my work." Therefore, he spoke thus. And seeing the Blessed One's perfection of marks, he was displeased thinking, "If he did not apply himself to work, he would be like a jewel on the head of all people in Jambudīpa. What purpose would not be fulfilled for him? Yet, being so lazy, without applying himself to work, he goes about for alms during festivals like the Vappamaṅgala." Therefore, he said, "I, ascetic, both plough and sow; having ploughed and sown, I eat."

ahampi kho brāhmaṇotiādimāha.

I too, brahmin, and so on, he said.

na kho pana mayaṃ passāma bhoto gotamassātiādimāha. Bhagavā pana yasmā pubbadhammasabhāgatāya kathanaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ ānubhāvo, tasmā buddhānubhāvaṃ dīpentosaddhā bījantiādimāha.

But we do not see Master Gotama and so on, he said. Since, however, the relating of prior qualities is the power of Buddhas, therefore the Blessed One, revealing the power of the Buddha, said faith is the seed, and so on.

Kā panettha pubbadhammasabhāgatā? Nanu brāhmaṇena bhagavā naṅgalādikasisambhārasamāyogaṃ puṭṭho apucchitassa bījassa sabhāgatāya āha ‘‘saddhā bīja’’nti, evañca sati kathāpi ananusandhikā hoti? Na hi buddhānaṃ ananusandhikakathā nāma atthi, napi pubbadhammassa asabhāgatāya kathenti. Evaṃ panettha anusandhi veditabbā – brāhmaṇena hi bhagavā yuganaṅgalādikasisambhāravasena kasiṃ pucchito. So tassa anukampāya ‘‘idaṃ apucchita’’nti aparihāpetvā samūlaṃ saupakāraṃ sasambhāraṃ saphalaṃ kasiṃ paññāpetuṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya dassento ‘‘saddhā bīja’’ntiādimāha. Tattha bījaṃ kasiyā mūlaṃ, tasmiṃ sati kattabbato, asati akattabbato, tappamāṇena ca kattabbato. Bīje hi sati kasiṃ karonti, na asati. Bījappamāṇena ca kusalā kassakā khettaṃ kasanti, na ūnaṃ ‘‘mā no sassaṃ parihāyī’’ti, na adhikaṃ ‘‘mā no mogho vāyāmo ahosī’’ti. Yasmā ca bījameva mūlaṃ, tasmā bhagavā mūlato paṭṭhāya kasisambhāraṃ dassento tassa brāhmaṇassa kasiyā pubbadhammassa bījassa sabhāgatāya attano kasiyā pubbadhammaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saddhā bīja’’nti. Evamettha pubbadhammasabhāgatāpi veditabbā.

What relating of prior qualities is here? Surely, when the brahmin asked the Blessed One about the implements of ploughing, such as the plough, he replied "faith is the seed" relating it to the seed that he had not asked about. And if so, would not the talk be unconnected? Indeed, there is no unconnected talk for the Buddhas, nor do they speak without relating to prior qualities. Thus, the connection here should be understood: for the brahmin asked the Blessed One about ploughing in terms of the yoke, plough, and other implements of ploughing. Out of compassion for him, without dismissing it as "this was not asked," in order to explain ploughing in its entirety, with its benefits, implements, and fruits, showing it from the beginning, he said, "faith is the seed," and so on. There, the seed is the root of ploughing, because upon its existence, it is to be done, and upon its non-existence, it is not to be done, and it is to be done according to its measure. For they do ploughing when there is a seed, not when there is none. And skilled farmers plough the field according to the measure of the seed, not less, fearing "lest our crop diminish," nor more, fearing "lest our effort be in vain." And since the seed itself is the root, therefore the Blessed One, showing the implements of ploughing from the root, revealing the prior quality of his own ploughing in relation to the brahmin's prior quality of the seed, said "faith is the seed." Thus, here, the relating of prior qualities should be understood.

Pucchitaṃyeva vatvā apucchitaṃ pacchā kiṃ na vuttanti ce? Tassa upakārabhāvato ca dhammasambandhasamatthabhāvato ca. Ayaṃ hi brāhmaṇo paññavā, micchādiṭṭhikule pana jātattā saddhārahito, saddhārahito ca paññavā paresaṃ saddhāya attano avisaye apaṭipajjamāno visesaṃ nādhigacchati, kilesakālussiyaparāmaṭṭhāpi cassa dubbalā saddhā balavatiyā paññāya sahasā vattamānā atthasiddhiṃ na karoti hatthinā saddhiṃ ekadhure yutto goṇo viya. Itissa saddhā upakārikāti taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ saddhāya patiṭṭhāpentena pacchāpi vattabbo ayamattho desanākusalatāya pubbe vutto. Bījassa ca upakārikā vuṭṭhi, sā tadanantaraṃyeva vuccamānā samatthā hoti. Evaṃ dhammasambandhasamatthabhāvato pacchāpi vattabbo ayamattho, añño ca evarūpo īsāyottādi pubbe vuttoti veditabbo.

If it is asked, "Why was what was asked not spoken first, and what was not asked spoken afterwards?" It is because of its helpfulness and its capacity for connection with the Dhamma. For this brahmin is wise, but because he was born in a family of wrong view, he is devoid of faith, and a wise person devoid of faith, not acting according to the faith of others in his own sphere, does not attain distinction, and even if his weak faith is seized by the defilements, it does not accomplish the purpose when operating hastily with strong wisdom, like a bull yoked in the same harness with an elephant. Thus, since faith is helpful to him, this matter, by which that brahmin is established in faith, should be spoken later, but it was spoken earlier out of skill in teaching. And rain is helpful for the seed, and being spoken immediately after that, it is capable. Thus, this matter which should be spoken later is due to its capacity for connection with the Dhamma, and other things of this sort, such as the ploughshare, etc., should be understood as spoken earlier.

Bījanti pañcavidhaṃ bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ khandhabījaṃ phalubījaṃ aggabījaṃ bījabījameva pañcamanti. Taṃ sabbampi viruhaṇaṭṭhena bījanteva saṅkhaṃ gacchati.

Seed: the five kinds of seeds are root-seed, stem-seed, joint-seed, shoot-seed, and seed-seed as the fifth. All of that goes to the reckoning of "seed" in the sense of sprouting.

Tattha yathā brāhmaṇassa kasiyā mūlabhūtaṃ bījaṃ dve kiccāni karoti, heṭṭhā mūlena patiṭṭhāti, upari aṅkuraṃ uṭṭhāpeti, evaṃ bhagavato kasiyā mūlabhūtā saddhā heṭṭhā sīlamūlena patiṭṭhāti, upari samathavipassanaṅkuraṃ uṭṭhāpeti. Yathā ca taṃ mūlena pathavirasaṃ āporasaṃ gahetvā nāḷena dhaññaparipākagahaṇatthaṃ vaḍḍhati, evamayaṃ sīlamūlena samathavipassanārasaṃ gahetvā ariyamagganāḷena ariyaphaladhaññaparipākagahaṇatthaṃ vaḍḍhati. Yathā ca taṃ subhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā mūlaṅkurapaṇṇanāḷakaṇḍapasavehi vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ patvā khīraṃ janetvā anekasāliphalabharitaṃ sālisīsaṃ nipphādeti, evamesā cittasantāne patiṭṭhahitvā chahi visuddhīhi vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ patvā ñāṇadassanavisuddhikhīraṃ janetvā anekapaṭisambhidābhiññābharitaṃ arahattaphalaṃ nipphādeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saddhā bīja’’nti.

There, just as the seed, which is the root of the brahmin's ploughing, performs two functions: it becomes established below by the root and raises up a sprout above; so too, faith, which is the root of the Blessed One's ploughing, is established below by the root of virtue and raises up the sprout of samatha and vipassanā above. And just as that grows by taking the sap of the earth and the sap of water with the stem for the sake of fully grasping the ripening of the grain, so too, this grows by taking the sap of samatha and vipassanā with the stem of the Noble Path for the sake of fully grasping the ripening of the grain of the Noble Fruit. And just as that, being established in good soil, having attained growth, increase, and abundance by means of root, sprout, leaf, stem, and shoots, generates milk and produces a head of rice filled with various rice grains, so too, this, being established in the mind-continuum, having attained growth, increase, and abundance by means of the six purifications, generating the milk of knowledge and vision purification, produces the fruit of Arahatship filled with various kinds of analytical knowledges and super-knowledges. Therefore, it was said, "faith is the seed."

Kasmā pana aññesu paropaññāsāya kusaladhammesu ekato uppajjamānesu saddhāva ‘‘bīja’’nti vuttāti ce? Bījakiccakaraṇato. Yathā hi tesu viññāṇaṃyeva vijānanakiccaṃ karoti, evaṃ saddhā bījakiccaṃ. Sā ca sabbakusalānaṃ mūlabhūtā. Yathāha – ‘‘saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati…pe… paññāya ca naṃ ativijjha passatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.183).

But why, among the wholesome qualities arising together in dependence on others, is only faith said to be the "seed"? Because it performs the function of a seed. Just as, among them, consciousness performs the function of knowing, so too, faith performs the function of a seed. And it is the root of all wholesome qualities. As it was said: "One approaches because of faith; approaching, one attends…pe… and sees through with wisdom" (M. ii, 183).

tapo. Indriyasaṃvaravīriyadhutaṅgadukkarakārikānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, idha pana indriyasaṃvaro adhippeto.Vuṭṭhīti vassavuṭṭhi vātavuṭṭhītiādi anekavidhā, idha vassavuṭṭhi adhippetā. Yathā hi brāhmaṇassa vassavuṭṭhisamanuggahitaṃ bījaṃ bījamūlakañca sassaṃ viruhati na milāyati nipphattiṃ gacchati, evaṃ bhagavato indriyasaṃvarasamanuggahitā saddhā, saddhāmūlā ca sīlādayo dhammā viruhanti, na milāyanti nipphattiṃ gacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti.

Austerity: this is a term for the practice of sense-restraint, effort, ascetic practices, and difficult deeds, but here sense-restraint is intended. Rain: there are various kinds, such as rain-fall, wind-rain, etc.; here, rain-fall is intended. Just as the seed sustained by rain-fall and the crop that has the seed as its root sprout, do not wither, and reach fulfillment, so too, faith sustained by the Blessed One's sense-restraint, and the virtues, etc., that have faith as their root, sprout, do not wither, and reach fulfillment. Therefore, he said, "austerity is the rain."

Paññā meti ettha vutto me-saddo purimapadesupi yojetabbo ‘‘saddhā me bījaṃ, tapo me vuṭṭhī’’ti tena kiṃ dīpeti? Yathā, brāhmaṇa, tayā vapite khette sace vuṭṭhi atthi, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce atthi, udakampi tāva dātabbaṃ hoti. Tathā mayā hiriīse paññāyuganaṅgale manoyottena ekābaddhe kate vīriyabalībadde yojetvā satipācanena vijjhitvā attano cittasantānakhettamhi saddhābīje vapite vuṭṭhiyā abhāvo nāma natthi, ayaṃ pana me niccakālaṃ indriyasaṃvaratapo vuṭṭhīti.

Wisdom is my… here the word "me" which is mentioned can be connected to the previous statements too, "faith is my seed, austerity is my rain," by that what does it reveal? Just as, brahmin, if there is rain in the field sown by you, that is good. If there is not, then even water must be given. Similarly, when the plough and yoke of wisdom has been made one with the mind-yoke, having yoked the oxen of effort, and pierced with the goad of mindfulness, in the field of my own mind-continuum, there is no lack of rain when the seed of faith has been sown, but this austerity of sense-restraint is my constant rain.

Paññāti kāmāvacarādibhedato anekavidhā. Idha pana saha vipassanāya maggapaññā adhippetā.Yuganaṅgalanti yugañca naṅgalañca yuganaṅgalaṃ. Yathā hi brāhmaṇassa yuganaṅgalaṃ, evaṃ bhagavato duvidhāpi vipassanā paññā ca. Tattha yathā yugaṃ īsāya upanissayaṃ hoti, purato ca īsābaddhaṃ hoti, yottānaṃ nissayaṃ hoti, balībaddānaṃ ekato gamanaṃ dhāreti, evaṃ paññā hirippamukhānaṃ dhammānaṃ upanissayā hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘paññuttarā sabbe kusalā dhammā’’ti (a. ni. 8.83; 10.58) ca, ‘‘paññā hi seṭṭhā kusalā vadanti, nakkhattarājāriva tārakāna’’nti (jā. 2.17.81) ca. Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena purato ca hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘sīlaṃ sirī cāpi satañca dhammo, anvāyikā paññavato bhavantī’’ti hirivippayogena anuppattito pana īsābaddho hoti. Manosaṅkhātassa samādhiyottassa nissayapaccayato yottānaṃ nissayo hoti. Accāraddhātilīnabhāvapaṭisedhanato vīriyabalībaddānaṃ ekato gamanaṃ dhāreti, yathā ca naṅgalaṃ phālayuttaṃ kasanakāle pathavighanaṃ bhindati, mūlasantānakāni padāleti, evaṃ satiyuttā paññā vipassanākāle dhammānaṃ santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanaṃ bhindati, sabbakilesamūlasantānakāni padāleti. Sā ca kho lokuttarāva, itarā pana lokikāpi siyā. Tenāha ‘‘paññā me yuganaṅgala’’nti.

Wisdom: is of many kinds, distinguished as belonging to the sense-sphere, etc. Here, however, path-wisdom together with vipassanā is intended. Plough and yoke: yoke and plough is plough and yoke. Just as there is a yoke and plough for the brahmin, so too there is two-fold vipassanā and wisdom for the Blessed One. There, just as the yoke is the support for the pole, and is fastened to the pole in front, is the support for the straps, and holds the oxen together in going, so too wisdom is the support for the virtues such as shame, etc. As it was said - "all skillful qualities have wisdom as their chief" (A. iv, 83; v, 58) and "wisdom is said to be the best among skillful qualities, like the king of stars among the stars" (Jā. ii, 17.81). Being the forerunner of skillful qualities, it is in front. As it was said - "virtue, prosperity, and the true doctrine attend the wise," from unarising in separation from shame, it is fastened to the pole. Being the support and condition for the straps of concentration, reckoned as mind, it is the support for the straps. Restraining from excessive exertion and laxity, it holds the oxen of effort together in going, and just as the plough, equipped with a ploughshare, breaks the solid earth at the time of ploughing and crushes the root-continuities, so too, wisdom, equipped with mindfulness, breaks the solid mass of objects of the continuum-aggregate function of phenomena at the time of vipassanā and crushes all root-continuities of defilements. And that is only supramundane, but the other can also be mundane. Therefore, he said, "wisdom is my plough and yoke."

hirī. Taggahaṇena tāya avippayuttaṃ ottappampi gahitameva hoti.Īsāti yuganaṅgalasandhārikā rukkhalaṭṭhi. Yathā hi brāhmaṇassa īsā yuganaṅgalaṃ dhāreti, evaṃ bhagavatopi hirī lokiyalokuttarapaññāsaṅkhātaṃ yuganaṅgalaṃ dhāreti hiriabhāve paññāya abhāvato. Yathā ca īsāpaṭibaddhayuganaṅgalaṃ kiccakaraṃ hoti acalaṃ asithilaṃ, evaṃ hiripaṭibaddhā ca paññā kiccakārī hoti acalā asithilā abbokiṇṇā ahirikena. Tenāha ‘‘hirī īsā’’ti. Munātītimano,cittassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Idha pana manosīsena taṃsampayutto samādhi adhippeto.Yottanti rajjubandhanaṃ. Taṃ tividhaṃ īsāya saha yugassa bandhanaṃ, yugena saha balībaddānaṃ bandhanaṃ, sārathinā saha balībaddānaṃ ekābandhananti. Tattha yathā brāhmaṇassa yottaṃ īsāyugabalībadde ekābaddhe katvā sakakicce paṭipādeti, evaṃ bhagavato samādhi sabbeva te hiripaññāvīriyadhamme ekārammaṇe avikkhepasabhāvena bandhitvā sakakicce paṭipādeti. Tenāha ‘‘mano yotta’’nti.

Shame: by mentioning that, the associated dread of blame is also taken. Pole: the wooden stick that fastens the plough and yoke. Just as the pole holds the yoke and plough for the brahmin, so too, shame holds the plough and yoke reckoned as mundane and supramundane wisdom for the Blessed One, because in the absence of shame, there is an absence of wisdom. And just as the yoke and plough fastened to the pole perform their function being unwavering and unfailing, so too, wisdom fastened to shame is a performer of function, being unwavering, unfailing, and unscattered by the shameless one. Therefore, he said, "shame is the pole." Mind: that which thinks, this is a name for the heart. But here, concentration associated with the head of the mind is intended. Straps: is the binding of ropes. That is of three kinds: the binding of the yoke together with the pole, the binding of the oxen together with the yoke, and the single binding of the oxen together with the driver. There, just as the straps make the pole, yoke, and oxen bound together and perform their respective functions for the brahmin, so too, concentration binds all those qualities of shame, wisdom, and effort together in a single object by means of its nature of non-distraction and performs their respective functions. Therefore, he said, "mind is the straps."

sati. Phāletītiphālo. Pājenti etenātipājanaṃ. Taṃ idha ‘‘pācana’’nti vuttaṃ. Patodassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Phālo ca pācanañca phālapācanaṃ. Yathā hi brāhmaṇassa phālapācanaṃ, evaṃ bhagavato vipassanāsampayuttā maggasampayuttā ca sati. Tattha yathā phālo naṅgalaṃ anurakkhati, purato cassa gacchati, evaṃ sati kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā ārammaṇe vā upaṭṭhāpayamānā paññānaṅgalaṃ rakkhati. Tenevesā ‘‘satārakkhena cetasā viharatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 10.20) viya ārakkhāti vuttā. Appamussanavasena cassā purato hoti. Satiparicite hi dhamme paññā pajānāti, no pamuṭṭhe. Yathā ca pācanaṃ balībaddānaṃ vijjhanabhayaṃ dassentaṃ saṃsīdituṃ na deti, uppathagamanaṃ vāreti, evaṃ sati vīriyabalībaddānaṃ apāyabhayaṃ dassentī kosajjasaṃsīdanaṃ na deti, kāmaguṇasaṅkhāte agocare cāraṃ nivāretvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojentī uppathagamanaṃ vāreti. Tenāha ‘‘sati me phālapācana’’nti.

Mindfulness: that which cuts is the ploughshare. That by which they drive is the goad. That here is called "pācana". This is a name for a whip. Ploughshare and goad is ploughshare-goad. Just as there is a ploughshare-goad for the brahmin, so too there is mindfulness associated with vipassanā and associated with the path for the Blessed One. There, just as the ploughshare protects the plough and goes in front of it, so too, mindfulness, seeking out the courses of skillful and unskillful qualities and establishing it on the object, protects the wisdom-plough. Therefore, that is called a protector, as in "he dwells with a mind protected by mindfulness" (A. v, 20). And by means of non-forgetfulness, it is in front of it. For wisdom knows a quality that is familiar with mindfulness, not one that is forgotten. And just as the goad, showing the fear of being pierced to the oxen, does not allow them to sink down, or prevents them from going astray, so too, mindfulness, showing the fear of the lower realms to the oxen of effort, does not allow them to sink into laziness, or preventing them from wandering in an improper place, reckoned as the sense pleasures, and employing them in the meditation subject, prevents them from going astray. Therefore, he said, "mindfulness is my ploughshare-goad."

Kāyaguttoti tividhena kāyasucaritena gutto.Vacīguttoti catubbidhena vacīsucaritena gutto. Ettāvatā pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ vuttaṃ.Āhāre udare yatoti ettha āhāramukhena sabbapaccayānaṃ gahitattā catubbidhepi paccaye yato saṃyato nirupakkilesoti attho. Iminā ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ vuttaṃ.Udare yatoti udare yato saṃyato mitabhojī, āhāre mattaññūti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā bhojane mattaññutāmukhena paccayapaṭisevanasīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena kiṃ dīpeti? Yathā tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, bījaṃ vapitvā sassaparipālanatthaṃ kaṇṭakavatiṃ vā rukkhavatiṃ vā pākāraparikkhepaṃ vā karosi, tena te gomahiṃsamigagaṇā pavesaṃ alabhantā sassaṃ na vilumpanti, evamahampi taṃ saddhābījaṃ vapitvā nānappakārakusalasassaparipālanatthaṃ kāyavacīāhāraguttimayaṃ tividhaṃ parikkhepaṃ karomi, tena me rāgādiakusaladhammagomahiṃsamigagaṇā pavesaṃ alabhantā nānappakārakaṃ kusalasassaṃ na vilumpantīti.

Guarded in body: guarded by means of the three kinds of good bodily conduct. Guarded in speech: guarded by means of the four kinds of good verbal conduct. Thus far, morality consisting of the Pātimokkha restraint has been spoken of. Restrained in regard to food: here, since all requisites are taken by way of food, therefore restrained, controlled, and free from defilements in regard to the four kinds of requisites is the meaning. By this, morality consisting of purity of livelihood has been spoken of. Restrained in regard to the belly: restrained and controlled in regard to the belly, is of moderate eating, is knowing moderation in food has been said. By this, morality consisting of reflection on the use of requisites has been spoken of by way of knowing moderation in food. By that what does it reveal? Just as you, brahmin, having sown the seed, make a thorny hedge, or a tree hedge, or a surrounding wall for the protection of the crop, so that the herds of cows, buffaloes, and deer, not getting an opportunity to enter, do not plunder the crop, so too, having sown that seed of faith, I make a three-fold enclosure consisting of guarding the body, speech, and food for the protection of the crop of various kinds of skillful qualities, so that the herds of cows, buffaloes, and deer of unskillful qualities such as greed, etc., not getting an opportunity to enter, do not plunder the crop of various kinds of skillful qualities.

Saccaṃ karomi niddānanti ettha dvīhākārehi avisaṃvādanaṃsaccaṃ. Niddānanti chedanaṃ lunanaṃ uppāṭanaṃ. Karaṇatthe cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ hettha attho ‘‘saccena karomi niddāna’’nti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yathā tvaṃ bāhiraṃ kasiṃ katvā sassadūsakānaṃ tiṇānaṃ hatthena vā asitena vā niddānaṃ karosi, evaṃ ahampi ajjhattikaṃ kasiṃ katvā kusalasassadūsakānaṃ visaṃvādanatiṇānaṃ saccena niddānaṃ karomī’’ti. Yathābhūtañāṇaṃ vā etthasaccanti veditabbaṃ. Tena attasaññādīnaṃ tiṇānaṃ niddānaṃ karomīti dasseti. Atha vāniddānanti chedakaṃ lāvakaṃ uppāṭakanti attho. Yathā tvaṃ dāsaṃ vā kammakaraṃ vā niddānaṃ karosi, ‘‘niddehi tiṇānī’’ti tiṇānaṃ chedakaṃ lāvakaṃ uppāṭakaṃ karosi, evamahaṃ saccaṃ karomīti dasseti, atha vāsaccanti diṭṭhisaccaṃ. Tamahaṃ niddānaṃ karomi, chinditabbaṃ lunitabbaṃ uppāṭetabbaṃ karomīti. Iti imesu dvīsu vikappesu upayogenevattho yujjati.

I make truth the weeding: here truth is non-deception in two ways. Weeding: is cutting, reaping, uprooting. And this should be understood as a usage-denoting instrument in the sense of doing. This is the meaning here "I make truth the weeding". What has been said is this - "just as you, having done external ploughing, do the weeding of grasses that spoil the crop with the hand or with a sword, so too, having done internal ploughing, I do the weeding of the deceiving grasses that spoil the crop of skillful qualities with truth." Or truth here should be understood as knowledge of what actually is. By that, he shows that he does the weeding of the grasses of self-conceit, etc. Furthermore, weeding means cutter, reaper, uprooter. Just as you do the weeding, making a slave or a worker a cutter, reaper, uprooter of the grasses, saying "weed the grasses", so too I make truth, he shows. Or else truth means the truth of views. That I make the weeding, I make it to be cut, reaped, uprooted. Thus, in these two alternatives, the meaning fits only in the instrumental case.

Soraccaṃ me pamocananti ettha yaṃ taṃ ‘‘kāyiko avītikkamo vācasiko avītikkamo’’ti sīlameva ‘‘soracca’’nti vuttaṃ, na taṃ adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Kāyagutto’’tiādinā hi taṃ vuttameva. Arahattaphalaṃ pana adhippetaṃ. Taṃ hi sundare nibbāne ratattā ‘‘soracca’’nti vuccati.Pamocananti yogavissajjanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā tava pamocanaṃ punapi sāyanhe vā dutiyadivase vā anāgatasaṃvacchare vā yojetabbato appamocanameva hoti, na mama evaṃ. Na hi mama antarā mocanaṃ nāma atthi. Ahaṃ hi dīpaṅkaradasabalakālato paṭṭhāya paññānaṅgale vīriyabalībadde yojetvā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni mahākasiṃ kasanto tāva na muñciṃ, yāva na sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhiṃ. Yadā ca me sabbaṃ taṃ kālaṃ khepetvā bodhimūle aparājitapallaṅke nisinnassa sabbaguṇaparivāraṃ arahattaphalaṃ udapādi, tadā mayā taṃ sabbussukkapaṭippassaddhiyā pamuttaṃ, na dāni puna yojetabbaṃ bhavissatīti. Etamatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘soraccaṃ me pamocana’’nti.

Soraccaṃ me pamocananti: Here, the "soracca" mentioned as "bodily non-transgression, verbal non-transgression" refers to sīla (virtue), but that is not the intended meaning, as it has already been described by "kāyagutto" etc. Here, the intended meaning is the fruition of Arahatship (arahattaphala). That is called "soracca" because of delighting in the beautiful Nibbāna. Pamocananti: Abandoning the yoke (yoga-vissajjana). The meaning is: Just as your pamocana (release) is actually non-release, as it has to be yoked again in the evening, or the next day, or in a future year, it is not so for me. For me, there is no such thing as an intervening release. From the time of Dīpaṅkara Dasabala, having yoked the plough of wisdom with the bullocks of effort, I did not release it while ploughing the great field for more than a hundred thousand aeons and four incalculable periods, until I awakened to Sammāsambodhi (Perfect Enlightenment). And when, after spending all that time, the Arahatship fruition, attended by all good qualities, arose for me sitting at the foot of the Bodhi tree on the unvanquished seat, then I released it with the cessation of all striving, and now it will not have to be yoked again. With this meaning in mind, he said, "soraccaṃ me pamocana".

Vīriyaṃme dhuradhorayhanti etthavīriyanti kāyikacetasiko vīriyārambho.Dhuradhorayhanti dhurāyaṃ dhorayhaṃ, dhurāvahanti attho. Yathā hi brāhmaṇassa dhurāyaṃ dhorayhākaḍḍhitaṃ naṅgalaṃ bhūmighanaṃ bhindati, mūlasantānakāni ca padāleti, evaṃ bhagavato vīriyākaḍḍhitaṃ paññānaṅgalaṃ yathā vuttaṃ ghanaṃ bhindati, kilesasantānakāni ca padāleti. Tenāha ‘‘vīriyaṃ me dhuradhorayha’’nti. Atha vā purimadhurāvahattā dhurā, mūladhurāvahattā dhorayhā, dhurā ca dhorayhā ca dhuradhorayhā. Iti yathā brāhmaṇassa ekekasmiṃ naṅgale catubalībaddapabhedaṃ dhuradhorayhaṃ vahantaṃ uppannuppannaṃ tiṇamūlaghātañceva sassasampattiñca sādheti, evaṃ bhagavato catusammappadhānavīriyabhedaṃ dhuradhorayhaṃ vahantaṃ uppannuppannaṃ akusalaghātañceva kusalasampattiñca sādheti. Tenāha ‘‘vīriyaṃ me dhuradhorayha’’nti.

Vīriyaṃ me dhuradhorayhanti: Here, vīriyanti means the exertion of effort, both physical and mental (kāyikacetasiko vīriyārambho). Dhuradhorayhanti: dhorayhaṃ in dhuraṃ (yoke), meaning carrying the yoke. Just as the plough, drawn by the dhorayhaṃ on the yoke, breaks the dense earth and tramples the root systems, so the plough of wisdom, drawn by the effort of the Blessed One, breaks the aforesaid density and tramples the defilement systems. Therefore, he said, "vīriyaṃ me dhuradhorayha". Alternatively, because it carries the primary yoke, it is dhurā; because it carries the root yoke, it is dhorayhā; dhurā and dhorayhā are dhuradhorayhā. Thus, just as a brāhmaṇa, with each plough carrying the dhuradhorayhaṃ, a team of four bullocks, accomplishes the destruction of newly arisen grass roots and the prosperity of crops, so the Blessed One, carrying the dhuradhorayhaṃ, a fourfold division of right effort, accomplishes the destruction of newly arisen unwholesome qualities and the prosperity of wholesome qualities. Therefore, he said, "vīriyaṃ me dhuradhorayha".

Yogakkhemādhivāhananti ettha yogehi khemattā nibbānaṃ yogakkhemaṃ nāma, taṃ adhikicca vāhīyati, abhimukhaṃ vā vāhīyatīti adhivāhanaṃ, yogakkhemassa adhivāhanaṃ yogakkhemādhivāhananti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā tava dhuradhorayhaṃ puratthimādīsu aññataradisābhimukhaṃ vāhīyati, tathā mama dhuradhorayhaṃ nibbānābhimukhaṃ vāhīyatīti. Evaṃ vāhīyamānaṃvagacchati anivattantaṃ. Yathā tava naṅgalaṃ vahantaṃ dhuradhorayhaṃ khettakoṭiṃ patvā puna nivattati, evaṃ anivattantaṃ dīpaṅkarakālato paṭṭhāya gacchateva. Yasmā vā tena tena maggena pahīnā kilesā na punappunaṃ pahātabbā honti, yathā tava naṅgalena chinnāni tiṇāni puna aparasmiṃ samaye chinditabbāni honti, tasmāpi evaṃ paṭhamamaggavasena diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese, dutiyavasena oḷārike, tatiyavasena aṇusahagate, catutthavasena sabbakilese pajahantaṃ gacchati anivattantaṃ. Atha vāgacchati anivattanti nivattanarahitaṃ hutvā gacchatīti attho.Tanti taṃ dhuradhorayhaṃ. Evamettha attho veditabbo. Evaṃ gacchantañca yathā tava dhuradhorayhaṃ na taṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchati, yattha gantvā kassako asoko virajo hutvā na socati. Etaṃ pana taṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatiyattha gantvā na socati. Yattha satipācanena etaṃ vīriyadhuradhorayhaṃ codento gantvā mādiso kassako asoko virajo hutvā na socati, taṃ sabbasokasallasamugghātabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma asaṅkhataṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti.

Yogakkhemādhivāhananti: Here, because Nibbāna is khemattā (safe) from the yogas (bonds), it is called yogakkhemaṃ. That which carries towards it, or carries facing it, is adhivāhanaṃ, yogakkhemassa adhivāhanaṃ is yogakkhemādhivāhananti. The meaning is: Just as your dhuradhorayhaṃ is driven facing one of the eastern directions, so my dhuradhorayhaṃ is driven facing Nibbāna. While being driven thus, it gacchati anivattantaṃ (goes without turning back). Just as your dhuradhorayhaṃ, while driving the plough, reaches the edge of the field and then turns back, so mine, without turning back, only goes onward from the time of Dīpaṅkara. Or, because the defilements abandoned by that path do not have to be abandoned again and again, just as the grasses cut by your plough have to be cut again at another time, therefore, having abandoned the defilements seen in one place by means of the first path, the coarse ones by means of the second, the subtle associated ones by means of the third, and all the defilements by means of the fourth, it goes without turning back. Alternatively, gacchati anivattanti means it goes by being devoid of turning back. Tanti means that dhuradhorayhaṃ. Here, the meaning should be understood thus. And while going thus, your dhuradhorayhaṃ does not go to that place where, having gone, the farmer becomes without sorrow and without stain and does not grieve. But this one goes to that place yattha gantvā na socati (where, having gone, one does not grieve). By urging on this vīriyadhuradhorayhaṃ with the goad of mindfulness, the farmer, like me, having gone there, becomes without sorrow and without stain and does not grieve; it goes to that unconditioned place called Nibbāna, which is the uprooting of all sorrows and darts.

evamesā kasīti gāthamāha. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yassa, brāhmaṇa, esā saddhābījā tapovuṭṭhiyā anuggahitā kasī paññāmayaṃ yuganaṅgalaṃ hirimayañca īsaṃ manomayena yottena ekābaddhaṃ katvā paññānaṅgalena satiphālaṃ ākoṭetvā satipācanaṃ gahetvā kāyavacīāhāraguttiyā gopetvā saccaṃ niddānaṃ katvā soraccapamocanaṃ vīriyadhuradhorayhaṃ yogakkhemābhimukhaṃ anivattantaṃ vāhantena kaṭṭhā kasī kammapariyosānaṃ catubbidhaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ pāpitā,sā hoti amatapphalā,sā esā kasī amatapphalā hoti. Amataṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, nibbānānisaṃsā hotīti attho. Sā kho panesā kasī na mamevekassa amatapphalā hoti, atha kho yo koci khattiyo vā brāhmaṇo vā vesso vā suddo vā gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā etaṃ kasiṃ kasati, so sabbopi etaṃ kasitvāna sabbadukkhā pamuccatīti.

evamesā kasīti (such is this farming) is the verse he spoke. Its meaning in brief is: O brāhmaṇa, this farming, which is sustained by the rain of virtue supported by faith-seed, having made the plough of wisdom and the ploughshare of shame joined together by the yoke of mind, having struck the ploughshare of mindfulness with the plough of wisdom, having taken up the goad of mindfulness, having protected it by restraint of body, speech, and food, having made truth the foundation, and by driving the soraccapamocanaṃ, the vīriyadhuradhorayhaṃ facing yogakkhemaṃ without turning back, this farming, by which the fourfold fruits of asceticism have been attained as the culmination of the work, sā hoti amatapphalā (that yields the fruit of deathlessness), this farming yields the fruit of deathlessness. Amataṃ (deathlessness) is called Nibbāna; the meaning is, it has the benefits of Nibbāna. But this farming is not only fruitful of deathlessness for me alone, but whoever, whether khattiya, brāhmaṇa, vessa, or sudda, householder or renunciate, cultivates this farming, all of them, having cultivated this farming, are released from all suffering.

bhuñjatu bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ tato parañca vuttatthamevāti. Paṭhamaṃ.

bhuñjatu bhavaṃ gotamoti (may venerable Gotama partake), etc., he said. All that and what follows has the meaning as stated. The first.

2. Udayasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Udayasuttavaṇṇanā

198.Dutiyeodanena pūresīti attano atthāya sampāditena sūpabyañjanena odanena pūretvā adāsi. Bhagavā kira paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokentova taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ disvā, pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā, gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā, dvāraṃ pidhāya, nisinno tassa bhojanaṃ upasaṃhariyamānaṃ disvā, ekakova pattaṃ aṃsakūṭe laggetvā, gandhakuṭito nikkhamma, nagaradvāre pattaṃ nīharitvā, antonagaraṃ pavisitvā, paṭipāṭiyā gacchanto brāhmaṇassa dvārakoṭṭhake aṭṭhāsi. Brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ disvā, attano sajjitaṃ bhojanaṃ adāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Dutiyampīti dutiyadivasepi.Tatiyampīti tatiyadivasepi. Tāni kira tīṇi divasāni nirantaraṃ brāhmaṇassa gharadvāraṃ gacchantassa bhagavato antarā añño koci uṭṭhāya pattaṃ gahetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, mahājano olokentova aṭṭhāsi.

198. In the second [sutta], odanena pūresīti: Having filled [the bowl] with rice with soup and curry prepared for his own sake, he gave it. It seems that the Blessed One, looking at the world at dawn and seeing that brāhmaṇa, after attending to his bodily needs early in the morning, entered the Perfumed Chamber, closed the door, and sat down, seeing that food was being brought to him, took the bowl by himself, hung it on his shoulder, came out of the Perfumed Chamber, took the bowl to the city gate, entered the city, and, going in order, stood at the brāhmaṇa's doorway. The brāhmaṇa, seeing the Blessed One, gave the food he had prepared. Referring to that, this was said. Dutiyampīti: on the second day too. Tatiyampīti: on the third day too. It seems that during those three days, while the Blessed One went to the brāhmaṇa's house door continuously, no one else was able to rise up and take the bowl; the great crowd just stood watching.

Etadavocāti brāhmaṇo tīṇi divasāni pattaṃ pūretvā dentopi na saddhāya adāsi, ‘‘gharadvāraṃ āgantvā ṭhitassa pabbajitassa bhikkhāmattampi adatvā bhuñjatī’’ti upārambhabhayena adāsi. Dadanto ca dve divasāni datvā kiñci avatvāva nivatto. Bhagavāpi kiñci avatvāva pakkanto. Tatiyadivase pana adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto etaṃ ‘‘pakaṭṭhako’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Bhagavāpi etaṃ vacanaṃ nicchārāpanatthameva yāva tatiyamagamāsi. Tatthapakaṭṭhakoti rasagiddho.

Etadavocāti: Although the brāhmaṇa gave [the Blessed One] a bowl filled [with food] for three days, he did not give it out of faith; he gave it out of fear of reproach, thinking, "Without giving even a morsel of food to the renunciate who has come and stood at the house door, he eats!" And while giving, he gave for two days and returned without saying anything. The Blessed One also departed without saying anything. But on the third day, being unable to remain indifferent, he spoke this saying, beginning with "pakaṭṭhako" (a glutton). The Blessed One also went as far as the third time only to elicit this statement. There, pakaṭṭhakoti means greedy for taste.

Punappunaṃ ceva vapanti bījanti satthā brāhmaṇassa vacanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘brāhmaṇa, tvaṃ tīṇi divasāni piṇḍapātaṃ datvā osakkasi, punappunaṃ kātabbā nāma lokasmiṃ soḷasa dhammā’’ti vatvā te dhamme dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthapunappunaṃ ceva vapantīti ekasmiṃ sassavāre vuttaṃ ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti anosakkitvā aparāparesupi sassavāresu ca vapantiyeva.Punappunaṃ vassatīti na ekadivasaṃ vassitvā tiṭṭhati, punappunadivasesupi punappunasaṃvaccharesupi vassatiyeva, evaṃ janapadā iddhā honti. Etenupāyena sabbattha nayo veditabbo.

Punappunaṃ ceva vapanti bījanti: The Teacher, having heard the brāhmaṇa's statement, said, "Brāhmaṇa, you are hesitating after giving alms for three days; there are sixteen things in the world that should be done repeatedly," and, to show those things, he began this teaching. There, punappunaṃ ceva vapantīti: In one harvest season, having said "alamettāvatā" (enough, that's all), they do not hesitate, but in subsequent harvest seasons, they keep sowing. Punappunaṃ vassatīti: It does not rain just for one day and stop; it rains again and again on subsequent days and in subsequent years; in this way, the countrysides are prosperous. In this way, the method should be understood everywhere.

Yācakāti imasmiṃ pade satthā desanākusalatāya attānampi pakkhipitvā dasseti.Khīranikāti khīrakārakā godohakā. Na hi te ekavārameva thanaṃ añchanti, punappunaṃ añchantā dhenuṃ duhantīti attho.Kilamati phandati cāti ayaṃ satto tena iriyāpathena kilamati ceva phandati ca.Gabbhanti soṇasiṅgālādīnampi tiracchānagatānaṃ kucchiṃ.Sivathikanti susānaṃ, mataṃ mataṃ sattaṃ tattha punappunaṃ harantīti attho.Maggañca laddhā apunabbhavāyāti apunabbhavāya maggo nāma nibbānaṃ, taṃ labhitvāti attho.

Yācakāti: In this word, the Teacher, skillful in teaching, shows [it] by including himself also. Khīranikāti: milk-extractors, milkers of cows. They do not milk the udder only once; they milk the cow by milking it again and again. Kilamati phandati cāti: This being becomes weary and agitated by that posture. Gabbhanti: the womb even of animals such as jackals and foxes. Sivathikanti: the cemetery; they carry the dead being there again and again. Maggañca laddhā apunabbhavāyāti: apunabbhavāya maggo (the path to non-rebirth) means Nibbāna; having attained that, is the meaning.

Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhatvāva soḷasa punappunadhamme desentena vutte.Etadavocāti desanāpariyosāne pasanno saddhiṃ puttadāramittañātivaggena bhagavato pāde vanditvā etaṃ ‘‘abhikkantaṃ bho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Dutiyaṃ.

Evaṃ vutteti: When [this] was said by the Blessed One, standing on the thoroughfare, teaching the sixteen things that are done repeatedly. Etadavocāti: At the end of the teaching, being pleased, having bowed at the Blessed One's feet together with his sons, wife, friends, and relatives, he spoke this saying beginning with "abhikkantaṃ bho" (excellent, venerable sir). The second.

3. Devahitasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Devahitasuttavaṇṇanā

199.Tatiyevātehīti udaravātehi. Bhagavato kira chabbassāni dukkarakārikaṃ karontassa pasatamuggayūsādīni āhārayato dubbhojanena ceva dukkhaseyyāya ca udaravāto kuppi. Aparabhāge sambodhiṃ patvā paṇītabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi antarantarā so ābādho attānaṃ dassetiyeva. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Upaṭṭhāko hotīti paṭhamabodhiyaṃ anibaddhupaṭṭhākakāle upaṭṭhāko hoti. Tasmiṃ kira kāle satthuasītimahātheresu upaṭṭhāko abhūtapubbo nāma natthi. Nāgasamālo upavāno sunakkhatto cundo samaṇuddeso sāgato bodhi meghiyoti ime pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatupaṭṭhākā. Imasmiṃ pana kāle upavānatthero pātova uṭṭhāya pariveṇasammajjanaṃ dantakaṭṭhadānaṃ nhānodakapariyādanaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā anugamananti sabbaṃ bhagavato upaṭṭhānamakāsi.Upasaṅkamīti paṭhamabodhiyaṃ kira vīsati vassāni niddhūmaṃ araññameva hoti, bhikkhusaṅghassa udakatāpanampi na bhagavatā anuññātaṃ. So ca brāhmaṇo uddhanapāḷiṃ bandhāpetvā mahācāṭiyo uddhanamāropetvā uṇhodakaṃ kāretvā, nhānīyacuṇṇādīhi saddhiṃ taṃ vikkiṇanto jīvikaṃ kappeti. Nhāyitukāmā tattha gantvā mūlaṃ datvā nhāyitvā gandhe vilimpitvā mālaṃ piḷandhitvā pakkamanti. Tasmā thero tattha upasaṅkami.

199. In the third [sutta], vātehīti: by wind disorders. It seems that for the Blessed One, who was practicing severe austerities for six years, eating food such as lentil soup, indigestion and painful sleep caused wind disorders to arise. Later on, even after attaining Enlightenment and eating good food, that disease would show itself from time to time. Referring to that, this was said. Upaṭṭhāko hotīti: He was an attendant during the time of the first Enlightenment, when attendants were not fixed. It seems that at that time, there was no one among the eighty great elders who had not been an attendant. Nāgasamālo, Upavāno, Sunakkhatto, Cundo the novice, Sāgato, Bodhi, and Meghiyo are the attendants who appear in the Pāḷi. But at this time, the Elder Upavāṇa would rise early in the morning and perform all the duties of an attendant to the Blessed One, such as sweeping the monastery, giving a toothpick, providing bathing water, and taking his robe and bowl and following him. Upasaṅkamīti: It seems that for twenty years after the first Enlightenment, it was like a smokeless forest, and even heating water for the monks was not allowed by the Blessed One. And that brāhmaṇa, after constructing a water-drawing well, put up large pots on the water-drawing device and made hot water, and made a living by selling it along with bathing powders etc. Those who wanted to bathe would go there, give money, bathe, anoint themselves with perfumes, wear garlands, and depart. Therefore, the Elder went there.

Kiṃ patthayānoti kiṃ icchanto.Kiṃ esanti kiṃ gavesanto.Pūjito pūjaneyyānanti idaṃ thero dasabalassa vaṇṇaṃ kathetumārabhi. Gilānabhesajjatthaṃ gatena kira gilānassa vaṇṇo kathetabboti vattametaṃ. Vaṇṇaṃ hi sutvā manussā sakkaccaṃ bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ maññanti. Sappāyabhesajjaṃ laddhā gilāno khippameva vuṭṭhāti. Kathentena ca jhānavimokkhasamāpattimaggaphalāni ārabbha kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Sīlavā lajjī kukkuccako bahussuto āgamadharo vaṃsānurakkhako’’ti evaṃ pana āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃyeva kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.Pūjaneyyānanti asītimahātherā sadevakena lokena pūjetabbāti pūjaneyyā. Teyeva sakkātabbātisakkareyyā. Tesaṃyeva apaciti kattabbātiapaceyyā. Bhagavā tesaṃ pūjito sakkato apacito ca, iccassa taṃ guṇaṃ pakāsento thero evamāha.Hātaveti harituṃ.

Kiṃ patthayānoti: What desiring? Kiṃ esanti: What searching for? Pūjito pūjaneyyānanti: Here, the Elder began to relate the virtues of the Ten-Powered One. It is the custom that, having gone for medicine for a sick person, the virtues of the sick person should be related. People think that having heard the virtues, medicine should be given respectfully. Having obtained suitable medicine, the sick person quickly recovers. While relating [the virtues], one should not relate [anything] about jhāna, liberation, attainments, paths, and fruits. But one should relate only the conduct that should be approached, such as "virtuous, modest, scrupulous, learned, a preserver of the Āgamas (tradition), a protector of lineage." Pūjaneyyānanti: the eighty great elders are worthy to be revered by the world with its devas. They alone are worthy to be honored, thus sakkareyyā. To them alone should respect be shown, thus apaceyyā. The Blessed One is revered, honored, and respected by them, and the Elder, revealing this quality of his, said thus. Hātaveti: to take.

Phāṇitassa ca puṭanti mahantaṃ nicchārikaṃ guḷapiṇḍaṃ. So kira ‘‘kiṃ samaṇassa gotamassa aphāsuka’’nti? Pucchitvā, ‘‘udaravāto’’ti sutvā, ‘‘tena hi mayamettha bhesajjaṃ jānāma, ito thokena udakena idaṃ phāṇitaṃ āloḷetvā nhānapariyosāne pātuṃ detha, iti uṇhodakena bahi parisedo bhavissati, iminā antoti evaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa phāsukaṃ bhavissatī’’ti vatvā therassa patte pakkhipitvā adāsi.

Phāṇitassa ca puṭanti: a large, solid lump of jaggery. He asked, "What is not comfortable for the ascetic Gotama?" Having heard, "Wind disorders," he said, "Then we know a medicine for this; having stirred this jaggery with a little water, give it to him to drink at the end of the bath. Thus, there will be external fomentation with hot water, and internal [relief] with this; thus, it will be comfortable for the ascetic Gotama," and having put it in the Elder's bowl, he gave it.

Upasaṅkamīti tasmiṃ kira ābādhe paṭippassaddhe ‘‘devahitena tathāgatassa bhesajjaṃ dinnaṃ, teneva rogo vūpasanto, aho dānaṃ paramadānaṃ brāhmaṇassā’’ti kathā vitthāritā jātā. Taṃ sutvā kittikāmo brāhmaṇo ‘‘ettakenapi tāva me ayaṃ kittisaddo abbhuggato’’ti somanassajāto attanā katabhāvaṃ jānāpetukāmo tāvatakeneva dasabale vissāsaṃ āpajjitvā upasaṅkami.

Upasaṅkamīti: It seems that when that sickness had subsided, the story was spread, "Medicine was given to the Tathāgata by Devahita; by that alone the disease was calmed; alas, the brāhmaṇa's giving is the supreme giving!" Having heard that, the brāhmaṇa, desiring fame, thinking, "Even with this much, my fame has risen so high," became joyful, and, wanting to make known the fact that he had done it himself, having gained confidence in the Ten-Powered One with just that much, he approached.

Dajjātidadeyya.Kathaṃ hi yajamānassāti kena kāraṇena yajantassa.Ijjhatīti samijjhati mahapphalo hoti.Yovedīti yo avedi aññāsi, viditaṃ pākaṭamakāsi ‘‘yovetī’’tipi pāṭho, yo aveti jānātīti attho.Passatīti dibbacakkhunā passati.Jātikkhayanti arahattaṃ.Abhiññāvositoti jānitvā vosito vosānaṃ katakiccataṃ patto.Evaṃ hi yajamānassāti iminā khīṇāsave yajanākārena yajantassa. Tatiyaṃ.

Dajjāti: would give. Kathaṃ hi yajamānassāti: For what reason, for one who is sacrificing? Ijjhatīti: succeeds, is greatly fruitful. Yovedīti: who knew, understood, made known; yovetītipi is also a reading, meaning who knows, understands. Passatīti: sees with the divine eye. Jātikkhayanti: Arahatship. Abhiññāvositoti: having known, brought to an end, reached the end of what had to be done. Evaṃ hi yajamānassāti: in this way, for one sacrificing in the manner of the khīṇāsava (one with destroyed taints). The third.

4. Mahāsālasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Mahāsālasuttavaṇṇanā

200.Catutthelūkho lūkhapāvuraṇoti jiṇṇo jiṇṇapāvuraṇo.Upasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Tassa kira ghare aṭṭhasatasahassadhanaṃ ahosi. So catunnaṃ puttānaṃ āvāhaṃ katvā cattāri satasahassāni adāsi. Athassa brāhmaṇiyā kālaṅkatāya puttā sammantayiṃsu – ‘‘sace aññaṃ brāhmaṇiṃ ānessati, tassā kucchiyaṃ nibbattavasena kulaṃ bhijjissati. Handa naṃ mayaṃ saṅgaṇhāmā’’ti. Te cattāropi paṇītehi ghāsacchādanādīhi upaṭṭhahantā hatthapādasambāhanādīni karontā saṅgaṇhitvā ekadivasaṃ divā niddāyitvā vuṭṭhitassa hatthapāde sambāhamānā pāṭiyekkaṃ gharāvāse ādīnavaṃ vatvā – ‘‘mayaṃ tumhe iminā nīhārena yāvajīvaṃ upaṭṭhahissāma, sesadhanampi no dethā’’ti yāciṃsu. Brāhmaṇo puna ekekassa satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ datvā attano nivatthapārupanamattaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ cattāro koṭṭhāse katvā niyyādesi. Taṃ jeṭṭhaputto katipāhaṃ upaṭṭhahi.

200. In the fourth, lūkho lūkhapāvuraṇo means old, wearing an old cloak. Upasaṅkamī means why did he approach? It seems he had 8,800,000 in wealth. Having arranged the marriages of his four sons, he gave away 4,400,000. Then, after his brahmin wife passed away, his sons conspired, "If he brings another brahmin woman, the family will be divided due to the children born from her womb. Let's take care of him." So, all four, attending to him with excellent food and clothing, performing services like massaging his hands and feet, and taking care of him, one day, after he had slept during the day and woken up, while massaging his hands and feet, each of them spoke of the disadvantages of household life, and requested, "We will take care of you with this provision for as long as you live, give us the remaining wealth too." Again, the brahmin gave 100,000 to each, keeping only what he wore and covered himself with, and divided all his belongings and possessions into four portions. The eldest son attended to him for a few days.

Atha naṃ ekadivasaṃ nhatvā āgacchantaṃ dvārakoṭṭhake ṭhatvā suṇhā evamāha – ‘‘kiṃ tayā jeṭṭhaputtassa sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā atirekaṃ dinnamatthi? Nanu sabbesaṃ dve dve satasahassāni dinnāni, kiṃ sesaputtānaṃ gharassa maggaṃ na jānāsī’’ti? So ‘‘nassa vasalī’’ti kujjhitvā aññassa gharaṃ agamāsi, tatopi katipāhaccayena imināva upāyena palāpito aññassāti evaṃ ekagharepi pavesanaṃ alabhamāno paṇḍaraṅgapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā bhikkhāya caranto kālānamaccayena jarājiṇṇo dubbhojanadukkhaseyyāhi milātasarīro bhikkhācārato āgamma, pīṭhakāya nipanno niddaṃ okkamitvā vuṭṭhāya nisinno attānaṃ oloketvā puttesu patiṭṭhaṃ apassanto cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo kira gotamo abbhākuṭiko uttānamukho sukhasambhāso paṭisanthārakusalo, sakkā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paṭisanthāraṃ labhitu’’nti nivāsanapāvuraṇaṃ saṇṭhapetvā bhikkhābhājanamādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.

Then one day, as he was coming after bathing, his daughter-in-law, standing at the doorway, said, "Did you give the eldest son a hundred or a thousand more? Weren't two hundred thousand given to each of them? Don't the other sons know the way to the house?" He, angered, thinking, "worthless woman," went to another's house; after a few days, driven away by the same means to another's house, unable to find entry into even one house, he took up the ascetic life of a paṇḍaraṅga, wandering for alms, over time becoming old and frail, his body withered by poor food and uncomfortable beds. Returning from his alms round, lying down on a bench, falling asleep, and waking up, sitting and looking at himself, not seeing any refuge in his sons, he thought, "It is said that the ascetic Gotama is without possessions, open-faced, speaks pleasantly, and is skilled in exchanging greetings; it is possible to approach the ascetic Gotama and receive a greeting." Straightening his lower and upper garments, taking his alms bowl, he went to where the Blessed One was.

Dārehisaṃpuccha gharā nikkhāmentīti sabbaṃ mama santakaṃ gahetvā mayhaṃ niddhanabhāvaṃ ñatvā attano bhariyāhi saddhiṃ mantayitvā maṃ gharā nikkaḍḍhāpenti.

Dārehi saṃpuccha gharā nikkhāmentī means having taken all that was mine, knowing my state of being without wealth, after consulting with their wives, they drive me out of the house.

Nandissanti nandijāto tuṭṭho pamudito ahosiṃ.Bhavamicchisanti vuḍḍhiṃ patthayiṃ.Sāva vārenti sūkaranti yathā sunakhā vaggavaggā hutvā bhussantā bhussantā sūkaraṃ vārenti, punappunaṃ mahāravaṃ ravāpenti, evaṃ dārehi saddhiṃ maṃ bahuṃ vatvā viravantaṃ palāpentīti attho.

Nandissa means I was joyful, delighted, and happy. Bhavamicchisa means I desired increase. Sāva vārenti sūkara means just as dogs, forming groups and barking, ward off a pig, repeatedly making a great noise, likewise, speaking much with their wives, shouting, they drove me away, is the meaning.

Asantāti asappurisā.Jammāti lāmakā.Bhāsareti bhāsanti.Puttarūpenāti puttavesena.Vayogatanti tayo vaye gataṃ atikkantaṃ pacchimavaye ṭhitaṃ maṃ.Jahantīti pariccajanti.

Asantā means unrighteous people. Jammā means inferior. Bhāsare means they speak. Puttarūpenā means in the guise of sons. Vayogata means gone to, exceeded three ages, standing in old age. Jahantī means they abandon.

Nibbhogoti nipparibhogo.Khādanā apanīyatīti asso hi yāvadeva taruṇo hoti javasampanno, tāvassa nānārasaṃ khādanaṃ dadanti, jiṇṇaṃ nibbhogaṃ tato apanenti, antimavaye taṃ vattaṃ na labhati, gāvīhi saddhiṃ aṭaviyaṃ sukkhatiṇāni khādanto carati. Yathā so asso, evaṃ jiṇṇakāle viluttasabbadhanattā nibbhogo mādisopi bālakānaṃ pitā thero paragharesu bhikkhati.

Nibbhogo means without possessions. Khādanā apanīyatī means indeed, as long as a horse is young and full of energy, they give it food of various flavors; when it is old and without possessions, they take that away from it; in its final age, it does not receive that allowance; grazing in the forest with cows, it eats dry grass. Just like that horse, similarly, in old age, having lost all wealth, even a father like me, without possessions, begs in the houses of others.

Yañceti nipāto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ye mama puttā anassavā appatissā avasavattino, tehi daṇḍova kira seyyo sundarataroti. Idānissa seyyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃcaṇḍampi goṇantiādi vuttaṃ.

Yañce is a particle. This is what was said - those sons of mine, who are without faith, without reliance, and unruly, a stick is indeed better and more beautiful than them. Now, to show its superiority, caṇḍampi goṇa etc. was said.

Pure hotīti aggato hoti, taṃ purato katvā gantuṃ sukhaṃ hotīti attho.Gādhamedhatīti udakaṃ otaraṇakāle gambhīre udake patiṭṭhaṃ labhati.

Pure hotī means it is in front, it is easy to go having made that the front. Gādhamedhatī means at the time of descending into the water, one gains a footing in deep water.

Pariyāpuṇitvāti uggaṇhitvā vā vācuggatā katvā.Sannisinnesūti tathārūpe brāhmaṇānaṃ samāgamadivase sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitesu puttesu taṃ sabhaṃ ogāhetvā brāhmaṇānaṃ majjhe mahārahe āsane nisinnesu.Abhāsīti ‘ayaṃ me kālo’ti sabhāya majjhe pavisitvā hatthaṃ ukkhipitvā, ‘‘bho ahaṃ tumhākaṃ gāthā bhāsitukāmo, bhāsite suṇissathā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘bhāsa, brāhmaṇa, suṇomā’’ti vutto ṭhitakova abhāsi. ‘‘Tena ca samayena manussānaṃ vattaṃ hoti yo mātāpitūnaṃ santakaṃ khādanto mātāpitaro na poseti, so māretabbo’’ti. Tasmā te brāhmaṇaputtā pitupādesu nipatitvā ‘‘jīvitaṃ no tāta, dehī’’ti yāciṃsu. So pituhadayassa puttānaṃ muduttā ‘‘mā me, bho, bālake vināsayittha, posissanti ma’’nti āha.

Pariyāpuṇitvā means having learned or made it recited. Sannisinnesū means in such a gathering day of brahmins, when the sons, adorned with all ornaments, had entered that assembly and were seated on precious seats in the middle of the brahmins. Abhāsī means, thinking, 'this is my time', entering the middle of the assembly, raising his hand, saying, "sirs, I want to speak a verse to you, will you listen if I speak?" - being told "Speak, brahmin, we will listen," standing right there, he spoke. "And at that time, it was the custom of people that one who eats the property of his parents and does not support his parents should be killed." Therefore, those brahmin sons fell at their father's feet, begging, "Give us life, father." Due to the tenderness of the father's heart towards his sons, he said, "Do not, sirs, destroy my children, they will support me."

atha kho naṃ brāhmaṇamahāsālantiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthanetvāti pīṭhe nisīdāpetvā sayaṃ ukkhipitvā nayiṃsu.Nhāpetvāti sarīraṃ telena abbhañjitvā ubbaṭṭetvā gandhacuṇṇādīhi nhāpesuṃ. Brāhmaṇiyopi pakkosāpetvā, ‘‘ajja paṭṭhāya amhākaṃ pitaraṃ sammā paṭijaggatha. Sace pamādaṃ āpajjissatha, gharato vo nikkaḍḍhissāmā’’ti vatvā, paṇītabhojanaṃ bhojesuṃ.

atha kho naṃ brāhmaṇamahāsāla etc. was said. There, netvā means having made him sit on a bench, they themselves lifted him up and took him. Nhāpetvā means having anointed his body with oil, rubbed it, and bathed him with scented powders etc. The brahmin women also had themselves called, and said, "From today onwards, properly look after our father. If you are negligent, we will throw you out of the house," and fed him excellent food.

atha kho sotiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaetadavocāti dussayugaṃ pādamūle ṭhapetvā etaṃ avoca. Saraṇagamanāvasāne cāpi bhagavantaṃ evamāha – ‘‘bho gotama, mayhaṃ puttehi cattāri dhurabhattāni dinnāni, tato ahaṃ dve tumhākaṃ dammi, dve sayaṃ paribhuñjissāmī’’ti. Kalyāṇaṃ, brāhmaṇa, pāṭiyekkaṃ pana mā niyyādehi, amhākaṃ ruccanaṭṭhānameva gamissāmāti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bho’’ti kho brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ vanditvā gharaṃ gantvā putte āmantesi ‘‘tātā, samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ sahāyo, tassa dve dhurabhattāni dinnāni, tumhe tasmiṃ sampatte mā pamajjathā’’ti. Sādhu, tātāti. Punadivase bhagavā pubbaṇhasamaye pattacīvaraṃ ādāya jeṭṭhaputtassa nivesanadvāraṃ gato. So satthāraṃ disvāva hatthato pattaṃ gahetvā gharaṃ pavesetvā mahārahe pallaṅke nisīdāpetvā paṇītabhojanamadāsi. Satthā punadivase itarassa, punadivase itarassāti paṭipāṭiyā sabbesaṃ gharāni agamāsi. Sabbe tatheva sakkāraṃ akaṃsu.

atha kho so etc. was said. There, etadavocā means having placed the pair of cloths at his feet, he said this. At the end of taking refuge, he also said this to the Blessed One - "Venerable Gotama, my sons have given me four portions of food, out of that, I will give two to you, and enjoy two myself." "Good, brahmin, but do not give separately, we will go to whatever place pleases us." "Yes, venerable sir," then the brahmin, having venerated the Blessed One, went home and addressed his sons, "Dear ones, the ascetic Gotama is my friend, two portions of food have been given to him, do not be negligent when he arrives." "Good, father." The next day, the Blessed One, in the forenoon, taking his robe and bowl, went to the door of the eldest son's house. Seeing the Teacher, he took the bowl from his hand, led him into the house, seated him on a precious couch, and gave him excellent food. The Teacher went to the house of the other on the next day, and to the house of the other on the next day, in due order he went to the houses of all. All performed the same respect.

Athekadivasaṃ jeṭṭhaputtassa ghare maṅgalaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ. So pitaraṃ āha – ‘‘tāta, kassa maṅgalaṃ demā’’ti. Amhe aññaṃ na jānāma? Nanu samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ sahāyoti? Tena hi tumhe pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ svātanāya samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ nimantethāti. Brāhmaṇo tathā akāsi. Bhagavā adhivāsetvā punadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto tassa gehadvāraṃ agamāsi. So haritupalittaṃ sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ gehaṃ satthāraṃ pavesetvā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paññattāsanesu nisīdāpetvā appodakapāyāsañceva khajjakavikatiñca adāsi. Antarabhattasmiṃyeva brāhmaṇassa cattāropi puttā satthu santike nisīditvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bho gotama, mayaṃ amhākaṃ pitaraṃ paṭijaggāma nappamajjāma, passathassa attabhāva’’nti. Satthā ‘‘kalyāṇaṃ vo kataṃ, mātāpituposakaṃ nāma porāṇakapaṇḍitānaṃ āciṇṇamevā’’ti vatvā mahānāgajātakaṃ (jā. 1.11.1 ādayo; cariyā. 2.1 ādayo) nāma kathetvā, cattāri saccāni dīpetvā dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāpariyosāne brāhmaṇo saddhiṃ catūhi puttehi catūhi ca suṇhāhi desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhito. Tato paṭṭhāya satthā na sabbakālaṃ tesaṃ gehaṃ agamāsīti. Catutthaṃ.

Then one day, a festival was being prepared in the house of the eldest son. He said to his father, "Father, to whom shall we give the festival?" "Do we not know anyone else? Isn't the ascetic Gotama my friend?" "Then you should invite the ascetic Gotama with five hundred monks for tomorrow." The brahmin did so. The Blessed One, having accepted, on the next day, surrounded by the community of monks, went to the door of his house. He led the Teacher into the house, which was plastered with green clay and adorned with all ornaments, and seated the community of monks, with the Buddha at their head, on the appointed seats, and gave them rice gruel and various kinds of sweets. While the meal was still in progress, all four sons of the brahmin, sitting near the Teacher, said, "Venerable Gotama, we will look after our father and not be negligent, see his condition." The Teacher, saying, "What you have done is good, supporting parents has indeed been the custom of the ancient wise," narrated the Mahānāga Jātaka (Jā. 1.11.1 ff; Cariyā. 2.1 ff), expounded the four Noble Truths, and taught the Dhamma. At the end of the discourse, the brahmin, along with his four sons and four daughters-in-law, generating knowledge in accordance with the discourse, was established in the fruit of Stream-entry. From then on, the Teacher did not go to their house all the time. The fourth.

5. Mānatthaddhasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Mānatthaddhasutta Commentary

201.Pañcamemānatthaddhoti vātabharitabhastā viya mānena thaddho.Ācariyanti sippuggahaṇakāle ācariyo anabhivādentassa sippaṃ na deti, aññasmiṃ pana kāle taṃ na abhivādeti, atthibhāvampissa na jānāti.Nāyaṃ samaṇoti evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ samaṇo mādise jātisampannabrāhmaṇe sampatte paṭisanthāramattampi na karoti, tasmā na kiñci jānātī’’ti.

201. In the fifth, mānatthaddho means stiff with pride, like a bellows filled with wind. Ācariya means the teacher does not give knowledge of the craft if one does not greet the teacher when taking up the craft, but at other times he does not greet him, and does not even acknowledge his existence. Nāyaṃ samaṇo means thus it occurred to him - "Since this ascetic does not even offer a greeting when I, a brahmin accomplished in birth, arrive, therefore he knows nothing."

Abbhutavittajātāti abhūtapubbāya tuṭṭhiyā samannāgatā.Kesu cassāti kesu bhaveyya.Kyassāti ke assa puggalassa.Apacitā assūti apacitiṃ dassetuṃ yuttā bhaveyyuṃ.Arahanteti imāya gāthāya desanākusalattā attānaṃ antokatvā pūjaneyyaṃ dasseti. Pañcamaṃ.

Abbhutavittajātā means endowed with unprecedented joy. Kesu cassā means in whom could it be. Kyassā means to what person. Apacitā assū means they would be fit to show respect. Arahante in this verse, by including himself due to skill in teaching, he shows himself as worthy of honor. The fifth.

6. Paccanīkasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Paccanīkasutta Commentary

202.Chaṭṭhe ‘‘sabbaṃ seta’’nti vutte ‘‘sabbaṃ kaṇha’’ntiādinā nayena paccanīkaṃ karontassevassa sātaṃ sukhaṃ hotītipaccanīkasāto.Yoca vineyya sārambhanti yo karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ sārambhaṃ vinetvā suṇātīti attho. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

202. In the sixth, paccanīkasāto means he finds satisfaction and happiness in doing the opposite, in the manner of saying "everything is white" when "everything is black" is said. Yo ca vineyya sārambha means he who listens after abandoning sārambha, which is the characteristic of being argumentative. The sixth.

7. Navakammikasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Navakammikasutta Commentary

203.Sattamenavakammikabhāradvājoti so kira araññe rukkhaṃ chindāpetvā tattheva pāsādakūṭāgārādīni yojetvā nagaraṃ āharitvā vikkiṇāti, iti navakammaṃ nissāya jīvatīti navakammiko, gottena bhāradvājotinavakammikabhāradvājo. Disvānassa etadahosīti chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjetvā nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvāna assa etaṃ ahosi.Vanasminti imasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe.Ucchinnamūlaṃ me vananti mayhaṃ kilesavanaṃ ucchinnamūlaṃ.Nibbanathoti nikkilesavano.Eko rameti ekako abhiramāmi.Aratiṃ vippahāyāti pantasenāsanesu ceva bhāvanāya ca ukkaṇṭhitaṃ jahitvā. Sattamaṃ.

203. In the seventh, navakammikabhāradvājo means it seems that he would have trees cut down in the forest, and there he would put together tiered buildings, etc., and bring them to the city and sell them; thus, living based on construction work, he is a construction worker, by the gotta Bharadvaja, hence navakammikabhāradvājo. Disvānassa etadahosī means having seen the Blessed One seated, emitting six-colored rays, this occurred to him. Vanasmi in this forest grove. Ucchinnamūlaṃ me vana my forest of defilements has had its root cut off. Nibbanatho without defilements. Eko rame I delight alone. Aratiṃ vippahāyā having abandoned dissatisfaction with secluded forest dwellings and with meditation. The seventh.

8. Kaṭṭhahārasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Kaṭṭhahārasutta Commentary

204.Aṭṭhameantevāsikāti veyyāvaccaṃ katvā sippuggaṇhanakā dhammantevāsikā.Nisinnanti chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjetvā nisinnaṃ.Gambhīrarūpeti gambhīrasabhāve.

204. In the eighth, antevāsikā means those disciples who perform service and take up a craft, disciples who learn Dhamma. Nisinna seated, emitting six-colored rays. Gambhīrarūpe in a profound state.

Bahubheraveti tatraṭṭhakasaviññāṇakaaviññāṇakabheravehi bahubherave.Vigāhiyāti anupavisitvā.Aniñjamānenātiādīni kāyavisesanāni, evarūpena kāyenāti attho.Sucārurūpaṃ vatāti atisundaraṃ vata jhānaṃ jhāyasīti vadati.

Bahubherave means full of terrors, with terrors of animate and inanimate objects in that place. Vigāhiyā having entered. Aniñjamānenā etc. are descriptions of the body, meaning with such a body. Sucārurūpaṃ vatā indeed very beautiful is the jhāna you are practicing, he says.

Vanavassito munīti vanaṃ avassito buddhamuni.Idanti idaṃ tumhākaṃ evaṃ vane nisinnakāraṇaṃ mayhaṃ accherarūpaṃ paṭibhāti.Pītimanoti tuṭṭhacitto.Vane vaseti vanamhi vasi.

Vanavassito munī the sage dwelling in the forest. Ida this reason for your dwelling in the forest like this appears wondrous to me. Pītimano with a joyful mind. Vane vase dwells in the forest.

Maññāmahanti maññāmi ahaṃ.Lokādhipatisahabyatanti lokādhipatimahābrahmunā sahabhāvaṃ.Ākaṅkhamānoti icchamāno.Tidivaṃ anuttaranti idaṃ brahmalokameva sandhāyāha.Kasmā bhavaṃ vijanamaraññamassitoti ahaṃ tāva brahmalokaṃ ākaṅkhamānoti maññāmi. Yadi evaṃ na hoti, atha me ācikkha, kasmā bhavanti? Pucchati.Brahmapattiyāti seṭṭhapattiyā. Idha idaṃ tapo kasmā karosīti aparenapi ākārena pucchati.

Maññāmaha I think. Lokādhipatisahabyata companionship with the Lord of the World, Mahābrahmā. Ākaṅkhamāno desiring. Tidivaṃ anuttara he said this referring to the Brahma world itself. Kasmā bhavaṃ vijanamaraññamassito I think that you are desiring the Brahma world. If that is not so, then tell me, why are you dwelling in a desolate forest? He asks. Brahmapattiyā for the sake of the highest attainment. Here, he asks in another way, why are you practicing this asceticism?

Kaṅkhāti taṇhā.Abhinandanāti abhinandanavasena taṇhāva vuttā.Anekadhātūsūti anekasabhāvesu ārammaṇesu.Puthūti nānappakārā taṇhā sesakilesā vā.Sadāsitāti niccakālaṃ avassitā.Aññāṇamūlappabhavāti avijjāmūlā hutvā jātā.Pajappitāti taṇhāva ‘‘idampi mayhaṃ, idampi mayha’’nti pajappāpanavasena pajappitā nāmāti vuttā.Sabbā mayā byantikatāti sabbā taṇhā mayā aggamaggena vigatantā nirantā katā.Samūlikāti saddhiṃ aññāṇamūlena.

Kaṅkhā craving. Abhinandanā craving is also stated in the sense of rejoicing. Anekadhātūsū in various states, in objects. Puthū various kinds of craving or other defilements. Sadāsitā always relied upon. Aññāṇamūlappabhavā arisen having ignorance as their root. Pajappitā craving is said to be named pajappitā in the sense of causing proliferation, thinking "this is mine, this is mine." Sabbā mayā byantikatā all craving has been utterly destroyed, ended, terminated, by me with the path of the Noble Ones. Samūlikā with its root of ignorance.

Anūpayoti anupagamano.Sabbesu dhammesu visuddhadassanoti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ dīpeti.Sambodhimanuttaranti arahattaṃ sandhāyāha.Sivanti seṭṭhaṃ.Jhāyāmīti dvīhi jhānehi jhāyāmi.Visāradoti vigatasārajjo. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Anūpayo non-approach. Sabbesu dhammesu visuddhadassano with this he indicates the knowledge of omniscience. Sambodhimanuttara he refers to arahatta. Siva the best. Jhāyāmī I practice jhāna with two jhānas. Visārado without arrogance. The eighth.

9. Mātuposakasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Mātuposakasutta Commentary

205.Navamepeccāti ito paṭigantvā. Navamaṃ.

205. In the ninth, peccā having gone from here. The ninth.

10. Bhikkhakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Bhikkhakasutta Commentary

206.Dasameidhāti imasmiṃ bhikkhubhāve.Vissaṃ dhammanti duggandhaṃ akusaladhammaṃ.Bāhitvāti aggamaggena jahitvā.Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena.Sa ve bhikkhūti vuccatīti so ve bhinnakilesattā bhikkhu nāma vuccati. Dasamaṃ.

206.In the tenth, idhā means in this state of being a bhikkhu. Vissaṃ dhamma means foul, unwholesome states. Bāhitvā means having abandoned by the path of the peak (aggamagga). Saṅkhāyā means with knowledge. Sa ve bhikkhūti vuccati means indeed, he is called a bhikkhu because his defilements are broken. The tenth.

11. Saṅgāravasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Commentary on the Saṅgārava Sutta

207.Ekādasamepaccetīti icchati pattheti.Sādhu, bhanteti āyācamāno āha. Therassa kiresa gihisahāyo, tasmā thero ‘‘ayaṃ varāko maṃ sahāyaṃ labhitvāpi micchādiṭṭhiṃ gahetvā mā apāyapūrako ahosī’’ti āyācati. Apicesa mahāparivāro, tasmiṃ pasanne pañcakulasatāni anuvattissantīti maññamānopi āyācati.Atthavasanti atthānisaṃsaṃ atthakāraṇaṃ.Pāpanti pāṇātipātādiakusalaṃ.Pavāhemīti galappamāṇaṃ udakaṃ otaritvā pavāhemi palāpemi.Dhammoti gāthā vuttatthāva. Ekādasamaṃ.

207.In the eleventh, paccetī means he desires, he longs for. Sādhu, bhante—he said, requesting. It seems this person was a lay friend of the Elder, so the Elder requested, "May this poor fellow, even having found me as a friend, not become one who fills the lower realms by taking up wrong view." Moreover, he had a large following, and thinking that five hundred families would follow if he were pleased, he also requested. Atthavasa means advantage, benefit, a cause of good. Pāpa means unwholesome actions such as killing living beings. Pavāhemī means having entered water up to my neck, I will wash away, I will dispel. Dhammo means the meaning stated in the verse. The eleventh.

12. Khomadussasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Khomadussa Sutta

208.Dvādasamekhomadussaṃ nāmāti khomadussānaṃ ussannattā evaṃladdhanāmaṃ.Sabhāyanti sālāyaṃ.Phusāyatīti phusitāni muñcati vassati. Satthā kira taṃ sabhaṃ upasaṅkamitukāmo – ‘‘mayi evamevaṃ upasaṅkamante aphāsukadhātukaṃ hoti, ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca upasaṅkamissāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhānavasena vuṭṭhiṃ uppādesi.Sabhādhammanti sukhanisinne kira asañcāletvā ekapassena pavisanaṃ tesaṃ sabhādhammo nāma, na mahājanaṃ cāletvā ujukameva pavisanaṃ. Bhagavā ca ujukameva āgacchati, tena te kupitā bhagavantaṃ hīḷentā ‘‘ke ca muṇḍakā samaṇakā, ke ca sabhādhammaṃ jānissantī’’ti āhaṃsu.Santoti paṇḍitā sappurisā.Pahāyāti ete rāgādayo jahitvā rāgādivinayāya dhammaṃ bhaṇanti, tasmā te santo nāmāti. Dvādasamaṃ.

208.In the twelfth, khomadussaṃ nāmā means named so because of the abundance of khomadussa cloth. Sabhāya means in the hall. Phusāyatī means releases showers, rains. It seems the Teacher, wanting to approach that hall, produced rain by means of a resolution, thinking, "As I approach in this way, it becomes uncomfortable for me; I will approach relying on a reason." Sabhādhamma means their custom of the hall was to enter to one side without disturbing those who were comfortably seated, not entering directly disturbing the crowd. But the Blessed One came directly, so they, being angry, reviled the Blessed One, saying, "Who are these shaven ascetics, who would know the custom of the hall?" Santo means wise, good people. Pahāyā means having abandoned these passions, they speak the Dhamma for the sake of the destruction of passions, therefore they are called the peaceful ones. The twelfth.

Upāsakavaggo dutiyo.

The Second Chapter on the Lay Followers.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus ends the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary on the Saṃyutta Nikāya.

8. Vaṅgīsasaṃyuttaṃ

8. Vaṅgīsa Saṃyutta

1. Nikkhantasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Commentary on the Nikkhanta Sutta

209.Vaṅgīsasaṃyuttassa paṭhameaggāḷave cetiyeti āḷaviyaṃ aggacetiye. Anuppanne buddhe aggāḷavagotamakādīni yakkhanāgādīnaṃ bhavanāni, cetiyāni ahesuṃ. Uppanne buddhe tāni apanetvā manussā vihāre kariṃsu. Tesaṃ tāneva nāmāni jātāni.Nigrodhakappenāti nigrodharukkhamūlavāsinā kappattherena.Ohiyyakoti ohīnako.Vihārapāloti so kira tadā avassiko hoti pattacīvaraggahaṇe akovido. Atha naṃ therā bhikkhū – ‘‘āvuso, imāni chattupāhanakattarayaṭṭhiādīni olokento nisīdā’’ti vihārarakkhakaṃ katvā piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vihārapālo’’ti.Samalaṅkaritvāti attano vibhavānurūpena alaṅkārena alaṅkaritvā.Cittaṃ anuddhaṃsetīti kusalacittaṃ viddhaṃseti vināseti.Taṃ kutettha labbhāti etasmiṃ rāge uppanne taṃ kāraṇaṃ kuto labbhā.Yaṃ me paroti yena me kāraṇena añño puggalo vā dhammo vā anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā idāneva abhiratiṃ uppādeyya ācariyupajjhāyāpi maṃ vihāre ohāya gatā.

209.In the first of the Vaṅgīsa Saṃyutta, aggāḷave cetiye means at the Aggāḷava Cetiya in Āḷavī. Before the arising of the Buddhas, there were dwellings and shrines for yakkhas, nāgas, and others, such as Aggāḷava and Gotamaka. When the Buddhas arose, humans removed those and built monasteries. Those same names became attached to them. Nigrodhakappenā means by Kappa Thera, who lived at the foot of a Nigrodha tree. Ohiyyako means left behind. Vihārapālo means he was a novice at that time, unskilled in taking care of robes and bowls. Then the elder bhikkhus, saying to him, "Friend, sit watching over these umbrellas, shoes, knives, staffs, and so on," made him the caretaker of the monastery and went for alms. Therefore, it is said "vihārapālo." Samalaṅkaritvā means having adorned himself with adornments suitable to his wealth. Cittaṃ anuddhaṃsetī means agitates, destroys the wholesome mind. Taṃ kutettha labbhā means where can that cause be found here, when this passion arises? Yaṃ me paro means by which cause another person or Dhamma, having removed my displeasure, might now create pleasure; even my teachers and preceptors have left me in the monastery and gone.

Agārasmāti agārato nikkhantaṃ.Anagāriyanti pabbajjaṃ upagatanti attho.Kaṇhatoti kaṇhapakkhato mārapakkhato ādhāvanti.Uggaputtāti uggatānaṃ puttā mahesakkhā rājaññabhūtā.Daḷhadhamminoti daḷhadhanuno, uttamappamāṇaṃ ācariyadhanuṃ dhārayamānā.Sahassaṃ apalāyinanti ye te samantā sarehi parikireyyuṃ, tesaṃ apalāyīnaṃ saṅkhaṃ dassento ‘‘sahassa’’nti āha.Etatobhiyyoti etasmā sahassā atirekatarā.Neva maṃ byādhayissantīti maṃ cāletuṃ na sakkhissanti.Dhamme samhi patiṭṭhitanti anabhiratiṃ vinodetvā abhiratiṃ uppādanasamatthe sake sāsanadhamme patiṭṭhitaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – issāsasahasse tāva samantā sarehi parikirante sikkhito puriso daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā sabbe sare sarīre apatamāne antarāva paharitvā pādamūle pāteti. Tattha ekopi issāso dve sare ekato na khipati, imā pana itthiyo rūpārammaṇādivasena pañca pañca sare ekato khipanti. Evaṃ khipantiyo etā sacepi atirekasahassā honti, neva maṃ cāletuṃ sakkhissantīti.

Agārasmā means having gone forth from the house. Anagāriya means having gone forth into homelessness, this is the meaning. Kaṇhato means they rush from the dark side, from Māra’s side. Uggaputtā means sons of the eminent, wealthy, royal lineage. Daḷhadhammino means holding firm bows, wielding the excellent standard, the teacher's bow. Sahassaṃ apalāyina means showing the number of those who would not flee even if surrounded by arrows from all sides, he said "thousand." Etato bhiyyo means more than this thousand. Neva maṃ byādhayissantī means they will not be able to shake me. Dhamme samhi patiṭṭhita means established in his own Sāsana-Dhamma, which is capable of removing displeasure and creating pleasure. This is what is said: even if a thousand archers were to surround and shower him with arrows from all sides, a trained man, taking a stick, would strike down all the arrows in between before they fall on his body, causing them to fall at his feet. There, not even one archer shoots two arrows together; but these women, in terms of forms and so on, shoot five arrows together. Even if these who shoot in this way are more than a thousand, they will not be able to shake me.

Sakkhī hi me sutaṃ etanti mayā hi sammukhā etaṃ sutaṃ.Nibbānagamanaṃ magganti vipassanaṃ sandhāyāha. So hi nibbānassa pubbabhāgamaggo, liṅgavipallāsena pana ‘‘magga’’nti āha.Tattha meti tasmiṃ me attano taruṇavipassanāsaṅkhāte nibbānagamanamagge mano nirato.Pāpimāti kilesaṃ ālapati.Maccūtipi tameva ālapati.Na me maggampi dakkhasīti yathā me bhavayoniādīsu gatamaggampi na passasi, tathā karissāmīti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Sakkhī hi me sutaṃ eta means this was heard by me face to face. Nibbānagamanaṃ magga he speaks referring to vipassanā. For that is the preliminary path to Nibbāna, but due to a reversal of gender, he says "magga." Tattha me means my mind is delighted in that path to Nibbāna, which is reckoned as my own youthful vipassanā. Pāpimā he addresses the defilement. Maccū he also addresses the same. Na me maggampi dakkhasī means just as you do not see the path I have gone in the wombs of existence and so on, so I will do. The first.

2. Aratīsuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Arati Sutta

210.Dutiyenikkhamatīti vihārā nikkhamati.Aparajju vā kāleti dutiyadivase vā bhikkhācārakāle. Vihāragaruko kiresa thero.Aratiñca ratiñcāti sāsane aratiṃ kāmaguṇesu ca ratiṃ.Sabbaso gehasitañca vitakkanti pañcakāmaguṇagehanissitaṃ pāpavitakkañca sabbākārena pahāya.Vanathanti kilesamahāvanaṃ.Kuhiñcīti kismiñci ārammaṇe.Nibbanathoti nikkilesavano.Aratoti taṇhāratirahito.

210.In the second, nikkhamatī means he goes out from the monastery. Aparajju vā kāle means on the second day or at the time for alms round. It seems this elder was one who held the monastery in high regard. Aratiñca ratiñcā means displeasure in the Sāsana and pleasure in the objects of sensual desire. Sabbaso gehasitañca vitakka means having abandoned in every way evil thoughts based on the five strands of sense pleasure. Vanatha means the great forest of defilements. Kuhiñcī means in any object. Nibbanatho means free from the forest of defilements. Arato means devoid of craving and pleasure.

Pathaviñca vehāsanti pathaviṭṭhitañca itthipurisavatthālaṅkārādivaṇṇaṃ, vehāsaṭṭhakañca candasūriyobhāsādi.Rūpagatanti rūpameva.Jagatogadhanti jagatiyā ogadhaṃ, antopathaviyaṃ nāgabhavanagatanti attho.Parijīyatīti parijīrati.Sabbamaniccanti sabbaṃ taṃ aniccaṃ. Ayaṃ therassa mahāvipassanāti vadanti.Evaṃ samaccāti evaṃ samāgantvā.Caranti mutattāti viññātattabhāvā viharanti.

Pathaviñca vehāsa means both the colors of women, men, ornaments, and so on, standing on the earth, and the light of the moon, sun, and so on, standing in the sky. Rūpagata means only form. Jagatogadha means immersed in the world, meaning dwelling in the nāga-world inside the earth. Parijīyatī means it wears away. Sabbamanicca means all that is impermanent. They say this is the elder’s great insight. Evaṃ samaccā means having come together in this way. Caranti mutattā means they live having understood their own state.

Upadhīsūti khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāresu.Gadhitāti giddhā.Diṭṭhasuteti cakkhunā diṭṭhe rūpe, sotena sute sadde.Paṭighe ca mute cāti ettha paṭighapadena gandharasā gahitā, mutapadena phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ.Yo ettha na limpatīti yo etesu pañcakāmaguṇesu taṇhādiṭṭhilepehi na limpati.

Upadhīsū means in the aggregates, defilements, and preparations. Gadhitā means attached. Diṭṭhasute means in forms seen with the eye, in sounds heard with the ear. Paṭighe ca mute cā—here, the term paṭigha includes odors and tastes, and the term muta includes tactile objects. Yo ettha na limpatī means he who is not stained in these five strands of sense pleasure by the stains of craving and wrong view.

Atha saṭṭhinissitā savitakkā, puthū janatāya adhammā niviṭṭhāti atha cha ārammaṇanissitā puthū adhammavitakkā janatāya niviṭṭhāti attho.Naca vaggagatassa kuhiñcīti tesaṃ vasena na katthaci kilesavaggagato bhaveyya.No pana duṭṭhullabhāṇīti duṭṭhullavacanabhāṇīpi na siyā.Sa bhikkhūti so evaṃvidho bhikkhu nāma hoti.

Atha saṭṭhinissitā savitakkā, puthū janatāya adhammā niviṭṭhā means then six thoughts, based on objects, diverse, unrighteous, are fixed in people. Na ca vaggagatassa kuhiñcī means he should not anywhere be subject to the group of defilements. No pana duṭṭhullabhāṇī means nor should he be one who speaks rough words. Sa bhikkhū means he, of such kind, is called a bhikkhu.

Dabboti dabbajātiko paṇḍito.Cirarattasamāhitoti dīgharattaṃ samāhitacitto.Nipakoti nepakkena samannāgato pariṇatapañño.Apihālūti nittaṇho.Santaṃ padanti nibbānaṃ.Ajjhagamā munīti adhigato muni.Paṭicca parinibbuto kaṅkhati kālanti nibbānaṃ paṭicca kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto parinibbānakālaṃ āgameti. Dutiyaṃ.

Dabbo means skilled, wise by birth. Cirarattasamāhito means one whose mind is concentrated for a long time. Nipako means endowed with prudence, mature in wisdom. Apihālū means without thirst. Santaṃ pada means Nibbāna. Ajjhagamā munī means the sage has attained. Paṭicca parinibbuto kaṅkhati kāla means having attained Nibbāna, extinguished by the extinction of defilements, he awaits the time for final passing away. The second.

3. Pesalasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Pesala Sutta

211.Tatiyeatimaññatīti ‘‘kiṃ ime mahallakā? Na etesaṃ pāḷi, na aṭṭhakathā, na padabyañjanamadhuratā, amhākaṃ pana pāḷipi aṭṭhakathāpi nayasatena nayasahassena upaṭṭhātī’’ti atikkamitvā maññati.Gotamāti gotamabuddhasāvakattā attānaṃ ālapati.Mānapathanti mānārammaṇañceva mānasahabhuno ca dhamme.Vippaṭisārīhuvāti vippaṭisārī ahuvā, ahosīti attho.Maggajinoti maggena jitakileso.Kittiñca sukhañcāti vaṇṇabhaṇanañca kāyikacetasikasukhañca.Akhilodha padhānavāti akhilo idha padhānavā vīriyasampanno.Visuddhoti visuddho bhaveyya.Asesanti nissesaṃ navavidhaṃ.Vijjāyantakaroti vijjāya kilesānaṃ antakaro.Samitāvīti rāgādīnaṃ samitatāya samitāvī. Tatiyaṃ.

211.In the third, atimaññatī means he thinks disparagingly, "What are these old fellows? They don't have the Pali, or the commentary, or the sweetness of word and syllable. But we have both the Pali and the commentary, supported by hundreds and thousands of methods." Gotamā means he addresses himself as a disciple of Gotama Buddha. Mānapatha means both the object of conceit and the states associated with conceit. Vippaṭisārīhuvā means having regret, that is, having been. Maggajino means one who has conquered defilements by the path. Kittiñca sukhañcā means both praise and bodily and mental happiness. Akhilodha padhānavā means untiring, strenuous, endowed with energy. Visuddho means he should be pure. Asesa means completely, in nine ways. Vijjāyantakaro means one who makes an end to defilements by knowledge. Samitāvī means one who has extinguished passions, being extinguished by the extinguishing of greed and so on. The third.

4. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Ānanda Sutta

212.Catuttherāgoti āyasmā ānando mahāpuñño sambhāvito, taṃ rājarājamahāmattādayo nimantetvā antonivesane nisīdāpenti. Sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitāpi itthiyo theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā tālavaṇṭena bījenti, upanisīditvā pañhaṃ pucchanti dhammaṃ suṇanti. Tattha āyasmato vaṅgīsassa navapabbajitassa ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetuṃ asakkontassa itthirūpārammaṇe rāgo cittaṃ anuddhaṃseti. So saddhāpabbajitattā ujujātiko kulaputto ‘‘ayaṃ me rāgo vaḍḍhitvā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ nāseyyā’’ti cintetvā anantaraṃ nisinnova therassa attānaṃ āvikarontokāmarāgenātiādimāha.

212.In the fourth, rāgo means the venerable Ānanda, of great merit and highly esteemed, was invited by kings, royal ministers, and others, who seated him inside their residences. Women, adorned with all kinds of ornaments, would approach the Elder, pay homage, fan him with palm fronds, sit nearby, ask questions, and listen to the Dhamma. There, for the venerable Vaṅgīsa, newly ordained, unable to restrain his object, passion agitated his mind in the object of female form. He, being a family man of upright character who had gone forth in faith, thinking, "This passion of mine, having grown, might ruin my welfare in this life and in the next," immediately revealing himself to the Elder while still seated, said, beginning with kāmarāgenā.

nibbāpananti rāganibbānakāraṇaṃ.Vipariyesāti vipallāsena.Subhaṃ rāgūpasañhitanti rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ.Parato passāti aniccato passa.Mā ca attatoti attato mā passa.Kāyagatā tyatthūti kāyagatā te atthu.Animittañca bhāvehīti niccādīnaṃ nimittānaṃ ugghāṭitattā vipassanā animittā nāma, taṃ bhāvehīti vadati.Mānābhisamayāti mānassa dassanābhisamayā ceva pahānābhisamayā ca.Upasantoti rāgādisantatāya upasanto. Catutthaṃ.

nibbāpana means the cause of extinguishing passion. Vipariyesā means by perversion. Subhaṃ rāgūpasañhita means a pleasing object, a place for passion, a desirable object. Parato passā means see it as impermanent. Mā ca attato means do not see it as self. Kāyagatā tyatthū means may mindfulness of the body be yours. Animittañca bhāvehī means since the signs of permanence and so on have been removed, vipassanā is called animitta, develop that, he says. Mānābhisamayā means both by the comprehension of seeing and the comprehension of abandoning conceit. Upasanto means calmed by the calming of greed and so on. The fourth.

5. Subhāsitasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Subhāsita Sutta

213.Pañcameaṅgehīti kāraṇehi, avayavehi vā. Musāvādāveramaṇiādīni hi cattāri subhāsitavācāya kāraṇāni, saccavacanādayo cattāro avayavā. Kāraṇatthe ca aṅgasadde ‘‘catūhī’’ti nissakkavacanaṃ hoti, avayavatthe karaṇavacanaṃ.Samannāgatāti samanuāgatā pavattā yuttā ca.Vācāti samullapanavācā, yā ‘‘vācā girā byappatho’’ti (dha. sa. 636) ca, ‘‘nelā kaṇṇasukhā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.9) ca āgatā. ‘‘Yā pana vācāya ce kataṃ kamma’’nti evaṃ viññatti ca ‘‘yā catūhi vacīduccaritehi ārati…pe… ayaṃ vuccati sammāvācā’’ti (vibha. 206) evaṃ virati ca, ‘‘pharusavācā, bhikkhave, āsevitā bhāvitā bahulīkatā nirayasaṃvattanikā hotī’’ti (a. ni. 8.40) evaṃ cetanā ca vācāti āgatā, na sā idha adhippetā. Kasmā? Abhāsitabbato.Subhāsitāti suṭṭhu bhāsitā. Tenassā atthāvahataṃ dīpeti.No dubbhāsitāti na duṭṭhu bhāsitā. Tenassā anatthāvahanapahānataṃ dīpeti.Anavajjāti rāgādivajjarahitā. Imināssā kāraṇasuddhiṃ catudosābhāvañca dīpeti.Ananuvajjāti anuvādavimuttā. Imināssā sabbākārasampattiṃ dīpeti.Viññūnanti paṇḍitānaṃ. Tena nindāpasaṃsāsu bālā appamāṇāti dīpeti.

213.In the fifth, aṅgehī means by causes or by parts. For the four causes of well-spoken speech are abstinence from false speech and so on, and the four parts are truthful speaking and so on. With the term aṅga in the sense of cause, the word "catūhī" is a definitive statement, but in the sense of part, it is an instrumental case. Samannāgatā means accompanied, occurring, connected. Vācā means uttered speech, which is what comes as "speech, utterance, expression" (Dhs. 636), and "smooth, pleasing to the ear" (DN 1.9). But that which is volition, such as "the action done by speech," and both the intimation, such as "that abstaining from the four kinds of verbal misconduct…pe… this is called right speech" (VibhA. 206), and the consciousness, such as "rough speech, bhikkhus, cultivated, developed, frequently practiced, leads to hell" (AN 8.40), which come as speech, that is not intended here. Why? Because it should not be spoken. Subhāsitā means well spoken. By that, it shows that it brings benefit. No dubbhāsitā means not badly spoken. By that, it shows that it avoids bringing harm. Anavajjā means free from the fault of greed and so on. By this, it shows the purity of its cause and the absence of the four faults. Ananuvajjā means free from blame. By this, it shows its perfection in every way. Viññūna means of the wise. By that, it shows that fools are immeasurable in blame and praise.

Subhāsitaṃyevabhāsatīti puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya catūsu vācaṅgesu aññataraniddosavacanametaṃ.No dubbhāsitanti tasseva vācaṅgassa paṭipakkhabhāsananivāraṇaṃ.No dubbhāsitanti iminā micchāvācappahānaṃ dīpeti.Subhāsitanti iminā pahīnamicchāvācena bhāsitabbavacanalakkhaṇaṃ. Aṅgaparidīpanatthaṃ panettha abhāsitabbaṃ pubbe avatvā bhāsitabbamevāha. Esa nayodhammaṃyevātiādīsupi. Ettha ca paṭhamena pisuṇadosarahitaṃ samaggakaraṇaṃ vacanaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyena samphappalāpadosarahitaṃ dhammato anapetaṃ mantāvacanaṃ, itarehi dvīhi pharusālikarahitāni piyasaccavacanāni.Imehi khoti ādinā tāni aṅgāni paccakkhato dassento taṃ vācaṃ nigameti. Yañca aññe paṭiññādīhi avayavehi, nāmādīhi padehi, liṅgavacanavibhattikālakārakasampattīhi ca samannāgataṃ musāvādādivācampi subhāsitanti maññanti, taṃ paṭisedheti. Avayavādisamannāgatāpi hi tathārūpī vācā dubbhāsitāva hoti attano ca paresañca anatthāvahattā. Imehi pana catūhaṅgehi samannāgatā sacepi milakkhubhāsāpariyāpannā ghaṭaceṭikāgītikapariyāpannāpi hoti, tathāpi subhāsitāva lokiyalokuttarahitasukhāvahattā. Tathā hi maggapasse sassaṃ rakkhantiyā sīhaḷaceṭikāya sīhaḷakeneva jātijarāmaraṇayuttaṃ gītikaṃ gāyantiyā saddaṃ sutvā maggaṃ gacchantā saṭṭhimattā vipassakā bhikkhū arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Tathā tisso nāma āraddhavipassako bhikkhu padumasarasamīpena gacchanto padumasare padumāni bhañjitvā –

Subhāsitaṃyeva bhāsatī means that in a teaching directed to individuals, this is faultless speech, one of the four factors of speech. No dubbhāsita means preventing speech that is the opposite of that factor of speech. No dubbhāsita indicates the abandonment of false speech (micchāvācā). Subhāsita indicates the characteristic of speech that should be spoken by one who has abandoned false speech. To explain the factors, it first mentions what should not be spoken and then what should be spoken. The same method applies to "dhammaṃyevātiādi." Here, the first refers to speech that promotes harmony, free from the fault of tale-bearing; the second, reasoned speech that is free from the fault of frivolous talk and not deviating from the Dhamma; the remaining two, kind and truthful speech, free from harshness. "Imehi khoti," etc., shows these factors directly, concluding that speech. It refutes the idea that speech consisting of promises and other components, words with names and other parts, and complete with gender, number, case, and tense is considered well-spoken (subhāsita), even if it involves false speech. Even speech complete with such components is ill-spoken (dubbhāsita) because it brings harm to oneself and others. However, speech complete with these four factors, even if it is expressed in a foreign language or consists of the song of a servant girl grinding grain, is still well-spoken because it brings happiness, both mundane and supramundane. For example, upon hearing the sound of a Sinhala servant girl singing a song in Sinhala about beings subject to aging, decay, and death while guarding a field of rice near the path, about sixty monks practicing insight meditation attained arahantship. Similarly, a monk named Tissa, who had begun practicing insight, while passing near a lotus pond, broke off lotuses from the pond and recited this verse:

‘‘Pātova phullitakokanadaṃ, sūriyālokena bhijjiyate;

"As soon as the red lotus blossoms in the morning,
It is destroyed by the light of the sun;
Likewise, beings who have attained human existence,
Are crushed by the force of old age."

Imaṃ gītikaṃ gāyantiyā ceṭikāya sutvā arahattaṃ patto.

Hearing this verse sung by the servant girl, he attained arahantship.

Buddhantarepi aññataro puriso sattahi puttehi saddhiṃ aṭavito āgamma aññatarāya itthiyā musalena taṇḍule koṭṭentiyā –

In another Buddha era, a man coming from the forest with his seven sons heard a woman grinding rice with a pestle, and recited:

‘‘Jarāya parimadditaṃ etaṃ, milātachavicammanissitaṃ;

"This is worn out by old age,
Leaning on withered skin and hide;
It is broken by death,
Food and flesh for the mortal one.

‘‘Kimīnaṃ ālayaṃ etaṃ, nānākuṇapena pūritaṃ;

"This is a dwelling for worms,
Filled with various corpses;
This is a vessel of impurity,
Like a trunk of a banana tree."

Imaṃ gītikaṃ sutvā paccavekkhanto saha puttehi paccekabodhiṃ patto. Evaṃ imehi catūhi aṅgehi samannāgatā vācā sacepi milakkhubhāsāpariyāpannā ghaṭaceṭikāgītikapariyāpannāpi hoti, tathāpi subhāsitāti veditabbā. Subhāsitattā eva ca anavajjā ca ananuvajjā ca viññūnaṃ atthatthikānaṃ atthapaṭisaraṇānaṃ, no byañjanapaṭisaraṇānanti.

Hearing this verse and reflecting, he and his sons attained Paccekabodhi. Thus, speech complete with these four factors, even if it is expressed in a foreign language or consists of the song of a servant girl grinding grain, should be understood as well-spoken. Because it is well-spoken, it is blameless and not censured by the wise, who are intent on meaning and resort to meaning, not to the letter.

Sāruppāhīti anucchavikāhi.Abhitthavīti pasaṃsi.Na tāpayeti vippaṭisārena na tāpeyya na vibādheyya.Pareti parehi bhindanto nābhibhaveyya na bādheyya. Iti imāya gāthāya apisuṇavācāvasena bhagavantaṃ thometi.Paṭinanditāti piyāyitā.Yaṃ anādāyāti yaṃ vācaṃ bhāsanto paresaṃ pāpāni appiyāni pharusavacanāni anādāya atthabyañjanamadhuraṃ piyameva bhāsati, taṃ vācaṃ bhāseyyāti piyavācāvasena abhitthavi.

Sāruppāhī means with fitting words. Abhitthavī means praised. Na tāpaye means should not torment or trouble with remorse. Pare means should not overcome or oppress, destroying others. Thus, with this verse, he praises the Buddha in terms of speech that is not divisive. Paṭinanditā means delighted. Yaṃ anādāyā means speaking which speech, not taking the displeasing, harsh words of others, but speaks only what is pleasant, sweet in meaning and expression, with that pleasant speech he praised.

Amatāti sādhubhāvena amatasadisā. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ have sādutaraṃ rasāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.246) nibbānāmatapaccayattā vā amatā.Esa dhammo sanantanoti yā ayaṃ saccavācā nāma, esa porāṇo dhammo cariyā paveṇī. Idameva hi porāṇānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ, na te alikaṃ bhāsiṃsu. Tenevāha –sacce atthe ca dhamme ca, āhu santo patiṭṭhitāti.

Amatā means like the deathless (amata) due to its goodness. For it has been said, "Truth, indeed, is sweeter than flavors" (saṃ. ni. 1.246), or because it is a condition for the deathless Nibbāna, it is deathless. Esa dhammo sanantano means that this truthfulness is an ancient Dhamma, a tradition. This, indeed, is what the ancients practiced; they did not speak falsely. Therefore, he said, "sacce atthe ca dhamme ca, āhu santo patiṭṭhitā" – the good are established in truth, meaning, and Dhamma.

Tattha sacce patiṭṭhitattāva attano ca paresañca atthe patiṭṭhitā, atthe patiṭṭhitattā eva dhamme patiṭṭhitā hontīti veditabbā. Saccavisesanameva vā etaṃ. Idaṃ hi vuttaṃ hoti – sacce patiṭṭhitā, kīdise? Atthe ca dhamme ca, yaṃ paresaṃ atthato anapetattā atthaṃ anuparodhakaraṃ, dhammato anapetattā dhammaṃ dhammikameva atthaṃ sādhetīti. Iti imāya gāthāya saccavacanavasena abhitthavi.

There, it should be understood that being established in truth, they are established in their own welfare and the welfare of others; being established in welfare, they are established in the Dhamma. Or, this is merely a specification of truth. For this is what is said: established in truth, of what kind? In welfare and Dhamma, not deviating from the welfare of others, not causing harm to welfare, but achieving that which is in accordance with the Dhamma and righteous. Thus, with this verse, he praised in terms of truthful speech.

Khemanti abhayaṃ nirupaddavaṃ. Kena kāraṇenāti ce.Nibbānapattiyā dukkhassantakiriyāya,yasmā kilesanibbānaṃ pāpeti, vaṭṭadukkhassa ca antakiriyāya saṃvattatīti attho. Atha vā yaṃ buddho nibbānapattiyā dukkhassantakiriyāyāti dvinnaṃ nibbānadhātūnaṃ atthāya khemamaggappakāsanato khemaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati,sā ve vācānamuttamāti sā vācā sabbavācānaṃ seṭṭhāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Iti imāya gāthāya mantāvacanavasena bhagavantaṃ abhitthavanto arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti. Pañcamaṃ.

Khema means safe, without danger. Why? Because it is for Nibbānapattiyā dukkhassantakiriyāya, because it leads to the Nibbana of defilements and contributes to the end of the suffering of the round of rebirths. Alternatively, because the Buddha speaks safe speech for the sake of attaining Nibbāna and ending suffering, by revealing the safe path for the sake of the two Nibbāna elements, "sā ve vācānamuttamāti" that speech is the best of all speech, is how the meaning here should be understood. Thus, with this verse, praising the Buddha in terms of reasoned speech, he concluded the teaching with the pinnacle of arahantship. Fifth.

6. Sāriputtasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Sāriputtasutta Commentary

214.Chaṭṭheporiyāti akkharādiparipuṇṇāya.Vissaṭṭhāyāti avibaddhāya apalibuddhāya. Dhammasenāpatissa hi kathentassa pittādīnaṃ vasena apalibuddhavacanaṃ hoti, ayadaṇḍena pahatakaṃsatālato saddo viya niccharati.Anelagalāyāti anelāya agalāya niddosāya ceva akkhalitapadabyañjanāya ca. Therassa hi kathayato padaṃ vā byañjanaṃ vā na parihāyati.Atthassa viññāpaniyāti atthassa viññāpanasamatthāya.Bhikkhunanti bhikkhūnaṃ.

214. In the sixth, poriyā means with complete diction, perfect in letters, etc. Vissaṭṭhāyā means unconstrained, not bound, for the Dhammasenāpati, when speaking, his words were unbound in terms of case endings, etc., like the sound emanating from a bronze bowl struck with an iron rod. Anelagalāyā means without impediment, flawless, and with faultless words and phrases. For the Elder, when speaking, neither word nor phrase is deficient. Atthassa viññāpaniyā means capable of making the meaning known. Bhikkhunanti means to the monks.

Saṃkhittenapīti ‘‘cattārimāni, āvuso, ariyasaccāni. Katamāni cattāri? Dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ…pe… imāni kho, āvuso, cattāri ariyasaccāni, tasmātiha, āvuso, idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti yogo karaṇīyo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1096-1098) evaṃ saṃkhittenapi deseti.Vitthārenapīti ‘‘katamaṃ, āvuso, dukkhaṃ ariyasacca’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 3.373) nayena tāneva vibhajanto vitthārenapi bhāsati. Khandhādidesanāsupi eseva nayo.Sāḷikāyiva nigghosoti yathā madhuraṃ ambapakkaṃ sāyitvā pakkhehi vātaṃ datvā madhurassaraṃ nicchārentiyā sāḷikasakuṇiyā nigghoso, evaṃ therassa dhammaṃ kathentassa madhuro nigghoso hoti.Paṭibhānaṃ udīrayīti samuddato ūmiyo viya anantaṃ paṭibhānaṃ uṭṭhahati.Odhentīti odahanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Saṃkhittenapī means even in brief, he teaches, saying, "These, friends, are the four Noble Truths. Which four? The Noble Truth of suffering… Therefore, friends, effort should be made to understand this Noble Truth of suffering" (saṃ. ni. 5.1096-1098). Vitthārenapī means even in detail, explaining those same truths by way of "What, friends, is the Noble Truth of suffering?" (ma. ni. 3.373). The same method applies to teachings on the aggregates, etc. Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso means just as the sound of a Sāḷikā bird, having tasted a sweet, ripe mango and flapping its wings, emits a sweet sound, so too is the sweet sound of the Elder when speaking the Dhamma. Paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī means endless eloquence arises, like waves rising from the ocean. Odhentī means they apply. Sixth.

7. Pavāraṇāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Pavāraṇāsutta Commentary

215.Sattametadahūti tasmiṃ ahu, tasmiṃ divaseti attho. Upavasanti etthātiuposatho. Upavasantīti ca sīlena vā anasanena vā upetā hutvā vasantīti attho. So panesa uposathadivaso aṭṭhamīcātuddasīpannarasībhedena tividho, tasmā sesadvayanivāraṇatthaṃpannarasetivuttaṃ.Pavāraṇāyāti vassaṃ-vuṭṭha-pavāraṇāya. Visuddhipavāraṇātipi etissāva nāmaṃ.Nisinno hotīti sāyanhasamaye sampattaparisāya kālayuttaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā udakakoṭṭhake gattāni parisiñcitvā nivatthanivāsano ekaṃsaṃ sugatamahācīvaraṃ katvā majjhimatthambhaṃ nissāya paññatte varabuddhāsane puratthimadisāya uṭṭhahato candamaṇḍalassa siriṃ siriyā abhibhavamāno nisinno hoti.Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yato yato anuviloketi, tato tato tuṇhībhūtameva. Tattha hi ekabhikkhussāpi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā natthi, sabbe niravā santena iriyāpathena nisīdiṃsu.Anuviloketvāti dissamānapañcapasādehi nettehi anuviloketvā.Handāti vossaggatthe nipāto.Na ca me kiñci garahathāti etthana ca kiñcīti pucchanatthe na-kāro. Kiṃ me kiñci garahatha? Yadi garahatha, vadatha, icchāpemi vo vattunti attho.Kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vāti iminā kāyavacīdvārāneva pavāreti, na manodvāraṃ. Kasmā? Apākaṭattā. Kāyavacīdvāresu hi doso pākaṭo hoti, na manodvāre. ‘‘Ekamañce sayatopi hi kiṃ cintesī’’ti? Pucchitvā cittācāraṃ jānāti. Iti manodvāraṃ apākaṭattā na pavāreti, no aparisuddhattā. Bodhisattabhūtassāpi hi tassa bhūridattachaddantasaṅkhapāladhammapālādikāle manodvāraṃ parisuddhaṃ, idānettha vattabbameva natthi.

215. In the seventh, tadahūti means it was then, meaning on that day. Uposatho means where one observes. It means that they dwell, endowed with virtue or fasting. That Uposatha day is of three kinds, differing as the eighth, fourteenth, or fifteenth lunar day, therefore, to exclude the other two, pannarasetivuttaṃ, it is said as fifteenth. Pavāraṇāyāti means at the Pavāraṇā concluding the rains-residence. Visuddhipavāraṇā is also a name for this. Nisinno hotīti means, in the evening, having taught the Dhamma appropriate to the occasion to the assembled gathering, having bathed their limbs in the water pavilion, wearing their under and outer robes, making the great robe of the Sugata one-shouldered, leaning on the middle pillar, he sits on the excellent Buddha-seat prepared, surpassing the glory of the rising moon in the eastern direction with his own glory. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti means wherever he looks, they are silent. There, not even a single monk has restlessness of hand or foot; all sit silently with peaceful deportment. Anuviloketvāti means having looked around with eyes that perceive the five visible objects. Handāti is a particle used in the sense of relinquishing. Na ca me kiñci garahathāti in this, na ca kiñcīti, the na-particle is in the sense of a question. Do you criticize anything of me? If you criticize, speak; I give you leave to speak, is the meaning. Kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vāti with this, he makes Pavāraṇā only through the doors of body and speech, not through the door of mind. Why? Because it is not manifest. For faults are manifest in the doors of body and speech, not in the door of mind. "Even lying on the same bed, what was he thinking?" Having asked, he knows the conduct of the mind. Thus, he does not make Pavāraṇā through the door of mind because it is not manifest, not because it is impure. For even in the times of Bodhisattas like Bhūridatta, Chaddanta, Saṅkhapāla, and Dhammapāla, the door of mind was pure; there is no need to mention it now.

Etadavocāti dhammasenāpatiṭṭhāne ṭhitattā bhikkhusaṅghassa bhāraṃ vahanto etaṃ avoca.Na kho mayaṃ, bhanteti, bhante, mayaṃ bhagavato na kiñci garahāma.Kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vāti idaṃ catunnaṃ arakkhiyataṃ sandhāya thero āha. Bhagavato hi cattāri arakkhiyāni. Yathāha –

Etadavocāti means bearing the burden of the Sangha, standing in the place of Dhammasenāpati, he said this. Na kho mayaṃ, bhanteti means, Bhante, we do not criticize anything of the Blessed One. Kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vāti the Elder said this referring to the four things that are guarded. For the Blessed One has four guarded things. As he said –

‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa arakkhiyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Parisuddhakāyasamācāro, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya ‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhavacīsamācāro, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa vacīduccaritaṃ, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, ‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhamanosamācāro, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa manoduccaritaṃ, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya, ‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’ti. Parisuddhājīvo, bhikkhave, tathāgato, natthi tathāgatassa micchāājīvo, yaṃ tathāgato rakkheyya ‘‘mā me idaṃ paro aññāsī’’ti (a. ni. 7.58).

"These four things, monks, are guarded in the Tathāgata. Which four? The Tathāgata, monks, is of purified bodily conduct; there is no bodily misconduct in the Tathāgata that the Tathāgata should guard, thinking, 'Lest another know this of me.' The Tathāgata, monks, is of purified verbal conduct; there is no verbal misconduct in the Tathāgata that the Tathāgata should guard, thinking, 'Lest another know this of me.' The Tathāgata, monks, is of purified mental conduct; there is no mental misconduct in the Tathāgata that the Tathāgata should guard, thinking, 'Lest another know this of me.' The Tathāgata, monks, is of purified livelihood; there is no wrong livelihood in the Tathāgata that the Tathāgata should guard, thinking, 'Lest another know this of me'" (a. ni. 7.58).

bhagavā hi, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthaanuppannassāti kassapasammāsambuddhato paṭṭhāya aññena samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā anuppāditapubbassa.Asañjātassāti idaṃ anuppannavevacanameva.Anakkhātassāti aññena adesitassa.Pacchā samannāgatāti paṭhamagatassa bhagavato pacchā samanuāgatā. Iti thero yasmā sabbepi bhagavato sīlādayo guṇā arahattamaggameva nissāya āgatā, tasmā arahattamaggameva nissāya guṇaṃ kathesi. Tena sabbaguṇā kathitāva honti.Ahañca kho, bhanteti idaṃ thero sadevake loke aggapuggalassa attano ceva saṅghassa ca kāyikavācasikaṃ pavārento āha.

bhagavā hi, bhantetiādi he said. There, anuppannassāti means that which has never been produced by another ascetic or brahmin, starting from Kassapa Sammāsambuddha. Asañjātassāti this is another word for "unproduced". Anakkhātassāti means not declared by another. Pacchā samannāgatāti means coming after the Blessed One, who came first. Thus, the Elder, since all the Blessed One’s virtues, such as morality, come relying on the path of arahantship, therefore, he spoke of the virtues relying on the path of arahantship. Therefore, all virtues are spoken of. Ahañca kho, bhanteti the Elder said this, making Pavāraṇā of himself and the Sangha in terms of body and speech to the chief person in the world with its devas.

Pitarāpavattitanti cakkavattimhi kālaṅkate vā pabbajite vā sattāhaccayena cakkaṃ antaradhāyati, tato dasavidhaṃ dvādasavidhaṃ cakkavattivattaṃ pūretvā nisinnassa puttassa aññaṃ pātubhavati, taṃ so pavatteti. Ratanamayattā pana sadisaṭṭhena tadeva vattaṃ katvā ‘‘pitarā pavattita’’nti vuttaṃ. Yasmā vā so ‘‘appossukko tvaṃ, deva, hohi, ahamanusāsissāmī’’ti āha, tasmā pitarā pavattitaṃ āṇācakkaṃ anuppavatteti nāma.Sammadeva anuppavattesīti sammā nayena hetunā kāraṇeneva anuppavattesi. Bhagavā hi catusaccadhammaṃ katheti, thero tameva anukatheti, tasmā evamāha.Ubhatobhāgavimuttāti dvīhi bhāgehi vimuttā, arūpāvacarasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato vimuttā, aggamaggena nāmakāyatoti.Paññāvimuttāti paññāya vimuttā tevijjādibhāvaṃ appattā khīṇāsavā.

Pitarā pavattitanti means when a wheel-turning monarch dies or goes forth, the wheel disappears after seven days; then, another appears to his son, who is seated, having fulfilled the ten or twelve duties of a wheel-turning monarch. However, because it is made of jewels, similarly, having made that same duty, it is said "pitarā pavattitanti." Or, because he said, "Be without anxiety, O King; I will instruct," therefore, he does not set rolling the wheel of command set rolling by his father. Sammadeva anuppavattesīti means he caused to roll on in a correct way, with reason and cause. For the Blessed One speaks of the four Noble Truths; the Elder repeats the same, therefore, he says this. Ubhatobhāgavimuttāti means liberated from two parts: liberated from the form body by the attainment of the formless attainments, and from the name body by the supreme path. Paññāvimuttāti means liberated by wisdom, a Khīṇāsava who has not attained the state of being a three-knowledge being, etc.

Visuddhiyāti visuddhatthāya.Saṃyojanabandhanacchidāti saṃyojanasaṅkhāte ceva bandhanasaṅkhāte ca kilese chinditvā ṭhitā.Vijitasaṅgāmanti vijitarāgadosamohasaṅgāmaṃ, mārabalassa vijitattāpi vijitasaṅgāmaṃ.Satthavāhanti aṭṭhaṅgikamaggarathe āropetvā veneyyasatthaṃ vāheti saṃsārakantāraṃ uttāretīti bhagavā satthavāho, taṃ satthavāhaṃ.Palāpoti antotuccho dussīlo.Ādiccabandhunanti ādiccabandhuṃ satthāraṃ dasabalaṃ vandāmīti vadati. Sattamaṃ.

Visuddhiyāti for the sake of purification. Saṃyojanabandhanacchidāti means having cut off the fetters and bonds consisting of defilements. Vijitasaṅgāmanti means having conquered the war of greed, hatred, and delusion; also, having conquered the power of Māra, he is a conqueror of battles. Satthavāhanti means the Blessed One is a caravan leader, conveying the caravan of those to be tamed, having loaded them onto the chariot of the eightfold path, delivering them across the wilderness of Saṃsāra. Palāpoti means one who is inwardly hollow and immoral. Ādiccabandhunanti means I salute the kinsman of the sun, the teacher, the one with ten powers. Seventh.

8. Parosahassasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Parosahassasutta Commentary

216.Aṭṭhameparosahassanti atirekasahassaṃ.Akutobhayanti nibbāne kutoci bhayaṃ natthi, nibbānappattassa vā kutoci bhayaṃ natthīti nibbānaṃ akutobhayaṃ nāma.Isīnaṃ isisattamoti vipassito paṭṭhāya isīnaṃ sattamako isi.

216. In the eighth, parosahassanti means exceeding a thousand. Akutobhayanti in Nibbāna there is no fear from anywhere, or there is no fear from anywhere for one who has attained Nibbāna; therefore, Nibbāna is called Akutobhaya. Isīnaṃ isisattamoti means the seventh Ṛṣi from Vipassī onward.

Kiṃ nu te vaṅgīsāti idaṃ bhagavā atthuppattivasena āha. Saṅghamajjhe kira kathā udapādi ‘‘vaṅgīsatthero vissaṭṭhavatto, neva uddese, na paripucchāya, na yonisomanasikāre kammaṃ karoti, gāthā bandhanto cuṇṇiyapadāni karonto vicaratī’’ti. Atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū vaṅgīsassa paṭibhānasampattiṃ na jānanti, cintetvā cintetvā vadatīti maññanti, paṭibhānasampattimassa jānāpessāmī’’ti cintetvā,‘‘kiṃ nu te vaṅgīsā’’tiādimāha.

Kiṃ nu te vaṅgīsāti the Blessed One spoke this based on the arising of the matter. It is said that a discussion arose in the Sangha: "The Elder Vaṅgīsa is one whose words flow freely; he does not work at the recital, nor at questioning, nor at proper attention; he wanders about composing verses and making cuṇṇiyapadas (commentarial verses)." Then the Blessed One thought: "These monks do not know Vaṅgīsa's accomplishment in eloquence; they think he speaks after thinking and thinking. I will make known his accomplishment in eloquence," thinking thus, "kiṃ nu te vaṅgīsā"tiādi, he said, etc.

Ummaggapathanti anekāni kilesummujjanasatāni, vaṭṭapathattā pana pathanti vuttaṃ.Pabhijja khilānīti rāgakhilādīni pañca bhinditvā carasi.Taṃ passathāti taṃ evaṃ abhibhuyya bhinditvā carantaṃ buddhaṃ passatha.Bandhapamuñcakaranti bandhanamocanakaraṃ.Asitanti anissitaṃ.Bhāgaso pavibhajanti satipaṭṭhānādikoṭṭhāsavasena dhammaṃ vibhajantaṃ. Pavibhajjāti vā pāṭho, aṅgapaccaṅgakoṭṭhāsavasena vibhajitvā vibhajitvā passathāti attho.

Ummaggapathanti: "Ummaggapatha" means hundreds of immersions in defilements; however, because it is a circular path, it is called a "path". Pabhijja khilānīti: "Having broken the stakes" means having broken the five stakes beginning with the stake of lust, you wander. Taṃ passathāti: "See him" means see that Buddha who, having overcome and broken [the stakes], wanders. Bandhapamuñcakaranti: "Bandhapamuñcakara" means the maker of releasing from bonds. Asitanti: "Asita" means unattached. Bhāgaso pavibhajanti: "Distributes in parts" means distributing the Dhamma according to the divisions beginning with the satipaṭṭhānas. Alternatively, "pavibhajjā" is the reading, meaning having divided it according to the divisions of limbs and parts, see it again and again.

Oghassāti caturoghassa.Anekavihitanti satipaṭṭhānādivasena anekavidhaṃ.Tasmiṃ ca amate akkhāteti tasmiṃ tena akkhāte amate.Dhammaddasāti dhammassa passitāro.Ṭhitā asaṃhīrāti asaṃhāriyā hutvā patiṭṭhitā.

Oghassāti: "Of the flood" means of the four floods. Anekavihitanti: "Of various kinds" means of various kinds according to the satipaṭṭhānas and so on. Tasmiṃ ca amate akkhāteti: "And in that deathless declared" means in that deathless declared by him. Dhammaddasāti: "Dhammaddasa" means seers of the Dhamma. Ṭhitā asaṃhīrāti: "Standing unshakeable" means having become unshakeable, they are established.

Ativijjhāti ativijjhitvā.Sabbaṭṭhitīnanti sabbesaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānānaṃ viññāṇaṭṭhitīnaṃ vā.Atikkamamaddasāti atikkamabhūtaṃ nibbānamaddasa.Agganti uttamadhammaṃ. Aggeti vā pāṭho, paṭhamataranti attho.Dasaddhānanti pañcannaṃ, aggadhammaṃ pañcavaggiyānaṃ, agge vā pañcavaggiyānaṃ dhammaṃ desesīti attho.Tasmāti yasmā esa dhammo sudesitoti jānantena ca pamādo na kātabbo, tasmā.Anusikkheti tisso sikkhā sikkheyya. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Ativijjhāti: "Having pierced beyond". Sabbaṭṭhitīnanti: "Of all standpoints" means of all standpoints of views or of standpoints of consciousness. Atikkamamaddasāti: "Atikkamamaddasa" means he saw Nibbāna, which is the transcendence. Agganti: "Agga" means the supreme Dhamma. Alternatively, "agge" is the reading, meaning the foremost. Dasaddhānanti: "For the ten" means for the five, [he taught] the supreme Dhamma to the group of five, or he taught the Dhamma to the foremost group of five. Tasmāti: "Therefore" means since this Dhamma is well-taught and one should not be negligent knowing this, therefore. Anusikkheti: "Should train accordingly" means one should train in the three trainings. The eighth.

9. Koṇḍaññasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Koṇḍañña Sutta Commentary

217.Navameaññāsikoṇḍaññoti paṭhamaṃ dhammassa aññātattā evaṃ gahitanāmo thero.Sucirassevāti kīvacirassa? Dvādasannaṃ saṃvaccharānaṃ. Ettakaṃ kālaṃ kattha vihāsīti. Chaddantabhavane mandākinipokkharaṇiyā tīre paccekabuddhānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne. Kasmā? Vihāragarutāya. So hi paññavā mahāsāvako. Yatheva bhagavato, evamassa dasasahassacakkavāḷe devamanussānaṃ abbhantare guṇā patthaṭāva. Devamanussā tathāgatassa santikaṃ gantvā gandhamālādīhi pūjaṃ katvā ‘‘aggadhammaṃ paṭividdhasāvako’’ti anantaraṃ theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā pūjenti. Santikaṃ āgatānañca nāma tathārūpā dhammakathā vā paṭisanthāro vā kātabbo hoti. Thero ca vihāragaruko, tenassa so papañco viya upaṭṭhāti. Iti vihāragarutāya tattha gantvā vihāsi.

217. In the ninth [sutta], Aññāsikoṇḍaññoti: "Aññāsikoṇḍañño" is the name taken by the Elder because he first understood the Dhamma. Sucirassevāti: "After a long time"; how long? Twelve years. Where did he live for such a long time? In Chaddantabhavana, on the bank of the Mandākini pond, in the dwelling place of the Paccekabuddhas. Why? Out of respect for solitude. For he was a wise, great disciple. Just as of the Blessed One, so too his virtues were spread among the gods and humans in the ten thousand world-systems. Gods and humans, after going to the presence of the Tathāgata and making offerings with incense and garlands, after "the disciple who has realized the supreme Dhamma," would approach the Elder and make offerings. And for those who came into his presence, a Dhamma talk or conversation of a similar nature had to be done. And the Elder was respectful of solitude, so that appeared to him as an impediment. Thus, out of respect for solitude, he went and lived there.

Aparampi kāraṇaṃ – bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ tāva sabbasāvakā vassaggena gacchanti. Dhammadesanākāle pana majjhaṭṭhāne alaṅkatabuddhāsanamhi satthari nisinne dakkhiṇahatthapasse dhammasenāpati, vāmahatthapasse mahāmoggallānatthero nisīdati, tesaṃ piṭṭhibhāge aññāsikoṇḍaññattherassa āsanaṃ paññāpenti. Sesā bhikkhū taṃ parivāretvā nisīdanti. Dve aggasāvakā aggadhammapaṭividdhattā ca mahallakattā ca there sagāravā theraṃ mahābrahmaṃ viya aggikkhandhaṃ viya āsīvisaṃ viya ca maññamānā dhurāsane nisīdantā ottappanti harāyanti. Thero cintesi – ‘‘imehi dhurāsanatthāya kappasatasahassādhikaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūritā, te idāni dhurāsane nisīdantā mama ottappanti harāyanti, phāsuvihāraṃ nesaṃ karissāmī’’ti. So patirūpe kāle tathāgataṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, bhante, janapade vasitu’’nti āha, satthā anujāni.

Another reason: At the time of the alms round, all the disciples would go in groups of their own. But at the time of the Dhamma talk, when the Teacher was seated in the middle on an adorned Buddha seat, the Dhammasenāpati [Sāriputta] would sit on his right-hand side, and the Elder Mahāmoggallāna on his left-hand side, and behind them, a seat would be arranged for the Elder Aññāsikoṇḍañña. The remaining monks would sit surrounding him. The two chief disciples, out of respect for the Elder because of his realization of the supreme Dhamma and because of his seniority, would sit on the designated seat, feeling apprehensive and ashamed, as if [he were] Mahābrahmā, a mass of fire, or a poisonous snake. The Elder thought, "These [disciples] have fulfilled the perfections for more than a hundred thousand aeons to be in the seat of honor, and now, sitting in the seat of honor, they feel apprehensive and ashamed of me; I will make it easy for them." So, at an appropriate time, he approached the Tathāgata and said, "I wish, Bhante, to dwell in the countryside," and the Teacher permitted it.

Thero senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya chaddantabhavane mandākinitīraṃ gato. Pubbe paccekabuddhānaṃ pāricariyāya kataparicayā aṭṭhasahassā hatthināgā theraṃ disvāva ‘‘amhākaṃ puññakkhettaṃ āgata’’nti nakhehi caṅkamanaṃ nittiṇaṃ katvā āvaraṇasākhā haritvā therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ paṭijaggitvā vattaṃ katvā sabbe sannipatitvā mantayiṃsu – ‘‘sace hi mayaṃ ‘ayaṃ therassa kattabbaṃ karissati, ayaṃ karissatī’ti paṭipajjissāma, thero bahuñātikagāmaṃ gato viya yathādhoteneva pattena gamissati, vārena naṃ paṭijaggissāma, ekassa pana vāre patte sesehipi nappamajjitabba’’nti vāraṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Vārikanāgo pātova therassa mukhodakañca dantakaṭṭhañca ṭhapeti, vattaṃ karoti.

The Elder, putting away his lodging, taking his bowl and robe, went to the bank of the Mandākini in Chaddantabhavana. Eight thousand elephant kings, having previously become familiar with him from ministering to the Paccekabuddhas, seeing the Elder, [thought], "Our field of merit has arrived," and, smoothing the walking path with their tusks, clearing away the obstructing branches, preparing a dwelling place for the Elder, performing their duties, all gathered together and conferred, "If we were to proceed [thinking], 'This one will do what the Elder needs to do, that one will do it,' the Elder will go away like someone who has gone to a village with many relatives with his bowl as clean as when he arrived; we will minister to him in turn, but when one is on duty, the others should not be negligent." They established a rotation. The elephant on duty would provide the Elder with face-washing water and a toothpick early in the morning and perform his duties.

Mandākinipokkharaṇīnāma cesā paṇṇāsayojanā hoti. Tassā pañcavīsatiyojanamatte ṭhāne sevālo vā paṇakaṃ vā natthi, phalikavaṇṇaṃ udakameva hoti. Tato paraṃ pana kaṭippamāṇe udake aḍḍhayojanavitthataṃ sesapadumavanaṃ paṇṇāsayojanaṃ saraṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ tāva mahantameva rattapadumavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattakumudavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ setakumudavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ nīluppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattuppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sugandharattasālivanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ eḷālukalābukumbhaṇḍādīni madhurarasāni valliphalāni, tadanantaraṃ aḍḍhayojanavitthārameva ucchuvanaṃ, tattha pūgarukkhakkhandhappamāṇā ucchū, tadanantaraṃ kadalivanaṃ, yato duve pakkāni khādantā kilamanti, tadanantaraṃ cāṭippamāṇaphalaṃ panasavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ jambuvanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ ambavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ kapitthavananti. Saṅkhepato tasmiṃ dahe khāditabbayuttakaṃ phalaṃ nāma natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Kusumānaṃ pupphanasamaye vāto reṇuvaṭṭiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā paduminipattesu ṭhapeti, tattha udakaphusitāni patanti. Tato ādiccapākena paccitvā pakkapayoghanikā viya tiṭṭhati, etaṃ pokkharamadhu nāma, taṃ therassa āharitvā denti. Muḷālaṃ naṅgalasīsamattaṃ hoti, tampi āharitvā denti. Bhisaṃ mahābheripokkharappamāṇaṃ hoti, tassa ekasmiṃ pabbe pādaghaṭakappamāṇaṃ khīraṃ hoti, taṃ āharitvā denti. Pokkharaṭṭhīni madhusakkharāya yojetvā denti. Ucchuṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhe ṭhapetvā pādena akkamanti. Tato raso paggharitvā soṇḍiāvāṭe pūretvā, ādiccapākena paccitvā khīrapāsāṇapiṇḍo viya tiṭṭhati, taṃ āharitvā denti. Panasakadaliambapakkādīsu kathāva natthi.

And that Mandākinipokkharaṇī is fifty leagues in extent. In a place about twenty-five leagues [across] it, there is no algae or scum; the water is crystal clear. Beyond that, in water up to the waist, there is a forest of blue lotuses half a league wide, encircling the entire fifty-league lake. Immediately after that is a very large forest of red lotuses, then a forest of red water lilies, then a forest of white water lilies, then a forest of blue lotuses, then a forest of red lotuses, then a fragrant forest of red Sāli rice, then various creepers and fruits with sweet tastes, such as elālu, gourd, and pumpkin, then a sugar cane forest half a league wide, where the sugar canes are the size of the trunks of areca nut trees, then a banana forest, from which they tire of eating two ripe [bananas] each, then a jackfruit forest with fruits the size of basins, then a rose-apple forest, then a mango forest, then a wood-apple forest. In short, it should not be said that there is no suitable fruit to eat in that lake. At the time of flowering, the wind raises a cloud of pollen and places it on the leaves of the lotuses, and drops of water fall there. Then, ripened by the heat of the sun, it remains like processed gruel, this is called lotus honey, and they bring it to the Elder. The lotus stalk is the size of a ploughshare, and they also bring that. The lotus root is the size of a large drum, and in one segment of it, there is milk the size of a foot-washing bowl, and they bring that. They mix the lotus seeds with honey and sugar and give [it to him]. They place the sugarcane on a stone slab and crush it with their feet. Then the juice flows out and fills a trough-like depression, and ripened by the heat of the sun, it remains like a lump of solidified milk, and they bring that. There is no need to mention ripe jackfruit, bananas, and mangoes.

Kelāsapabbate nāgadatto nāma devaputto vasati. Thero kālena kālaṃ tassa vimānadvāraṃ gacchati. So navasappipokkharamadhucuṇṇayuttassa nirudakapāyāsassa pattaṃ pūretvā deti. So kira kassapabuddhakāle vīsativassasahassāni sugandhasappinā khīrasalākaṃ adāsi. Tenassetaṃ bhojanaṃ uppajjati. Evaṃ thero dvādasa vassāni vasitvā attano āyusaṅkhāraṃ olokento parikkhīṇabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘kattha parinibbāyissāmī’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘hatthināgehi maṃ dvādasa vassāni upaṭṭhahantehi dukkaraṃ kataṃ, satthāraṃ anujānāpetvā etesaṃyeva santike parinibbāyissāmī’’ti ākāsena bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sucirasseva yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī’’ti.

On Mount Kelāsa dwells a deva-son named Nāgadatta. From time to time, the Elder would go to the door of his celestial mansion. He would fill a bowl with a porridge mixed with fresh ghee, lotus honey, and flour, without water. It is said that in the time of Kassapa Buddha, he gave a milk ladle with fragrant ghee for twenty thousand years. That is why this food arises for him. Thus, having lived for twelve years, the Elder, looking at the remaining span of his life, knowing it to be depleted, [thought], "Where shall I attain Parinibbāna?" He thought, "The elephant kings have done a difficult thing by attending to me for twelve years; having obtained permission from the Teacher, I will attain Parinibbāna in their presence." He went by air to the presence of the Blessed One. Therefore, it was said, "After a long time, he approached the Blessed One."

Nāmañcāti kasmā nāmaṃ sāveti? Therañhi keci sañjānanti, keci na sañjānanti. Tattha thero cintesi – ‘‘ye maṃ ajānantā ‘ko esa paṇḍarasīso obhaggo gopānasivaṅko mahallako satthārā saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karotī’ti cittaṃ padūsessanti, te apāyapūrakā bhavissanti. Ye pana maṃ jānantā – ‘dasasahassacakkavāḷe satthā viya paññāto pākaṭo mahāsāvako’ti cittaṃ pasādessanti, te saggūpagā bhavissantī’’ti, sattānaṃ apāyamaggaṃ pidahitvā saggamaggaṃ vivaranto nāmaṃ sāveti.

Nāmañcāti: "And his name"—why does he announce his name? For some know the Elder, and some do not know him. There, the Elder thought, "Those who do not know me and think, 'Who is this old, shaven-headed, stooped, hunchbacked old man who is conversing with the Teacher?' will corrupt their minds, they will fill up the hells. But those who know me [and] gladden their minds [thinking], 'In the ten thousand world-systems, he is known and famous as the Teacher's great disciple,' will ascend to heaven." Thus, closing the path to misfortune for beings and opening the path to heaven, he announces his name.

Buddhānubuddhoti paṭhamaṃ satthā cattāri saccāni bujjhi, pacchā thero, tasmā buddhānubuddhoti, vuccati.Tibbanikkamoti bāḷhavīriyo.Vivekānanti tiṇṇaṃ vivekānaṃ.Tevijjo, cetopariyāyakovidoti chasu abhiññāsu catasso vadati. Itarā dve kiñcāpi na vuttā, thero pana chaḷabhiññova. Imissā ca gāthāya pariyosāne parisā sannisīdi. Parisāya sannisinnabhāvaṃ ñatvā thero satthārā saddhiṃ paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ‘‘parikkhīṇā me, bhante, āyusaṅkhārā, parinibbāyissāmī’’ti, parinibbānakālaṃ anujānāpesi. Kattha parinibbāyissasi koṇḍaññāti? Upaṭṭhākehi me, bhante, hatthināgehi dukkaraṃ kataṃ, tesaṃ santiketi. Satthā anujāni.

Buddhānubuddhoti: "Enlightened after the Buddha" means the Teacher first awakened to the four truths, then the Elder, therefore he is called "enlightened after the Buddha". Tibbanikkamoti: "Of sharp effort". Vivekānanti: "Of the solitudes," means of the three solitudes. Tevijjo, cetopariyāyakovidoti: "Possessed of the three knowledges, skilled in knowledge of others' minds" means he mentions four out of the six super-knowledges. Although the other two are not mentioned, the Elder possessed all six super-knowledges. And at the end of this verse, the assembly gathered. Knowing that the assembly had gathered, the Elder, having conversed with the Teacher, said, "My life force is depleted, Bhante, I will attain Parinibbāna," he sought permission for the time of his Parinibbāna. "Where will you attain Parinibbāna, Koṇḍañña?" "In the presence of the elephant kings who have done a difficult thing by attending to me, Bhante." The Teacher granted permission.

Thero dasabalaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā – ‘‘pubbaṃ taṃ me, bhante, paṭhamadassanaṃ, idaṃ pacchimadassana’’nti paridevante mahājane satthāraṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā, dvārakoṭṭhake ṭhito – ‘‘mā socittha, mā paridevittha, buddhā vā hontu buddhasāvakā vā, uppannā saṅkhārā abhijjanakā nāma natthī’’ti mahājanaṃ ovaditvā passantasseva mahājanassa vehāsaṃ abbhuggamma mandākinitīre otaritvā pokkharaṇiyaṃ nhatvā nivatthanivāsano katuttarāsaṅgo senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā phalasamāpattiyā tayo yāme vītināmetvā balavapaccūsasamaye parinibbāyi. Therassa sahaparinibbānā himavati sabbarukkhā pupphehi ca phalehi ca onatavinatā ahesuṃ. Vārikanāgo therassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ ajānanto pātova mukhodakadantakaṭṭhāni upaṭṭhapetvā vattaṃ katvā khādanīyaphalāni āharitvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. So yāva sūriyuggamanā therassa nikkhamanaṃ apassanto ‘‘kiṃ nu kho etaṃ? Pubbe ayyo pātova caṅkamati, mukhaṃ dhovati. Ajja pana paṇṇasālatopi na nikkhamatī’’ti kuṭidvāraṃ kampetvā olokento theraṃ nisinnakameva disvā hatthaṃ pasāretvā parāmasitvā assāsapassāse pariyesanto tesaṃ appavattibhāvaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘parinibbuto thero’’ti soṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipitvā mahāravaṃ viravi. Sakalahimavanto ekaninnādo ahosi. Aṭṭhanāgasahassāni sannipatitvā theraṃ jeṭṭhakanāgassa kumbhe nisīdāpetvā supupphitarukkhasākhā gahetvā parivāretvā sakalahimavantaṃ anuvicaritvā sakaṭṭhānameva āgatā.

The Elder, circumambulating the Ten-Powered One, [said], "That was my first sight of you, Bhante, this is the last sight." While the great crowd lamented, having paid homage to the Teacher, he departed and, standing at the gate, [said], "Do not grieve, do not lament; whether they are Buddhas or disciples of Buddhas, there is no arising of conditioned things that is not subject to destruction." Having admonished the great crowd, as the great crowd watched, he rose into the sky, descended to the bank of the Mandākini, bathed in the pond, put on his lower robe and wrapped his upper robe, put away his lodging, and having spent the three watches of the night in the attainment of fruition, he attained Parinibbāna at dawn. At the Elder's Parinibbāna, all the trees in the Himalayas bent down, laden with flowers and fruits. The elephant on duty, not knowing that the Elder had attained Parinibbāna, early in the morning, provided face-washing water and toothpicks, performed his duties, and bringing edible fruits, stood at the end of the walking path. Not seeing the Elder emerge until sunrise, [he thought], "What is this? Previously, the Venerable One would walk early in the morning, wash his face. But today, he does not even emerge from his hut." Shaking the door of the hut, looking in, seeing the Elder sitting still, stretching out his trunk and touching him, looking for his breaths, knowing that they were no longer functioning, [he thought], "The Elder has attained Parinibbāna," putting his trunk in his mouth, he cried out loudly. The entire Himalayas became a single roar. Eight thousand elephants gathered together and, placing the Elder on the head of the chief elephant, taking branches of fully blossomed trees, surrounding [the Elder], wandering throughout the entire Himalayas, they returned to their own place.

Sakko vissakammaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tāta, amhākaṃ jeṭṭhabhātā parinibbuto, sakkāraṃ karissāma, navayojanikaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ kūṭāgāraṃ māpehī’’ti. So tathā katvā theraṃ tattha nipajjāpetvā hatthināgānaṃ adāsi. Te kūṭāgāraṃ ukkhipitvā tiyojanasahassaṃ himavantaṃ punappunaṃ āvijjhiṃsu. Tesaṃ hatthato ākāsaṭṭhakā devā gahetvā sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷiṃsu. Tato vassavalāhakā sītavalāhakā uṇhavalāhakā cātumahārājikā tāvatiṃsāti etenupāyena yāva brahmalokā kūṭāgāraṃ agamāsi, puna brahmāno devānanti anupubbena hatthināgānaṃyeva kūṭāgāraṃ adaṃsu. Ekekā devatā caturaṅgulamattaṃ candanaghaṭikaṃ āhari, citako navayojaniko ahosi. Kūṭāgāraṃ citakaṃ āropayiṃsu. Pañca bhikkhusatāni ākāsenāgantvā sabbarattiṃ sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Anuruddhatthero dhammaṃ kathesi, bahūnaṃ devatānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Punadivase aruṇuggamanavelāyameva citakaṃ nibbāpetvā sumanamakuḷavaṇṇānaṃ dhātūnaṃ parisāvanaṃ pūretvā bhagavati nikkhamitvā veḷuvanavihārakoṭṭhakaṃ sampatte āharitvā satthu hatthe ṭhapayiṃsu. Satthā dhātuparisāvanaṃ gahetvā pathaviyā hatthaṃ pasāresi, mahāpathaviṃ bhinditvā rajatabubbuḷasadisaṃ cetiyaṃ nikkhami. Satthā sahatthena cetiye dhātuyo nidhesi. Ajjāpi kira taṃ cetiyaṃ dharatiyevāti. Navamaṃ.

Sakka addressed Vissakamma, "Dear one, our elder brother has attained Parinibbāna; we will make an offering. Build a palace of all jewels, nine leagues in extent." He did so and, having laid the Elder there, gave [the palace] to the elephant kings. The elephants, lifting up the palace, shook the Himalayas a thousand times, three leagues [in extent]. The devas who stood in the sky, taking it from their hands, played a joyful game. Then the cloud of rain, the cloud of cold, the cloud of heat, the Four Great Kings, the Tāvatiṃsa devas—in this way, as far as the Brahma world, the palace went; again, the Brahmas, the devas, in due order, gave the palace back to the elephant kings themselves. Each deva brought a sandalwood casket four fingerbreadths in size; the pyre was nine leagues in extent. They placed the palace on the pyre. Five hundred monks came through the air and chanted throughout the night. Anuruddha Thera gave a Dhamma talk; many devas had a realization of the Dhamma. The next day, at the time of sunrise, having extinguished the pyre, filling a strainer with the relics the color of jasmine buds, having gone to the Blessed One and arriving at the Vēḷuvana monastery, they placed it in the Teacher's hand. The Teacher, taking the relic strainer, stretched out his hand on the earth; splitting the great earth, a caitya like a bubble of silver emerged. The Teacher personally placed the relics in the caitya. It is said that even today that caitya stands. The ninth.

10. Moggallānasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Moggallāna Sutta Commentary

218.Dasamesamannesatīti pariyesati paccavekkhati.Nagassāti pabbatassa.Muninti buddhamuniṃ.Dukkhassa pāragunti dukkhapāraṃ gataṃ.Samannesanti samannesanto.Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannanti evaṃ sabbaguṇasampannaṃ.Anekākārasampannanti anekehi guṇehi samannāgataṃ. Dasamaṃ.

218. In the tenth [sutta], samannesatīti: "Samannesati" means seeks, reflects. Nagassāti: "Of the mountain". Muninti: "Muni" means the Buddha Muni. Dukkhassa pāragunti: "Dukkhassa pāragu" means one who has gone to the far shore of suffering. Samannesanti: "Samannesanto" means while seeking. Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannanti: "Thus, possessed of all limbs" means thus, possessed of all qualities. Anekākārasampannanti: "Possessed of various aspects" means endowed with many qualities. The tenth.

11. Gaggarāsuttavaṇṇanā
11. Gaggarā Sutta Commentary

219.Ekādasametyāssudanti te assudaṃ. Assudanti nipātamattaṃ.Vaṇṇenāti sarīravaṇṇena.Yasasāti parivārena.Vigatamalova bhāṇumāti vigatamalo ādicco viya. Ekādasamaṃ.

219. In the eleventh [sutta], tyāssudanti: "tyāssuda" means they heard. "Assuda" is merely a particle. Vaṇṇenāti: "By beauty" means by bodily beauty. Yasasāti: "By glory" means by retinue. Vigatamalova bhāṇumāti: "Like the sun without blemish" means like the sun without blemish. The eleventh.

12. Vaṅgīsasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Vaṅgīsa Sutta Commentary

220.Dvādasameāyasmāti piyavacanaṃ.Vaṅgīsoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. So kira pubbe padumuttarakāle paṭibhānasampannaṃ sāvakaṃ disvā dānaṃ datvā patthanaṃ katvā kappasatasahassaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle sakalajambudīpe vādakāmatāya jambusākhaṃ pariharitvā ekena paribbājakena saddhiṃ vādaṃ katvā vāde jayaparājayānubhāvena teneva paribbājakena saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappetvā vasamānāya ekissā paribbājikāya kucchimhi nibbatto vayaṃ āgamma mātito pañcavādasatāni, pitito pañcavādasatānīti vādasahassaṃ uggaṇhitvā vicarati. Ekañca vijjaṃ jānāti, yaṃ vijjaṃ parijappitvā matānaṃ sīsaṃ aṅguliyā paharitvā – ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne nibbatto’’ti jānāti. So anupubbena gāmanigamādīsu vicaranto pañcahi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ sāvatthiṃ anuppatto nagaradvāre sālāya nisīdati.

220. In the twelfth, "Āyasmā" is a term of endearment. Vaṅgīsa is the name of that Thera. It is said that in the time of Padumuttara Buddha, seeing a disciple endowed with eloquence, he gave a gift, made a wish, fulfilled the pāramīs for a hundred thousand aeons, and in the time of our Blessed One, throughout all of Jambudīpa, carrying a jambu branch for the sake of debating, having debated with a certain wanderer, and experiencing victory and defeat in the debate, having formed a companionship with that same wanderer, he was born in the womb of a female wanderer while living together. Having reached adulthood, he wandered about having learned a thousand debates—fifteen hundred from his mother and fifteen hundred from his father. And he knew a certain science, by applying which and striking the head of the dead with his finger, he knew, "He was reborn in such and such a place." He, wandering gradually through villages and towns, arrived at Sāvatthi with five hundred youths and sat down in a hall at the city gate.

Tadā ca nagaravāsino purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā pacchābhattaṃ suddhuttarāsaṅgā gandhamālādihatthā dhammassavanāya vihāraṃ gacchanti. Māṇavo disvā, ‘‘kahaṃ gacchathā’’ti? Pucchi. Te ‘‘dasabalassa santikaṃ dhammassavanāyā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sopi saparivāro tehi saddhiṃ gantvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ bhagavā āha – ‘‘vaṅgīsa, bhaddakaṃ kira sippaṃ jānāsī’’ti. ‘‘Bho gotama, ahaṃ bahusippaṃ jānāmi. Tumhe kataraṃ sandhāya vadathā’’ti? Chavadūsakasippanti. Āma, bho gotamāti. Athassa bhagavā attano ānubhāvena niraye nibbattassa sīsaṃ dassetvā, ‘‘vaṅgīsa, ayaṃ kahaṃ nibbatto’’ti pucchi. So mantaṃ jappitvā aṅguliyā paharitvā ‘‘niraye’’ti āha. ‘‘Sādhu, vaṅgīsa, sukathita’’nti devaloke nibbattassa sīsaṃ dassesi. Tampi so tatheva byākāsi. Athassa khīṇāsavassa sīsaṃ dassesi. So punappunaṃ mantaṃ parivattetvāpi aṅguliyā paharitvāpi nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ na passati.

At that time, the townspeople, having given alms before noon, after the meal, with clean upper robes and flowers and perfumes in their hands, were going to the monastery to hear the Dhamma. The youth, seeing them, asked, "Where are you going?" They said, "To the presence of the Ten-Powered One to hear the Dhamma." He too, with his retinue, went with them, exchanged greetings, and stood to one side. Then the Blessed One said to him, "Vaṅgīsa, it seems you know a good craft?" "Venerable Gotama, I know many crafts. Which one are you referring to?" "The craft of indicating the dead." "Yes, Venerable Gotama." Then the Blessed One, by his power, showed him the head of one reborn in hell and asked, "Vaṅgīsa, where was this one reborn?" He chanted a mantra and, striking it with his finger, said, "In hell." "Good, Vaṅgīsa, well said," and showed him the head of one reborn in the deva-world. He explained that too in the same way. Then he showed him the head of a Khīṇāsava. Even after repeatedly reciting the mantra and striking it with his finger, he did not see the place of rebirth.

Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘kilamasi, vaṅgīsā’’ti āha? Āma bho, gotamāti. Punappunaṃ upadhārehīti. Tathā karontopi adisvā, ‘‘tumhe, bho gotama, jānāthā’’ti āha. Āma, vaṅgīsa, maṃ nissāya cesa gato, ahamassa gatiṃ jānāmīti. Mantena jānāsi, bho gotamāti? Āma, vaṅgīsa, ekena manteneva jānāmīti. Bho gotama, mayhaṃ mantena imaṃ mantaṃ dethāti. Amūliko, vaṅgīsa, mayhaṃ mantoti. Detha, bho gotamāti. Na sakkā mayhaṃ santike apabbajitassa dātunti. So antevāsike āmantesi – ‘‘tātā samaṇo gotamo atirekasippaṃ jānāti, ahaṃ imassa santike pabbajitvā sippaṃ gaṇhāmi, tato sakalajambudīpe amhehi bahutaraṃ jānanto nāma na bhavissati. Tumhe yāva ahaṃ āgacchāmi, tāva anukkaṇṭhitvā vicarathā’’ti te uyyojetvā ‘‘pabbājetha ma’’nti āha. Satthā nigrodhakappassa paṭipādesi. Thero taṃ attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ netvā pabbājesi. So pabbajitvā satthu santikaṃ āgamma vanditvā ṭhito ‘‘sippaṃ dethā’’ti yāci. Vaṅgīsa, tumhe sippaṃ gaṇhantā aloṇabhojanathaṇḍilaseyyādīhi parikammaṃ katvā gaṇhatha, imassāpi sippassa parikammaṃ atthi, taṃ tāva karohīti. Sādhu, bhanteti. Athassa satthā dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhi. So taṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasikaronto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā anukkamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

Then the Blessed One said to him, "Are you tired, Vaṅgīsa?" "Yes, Venerable Gotama." "Examine it again and again." Doing so, even without seeing it, he said, "Do you, Venerable Gotama, know?" "Yes, Vaṅgīsa, since he has gone depending on me, I know his destination." "Do you know with a mantra, Venerable Gotama?" "Yes, Vaṅgīsa, I know with only one mantra." "Venerable Gotama, give me that mantra in exchange for my mantra." "My mantra, Vaṅgīsa, is without a price." "Give it to me, Venerable Gotama." "It is not possible to give it to one who has not gone forth in my presence." He addressed his followers, "Friends, the ascetic Gotama knows an extraordinary craft; having gone forth in his presence, I will learn the craft; then there will be no one in all of Jambudīpa who knows more than us. As long as I have not come, wander about without being anxious." Having dismissed them, he said, "Ordain me." The Teacher instructed Nigrodhakappa. The Thera, taking him to his dwelling place, ordained him. Having been ordained, coming into the presence of the Teacher, having paid homage, and standing to one side, he asked, "Give me the craft." "Vaṅgīsa, when learning a craft, you learn it having done the preliminary work such as eating food without salt and sleeping on bare ground; there is also a preliminary work for this craft; do that first." "Good, Venerable Sir." Then the Teacher taught him the thirty-two-part body meditation (dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ). Considering it in direct and reverse order, developing insight, he gradually attained Arahatship.

Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedīti evaṃ arahattaṃ patvā vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedento.Kāveyyamattāti kāveyyena kabbakaraṇena mattā.Khandhāyatanadhātuyoti imāni khandhādīni pakāsento dhammaṃ desesi.Ye niyāmagataddasāti ye niyāmagatā ceva niyāmadassāti ca.Svāgatanti suāgamanaṃ.Iddhipattomhīti iminā iddhividhañāṇaṃ gahitaṃ.Cetopariyāyakovidoti iminā cetopariyañāṇaṃ. Dibbasotaṃ pana avuttampi gahitameva hoti. Evaṃ cha abhiññāpatto eso mahāsāvakoti veditabbo. Dvādasamaṃ.

Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedī: Thus, having attained Arahatship, experiencing the bliss of liberation. Kāveyyamattā: Delighted by poetry, by composing verses. Khandhāyatanadhātuyo: Explaining these aggregates and so on, he taught the Dhamma. Ye niyāmagataddasā: Those who have attained the fixed order and who see the fixed order. Svāgataṃ: A good welcome. Iddhipattomhī: By this, the knowledge of psychic powers (iddhividhañāṇaṃ) is taken. Cetopariyāyakovido: By this, knowledge of penetration of minds (cetopariyañāṇaṃ). But divine ear (dibbasotaṃ), though unmentioned, is taken as included. Thus, this great disciple should be understood as having attained the six Abhiññās. Twelfth.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus in the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary to the Saṃyutta Nikāya,

9. Vanasaṃyuttaṃ

9. Vanasaṃyuttaṃ

1. Vivekasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Vivekasuttavaṇṇanā

221.Vanasaṃyuttassa paṭhamekosalesu viharatīti satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā tassa janapadassa sulabhabhikkhatāya tattha gantvā viharati.Saṃvejetukāmāti vivekaṃ paṭipajjāpetukāmā.Vivekakāmoti tayo viveke patthayanto.Niccharatī bahiddhāti bāhiresu puthuttārammaṇesu carati.Jano janasminti tvaṃ jano aññasmiṃ jane chandarāgaṃ vinayassu.Pajahāsīti pajaha.Bhavāsīti bhava.Sataṃ taṃ sārayāmaseti satimantaṃ paṇḍitaṃ taṃ mayampi sārayāma, sataṃ vā dhammaṃ mayaṃ taṃ sārayāmāti attho.Pātālarajoti appatiṭṭhaṭṭhena pātālasaṅkhāto kilesarajo.Mā taṃ kāmarajoti ayaṃ kāmarāgarajo taṃ mā avahari, apāyameva mā netūti attho.Paṃsukunthitoti paṃsumakkhito.Vidhunanti vidhunanto.Sitaṃ rajanti sarīralaggaṃ rajaṃ.Saṃvegamāpādīti devatāpi nāma maṃ evaṃ sāretīti vivekamāpanno, uttamavīriyaṃ vā paggayha paramavivekaṃ maggameva paṭipannoti. Paṭhamaṃ.

221. In the first of the Vanasaṃyutta, "Viharatī in the Kosalas": Having taken a meditation subject in the Teacher's presence, he dwells there in that district because of the easy availability of alms. Saṃvejetukāmā: Desiring to induce detachment. Vivekakāmo: Desiring the three kinds of detachment. Niccharatī bahiddhā: He wanders in external, diverse objects. Jano janasmiṃ: You, a person, should remove lust and attachment in another person. Pajahāsī: Abandon. Bhavāsī: Become. Sataṃ taṃ sārayāmase: We also remind you, mindful, wise one; or we remind you of the Dhamma for the mindful. Pātālarajo: The dust of defilements, called "pātāla" because of its instability. Mā taṃ kāmarajo: May this dust of sensual desire not carry you away, may it not lead you to the apāya. Paṃsukunthito: Covered with dust. Vidhunaṃ: Shaking off. Sitaṃ rajaṃ: The dust clinging to the body. Saṃvegamāpādī: Experiencing detachment, thinking, "Even a deva reminds me thus," or having exerted supreme effort, he attained the supreme detachment, the path itself. First.

2. Upaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Upaṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā

222.Dutiyesupatīti ayaṃ kira khīṇāsavo, so dūre bhikkhācāragāmaṃ gantvā āgato paṇṇasālāya pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā avidūre jātassaraṃ otaritvā gattāni utuṃ gāhāpetvā divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā tattha nīcamañcakaṃ paññāpetvā niddaṃ anokkamantova nipanno. Khīṇāsavassāpi hi kāyadaratho hotiyevāti tassa vinodanatthaṃ, taṃ sandhāya supatīti vuttaṃ.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā divā supati, divāsoppañca nāmetaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ nāsetī’’ti maññamānā ‘‘codessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi.

222. In the second, supatī: It is said that this Khīṇāsava, having gone to an alms village far away and returned, having put away his bowl and robes in the leaf hut, having descended to a natural pond not far away and cooled his limbs, having swept the day dwelling and spread out a low cot there, lay down, not even resisting sleep. For even a Khīṇāsava has physical fatigue; therefore, to relieve that, referring to that, "supatī" is said. Ajjhabhāsī: Thinking, "This bhikkhu, having taken a meditation subject in the Teacher's presence, sleeps during the day; daytime sleep ruins the seen-now and future benefit which is not encouraged by noble ones," thinking "I will rebuke him," she spoke.

Āturassāti jarāturo rogāturo kilesāturoti tayo āturā, tesu kilesāturaṃ sandhāyevamāha.Sallaviddhassāti savisena sattisallena viya avijjāvisaviṭṭhena taṇhāsallena hadaye viddhassa.Ruppatoti ghaṭṭiyamānassa.

Āturassa: There are three who are ill: ill with old age, ill with disease, and ill with defilements; here, she speaks referring to the illness of defilements. Sallaviddhassa: Struck in the heart with the dart of craving, like with a poisoned spear, with the dart of ignorance-poison. Ruppato: Being harassed.

aniccātiādimāha. Tatthaasitanti taṇhādiṭṭhinissayena anissitaṃ.Kasmā pabbajitaṃ tapeti evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ divāsoppaṃ na tapati, tādisaṃ pana kasmā na tapessatīti? Vadati. Therasseva vā etaṃ vacanaṃ, tasmā ayamettha attho – baddhesu muttaṃ asitaṃ mādisaṃ khīṇāsavapabbajitaṃ kasmā divāsoppaṃ tape, na tapessatīti? Sesagāthāsupi eseva nayo. Devatāya hi vacanapakkhe – ‘‘evarūpaṃ khīṇāsavapabbajitaṃ divāsoppaṃ na tapati, tādisaṃ pana kasmā na tapessati? Tapessatiyevā’’ti attho. Therassa vacanapakkhe – ‘‘evarūpaṃ mādisaṃ khīṇāsavapabbajitaṃ kasmā divāsoppaṃ tape? Na tapatiyevā’’ti attho. Ayaṃ panettha anuttānapadavaṇṇanā.Vinayāti vinayena.Samatikkamāti vaṭṭamūlikāya avijjāya samatikkamena.Taṃ ñāṇanti taṃ catusaccañāṇaṃ.Paramodānanti paramaparisuddhaṃ.Pabbajitanti evarūpena ñāṇena samannāgataṃ pabbajitaṃ.Vijjāyāti catutthamaggavijjāya.Āraddhavīriyanti paggahitavīriyaṃ paripuṇṇavīriyaṃ. Dutiyaṃ.

Aniccāti etc., he said. There, asitaṃ: Not relying on the support of craving and views. Kasmā pabbajitaṃ tape: Why does daytime sleep not afflict such a Khīṇāsava? He says, "Why would it not afflict such a one?" Or this is the Thera's own statement; therefore, the meaning here is: Why would daytime sleep afflict one liberated among the bound, a Khīṇāsava like me who is independent? It will not afflict. The same method applies in the remaining verses. For on the side of the deva's statement, the meaning is, "Daytime sleep does not afflict such a Khīṇāsava; why would it not afflict such a one? It will surely afflict." On the side of the Thera's statement, the meaning is, "Why would daytime sleep afflict a Khīṇāsava like me? It does not afflict at all." Here, this is the explanation of the non-obvious words. Vinayā: By discipline. Samatikkamā: By overcoming the root of existence, ignorance. Taṃ ñāṇaṃ: That knowledge of the Four Noble Truths. Paramodānaṃ: Supremely pure. Pabbajitaṃ: One gone forth endowed with such knowledge. Vijjāyā: By the fourth path knowledge. Āraddhavīriyaṃ: One with aroused effort, complete effort. Second.

3. Kassapagottasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Kassapagottasuttavaṇṇanā

223.Tatiyechetanti ekaṃ migaluddakaṃ.Ovadatīti so kira migaluddako pātova bhuñjitvā ‘‘mige vadhissāmī’’ti araññaṃ paviṭṭho ekaṃ rohitamigaṃ disvā ‘‘sattiyā naṃ paharissāmī’’ti anubandhamāno therassa paṭhamasutte vuttanayeneva divāvihāraṃ nisinnassa avidūrena pakkamati. Atha naṃ thero – ‘‘upāsaka, pāṇātipāto nāmesa apāyasaṃvattaniko appāyukasaṃvattaniko, sakkā aññenapi kasivaṇijjādikammena dārabharaṇaṃ kātuṃ, mā evarūpaṃ kakkhaḷakammaṃ karohī’’ti āha. Sopi ‘‘mahāpaṃsukūlikatthero kathetī’’ti gāravena ṭhatvā sotuṃ āraddho. Athassa sotukāmataṃ janessāmīti thero aṅguṭṭhakaṃ jālāpesi. So akkhīhipi passati, kaṇṇehipi suṇāti, cittaṃ panassa ‘‘asukaṭṭhānaṃ migo gato bhavissati, asukatitthaṃ otiṇṇo, tattha naṃ gantvā ghātetvā yāvadicchakaṃ maṃsaṃ khāditvā sesaṃ kājenādāya gantvā puttake tosessāmī’’ti evaṃ migasseva anupadaṃ dhāvati. Evaṃ vikkhittacittassa dhammaṃ desentaṃ theraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ovadatī’’ti.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ thero adāruṃ tacchanto viya akhette vappanto viya attanopi kammaṃ nāseti, etassāpi codessāmi na’’nti abhāsi.

223. In the third, chetaṃ: A certain hunter. Ovadatī: It is said that that hunter, having eaten early in the morning, thinking, "I will kill deer," having entered the forest, seeing a rohita deer, thinking, "I will strike it with a spear," chasing after it, passed not far from the Thera, who was sitting in his day dwelling in the manner stated in the first sutta. Then the Thera said to him, "Layman, killing living beings is conducive to the apāya and conducive to short life; it is possible to support your family by some other means such as farming or trade; do not do such a harsh deed." He, thinking, "The great Paṃsukūlika Thera is speaking," stood respectfully and began to listen. Then, thinking, "I will generate his desire to listen," the Thera lit his thumb. He sees with his eyes and hears with his ears, but his mind runs after the deer: "The deer must have gone to such and such a place; it has gone down to such and such a ford; having gone there, having killed it, having eaten as much meat as he wants, having taken the rest with the cart, I will delight my children." Referring to the Thera teaching the Dhamma to one with such a distracted mind, "ovadatī" is said. Ajjhabhāsī: Thinking, "This Thera, like one planing non-timber, like one sowing in a non-field, destroys his own work; I will rebuke him," he spoke.

Appapaññanti nippaññaṃ.Acetasanti kāraṇajānanasamatthena cittena rahitaṃ.Mandovāti andhabālo viya.Suṇātīti tava dhammakathaṃ suṇāti.Na vijānātīti atthamassa na jānāti.Āloketīti tava puthujjanikaiddhiyā jalantaṃ aṅguṭṭhakaṃ āloketi.Na passatīti ettha ‘‘neva telaṃ na vaṭṭi na dīpakapallikā, therassa pana ānubhāvenāyaṃ jalatī’’ti imaṃ kāraṇaṃ na passati.Dasa pajjoteti dasasu aṅgulīsu dasa padīpe.Rūpānīti kāraṇarūpāni.Cakkhūti paññācakkhu.Saṃvegamāpādīti kiṃ me imināti? Vīriyaṃ paggayha paramavivekaṃ arahattamaggaṃ paṭipajji. Tatiyaṃ.

Appapaññaṃ: Lacking wisdom. Acetasaṃ: Devoid of a mind capable of understanding the cause. Mandovā: Like a blind fool. Suṇātī: He hears your Dhamma talk. Na vijānātī: He does not understand its meaning. Āloketī: He illuminates your thumb blazing with your mundane psychic power. Na passatī: Here, he does not see this cause: "There is neither oil nor wick nor lamp-holder; but this is blazing by the power of the Thera." Dasa pajjote: Ten lamps in ten fingers. Rūpāni: Causal forms. Cakkhū: The eye of wisdom. Saṃvegamāpādī: "What is the use of this to me?" Having exerted effort, he attained the supreme detachment, the path of Arahatship. Third.

4. Sambahulasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Sambahulasuttavaṇṇanā

224.Catutthesambahulāti bahū suttantikā ābhidhammikā vinayadharā ca.Viharantīti satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharanti.Pakkamiṃsūti te kira tasmiṃ janapade aññataraṃ gāmaṃ upasaṅkamante disvā manussā pasannacittā āsanasālāya kojavattharaṇādīni paññāpetvā yāgukhajjakāni datvā upanisīdiṃsu. Mahāthero ekaṃ dhammakathikaṃ ‘‘dhammaṃ kathehī’’ti āha. So cittaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesi. Manussā pasīditvā bhojanavelāyaṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ adaṃsu. Mahāthero manuññaṃ bhattānumodanamakāsi. Manussā bhiyyosomattāya pasannā ‘‘idheva, bhante, temāsaṃ vasathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ kāretvā gamanāgamanasampanne ṭhāne senāsanāni kāretvā catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Mahāthero vassūpanāyikadivase bhikkhū ovadi – ‘‘āvuso, tumhehi garukassa satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahitaṃ, buddhapātubhāvo nāma dullabho. Māsassa aṭṭha divase dhammassavanaṃ katvā gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya appamattā viharathā’’ti. Te tato paṭṭhāya yuñjanti ghaṭenti. Kadāci sabbarattikaṃ dhammassavanaṃ karonti, kadāci pañhaṃ vissajjenti, kadāci padhānaṃ karonti. Tesaṃ dhammassavanadivase dhammaṃ kathentānaṃyeva aruṇo uggacchati. Pañhāvissajjanadivase byatto bhikkhu pañhaṃ pucchati, paṇḍito vissajjetīti pucchanavissajjanaṃ karontānaṃyeva. Padhānadivase sūriyatthaṅgamane gaṇḍiṃ paharitvāva caṅkamaṃ otaritvā padhānaṃ karontānaṃyeva. Te evaṃ vassaṃ vassitvā pavāretvā pakkamiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Paridevamānāti ‘‘idāni tathārūpaṃ madhuraṃ dhammassavanaṃ pañhākathanaṃ kuto labhissāmī’’tiādīni vatvā rodamānā.

224. In the fourth, sambahulā: Many Suttantikas, Abhidhammikas, and Vinayadharas. Viharantī: Having taken a meditation subject in the Teacher's presence, they dwell. Pakkamiṃsū: It is said that as they were approaching a certain village in that district, seeing them, people with pleased minds, having spread out mats and cloths in the assembly hall, having given rice-gruel and snacks, sat down. The Great Thera said to a certain Dhamma-speaker, "Speak Dhamma." He spoke Dhamma that pleased the mind. The people, having been pleased, gave excellent food at mealtime. The Great Thera gave a delightful meal-anumodanā. The people, even more pleased, having made them promise, "Dwell here for three months," having built lodgings in a place suitable for coming and going, attended to them with the four requisites. The Great Thera advised the bhikkhus on the day of entering the rains, "Friends, you have taken a meditation subject in the presence of the Teacher, who is worthy of respect; the appearance of a Buddha is rare. Having heard Dhamma eight days of the month, abandoning company and association, dwell diligently." From then on, they applied themselves, they strove. Sometimes they had an all-night Dhamma talk; sometimes they answered questions; sometimes they practiced meditation. For them, on the day of the Dhamma talk, dawn broke while they were speaking Dhamma. On the day of answering questions, the able bhikkhu asks a question, and the wise one answers, even while they were asking and answering. On the day of meditation, having struck the gong at sunset, having descended to the cloister, even while they were practicing meditation. Having spent the rains thus, having held the Pavāraṇā, they departed. Referring to that, this is said. Paridevamānā: Wailing, saying, "Now where will we obtain such sweet Dhamma talks and questionings?"

Khāyatīti paññāyati upaṭṭhāti.Ko meti kahaṃ ime.Vajjibhūmiyāti vajjiraṭṭhābhimukhā gatā.Magā viyāti yathā magā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pabbatapāde vā vanasaṇḍe vā vicarantā – ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ mātusantakaṃ pitusantakaṃ paveṇiāgata’’nti agahetvā, yattheva nesaṃ gocaraphāsutā ca hoti paripanthābhāvo ca, tattha vicaranti. Evaṃ aniketā agehā bhikkhavopi ‘‘ayaṃ, āvuso, amhākaṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ santako paveṇiāgato’’ti agahetvā yattheva nesaṃ utusappāyaṃ bhojanasappāyaṃ puggalasappāyaṃ senāsanasappāyaṃ dhammassavanasappāyañca sulabhaṃ hoti, tattha viharanti. Catutthaṃ.

Khāyatīti: it appears, is present. Ko me ti: where are these? Vajjibhūmiyā ti: having gone towards the Vajjian territory. Magā viyā ti: just as deer, wandering in this or that mountain foot or forest thicket, without clinging to the idea that "this is my mother's property, my father's property, inherited from tradition," but wandering wherever they find ease of grazing and absence of danger. Similarly, monks who are homeless and without fixed abode, without clinging to the idea that "this, venerable sir, is the property of our preceptors and teachers, inherited from tradition," dwell wherever they find suitable climate, suitable food, suitable persons, suitable lodging, and ease of hearing the Dhamma. The fourth.

5. Ānandasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Ānanda Sutta

225.Pañcameānandoti dhammabhaṇḍāgārikatthero.Ativelanti atikkantaṃ velaṃ.Gihisaññattibahuloti rattiñca divā ca bahukālaṃ gihī saññāpayanto. Bhagavati parinibbute mahākassapatthero theraṃ āha – ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ rājagahe vassaṃ upagantvā dhammaṃ saṅgāyissāma, gaccha tvaṃ araññaṃ pavisitvā uparimaggattayatthāya vāyāmaṃ karohī’’ti. So bhagavato pattacīvaramādāya kosalaraṭṭhaṃ gantvā ekasmiṃ araññāvāse vasitvā punadivase ekaṃ gāmaṃ pāvisi. Manussā theraṃ disvā – ‘‘bhante ānanda, tumhe pubbe satthārā saddhiṃ āgacchatha. Ajja ekakāva āgatā. Kahaṃ satthāraṃ ṭhapetvā āgatattha? Idāni kassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicaratha? Kassa mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ detha, pariveṇaṃ sammajjatha, vattapaṭivattaṃ karothā’’ti bahuṃ vatvā parideviṃsu. Thero – ‘‘mā, āvuso, socittha, mā paridevittha, aniccā saṅkhārā’’tiādīni vatvā te saññāpetvā bhattakiccāvasāne vasanaṭṭhānameva gacchati. Manussā sāyampi tattha gantvā tatheva paridevanti. Theropi tatheva ovadati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ thero bhikkhusaṅghassa kathaṃ sutvā ‘samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmī’ti araññaṃ pavisitvā idāni gihī saññāpento viharati, satthu sāsanaṃ asaṅgahitapuppharāsi viya ṭhitaṃ, dhammasaṅgahaṃ na karoti, codessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi.

225. In the fifth, Ānando ti: the Elder Ānanda, the treasurer of the Dhamma. Ativelaṃ ti: beyond the proper time. Gihisaññattibahulo ti: spending much time, day and night, in consoling laypeople. When the Blessed One had attained final Nibbāna, the Elder Mahākassapa said to the Elder: "Venerable Ānanda, we will go to Rājagaha and spend the rainy season there, and we will recite the Dhamma. You go, enter the forest, and strive for the sake of the three higher paths." He, taking the Blessed One's bowl and robe, went to the Kosala country and lived in a certain forest dwelling. The next day, he entered a village for alms. Seeing the Elder, people said, "Venerable Ānanda, you used to come with the Teacher. Today you have come alone. Where have you left the Teacher? Whose bowl and robe do you carry now? To whom do you give water for the face and a toothpick, sweep the enclosure, and perform the regular duties?" Saying much, they lamented. The Elder, saying, "Do not grieve, venerable sirs, do not lament, conditioned things are impermanent," consoled them and, after the meal, went to his dwelling place. In the evening too, people went there and lamented in the same way. The Elder also advised them in the same way. With reference to that, this was said. Ajjhabhāsī ti: thinking, "How is it that this Elder, having heard from the Saṅgha of monks, entered the forest intending to 'practice the ascetic life,' and now lives consoling laypeople? The Teacher's teaching stands like a scattered heap of flowers, he does not undertake a compilation of the Dhamma; I will rebuke him," he spoke.

Pasakkiyāti pavisitvā.Hadayasmiṃ opiyāti kiccato ca ārammaṇato ca hadayamhi pakkhipitvā. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti vīriyaṃ karonto nibbānaṃ kiccato hadayamhi opeti nāma, nibbānārammaṇaṃ pana samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdanto ārammaṇato. Tadubhayampi sandhāyesā bhāsati.Jhāyāti dvīhi jhānehi jhāyiko bhava.Biḷibiḷikāti ayaṃ gihīhi saddhiṃ biḷibiḷikathā. Pañcamaṃ.

Pasakkiyā ti: having entered. Hadayasmiṃ opiyā ti: having placed [it] in his heart, both in terms of function and object. One who strives for Nibbāna, placing Nibbāna in his heart in terms of function, and one who sits after applying the attainment having Nibbāna as its object, thus in terms of object. She speaks referring to both of those. Jhāyā ti: become one who dwells in jhāna through two jhānas. Biḷibiḷikā ti: this is frivolous talk with laypeople. The fifth.

6. Anuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Anuruddha Sutta

226.Chaṭṭhepurāṇadutiyikāti anantare attabhāve aggamahesī.Sobhasīti pubbepi sobhasi, idānipi sobhasi.Duggatāti na gatiduggatiyā duggatā. Tā hi sugatiyaṃ ṭhitā sampattiṃ anubhavanti, paṭipattiduggatiyā pana duggatā. Tato cutā hi tā nirayepi upapajjantīti duggatā.Patiṭṭhitāti sakkāyasmiṃ hi patiṭṭhahanto aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi patiṭṭhāti – ratto rāgavasena patiṭṭhāti, duṭṭho dosavasena… mūḷho mohavasena… vinibaddho mānavasena… parāmaṭṭho diṭṭhivasena… thāmagato anusayavasena… aniṭṭhaṅgato vicikicchāvasena… vikkhepagato uddhaccavasena patiṭṭhāti. Tāpi evaṃ patiṭṭhitāva.Naradevānanti devanarānaṃ.

226. In the sixth, purāṇadutiyikā ti: the chief queen in a previous existence. Sobhasī ti: you were beautiful before, and you are beautiful now. Duggatā ti: not wretched due to wretched destiny. For they, standing in a good destiny, experience prosperity, but they are wretched due to wretched practice. For, having died from there, they are born even in hell, thus they are wretched. Patiṭṭhitā ti: for one who is established in the existing group of five aggregates is established for eight reasons: one who is lustful is established due to lust, one who is hateful due to hatred… one who is deluded due to delusion… one who is bound due to conceit… one who is affected due to wrong view… one who is obstinate is [established] due to underlying tendency… one who is averse is [established] due to doubt… one who is distracted is [established] due to restlessness. They too are established in this way. Naradevānaṃ ti: of gods and men.

Natthi dānīti sā kira devadhītā there balavasinehā ahosi, paṭigantuṃ nāsakkhi. Kālena āgantvā pariveṇaṃ sammajjati, mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhapeti. Thero anāvajjanena paribhuñjati. Ekasmiṃ divase therassa jiṇṇacīvarassa coḷakabhikkhaṃ carato saṅkārakūṭe dibbadussaṃ ṭhapetvā pakkami. Thero taṃ disvā ukkhipitvā, olokento dussantaṃ disvā ‘‘dussameta’’nti ñatvā, ‘‘alaṃ ettāvatā’’ti aggahesi. Tenevassa cīvaraṃ niṭṭhāsi. Atha dve aggasāvakā anuruddhatthero cāti tayo janā cīvaraṃ kariṃsu. Satthā sūciṃ yojetvā adāsi. Niṭṭhitacīvarassa piṇḍāya carato devatā piṇḍapātaṃ samādapeti. Sā kālena ekikā, kālena attadutiyā therassa santikaṃ āgacchati. Tadā pana attatatiyā āgantvā divāṭṭhāne theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘mayaṃ manāpakāyikā nāma manasā icchiticchitarūpaṃ māpemā’’ti āha. Thero – ‘‘etā evaṃ vadanti, vīmaṃsissāmi, sabbā nīlakā hontū’’ti cintesi. Tā therassa manaṃ ñatvā sabbāva nīlavaṇṇā ahesuṃ, evaṃ pītalohitaodātavaṇṇāti. Tato cintayiṃsu – ‘‘thero amhākaṃ dassanaṃ assādetī’’ti tā samajjaṃ kātuṃ āraddhā, ekāpi gāyi, ekāpi nacci, ekāpi accharaṃ pahari. Thero indriyāni okkhipi. Tato – ‘‘na amhākaṃ dassanaṃ thero assādetī’’ti ñatvā sinehaṃ vā santhavaṃ vā alabhamānā nibbinditvā gantumāraddhā. Thero tāsaṃ gamanabhāvaṃ ñatvā – ‘‘mā punappunaṃ āgacchiṃsū’’ti arahattaṃ byākaronto imaṃ gāthamāha. Tatthavikkhīṇoti khīṇo.Jātisaṃsāroti tattha tattha jātisaṅkhāto saṃsāro. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Natthi dānī ti: it seems that goddess had a strong affection for the Elder, she could not refuse him. From time to time, she would come and sweep the enclosure, provide water for the face and toothpicks, drinking water, and things to be used. The Elder used them without paying attention. One day, when the Elder was going for alms for rags for an old robe, she placed a divine cloth on the rubbish heap and left. The Elder, seeing it, picked it up and, looking at the edge of the cloth, recognized "this is cloth," and, thinking "that is enough," he took it. With that he finished the robe. Then two chief disciples and the Elder Anuruddha, these three people made the robe. The Teacher threaded the needle and gave it to him. When the robe was finished, a deity arranged for alms when he went for alms. She would come to the Elder, sometimes alone, sometimes as a second person. Then, coming as a third person, she approached the Elder in the daytime and said, "We are called 'pleasant-bodied,' we create whatever form is desired by the mind." The Elder thought, "They say this, I will investigate, let them all be blue." Knowing the Elder's mind, they all became blue in color, likewise yellow, red, and white. Then they thought, "The Elder enjoys seeing us," so they began to have a gathering, one sang, one danced, one snapped her fingers. The Elder restrained his senses. Then, knowing that "the Elder does not enjoy seeing us," not getting affection or intimacy, they began to leave, feeling disgust. Knowing their intention to leave, the Elder, declaring arahantship so that they would not come again and again, spoke this verse. There, vikkhīṇo ti: destroyed. Jātisaṃsāro ti: the cycle of rebirths, known as birth in various existences. The sixth.

7. Nāgadattasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Nāgadatta Sutta

227.Sattameatikālenāti sabbarattiṃ niddāyitvā balavapaccūse koṭisammuñjaniyā thokaṃ sammajjitvā mukhaṃ dhovitvā yāgubhikkhāya pātova pavisati.Atidivāti yāguṃ ādāya āsanasālaṃ gantvā pivitvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nipanno niddāyitvā – ‘‘manussānaṃ bhojanavelāya paṇītaṃ bhikkhaṃ labhissāmī’’ti upakaṭṭhe majjhanhike uṭṭhāya dhammakaraṇena udakaṃ gahetvā akkhīni pamajjitvā piṇḍāya caritvā yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā majjhanhike vītivatte paṭikkamati.Divā ca āgantvāti atikāle paviṭṭhena nāma aññehi bhikkhūhi paṭhamataraṃ āgantabbaṃ hoti, tvaṃ pana ativiya divā āgantvā gatāsīti attho.Bhāyāmi nāgadattanti taṃ nāgadattaṃ ahaṃ bhāyāmi.Suppagabbhanti suṭṭhu pagabbhaṃ.Kulesūti khattiyakulādiupaṭṭhākakulesu. Sattamaṃ.

227. In the seventh, atikālenā ti: having slept all night, at the very crack of dawn, after sweeping a little with a broom worth a koṭi, having washed his face, he enters [the village] very early for rice-gruel alms. Atidivā ti: having taken the rice-gruel, having gone to the assembly hall, having drunk it, having lain down in one place and slept, thinking, "At mealtime, I will get fine alms from the people," he gets up at midday near the time, takes water with a water scoop, wipes his eyes, goes for alms, eats as much as he needs, and returns when midday has passed. Divā ca āgantvā ti: one who enters very early should come back earlier than other monks, but you come back extremely late, this is the meaning. Bhāyāmi nāgadatta ti: I am afraid of that Nāgadatta. Suppagabbhaṃ ti: very bold. Kulesū ti: in families of patrons such as khattiya families. The seventh.

8. Kulagharaṇīsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Kulagharaṇī Sutta

228.Aṭṭhameajjhogāḷhappattoti ogāhappatto. So kira satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā dutiyadivase gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi pāsādikehi abhikkantādīhi. Aññataraṃ kulaṃ tassa iriyāpathe pasīditvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā piṇḍapātaṃ adāsi. Bhattānumodanaṃ puna sutvā atirekataraṃ pasīditvā, ‘‘bhante, niccakālaṃ idheva bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti nimantesi. Thero adhivāsetvā tesaṃ āhāraṃ paribhuñjamāno vīriyaṃ paggayha ghaṭento arahattaṃ patvā cintesi – ‘‘bahūpakāraṃ me etaṃ kulaṃ, aññattha gantvā kiṃ karissāmī’’ti? Phalasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavanto tattheva vasi.Ajjhabhāsīti sā kira therassa khīṇāsavabhāvaṃ ajānantī cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ thero neva aññaṃ gāmaṃ gacchati, na aññaṃ gharaṃ, na rukkhamūlaāsanasālādīsu nisīdati, niccakālaṃ gharaṃ pavisitvāva nisīdati, ubhopete ogādhappattā paṭigādhappattā, kadāci esa imaṃ kulaṃ dūseyya, codessāmi na’’nti. Tasmā abhāsi.

228. In the eighth, ajjhogāḷhappatto ti: one who has attained immersion. It seems he took a meditation subject from the Teacher and, having entered that forest thicket, entered a village for alms on the second day, with pleasing deportment, etc. A certain family, pleased with his deportment, having paid homage with the five-point prostration, gave him alms food. Having heard the thanksgiving after the meal and being even more pleased, they invited him, "Venerable sir, always take alms here." The Elder, having accepted, partaking of their food, exerting effort and striving, attained arahantship and thought: "This family has done much for me, what shall I do going elsewhere?" Experiencing the bliss of fruition attainment, he lived there itself. Ajjhabhāsī ti: it seems she, not knowing the Elder's state of being a khīṇāsava, thought: "This Elder neither goes to another village, nor to another house, nor sits at the foot of a tree or in an assembly hall, he always enters the house and sits, both of these have attained immersion, have attained going deep, someday he might corrupt this family, I will rebuke him." Therefore, she spoke.

Saṇṭhāneti nagaradvārassa āsanne manussānaṃ bhaṇḍakaṃ otāretvā vissamanaṭṭhāne.Saṅgammāti samāgantvā.Mantentīti kathenti.Mañca tañcāti mañca kathenti tañca kathenti.Kimantaranti kiṃ kāraṇaṃ?Bahū hi saddā paccūhāti bahukā ete lokasmiṃ paṭilomasaddā.Na tenāti tena kāraṇena, tena vā tapassinā na maṅku hotabbaṃ.Na hi tenāti na hi tena parehi vuttavacanena satto kilissati, attanā katena pana pāpakammeneva kilissatīti dasseti.Vātamigo yathāti yathā vane vātamigo vāteritānaṃ paṇṇādīnaṃ saddena paritassati, evaṃ yo saddaparittāsī hotīti attho.Nāssa sampajjate vatanti tassa lahucittassa vataṃ na sampajjati. Thero pana khīṇāsavattā sampannavatoti veditabbo. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Saṇṭhāne ti: in a place near the city gate where people unload their goods and rest. Saṅgammā ti: having gathered. Mantentī ti: they speak. Mañca tañcā ti: they speak of this and they speak of that. Kimantaraṃ ti: what is the reason? Bahū hi saddā paccūhā ti: indeed, many are these contrary sounds in the world. Na tenā ti: one should not be proud because of that reason, or because of that ascetic. Na hi tenā ti: for indeed, one is not defiled by the words spoken by others, but he is defiled only by the evil deed done by oneself, this he shows. Vātamigo yathā ti: just as a wind-deer in the forest trembles at the sound of leaves, etc., blown by the wind, so too, one who is terrified by sounds, this is the meaning. Nāssa sampajjate vataṃ ti: for that fickle-minded one, the practice is not accomplished. But the Elder should be understood as one whose practice is accomplished due to being a khīṇāsava. The eighth.

9. Vajjiputtasuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Vajjiputta Sutta

229.Navamevajjiputtakoti vajjiraṭṭhe rājaputto chattaṃ pahāya pabbajito.Sabbaratticāroti kattikanakkhattaṃ ghosetvā sakalanagaraṃ dhajapaṭākādīhi paṭimaṇḍetvā pavattito sabbaratticāro. Idañhi nakkhattaṃ yāva cātumahārājikehi ekābaddhaṃ hoti.Tūriyatāḷitavāditanigghosasaddanti bheriāditūriyānaṃ tāḷitānaṃ vīṇādīnañca vāditānaṃ nigghosasaddaṃ.Abhāsīti vesāliyaṃ kira satta rājasahassāni sattasatāni satta ca rājāno, tattakāva tesaṃ uparājasenāpatiādayo. Tesu alaṅkatapaṭiyattesu nakkhattakīḷanatthāya vīthiṃ otiṇṇesu saṭṭhihatthe mahācaṅkame caṅkamamāno nabhassa majjhe ṭhitaṃ candaṃ disvā caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ phalakaṃ nissāya ṭhito abhāsi.Apaviddhaṃvavanasmiṃ dārukanti vatthaveṭhanālaṅkārarahitattā vane chaḍḍitadārukaṃ viya jātaṃ.Pāpiyoti lāmakataro amhehi añño koci atthi.Pihayantīti thero āraññiko paṃsukūliko piṇḍapātiko sapadānacāriko appiccho santuṭṭhoti bahū tuyhaṃ patthayantīti attho.Saggagāminanti saggaṃ gacchantānaṃ gatānampi. Navamaṃ.

229. In the ninth, vajjiputtako ti: a prince in the Vajjian country, having renounced the umbrella [of royalty], went forth. Sabbaratticāro ti: having announced the Kattika festival, having decorated the entire city with flags, banners, etc., the all-night procession was started. For this festival is connected as one with the Four Great Kings. Tūriyatāḷitavāditanigghosasaddaṃ ti: the loud sound of drums and other instruments being beaten, and of lutes and other instruments being played. Abhāsī ti: it seems that in Vesālī there were seven thousand seven hundred and seven kings, and as many sub-kings, generals, etc. While they, adorned and dressed up, had gone out on the streets to play in the festival, [the Elder], walking on a great cloister sixty cubits long, having seen the moon standing in the middle of the sky, stood leaning against a plank at the end of the cloister and spoke. Apaviddhaṃva vanasmiṃ dārukaṃ ti: like a log of wood thrown away in the forest due to being devoid of clothing, wrapping, and adornment. Pāpiyo ti: who else is more wretched than us? Pihayantī ti: many desire for you that the Elder is a forest dweller, one who wears robes from a dust heap, one who lives on alms, one who wanders from place to place, one who is content, this is the meaning. Saggagāminaṃ ti: for those who go to heaven and for those who have gone. The ninth.

10. Sajjhāyasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Sajjhāya Sutta

230.Dasameyaṃ sudanti nipātamattaṃ.Sajjhāyabahuloti nissaraṇapariyattivasena sajjhāyanato bahutaraṃ kālaṃ sajjhāyanto. So kira ācariyassa divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā ācariyaṃ udikkhanto tiṭṭhati. Atha naṃ āgacchantaṃ disvāva paccuggantvā pattacīvaraṃ paṭiggahetvā paññattāsane nisinnassa tālavaṇṭavātaṃ datvā pānīyaṃ āpucchitvā pāde dhovitvā telaṃ makkhetvā vanditvā ṭhito uddesaṃ gahetvā yāva sūriyatthaṅgamā sajjhāyaṃ karoti. So nhānakoṭṭhake udakaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā aṅgārakapalle aggiṃ karoti. Ācariyassa nhatvā āgatassa pādesu udakaṃ puñchitvā piṭṭhiparikammaṃ katvā vanditvā uddesaṃ gahetvā paṭhamayāme sajjhāyaṃ katvā majjhimayāme sarīraṃ samassāsetvā pacchimayāme uddesaṃ gahetvā yāva aruṇuggamanā sajjhāyaṃ katvā niruddhasaddaṃ khayato sammasati. Tato sesaṃ upādāyarūpaṃ bhūtarūpaṃ nāmarūpanti pañcasu khandhesu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.Appossukkoti uddesaggahaṇe ca sajjhāyakaraṇīye ca nirussukko.Saṅkasāyatīti yassa dāni atthāya ahaṃ sajjhāyaṃ kareyyaṃ, so me attho matthakaṃ patto. Kiṃ me idāni sajjhāyenāti phalasamāpattisukhena kālaṃ ativatteti.Ajjhabhāsīti, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho assa therassa aphāsukaṃ jātaṃ, udāhussa ācariyassa? Kena nu kho kāraṇena pubbe viya madhurassarena na sajjhāyatī’’ti? Āgantvā santike ṭhitā abhāsi.

230. In the tenth, yaṃ sudaṃ ti: [this is] merely an expletive. Sajjhāyabahulo ti: reciting for a longer time than reciting in the sense of liberation. It seems that he sweeps the Teacher's daytime dwelling, stands looking up at the Teacher. Then, having seen him coming, having gone to meet him, having taken his bowl and robe, having given him a palm-leaf fan when he was seated on the prepared seat, having asked for drinking water, having washed his feet, having applied oil, having paid homage and having taken the lesson, he recites until sunset. He prepares water in the bathing chamber and makes a fire with charcoal. Having wiped the water on the Teacher's feet after he has bathed and returned, having massaged his back, having paid homage and having taken the lesson, he recites in the first watch of the night, rests his body in the middle watch, and having taken the lesson in the last watch, he recites until dawn, contemplating the cessation of the sound that has ceased. Then, developing insight into the remaining clinging-on-to matter, material matter, name-and-form, he attained arahantship in the five aggregates. Appossukko ti: without eagerness in taking the lesson and in doing the recitation. Saṅkasāyatī ti: now the purpose for which I would recite has reached its peak. What is the use of recitation for me now? he spends time enjoying the bliss of fruition attainment. Ajjhabhāsī ti: "What discomfort has arisen for the Elder, or for his Teacher? For what reason does he not recite with a sweet voice as before?" Having come and stood near, she spoke.

Dhammapadānīti idha sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ adhippetaṃ.Nādhīyasīti na sajjhāyasi. Nādiyasīti vā pāṭho, na gaṇhāsīti attho.Pasaṃsanti dhammabhāṇako pasaṃsaṃ labhati, ābhidhammiko suttantiko vinayadharotissa pasaṃsitā bhavanti.Virāgenāti ariyamaggena.Aññāyāti jānitvā.Nikkhepananti tassa diṭṭhasutādino vissajjanaṃ santo vadantīti dīpeti, na buddhavacanassa. Ettāvatā ‘‘thero buddhavacanaṃ na vissajjāpetī’’ti na niccakālaṃ sajjhāyanteneva bhavitabbaṃ, sajjhāyitvā pana – ‘‘ettakassāhaṃ atthassa vā dhammassa vā ādhāro bhavituṃ samattho’’ti ñatvā vaṭṭadukkhassa antakiriyāya paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Dasamaṃ.

Dhammapadānī ti: here, all the Buddha's words are intended. Nādhīyasī ti: you do not recite. Nādiyasīti is also a reading, the meaning is, you do not take [it]. Pasaṃsaṃ ti: the one who preaches the Dhamma obtains praise, the Abhidhamma expert, the Suttanta expert, the Vinaya expert, they become praised. Virāgenā ti: with the noble path. Aññāyā ti: having known. Nikkhepanaṃ ti: he indicates that those who are at peace speak of the abandonment of what is seen, heard, etc., not of the Buddha's words. To this extent, "the Elder does not abandon the Buddha's words," one should not merely recite all the time, but having recited, knowing "I am capable of being the basis for this much meaning or this much Dhamma," one should practice for the cessation of the round of suffering. The tenth.

11. Akusalavitakkasuttavaṇṇanā
11. Akusalavitakkasuttavaṇṇanā

231.Ekādasameakusale vitakketi kāmavitakkādayo tayo mahāvitakke.Ayoniso manasikārāti anupāyamanasikārena.Soti so tvaṃ.Ayoniso paṭinissajjāti etaṃ anupāyamanasikāraṃ vajjehi.Satthāranti imāya gāthāya pāsādikakammaṭṭhānaṃ katheti.Pītisukhamasaṃsayanti ekaṃseneva balavapītiñca sukhañca adhigamissasi. Ekādasamaṃ.

231. In the eleventh, akusale vitakke means the three great thoughts beginning with sensual thought (kāmavitakkā). Ayoniso manasikārā means by unwise attention. So means that you. Ayoniso paṭinissajjā means abandon that unwise attention. Satthāraṃ: in this verse, he speaks of a pleasing meditation subject. Pītisukhamasaṃsayaṃ: certainly you will attain strong joy and happiness. The eleventh is concluded.

12. Majjhanhikasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Majjhanhikasuttavaṇṇanā

232.Dvādasame yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ devatāsaṃyutte nandanavagge vuttameva. Dvādasamaṃ.

232. In the twelfth, what should be said has already been said in the Nandanavagga of the Devatāsaṃyutta. The twelfth is concluded.

13. Pākatindriyasuttavaṇṇanā
13. Pākatindriyasuttavaṇṇanā

233.Terasamaṃ devaputtasaṃyutte jantudevaputtasutte vitthāritameva. Terasamaṃ.

233. The thirteenth has already been explained in detail in the Jantudevaputtasutta of the Devaputtasaṃyutta. The thirteenth is concluded.

14. Gandhatthenasuttavaṇṇanā
14. Gandhatthenasuttavaṇṇanā

234.Cuddasameajjhabhāsīti taṃ bhikkhuṃ nāḷe gahetvā padumaṃ siṅghamānaṃ disvāva – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ araññaṃ paviṭṭho gandhārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyati, svāyaṃ ajja upasiṅghaṃ svepi punadivasepi upasiṅghissati, evamassa sā gandhataṇhā vaḍḍhitvā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ nāsessati, mā mayi passantiyā nassatu, codessāmi na’’nti upasaṅkamitvā abhāsi.

234. In the fourteenth, ajjhabhāsī means, having seen that monk holding a lotus stalk and smelling it, [the deity spoke], "This monk, having taken a meditation subject from the Teacher and having entered the forest to practice the monastic life, is contemplating a smell object. Tomorrow, he will smell again, and the day after tomorrow he will smell again. Thus, his craving for smell will grow and destroy his welfare in this life and the next. Let him not be destroyed while I am watching; I will rebuke him." Having approached, he spoke.

Ekaṅgametaṃtheyyānanti thenitabbānaṃ rūpārammaṇādīnaṃ pañcakoṭṭhāsānaṃ idaṃ ekaṅgaṃ, ekakoṭṭhāsoti attho.Na harāmīti na gahetvā gacchāmi.Ārāti dūre nāḷe gahetvā nāmetvā dūre ṭhito upasiṅghāmīti vadati.Vaṇṇenāti kāraṇena.

Ekaṅgametaṃ theyyānaṃ: this is one part of the five aggregates of sense objects (rūpārammaṇādīnaṃ) to be stolen; the meaning is one part. Na harāmīti: I am not taking and going away. Ārā: he says, "I am holding the stalk at a distance, bending it down, and smelling it from afar." Vaṇṇenā: by reason.

Yvāyanti yo ayaṃ. Tasmiṃ kira devatāya saddhiṃ kathenteyeva eko tāpaso otaritvā bhisakhananādīni kātuṃ āraddho, taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Ākiṇṇakammantoti evaṃ aparisuddhakammanto. Akhīṇakammantotipi pāṭho, kakkhaḷakammantoti attho.Na vuccatīti gandhacoroti vā pupphacoroti vā kasmā na vuccati.

Yvāyaṃ: that which. It is said that while he was talking with the deity, a hermit descended and started digging for medicine, etc., referring to him, he said this. Ākiṇṇakammanto: thus, with impure deeds. Akhīṇakammantopi is also a reading, meaning with rough deeds. Na vuccatī: why is he not called a smell thief or a flower thief?

Ākiṇṇaluddoti bahupāpo gāḷhapāpo vā, tasmā na vuccati.Dhāticelaṃva makkhitoti yathā dhātiyā nivatthakiliṭṭhavatthaṃ uccārapassāvapaṃsumasikaddamādīhi makkhitaṃ, evamevaṃ rāgadosādīhi makkhito.Arahāmi vattaveti arahāmi vattuṃ. Devatāya codanā kira sugatānusiṭṭhisadisā, na taṃ lāmakā hīnādhimuttikā micchāpaṭipannakapuggalā labhanti. Tasmiṃ pana attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ bhabbarūpā puggalā taṃ labhanti, tasmā evamāha.

Ākiṇṇaluddo: one with much evil or deeply evil; therefore, he is not called that. Dhāticelaṃva makkhito: just as a soiled cloth worn by a wet nurse is stained with excrement, urine, dust, soot, mud, etc., so too is he stained with greed, hatred, etc. Arahāmi vattave: I am able to say. The deity's rebuke is like the Sugata's instruction; base, mean-minded, wrongly practicing individuals do not obtain it. But in that existence, individuals fit for the paths and fruits obtain it; therefore, he says this.

Sucigavesinoti sucīni sīlasamādhiñāṇāni gavesantassa.Abbhāmattaṃ vāti valāhakakūṭamattaṃ viya.Jānāsīti suddho ayanti jānāsi.Vajjāsīti vadeyyāsi.Neva taṃ upajīvāmāti devatā kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu atthi me hitakāmā devatā, sā maṃ codessati sāressatīti pamādampi anuyuñjeyya, nāssa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchissāmī’’ti. Tasmā evamāha.Tvamevāti tvaṃyeva.Jāneyyāti jāneyyāsi.Yenāti yena kammena sugatiṃ gaccheyyāsi, taṃ kammaṃ tvaṃyeva jāneyyāsīti. Cuddasamaṃ.

Sucigavesino: for one seeking purity, i.e., morality, concentration, and wisdom. Abbhāmattaṃ vā: like a mass of clouds. Jānāsī: do you know if he is pure? Vajjāsī: you would say. Neva taṃ upajīvāmā: the deity thought, "This monk might indulge in negligence, thinking, 'There is a deity who desires my welfare; she will rebuke and remind me.' I will not accept his words." Therefore, he says this. Tvamevā: you yourself. Jāneyyā: you would know. Yenā: by which action you would go to a good destination; you yourself would know that action. The fourteenth is concluded.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus ends the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary on the Saṃyutta Nikāya,

10. Yakkhasaṃyuttaṃ

10. Yakkhasaṃyuttaṃ

1. Indakasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Indakasuttavaṇṇanā

235.Yakkhasaṃyuttassa paṭhameindakassāti indakūṭanivāsino yakkhassa. Yakkhato hi kūṭena, kūṭato ca yakkhena nāmaṃ laddhaṃ.Rūpaṃ na jīvanti vadantīti yadi buddhā rūpaṃ jīvanti na vadanti, yadi rūpaṃ satto puggaloti evaṃ na vadantīti attho.Kathaṃ nvayanti kathaṃ nu ayaṃ?Kutassa aṭṭhīyakapiṇḍametīti assa sattassa aṭṭhiyakapiṇḍañca kuto āgacchati? Ettha ca aṭṭhiggahaṇena tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni, yakapiṇḍaggahaṇena nava maṃsapesisatāni gahitāni. Yadi rūpaṃ na jīvo, athassa imāni ca aṭṭhīni imā ca maṃsapesiyo kuto āgacchantīti pucchati.Kathaṃ nvayaṃ sajjati gabbharasminti kena nu kāraṇena ayaṃ satto mātukucchismiṃ sajjati laggati, tiṭṭhatīti? Puggalavādī kiresa yakkho, ‘‘ekappahāreneva satto mātukucchismiṃ nibbattatī’’ti gahetvā gabbhaseyyakasattassa mātā macchamaṃsādīni khādati, sabbāni ekarattivāsena pacitvā pheṇaṃ viya vilīyanti. Yadi rūpaṃ satto na bhaveyya, evameva vilīyeyyāti laddhiyā evamāha. Athassa bhagavā – ‘‘na mātukucchismiṃ ekappahāreneva nibbattati, anupubbena pana vaḍḍhatī’’ti dassentopaṭhamaṃ kalalaṃ hotītiādimāha. Tatthapaṭhamanti paṭhamena paṭisandhiviññāṇena saddhiṃ tissoti vā phussoti vā nāmaṃ natthi, atha kho tīhi jātiuṇṇaṃsūhi katasuttagge saṇṭhitatelabinduppamāṇaṃ kalalaṃ hoti, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –

235. In the first of the Yakkhasaṃyutta, indakassāti: of the yakkha residing at Indakūṭa. He obtained the name from the yakkha and from the kūṭa. Rūpaṃ na jīvanti vadantīti: if the Buddhas do not say that form is living, if they do not say that form is a being or a person, this is the meaning. Kathaṃ nvayaṃti: how now is this? Kutassa aṭṭhīyakapiṇḍametīti: whence comes this being’s mass of bones and flesh? Here, by the mention of bones, three hundred bones are taken, and by the mention of flesh, nine hundred pieces of flesh are taken. If form is not living, then whence come these bones and these pieces of flesh? he asks. Kathaṃ nvayaṃ sajjati gabbharasmiṃti: by what cause does this being cling, stick, and remain in the mother's womb? It is said that this yakkha was a personalist (puggalavādī), taking it that "a being arises in the mother's womb with a single impact." The mother of a being dwelling in the womb eats fish, meat, etc.; all of it dissolves like foam after one night. If form were not a being, it would dissolve in the same way, with this view, he says this. Then the Blessed One, showing that "it does not arise in the mother's womb with a single impact, but grows gradually," said, starting with paṭhamaṃ kalalaṃ hotīti. There, paṭhamaṃti: with the first rebirth-consciousness, there is no name such as Tissa or Phussa; but rather, the kalala is the size of a drop of oil clinging to the tip of a thread made of three strands of Jāti flax, concerning which it was said:

‘‘Tilatelassa yathā bindu, sappimaṇḍo anāvilo;

‘‘Just as a drop of sesame oil, clear as the essence of ghee;
Similarly, the appearance of color is called kalala.’’

Kalalāhoti abbudanti tasmā kalalā sattāhaccayena maṃsadhovanaudakavaṇṇaṃ abbudaṃ nāma hoti, kalalanti nāmaṃ antaradhāyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Kalalā hoti abbudaṃti: after seven days from that kalala, it becomes an abbuda, the color of water used to wash meat, the name kalala disappears. This also was said:

‘‘Sattāhaṃ kalalaṃ hoti, paripakkaṃ samūhataṃ;

‘‘For a week it is kalala, fully ripe and congealed;
Developing from that state, it becomes known as abbuda.’’

Abbudājāyate pesīti tasmāpi abbudā sattāhaccayena vilīnatipusadisā pesi nāma sañjāyati. Sā maricaphāṇitena dīpetabbā. Gāmadārikā hi supakkāni maricāni gahetvā sāṭakante bhaṇḍikaṃ katvā pīḷetvā maṇḍaṃ ādāya kapāle pakkhipitvā ātape ṭhapenti, taṃ sukkhamānaṃ sabbabhāgehi muccati. Evarūpā pesi hoti, abbudanti nāmaṃ antaradhāyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Abbudā jāyate pesīti: after seven days from that abbuda, it becomes a pesī, like a crushed Tila-flower. It should be compared to maricaphāṇita. Village girls take ripe peppers, make a bundle in the corner of their sāṭaka, squeeze them, take the juice, put it in a potsherd, and place it in the sun; as it dries, it separates in all parts. Such is the pesī; the name abbuda disappears. This also was said:

‘‘Sattāhaṃ abbudaṃ hoti, paripakkaṃ samūhataṃ;

‘‘For a week it is abbuda, fully ripe and congealed;
Developing from that state, it becomes known as pesi.’’

Pesi nibbattatī ghanoti tato pesito sattāhaccayena kukkuṭaṇḍasaṇṭhāno ghano nāma maṃsapiṇḍo nibbattati, pesīti nāmaṃ antaradhāyati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Pesi nibbattatī ghanoti: after seven days from that pesī, a mass of flesh called ghana, shaped like a hen's egg, arises; the name pesī disappears. This also was said:

‘‘Sattāhaṃ pesi bhavati, paripakkaṃ samūhataṃ;

‘‘For a week it is pesi, fully ripe and congealed;
Developing from that state, it becomes known as ghana.

‘‘Yathā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍaṃ, samantā parimaṇḍalaṃ;

‘‘Just as the egg of a hen is perfectly round on all sides;
Similarly, the shape of the ghana is produced by the force of karma.’’

Ghanā pasākhā jāyantīti pañcame sattāhe dvinnaṃ hatthapādānaṃ sīsassa catthāya pañca pīḷakā jāyanti, yaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcame, bhikkhave, sattāhe pañca pīḷakā saṇṭhahanti kammato’’ti.

Ghanā pasākhā jāyantīti: in the fifth week, five buds appear for the two hands, two feet, and the head, concerning which it was said, "In the fifth week, O monks, five buds arise due to karma."

kesātiādimāha. Tatthakesā lomā nakhāpi cāti dvācattālīse sattāhe etāni jāyanti.

kesātiādimāha: starting with kesā lomā nakhāpi cā, these arise in the forty-second week.

Tena so tattha yāpetīti tassa hi nābhito uṭṭhito nāḷo mātu udarapaṭalena ekābaddho hoti, so uppaladaṇḍako viya chiddo, tena āhāraraso saṃsaritvā āhārasamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ so dasa māse yāpeti.Mātukucchigato naroti mātuyā tirokucchigato, kucchiyā abbhantaragatoti attho. Iti bhagavā ‘‘evaṃ kho, yakkha, ayaṃ satto anupubbena mātukucchiyaṃ vaḍḍhati, na ekappahāreneva nibbattatī’’ti dasseti. Paṭhamaṃ.

Tena so tattha yāpetīti: for the stalk rising from his navel is bound together with the mother's abdominal wall; it is hollow like a lotus stalk, and through it, the juice of food circulates, producing nutriment-originated form. Thus, he maintains himself for ten months. Mātukucchigato naro: gone to the mother's side, meaning gone inside the womb. Thus, the Blessed One shows, "Thus, O yakkha, this being grows gradually in the mother's womb, it does not arise with a single impact." The first is concluded.

2. Sakkanāmasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Sakkanāmasuttavaṇṇanā

236.Dutiyesakkanāmakoti evaṃ nāmako eko yakkho, so kira mārapakkhikayakkho.Vippamuttassāti tīhi bhavehi vippamuttassa.Yadaññanti yaṃ aññaṃ.Vaṇṇenāti kāraṇena.Saṃvāsoti ekato vāso, sakkhidhammo mittadhammoti attho.Sappaññoti supañño sambuddho. Dutiyaṃ.

236. In the second, sakkanāmakoti: a yakkha named Sakka; it is said that he was a yakkha on Māra's side. Vippamuttassāti: of one freed from the three existences. Yadaññanti: whatever else. Vaṇṇenā: by reason. Saṃvāso: living together, the friendship of an ally, the friendship of a friend, is the meaning. Sappañño: supremely wise, a Buddha. The second is concluded.

3. Sūcilomasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Sūcilomasuttavaṇṇanā

237.Tatiyegayāyanti gayāgāme, gayāya avidūre niviṭṭhagāmaṃ upanissāyāti attho.Ṭaṅkitamañceti dīghamañce pādamajjhe vijjhitvā aṭaniyo pavesetvā katamañce. Tassa ‘‘idaṃ upari, idaṃ heṭṭhā’’ti natthi, parivattetvā atthatopi tādisova hoti, taṃ devaṭṭhāne ṭhapenti. Catunnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ upari pāsāṇaṃ attharitvā katagehampi ‘‘ṭaṅkitamañco’’ti vuccati.Sūcilomassāti kathinasūcisadisalomassa. So kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane pabbajitvā dūraṭṭhānato āgato sedamalaggahitena gattena supaññattaṃ saṅghikamañcaṃ anādarena apaccattharitvā nipajji, tassa parisuddhasīlassa taṃ kammaṃ suddhavatthe kāḷakaṃ viya ahosi. So tasmiṃ attabhāve visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkonto kālaṃkatvā gayāgāmadvāre saṅkāraṭṭhāne yakkho hutvā nibbatti. Nibbattamattasseva cassa sakalasarīraṃ kathinasūcīhi gavicchivijjhitaṃ viya jātaṃ.

237. In the third, gayāyanti: in Gayā village, relying on a village situated not far from Gayā, is the meaning. Ṭaṅkitamañce: on a long bench, having drilled a hole in the middle of the legs and inserted pegs to make the bench. It has no "this is up, this is down"; even if turned over, it is the same, it is placed in a shrine. A house made by spreading a stone on top of four stones is also called a "ṭaṅkitamañca." Sūcilomassā: having hairs like sharp needles. It is said that he, having gone forth in the dispensation of Kassapa Buddha, came from a distant place, and carelessly lay down on a Saṅgha bench that was well-prepared, with his body covered in sweat and dirt; that action of his, with pure morality, was like a stain on a clean cloth. Unable to produce distinction in that existence, he died and was reborn as a yakkha in a charnel ground at the gate of Gayā village. As soon as he was born, his whole body became like being pierced with sharp needles.

Athekadivasaṃ bhagavā paccūsasamaye lokaṃ olokento taṃ yakkhaṃ paṭhamāvajjanasseva āpāthaṃ āgataṃ disvā – ‘‘ayaṃ ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavi. Kiṃ nu khvāssa maṃ āgamma sotthikāraṇaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti? Āvajjento paṭhamamaggassa upanissayaṃ addasa. Athassa saṅgahaṃ kātukāmo surattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā sugatamahācīvaraṃ pārupitvā devavimānakappaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pahāya hatthigavāssamanussakukkurādikuṇapaduggandhaṃ saṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃ viya nisīdi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sūcilomassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.

Then one day, the Blessed One, looking at the world at dawn, saw that yakkha coming into range at the very first attention, [and thought,] "This one will experience great suffering for a whole Buddha-interval. What could bring about his welfare by coming to me?" Considering, he saw the supporting condition for the first path. Then, wishing to help him, having put on a red upper robe, having draped the great robe of a Sugata, having left the perfumed chamber resembling a deva-mansion, he went to the charnel ground with the foul smell of elephants, cows, horses, humans, dogs, and other corpses, and sat there as if in a great perfumed chamber. Concerning that, it was said, "in the dwelling of the yakkha Sūciloma."

Kharoti suṃsumārapiṭṭhi viya chadaniṭṭhakāhi visamacchadanapiṭṭhi viya ca kharasarīro. So kira kassapasammāsambuddhakāle sīlasampanno upāsako ekadivase vihāre cittattharaṇādīhi atthatāya bhūmiyā saṅghike attharaṇe attano uttarāsaṅgaṃ apaccattharitvā nipajji. Saṅghikaṃ telaṃ abhājetvā attano uttarāsaṅgaṃ apaccattharitvā nipajji. Saṅghikaṃ telaṃ abhājetvā attano hatthehi sarīraṃ makkhesītipi vadanti. So tena kammena sagge nibbattituṃ asakkonto tasseva gāmassa dvāre saṅkāraṭṭhāne yakkho hutvā nibbatti. Nibbattamattassa cassa sakalasarīraṃ vuttappakāraṃ ahosi. Te ubhopi sahāyā jātā. Iti kharassa kharabhāvo veditabbo.

Kharoti: having a rough body like the back of a crocodile, or like a roof with uneven bricks. It is said that in the time of Kassapa, the Perfectly Enlightened Buddha, he was a lay follower endowed with morality who, one day in a monastery, in order to spread out the ground with various coverings, carelessly lay down on the Saṅgha's covering with his upper robe. He did not share the Saṅgha's oil and carelessly smeared his body with his own hands. It is also said that he did not share the Saṅgha's oil and lay down covering himself with his own upper robe. By that action, being unable to be reborn in heaven, he was reborn as a yakkha in a charnel ground at the gate of that same village. As soon as he was born, his whole body became as described above. Both of them became friends. Thus, the roughness of Khara should be understood.

Avidūre atikkamantīti gocaraṃ pariyesantā samāgamaṭṭhānaṃ vā gacchantā āsanne ṭhāne gacchanti. Tesu sūcilomo satthāraṃ na passati, kharalomo paṭhamataraṃ disvā sūcilomaṃ yakkhaṃ etadavoca –‘‘eso samaṇo’’ti, samma, esa tava bhavanaṃ pavisitvā nisinno eko samaṇoti.Neso samaṇo, samaṇako esoti so kira yo maṃ passitvā bhīto palāyati, taṃ samaṇakoti vadati. Yo na bhāyati, taṃ samaṇoti. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ maṃ disvā bhīto palāyissatī’’ti maññamāno evamāha.

Avidūre atikkamantīti: while wandering for alms or going to a meeting place, they go to a nearby place. Among them, Sūciloma does not see the Teacher; Kharaloma, seeing him first, said this to the yakkha Sūciloma: ‘‘eso samaṇo’’ti: friend, this is a samaṇa who has entered your dwelling and is sitting. Neso samaṇo, samaṇako esoti: he calls one who sees him and flees in fear a samaṇa. He calls one who is not afraid a samaṇa. Therefore, thinking, "This one will see me and flee in fear," he says this.

Kāyaṃ upanāmesīti bheravarūpaṃ nimminitvā mahāmukhaṃ vivaritvā sakalasarīre lomāni uṭṭhāpetvā kāyaṃ upanāmesi.Apanāmesīti ratanasatikaṃ suvaṇṇagghanikaṃ viya thokaṃ apanāmesi.Pāpakoti lāmako amanuñño. So gūthaṃ viya aggi viya kaṇhasappo viya ca parivajjetabbo, na iminā suvaṇṇavaṇṇena sarīrena sampaṭicchitabbo. Evaṃ vutte pana sūcilomo ‘‘pāpako kira me samphasso’’ti kuddhopañhaṃ taṃ, samaṇātiādimāha.Cittaṃ vā te khipissāmīti yesañhi amanussā cittaṃ khipitukāmā honti, tesaṃ setamukhaṃ nīlodaraṃ surattahatthapādaṃ mahāsīsaṃ pajjalitanettaṃ bheravaṃ vā attabhāvaṃ nimminitvā dassenti, bheravaṃ vā saddaṃ sāventi, kathentānaṃyeva vā mukhe hatthaṃ pakkhipitvā hadayaṃ maddanti, tena te sattā ummattakā honti khittacittā. Taṃ sandhāyevamāha.Pāragaṅgāyāti dvīsu pādesu gahetvā taṃ āviñchetvā yathā na punāgacchasi, evaṃ pāraṃ vā gaṅgāya khipissāmīti vadati.Sadevaketiādi vuttatthameva.Puccha yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃkiñci ākaṅkhasi, taṃ sabbaṃ puccha, asesaṃ te byākarissāmīti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāreti.

Kāyaṃ upanāmesī means having created a terrifying form, opened a huge mouth, raised the hairs on the entire body, he drew near with his body. Apanāmesī means he drew back a little, like a jeweled necklace worth a hundred or a golden ornament. Pāpako means base, unpleasant. It should be avoided like filth, like fire, like a black snake; it should not be welcomed with this golden-colored body. When this was said, Sūciloma, angered that "my touch is base," spoke beginning with pañhaṃ taṃ, samaṇā. Cittaṃ vā te khipissāmī means, for those non-humans who wish to derange the mind, they create and show a terrifying form with a white face, blue belly, bright red hands and feet, a huge head, and blazing eyes, or they make a terrifying sound, or they put their hands in the mouths of those speaking and crush their hearts, by which those beings become mad, with deranged minds. Referring to that, he said this. Pāragaṅgāyā means having seized you by both feet and shaken you out so that you would not return again, I will throw you to the other side of the Ganges. Sadevake etc., the meaning has already been stated. Puccha yadākaṅkhasī means ask whatever you desire; I will explain everything to you completely, thus he extends the invitation to omniscience.

Kutonidānāti kiṃnidānā, kiṃpaccayāti attho?Kumārakā dhaṅkamivossajantīti yathā kumārakā kākaṃ gahetvā ossajanti khipanti, evaṃ pāpavitakkā kuto samuṭṭhāya cittaṃ ossajantīti pucchati?

Kutonidānā means what is the cause, what is the condition? Kumārakā dhaṅkamivossajantī means how, having arisen from where, do evil thoughts fling the mind away, just as boys seize a crow and release it, throwing it away?

Itonidānāti ayaṃ attabhāvo nidānaṃ etesanti ito nidānā.Itojāti ito attabhāvato jātā.Ito samuṭṭhāya manovitakkāti yathā dīghasuttakena pāde baddhaṃ kākaṃ kumārakā tassa suttapariyantaṃ aṅguliyaṃ veṭhetvā ossajanti, so dūraṃ gantvāpi puna tesaṃ pādamūleyeva patati, evameva ito attabhāvato samuṭṭhāya pāpavitakkā cittaṃ ossajanti.

Itonidānā means this self is the cause of these, therefore from here is the cause. Itojā means born from this self. Ito samuṭṭhāya manovitakkā means just as boys, having tied a crow by the foot with a long string, wind the end of that string on their finger and throw it away, and even though it goes far, it falls again at the base of their feet, just so, having arisen from this self, evil thoughts fling the mind away.

Snehajāti taṇhāsinehato jātā.Attasambhūtāti attani sambhūtā.Nigrodhasseva khandhajāti nigrodhakhandhe jātā pārohā viya.Puthūti bahū anekappakārā pāpavitakkā taṃsampayuttakilesā ca.Visattāti laggā laggitā.Kāmesūti vatthukāmesu.Māluvāva vitatā vaneti yathā vane māluvā latā yaṃ rukkhaṃ nissāya jāyati, taṃ mūlato yāva aggā, aggato yāva mūlā punappunaṃ saṃsibbitvā ajjhottharitvā otatavitatā tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ vatthukāmesu puthū kilesakāmā visattā, puthū vā sattā tehi kilesakāmehi vatthukāmesu visattā.Ye naṃ pajānantīti ye ‘‘attasambhūtā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ attabhāvaṃ jānanti.

Snehajā means born from the affection of craving. Attasambhūtā means originated in the self. Nigrodhasseva khandhajā means like shoots born from the trunk of a banyan tree. Puthū means numerous, of many kinds, evil thoughts and associated defilements. Visattā means clinging, attached. Kāmesū means in sense objects. Māluvāva vitatā vane means just as in a forest, a māluvā creeper, relying on whatever tree it grows upon, entangling and covering it again and again from root to tip and from tip to root, stands spread out and extended. So too, numerous defilements are clinging to sense objects, or numerous beings are clinging to sense objects with those defilements. Ye naṃ pajānantī means those who know the self mentioned in "attasambhūtā".

Yatonidānanti yaṃ nidānamassa attabhāvassa tañca jānanti.Te naṃ vinodentīti te evaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātassa dukkhasaccassa nidānabhūtaṃ samudayasaccaṃ maggasaccena vinodenti.Te duttaranti te samudayasaccaṃ nīharantā idaṃ duttaraṃ kilesoghaṃ taranti.Atiṇṇapubbanti anamatagge saṃsāre supinantepi na tiṇṇapubbaṃ.Apunabbhavāyāti apunabbhavasaṅkhātassa nirodhasaccassatthāya. Iti imāya gāthāya cattāri saccāni pakāsento arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Desanāvasāne sūcilomo tasmiṃyeva padese ṭhito desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhito. Sotāpannā ca nāma na kiliṭṭhattabhāve tiṭṭhantīti saha phalapaṭilābhenassa sarīre setakaṇḍupīḷakasūciyo sabbā patitā. So dibbavatthanivattho dibbavaradukūluttarāsaṅgo dibbaveṭhanaveṭhito dibbābharaṇagandhamāladharo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo hutvā bhummadevatāparihāraṃ paṭilabhīti. Tatiyaṃ.

Yatonidāna means they also know what is the cause of that self. Te naṃ vinodentī means they, thus eliminating the arising-truth which is the cause of the suffering-truth known as the self, eliminate it with the path-truth. Te duttara means they, removing the arising-truth, cross over this difficult-to-cross flood of defilements. Atiṇṇapubba means never crossed before, even in a dream, in beginningless saṃsāra. Apunabbhavāyā means for the sake of the cessation-truth known as non-rebirth. Thus, in this verse, revealing the four truths, he concluded the teaching with the pinnacle of arahantship. At the end of the teaching, Sūciloma, standing in that very place, directing his knowledge according to the teaching, was established in the fruit of stream-entry. And those who are stream-enterers do not remain in a defiled state, so with the attainment of the fruit, all the needles of white pustules on his body fell off. Clothed in divine garments, with a fine divine upper cloth and robe, wrapped in a divine wrapping, wearing divine ornaments, perfumes, and garlands, he became golden in color and attained the retinue of a earth-deity. The third.

4. Maṇibhaddasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Maṇibhaddasutta Commentary

238.Catutthesukhamedhatīti, sukhaṃ paṭilabhati.Suve seyyoti suve suve seyyo, niccameva seyyoti attho.Verā na parimuccatīti ahaṃ satimāti ettakena verato na muccati.Yassāti yassa arahato.Ahiṃsāyāti karuṇāya ceva karuṇāpubbabhāge ca.Mettaṃsoti so mettañceva mettāpubbabhāgañca bhāveti. Atha vāaṃsoti koṭṭhāso vuccati. Mettā aṃso etassāti mettaṃso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yassa arahato sabbakālaṃ ahiṃsāya rato mano, yassa ca sabbabhūtesu mettākoṭṭhāso atthi, tassa kenaci puggalena saddhiṃ veraṃ nāma natthi yakkhāti. Catutthaṃ.

238.In the fourth, sukhamedhatī means he obtains happiness. Suve seyyo means tomorrow, tomorrow is better, it is always better. Verā na parimuccatī means he is not freed from enmity by merely being mindful. Yassā means of which, of which arahat. Ahiṃsāyā means both by compassion and by the preliminary stages of compassion. Mettaṃso means he develops both loving-kindness and the preliminary stages of loving-kindness. Or alternatively, aṃso means a portion. Mettā is a portion of him, therefore mettaṃso. This is what is said: there is no enmity with any person for that arahat whose mind is always delighted in non-harming, and who has a portion of loving-kindness towards all beings, O Yaksha. The fourth.

5. Sānusuttavaṇṇanā
5. Sānusutta Commentary

239.Pañcameyakkhena gahito hotīti so kira tassā upāsikāya ekaputtako. Atha naṃ sā daharakāleyeva pabbājesi. So pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya sīlavā ahosi vattasampanno, ācariyupajjhāyaāgantukādīnaṃ vattaṃ katameva hoti, māsassa aṭṭhamīdivase pāto vuṭṭhāya udakamāḷake udakaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā dhammassavanaggaṃ sammajjitvā dīpaṃ jāletvā madhurassarena dhammassavanaṃ ghoseti. Bhikkhū tassa thāmaṃ ñatvā ‘‘sarabhāṇaṃ bhaṇa, sāmaṇerā’’ti ajjhesanti. So ‘‘mayhaṃ hadayavāto rujati, kāso vā bādhatī’’ti kiñci paccāhāraṃ akatvā dhammāsanaṃ abhiruhitvā ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya sarabhāṇaṃ vatvā otaranto – ‘‘mayhaṃ mātāpitūnampi imasmiṃ sarabhaññe pattī’’ti vadati. Tassa manussā mātāpitaro pattiyā dinnabhāvaṃ na jānanti. Anantarattabhāve panassa mātā yakkhinī jātā. Sā devatāhi saddhiṃ āgatā, dhammaṃ sutvā – ‘‘sāmaṇerena dinnapattiṃ anumodāmi, tātā’’ti vadati. Sīlasampannā ca nāma bhikkhū sadevakassa lokassa piyā hontīti tasmiṃ sāmaṇere devatā salajjā sagāravā mahābrahmaṃ viya aggikkhandhaṃ viya ca naṃ maññanti. Sāmaṇere gāravena taṃ yakkhiniṃ garuṃ katvā passanti. Dhammassavanayakkhasamāgamādīsu ‘‘sānumātā sānumātā’’ti yakkhiniyā aggāsanaṃ aggodakaṃ aggapiṇḍaṃ denti. Mahesakkhāpi yakkhā taṃ disvā maggā okkamanti, āsanā vuṭṭhahanti.

239.In the fifth, yakkhena gahito hotī means it is said that he was the only son of that female lay follower. Then she ordained him when he was just a young boy. From the time he was ordained, he was virtuous and accomplished in duties. He would perform the duties for teachers, preceptors, and guests, etc. On the eighth day of the month, he would get up early in the morning, prepare water in the water pavilion, sweep the hall for hearing the Dhamma, light a lamp, and announce the hearing of the Dhamma in a sweet voice. Knowing his strength, the monks would request him, "Recite the sarabhañña, novice." Without making any excuse, such as, "My heart wind hurts, or a cough is bothering me," he would ascend the Dhamma seat, and reciting the sarabhañña as if descending the River of the Sky, he would descend, saying, "May my parents also have a share in this recitation." People did not know that his parents had been given a share in the offering. In his immediately previous existence, his mother had been born as a yakkhinī. Having come with the deities, and hearing the Dhamma, she said, "I rejoice in the offering given by the novice, son." For monks accomplished in virtue are dear to the world with its deities, so deities respectfully and reverently regard that novice like Mahābrahmā and like a mass of fire. Out of respect for the novice, they honor that yakkhinī. In gatherings for hearing the Dhamma, meetings with yakkhas, etc., they give the yakkhinī the chief seat, the chief water, and the chief alms-food, saying, "Sānu's mother, Sānu's mother." Even mighty yakkhas, seeing her, would step aside from the path and rise from their seats.

Atha kho sāmaṇero vuḍḍhimanvāya paripakkindriyo anabhiratipīḷito anabhiratiṃ vinodetuṃ asakkonto parūḷhakesanakho kiliṭṭhanivāsanapārupano kassaci anārocetvā pattacīvaramādāya ekakova mātu gharaṃ gato. Upāsikā puttaṃ disvā, vanditvā āha – ‘‘tāta, tvaṃ pubbe ācariyupajjhāyehi vā daharasāmaṇerehi vā saddhiṃ idhāgacchasi. Kasmā ekakova ajja āgato’’ti? So ukkaṇṭhitabhāvaṃ ārocesi. Saddhā upāsikā nānappakārena gharāvāse ādīnavaṃ dassetvā puttaṃ ovadamānāpi taṃ saññāpetuṃ asakkontī, ‘‘appeva nāma attano dhammatāyapi sallakkhessatī’’ti anuyojetvāva – ‘‘tiṭṭha, tāta, yāva te yāgubhattaṃ sampādemi, yāguṃ pivitvā katabhattakiccassa te manāpāni vatthāni nīharitvā dassāmī’’ti vatvā āsanaṃ paññāpetvā adāsi. Nisīdi sāmaṇero. Upāsikā muhutteneva yāgukhajjakaṃ sampādetvā adāsi. Tato ‘‘bhattaṃ sampādessāmī’’ti avidūre nisinnā taṇḍule dhovati. Tasmiṃ samaye sā yakkhinī ‘‘kahaṃ nu kho sāmaṇero? Kiñci bhikkhāhāraṃ labhati, udāhu no’’ti? Āvajjamānā tassa vibbhamitukāmatāya nisinnabhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘mā heva kho me devatānaṃ antare lajjaṃ uppādeyya, gacchāmissa vibbhamane antarāyaṃ karomī’’ti āgantvā sarīre adhimuccitvā gīvaṃ parivattetvā bhūmiyaṃ pātesi. So akkhīhi viparivattehi kheḷena paggharantena bhūmiyaṃ vipphandati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yakkhena gahito hotī’’ti.

Then the novice, having grown up, with matured faculties, afflicted by discontent, and unable to dispel the discontent, with overgrown hair and nails, and wearing soiled robes, without telling anyone, taking his bowl and robes, alone went to his mother's house. Seeing her son, the female lay follower, having paid homage, said, "Son, you used to come here with your teachers, preceptors, or young novices. Why have you come alone today?" He revealed his state of longing. Although the faithful female lay follower showed him the dangers in many ways of household life and admonished her son, being unable to convince him, thinking, "Perhaps he will consider his own nature," she asked him only after urging him, "Stay here, son, until I prepare rice-gruel for you. After you drink the rice-gruel and finish your meal, I will take out and show you clothes that you like." Having said this, she prepared a seat and gave it to him. The novice sat down. In a moment, the female lay follower prepared rice-gruel and hard food and gave it to him. Then, thinking, "I will prepare rice," she sat not far away and washed the rice grains. At that time, the yakkhinī, wondering, "Where is the novice? Will he get any alms-food, or not?" Knowing that he was sitting there intending to become corrupted, thinking, "Lest he cause me to be embarrassed among the deities, I will go and create an obstacle to his corruption," she came, possessed his body, twisted his neck, and threw him to the ground. With his eyes rolled back and saliva drooling, he writhed on the ground. Therefore it was said, "yakkhena gahito hotī".

Abhāsīti upāsikā puttassa taṃ vippakāraṃ disvā vegena gantvā puttaṃ āliṅgetvā ūrūsu nipajjāpesi. Sakalagāmavāsino āgantvā balikammādīni karonti. Upāsikā paridevamānā imā gāthāyo abhāsi.

Abhāsī means seeing her son's misfortune, the female lay follower quickly went, embraced her son, and laid him on her lap. All the villagers came and performed rites of offering. Wailing, the female lay follower spoke these verses.

Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti manussā ‘‘aṭṭhamīuposathassa paccuggamanañca anuggamanañca karissāmā’’ti sattamiyāpi navamiyāpi uposathaṅgāni samādiyanti, cātuddasīpannarasīnaṃ paccuggamanānuggamanaṃ karontā terasiyāpi pāṭipadepi samādiyanti, ‘‘vassāvāsassa anuggamanaṃ karissāmā’’ti dvinnaṃ pavāraṇānaṃ antare aḍḍhamāsaṃ nibaddhuposathikā bhavanti. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṭihāriyapakkhañcā’’ti.Aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgatanti aṭṭhaṅgehi suṭṭhu samāgataṃ, sampayuttanti attho.Brahmacariyanti seṭṭhacariyaṃ.Na te hi yakkhā kīḷantīti na te gahetvā yakkhā kilamenti.

Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcā means people undertake the precepts on the seventh day and the ninth day, thinking, "We will observe and follow the eighth-day uposatha," and observing and following the fourteenth and fifteenth days, they undertake them even on the thirteenth day and the first day of the lunar cycle, thinking, "We will follow the rains retreat," they observe the uposatha continuously for half a month between the two pavāraṇā ceremonies. Referring to this, it was said "pāṭihāriyapakkhañcā". Aṭṭhaṅgasusamāgata means well endowed with eight factors, associated with eight factors. Brahmacariya means the best conduct. Na te hi yakkhā kīḷantī means yakkhas do not seize and harass them.

cātuddasinti imāya gāthāya sāmaṇerassa kāye adhimuttā yakkhinī āha.Āvi vā yadi vā rahoti kassaci sammukhe vā parammukhe vā.Pamutyatthīti pamutti atthi.Uppaccāpīti uppatitvāpi. Sacepi sakuṇo viya uppatitvā palāyasi, tathāpi te mokkho natthīti vadati. Evañca pana vatvā sāmaṇeraṃ muñci. Sāmaṇero akkhīni ummīlesi, mātā kese pakiriya assasantī passasantī rodati. So ‘‘amanussena gahitomhī’’ti na jānāti. Olokento pana ‘‘ahaṃ pubbe pīṭhe nisinno. Mātā me avidūre nisīditvā taṇḍule dhovati. Idāni panamhi bhūmiyaṃ nisinno, mātāpi me assasantī passasantī rodati, sakalagāmavāsinopi sannipatitā. Kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti? Nipannakovamataṃ vā ammāti gāthamāha.

cātuddasi In this verse, the yakkhinī who had possessed the novice spoke. Āvi vā yadi vā raho means whether in front of someone or behind someone. Pamutyatthī means there is release. Uppaccāpī means even having flown away. She says, even if you fly away like a bird, there is no escape for you. Having spoken thus, she released the novice. The novice opened his eyes; his mother, with her hair disheveled, crying and breathing heavily, weeps. He does not know that "I have been seized by a non-human." But looking around, "I was previously sitting on a seat. My mother was sitting not far away washing rice grains. Now, however, I am sitting on the ground, and my mother is weeping, breathing heavily, and all the villagers have gathered. What could this be?" Remaining lying down, he spoke the verse mataṃ vā ammā.

Kāmecajitvānāti duvidhepi kāme pahāya.Punarāgacchateti vibbhamanavasena āgacchati.Puna jīvaṃ mato hi soti uppabbajitvā puna jīvantopi so matakova, tasmā tampi rodantīti vadati.

Kāmecajitvānā means having abandoned both kinds of sense pleasures. Punarāgacchate means he comes again due to corruption. Puna jīvaṃ mato hi so means even living again after disrobing, he is just as good as dead, therefore they weep for him, she says.

kukkuḷātiādimāha. Tatthakukkuḷāti gharāvāso kira uṇhaṭṭhena kukkuḷā nāma hoti.Kassa ujjhāpayāmaseti – ‘‘abhidhāvatha, bhaddaṃ te hotū’’ti evaṃ vatvā – ‘‘yaṃ tvaṃ vibbhamitukāmo yakkhena pāpito, imaṃ vippakāraṃ kassa mayaṃ ujjhāpayāma nijjhāpayāma ārocayāmā’’ti vadati.Puna ḍayhitumicchasītiādittagharato nīhaṭabhaṇḍaṃ viya gharā nīharitvā buddhasāsane pabbajito puna mahāḍāhasadise gharāvāse ḍayhituṃ icchasīti attho. So mātari kathentiyā kathentiyā sallakkhetvā hirottappaṃ paṭilabhitvā, ‘‘natthi mayhaṃ gihibhāvena attho’’ti āha. Athassa mātā ‘‘sādhu, tātā’’ti tuṭṭhā paṇītabhojanaṃ bhojetvā, ‘‘kati vassosi, tātā’’ti pucchi. Paripuṇṇavassomhi upāsiketi. ‘‘Tena hi, tāta, upasampadaṃ karohī’’ti cīvarasāṭake adāsi. So ticīvaraṃ kārāpetvā upasampanno buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhanto tepiṭako hutvā sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhāne taṃ taṃ pūrento nacirasseva arahattaṃ patvā mahādhammakathiko hutvā vīsavassasataṃ ṭhatvā sakalajambudīpaṃ khobhetvā parinibbāyi. Pañcamaṃ.

kukkuḷā etc., he said. Therein, kukkuḷā means the household life is called kukkuḷā because of its heated state. Kassa ujjhāpayāmase means, having said, "Run, may good be upon you," she says, "to whom shall we express, explain, or announce this misfortune to which you have been brought by a yakkha because you desired corruption?" Puna ḍayhitumicchasī means do you wish to burn again in the household life, which is like a great fire, after being brought out from the house like goods removed from a burning house and ordained in the Buddha's dispensation? While his mother was speaking, having considered the matter and regained a sense of shame and fear of wrongdoing, he said, "I have no need for the householder life." Then his mother, pleased, said, "Good, son," and having fed him delicious food, she asked, "How old are you, son?" "I am of full age, female lay follower." "Then, son, receive the higher ordination," and she gave him cloths for robes. Having had the three robes made, having received the higher ordination, learning the Buddha's word, becoming a tipiṭaka, fulfilling each of the trainings of virtue etc. in their respective places, he soon attained arahatship, became a great Dhamma speaker, lived for one hundred and twenty years, shook the entire Jambudīpa, and passed away. The fifth.

6. Piyaṅkarasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Piyaṅkarasutta Commentary

240.Chaṭṭhejetavaneti jetavanassa paccante kosambakakuṭi nāma atthi, tattha viharati.Dhammapadānīti idha pāṭiyekkaṃ saṅgahaṃ āruḷhā chabbīsativaggā tanti adhippetā. Tatra thero tasmiṃ samaye antovihāre nisinno madhurassarena sarabhaññaṃ katvā appamādavaggaṃ bhāsati.Evaṃ tosesīti sā kira puttaṃ piyaṅkaraṃ aṅkenādāya jetavanassa pacchimabhāgato paṭṭhāya gocaraṃ pariyesantī anupubbena nagarābhimukhī hutvā uccārapassāvakheḷasiṅghāṇikadubbhojanāni pariyesamānā therassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ patvā madhurassaraṃ assosi. Tassā so saddo chaviādīni chetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca hadayaṅgamanīyo hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Athassā gocarapariyesane cittampi na uppajji, ohitasotā dhammameva suṇantī ṭhitā. Yakkhadārakassa pana daharatāya dhammassavane cittaṃ natthi. So jighacchāya pīḷitattā, ‘‘kasmā ammā gatagataṭṭhāne khāṇuko viya tiṭṭhasi? Na mayhaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā pariyesasī’’ti punappunaṃ mātaraṃ codeti. Sā ‘‘dhammassavanassa me antarāyaṃ karotī’’ti puttakaṃ ‘‘mā saddaṃ kari, piyaṅkarā’’ti evaṃ tosesi. Tatthamā saddaṃ karīti saddaṃ mā kari.

240.In the sixth, jetavane means there is a Kosambakakuṭi at the edge of Jetavana, there he dwells. Dhammapadānī means here the twenty-six chapters arranged separately, that collection is intended. There, at that time, the Elder, sitting inside the dwelling, reciting in a sweet voice, speaks the Appamādavagga. Evaṃ tosesī means it is said that she, having taken her son Piyaṅkara in her lap, starting from the western part of Jetavana, searching for food, gradually turning towards the city, looking for ejected food, urine, excrement, phlegm, and snot, having arrived at the Elder's dwelling, heard a sweet voice. That sound, cutting through the skin etc., striking the bone marrow, became very pleasing and heart-touching. Then the thought of searching for food did not even arise in her mind; with her ears attentive, she stood listening to the Dhamma. But the yakkha's child, being young, had no mind for hearing the Dhamma. Afflicted by hunger, he repeatedly urged his mother, "Why do you stand like a stump in every place we go? Are you not searching for something to eat or consume for me?" Thinking, "He is creating an obstacle for my hearing the Dhamma," she soothed her son, Piyaṅkara, "Do not make a noise." Therein, mā saddaṃ karī means do not make a noise.

Pāṇesu cāti gāthāya sā attano dhammatāya samādiṇṇaṃ pañcasīlaṃ dasseti. Tatthasaṃyamāmaseti saṃyamāma saṃyatā homa. Iminā pāṇātipātā virati gahitā, dutiyapadena musāvādā virati, tatiyapadena sesā tisso viratiyo.Api muccema pisācayoniyāti api nāma yakkhaloke uppannāni pañca verāni pahāya, yoniso paṭipajjitvā imāya chātakadubbhikkhāya pisācayakkhayoniyā muccema, tātāti vadati. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

Pāṇesu cāti: In the verse beginning "Pāṇesu ca," she shows the five precepts that she has undertaken as her inherent nature. There, saṃyamāmase means "we restrain, we become restrained." With this, abstaining from killing living beings is taken; with the second phrase, abstaining from false speech; with the third phrase, the remaining three abstentions. Api muccema pisācayoniyāti: "Perhaps, having abandoned the five kinds of enmity that arise in the realm of yakkhas, and having practiced wisely, we might be freed from this hungry, famine-stricken realm of pisācas and yakkhas," she says, dear one. The sixth.

7. Punabbasusuttavaṇṇanā
7. A Description of the Punabbasu Sutta

241.Sattametena kho pana samayenāti katarasamayena? Sūriyassa atthaṅgamanasamayena. Tadā kira bhagavā pacchābhatte mahājanassa dhammaṃ desetvā mahājanaṃ uyyojetvā nhānakoṭṭhake nhatvā gandhakuṭipariveṇe paññattavarabuddhāsane puratthimalokadhātuṃ olokayamāno nisīdi. Athekacārikadvicārikādayo paṃsukūlikapiṇḍapātikabhikkhū attano attano vasanaṭṭhānehi nikkhamitvā āgamma dasabalaṃ vanditvā rattasāṇiyā parikkhipamānā viya nisīdiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā satthā nibbānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesi.

241.In the seventh, tena kho pana samayenati: At what time? At the time of the sun’s setting. It seems that then the Blessed One, after teaching the Dhamma to the great crowd after the meal and dismissing the great crowd, bathed in the bathing chamber and sat down on the excellent Buddha seat prepared in the Perfumed Chamber enclosure, gazing at the eastern world-element. Then bhikkhus who were solitary wanderers, wandering in pairs, wearing robes made of rags, and eating only alms-food, having come out of their respective dwellings, approached and, paying homage to the Ten-Powered One, sat down as if surrounding him with a red blanket. Then, knowing their inclinations, the Teacher spoke a Dhamma talk connected with Nibbāna.

Evaṃ tosesīti sā kira dhītaraṃ aṅkenādāya puttaṃ aṅguliyā gahetvā jetavanapiṭṭhiyaṃ pākāraparikkhepasamīpe uccārapassāvakheḷasiṅghāṇikaṃ pariyesamānā anupubbena jetavanadvārakoṭṭhakaṃ sampattā. Bhagavato ca, ‘‘ānanda, pattaṃ āhara, cīvaraṃ āhara, vighāsādānaṃ dānaṃ dehī’’ti kathentassa saddo samantā dvādasahatthamattameva gaṇhāti. Dhammaṃ desentassa sacepi cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā parisā nisīdati, yathā parisaṃ gacchati, bahiparisāya ekaṅgulimattampi na niggacchati, ‘‘mā akāraṇā madhurasaddo nassī’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ yakkhinī bahiparisāya ṭhitā saddaṃ na suṇāti, dvārakoṭṭhake ṭhitāya panassā mahatiyā buddhavīthiyā abhimukhe ṭhitā gandhakuṭi paññāyi. Sā nivāte dīpasikhā viya buddhagāravena hatthakukkuccādirahitaṃ niccalaṃ parisaṃ disvā – ‘‘nūna mettha kiñci bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ bhavissati, yato ahaṃ sappitelamadhuphāṇitādīsu kiñcideva pattato vā hatthato vā paggharantaṃ bhūmiyaṃ vā pana patitaṃ labhissāmī’’ti antovihāraṃ pāvisi. Dvārakoṭṭhake avaruddhakānaṃ nivāraṇatthāya ṭhitā ārakkhadevatā yakkhiniyā upanissayaṃ disvā na nivāresi. Tassā saha parisāya ekībhāvagamanena madhurassaro chaviādīni chinditvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ dhammassavanatthāya niccalaṃ ṭhitaṃ purimanayeneva puttakā codayiṃsu. Sā ‘‘dhammassavanassa me antarāyaṃ karontī’’ti puttaketuṇhī uttarike hohīti evaṃ tosesi.

Evaṃ tosesīti: It seems that she, taking her daughter on her hip and holding her son by the finger, searching for places to urinate, defecate, spit, and blow her nose near the enclosure wall on the outskirts of Jetavana, gradually reached the gatehouse of Jetavana. The sound of the Blessed One, saying, "Ānanda, bring the bowl, bring the robe, give food for those who have abandoned their possessions," extended only about twelve cubits in all directions. However, when the Dhamma is being taught, even if an assembly sits extending to the edge of the universe, it does not go even an inch beyond the assembly, thinking, "Let the sweet sound not be wasted without reason." There, this yakkhinī, standing outside the assembly, did not hear the sound, but standing at the gatehouse, facing the great Buddha-street, the Perfumed Chamber was visible to her. Seeing the assembly motionless like a lamp flame in a windless place, due to respect for the Buddha and without hand fidgeting, etc., she thought, "Surely there will be something edible here, since I will get some oil, ghee, honey, molasses, etc., dripping from a bowl or hand, or even fallen on the ground," and entered the inner monastery. The guardian deities standing at the gatehouse to prevent those who were restricted, seeing the yakkhinī's supporting condition, did not stop her. Her arrival coincided with the sweet sound and appearance being cut off as if striking bone marrow. As she stood motionless to hear the Dhamma, the children urged her in the same way as before. She, thinking, "They are obstructing my hearing of the Dhamma," quieted the children, saying, "tuṇhī uttarike hohīti"– in this way she quieted them.

yāvāti yāva dhammaṃ suṇāmi, tāva tuṇhī hohīti attho.Sabbaganthappamocananti nibbānaṃ āgamma sabbe ganthā pamuccanti, tasmā taṃ sabbaganthappamocananti vuccati.Ativelāti velātikkantā pamāṇātikkantā.Piyāyanāti magganā patthanā.Tato piyataranti yā ayaṃ assa dhammassa magganā patthanā, idaṃ mayhaṃ tato piyataranti attho. Piyatarāti vā pāṭho.Pāṇinanti yathā pāṇīnaṃ dukkhā moceti. Ke mocetīti? Pāṇineti āharitvā vattabbaṃ.Yaṃ dhammaṃ abhisambuddhanti, yaṃ dhammaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho.Tuṇhībhūtāyamuttarāti na kevalaṃ ahameva, ayaṃ me bhaginī uttarāpi tuṇhībhūtāti vadati.Saddhammassa anaññāyāti, amma, mayaṃ pubbepi imaṃ saddhammameva ajānitvā idāni idaṃ khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ anubhavantā dukkhaṃ carāma viharāma.

yāvāti: Yāva means, "Be quiet until I hear the Dhamma." Sabbaganthappamocananti: Because all fetters are released upon reaching Nibbāna, therefore it is called "sabbaganthappamocana." Ativelāti: Exceeding the time, exceeding the measure. Piyāyanāti: Seeking, desiring. Tato piyataranti: That seeking, that desire for this Dhamma, this is dearer to me than that. Piyatarāti vā pāṭho: Or there is a reading "piyatara." Pāṇinanti: Just as He releases from the suffering of living beings. Ke mocetīti? Pāṇineti āharitvā vattabbaṃ: Who releases? Pāṇinā should be brought in and said. Yaṃ dhammaṃ abhisambuddhanti: The Dhamma that the Blessed One fully awakened to. Tuṇhībhūtāyamuttarāti: Not only I, but my sister Uttarā is also silent, she says. Saddhammassa anaññāyāti: Mother, even before, without knowing this Good Dhamma, we now experience this suffering, living in misery due to hunger, thirst, etc.

Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā. Dhammaṃ desentoyeva bhagavā parisaṃ sallakkhayamāno tassā yakkhiniyā ceva yakkhadārakassa ca sotāpattiphalassa upanissayaṃ disvā desanaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā catusaccakathaṃ dīpeti, taṃ sutvā tasmiṃyeva dese ṭhitā yakkhinī saddhiṃ puttena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitā. Dhītuyāpi panassā upanissayo atthi, atidaharattā pana desanaṃ sampaṭicchituṃ nāsakkhi.

Cakkhumāti: Possessing the five eyes. While teaching the Dhamma, the Blessed One, observing the assembly, seeing the supporting condition for the yakkhinī and the yakkhadāraka to attain the fruit of stream-entry, diverted the teaching and revealed the discourse on the Four Noble Truths. Having heard that, the yakkhinī, standing in that very place together with her son, was established in the fruit of stream-entry. However, her daughter also had a supporting condition, but being too young, she was not able to accept the teaching.

sādhu kho paṇḍito nāmātiādimāha.Ajjāhamhi samuggatāti ahamhi ajja vaṭṭato uggatā samuggatā sāsane vā uggatā samuggatā, tvampi sukhī hohīti.Diṭṭhānīti mayā ca tayā ca diṭṭhāni.Uttarāpi suṇātu meti, ‘‘amhākaṃ catusaccapaṭivedhabhāvaṃ, dhītā me uttarāpi, suṇātū’’ti vadati. Saha saccapaṭivedheneva sāpi sūcilomo viya sabbaṃ setakaṇḍukacchuādibhāvaṃ pahāya dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhati saddhiṃ puttena. Dhītā panassā yathā nāma loke mātāpitūhi issariye laddhe puttānampi taṃ hoti, evaṃ mātu-ānubhāveneva sampattiṃ labhi. Tato paṭṭhāya ca sā saddhiṃ puttakehi gandhakuṭisamīparukkheyeva nivāsarukkhaṃ labhitvā sāyaṃ pātaṃ buddhadassanaṃ labhamānā dhammaṃ suṇamānā dīgharattaṃ tattheva vasi. Sattamaṃ.

sādhu kho paṇḍito nāmātiādimāha: He spoke beginning with "sādhu kho paṇḍito nāmā." Ajjāhamhi samuggatāti: Today I am emerged, fully emerged from the cycle, or emerged, fully emerged in the dispensation; may you also be happy. Diṭṭhānīti: Seen by me and by you. Uttarāpi suṇātu meti: "May my daughter Uttarā also hear of our realization of the Four Noble Truths," she says. Along with the realization of the Truths, she, like Sūciloma, abandoned all conditions such as white scabs and scabies, and attained divine prosperity together with her son. As for her daughter, just as in the world, when sovereignty is obtained by the parents, it also belongs to the sons, so too she attained prosperity by the power of her mother. From then on, having obtained a dwelling tree near the Perfumed Chamber together with her children, seeing the Buddha morning and evening, hearing the Dhamma, she lived there for a long time. The seventh.

8. Sudattasuttavaṇṇanā
8. A Description of the Sudatta Sutta

242.Aṭṭhamekenacideva karaṇīyenāti vāṇijjakammaṃ adhippetaṃ. Anāthapiṇḍiko ca rājagahaseṭṭhi ca aññamaññaṃ bhaginipatikā honti. Yadā rājagahe uṭṭhānakabhaṇḍakaṃ mahagghaṃ hoti, tadā rājagahaseṭṭhi taṃ gahetvā pañcasakaṭasatehi sāvatthiṃ gantvā yojanamatte ṭhito attano āgatabhāvaṃ jānāpeti. Anāthapiṇḍiko paccuggantvā tassa mahāsakkāraṃ katvā ekayānaṃ āropetvā sāvatthiṃ pavisati. So sace bhaṇḍaṃ lahukaṃ vikkīyati, vikkiṇāti. No ce, bhaginighare ṭhapetvā pakkamati. Anāthapiṇḍikopi tatheva karoti. Svāyaṃ tadāpi teneva karaṇīyena agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

242.In the eighth, kenacideva karaṇīyenāti: Trading business is intended. Anāthapiṇḍika and the Rājagaha treasurer were brothers-in-law to each other. When goods for sale became expensive in Rājagaha, the Rājagaha treasurer, having taken them, went to Sāvatthi with five hundred carts and, standing about a league away, made his arrival known. Anāthapiṇḍika went out to meet him, made great honor for him, put him on a single vehicle, and entered Sāvatthi. He would sell the goods if they were easily sold; if not, he would leave them at his sister's house and depart. Anāthapiṇḍika would also do the same. So, on that occasion, he went for the same reason. This was said with that in mind.

Taṃ divasaṃ pana rājagahaseṭṭhi yojanamatte ṭhitena anāthapiṇḍikena āgatabhāvajānanatthaṃ pesitaṃ paṇṇaṃ na suṇi, dhammassavanatthāya vihāraṃ agamāsi. So dhammakathaṃ sutvā svātanāya buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nimantetvā attano ghare uddhanakhaṇāpanadāruphālanādīni kāresi. Anāthapiṇḍikopi ‘‘idāni mayhaṃ paccuggamanaṃ karissati, idāni karissatī’’ti gharadvārepi paccuggamanaṃ alabhitvā antogharaṃ paviṭṭho paṭisanthārampi na bahuṃ alattha. ‘‘Kiṃ, mahāseṭṭhi, kusalaṃ dārakarūpānaṃ? Nasi magge kilanto’’ti? Ettakova paṭisanthāro ahosi. So tassa mahābyāpāraṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu te, gahapati, āvāho vā bhavissatī’’ti? Khandhake (cūḷava. 304) āgatanayeneva kathaṃ pavattetvā tassa mukhato buddhasaddaṃ sutvā pañcavaṇṇaṃ pītiṃ paṭilabhi. Sā tassa sīsena uṭṭhāya yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā, pādapiṭṭhiyā uṭṭhāya yāva sīsā gacchati, ubhato uṭṭhāya majjhe osarati, majjhe uṭṭhāya ubhato gacchati. So pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭṭho, ‘‘buddhoti tvaṃ, gahapati, vadesi? Buddho tāhaṃ, gahapati, vadāmī’’ti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ pucchitvā, ‘‘ghosopi kho eso dullabho lokasmiṃ yadidaṃ buddho’’ti āha. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘assosi kho anāthapiṇḍiko, gahapati, buddho kira loke uppanno’’ti.

However, on that day, the Rājagaha treasurer did not hear the message sent by Anāthapiṇḍika, who was standing about a league away, to announce his arrival, but went to the monastery to hear the Dhamma. Having heard the Dhamma talk, he invited the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, with the Buddha at their head, for the next day and had activities such as digging up charcoal, chopping wood, etc., done in his house. Anāthapiṇḍika, thinking, "Now he will come out to greet me, now he will come out," not even getting a greeting at the house door, entered the inner house and did not get much of a welcome either. "What, Mahāseṭṭhi, are the children well? Aren't you tired from the road?" Only this much was the greeting. Seeing his great activity, he asked, "What is it, householder? Will there be a wedding?" In the same manner as it came in the Khandhaka (cūḷava. 304), having started the conversation and having heard the word "Buddha" from his mouth, he experienced five-colored joy. That rose from his head up to the soles of his feet, and rising from the soles of his feet up to his head, rising from both sides, it descended in the middle, and rising in the middle, it went to both sides. He, being constantly touched by joy, having asked three times, "Do you say 'Buddha,' householder? Do I say 'Buddha,' householder?" said, "Even this sound is difficult to obtain in the world, namely, 'Buddha.'" This was said with this in mind: "Anāthapiṇḍika heard, 'It is said, householder, that a Buddha has arisen in the world.'"

Etadahosi akālo kho ajjāti so kira taṃ seṭṭhiṃ pucchi, ‘‘kuhiṃ gahapati satthā viharatī’’ti? Athassa so – ‘‘buddhā nāma durāsadā āsīvisasadisā honti, satthā sivathikāya vasati, na sakkā tattha tumhādisehi imāya velāya gantu’’nti ācikkhi. Athassa etadahosi.Buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjīti taṃdivasaṃ kirassa bhaṇḍasakaṭesu vā upaṭṭhākesu vā cittampi na uppajji, sāyamāsampi na akāsi, sattabhūmikaṃ pana pāsādaṃ āruyha supaññattālaṅkatavarasayane ‘‘buddho buddho’’ti sajjhāyaṃ karontova nipajjitvā niddaṃ okkami. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjī’’ti.

Etadahosi akālo kho ajjāti: It seems that he asked that treasurer, "Where does the Teacher reside, householder?" Then he told him, "Buddhas are difficult to approach, like poisonous snakes. The Teacher dwells in the charnel ground; it is not possible for people like you to go there at this time." Then this occurred to him. Buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjīti: It seems that on that day, he did not even think about the goods in the carts or the attendants, nor did he eat the evening meal, but having ascended to the seven-storied mansion, he lay down on the well-appointed and decorated excellent bed, contemplating "Buddha, Buddha," and fell asleep. Therefore, it was said, "buddhagatāya satiyā nipajjī."

Rattiyā sudaṃ tikkhattuṃ uṭṭhāsi pabhātanti maññamānoti paṭhamayāme tāva vītivatte uṭṭhāya buddhaṃ anussari, athassa balavappasādo udapādi, pītiāloko ahosi, sabbatamaṃ vigacchi, dīpasahassujjalaṃ viya canduṭṭhānaṃ sūriyuṭṭhānaṃ viya ca jātaṃ. So ‘‘papādaṃ āpanno vatamhi, sūriyo uggato’’ti uṭṭhāya ākāsatale ṭhitaṃ candaṃ ulloketvā ‘‘ekova yāmo gato, aññe dve atthī’’ti puna pavisitvā nipajji. Etenupāyena majjhimayāmāvasānepi pacchimayāmāvasānepīti tikkhattuṃ uṭṭhāsi. Pacchimayāmāvasāne pana balavapaccūseyeva uṭṭhāya ākāsatalaṃ āgantvā mahādvārābhimukhova ahosi, sattabhūmikadvāraṃ sayameva vivaṭaṃ ahosi. So pāsādā oruyha antaravīthiṃ paṭipajji.

Rattiyā sudaṃ tikkhattuṃ uṭṭhāsi pabhātanti maññamānoti: It seems that after the first watch of the night had passed, he got up and recollected the Buddha. Then strong confidence arose in him, a light of joy appeared, all darkness vanished, and it was as if a thousand lamps were lit, like the rising of the moon or the rising of the sun. Thinking, "I have fallen into a ravine; the sun has risen," he got up, looked up at the moon standing in the sky, and thinking, "Only one watch has passed; there are two more," he entered again and lay down. In this way, at the end of the middle watch and at the end of the last watch, he got up three times. However, at the end of the last watch, very early at dawn, having risen and come to the sky, he was facing the main gate, and the door of the seven-storied building opened by itself. He descended from the mansion and proceeded along the inner street.

Vivariṃsūti ‘‘ayaṃ mahāseṭṭhi ‘buddhupaṭṭhānaṃ gamissāmī’ti nikkhanto, paṭhamadassaneneva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ aggupaṭṭhāko hutvā asadisaṃ saṅghārāmaṃ katvā cātuddisassa ariyagaṇassa anāvaṭadvāro bhavissati, na yuttamassa dvāraṃ pidahitu’’nti cintetvā vivariṃsu.Antaradhāyīti rājagahaṃ kira ākiṇṇamanussaṃ antonagare nava koṭiyo, bahinagare navāti taṃ upanissāya aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo vasanti. Avelāya matamanusse bahi nīharituṃ asakkontā aṭṭālake ṭhatvā bahidvāre khipanti. Mahāseṭṭhi nagarato bahinikkhantamattova allasarīraṃ pādena akkami, aparampi piṭṭhipādena pahari. Makkhikā uppatitvā parikiriṃsu. Duggandho nāsapuṭaṃ abhihani. Buddhappasādo tanuttaṃ gato. Tenassa āloko antaradhāyi, andhakāro pāturahosi.Saddamanussāvesīti ‘‘seṭṭhissa ussāhaṃ janessāmī’’ti suvaṇṇakiṅkiṇikaṃ ghaṭṭento viya madhurassarena saddaṃ anussāvesi.

Vivariṃsūti: Thinking, "This Mahāseṭṭhi has set out thinking, 'I will go to attend upon the Buddha,' and having been established in the fruit of stream-entry at the very first sight, he will become the foremost supporter of the Three Jewels and, having built an incomparable monastery, it will have its doors open to the four-quartered community of noble ones; it is not right to close the door to him," they opened it. Antaradhāyīti: It seems that Rājagaha was crowded with people; nine kotis lived in the inner city and nine in the outer city, thus eighteen kotis of people lived depending on it. Unable to take out the dead bodies at untimely hours, they would stand on the upper story and throw them outside the gate. As soon as the Mahāseṭṭhi had gone out of the city, he stepped on a fresh corpse with his foot and struck another with the back of his foot. Flies rose and swarmed around. The stench offended his nostrils. The confidence in the Buddha became thin. Therefore, his light disappeared, and darkness arose. Saddamanussāvesīti: Thinking, "I will generate enthusiasm in the Seṭṭhi," as if striking a golden bell, he made a sound with a sweet voice.

Sataṃ kaññāsahassānīti purimapadānipi imināva sahassapadena saddhiṃ sambandhanīyāni. Yatheva hi sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, sataṃ sahassāni hatthī, sataṃ sahassāni assā, sataṃ sahassāni rathāti ayamettha attho. Iti ekekasatasahassameva dīpitaṃ.Padavītihārassāti padavītihāro nāma samagamane dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ.Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasinti taṃ ekaṃ padavītihāraṃ soḷasabhāge katvā tato eko koṭṭhāso puna soḷasadhā, tato eko soḷasadhāti evaṃ soḷasa vāre soḷasadhā bhinnassa eko koṭṭhāso soḷasikalā nāma, taṃ soḷasikalaṃ etāni cattāri satasahassāni na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sataṃ hatthisahassāni sataṃ assasahassāni sataṃ rathasahassāni sataṃ kaññāsahassāni, tā ca kho āmukkamaṇikuṇḍalā sakalajambudīparājadhītaro vāti imasmā ettakā lābhā vihāraṃ gacchantassa tasmiṃ soḷasikalasaṅkhāte padese pavattacetanāva uttaritarāti. Idaṃ pana vihāragamanaṃ kassa vasena gahitanti? Vihāraṃ gantvā anantarāyena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahantassa. ‘‘Gandhamālādīhi pūjaṃ karissāmi, cetiyaṃ vandissāmi, dhammaṃ sossāmi, dīpapūjaṃ karissāmi, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā dānaṃ dassāmi, sikkhāpadesu vā saraṇesu vā patiṭṭhahissāmī’’ti gacchatopi vasena vaṭṭatiyeva.

Sataṃ kaññāsahassānīti: The previous words should also be connected with this word "sahassāni." Just as there are a hundred thousand maidens, a hundred thousand elephants, a hundred thousand horses, a hundred thousand chariots, this is the meaning here. Thus, only one hundred thousand each is indicated. Padavītihārassāti: Padavītihāro means the space between two footsteps in a straight line, equal to the size of a fistful of jewels. Kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasinti: Having divided that one padavītihāra into sixteen parts, and then dividing one of those parts into sixteen again, and then dividing one of those into sixteen, thus one part divided sixteen times into sixteen parts is called a soḷasikalā, and these four hundred thousand do not equal that soḷasikalā. This is what was said: a hundred thousand elephants, a hundred thousand horses, a hundred thousand chariots, a hundred thousand maidens, and those maidens are wearing necklaces and earrings and are daughters of kings from all over Jambudīpa – from such gains, the consciousness that arises in that soḷasikalā-sized space is superior for one who is going to the monastery. Now, whose going to the monastery is taken here? It is taken as the going of one who, going to the monastery, will be established in the fruit of stream-entry without interruption. It is also fitting to take it as the going of one who thinks, "I will offer worship with garlands and perfumes, I will worship the shrine, I will hear the Dhamma, I will offer lamp worship, I will invite the Saṅgha and give alms, or I will be established in the precepts or refuges."

Andhakāro antaradhāyīti so kira cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ ekakoti saññaṃ karomi, anuyuttāpi me atthi, kasmā bhāyāmī’’ti sūro ahosi. Athassa balavā buddhappasādo udapādi. Tasmā andhakāro antaradhāyīti. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo. Apica purato purato gacchanto bhiṃsanake susānamagge aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikasamaṃsalohitantiādīni anekavidhāni kuṇapāni addasa. Soṇasiṅgālādīnaṃ saddaṃ assosi. Taṃ sabbaṃ parissayaṃ punappunaṃ buddhagataṃ pasādaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maddanto agamāsiyeva.

Andhakāro antaradhāyīti: It seems that he thought, "I am making an effort worth one koti, and I also have attendants; why am I afraid?" and he became brave. Then strong confidence in the Buddha arose in him. Therefore, the darkness disappeared. The same method applies in the remaining instances. Moreover, as he went further and further, on the fearful charnel ground path, he saw various kinds of corpses: skeletons, bones, flesh, blood, etc. He heard the sounds of jackals and foxes. Having repeatedly increased his confidence in the Buddha while enduring all those dangers, he went on.

Ehi sudattāti so kira seṭṭhi gacchamānova cintesi – ‘‘imasmiṃ loke bahū pūraṇakassapādayo titthiyā ‘mayaṃ buddhā mayaṃ buddhā’ti vadanti, kathaṃ nu kho ahaṃ satthu buddhabhāvaṃ jāneyya’’nti? Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘mayhaṃ guṇavasena uppannaṃ nāmaṃ mahājano jānāti, kuladattiyaṃ pana me nāmaṃ aññatra mayā na koci jānāti. Sace buddho bhavissati, kuladattikanāmena maṃ ālapissatī’’ti. Satthā tassa cittaṃ ñatvā evamāha.

"Ehi Sudatta" (Come, Sudatta): It is said that while the merchant was on his way, he thought, "In this world, many non-Buddhist ascetics like Pūraṇa Kassapa claim 'We are Buddhas, we are Buddhas.' How shall I know the Buddha-nature of the Teacher?" Then it occurred to him, "The name given to me based on my virtues is known by many, but my family name, Kuladatta, is not known by anyone except me. If he is a Buddha, he will address me by the name Kuladatta." Knowing his thoughts, the Teacher spoke thus.

Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Āsattiyoti taṇhāyo.Santinti kilesavūpasamaṃ.Pappuyyāti patvā. Idañca pana vatvā satthā tassa anupubbikathaṃ kathetvā matthake cattāri saccāni pakāsesi. Seṭṭhi dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nimantetvā punadivasato paṭṭhāya mahādānaṃ dātuṃ ārabhi. Bimbisārādayo seṭṭhissa sāsanaṃ pesenti – ‘‘tvaṃ āgantuko, yaṃ nappahoti, taṃ ito āharāpehī’’ti. So ‘‘alaṃ tumhe bahukiccā’’ti sabbe paṭikkhipitvā pañcahi sakaṭasatehi ānītavibhavena sattāhaṃ mahādānaṃ adāsi. Dānapariyosāne ca bhagavantaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ paṭijānāpetvā rājagahassa ca sāvatthiyā ca antare yojane yojane satasahassaṃ datvā pañcacattālīsa vihāre kārento sāvatthiṃ gantvā jetavanamahāvihāraṃ kāretvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa niyyādesīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

Parinibbuto (Fully extinguished): Fully extinguished by the extinction of defilements. Āsattiyo (Attachments): Cravings. Santi (Peace): The subsiding of defilements. Pappuyyā (Attaining): Having attained. After saying this, the Teacher delivered a progressive discourse to him and revealed the Four Noble Truths at the end. The merchant, after hearing the Dhamma talk, was established in the fruition of Stream-entry (sotāpattiphala). He invited the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha and began to give great alms starting from the next day. Bimbisāra and others sent messages to the merchant, "You are a newcomer; bring whatever you need from here if you cannot provide it." He refused them all, saying, "Enough, you have many duties," and gave great alms for seven days with the wealth brought in five hundred carts. At the conclusion of the almsgiving, he persuaded the Blessed One to spend the rainy season in Sāvatthi and, while constructing forty-five monasteries at the cost of one hundred thousand (coins) per yojana between Rājagaha and Sāvatthi, he went to Sāvatthi and dedicated the Jetavana Monastery to the Saṅgha headed by the Buddha. The eighth (story) is concluded.

9. Paṭhamasukkāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the First Sukkā Sutta

243.Navamerathikāya rathikanti ekaṃ rathikaṃ gahetvā tato aparaṃ gacchanto rathikāya rathikaṃ upasaṅkamanto nāma hoti. Siṅghāṭakepi eseva nayo. Ettha carathikāti racchā.Siṅghāṭakanti catukkaṃ.Kiṃ me katāti kiṃ ime katā? Kiṃ karontīti attho.Madhupītāvaseyareti gandhamadhupānaṃ pītā viya sayanti. Gandhamadhupānaṃ pīto kira sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkoti, asaññī hutvā sayateva. Tasmā evamāha.

243. In the ninth (sutta): Rathikāya rathikaṃ (From street to street): Taking one street and then going to another, approaching street after street. The same method applies to crossroads. Here, rathikā means street. Siṅghāṭaka means crossroads. Kiṃ me katā (What have they done to me?): What have these done? What are they doing? is the meaning. Madhupītāva seyare (They lie down as if having drunk honey-wine): It is said that one who has drunk honey-wine cannot lift their head; they lie down unconscious. Therefore, he said so.

Tañca pana appaṭivānīyanti tañca pana dhammaṃ appaṭivānīyaṃ deseti. Bāhirakañhi sumadhurampi bhojanaṃ punappunaṃ bhuñjantassa na ruccati, ‘‘apanetha, kiṃ iminā’’ti? Paṭivānetabbaṃ apanetabbaṃ hoti, na evamayaṃ dhammo. Imaṃ hi dhammaṃ paṇḍitā vassasatampi vassasahassampi suṇantā tittiṃ na gacchanti. Tenāha ‘‘appaṭivānīya’’nti.Asecanakamojavanti anāsittakaṃ ojavantaṃ. Yathā hi bāhirāni asambhinnapāyāsādīnipi sappimadhusakkharāhi āsittāni yojitāneva madhurāni ojavantāni honti, na evamayaṃ dhammo. Ayaṃ hi attano dhammatāya madhuro ceva ojavā ca, na aññena upasitto. Tenāha ‘‘asecanakamojava’’nti.Pivanti maññe sappaññāti paṇḍitapurisā pivanti viya.Valāhakameva panthagūti valāhakantarato nikkhantaudakaṃ ghammābhitattā pathikā viya. Navamaṃ.

Tañca pana appaṭivānīyaṃ (And that is not to be rejected): And that Dhamma he teaches is not to be rejected. For even the most delicious external food is not pleasing to one who eats it again and again. (One says,) "Take it away, what is the use of this?" It has to be rejected, taken away, but this Dhamma is not like that. For even if wise people listen to this Dhamma for a hundred or a thousand years, they do not get tired. Therefore, he said, "not to be rejected." Asecanakamojavaṃ (Unsullied and savory): Without being sprinkled, (it is) savory. Just as external foods like pāyāsa (milk-rice pudding) and so on, mixed with ghee, honey, and sugar, are sweet and savory only when they are sprinkled (with these ingredients), this Dhamma is not like that. For this Dhamma is sweet and savory by its very nature, not sprinkled by anything else. Therefore, he said, "unsullied and savory." Pivanti maññe sappaññā (The wise, I think, drink): Wise men drink, as it were. Valāhakameva panthagū (Like travelers [relishing water] from a cloud): Like travelers oppressed by the heat (relishing) water that has come out of a mass of clouds. The ninth (sutta) is concluded.

10-11. Dutiyasukkāsuttādivaṇṇanā
10-11. Commentary on the Second Sukkā Sutta, etc.

244.Dasamepuññaṃ vata pasavi bahunti bahuṃ vata puññaṃ pasavatīti. Dasamaṃ.

244. In the tenth (sutta): Puññaṃ vata pasavi bahuṃ (She has surely produced much merit): She has surely produced much merit. The tenth (sutta) is concluded.

245.Ekādasamaṃ uttānameva. Ekādasamaṃ.

245. The eleventh (sutta) is straightforward. The eleventh (sutta) is concluded.

12. Āḷavakasuttavaṇṇanā
12. Commentary on the Āḷavaka Sutta

246.Dvādasameāḷaviyanti āḷavīti taṃ raṭṭhampi nagarampi. Tañca bhavanaṃ nagarassa avidūre gāvutamatte ṭhitaṃ. Bhagavā tattha viharanto taṃ nagaraṃ upanissāya āḷaviyaṃ viharatīti vutto.Āḷavakassa yakkhassa bhavaneti ettha pana ayamanupubbikathā – āḷavako kira rājā vividhanāṭakūpabhogaṃ chaḍḍetvā corapaṭibāhanatthaṃ paṭirājanisedhanatthaṃ byāyāmakaraṇatthañca sattame sattame divase migavaṃ gacchanto ekadivasaṃ balakāyena saddhiṃ katikaṃ akāsi – ‘‘yassa passena migo palāyati, tasseva so bhāro’’ti. Atha tasseva passena migo palāyi, javasampanno rājā dhanuṃ gahetvā pattikova tiyojanaṃ taṃ migaṃ anubandhi. Eṇimigā ca tiyojanavegā eva honti. Atha parikkhīṇajavaṃ taṃ udakaṃ viya pavisitvā ṭhitaṃ vadhitvā dvidhā chetvā anatthikopi maṃsena ‘‘nāsakkhi migaṃ gahetu’’nti apavādamocanatthaṃ kājenādāya āgacchanto nagarassāvidūre bahalapattapalāsaṃ mahānigrodhaṃ disvā parissamavinodanatthaṃ tassa mūlamupagato. Tasmiñca nigrodhe āḷavako yakkho mahārājasantikā bhavanaṃ labhitvā majjhanhikasamaye tassa rukkhassa chāyāya phuṭṭhokāsaṃ paviṭṭhe pāṇino khādanto paṭivasati. So taṃ disvā khādituṃ upagato. Rājā tena saddhiṃ katikaṃ akāsi – ‘‘muñca maṃ, ahaṃ te divase divase manussañca thālipākañca pesessāmī’’ti. Yakkho – ‘‘tvaṃ rājūpabhogena pamatto na sarissasi, ahaṃ pana bhavanaṃ anupagatañca ananuññātañca khādituṃ na labhāmi, svāhaṃ bhavantampi jīyeyya’’nti na muñci. Rājā ‘‘yaṃ divasaṃ na pesemi, taṃ divasaṃ maṃ gahetvā khādā’’ti attānaṃ anujānitvā tena mutto nagarābhimukho agamāsi.

246. In the twelfth (sutta): Āḷaviyaṃ (In Āḷavi): Āḷavī is both the country and the city. And that residence was situated not far from the city, about a gāvuta (a unit of distance) away. The Blessed One, dwelling there, was said to be dwelling in Āḷavi, depending on that city. Āḷavakassa yakkhassa bhavane (In the abode of the Yakka Āḷavaka): Here is the progressive story: It is said that King Āḷavaka, abandoning the enjoyment of various theatrical performances, went hunting every seventh day for the purpose of warding off thieves, preventing attacks from rival kings, and exercising. One day, he made an agreement with his force, "The one by whose side a deer flees, that one will be responsible for it." Then, a deer fled by his side, and the king, full of speed, taking his bow, pursued that deer for three yojanas (a unit of distance), as if he had wings. Deer are indeed of such speed as to travel three yojanas. Then, having killed the deer, which had become exhausted and had entered the water as if entering (a house), he cut it in two. And even though he did not need the meat, he carried it on his shoulders to avoid the reproach that "he was unable to catch the deer," and while coming towards the city, he saw a large banyan tree with thick leaves and foliage not far from the city, and he approached its root to relieve his fatigue. In that banyan tree, the Yakka Āḷavaka, having obtained a residence from the great king, lived, eating those who entered the open space touched by the shade of that tree at midday. Seeing him, he approached to eat him. The king made an agreement with him: "Release me, and I will send you a man and a pot of food every day." The Yakka (replied): "You are heedless with the enjoyment of kingship and will not remember, but I cannot eat someone who has not entered the residence and has not been given permission, or else I might lose even you." The king (said): "On the day that I do not send (someone), take me and eat me," having authorized himself, he was released by him and went towards the city.

Balakāyo magge khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā ṭhito rājānaṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ, mahārāja, ayasamattabhayā evaṃ kilantosī’’ti? Vadanto paccuggantvā paṭiggahesi. Rājā taṃ pavattiṃ anārocetvā nagaraṃ gantvā katapātarāso nagaraguttikaṃ āmantetvā etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Nagaraguttiko – ‘‘kiṃ, deva, kālaparicchedo kato’’ti āha? Na kato bhaṇeti. Duṭṭhu kataṃ, deva, amanussā hi paricchinnamattameva labhanti, aparicchinne pana janapadassābādho bhavissati, hotu deva, kiñcāpi evamakāsi, appossukko tvaṃ rajjasukhamanubhohi, ahamettha kātabbaṃ karissāmīti. So kālasseva vuṭṭhāya bandhanāgāradvāre ṭhatvā ye ye vajjhā honti, te te sandhāya ‘‘yo jīvitatthiko, so nikkhamatū’’ti bhaṇati. Yo paṭhamaṃ nikkhamati, taṃ gehaṃ netvā nhāpetvā bhojetvā ca ‘‘imaṃ thālipākaṃ yakkhassa dehī’’ti peseti. Taṃ rukkhamūlaṃ paviṭṭhamattaṃyeva yakkho bheravaṃ attabhāvaṃ nimminitvā mūlakandaṃ viya khādi. Yakkhānubhāvena kira manussānaṃ kesādīni upādāya sakalasarīraṃ navanītapiṇḍaṃ viya hoti, yakkhassa bhattaṃ gāhāpetuṃ gatapurisā taṃ disvā bhītā yathāmittaṃ ārocesuṃ. Tato pabhuti ‘‘rājā core gahetvā yakkhassa detī’’ti manussā corakammato paṭiviratā. Tato aparena samayena navacorānaṃ abhāvena purāṇacorānañca parikkhayena bandhanāgārāni suññāni ahesuṃ.

The force, having set up camp on the road, seeing the king, came forward and greeted him, saying, "What is this, O Great King, are you so exhausted as if you had faced the fear of weapons?" Without revealing the incident, the king went to the city and, having had his breakfast, summoned the city guard and informed him of the matter. The city guard asked, "Has a time limit been set, O King?" "No, it has not been set," he said. "It has been done badly, O King, for non-humans only receive what has been limited, but if it is unlimited, there will be harm to the populace. Let it be, O King, even though you have done this, be unconcerned and enjoy the bliss of kingship, I will do what is to be done here." So, rising early in the morning, standing at the door of the prison, he said to those who were to be executed, "Whoever desires to live, let him come out." He would take the first one who came out to his house, bathe him, feed him, and send him, saying, "Give this pot of food to the Yakka." As soon as he entered the foot of that tree, the Yakka would create a terrifying form and devour him like eating a root-bulb. It is said that by the power of the Yakka, from the hair onwards, the entire body of humans becomes like a lump of butter. The men who had gone to give the Yakka his food, seeing that, were frightened and reported it to their friends. From then on, people refrained from the crime of theft, (saying) "The king catches thieves and gives them to the Yakka." Then after some time, due to the lack of new thieves and the exhaustion of the old thieves, the prisons became empty.

Atha nagaraguttiko rañño ārocesi. Rājā attano dhanaṃ nagararacchāsu chaḍḍāpesi ‘‘appeva nāma koci lobhena gaṇheyyā’’ti. Taṃ pādenapi koci nacchupi. So core alabhanto amaccānaṃ ārocesi. Amaccā ‘‘kulapaṭipāṭiyā ekamekaṃ jiṇṇakaṃ pesema, so pakatiyāpi maccupathe vattatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā ‘‘amhākaṃ pitaraṃ amhākaṃ pitāmahaṃ pesetīti manussā khobhaṃ karissanti, mā vo etaṃ ruccī’’ti vāresi. ‘‘Tena hi, deva, dārakaṃ pesema uttānaseyyakaṃ, tathāvidhassa hi ‘mātā me’ti ‘pitā me’ti sineho natthī’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā anujāni. Te tathā akaṃsu. Nagare dārakamātaro ca dārake gahetvā gabbhiniyo ca palāyitvā parajanapade dārake saṃvaḍḍhetvā ānenti. Evaṃ dvādasa vassāni gatāni.

Then the city guard reported it to the king. The king had his wealth scattered in the streets of the city (thinking), "Perhaps someone might take it out of greed." But no one even touched it with their foot. Not finding thieves, he reported it to the ministers. The ministers said, "Let us send an old man, one from each family lineage, for he is naturally on the path to death." The king forbade (them), saying, "People will be agitated, (saying) 'He sends our father, he sends our grandfather.' May this not please you." "Then, O King, let us send a baby lying on its back, for such a one has no affection, (thinking) 'This is my mother,' 'This is my father.'" The king approved. They did so. In the city, mothers of children, taking their children, and pregnant women fled to other countries and raised their children and brought them back. Thus, twelve years passed.

Tato ekadivasaṃ sakalanagaraṃ vicinitvā ekampi dārakaṃ alabhitvā amaccā rañño ārocesuṃ – ‘‘natthi, deva, nagare dārako ṭhapetvā antepure tava puttaṃ āḷavakakumāra’’nti. Rājā ‘‘yathā mama putto piyo, evaṃ sabbalokassa, attanā pana piyataraṃ natthi, gacchatha tampi datvā mama jīvitaṃ rakkhathā’’ti. Tena ca samayena āḷavakassa mātā puttaṃ nhāpetvā maṇḍetvā dukūlacumbaṭake katvā aṅke sayāpetvā nisinnā hoti. Rājapurisā rañño āṇāya tattha gantvā vippalapantiyā tassā soḷasannañca devisahassānaṃ saddhiṃ dhātiyā taṃ ādāya pakkamiṃsu, ‘‘sve yakkhabhakkho bhavissatī’’ti. Taṃdivasañca bhagavā paccūsasamayaṃ paccuṭṭhāya jetavanavihāre gandhakuṭiyaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ olokento addasa āḷavakassa kumārassa anāgāmiphaluppattiyā upanissayaṃ yakkhassa ca sotāpattiphaluppattiyā, desanāpariyosāne ca caturāsītipāṇasahassānaṃ dhammacakkhupaṭilābhassāti. So vibhātāya rattiyā purimabhattakiccaṃ katvā suniṭṭhitapacchābhattakicco kāḷapakkhūposathadivase vattamāne oggate sūriye eko adutiyo pattacīvaramādāya pādamaggeneva sāvatthito tiṃsa yojanāni gantvā tassa yakkhassa bhavanaṃ pāvisi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āḷavakassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.

Then one day, having searched the entire city and not finding even one child, the ministers reported to the king, "There is no child in the city, except for your son, Prince Āḷavaka, in the inner quarters." The king (said), "Just as my son is dear to me, so (are all children) to the whole world, but there is nothing dearer than oneself. Go, give even him and protect my life." At that time, Āḷavaka's mother had bathed her son, adorned him, put him in a fine cloth basket, made him lie on her lap, and was sitting down. The king's men, going there by the king's order, despite her lamentations and those of the sixteen thousand goddesses together with the nurse, took him away, (thinking) "Tomorrow he will be food for the Yakka." On that day, the Blessed One, having risen at dawn, having attained the Great Compassion Samādhi in the Perfumed Chamber of Jetavana Monastery, looking at the world with the Buddha-eye, saw the condition for the arising of the fruition of Non-returning (anāgāmiphala) in Āḷavaka's son, and the condition for the arising of the fruition of Stream-entry (sotāpattiphala) in the Yakka, and the attainment of the Dhamma-eye by eighty-four thousand beings at the end of the discourse. So, having completed his morning duties at the break of dawn, having finished his after-meal duties well, on the day of the Kālapaḷkha Uposatha (the dark-moon observance day), when the sun had set, alone, without a second, taking his bowl and robes, he went by foot from Sāvatthi, thirty yojanas away, and entered the residence of that Yakka. Therefore, it was said, "In the abode of the Yakka Āḷavaka."

Kiṃ pana bhagavā yasmiṃ nigrodhe āḷavakassa bhavanaṃ, tassa mūle vihāsi, udāhu bhavaneyevāti? Bhavaneyeva. Yatheva hi yakkhā attano bhavanaṃ passanti, tathā bhagavāpi. So tattha gantvā bhavanadvāre aṭṭhāsi. Tadā āḷavako himavante yakkhasamāgamaṃ gato hoti. Tato āḷavakassa dvārapālo gadrabho nāma yakkho bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā, ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, bhagavā vikāle āgato’’ti āha. Āma, gadrabha, āgatomhi, sace te agaru, vihareyyāmekarattaṃ āḷavakassa bhavaneti. Na me, bhante, garu, apica kho so yakkho kakkhaḷo pharuso, mātāpitūnampi abhivādanādīni na karoti, mā rucci bhagavato idha vāsoti. Jānāmi, gadrabha, tassa sabhāvaṃ, na koci mamantarāyo bhavissati. Sace te agaru, vihareyyāmekarattanti.

But did the Blessed One dwell at the foot of that banyan tree where Āḷavaka's residence was, or in the residence itself? In the residence itself. Just as Yakkas see their own residence, so too did the Blessed One. He went there and stood at the door of the residence. At that time, Āḷavaka had gone to the Himalayas for a Yakka assembly. Then Āḷavaka's doorkeeper, a Yakka named Gadrabha, approached the Blessed One, paid homage, and said, "Why, Venerable Sir, has the Blessed One come at an unseemly time?" "Yes, Gadrabha, I have come. If it is not a burden to you, may I stay for one night in Āḷavaka's residence?" "It is not a burden to me, Venerable Sir, but that Yakka is harsh and rough; he does not even offer greetings and so on to his parents; may dwelling here not please the Blessed One." "I know, Gadrabha, his nature; no danger will come to me. If it is not a burden to you, may I stay for one night?"

Dutiyampi gadrabho yakkho bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘aggitattakapālasadiso, bhante, āḷavako, mātāpitaroti vā samaṇabrāhmaṇāti vā dhammoti vā na jānāti, idhāgatānaṃ pana cittakkhepampi karoti, hadayampi phāleti, pādepi gahetvā parasamuddaṃ vā paracakkavāḷaṃ vā khipatī’’ti. Dutiyampi bhagavā āha – ‘‘jānāmi, gadrabha, sacepi te agaru, vihareyyāmekaratta’’nti. Na me, bhante, garu, apica kho so yakkho attano anārocetvā anujānantaṃ maṃ jīvitāpi voropeyya, ārocemi, bhante, tassāti. Yathāsukhaṃ, gadrabha, ārocehīti. ‘‘Tena hi, bhante, tvameva jānāhī’’ti bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā himavantābhimukho pakkāmi. Bhavanadvārampi sayameva bhagavato vivaramadāsi. Bhagavā antobhavanaṃ pavisitvā yattha abhilakkhitesu maṅgaladivasādīsu nisīditvā āḷavako siriṃ anubhoti, tasmiṃyeva dibbaratanamaye pallaṅke nisīditvā suvaṇṇābhaṃ muñci. Taṃ disvā yakkhassa itthiyo āgantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā samparivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Bhagavā ‘‘pubbe tumhe dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ samādiyitvā pūjaneyyaṃ pūjetvā imaṃ sampattiṃ pattā, idānipi tatheva karotha, mā aññamaññaṃ issāmacchariyābhibhūtā viharathā’’tiādinā nayena tāsaṃ pakiṇṇakadhammakathaṃ kathesi. Tā bhagavato madhuranigghosaṃ sutvā sādhukārasahassāni datvā bhagavantaṃ samparivāretvā nisīdiṃsuyeva. Gadrabhopi himavantaṃ gantvā āḷavakassārocesi – ‘‘yagghe, mārisa, jāneyyāsi vimāne te bhagavā nisinno’’ti. So gadrabhassa saññaṃ akāsi ‘‘tuṇhī hohi, gantvā kattabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Purisamānena kira lajjito ahosi, tasmā ‘‘mā koci parisamajjhe suṇeyyā’’ti evamakāsi.

A second time, the Yakka Gadrabha said this to the Blessed One: "Āḷavaka is like a hot iron pan, Venerable Sir; he does not know 'mother and father,' or 'ascetics and brahmins,' or 'Dhamma.' But he causes agitation of mind to those who come here; he even splits their hearts; he even takes them by their feet and throws them across the ocean or to another world-system." A second time, the Blessed One said, "I know, Gadrabha, even if it is not a burden to you, may I stay for one night?" "It is not a burden to me, Venerable Sir, but that Yakka, without announcing (your arrival) to him, might deprive me of my life for allowing (you in). I will announce it to him, Venerable Sir." "As you please, Gadrabha, announce it." "Then, Venerable Sir, know (this) yourself." Having paid homage to the Blessed One, he departed towards the Himalayas. The door of the residence itself opened for the Blessed One. The Blessed One, having entered the inner residence, sat on the divine jeweled couch on which Āḷavaka enjoys his splendor, sitting during auspicious days and so on that are meant (for enjoyment), and emitted a golden radiance. Seeing that, the Yakka's women came, paid homage to the Blessed One, and sat surrounding him. The Blessed One delivered various Dhamma talks to them, (saying) in the manner, beginning with, "In the past, you attained this prosperity by giving alms, undertaking precepts, and honoring those worthy of honor. Even now, do the same; do not live overcome by mutual envy and stinginess." Hearing the sweet sound of the Blessed One, they gave thousands of exclamations of "Sadhu!" and sat surrounding the Blessed One. Gadrabha too, having gone to the Himalayas, announced to Āḷavaka, "If you must know, Venerable Sir, the Blessed One is sitting in your palace." He made a sign to Gadrabha, "Be quiet, I will go and do what needs to be done." It is said that he was ashamed by the man, therefore he did so in this way, (thinking) "May no one hear in the midst of the assembly."

Tadā sātāgirahemavatā bhagavantaṃ jetavaneyeva vanditvā ‘‘yakkhasamāgamaṃ gamissāmā’’ti saparivārā nānāyānehi ākāsena gacchanti. Ākāse ca yakkhānaṃ sabbattha maggo natthi, ākāsaṭṭhāni vimānāni pariharitvā maggaṭṭhāneneva maggo hoti. Āḷavakassa pana vimānaṃ bhūmaṭṭhaṃ suguttaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ susaṃvihitadvāraaṭṭālakagopuraṃ upari kaṃsajālasañchannaṃ mañjūsasadisaṃ tiyojanaṃ ubbedhena, tassa upari maggo hoti. Te taṃ padesamāgamma gantuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Buddhānaṃ hi nisinnokāsassa uparibhāgena yāva bhavaggā koci gantuṃ na sakkoti. Te ‘‘kimida’’nti? Āvajjetvā bhagavantaṃ disvā ākāse khittaleḍḍu viya oruyha vanditvā dhammaṃ sutvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā, ‘‘yakkhasamāgamaṃ gacchāma bhagavā’’ti tīṇi vatthūni pasaṃsantā yakkhasamāgamaṃ agamaṃsu. Āḷavako te disvā, ‘‘idha nisīdathā’’ti paṭikkamma okāsamadāsi. Te āḷavakassa nivedesuṃ – ‘‘lābhā te, āḷavaka, yassa te bhavane bhagavā viharati, gacchāvuso, bhagavantaṃ payirupāsassū’’ti. Evaṃ bhagavā bhavaneyeva vihāsi, na yasmiṃ nigrodhe āḷavakassa bhavanaṃ, tassa mūleti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā āḷaviyaṃ viharati āḷavakassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.

Then Sātāgira and Hemavata, after paying homage to the Blessed One right there in Jeta Grove, thinking, "We will go to the yaksha gathering," were traveling through the sky in various vehicles with their retinues. In the sky, however, there is no path for yakkhas everywhere; the path exists only where there is space for passage, avoiding the celestial mansions in the sky. Āḷavaka's celestial mansion, however, was on the ground, well-guarded, surrounded by walls, with well-constructed gate towers and turrets, covered above with a bronze net, resembling a casket, with a height of three yojanas, and the path was above that. They, arriving at that place, were unable to proceed. For no one can go above the space where Buddhas have sat, up to the peak of existence (bhavagga). They, wondering, "What is this?" and reflecting, seeing the Blessed One, descended like a clod of earth thrown in the sky, and after paying homage, hearing the Dhamma, circumambulating, said, "We are going to the yaksha gathering, O Blessed One," praising three objects (of refuge), they went to the yaksha gathering. Āḷavaka, seeing them, said, "Sit here," and stepping aside, gave space. They reported to Āḷavaka, "It is a gain for you, Āḷavaka, that the Blessed One dwells in your dwelling; go, friend, attend upon the Blessed One." Thus, the Blessed One dwelt in the dwelling itself, not at the root of the Nigrodha tree where Āḷavaka's dwelling was. Therefore, it was said: "On one occasion the Blessed One was dwelling at Āḷavi in the dwelling of the yaksha Āḷavaka."

Atha kho āḷavako…pe… etadavoca – ‘‘nikkhama, samaṇā’’ti kasmā panāyaṃ etadavoca? Rosetukāmatāya. Tatrevaṃ ādito pabhuti sambandho veditabbo – ayaṃ hi yasmā assaddhassa saddhākathā dukkathā hoti dussīlādīnaṃ sīlādikathā viya, tasmā tesaṃ yakkhānaṃ santikā bhagavato pasaṃsaṃ sutvāyeva aggimhi pakkhittaloṇasakkharā viya abbhantare kopena taṭataṭāyamānahadayo hutvā ‘‘ko so bhagavā nāma, yo mama bhavanaṃ paviṭṭho’’ti āha. Te ahaṃsu – ‘‘na tvaṃ, āvuso, jānāsi bhagavantaṃ amhākaṃ satthāraṃ, yo tusitabhavane ṭhito pañcamahāvilokitaṃ viloketvā’’tiādinā nayena yāva dhammacakkapavattanā kathentā paṭisandhiādīsu dvattiṃsa pubbanimittāni vatvā, ‘‘imānipi tvaṃ, āvuso, acchariyāni nāddasā’’ti? Codesuṃ. So disvāpi kodhavasena ‘‘nāddasa’’nti āha. Āvuso āḷavaka, passeyyāsi vā tvaṃ, na vā, ko tayā attho passatā vā apassatā vā? Kiṃ tvaṃ karissasi amhākaṃ satthuno, yo tvaṃ taṃ upanidhāya calakkakudha-mahāusabhasamīpe tadahujātavacchako viya, tidhā pabhinnamattavāraṇasamīpe bhiṅkapotako viya, bhāsuravilambitakesarasobhitakkhandhassa migarañño samīpe jarasiṅgālo viya, diyaḍḍhayojanasatapavaḍḍhakāyasupaṇṇarājasamīpe chinnapakkhakākapotako viya khāyasi, gaccha yaṃ te karaṇīyaṃ, taṃ karohīti. Evaṃ vutte duṭṭho āḷavako uṭṭhahitvā manosilātale vāmapādena ṭhatvā – ‘‘passatha dāni tumhākaṃ vā satthā mahānubhāvo, ahaṃ vā’’ti dakkhiṇapādena saṭṭhiyojanamattaṃ kelāsapabbatakūṭaṃ akkami. Taṃ ayokūṭapahaṭo viya niddhantaayopiṇḍo papaṭikāyo muñci, so tatra ṭhatvā, ‘‘ahaṃ āḷavako’’ti ugghosesi. Sakalajambudīpaṃ saddo phari.

Then Āḷavaka…pe… said this: "Get out, ascetic!" Why did he say this? Because he wanted to provoke him. Here, the connection from the beginning should be understood thus: Since the talk of faith is unwelcome to the faithless, like the talk of virtue to the immoral, therefore, having heard praise of the Blessed One from those yakkhas, his heart, like salt thrown into a fire, crackled within with anger, and he said, "Who is this so-called Blessed One who has entered my dwelling?" They said, "Do you not, friend, know the Blessed One, our Teacher, who, standing in the Tusita heaven, having observed the five great observations..." and relating up to the turning of the Wheel of Dhamma, after mentioning the thirty-two portents at the time of rebirth, they reproached him, "Have you not seen these wonders, friend?" He, even having seen, said "I have not seen," due to anger. "Friend Āḷavaka, whether you see or not, what is the point to you whether you see or do not see? What will you do to our Teacher? Compared to him you are like a newborn calf near Calakkakudha and Mahāusabha, like a bhiṅkapotaka bird near a rutting elephant split in three places, like a jarasiṅgāla jackal near the king of beasts with a beautiful mane of shining, hanging filaments, like a fledgling crow with severed wings near the Garuda king with a body of two and a half hundred yojanas. Go, do what you have to do." Thus addressed, the wicked Āḷavaka, rising, standing with his left foot on a slab of red arsenic, kicked the peak of Mount Kelāsa, sixty yojanas away, with his right foot. Like an iron ball struck by an iron hammer, it shed flakes like scales from a fish, and he stood there shouting, "I am Āḷavaka!" The sound spread throughout Jambudīpa.

Cattāro kira saddāsakalajambudīpe sūyiṃsu – yañca puṇṇako yakkhasenāpati dhanañjayakorabyarājānaṃ jūtaṃ jinitvā apphoṭetvā ‘‘ahaṃ jini’’nti ugghosesi; yañca sakko devānamindo kassapabhagavato sāsane osakkante vissakammadevaputtaṃ sunakhaṃ karitvā – ‘‘ahaṃ pāpabhikkhū ca pāpabhikkhuniyo ca upāsake ca upāsikāyo ca sabbeva ca adhammavādino khādāmī’’ti ugghosāpesi; yañca kusajātake pabhāvatihetu sattahi rājūhi nagare uparuddhe pabhāvatiṃ attanā saha hatthikkhandhe āropetvā nagarā nikkhamma – ‘‘ahaṃ sīhassaramahākusarājā’’ti mahāpuriso ugghosesi; yañca kelāsamuddhani ṭhatvā āḷavakoti. Tadā hi sakalajambudīpe dvāre ṭhatvā ugghositasadisaṃ ahosi. Tiyojanasahassavitthato ca himavāpi saṅkampi yakkhassānubhāvena.

It is said that four sounds were heard throughout Jambudīpa: that which Puṇṇaka, the yaksha general, having won the game of dice against King Dhanañjaya of Korabya, shouted, "I have won!"; and that which Sakka, the king of the gods, having turned Vissakamma, the divine architect, into a dog because of Kassapa Buddha's dispensation in decline, had him shout, "I will devour all the evil monks, evil nuns, laymen, laywomen, and all those who speak against the Dhamma!"; and that which the great man, King Sīhassara Mahā Kusa, in the Kusa Jātaka, having placed Prabhāvatī on the elephant's neck with himself, and exiting the city besieged by seven kings because of Prabhāvatī, shouted, "I am King Sīhassara Mahā Kusa!"; and that which Āḷavaka shouted standing on the summit of Kelāsa. Then, it was as if the shouting was done standing at the door of all Jambudīpa. And the Himavanta, three thousand yojanas wide, trembled due to the yaksha's power.

vātamaṇḍalaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi – ‘‘eteneva samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti. Te puratthimādibhedā vātā samuṭṭhahitvā aḍḍhayojanayojanadviyojanatiyojanappamāṇāni pabbatakūṭāni padāletvā vanagaccharukkhādīni ummūlaṃ katvā, āḷavinagaraṃ pakkhantā jiṇṇahatthisālādīni cuṇṇentā chadaniṭṭhakā ākāse vidhamentā. Bhagavā ‘‘mā kassaci uparodho hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Te vātā dasabalaṃ patvā cīvarakaṇṇamattampi cāletuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Tatomahāvassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. ‘‘Udakena ajjhottharitvā samaṇaṃ māressāmī’’ti. Tassānubhāvena uparūpari satapaṭalasahassapaṭalādibhedā valāhakā uṭṭhahitvā pavassiṃsu. Vuṭṭhidhārāvegena pathavī chiddā ahosi. Vanarukkhādīnaṃ upari mahogho āgantvā dasabalassa cīvare ussāvabindumattampi temetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tatopāsāṇavassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Mahantāni mahantāni pabbatakūṭāni dhūmāyantāni pajjalantāni ākāsenāgantvā dasabalaṃ patvā dibbamālāguḷāni sampajjiṃsu. Tatopaharaṇavassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Ekatodhārāubhatodhārāasisattikhurappādayo dhūmāyantā pajjalantā ākāsenāgantvā dasabalaṃ patvā dibbapupphāni ahesuṃ. Tatoaṅgāravassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Kiṃsuka vaṇṇā aṅgārā ākāsenāgantvā dasabalassa pādamūle dibbapupphāni hutvā vikīrayiṃsu. Tatokukkulavassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Accuṇhā kukkulā ākāsenāgantvā dasabalassa pādamūle candanacuṇṇaṃ hutvā nipatiṃsu. Tatovālikavassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Atisukhumavālikā dhūmāyantā pajjalantā ākāsenāgantvā dasabalassa pādamūle dibbapupphāni hutvā nipatiṃsu. Tatokalalavassaṃsamuṭṭhāpesi. Taṃ kalalavassaṃ dhūmāyantaṃ pajjalantaṃ ākāsenāgantvā dasabalassa pādamūle dibbagandhaṃ hutvā nipati. Tatoandhakāraṃsamuṭṭhāpesi ‘‘bhiṃsetvā samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti. Taṃ caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ andhakārasadisaṃ hutvā dasabalaṃ patvā sūriyappabhāvihatamiva andhakāraṃ antaradhāyi.

He stirred up a wind circle thinking, "I will drive the ascetic away with this." Winds, distinguished as eastern and so on, arose, splitting mountain peaks measuring half a yojana, one, two, or three yojanas, uprooting forests, shrubs, and trees, and as they approached Āḷavi City, they pulverized old elephant stables and so on, scattering roof tiles and bricks in the sky. The Blessed One resolved, "Let there be no harm to anyone." Reaching the Ten-Powered One, those winds were unable to move even the edge of his robe. Then, he stirred up a great rain, thinking, "I will kill the ascetic by flooding him with water." By his power, clouds arose one above another in layers of hundreds and thousands, and rained. The earth became riddled with the force of the raindrops. A great flood came over the forest trees and so on, but it could not wet even a drop of sweat on the robe of the Ten-Powered One. Then, he stirred up a stone rain. Huge mountain peaks, smoking and blazing, came through the sky, and reaching the Ten-Powered One, became divine garlands. Then, he stirred up a weapon rain. Single-edged and double-edged swords, spears, razors, and so on, smoking and blazing, came through the sky, and reaching the Ten-Powered One, became divine flowers. Then, he stirred up a coal rain. Coals of kiṃsuka color came through the sky, and at the feet of the Ten-Powered One, they became divine flowers and scattered. Then, he stirred up a cinder rain. Extremely hot cinders came through the sky, and at the feet of the Ten-Powered One, they became sandalwood powder and fell. Then, he stirred up a sand rain. Very fine sand, smoking and blazing, came through the sky, and at the feet of the Ten-Powered One, it became divine flowers and fell. Then, he stirred up a mud rain. That mud rain, smoking and blazing, came through the sky, and at the feet of the Ten-Powered One, it became divine perfume and fell. Then, he stirred up darkness, thinking, "I will frighten the ascetic and drive him away." That darkness, resembling a fourfold army, reaching the Ten-Powered One, vanished as if struck by the light of the sun.

Evaṃ yakkho imāhi navahi vātavassapāsāṇapaharaṇaṅgārakukkulavālikakalalandhakāravuṭṭhīhi bhagavantaṃ palāpetuṃ asakkonto nānāvidhapaharaṇahatthāya anekappakārarūpabhūtagaṇasamākulāya caturaṅginiyā senāya sayameva bhagavantaṃ abhigato. Te bhūtagaṇā anekappakāre vikāre katvā ‘‘gaṇhatha hanathā’’ti bhagavato upari āgacchantā viya honti. Apica kho niddhantalohapiṇḍaṃ viya makkhikā, bhagavantaṃ allīyituṃ asamatthāva ahesuṃ. Evaṃ santepi yathā bodhimaṇḍe māro āgatavelāyameva nivatto, tathā anivattetvā upaḍḍharattimattaṃ byākulamakaṃsu. Evaṃ upaḍḍharattimattaṃ anekappakāravibhiṃsanakadassanenapi bhagavantaṃ cāletuṃ asakkonto āḷavako cintesi – ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ kenaci ajeyyaṃ dussāvudhaṃ muñceyya’’nti.

Thus, the yaksha, unable to drive away the Blessed One with these nine rains of wind, rain, stones, weapons, coals, cinders, sand, mud, and darkness, approached the Blessed One himself with a fourfold army teeming with various kinds of threatening demon hordes, with various kinds of weapons in their hands. Those demon hordes made various kinds of grimaces, appearing to come upon the Blessed One, saying, "Seize him! Strike him!" However, like flies on a molten iron ball, they were unable to cling to the Blessed One. Even so, without retreating as Māra did at the Bodhi tree, they caused confusion for about half the night. Unable to move the Blessed One even with various kinds of frightening displays for about half the night, Āḷavaka thought: "Why don't I release some invincible, difficult-to-use weapon?"

Cattāri kira āvudhāniloke seṭṭhāni – sakkassa vajirāvudhaṃ, vessavaṇassa gadāvudhaṃ, yamassa nayanāvudhaṃ, āḷavakassa dussāvudhanti. Yadi hi sakko duṭṭho vajirāvudhaṃ sinerumatthake pahareyya, aṭṭhasaṭṭhisahassādhikayojanasatasahassaṃ vinivijjhitvā heṭṭhato gaccheyya. Vessavaṇena kujjhanakāle vissajjitaṃ gadāvudhaṃ bahūnaṃ yakkhasahassānaṃ sīsaṃ pātetvā puna hatthapāsaṃ āgantvā tiṭṭhati. Yamena duṭṭhena nayanāvudhena olokitamatte anekāni kumbhaṇḍasahassāni tattakapāle tilā viya pharantāni vinassanti. Āḷavako duṭṭho sace ākāse dussāvudhaṃ muñceyya, dvādasa vassāni devo na vasseyya. Sace pathaviyaṃ muñceyya. Sabbarukkhatiṇādīni sussitvā dvādasavassantare na puna viruheyyuṃ. Sace samudde muñceyya, tattakapāle udakabindu viya sabbamudakaṃ susseyya. Sace sinerusadisepi pabbate muñceyya, khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ hutvā vikireyya. So evaṃ mahānubhāvaṃ dussāvudhaṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ muñcitvā aggahesi. Yebhuyyena dasasahassīlokadhātudevatā vegena sannipatiṃsu ‘‘ajja bhagavā āḷavakaṃ damessati, tattha dhammaṃ sossāmā’’ti yuddhadassanakāmāpi devatā sannipatiṃsu. Evaṃ sakalampi ākāsaṃ devatāhi paripuṇṇamahosi.

It is said that four weapons are the best in the world: Sakka's thunderbolt weapon, Vessavaṇa's club weapon, Yama's eye weapon, and Āḷavaka's difficult-to-use weapon. If Sakka, being angry, were to strike the summit of Mount Sineru with the thunderbolt weapon, it would pierce through one hundred and sixty-eight thousand yojanas and go below. The club weapon released by Vessavaṇa in anger, after felling the heads of many thousands of yakkhas, returns to his hand and stands there. When Yama looks with his eye weapon in anger, many thousands of kumbhaṇḍas perish, scattering like sesame seeds on a hot pan. If Āḷavaka, being angry, were to release the difficult-to-use weapon into the sky, the deva would not rain for twelve years. If he were to release it on the earth, all trees, grass, and so on would wither and not sprout again for twelve years. If he were to release it into the ocean, all the water would dry up like a drop of water on a hot pan. If he were to release it on a mountain like Mount Sineru, it would shatter into fragments and scatter. He took hold of such a powerful difficult-to-use weapon, releasing his upper garment. For the most part, deities from ten thousand world-systems gathered quickly, thinking, "Today the Blessed One will tame Āḷavaka, and we will hear the Dhamma there," and deities who wanted to see the battle also gathered. Thus, the entire sky became exceedingly full of deities.

Atha āḷavako bhagavato samīpe uparūpari vicaritvā vatthāvudhaṃ muñci. Taṃ asanivicakkaṃ viya ākāse bheravasaddaṃ karontaṃ dhūmāyantaṃ pajjalantaṃ bhagavantaṃ patvā yakkhamānamaddanatthaṃ pādapuñchanacoḷaṃ hutvā pādamūle nipati. Āḷavako taṃ disvā chinnavisāṇo viya usabho uddhatadāṭho viya sappo nittejo nimmado nipatitamānaddhajo hutvā cintesi – ‘‘dussāvudhampi me samaṇaṃ nābhibhosi. Kiṃ nu kho kāraṇa’’nti? ‘‘Idaṃ kāraṇaṃ, mettāvihārayutto samaṇo, handa naṃ rosetvā mettāya viyojemī’’ti iminā sambandhenetaṃ vuttaṃ – atha kho āḷavako yakkho yena bhagavā…pe… nikkhama samaṇāti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo – kasmā mayā ananuññāto mama bhavanaṃ pavisitvā gharasāmiko viya itthāgārassa majjhe nisinnosi? Ananuyuttametaṃ samaṇassa yadidaṃ adinnaparibhogo itthisaṃsaggo ca? Tasmā yadi tvaṃ samaṇadhamme ṭhito, nikkhama samaṇāti. Eke pana – ‘‘etāni aññāni ca pharusavacanāni vatvā evāyaṃ etadavocā’’ti bhaṇanti.

Then Āḷavaka, after pacing back and forth near the Blessed One, released the cloth weapon. Making a terrifying sound in the sky like a thunderbolt wheel, smoking and blazing, reaching the Blessed One, in order to subdue the yaksha's pride, it became a foot-wiping cloth and fell at his feet. Āḷavaka, seeing that, like a bull with broken horns, like a snake with bared fangs, without energy, without arrogance, with his banner of pride fallen, thought: "Even my difficult-to-use weapon did not overcome the ascetic. What could be the reason?" "The ascetic is endowed with dwelling in loving-kindness. Come, I will provoke him and separate him from loving-kindness." With this connection, it was said: "Then Āḷavaka the yaksha, went to where the Blessed One was…pe… Get out, ascetic!" Here is the idea: "Why have you entered my dwelling without my permission and sat in the middle of my women's quarters like the owner of the house? Is this not improper for an ascetic, this unpermitted use of things and association with women?" Therefore, if you abide in ascetic practices, get out, ascetic!" Some, however, say: "Having spoken these and other harsh words, that is why he said this."

sādhāvusoti piyavacanena tassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā nikkhami. Tena vuttaṃsādhāvusoti bhagavā nikkhamīti.

Good, friend, having accepted his words with pleasant speech, he went out. Therefore it was said: "Good, friend," the Blessed One went out.

pavisa, samaṇāti āha. Atha subbacoti mudubhūtacittavavatthānakaraṇatthaṃ puna piyavacanaṃ vadantosādhāvusoti bhagavā pāvisi. Āḷavako punappunaṃ tameva subbacabhāvaṃ vīmaṃsanto dutiyampi tatiyampinikkhama pavisāti āha. Bhagavāpi tathā akāsi. Yadi na kareyya, pakatiyāpi thaddhayakkhassa cittaṃ thaddhataraṃ hutvā dhammakathāya bhājanaṃ na bhaveyya. Tasmā yathā nāma mātā rodantaṃ puttakaṃ yaṃ so icchati, taṃ datvā vā katvā vā saññāpesi tathā bhagavā kilesarodanena rodantaṃ yakkhaṃ saññāpetuṃ yaṃ so bhaṇati, taṃ akāsi. Yathā ca dhātī thaññaṃ apivantaṃ dārakaṃ kiñci datvā upalāḷetvā pāyeti, tathā bhagavā yakkhaṃ lokuttaradhammakhīraṃ pāyetuṃ tassa patthitavacanakaraṇena upalāḷento evamakāsi. Yathā ca puriso lābumhi catumadhuraṃ pūretukāmo tassabbhantaraṃ sodheti, evaṃ bhagavā yakkhassa citte lokuttaracatumadhuraṃ pūretukāmo tassabbhantare kodhamalaṃ sodhetuṃ yāva tatiyaṃ nikkhamanapavisanaṃ akāsi.

Enter, ascetic, he said. Then, in order to prepare a basis for a very docile and gentle mind, again speaking pleasant words, "Good, friend," the Blessed One entered. Āḷavaka, repeatedly examining that very docile state, a second and a third time said, "Get out, enter!" The Blessed One did likewise. If he had not done so, the mind of the yaksha, stubborn by nature, would have become even more stubborn and would not have been a vessel for the teaching of the Dhamma. Therefore, just as a mother soothes her crying child by giving or doing what he wants, so too the Blessed One, in order to soothe the yaksha crying with the weeping of defilements, did what he said. And just as a wet nurse, after giving something to a child who is not drinking milk, caresses him and gives him to drink, so too the Blessed One, in order to give the yaksha the milk of supramundane Dhamma, caressing him by doing what he requested, did thus. And just as a man who wants to fill a gourd with the four honeys cleans its inside, so too the Blessed One, wanting to fill the yaksha's mind with the four supramundane honeys, in order to cleanse the impurity of anger within him, did the getting out and entering up to the third time.

nikkhama, samaṇāti. Taṃ ñatvā bhagavāna khvāhaṃ tanti āha. Evaṃ vā vutte taduttarikaraṇīyaṃ pariyesamāno pañhaṃ pucchitabbaṃ maññissati. Taṃ dhammakathāya mukhaṃ bhavissatīti ñatvā,na khvāhaṃ tanti āha. Tatthana-iti paṭikkhepe.Khoti avadhāraṇe.Ahanti attanidassanaṃ.Tanti hetuvacanaṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘yasmā tvaṃ evaṃ cintesi, tasmā ahaṃ, āvuso, neva nikkhamissāmi, yaṃ te karaṇīyaṃ, taṃ karohī’’ti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

Get out, ascetic! Knowing that, the Blessed One said, "I will not go out from you." Having said so, thinking that he will consider what further needs to be done, and that this will be an opening for a Dhamma talk, "I will not go out from you," he said. Here, "na" is a negation. "Kho" is a determination. "Ahaṃ" is a showing of self. "Taṃ" is a word of cause. Therefore, here the meaning should be seen thus: "Because you think thus, therefore, friend, I will never go out; do what you have to do."

pañhaṃ tantiādimāha.

I will ask you a question, and so on, he said.

na khvāhaṃ taṃ, āvuso, passāmi sadevake loketiādimāha.

I do not see anyone, friend, in the world with its devas, and so on, he said.

apica tvaṃ, āvuso, puccha, yadākaṅkhasīti. Tassattho – puccha, yadi ākāṅkhasi, na me pañhāvissajjane bhāro atthi. Atha vā puccha, yaṃ ākaṅkhasi. Sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmīti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvakamahāsāvakehi. Evaṃ bhagavato sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāyaatha kho āḷavako yakkho bhagavantaṃ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi.

Moreover, friend, ask what you wish. Its meaning is: Ask if you wish; there is no burden for me in answering questions. Or, ask what you wish. I will answer everything for you, thus he extended the invitation of omniscience, not shared with individual Buddhas, foremost disciples, or great disciples. When the Blessed One was thus invited with the invitation of omniscience, then Āḷavaka the yaksha addressed the Blessed One in verse.

kiṃ sūdha vittanti, kiṃ su idha vittaṃ.Vittanti dhanaṃ. Taṃ hi pītisaṅkhātaṃ vittiṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘vitta’’nti vuccati.Suciṇṇanti sukataṃ.Sukhanti kāyikacetasikaṃ sātaṃ.Āvahātīti āvahati āneti deti appeti.Have-iti daḷhatthe nipāto.Sādutaranti atisayena sādu. ‘‘Sādhutara’’ntipi pāṭho.Rasānanti rasasaññitānaṃ dhammānaṃ.Kathanti kena pakārena. Kathaṃjīvino jīvitaṃkathaṃjīviṃjīvitaṃ. Gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ pana sānunāsikaṃ vuccati. Kathaṃjīviṃ jīvatanti vā pāṭho, tassa ‘‘jīvantānaṃ kathaṃjīvi’’nti attho. Evaṃ imāya gāthāya ‘‘kiṃ su idha loke purisassa vittaṃ seṭṭhaṃ? Kiṃ su suciṇṇaṃ sukhamāvahāti? Kiṃ rasānaṃ sādutaraṃ? Kathaṃjīviṃ jīvitaṃ seṭṭhamāhū’’ti? Ime cattāro pañhe pucchi.

kiṃ sūdha vittaṃti, what is wealth here? Vittaṃ means wealth. For it creates wealth reckoned as joy, therefore it is called "wealth." Suciṇṇaṃ means well-done. Sukhaṃ means bodily and mental pleasure. Āvahātīti brings, leads, gives, bestows. Have is a particle emphasizing certainty. Sādutaraṃ means exceedingly sweet. "Sādhutara" is also a reading. Rasānaṃ means of things known as flavors (rasa). Kathaṃ means in what manner. Kathaṃjīvino jīvitaṃ kathaṃjīviṃjīvitaṃ. But, for the ease of the verse, it is said with anusvara. Alternatively, the reading is Kathaṃjīviṃ jīvatanti, its meaning being "how is the life of the living?" Thus, in this verse, four questions are asked: "What indeed is the best wealth for a person in this world? What well-done act brings happiness? What is the sweetest of flavors? How is life lived best?"

saddhīdha vittanti. Tattha yathā hiraññasuvaṇṇādi vittaṃ upabhogasukhaṃ āvahati, khuppipāsādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, dāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, muttādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti, lokasantatiñca āvahati, evaṃ lokiyalokuttarā saddhāpi yathāsambhavaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ vipākaṃ sukhamāvahati, saddhādhurena paṭipannānaṃ jātijarādidukkhaṃ paṭibāhati, guṇadāliddiyaṃ vūpasameti, satisambojjhaṅgādiratanapaṭilābhahetu hoti.

saddhīdha vittanti. Therein, just as wealth such as silver and gold brings the happiness of enjoyment, wards off suffering such as hunger and thirst, alleviates poverty, is the cause for obtaining gems such as pearls, and brings about the continuity of the world, so too, faith (saddhā), both mundane and supramundane, brings about happiness as its result, wards off the suffering of birth and old age for those who proceed with faith as their guiding principle, alleviates the poverty of virtues, and is the cause for obtaining gems such as mindfulness as an enlightenment factor.

‘‘Saddho sīlena sampanno, yaso bhogasamappito;

"The faithful one, endowed with virtue, rich in fame and wealth;
Whatever land he visits, in that very place he is honored." (Dhp. 303) –

Purisassāti ukkaṭṭhaparicchedadesanā. Tasmā na kevalaṃ purisassa, itthiādīnampi saddhāvittameva seṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.

Purisassāti is a designation specifying excellence. Therefore, it should be understood that not only for a man, but also for women, etc., faith is the best wealth.

Dhammoti dasakusaladhammo, dānasīlabhāvanādhammo vā.Suciṇṇoti sukato sucarito.Sukhamāvahatīti soṇaseṭṭhiputtaraṭṭhapālādīnaṃ viya manussasukhaṃ, sakkādīnaṃ viya dibbasukhaṃ, pariyosāne mahāpadumādīnaṃ viya nibbānasukhañca āvahati.

Dhammoti means the ten wholesome actions, or the practice of giving, morality, and meditation. Suciṇṇoti means well-done, well-practiced. Sukhamāvahatīti brings happiness, like human happiness to Soṇaseṭṭhiputta Raṭṭhapāla and others, divine happiness to Sakkā and others, and, in the end, the happiness of Nibbāna like to Mahāpaduma and others.

Saccanti ayaṃ saccasaddo anekesu atthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā ’’ tiādīsu (dha. pa. 224) vācāsacce. ‘‘Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.433) viratisacce. ‘‘Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā, pavādiyāse kusalā vadānā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 891) diṭṭhisacce. ‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇasaccānī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.185) brāhmaṇasacce. ‘‘Ekaṃ hi saccaṃ na dutiyamatthī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) paramatthasacce. ‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ kati kusalā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 216) ariyasacce. Idha pana paramatthasaccaṃ nibbānaṃ viratisaccañca abbhantaraṃ katvā vācāsaccaṃ adhippetaṃ, yassānubhāvena udakādīni vase vattenti, jātijarāmaraṇapāraṃ taranti. Yathāha –

Saccaṃti, this word "sacca" (truth) is seen in many meanings. That is to say – in "speak the truth, do not get angry," etc. (Dhp. 224), it is truth of speech. In "established in truth are the ascetics and brahmins," etc. (Jā. 2.21.433), it is truth as abstinence. In "why do the disputants speak various truths, skilled in debate?" etc. (Sn. 891), it is truth as views. In "these four, monks, are the truths of brahmins," etc. (AN. 4.185), it is truth of brahmins. In "for there is one truth, there is no second," etc. (Sn. 890; Mahāni. 119), it is ultimate truth. In "how many of the four truths are wholesome?" etc. (Vibha. 216), it is noble truth. Here, however, the truth of speech is intended, including within it ultimate truth, Nibbāna, and truth as abstinence, by the power of which they control water and other elements, and cross over the far shore of birth, old age, and death. As it was said –

‘‘Saccena vācenudakamhi dhāvati,

"By the truth of speech, he runs on the water,
By truth, the wise kill poison;
By truth, the god thundering sends rain,
Established in truth, they aspire to Nibbāna.

‘‘Ye kecime atthi rasā pathabyā,

"Whatever tastes there are on earth,
Truth is the sweetest of those tastes;
Established in truth are the ascetics and brahmins,
They cross over the far shore of birth and death." (Jā. 2.21.433);

Sādutaranti madhurataraṃ paṇītataraṃ.Rasānanti ye ime ‘‘mūlaraso khandharaso’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 628-630) nayena sāyanīyadhammā, yecime ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ phalarasaṃ (mahāva. 300), arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo, ye te, brāhmaṇa, rūparasā saddarasā (pārā. 3; a. ni. 8.11), anāpatti rasarase (pāci. 605-611), ayaṃ dhammavinayo ekaraso vimuttiraso (cūḷava. 385; a. ni. 8.19), bhāgī vā bhagavā attharasassa dhammarasassā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 149) nayena rūpācārarasupavajjā avasesā byañjanādayo ‘‘dhammarasā’’ti vuccanti. Tesaṃ rasānaṃ saccaṃ have sādutaraṃ saccameva sādutaraṃ. Sādhutaraṃ vā, seṭṭhataraṃ, uttamataraṃ. Mūlarasādayo hi sarīramupabrūhenti, saṃkilesikañca sukhamāvahanti. Saccarase viratisaccavācāsaccarasā samathavipassanādīhi cittaṃ upabrūheti, asaṃkilesikañca sukhamāvahati. Vimuttiraso paramatthasaccarasaparibhāvitattā sādu, attharasadhammarasā ca tadadhigamūpāyabhūtaṃ atthañca dhammañca nissāya pavattitoti.

Sādutaraṃti means more sweet, more exquisite. Rasānaṃti means those desirable things in the way of "root flavor, stem flavor," etc. (Dhs. 628-630), and those remaining flavors such as condiments that are not subject to the fault of form, conduct, taste, etc. in the way of "I allow, monks, all fruit flavors (Mahāva. 300), the ascetic Gotama is devoid of taste, those flavors of form, brahmins, sounds (Pārā. 3; AN. 8.11), there is no offense in flavors (pāci. 605-611), this Dhamma-Vinaya is of one taste, the taste of liberation (Cūḷava. 385; AN. 8.19), the Blessed One is a partaker of the taste of meaning, the taste of Dhamma" (Mahāni. 149), are called "flavor of Dhamma". Of those flavors, truth indeed is sweeter, truth alone is sweeter. Or, more pleasing, more excellent, more sublime. For root flavors and the like nourish the body and bring about defiled happiness. In the flavor of truth, abstinence from truth and the flavor of truth of speech nourish the mind through serenity and insight, and bring about undefiled happiness. The flavor of liberation is sweet because it is imbued with the flavor of ultimate truth, and the flavors of meaning and flavor of Dhamma occur dependent on the meaning and the Dhamma that are the means to its attainment.

Paññājīviṃjīvitanti ettha pana yvāyaṃ andhekacakkhudvicakkhukesu dvicakkhupuggalo gahaṭṭho vā kammantānuṭṭhāna-saraṇagamanadāna-saṃvibhāga-sīlasamādānuposathakammādi gahaṭṭhapaṭipadaṃ, pabbajito vā avippaṭisārakarasīlasaṅkhātaṃ taduttaricittavisuddhiādibhedampi pabbajitapaṭipadaṃ paññāya ārādhetvā jīvati, tassa paññāya jīvino jīvitaṃ, taṃ vā paññājīvitaṃ seṭṭhamāhūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

Paññājīviṃjīvitaṃti, here the life of one who lives by wisdom (paññā), having cultivated with wisdom either the conduct of a householder, such as performance of duties, going for refuge, giving, sharing, undertaking morality, observance of the uposatha, etc., or the conduct of a renunciant, such as morality that causes no remorse, together with its divisions of higher purification of mind, etc., whether that person is one-eyed, two-eyed, or a two-eyed individual among the blind and those with sight, that life lived by wisdom is said to be the best; thus the meaning should be understood.

kathaṃsu tarati oghanti gāthamāha. Athassa bhagavā purimanayeneva vissajjentosaddhāya taratīti gāthamāha. Tattha kiñcāpi yo catubbidhamoghaṃ tarati, so saṃsāraṇṇavampi tarati, vaṭṭadukkhampi acceti, kilesamalāpi parisujjhati, evaṃ santepi pana yasmā assaddho oghataraṇaṃ asaddahanto na pakkhandati, pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavossaggena pamatto tattheva visattattā saṃsāraṇṇavaṃ na tarati, kusīto dukkhaṃ viharati vokiṇṇo akusalehi dhammehi, appañño suddhimaggaṃ ajānanto na parisujjhati, tasmā tappaṭipakkhaṃ dassentena bhagavatā ayaṃ gāthā vuttā.

kathaṃsu tarati oghanti, he spoke this verse. Then the Blessed One, explaining it in the same manner as before, spoke the verse saddhāya taratī. Therein, although one who crosses the fourfold flood (ogha) also crosses the ocean of existence (saṃsāra), transcends the round of suffering, and purifies the impurities of defilements, nevertheless, since the faithless one, disbelieving in crossing the flood, does not strive, being heedless due to abandoning the mind in the five sense pleasures, does not cross the ocean of existence due to being attached to them, the slothful one lives in misery, being overwhelmed by unwholesome qualities, and the unwise one, not knowing the path of purification, is not purified, therefore, the Blessed One spoke this verse showing its opposite.

saddhāya tarati oghanti iminā padena diṭṭhoghataraṇaṃ sotāpattimaggaṃ sotāpannañca pakāseti. Yasmā pana sotāpanno kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya sātaccakiriyasaṅkhatena appamādena samannāgato dutiyamaggaṃ ārādhetvā ṭhapetvā sakidevimaṃ lokaṃ āgamanamaggaṃ avasesaṃ sotāpattimaggena atiṇṇaṃ bhavoghavatthuṃ saṃsāraṇṇavaṃ tarati, tasmāappamādena aṇṇavanti iminā padena bhavoghataraṇaṃ sakadāgāmimaggaṃ sakadāgāmiñca pakāseti. Yasmā ca sakadāgāmī vīriyena tatiyamaggaṃ ārādhetvā sakadāgāmimaggena anatītaṃ kāmoghavatthuṃ kāmoghasaññitañca kāmadukkhamacceti, tasmāvīriyena dukkhamaccetīti iminā padena kāmoghataraṇaṃ anāgāmimaggaṃ anāgāmiñca pakāseti. Yasmā pana anāgāmī vigatakāmasaññāya parisuddhāya paññāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ catutthamaggapaññaṃ ārādhetvā anāgāmimaggena appahīnaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ paramamalaṃ pajahati, tasmāpaññāya parisujjhatīti, iminā padena avijjoghataraṇaṃ arahattamaggañca arahattañca pakāseti. Imāya ca arahattanikūṭena kathitāya gāthāya pariyosāne yakkho sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi.

saddhāya tarati oghanti, by this phrase, he reveals the crossing of the flood of views (diṭṭhogha), the stream-entry path (sotāpattimagga), and the stream-enterer (sotāpanna). But since the stream-enterer, endowed with diligence in the continuous practice of cultivating wholesome qualities, cultivates the second path and, having established it, crosses the ocean of existence (saṃsāra), the basis for the flood of becoming (bhavogha), which remains untraversed by the stream-entry path, the coming to this world only once more, therefore, by this phrase appamādena aṇṇavaṃ, he reveals the crossing of the flood of becoming, the once-returning path (sakadāgāmimagga), and the once-returner (sakadāgāmi). And since the once-returner, with vigor, cultivates the third path and transcends the flood of sensual desire (kāmogha) and the suffering of sensual desire, the basis for the flood of sensual desire, which remains untraversed by the once-returning path, therefore, by this phrase vīriyena dukkhamacceti, he reveals the crossing of the flood of sensual desire, the non-returning path (anāgāmimagga), and the non-returner (anāgāmi). But since the non-returner, with the cessation of sensual desire and with pure wisdom, cultivates the perfectly pure fourth path wisdom and abandons the supreme impurity reckoned as ignorance, which remains unabandoned by the non-returning path, therefore, by this phrase paññāya parisujjhati, he reveals the crossing of the flood of ignorance (avijjogha), the arahantship path (arahattamagga), and arahantship (arahatta). And with this verse, spoken with the subtlety of arahantship, at the end, the yaksha was established in the fruit of stream-entry.

kathaṃsu labhate paññanti imaṃ chappadaṃ gāthamāha. Tatthakathaṃsūti sabbattheva atthayuttipucchā honti. Ayaṃ hi paññādiatthaṃ ñatvā tassa yuttiṃ pucchati – ‘‘kathaṃ, kāya yuttiyā, kena kāraṇena paññaṃ labhatī’’ti? Esa nayo dhanādīsu.

kathaṃsu labhate paññanti, he spoke this six-word verse. Therein, kathaṃsūti, everywhere there are questions with reasons. For he asks about the reasoning of attaining wisdom, knowing the meaning of wisdom, etc. – "how, by what reasoning, by what cause does one attain wisdom?" This method also applies to wealth and the like.

saddahānotiādimāha. Tassattho – yena pubbabhāge kāyasucaritādibhedena aparabhāge ca sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyabhedena dhammena arahanto buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakā nibbānaṃ pattā, taṃ saddahāno arahataṃ dhammaṃ nibbānapattiyā lokiyalokuttarapaññaṃ labhati, tañca kho na saddhāmattakeneva. Yasmā pana saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsati, payirupāsanto sotaṃ odahati, ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, tasmā upasaṅkamanato pabhuti yāva dhammassavanena sussūsaṃ labhati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – taṃ dhammaṃ saddahitvāpi ācariyupajjhāye kālena upasaṅkamitvā vattakaraṇena payirupāsitvā yadā payirupāsanāya ārādhitacittā kiñci vattukāmā honti. Atha adhigatāya sotukāmatāya sotaṃ odahitvā suṇanto labhatīti. Evaṃ sussūsampi ca satiavippavāsena appamatto subhāsitadubbhāsitaññutāya vicakkhaṇo eva labhati, na itaro. Tenāha ‘‘appamatto vicakkhaṇo’’ti.

saddahānotiādi, he said this. Its meaning is – believing in that Dhamma by which arahants, Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and disciples of the Buddha have attained Nibbāna through the division of wholesome bodily conduct, etc., in the prior part, and the division of the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment in the latter part, one attains mundane and supramundane wisdom for the attainment of Nibbāna, the Dhamma of the arahants, and that not by mere faith alone. But since one born of faith approaches, approaching, attends, attending, lends an ear, lending an ear, hears the Dhamma, therefore, from approaching onwards, up to hearing the Dhamma, he attains attentiveness. What has been said? Even after believing in that Dhamma, having approached the teachers and preceptors in due time and having attended to them by performing duties, when they are about to speak something with minds pleased by the attendance, then, having lent an ear with a desire to hear, he attains it. And thus, even the attentive one, being mindful with non-forgetfulness, discerning with knowledge of what is well-spoken and ill-spoken, attains it, not the other. Therefore, he said "mindful, discerning."

Evaṃ yasmā saddhāya paññalābhasaṃvattanikaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, sussūsāya sakkaccaṃ paññādhigamūpāyaṃ suṇāti, appamādena gahitaṃ na pamussati. Vicakkhaṇatāya anūnādhikaṃ aviparītañca gahetvā vitthārikaṃ karoti. Sussūsāya vā ohitasoto paññāpaṭilābhahetuṃ dhammaṃ suṇāti, appamādena sutadhammaṃ dhāreti, vicakkhaṇatāya dhatānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthamupaparikkhati, athānupubbena paramatthasaccaṃ sacchikaroti, tasmāssa bhagavā ‘‘kathaṃsu labhate pañña’’nti puṭṭho imāni cattāri kāraṇāni dassento imaṃ gāthamāha.

Thus, since by faith one undertakes the practice that leads to the attainment of wisdom, by attentiveness one hears the means for attaining wisdom with reverence, by mindfulness one does not forget what has been grasped, and by discernment one grasps what is neither deficient nor excessive nor distorted and makes it expansive. Or, by attentiveness, having lent an ear, one hears the Dhamma that is the cause for attaining wisdom, by mindfulness one remembers the heard Dhamma, by discernment one investigates the meaning of the remembered Dhammas, then gradually one realizes the ultimate truth. Therefore, the Blessed One, when asked "how does one attain wisdom?" spoke this verse showing these four reasons.

patirūpakārīti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha desakālādīni ahāpetvā lokiyassa lokuttarassa vā dhanassa patirūpaṃ adhigamūpāyaṃ karotītipatirūpakārī. Dhuravāti cetasikavīriyavasena anikkhittadhuro.Uṭṭhātāti, ‘‘yo ca sītañca uṇhañca, tiṇā bhiyyo na maññatī’’tiādinā (theragā. 232) nayena kāyikavīrīyavasena uṭṭhānasampanno asithilaparakkamo.Vindate dhananti ekamūsikāya nacirasseva catusatasahassasaṅkhaṃ cūḷantevāsī viya lokiyadhanañca, mahallakamahātissatthero viya lokuttaradhanañca labhati. So ‘‘tīhiyeva iriyāpathehi viharissāmī’’ti vattaṃ katvā thinamiddhāgamanavelāya palālacumbaṭakaṃ temetvā sīse katvā galappamāṇaṃ udakaṃ pavisitvā thinamiddhaṃ paṭibāhanto dasahi vassehi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.Saccenāti vacīsaccenāpi ‘‘saccavādī bhūtavādī’’ti, paramatthasaccenāpi ‘‘buddho paccekabuddho ariyasāvako’’ti evaṃ kittiṃ pappoti.Dadanti yaṃkiñci icchitapatthitaṃ dadanto mittāni ganthati, sampādeti karotīti attho. Duddadaṃ vā dadaṃ taṃ ganthati. Dānamukhena vā cattāripi saṅgahavatthūni gahitānīti veditabbāni, tehi mittāni karotīti vuttaṃ hoti.

patirūpakārīti, he spoke this verse. Therein, patirūpakārī means one who, not abandoning the proper time and place, etc., does the proper means for attaining mundane or supramundane wealth. Dhuravāti means one who does not abandon the burden due to mental vigor. Uṭṭhātāti, means one endowed with effort due to bodily vigor in the way of "and he does not consider cold or heat to be more than grass" (Theragā. 232), with unremitting exertion. Vindate dhananti, like Cūḷantevāsī with one mouse who soon attained four hundred thousand, he obtains both mundane wealth and supramundane wealth like Mahallakamahātissatthera. Having made a vow that "I will live only in three postures," he attained arahantship in ten years, countering drowsiness by soaking a rag in water and placing it on his head, and entering water up to his neck. Saccenāti, by truth of speech also, "speaking the truth, speaking what is factual," and by ultimate truth also, he obtains fame, "Buddha, Paccekabuddha, noble disciple." Dadaṃti, giving whatever is desired and wished for, he binds friends, accomplishes, makes, is the meaning. Or, giving what is difficult to give, he binds them. It should be understood that by way of giving, the four bases of sympathy are also taken, by which it is said that he makes friends.

yassetetiādīmāha. Tassattho – yassa ‘‘saddahāno arahata’’nti ettha vuttāya sabbakalyāṇadhammuppādikāya saddhāya samannāgatattāsaddhassa, gharamesinoti gharāvāsaṃ pañca vā kāmaguṇe esantassa gavesantassa kāmabhogino gahaṭṭhassa ‘‘saccena kittiṃ pappotī’’ti ettha vuttappakāraṃsaccaṃ. ‘‘Sussūsaṃ labhate pañña’’nti ettha sussūsapaññānāmena vuttovadamo. ‘‘Dhuravā uṭṭhātā’’ti ettha dhuranāmena uṭṭhānanāmena ca vuttādhiti. ‘‘Dadaṃ mittāni ganthatī’’ti ettha vuttappakārocāgocāti ete caturo dhammā santi.Sa ve pecca na socatīti idhalokā paralokaṃ gantvā sa ve na socatīti.

yassetetiādi, he said this. Its meaning is – because he is endowed with faith that is the cause for the arising of all good qualities, as said in "believing in the arahants," saddhassa, gharamesinoti, for the householder who seeks after the household life, searching for the five sense pleasures, saccaṃ, the truth as described in "he obtains fame by truth." Damo, the taming, which was just spoken of with the name attentiveness and wisdom in "he attains wisdom by being attentive." Dhiti, the resoluteness spoken of with the name burden and the name effort in "bearing the burden, making effort." Cāgo, the generosity as described in "giving, he binds friends," these four qualities exist. Sa ve pecca na socatīti, having gone from this world to the next world, he does not grieve.

iṅgha aññepītiādimāha. Tatthaiṅghāti codanatthe nipāto.Aññepīti aññepi dhamme puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchassu. Aññepi vā pūraṇādayo sabbaññupaṭiññe puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇe pucchassu. Yadi amhehi ‘‘saccena kittiṃ pappotī’’ti ettha vuttappakārā saccā bhiyyo kittippattikāraṇaṃ vā, ‘‘sussūsaṃ labhate pañña’’nti ettha sussūsāti paññāpadesena vuttā dammā bhiyyo lokiyalokuttarapaññāpaṭilābhakāraṇaṃ vā, ‘‘dadaṃ mittāni ganthatī’’ti ettha vuttappakārā cāgā bhiyyo mittaganthanakāraṇaṃ vā, ‘‘dhuravā uṭṭhātā’’ti ettha taṃ taṃ atthavasaṃ paṭicca dhuranāmena uṭṭhānanāmena ca vuttāya mahābhārasahanatthena ussoḷhibhāvappattāya vīriyasaṅkhātāya khantyā bhiyyo lokiyalokuttaradhanavindanakāraṇaṃ vā, ‘‘saccaṃ dammo dhiti cāgo’’ti evaṃ vuttehi imeheva catūhi dhammehi bhiyyo asmā lokā paraṃ lokaṃ pecca asocanakāraṇaṃ vā idha vijjatīti ayamettha saddhiṃ saṅkhepayojanāya atthavaṇṇanā. Vitthārato pana ekamekaṃ padaṃ atthuddhārapaduddhārapadavaṇṇanānayehi vibhajitvā veditabbā.

iṅgha aññepītiādi, he said this. Therein, iṅghāti is a particle in the sense of urging. Aññepīti, ask other wandering ascetics and brahmins about other qualities too. Or, ask other wandering ascetics and brahmins who claim to be all-knowing, like Pūraṇa and others. If there is more cause for obtaining fame than the truth as described in "he obtains fame by truth," or more cause for attaining mundane and supramundane wisdom than the taming mentioned with the name of wisdom in attentiveness as described in "he attains wisdom by being attentive," or more cause for binding friends than the generosity as described in "giving, he binds friends," or more cause for obtaining mundane and supramundane wealth than the perseverance reckoned as vigor mentioned with the name bearing the burden and the name effort, having attained the state of being energetic in enduring great burdens, with regard to each specific object, or more cause for not grieving after passing away from this world to the next than these four qualities mentioned as "truth, taming, resoluteness, generosity," exists here, this is a concise description of meaning for the sake of summarizing the purpose. But in detail, each single word should be distinguished by the methods of meaning extraction, word extraction, and word description.

kathaṃ nu dāni puccheyyaṃ, puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇeti vatvā yepissa apucchanakāraṇaṃ na jānanti, tepi jānāpentoyohaṃ ajjapajānāmi, yo attho samparāyikoti āha. Tatthaajjāti ajjādiṃ katvāti adhippāyo.Pajānāmīti yathāvuttena pakārena jānāmi.Yo atthoti ettāvatā ‘‘sussūsaṃ labhate pañña’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ dasseti.Samparāyikoti iminā ‘‘yassete caturo dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ pecca sokābhāvakāraṇaṃ samparāyikaṃ.Atthoti ca kāraṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayaṃ hi atthasaddo ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti evamādīsu (pārā. 1; dī. ni. 1.255) pāṭhatthe vattati. ‘‘Attho me, gahapati, hiraññasuvaṇṇenā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.250; ma. ni. 3.258) vicakkhaṇe. ‘‘Hoti sīlavataṃ attho’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.11) vuḍḍhimhi. ‘‘Bahujano bhajate atthahetū’’tiādīsu dhane. ‘‘Ubhinnamatthaṃ caratī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.7.66; saṃ. ni. 1.250; theragā. 443) hite. ‘‘Atthe jāte ca paṇḍita’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.1.92) kāraṇe. Idha pana kāraṇe. Tasmā yaṃ paññādilābhādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ, yañca pecca sokābhāvassa kāraṇaṃ samparāyikaṃ, taṃ yohaṃ ajja bhagavatā vuttanayena sāmaṃyeva pajānāmi, so kathaṃ nu dāni puccheyyaṃ puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇeti evamettha saṅkhepato attho veditabbo.

kathaṃ nu dāni puccheyyaṃ, puthū samaṇabrāhmaṇeti, saying this, in order to make known even to those who do not know the reason for asking, he said, yohaṃ ajjapajānāmi, yo attho samparāyiko. Here, ajjā means having made today the beginning, is the meaning. Pajānāmī means I know in the manner as stated. Yo attho: by this much, he shows the visible benefit (diṭṭhadhammika) stated in the way beginning with "one obtains wisdom by paying attention". Samparāyiko: by this, he shows the future benefit (samparāyika), the cause of the absence of sorrow after death, stated in "for whom these four qualities". Attho is a designation for cause. This word 'attha' occurs in the sense of meaning in "sātthaṃ sabyañjana" (pārā. 1; dī. ni. 1.255). In "Attho me, gahapati, hiraññasuvaṇṇenā" (dī. ni. 2.250; ma. ni. 3.258), it means discerning. In "Hoti sīlavataṃ attho" (jā. 1.1.11), it means growth. In "Bahujano bhajate atthahetū," it means wealth. In "Ubhinnamatthaṃ caratī" (jā. 1.7.66; saṃ. ni. 1.250; theragā. 443), it means welfare. In "Atthe jāte ca paṇḍita" (jā. 1.1.92), it means cause. But here it means cause. Therefore, the meaning here should be understood concisely as, "How indeed should I now ask the various ascetics and brahmins, since I myself understand today, in the way spoken by the Blessed One, both the visible benefit which is the cause of gaining wisdom and so on, and the future benefit which is the cause of the absence of sorrow after death."

atthāya vata me buddhoti āha. Tatthaatthāyāti hitāya vuḍḍhiyā ca.Yattha dinnaṃ mahapphalanti ‘‘yassete caturo dhammā’’ti ettha vuttacāgena yattha dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ, taṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyaṃ buddhaṃ pajānāmīti attho. Keci pana ‘‘saṅghaṃ sandhāya evamāhā’’ti bhaṇanti.

He said, atthāya vata me buddho. Here, atthāyā means for welfare and growth. Yattha dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ: the meaning is, I know the Buddha to be the supreme object of offerings, to whom, when offerings are given, the fruit is great, as stated in "for whom these four qualities." Some, however, say that "he spoke thus referring to the Sangha."

so ahaṃ vicarissāmītiādimāha. Tatthagāmā gāmanti devagāmā devagāmaṃ.Purā puranti devanagarato devanagaraṃ.Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammatanti ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata bhagavā, svākkhāto vata bhagavato dhammo’’tiādinā nayena buddhasubodhitañca dhammasudhammatañca ca-saddena ‘‘suppaṭipanno vata bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’tiādinā saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca abhitthavitvā namassamāno dhammaghosako hutvā vicarissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.

He said beginning with so ahaṃ vicarissāmī. Here, gāmā gāmaṃ means from Devagama to Devagama. Purā puraṃ means from Devanagara to Devanagara. Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammataṃ: having praised and revered both the perfect enlightenment of the Buddha and the perfect quality of the Dhamma in the manner beginning with "Indeed, the Blessed One is a Fully Enlightened One; indeed, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed by the Blessed One," and also, by including 'ca', the perfect practice of the Sangha, in the manner beginning with "Indeed, the Sangha of the Blessed One's disciples is practicing well," it is said that "I will wander about as a proclaimer of the Dhamma."

Evamimāya gāthāya pariyosānañca rattivibhāvanañca sādhukārasadduṭṭhānañca āḷavakakumārassa yakkhabhavanaṃ ānayanañca ekakkhaṇeyeva ahosi. Rājapurisā sādhukārasaddaṃ sutvā – ‘‘evarūpo sādhukārasaddo ṭhapetvā buddhe na aññesaṃ abbhuggacchati, āgato nu kho bhagavā’’ti āvajjentā bhagavato sarīrappabhaṃ disvā pubbe viya bahi aṭṭhatvā nibbisaṅkā antoyeva pavisitvā addasaṃsu bhagavantaṃ yakkhassa bhavane nisinnaṃ, yakkhañca añjaliṃ paggahetvā ṭhitaṃ. Disvāna yakkhaṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘ayaṃ te, mahāyakkha, rājakumāro balikammāya ānīto, handa naṃ khāda vā bhuñja vā, yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti. So sotāpannattā lajjito visesena ca bhagavato purato evaṃ vuccamāno atha taṃ kumāraṃ ubhohi hatthehi paṭiggahetvā bhagavato upanāmesi ‘‘ayaṃ, bhante, kumāro mayhaṃ pesito, imāhaṃ bhagavato dammi, hitānukampakā buddhā, paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā imaṃ dārakaṃ imassa hitatthāya sukhatthāyā’’ti imañca gāthamāha –

Thus, with this verse, the completion, the dawning of the night, the exclamation of "sadhu" (well done), the rising up, and the bringing of Alavaka Kumara to the yaksha's dwelling, all happened in a single moment. The king's men, hearing the exclamation of "sadhu", thinking, "Such an exclamation of 'sadhu' does not rise up for others except for the Buddha; has the Blessed One arrived?", and turning their attention, saw the radiance of the Blessed One's body and, without staying outside as before, entered inside and saw the Blessed One sitting in the yaksha's dwelling, and the yaksha standing with his hands in añjali. Seeing him, they said to the yaksha, "This prince, great yaksha, has been brought here for a sacrifice; go ahead, eat him or consume him, or do whatever you see fit." Because he was a Sotapanna, and especially because he was being spoken to in this way in front of the Blessed One, feeling ashamed, he then took that boy with both hands and presented him to the Blessed One, saying, "This, venerable sir, is the boy sent to me; I give him to the Blessed One; Buddhas are compassionate for the welfare [of beings], may the Blessed One accept this child for his welfare and happiness," and he spoke this verse:

‘‘Imaṃ kumāraṃ satapuññalakkhaṇaṃ,

"This boy, marked with a hundred auspicious signs,
Endowed with all limbs, with perfectly formed features;
With uplifted heart, gladly I give him to you,
Accept him, O Seer, for the welfare of the world."

Paṭiggahesi bhagavā kumāraṃ. Paṭiggaṇhanto ca yakkhassa ca kumārassa ca maṅgalakaraṇatthaṃ pādūnagāthaṃ abhāsi. Taṃ yakkho kumāraṃ saraṇaṃ gamento tikkhattuṃ catutthapādena pūresi. Seyyathidaṃ –

The Blessed One accepted the boy. While accepting, he spoke a verse lacking a quarter, for the sake of bestowing auspiciousness on both the yaksha and the boy. The yaksha, leading the boy to take refuge, completed it three times with the fourth line. As follows:

‘‘Dīghāyuko hotu ayaṃ kumāro,

"May this boy be long-lived,
And may you, yaksha, be happy;
May you both stand free from illness, for the welfare of the world,
This boy goes for refuge to the Buddha;
This boy goes for refuge to the Dhamma;
This boy goes for refuge to the Sangha."

Atha bhagavā kumāraṃ rājapurisānaṃ adāsi – ‘‘imaṃ vaḍḍhetvā puna mameva dethā’’ti. Evaṃ so kumāro rājapurisānaṃ hatthato yakkhassa hatthaṃ, yakkhassa hatthato bhagavato hatthaṃ, bhagavato hatthato puna rājapurisānaṃ hatthaṃ gatattā nāmato ‘‘hatthako āḷavako’’ti jāto. Taṃ ādāya paṭinivatte rājapurise disvā kassakavanakammikādayo ‘‘kiṃ yakkho kumāraṃ atidaharattā na icchī’’ti? Bhītā pucchiṃsu. Rājapurisā ‘‘mā bhāyatha. Khemaṃ kataṃ bhagavatā’’ti sabbamārocesuṃ. Tato ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sakalaṃ āḷavinagaraṃ ekakolāhalena yakkhābhimukhaṃ ahosi. Yakkhopi bhagavato bhikkhācārakāle anuppatte pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā upaḍḍhamaggaṃ anugantvā nivatti.

Then the Blessed One gave the boy to the king's men, saying, "Raise him and give him back to me again." Thus, because that boy went from the hands of the king's men to the hand of the yaksha, from the hand of the yaksha to the hand of the Blessed One, and from the hand of the Blessed One back to the hand of the king's men, he became known by the name "Hatthaka Alavaka." Seeing the king's men returning, carrying him, the farmers, traders, workers, and others, fearing, asked, "Why did the yaksha not want the boy because he was too young?" The king's men announced, "Do not fear. Safety has been made by the Blessed One," Then, with a single uproar of "sadhu, sadhu," the entire city of Alavi turned towards the yaksha. The yaksha, too, when the Blessed One's time for alms-gathering arrived, taking the bowl and robes, followed him halfway and then turned back.

Atha bhagavā nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco nagaradvāre aññatarasmiṃ vivitte rukkhamūle paññattabuddhāsane nisīdi. Tato mahājanakāyena saddhiṃ rājā ca nāgarā ca ekato sampiṇḍitvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamma vanditvā parivāretvā nisinnā – ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, evaṃ dāruṇaṃ yakkhaṃ damayitthā’’ti pucchiṃsu. Tesaṃ bhagavā yuddhamādiṃ katvā ‘‘evaṃ navavidhaṃ vassaṃ vassetvā evaṃ vibhiṃsanakaṃ akāsi, evaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi. Tassāhaṃ evaṃ vissajjesi’’nti tamevāḷavakasuttaṃ kathesi. Kathāpariyosāne caturāsītipāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Tato rājā ceva nāgarā ca vessavaṇamahārājassa bhavanasamīpe yakkhassa bhavanaṃ katvā pupphagandhādisakkārupetaṃ niccabaliṃ pavattesuṃ. Tañca kumāraṃ viññutaṃ pattaṃ ‘‘tvaṃ bhagavantaṃ nissāya jīvitaṃ labhi, gaccha bhagavantaṃyeva payirupāsassu bhikkhusaṅghañcā’’ti vissajjesuṃ. So bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca payirupāsamāno nacirasseva anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya sabbaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā pañcasataupāsakaparivāro ahosi. Bhagavā ca naṃ etadagge niddisi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ upāsakānaṃ catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi parisaṃ saṅgaṇhantānaṃ yadidaṃ hatthako āḷavako’’ti (a. ni. 1.251). Dvādasamaṃ.

Then the Blessed One, having gone for alms in the city and completed his meal, sat down at the city gate at the root of a certain secluded tree on the Buddha-seat that had been prepared. Then the king, together with a great crowd of people and the townspeople, gathered together, approached the Blessed One, paid homage, surrounded him, and sat down, asking, "How, venerable sir, did you tame such a fierce yaksha?" To them, the Blessed One, starting with the battle, recounted that very Alavaka Sutta, saying, "In this way, having rained down in nine ways, he did such a frightening thing, he asked such a question, and I answered him in this way." At the end of the discourse, a realization of the Dhamma arose in eighty-four thousand beings. Then the king and the townspeople, near the dwelling of Vessavana Maharaja, built a dwelling for the yaksha and instituted a regular offering with flowers, incense, and other forms of respect. When that boy had grown up and come of age, they released him, saying, "You obtained life by depending on the Blessed One; go and attend upon the Blessed One and the Sangha of monks." Attending upon the Blessed One and the Sangha of monks, not long after, he became established in the fruit of Non-Returning and, having memorized all the Buddha's teachings, he had a retinue of five hundred lay devotees. And the Blessed One designated him as foremost in this regard: "Monks, Hatthaka Alavaka is the foremost of my lay disciples who gather a following by means of the four bases of sympathy" (a. ni. 1.251). The twelfth [sutta is completed].

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā

Thus in the Sāratthappakāsinī,

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Commentary to the Samyutta Nikaya,

11. Sakkasaṃyuttaṃ

11. Sakkasaṃyuttaṃ

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. Paṭhamavaggo

1. Suvīrasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Suvīrasuttavaṇṇanā

247.Sakkasaṃyuttassa paṭhameabhiyaṃsūti kadā abhiyaṃsu? Yadā balavanto ahesuṃ, tadā. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – sakko kira magadharaṭṭhe macalagāmake magho nāma māṇavo hutvā tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇakammaṃ karonto satta vatapadāni pūretvā tattha kālaṅkato devaloke nibbatti. Taṃ balavakammānubhāvena saparisaṃ sesadevatā dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhantaṃ disvā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtā āgatā’’ti nevāsikā gandhapānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko sakaparisāya saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘mārisā mā gandhapānaṃ pivittha, pivanākāramattameva dassethā’’ti. Te tattha akaṃsu. Nevāsikadevatā suvaṇṇasarakehi upanītaṃ gandhapānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ pivitvā mattā tattha tattha suvaṇṇapathaviyaṃ patitvā sayiṃsu. Sakko ‘‘gaṇhatha puttahatāya putte’’ti te pādesu gahetvā sinerupāde khipāpesi. Sakkassa puññatejena tadanuvattakāpi sabbe tattheva patiṃsu. Te sineruvemajjhakāle saññaṃ labhitvā, ‘‘tātā na suraṃ pivimha, na suraṃ pivimhā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya asurā nāma jātā. Atha nesaṃ kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhimatale dasayojanasahassaṃ asurabhavanaṃ nibbatti. Sakko tesaṃ nivattetvā anāgamanatthāya ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –

247. In the first [sutta] of Sakkasaṃyutta, abhiyaṃsū: When did they approach? When they were strong. Here is the connected story: It seems that Sakka, in the Magadha country, in the village of Macala, having been a young man named Magha, taking thirty-three men, doing meritorious deeds, fulfilling seven vows, having died there, was reborn in the deva-world. Seeing him, along with his retinue, surpassing the remaining devas in ten ways due to the power of his strong merit, the resident devas prepared intoxicating drinks, [saying], "Deva-sons who are newcomers have arrived." Sakka gave a sign to his retinue, "Friends, do not drink the intoxicating drink; only show the manner of drinking." They did so there. The resident devas, drinking the intoxicating drink brought in golden vessels to their heart's content, fell down there and then on the golden earth and lay down. Sakka, [saying], "Seize the sons of the murderers!", had them seized by the feet and thrown down at the foot of Mount Sineru. By the power of Sakka's merit, all those who followed him fell down in the same place. Gaining consciousness in the middle of Mount Sineru, they said, "Fathers, we did not drink liquor, we did not drink liquor." From then on, they were born as Asuras. Then, due to the karma-produced seasonal conditions, an Asura-abode, ten thousand yojanas [in extent], arose on the lower surface of Mount Sineru. Sakka placed guards to prevent them from returning, regarding which it was said:

‘‘Antarā dvinnaṃ ayujjhapurānaṃ,

"Between the two warring cities,
Guards have been established in five ways;
Nagas who carry water from the Karoṭi lake,
And Kumbhandas associated with arrogance, and the four great [kings]."

udakasaddena nāgā gahitā. Te hi udake balavanto honti. Tasmā sinerussa paṭhamālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.Karoṭisaddena supaṇṇā gahitā. Tesaṃ kira karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ, tena taṃ nāmaṃ labhiṃsu. Dutiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.Payassahārīsaddena kumbhaṇḍā gahitā. Dānavarakkhasā kira te. Tatiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.Madanayutasaddena yakkhā gahitā. Visamacārino kirate yujjhasoṇḍā. Catutthālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.Caturo ca mahantāti cattāro mahārājāno vuttā. Pañcamālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Tasmā yadi asurā kupitāvilacittā devapuraṃ upayanti yuddhesū, yaṃ girino paṭhamaṃ paribhaṇḍaṃ, taṃ uragā paṭibāhanti evaṃ sesesu sesā.

By the word udaka, Nagas are included. For they are strong in water. Therefore, their guard is on the first terrace of Mount Sineru. By the word karoṭi, Supaṇṇas are included. It seems that their drink and food is called 'karoṭi', hence they obtained that name. Their guard is on the second terrace. By the words payassahārī, Kumbhaṇḍas are included. They are Dānava-Rakkhasas. Their guard is on the third terrace. By the words madanayuta, Yakkhas are included. It seems that they are of uneven conduct and fond of fighting. Their guard is on the fourth terrace. Caturo ca mahantā: the four great kings are mentioned. Their guard is on the fifth terrace. Therefore, if the Asuras, with angry and agitated minds, approach the city of the devas for war, the Uragas repel that which is the first layer of the mountain; in this way, the rest [are repelled] by the rest.

Te pana asurā āyuvaṇṇarasaissariyasampattīhi tāvatiṃsasadisāva. Tasmā antarā attānaṃ ajānitvā pāṭaliyā pupphitāya, ‘‘na idaṃ devanagaraṃ, tattha pāricchattako pupphati, idha pana cittapāṭalī, jarasakkenāmhākaṃ suraṃ pāyetvā vañcitā, devanagarañca no gahitaṃ, gacchāma tena saddhiṃ yujjhissāmā’’ti hatthiassarathe āruyha suvaṇṇarajatamaṇiphalakāni gahetvā, yuddhasajjā hutvā, asurabheriyo vādentā mahāsamudde udakaṃ dvidhā bhetvā uṭṭhahanti. Te deve vuṭṭhe vammikamakkhikā vammikaṃ viya sineruṃ abhiruhitu ārabhanti. Atha nesaṃ paṭhamaṃ nāgehi saddhiṃ yuddhaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ kho pana yuddhe na kassaci chavi vā cammaṃ vā chijjati, na lohitaṃ uppajjati, kevalaṃ kumārakānaṃ dārumeṇḍakayuddhaṃ viya aññamaññaṃ santāsanamattameva hoti. Koṭisatāpi koṭisahassāpi nāgā tehi saddhiṃ yujjhitvā te asurapuraṃyeva pavesetvā nivattanti.

But those Asuras are just like the Tāvatiṃsa devas in terms of lifespan, beauty, taste, sovereignty, and prosperity. Therefore, not recognizing themselves in between, when the pāṭalī [trumpet flower] is in bloom, [they think,] "This is not the city of the devas; in that place, the pāricchattaka [coral tree] blooms, but here [there is only] the mottled pāṭalī. We were deceived by Jara Sakka after making us drink liquor, and our city of the devas was taken; let us go and fight with him," mounting elephants, horses, and chariots, taking gold, silver, and jeweled shields, preparing for battle, sounding the Asura-drums, they rise up in the great ocean, cleaving the water in two. When the devas have risen up, like white ants [climbing] an anthill, they begin to climb Mount Sineru. Then their first battle is with the Nagas. In that battle, however, no one's skin or hide is cut, no blood arises, [there is] only mutual intimidation, like the wooden-peg battle of boys. Hundreds of thousands of millions of Nagas, having fought with them, escort them into the Asura-city and then turn back.

tāta suvīrātiādimāha.

He said, beginning with tāta suvīrā. [The sutta explains how the devas lost a battle to the asuras due to their intoxication and lack of mindfulness.]

Evaṃ bhaddantavāti khoti evaṃ hotu bhaddaṃ tava iti kho.Pamādaṃ āpādesīti pamādaṃ akāsi. Accharāsaṅghaparivuto saṭṭhiyojanaṃ vitthārena suvaṇṇamahāvīthiṃ otaritvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷanto nandanavanādīsu vicaratīti attho.

Evaṃ bhaddantavāti kho: May it be well with you, thus [he says]. Pamādaṃ āpādesī: He fell into negligence. The meaning is that he, surrounded by a company of nymphs, descending on the sixty-yojana-wide golden great-street, wandering in the Nandana grove and so on, playing with the stars.

Anuṭṭhahanti anuṭṭhahanto.Avāyāmanti avāyamanto.Alasvassāti alaso assa.Na ca kiccāni kārayeti kiñci kiccaṃ nāma na kareyya.Sabbakāmasamiddhassāti sabbakāmehi samiddho assa.Taṃ me, sakka, varaṃ disāti, sakka devaseṭṭha, taṃ me varaṃ uttamaṃ ṭhānaṃ okāsaṃ disaṃ ācikkha kathehīti vadati.Nibbānassa hi so maggoti kammaṃ akatvā jīvitaṭṭhānaṃ nāma nibbānassa maggo. Paṭhamaṃ.

Anuṭṭhahaṃ: Not striving. Avāyāmaṃ: Not making effort. Alasvassā: He would be lazy. Na ca kiccāni kāraye: He would not do any work. Sabbakāmasamiddhassā: He would be endowed with all pleasures. Taṃ me, sakka, varaṃ disā: Sakka, lord of devas, tell me, show me that excellent place, that supreme opportunity, that direction. Nibbānassa hi so maggo: Living without doing deeds is indeed the path to Nibbana. The first [sutta is completed].

2. Susīmasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Susīmasuttavaṇṇanā

248.Dutiyesusīmanti attano puttasahassassa antare evaṃnāmakaṃ ekaṃ puttameva. Dutiyaṃ.

248. In the second [sutta], susīma: one son of that name among his thousand sons. The second [sutta is completed].

3. Dhajaggasuttavaṇṇanā
3. Dhajaggasuttavaṇṇanā

249.Tatiyesamupabyūḷhoti sampiṇḍito rāsibhūto.Dhajaggaṃullokeyyathāti sakkassa kira diyaḍḍhayojanasatāyāmo ratho. Tassa hi pacchimanto paṇṇāsayojano, majjhe rathapañjaro paṇṇāsayojano, rathasandhito yāva rathasīsā paṇṇāsayojanāni. Tadeva pamāṇaṃ diguṇaṃ katvā tiyojanasatāyāmotipi vadantiyeva. Tasmiṃ yojanikapallaṅko atthato, tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ matthake ṭhapitaṃ, ekasmiṃyeva yuge sahassaājaññā yuttā, sesālaṅkārassa pamāṇaṃ natthi. Dhajo panassa aḍḍhatiyāni yojanasatāni uggato, yassa vātāhatassa pañcaṅgikatūriyasseva saddo niccharati, taṃ ullokeyyāthāti vadati. Kasmā? Taṃ passantānañhi rājā no āgantvā parisapariyante nikhātathambho viya ṭhito, kassa mayaṃ bhāyāmāti bhayaṃ na hoti.Pajāpatissāti so kira sakkena samānavaṇṇo samānāyuko dutiyaṃ āsanaṃ labhati. Tathāvaruṇo īsānoca. Varuṇo pana tatiyaṃ āsanaṃ labhati, īsāno catutthaṃ.Palāyīti asurehi parājito tasmiṃ rathe ṭhito appamattakampi rajadhajaṃ disvā palāyanadhammo.

249. Tatiye samupabyūḷho means gathered together, heaped up. Dhajaggaṃ ullokeyyathā means it is said that Sakka's chariot was one and a half hundred yojanas long. Its rear portion was fifty yojanas, the chariot frame in the middle was fifty yojanas, and from the chariot joint to the top of the chariot was fifty yojanas. Some even say that doubling that measure makes it three hundred yojanas long. In it, there was a throne of one yojana in size, and a three-yojana white parasol was placed on top. A thousand thoroughbred steeds were yoked to a single yoke, and there was no measure to the remaining adornments. However, his banner was raised two and a half hundred yojanas high, from which, when struck by the wind, a sound like that of a fivefold musical instrument would emanate. He says that one should look up to that. Why? Because for those who see it, the king seems not to have come but to be standing like a pillar planted at the edge of the assembly, and they have no fear, thinking, "Whom do we fear?". Pajāpatissā means that he, being of equal complexion and age to Sakka, obtains the second seat. Likewise, Varuṇa and Īsāna. Varuṇa obtains the third seat, and Īsāna the fourth. Palāyī means one who, defeated by the asuras, is liable to flee upon seeing even a tiny speck of dust on that chariot.

Itipi so bhagavātiādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāneva.Idamavocāti idaṃ dhajaggaparittaṃ nāma bhagavā avoca, yassa āṇākhette koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ānubhāvo vattati. Idaṃ āvajjetvā hi yakkhabhayacorabhayādīhi dukkhehi muttānaṃ anto natthi. Tiṭṭhatu aññadukkhavūpasamo, idaṃ āvajjamāno hi pasannacitto ākāsepi patiṭṭhaṃ labhati.

Itipi so bhagavā etc., has already been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga. Idamavocā means the Blessed One spoke this, which is called the Dhajagga-paritta, in whose sphere of authority its power extends to a hundred thousand million world-systems. There is no end to those freed from suffering due to yaksha-fear, thief-fear, and so on, by reciting this. Let alone the pacification of other sufferings, one who recites this with a serene mind even gains a foothold in the sky.

Tatridaṃ vatthu – dīghavāpicetiyamhi kira sudhākamme kayiramāne eko daharo muddhavedikāpādato patitvā cetiyakucchiyā bhassati. Heṭṭhā ṭhito bhikkhusaṅgho ‘‘dhajaggaparittaṃ, āvuso, āvajjāhī’’ti āha. So maraṇabhayena tajjito ‘‘dhajaggaparittaṃ maṃ rakkhatū’’ti āha. Tāvadevassa cetiyakucchito dve iṭṭhakā nikkhamitvā sopānaṃ hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu, upariṭṭhito vallinisseṇiṃ otāresuṃ. Tasmiṃ nisseṇiyaṃ ṭhite iṭṭhakā yathāṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhaṃsu. Tatiyaṃ.

Here is an instance of that: It is said that while whitewashing was being done at the Dīghavāpi-cetiya, a young man fell from the base of the parapet and slid down the inside of the cetiya. The Saṅgha of bhikkhus standing below said, "Recite the Dhajagga-paritta, Āvuso." Urged on by fear of death, he said, "May the Dhajagga-paritta protect me!" At that very moment, two bricks came out from the inside of the cetiya and stood as steps, and a vine ladder was lowered from above. When he stood on that ladder, the bricks returned to their original places. Third.

4. Vepacittisuttavaṇṇanā
4. Vepacittisuttavaṇṇanā

250.Catutthevepacittīti so kira asurānaṃ sabbajeṭṭhako.Yenāti nipātamattaṃnanti ca.Kaṇṭhapañcamehīti dvīsu hatthesu pādesu kaṇṭhe cāti evaṃ pañcahi bandhanehi. Tāni pana naḷinasuttaṃ viya makkaṭakasuttaṃ viya ca cakkhussāpāthaṃ āgacchanti, iriyāpathaṃ rujjhanti. Tehi pana citteneva bajjhati, citteneva muccati.Akkosatīti corosi bālosi mūḷhosi thenosi oṭṭhosi goṇosi gadrabhosi nerayikosi tiracchānagatosi, natthi tuyhaṃ sugati, duggatiyeva tuyhaṃ pāṭikaṅkhāti imehi dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosati.Paribhāsatīti, jarasakka, na tvaṃ sabbakālaṃ jinissasi, yadā asurānaṃ jayo bhavissati, tadā tampi evaṃ bandhitvā asurabhavanassa dvāre nipajjāpetvā pothāpessāmīti ādīni vatvā tajjeti. Sakko vijitavijayo na taṃ manasi karoti, mahāpaṭiggahaṇaṃ panassa matthake vidhunanto sudhammadevasabhaṃ pavisati ceva nikkhamati ca.Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho esa sakko imāni pharusavacanāni bhayena titikkhati, udāhu adhivāsanakhantiyā samannāgatattā’’ti? Vīmaṃsanto abhāsi.

250. In the fourth, vepacittī means he was the most senior of the asuras. Yenā is merely a particle, and so is na. Kaṇṭhapañcamehī means with five bonds: on the two hands, the two feet, and the neck. These, however, come into sight like lotus fibers or spiderwebs, and they obstruct movement. However, one is bound by thought and freed by thought. Akkosatī means he reviles with these ten grounds for abuse: "You are a thief, a fool, an idiot, a rogue, a liar, a cow, a donkey, a hell-dweller, an animal; there is no good destination for you, only a bad destination is to be expected for you." Paribhāsatī means he threatens, saying things like, "Old Sakka, you will not always be victorious. When the asuras are victorious, then I will bind you in the same way, make you lie down at the gate of the asura-mansion, and beat you." Sakka, victorious in battle, does not take that to heart, but shaking the great offering on his head, he enters and exits the Sudhammā-assembly hall of the devas. Ajjhabhāsī means he spoke, considering, "Is this Sakka enduring these harsh words out of fear, or is it because he is endowed with forbearance and patience?"

Dubbalyā noti dubbalabhāvena nu.Paṭisaṃyujeti paṭisaṃyujeyya paṭipphareyya.Pabhijjeyyunti virajjeyyuṃ. Pakujjheyyuntipi pāṭho.Paranti paccatthikaṃ.Yo sato upasammatīti yo satimā hutvā upasammati, tassa upasamaṃyevāhaṃ bālassa paṭisedhanaṃ maññeti attho.Yadā naṃ maññatīti yasmā taṃ maññati.Ajjhāruhatīti ajjhottharati.Gova bhiyyo palāyinanti yathā goyuddhe tāvadeva dve gāvo yujjhante gogaṇo olokento tiṭṭhati, yadā pana eko palāyati, atha naṃ palāyantaṃ sabbo gogaṇo bhiyyo ajjhottharati. Evaṃ dummedho khamantaṃ bhiyyo ajjhottharatīti attho.

Dubbalyā no means is it due to weakness? Paṭisaṃyuje means should retaliate, should fight back. Pabhijjeyyunti means would become estranged. Pakujjheyyunti is also a reading. Para means an adversary. Yo sato upasammatī means I consider the restraint of a wise person who is mindful to be restraint itself, that is the meaning. Yadā naṃ maññatī means because he considers him so. Ajjhāruhatī means overpowers. Gova bhiyyo palāyinanti means just as when two cows are fighting in a cow-fight, the herd stands watching, but when one flees, then the whole herd overpowers the fleeing one even more. Likewise, a foolish person overpowers one who is patient even more, that is the meaning.

Sadatthaparamāti sakatthaparamā.Khantyā bhiyyo na vijjatīti tesu sakaatthaparamesu atthesu khantito uttaritaro añño attho na vijjati.Tamāhu paramaṃ khantinti yo balavā titikkhati, tassa taṃ khantiṃ paramaṃ āhu.Bālabalaṃnāma aññāṇabalaṃ. Taṃ yassa balaṃ, abalameva taṃ balanti āhu kathentīti dīpeti.Dhammaguttassāti dhammena rakkhitassa, dhammaṃ vā rakkhantassa.Paṭivattāti paṭippharitvā vattā, paṭippharitvā vā bālabalanti vadeyyāpi, dhammaṭṭhaṃ pana cāletuṃ samattho nāma natthi.Tasseva tena pāpiyoti tena kodhena tasseva puggalassa pāpaṃ. Katarassa?Yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati. Tikicchantānanti ekavacane bahuvacanaṃ, tikicchantanti attho.Janā maññantīti evarūpaṃ attano ca parassa cāti ubhinnaṃ atthaṃ tikicchantaṃ nipphādentaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘andhabālo aya’’nti andhabālaputhujjanāva evaṃ maññanti.Dhammassa akovidāti catusaccadhamme achekā.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Khoti nipātamattaṃ. Catutthaṃ.

Sadatthaparamā means intent on their own benefit. Khantyā bhiyyo na vijjatī means among those aims that are for one's own benefit, there is no other thing superior to patience. Tamāhu paramaṃ khantinti means they call that patience supreme, which is endured by one who is strong. Bālabalaṃ means the strength of ignorance. He indicates that they say, relate, that the strength of one whose strength that is, is indeed weakness. Dhammaguttassā means one protected by the Dhamma, or one protecting the Dhamma. Paṭivattā means one who replies after retaliating, or one might even say 'retaliating weakness,' but truly there is no one able to make a Dhamma-abiding person waver. Tasseva tena pāpiyoti means through that anger, evil befalls that very person. Which one? Yo kuddhaṃ paṭikujjhati, one who retaliates against one who is angry. Tikicchantānanti, the singular is used in place of the plural, meaning those who are treating. Janā maññantīti means only foolish, blind ordinary people think thus of such a person who is treating and accomplishing the benefit of both himself and others, thinking "this is a blind fool". Dhammassa akovidāti means unskilled in the Four Noble Truths. Idhāti means in this Dispensation. Khoti is merely a particle. Fourth.

5. Subhāsitajayasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Subhāsitajayasuttavaṇṇanā

251.Pañcameasurindaṃ etadavocāti chekatāya etaṃ avoca. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘parassa nāma gāhaṃ mocetvā paṭhamaṃ vattuṃ garu. Parassa vacanaṃ anugantvā pana pacchā sukhaṃ vattu’’nti.Pubbadevāti devaloke ciranivāsino pubbasāmikā, tumhākaṃ tāva paveṇiāgataṃ bhaṇathāti.Adaṇḍāvacarāti daṇḍāvacaraṇarahitā, daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā gahetabbanti evamettha natthīti attho. Pañcamaṃ.

251. In the fifth, asurindaṃ etadavocā means he spoke thus skillfully. For it occurred to him, "It is proper to speak first after releasing another's argument. But it is pleasant to speak after following another's words." Pubbadevā means the former owners, long-time residents in the deva-world; speak what has come to you by tradition. Adaṇḍāvacarāti means those who do not carry a stick, that is, there is no taking up of a stick or weapon here, that is the meaning. Fifth.

6. Kulāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Kulāvakasuttavaṇṇanā

252.Chaṭṭheajjhabhāsīti tassa kira simbalivanābhimukhassa jātassa rathasaddo ca ājānīyasaddo dhajasaddo ca samantā asanipātasaddo viya ahosi. Taṃ sutvā simbalivane balavasupaṇṇā palāyiṃsu, jarājiṇṇā ceva rogadubbalā ca asañjātapakkhapotakā ca palāyituṃ asakkontā, maraṇabhayena tajjitā ekappahāreneva mahāviravaṃ viraviṃsu. Sakko taṃ sutvā ‘‘kassa saddo, tātā’’ti? Mātaliṃ pucchi. Rathasaddaṃ, te deva, sutvā supaṇṇā palāyituṃ asakkontā viravantīti. Taṃ sutvā karuṇāsamāvajjitahadayo abhāsi.Īsāmukhenāti rathassa īsāmukhena. Yathā kulāvake īsāmukhaṃ na sañcuṇṇeti, evaṃ iminā īsāmukhena te parivajjaya. So hi ratho puññapaccayanibbatto cakkavāḷapabbatepi sinerumhipi sammukhībhūte vinivijjhitvāva gacchati na sajjati, ākāsagatasadiseneva gacchati. Sace tena simbalivanena gato bhaveyya, yathā mahāsakaṭe kadalivanamajjhena vā eraṇḍavanamajjhena vā gacchante sabbavanaṃ vibhaggaṃ nimmathitaṃ hoti, evaṃ tampi simbalivanaṃ bhaveyya. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

252. In the sixth, ajjhabhāsī means for him, born facing the silk-cotton tree forest, the sound of the chariot, the sound of the thoroughbred steeds, and the sound of the banner were like the sound of thunderbolts all around. Hearing that, the strong garudas in the silk-cotton tree forest fled, and those who were old and infirm, and those who were weak from disease, and the fledglings whose wings had not yet developed, being unable to flee, terrified by the fear of death, cried out a great cry with a single utterance. Hearing that, with his heart stirred by compassion, Sakka spoke. Īsāmukhenāti means with the chariot's shaft-mouth. Just as the shaft-mouth does not crush a nest, likewise avoid them with this shaft-mouth. For that chariot, born of the force of merit, pierces and goes right through even the Cakkavāḷa-mountain and Mount Sineru when they appear in its path, it does not get stuck, it goes as if in the sky. If it had gone through that silk-cotton tree forest, just as when a large cart goes through the middle of a banana grove or the middle of a castor-oil plant grove, the whole forest would be broken and churned up, so too that silk-cotton tree forest would have been. Sixth.

7. Nadubbhiyasuttavaṇṇanā
7. Nadubbhiyasuttavaṇṇanā

253.Sattameupasaṅkamīti ‘‘ayaṃ sakko ‘yopi me assa supaccatthiko, tassa pāhaṃ na dubbheyya’nti cinteti, mayā tassa paccatthikataro nāma natthi, vīmaṃsissāmi tāva naṃ, kiṃ nu kho maṃ passitvā dubbhati, na dubbhatī’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkami.Tiṭṭha vepacitti gahitosīti vepacitti, ettheva tiṭṭha, gahito tvaṃ mayāti vadati. Saha vacanenevassa so kaṇṭhapañcamehi bandhanehi baddhova ahosi.Sapassu ca meti mayi adubbhatthāya sapathaṃ karohīti vadati.Yaṃ musābhaṇato pāpanti imasmiṃ kappe paṭhamakappikesu cetiyarañño pāpaṃ sandhāyāha.Ariyūpavādinoti kokalikassa viya pāpaṃ.Mittadduno ca yaṃ pāpanti mahākapijātakemahāsatte duṭṭhacittassa pāpaṃ.Akataññunoti devadattasadisassa akataññuno pāpaṃ. Imāni kira imasmiṃ kappe cattāri mahāpāpāni. Sattamaṃ.

253. In the seventh, upasaṅkamī means thinking, "This Sakka thinks 'May I not be malicious towards one who is very hostile to me,' there is no one more hostile to him than me, I will test him, I wonder if he becomes malicious when he sees me, or does not become malicious," he approached. Tiṭṭha vepacitti gahitosīti means Vepacitti, stay right here, you are seized by me. As soon as he spoke those words, he was bound by those five bonds on the neck. Sapassu ca meti means make an oath to me not to be malicious. Yaṃ musābhaṇato pāpanti refers to the evil of Cetiya-rāja in the first cycle of this aeon. Ariyūpavādinoti means evil like that of Kokālika. Mittadduno ca yaṃ pāpanti means the evil of one with a wicked mind towards the great being in the Mahākapijātaka.Akataññuno**ti means the evil of an ungrateful person like Devadatta. It is said that these are the four great evils in this aeon. Seventh.

8. Verocanaasurindasuttavaṇṇanā
8. Verocanaasurindasuttavaṇṇanā

254.Aṭṭhameaṭṭhaṃsūti dvārapālarūpakāni viya ṭhitā.Nipphadāti nipphatti, yāva attho nipphajjati, tāva vāyamethevāti vadati. Dutiyagāthā sakkassa. Tatthakhantyā bhiyyoti nipphannasobhanesu atthesu khantito uttaritaro attho nāma natthi.Atthajātāti kiccajātā. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi hi upādāya akiccajāto satto nāma natthi. Ito etto gamanamattampi kiccameva hoti.Saṃyogaparamā tveva, sambhogā sabbapāṇinanti pārivāsikaodanādīni hi asambhogārahāni honti, tāni puna uṇhāpetvā bhajjitvā sappimadhuphāṇitādīhi saṃyojitāni sambhogārahāni honti. Tenāha ‘‘saṃyogaparamā tveva, sambhogā sabbapāṇina’’nti.Nipphannasobhano atthoti ime atthā nāma nipphannāva sobhanti. Puna catutthagāthā sakkassa. Tatthāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

254. In the eighth, aṭṭhaṃsūti means they stood like doorkeepers. Nipphadāti means accomplishment, until the aim is accomplished, one should strive, that is what he says. The second verse is Sakka's. There, khantyā bhiyyoti means in aims that are accomplished and beautiful, there is no other thing superior to patience. Atthajātāti means kinds of business. For indeed, from the jackal onwards, there is no being that is a non-business entity. Even just going here and there is business. Saṃyogaparamā tveva, sambhogā sabbapāṇinanti means communal meals, etc., are not fit for enjoyment, but when those are reheated, fried, and combined with ghee, honey, molasses, etc., they are fit for enjoyment. Therefore he says, "Indeed, combinations are supreme, enjoyments for all beings." Nipphannasobhano atthoti means these aims are beautiful only when they are accomplished. Again, the fourth verse is Sakka's. There, too, the meaning should be understood in the manner already stated. Eighth.

9. Araññāyatanaisisuttavaṇṇanā
9. Araññāyatanaisisuttavaṇṇanā

255.Navamepaṇṇakuṭīsu sammantīti himavantapadese ramaṇīye araññāyatane rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānacaṅkamanādīhi sampannāsu paṇṇasālāsu vasanti.Sakko ca devānamindo vepacitti cāti ime dve janā jāmātikasasurā kālena kalahaṃ karonti, kālena ekato caranti, imasmiṃ pana kāle ekato caranti.Paṭaliyoti gaṇaṅgaṇūpāhanā.Khaggaṃ olaggetvāti khaggaṃ aṃse olaggetvā.Chattenāti dibbasetacchattena matthake dhārayamānena.Apabyāmato karitvāti byāmato akatvā.Ciradikkhitānanti cirasamādiṇṇavatānaṃ.Ito paṭikkammāti ‘‘ito pakkama parivajjaya, mā uparivāte tiṭṭhā’’ti vadanti.Na hettha devāti etasmiṃ sīlavantānaṃ gandhe devā na paṭikkūlasaññino, iṭṭhakantamanāpasaññinoyevāti dīpeti. Navamaṃ.

255. In the ninth, paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantīti means they dwell in leaf huts in a delightful forest abode in the Himalayan region, complete with places for night-time dwelling, daytime dwelling, walking, and so on. Sakko ca devānamindo vepacitti cāti means these two people, father-in-law and son-in-law, sometimes quarrel, sometimes go together, but at this time they are going together. Paṭaliyoti means sandals with designs. Khaggaṃ olaggetvāti means hanging the sword on his shoulder. Chattenāti means carrying a divine white parasol above his head. Apabyāmato karitvāti means without making a bow. Ciradikkhitānanti means those who have long undertaken vows. Ito paṭikkammāti means they say, "Go away from here, avoid it, do not stand upwind." Na hettha devāti means the devas here are not repulsed by the scent of the virtuous, they are indeed of pleasant mind and agreeable perception. Ninth.

10. Samuddakasuttavaṇṇanā
10. Samuddakasuttavaṇṇanā

256.Dasamesamuddatīre paṇṇakuṭīsūti cakkavāḷamahāsamuddapiṭṭhiyaṃ rajatapaṭṭavaṇṇe vālukapuḷine vuttappakārāsu paṇṇasālāsu vasanti.Siyāpi noti siyāpi amhākaṃ.Abhayadakkhiṇaṃ yāceyyāmāti abhayadānaṃ yāceyyāma. Yebhuyyena kira devāsurasaṅgāmo mahāsamuddapiṭṭhe hoti. Asurānaṃ na sabbakālaṃ jayo hoti, bahuvāre parājayova hoti. Te devehi parājitā palāyantā isīnaṃ assamapadena gacchantā ‘‘sakko imehi saddhiṃ mantetvā amhe nāseti, gaṇhatha puttahatāya putte’’ti kupitā assamapade pānīyaghaṭacaṅkamanasālādīni viddhaṃsenti. Isayo araññato phalāphalaṃ ādāya āgatā naṃ disvā puna dukkhena paṭipākatikaṃ karonti. Tepi punappunaṃ tatheva vināsenti. Tasmā ‘‘idāni tesaṃ saṅgāmo paccupaṭṭhito’’ti sutvā evaṃ cintayiṃsu.

256. In the tenth, samuddatīre paṇṇakuṭīsūti means they dwell in leaf huts of the kind already mentioned on the sandy shores of the great ocean of the Cakkavāḷa, which are the color of a silver plate. Siyāpi noti means perhaps to us. Abhayadakkhiṇaṃ yāceyyāmāti means we should ask for the gift of safety. It is said that most of the deva-asura battles take place on the surface of the great ocean. The asuras do not always win, defeat is more often the case. Those who are defeated by the devas, while fleeing and passing through the hermitages of the sages, thinking, "Sakka is conspiring with these to destroy us, seize the sons of the murderers," angered, they destroy water pots, walking halls, etc., in the hermitages. The sages, having brought fruits and roots from the forest, see them and again painstakingly prepare them. They, too, repeatedly destroy them in the same way. Therefore, hearing that a battle is now imminent for them, they thought thus.

Kāmaṃkaroti icchitakaro.Bhayassa abhayassa vāti bhayaṃ vā abhayaṃ vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace tvaṃ abhayaṃ dātukāmo, abhayaṃ dātuṃ pahosi. Sace bhayaṃ dātukāmo. Bhayaṃ dātuṃ pahosi. Amhākaṃ pana abhayadānaṃ dehīti.Duṭṭhānanti viruddhānaṃ.Pavuttanti khette patiṭṭhāpitaṃ.

Kāmaṃkaroti means one who does as he wishes. Bhayassa abhayassa vāti means either fear or safety. This is what was said - if you wish to give safety, you are able to give safety. If you wish to give fear, you are able to give fear. But give us the gift of safety. Duṭṭhānanti means hostile. Pavuttanti means established in the field.

Tikkhattuṃ ubbijjīti sāyamāsabhattaṃ bhuñjitvā sayanaṃ abhiruyha nipanno niddāya okkantamattāya samantā ṭhatvā sattisatena pahaṭo viya viravanto uṭṭhahati, dasayojanasahassaṃ asurabhavanaṃ ‘‘kimida’’nti saṅkhobhaṃ āpajjati. Atha naṃ āgantvā ‘‘kimida’’nti pucchanti. So ‘‘na kiñcī’’ti vadati. Dutiyayāmādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti asurānaṃ ‘‘mā bhāyi, mahārājā’’ti taṃ assāsentānaṃyeva aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Evamassa tato paṭṭhāya gelaññajātaṃ cittaṃ vepati. Teneva cassa ‘‘vepacittī’’ti aparaṃ nāmaṃ udapādīti. Dasamaṃ.

Tikkhattuṃ ubbijjīti means having eaten the evening barley meal and lain down on the bed, just as he is about to fall asleep, he starts up crying out as if struck by a hundred spears from all around, and the asura-mansion ten thousand yojanas across is thrown into turmoil, "What is this?" Then, coming to him, they ask, "What is this?" He says, "Nothing." The same method applies during the middle watch of the night and at dawn. Thus, just as they are reassuring him, "Do not fear, Great King," the sun rises. In this way, from then on, a sickness arose in him, and his mind trembled. Because of that, another name, "Vepacitti," arose for him. Tenth.

Paṭhamo vaggo.

First Vagga.

2. Dutiyavaggo

2. Dutiyavaggo

1. Vatapadasuttavaṇṇanā
1. Vatapadasuttavaṇṇanā

257.Dutiyavaggassa paṭhamevatapadānīti vatakoṭṭhāsāni.Samattānīti paripuṇṇāni.Samādinnānīti gahitāni.Kule jeṭṭhāpacāyīti kulajeṭṭhakānaṃ mahāpitā mahāmātā cūḷapitā cūḷamātā mātulo mātulānītiādīnaṃ apacitikārako.Saṇhavācoti piyamudumadhuravāco.Muttacāgoti vissaṭṭhacāgo.Payatapāṇīti deyyadhammadānatthāya sadā dhotahattho.Vossaggaratoti vossajjane rato.Yācayogoti parehi yācitabbāraho,yācayogoti vā yācayogeneva yutto.Dānasaṃvibhāgaratoti dāne ca saṃvibhāge ca rato. Paṭhamaṃ.

257. In the first (sutta) of the Second Vagga, vatapadānī means sections (koṭṭhāsa) concerning observances. Samattānī means complete. Samādinnānī means undertaken. Kule jeṭṭhāpacāyī means one who honors the elders in the family, such as grandparents, parents, uncles, aunts, etc. Saṇhavāco means one who speaks gentle, soft, and sweet words. Muttacāgo means one who is open-handed in giving. Payatapāṇī means one whose hands are always washed, ready for giving. Vossaggarato means one who delights in relinquishing. Yācayogo means worthy of being asked for things by others or, alternatively, endowed with the quality of being asked. Dānasaṃvibhāgarato means one who delights in giving and sharing. The first.

2. Sakkanāmasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Sakkanāma Sutta

258.Dutiyemanussabhūtoti magadharaṭṭhe macalagāme manussabhūto.Āvasathaṃ adāsīti catumahāpathe mahājanassa āvasathaṃ kāretvā adāsi.Sahassampi atthānanti sahassampi kāraṇānaṃ, janasahassena vā vacanasahassena vā osārite ‘‘ayaṃ imassa attho, ayaṃ imassa attho’’ti ekapade ṭhitova vinicchinati. Dutiyaṃ.

258. In the second (sutta), manussabhūto means having been born as a human in the village of Macala in the kingdom of Magadha. Āvasathaṃ adāsī means having rest houses built at the four main crossroads and giving them (to the public). Sahassampi atthānanti means even a thousand matters; or he would decide cases standing in one place, having been asked a thousand times by thousands of people, "What is the meaning of this? What is the meaning of that?" The second.

3. Mahālisuttavaṇṇanā
3. Commentary on the Mahāli Sutta

259.Tatiyeupasaṅkamīti ‘‘sakko devarājāti kathenti, atthi nu kho so sakko, yena so diṭṭhapubboti imamatthaṃ dasabalaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti upasaṅkami.Tañca pajānāmīti bahuvacane ekavacanaṃ, te ca dhamme pajānāmīti attho. Sakko kira anantare attabhāve magadharaṭṭhe macalagāme magho nāma māṇavo ahosi paṇḍito byatto, bodhisattacariyā viya ca tassa cariyā ahosi. So tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇamakāsi. Ekadivasaṃ attanova paññāya upaparikkhitvā gāmamajjhe mahājanassa sannipatitaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ ubhatopassesu apabyūhitvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ akāsi. Puna tattheva maṇḍapaṃ kāresi. Puna gacchante kāle sālaṃ kāresi. Gāmato ca nikkhamitvā gāvutampi aḍḍhayojanampi tigāvutampi yojanampi vicaritvā tehi sahāyehi saddhiṃ visamaṃ samaṃ akāsi. Te sabbeva ekacchandā tattha tattha setuyuttaṭṭhāne setuṃ, maṇḍapasālāpokkharaṇimālāvaccharopanapadīnaṃ yuttaṭṭhānesu maṇḍapasālāpokkharaṇimālāvaccharopanādīni karontā bahuṃ puññamakaṃsu. Magho satta vatapadāni pūretvā kāyassa bhedā saddhiṃ sahāyehi tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā jānāti. Tenāha –yesaṃ dhammānaṃ samādinnattā sakko sakkattaṃ ajjhagā, tañca pajānāmīti. Ayaṃ sakkassa sakkattādhigame saṅkhepakathā, vitthāro pana sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya sakkapaṇhavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto. Tatiyaṃ.

259. In the third (sutta), upasaṅkamī means, "I will approach the Ten-Powered One to ask this question: 'They say that Sakka is the king of the gods; does such a Sakka exist? Has he ever been seen before?'" Tañca pajānāmī is a singular form used in place of a plural; the meaning is, "And I know those qualities." It is said that in a previous existence, Sakka was a young man named Magha in the village of Macala in the kingdom of Magadha; he was wise and intelligent, and his conduct was like that of a Bodhisatta. He gathered thirty-three men and performed meritorious deeds. One day, reflecting with his own wisdom, he cleared away rubbish from both sides of a public gathering place in the middle of the village and made the place delightful. Then he built a pavilion there. Later, he built a hall. Leaving the village, he traveled a gāvuta, half a yojana, three gāvutas, or a yojana, leveling uneven ground with his companions. With one accord, they built bridges where bridges were needed, and constructed pavilions, halls, ponds, gardens of garlands, tree plantings, and wells where these were appropriate, thus performing much merit. Having fulfilled seven vatapadas, Magha, upon the dissolution of his body, was reborn in the Tāvatiṃsa heaven, together with his companions. The Blessed One knows all of this. Therefore, he said, yesaṃ dhammānaṃ samādinnattā sakko sakkattaṃ ajjhagā, tañca pajānāmīti, "I know those qualities through undertaking which Sakka attained Sakka-hood." This is a summary account of Sakka's attainment of Sakka-hood; the detailed account, however, is given in the Sakka Pañha Vaṇṇanā in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, the commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya. The third.

4. Daliddasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Commentary on the Dalidda Sutta

260.Catutthemanussadaliddoti manussaadhano.Manussakapaṇoti manussakāruññataṃ patto.Manussavarākoti manussalāmako.Tatrāti tasmiṃ ṭhāne, tasmiṃ vā atirocane.Ujjhāyantīti avajjhāyanti lāmakato cintenti.Khiyantīti kathenti pakāsenti.Vipācentīti tattha tattha kathenti vitthārenti.Eso kho mārisāti ettha ayamanupubbikathā – so kira anuppanne buddhe kāsiraṭṭhe bārāṇasirājā hutvā samussitaddhajapaṭākanānālaṅkārena suṭṭhu alaṅkataṃ nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ akāsi attano sirisampattiyā samākaḍḍhitanettena janakāyena samullokiyamāno. Tasmiñca samaye eko paccekabuddho gandhamādanapabbatā āgamma tasmiṃ nagare piṇḍāya carati, santindriyo santamānaso uttamadamathasamannāgato. Mahājanopi rājagataṃ cittīkāraṃ pahāya paccekabuddhameva olokesi. Rājā – ‘‘idāni imasmiṃ janakāye ekopi maṃ na oloketi. Kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti? Olokento paccekabuddhaṃ addasa. Sopi paccekabuddho mahallako hoti pacchimavaye ṭhito. Cīvarānipissa jiṇṇāni, tato tato suttāni gaḷanti. Rañño satasahassādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pūritapāramiṃ paccekabuddhaṃ disvā cittapasādamattaṃ vā hatthaṃ pasāretvā vandanamattaṃ vā nāhosi. So rājā ‘‘pabbajito maññe esa usūyāya maṃ na oloketī’’ti kujjhitvā ‘‘kvāyaṃ kuṭṭhicīvarāni pāruto’’ti niṭṭhubhitvā pakkāmi. Tassa kammassa vipākena mahāniraye nibbattitvā vipākāvasesena manussalokaṃ āgacchanto rājagahe paramakapaṇāya itthiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Gahitakālato paṭṭhāya sā itthī kañjikamattampi udarapūraṃ nālattha. Tassa kucchigatasseva kaṇṇanāsā vilīnā, saṅkhapalitakuṭṭhī hutvā mātukucchito nikkhanto. Mātāpitaro nāma dukkarakārikā honti, tenassa mātā yāva kapālaṃ gahetvā carituṃ na sakkoti, tāvassa kañjikampi udakampi āharitvā adāsi. Bhikkhāya carituṃ samatthakāle panassa kapālaṃ hatthe datvā ‘‘paññāyissasi sakena kammenā’’ti pakkāmi.

260. In the fourth (sutta), manussadaliddo means a human who is without wealth. Manussakapaṇo means one who has fallen into human wretchedness. Manussavarāko means a miserable human. Tatrāti means in that place, or in that situation. Ujjhāyantī means they do not speak critically, they think of him as worthless. Khiyantī means they say, they declare. Vipācentī means they speak and spread it around in various places. Eso kho mārisāti Here, there is the following preliminary story: It is said that in the time before the arising of a Buddha, he was a king of Bārāṇasī in the kingdom of Kāsī, and he circumambulated the city, which was beautifully adorned with raised banners and various decorations, being looked upon by crowds of people with eyes drawn to his glorious prosperity. At that time, a Paccekabuddha, having come from Gandhamādana Mountain, was wandering for alms in that city, with senses calmed, mind calmed, and endowed with the supreme taming. The great crowd, abandoning their attention to the king, looked only at the Paccekabuddha. The king thought, "Now, not even one person in this crowd is looking at me. What is going on?" Looking around, he saw the Paccekabuddha. That Paccekabuddha was old and advanced in years. His robes were old, and threads were hanging down from them here and there. Seeing the Paccekabuddha, who had fulfilled the pāramīs for more than a hundred thousand asaṅkhyeyyas, the king did not even have a moment of serene joy, nor did he extend his hand to make a gesture of respect. The king, thinking, "This renunciate is probably not looking at me out of envy," became angry and, spitting, he left, saying, "Where is this one covered in tattered robes?" As a result of that deed, after being reborn in the great hells and due to the remaining effects (of that kamma), when he came to the human world, he took rebirth in the womb of an extremely wretched woman in Rājagaha. From the moment of conception, that woman could not even obtain enough rice gruel to fill her stomach. While he was in the womb, his ears and nose dissolved, and he emerged from his mother's womb with white patches of leprosy. His parents were named Dukkarakārikā, for as long as his mother could not go out begging with a bowl, she brought him rice gruel and water. When he was able to go begging, they gave him a bowl and left, saying, "You will become known through your own kamma."

suppabuddhotveva nāmaṃ udapādi. Athāparena samayena bhagavati rājagahaṃ sampatte nāgarā satthāraṃ nimantetvā nagaramajjhe mahāmaṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaṃ adaṃsu. Suppabuddhopi kuṭṭhī gantvā dānaggamaṇḍapassa avidūre nisīdi. Nāgarā buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṇītena khādanīyena bhojanīyena parivisantā tassāpi yāgubhattaṃ adaṃsu. Tassa paṇītabhojanaṃ bhuttassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ ahosi. Satthā bhattakiccāvasāne anumodanaṃ katvā saccāni dīpesi, suppabuddho nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnova desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhito. Satthā uṭṭhāya vihāraṃ gato. Sopi cumbaṭaṃ āruyha kapālamādāya daṇḍamolubbha attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanto vibbhantāya gāviyā jīvitā voropito mattikapātiṃ bhinditvā suvaṇṇapātiṃ paṭilabhanto viya dutiyacittavāre devaloke nibbatto attano puññaṃ nissāya aññe deve atikkamma virocittha. Taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento sakko devānamindoeso kho mārisātiādimāha.

The name Suppabuddha arose. Then, at another time, when the Blessed One arrived in Rājagaha, the townspeople invited the Teacher and made a great pavilion in the middle of the city to offer alms. Suppabuddha the leper also went and sat not far from the alms-giving pavilion. The townspeople, serving the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, with the Buddha at its head, with delicious foods, also gave him rice gruel and food. As he ate the delicious food, his mind became focused. At the end of the meal, the Teacher gave thanks and expounded the Truths; Suppabuddha, remaining seated, directed his mind in accordance with the teaching and was established in the fruit of stream-entry. The Teacher rose and went to the monastery. He too, climbing onto a rubbish heap, took his bowl and, leaning on a staff, was going to his dwelling place when he was killed by a runaway cow, like one who breaks an earthenware bowl and obtains a golden bowl, at the second arising of consciousness, he was reborn in the world of the gods, shining forth beyond the other gods by virtue of his merit. Showing that cause, Sakka, the king of the gods, said eso kho mārisāti, and so on.

Saddhāti maggenāgatasaddhā.Sīlañca yassa kalyāṇanti kalyāṇasīlaṃ nāma ariyasāvakassa ariyakantasīlaṃ vuccati. Tattha kiñcāpi ariyasāvakassa ekasīlampi akantaṃ nāma natthi, imasmiṃ panatthe bhavantarepi appahīnaṃ pañcasīlaṃ adhippetaṃ. Catutthaṃ.

Saddhā means faith that has come through the path. Sīlañca yassa kalyāṇanti means that kalyāṇasīla or beautiful virtue is said to be the noble, lovely virtue of the noble disciple. Although there is no virtue of a noble disciple that is not lovely, in this context, the five precepts which are not abandoned even in future existences are intended. The fourth.

5. Rāmaṇeyyakasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Rāmaṇeyyaka Sutta

261.Pañcameārāmacetyāti ārāmacetiyāni.Vanacetyāti vanacetiyāni. Ubhayatthāpi cittīkataṭṭhena cetyaṃ veditabbaṃ.Manussarāmaṇeyyassāti manussaramaṇīyabhāvassa. Idāni manussaramaṇīyakavasena bhūmiramaṇīyakaṃ dassentogāme vātiādimāha. Pañcamaṃ.

261. In the fifth (sutta), ārāmacetyāti means monastery shrines. Vanacetyāti means forest shrines. In both cases, cetiya should be understood in the sense of a place of reverence. Manussarāmaṇeyyassāti means the loveliness of humans. Now, showing the loveliness of the land in terms of human loveliness, he said gāme vāti, and so on. The fifth.

6. Yajamānasuttavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Yajamāna Sutta

262.Chaṭṭheyajamānānanti yajantānaṃ. Tadā kira aṅgamagadhavāsikā manussā anusaṃvaccharaṃ sappimadhuphāṇitādīsu aggaṃ gahetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dārūnaṃ saṭṭhimatte sakaṭabhāre rāsiṃ katvā aggiṃ datvā pajjalitakāle ‘‘mahābrahmuno yajāmā’’ti taṃ sabbaṃ pakkhipanti. ‘‘Ekavāraṃ pakkhittaṃ sahassaguṇaphalaṃ detī’’ti nesaṃ laddhi. Sakko devarājā ‘‘sabbepime sabbaaggāni gahetvā ‘mahābrahmuno yajāmā’ti aggimhi jhāpenti. Aphalaṃ karonti, mayi passante mā nassantu, yathā buddhassa ceva saṅghassa ca datvā bahuṃ puññaṃ pasavanti, evaṃ karissāmī’’ti dārurāsiṃ jalāpetvā olokentesu manussesu puṇṇamadivase brahmattabhāvaṃ māpetvā mahājanassa passantasseva candamaṇḍalaṃ bhinditvā nikkhanto viya ahosi. Mahājano disvā ‘‘imaṃ yaññaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ mahābrahmā āgacchatī’’ti jaṇṇukehi bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhāya, añjaliṃ paggayha namassamāno aṭṭhāsi. Brāhmaṇā āhaṃsu ‘‘tumhe ‘mayaṃ takkena kathemā’ti maññatha, idāni passatha, ayaṃ vo brahmā sahatthā yaññaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ āgacchatī’’ti. Sakko āgantvā dārucitakamatthake ākāse ṭhatvā ‘‘kassāyaṃ sakkāro’’ti pucchi? Tumhākaṃ, bhante, paṭiggaṇhatha no yaññanti. Tena hi āgacchatha, mā tulaṃ chaḍḍetvā hatthena tulayittha, ayaṃ satthā dhuravihāre vasati, taṃ pucchissāma ‘‘kassa dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hotī’’ti? Ubhayaraṭṭhavāsino gahetvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā pucchanto evamāha.

262. In the sixth (sutta), yajamānānanti means those who are sacrificing. At that time, it seems, the people living in Aṅga and Magadha would annually take the best of ghee, honey, molasses, etc., and, piling up about sixty cartloads of wood in one place, set fire to it and, when it was blazing, they would throw everything in, saying, "We sacrifice to Mahābrahmā." Their belief was that "what is thrown in once gives a thousandfold result." Sakka, the king of the gods (thought), "All these people are taking the best of everything and burning it in the fire, saying, 'We sacrifice to Mahābrahmā.' They are making it fruitless. While I am watching, may it not be wasted. I will do it in such a way that they will give it to the Buddha and the Saṅgha and generate much merit." Having set fire to the pile of wood, while the people were watching, on a full-moon day, he manifested the form of Brahmā and, as the great crowd looked on, he appeared to come out, splitting the circle of the moon. The crowd, seeing this, knelt on the ground, and stood paying homage with clasped hands. The Brahmins said, "You think, 'We speak with logic,' now see, this Brahmā of yours is coming to accept the sacrifice with his own hands." Sakka came and stood in the sky above the pyre of wood and asked, "To whom is this offering?" "To you, Venerable One, please accept our sacrifice." "Then come, do not weigh it with scales but weigh it with your hands. The Teacher dwells in Dhuravihāra, we will ask him, 'To whom does giving yield great fruit?'" Taking the inhabitants of both kingdoms, he went to the Teacher and asked thus.

puññapekkhānanti puññaṃ icchantānaṃ puññatthikānaṃ.Opadhikaṃ puññanti upadhivipākaṃ puññaṃ.Saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalanti ariyasaṅghe dinnaṃ vipphāravantaṃ hoti. Desanāvasāne caturāsītipāṇasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya manussā sabbāni aggadānāni bhikkhusaṅghassa adaṃsu. Chaṭṭhaṃ.

puññapekkhānanti means those who desire merit, those who are seeking merit. Opadhikaṃ puññanti means merit that results in rebirth. Saṅghe dinnaṃ mahapphalanti means what is given to the Noble Saṅgha is of great benefit. At the end of the discourse, eighty-four thousand beings drank the nectar of immortality. From then on, people gave all the best offerings to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. The sixth.

7. Buddhavandanāsuttavaṇṇanā
7. Commentary on the Buddhavandanā Sutta

263.Sattameuṭṭhehīti uṭṭhaha, ghaṭa, vāyama.Vijitasaṅgāmāti rāgādīnañceva dvādasayojanikassa ca mārabalassa jitattā bhagavantaṃ evaṃ ālapati.Pannabhārāti oropitakhandhakilesābhisaṅkhārabhāra.Pannarasāya rattinti pannarasāya puṇṇamāya rattiṃ. Sattamaṃ.

263. In the seventh (sutta), uṭṭhehīti means arise, strive, endeavor. Vijitasaṅgāmāti, because of having conquered the Māra army of Rāga and others, as well as the twelve-yojana army, he addresses the Blessed One thus. Pannabhārāti means those who have laid down the burden of the aggregates, defilements, and kamma formations. Pannarasāya rattinti means the night of the fifteenth, the full-moon night. The seventh.

8. Gahaṭṭhavandanāsuttavaṇṇanā
8. Commentary on the Gahaṭṭhavandanā Sutta

264.Aṭṭhameputhuddisāti catasso disā catasso anudisā ca.Bhummāti bhūmivāsino.Cirarattasamāhiteti upacārappanāhi cirarattasamāhitacitte.Vandeti vandāmi.Brahmacariyaparāyaṇeti dasapi vassāni vīsatipi vassāni…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni āpāṇakoṭikaṃ ekaseyyaṃ ekabhattantiādikaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ caramāneti attho.Puññakarāti catupaccayadānaṃ kusumbhasumanapūjā dīpasahassajālanti evamādipuññakārakā.Sīlavantoti upāsakatte patiṭṭhāya pañcahipi dasahipi sīlehi samannāgatā.Dhammena dāraṃ posentīti umaṅgabhindanādīni akatvā dhammikehi kasigorakkhavaṇijjādīhi puttadāraṃ posenti.Pamukho rathamāruhīti devānaṃ pamukho seṭṭho rathaṃ āruhi. Aṭṭhamaṃ.

264. In the eighth (sutta), puthuddisāti means the four directions and the four intermediate directions. Bhummāti means those who dwell on the earth. Cirarattasamāhiteti means with minds long concentrated with access (upacāra) and attainment (appanā) concentration. Vandeti means I salute. Brahmacariyaparāyaṇeti means those who live the excellent conduct, the brahmacariya, such as observing one bed and one meal for ten years, twenty years...up to sixty years, until the end of their lives. Puññakarāti means those who do meritorious deeds such as giving the four requisites, offering jasmine flowers, lighting thousands of lamps, and so on. Sīlavantoti means those who are established in the state of a lay follower and endowed with the five or ten precepts. Dhammena dāraṃ posentīti means those who support their children and spouses through righteous means such as farming, cattle-raising, or trade, without engaging in activities such as breaking into the Umaṅga tunnel. Pamukho rathamāruhīti means the foremost of the gods ascended the chariot. The eighth.

9. Satthāravandanāsuttavaṇṇanā
9. Commentary on the Satthāravandanā Sutta

265.Navamebhagavantaṃ namassatīti ekaṃsaṃ uttariyaṃ dukulaṃ katvā, brahmajāṇuko hutvā sirasi añjaliṃ ṭhapetvā namassati.So yakkhoti so sakko.Anomanāmanti sabbaguṇehi omakabhāvassa natthitāya sabbaguṇanemittakehi nāmehi anomanāmaṃ.Avijjāsamatikkamāti catusaccapaṭicchādikāya vaṭṭamūlakaavijjāya samatikkamena.Sekkhāti satta sekkhā.Apacayārāmāti vaṭṭaviddhaṃsane ratā.Sikkhareti sikkhanti. Navamaṃ.

265. In the ninth (sutta), bhagavantaṃ namassatīti means, having arranged the upper robe on one shoulder, kneeling with the right knee on the ground, placing the clasped hands on the head, he pays homage. So yakkhoti means that Sakka. Anomanāmanti means the name "Anoma" because there is no inferior state in all good qualities, due to the possession of all excellent qualities. Avijjāsamatikkamāti means by overcoming ignorance, the root of the cycle (of rebirths), which conceals the Four Noble Truths. Sekkhāti means the seven sekhas (trainees). Apacayārāmāti means delighting in the destruction of the cycle (of rebirths). Sikkhareti means they are training. The ninth.

10. Saṅghavandanāsuttavaṇṇanā
10. Commentary on the Saṅghavandanā Sutta

266.Dasameajjhabhāsīti kasmā esa punappunaṃ evaṃ bhāsatīti? Sakkassa kira devarañño saddo madhuro, suphasitaṃ dantāvaraṇaṃ, kathanakāle suvaṇṇakiṅkiṇikasaddo viya niccharati. Taṃ punappunaṃ sotuṃ labhissāmīti bhāsati.Pūtidehasayāti pūtimhi mātusarīre vā, attanoyeva vā sarīraṃ avattharitvā sayanato pūtidehasayā.Nimuggākuṇapamheteti dasamāse mātukucchisaṅkhāte kuṇapasmiṃ ete nimuggā.Etaṃ tesaṃ pihayāmīti etesaṃ etaṃ pihayāmi patthayāmi.Na te saṃ koṭṭhe opentīti na te saṃ santakaṃ dhaññaṃ koṭṭhe pakkhipanti. Na hi etesaṃ dhaññaṃ atthi.Na kumbhīti na kumbhiyaṃ.Na kaḷopiyanti na pacchiyaṃ.Paraniṭṭhitamesānāti paresaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ paraghare pakkaṃ bhikkhācāravattena esamānā gavesamānā.Tenāti evaṃ pariyiṭṭhena.Subbatāti dasapi…pe… saṭṭhipi vassāni susamādinnasundaravatā.

266. In the tenth (sutta), ajjhabhāsīti, "Why does he speak thus again and again?" It is said that the voice of Sakka, the king of the gods, is sweet, his teeth are well-formed, and when he speaks, a sound like golden bells emanates. (The interlocutor) speaks so that he can hear it again and again. Pūtidehasayāti means lying having taken a foul body, either in the foul body of a mother or in one's own body. Nimuggā kuṇapamheteti means immersed in this corpse (kuṇapa) which is the mother's womb for ten months. Etaṃ tesaṃ pihayāmīti means I desire this, I long for this for them. Na te saṃ koṭṭhe opentīti means they do not put their own grain into the storehouse. Indeed, they have no grain of their own. Na kumbhīti means not in a pot. Na kaḷopiyanti means not in a basket. Paraniṭṭhitamesānāti means seeking, searching for what is prepared by others, cooked in another's house, by means of the alms round. Tenāti means by such striving. Subbatāti means having excellent and well-undertaken observances for ten...up to sixty years.

Sumantamantinoti dhammaṃ sajjhāyissāma, dhutaṅgaṃ samādiyissāma, amataṃ paribhuñjissāma, samaṇadhammaṃ karissāmāti evaṃ subhāsitabhāsino.Tuṇhībhūtā samañcarāti tiyāmarattiṃ asanighosena ghositā viya dhammaṃ kathentāpi tuṇhībhūtā samaṃ carantiyeva nāma. Kasmā? Niratthakavacanassābhāvā.Puthumaccā cāti bahusattā ca aññamaññaṃ viruddhā.Attadaṇḍesu nibbutāti paraviheṭhanatthaṃ gahitadaṇḍesu sattesu nibbutā vissaṭṭhadaṇḍā.Sādānesu anādānāti sagahaṇesu sattesu ca bhavayoniādīnaṃ ekakoṭṭhāsassāpi agahitattā agahaṇā. Dasamaṃ.

Sumantamantino means they recite the Dhamma, undertake the dhutaṅgas, partake of the Deathless, and perform the duties of a renunciate; thus, they are speakers of well-spoken words. Tuṇhībhūtā samañcarā means even while expounding the Dhamma, they are silent and walk evenly, as if proclaimed by the night in its three watches without a sound. Why? Because there is no meaningless speech. Puthumaccā cā means there are many beings, and they are opposed to one another. Attadaṇḍesu nibbutā means they are extinguished from beings who have taken up clubs for the purpose of harming others, they have laid down their clubs. Sādānesu anādānā means among beings who grasp, they do not grasp even a single portion of the realms of existence, etc., therefore they do not grasp. Tenth.

Dutiyo vaggo.

Second Chapter.

3. Tatiyavaggo

3. Third Chapter

1. Chetvāsuttavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Discourse on Cutting the Ties

267.Tatiyavaggassa paṭhamaṃ vuttatthameva. Paṭhamaṃ.

267.The first verse of the third chapter has the same meaning as previously stated. First.

2. Dubbaṇṇiyasuttavaṇṇanā
2. Explanation of the Discourse on the Ugly One

268.Dutiyedubbaṇṇoti jhāmakhāṇuvaṇṇo.Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako mahodaro.Āsaneti paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ.Kodhabhakkhoti sakkena gahitanāmamevetaṃ. So pana eko rūpāvacarabrahmā, ‘‘sakko kira khantibalena samannāgato’’ti sutvā vīmaṃsanatthaṃ āgato. Avaruddhakayakkhā pana evarūpaṃ saṃvihitārakkhaṃ ṭhānaṃ pavisituṃ na sakkonti.Upasaṅkamīti devānaṃ sutvā ‘‘na sakkā esa pharusena cāletuṃ, nīcavuttinā pana khantiyaṃ ṭhitena sakkā palāpetu’’nti tathā palāpetukāmo upasaṅkami.Antaradhāyīti khantiyaṃ ṭhatvā balavacittīkāraṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā nīcavuttiyā dassiyamānāya sakkāsane ṭhātuṃ asakkonto antaradhāyi.Na sūpahatacittomhīti etthati nipātamattaṃ, upahatacittomhīti āha.Nāvattena suvānayoti na kodhāvattena suānayo, kodhavase vattetuṃ na sukaromhīti vadati.Na vo cirāhantivoti nipātamattaṃ, ahaṃ ciraṃ na kujjhāmīti vadati. Dutiyaṃ.

268.In the second, dubbaṇṇo means of a complexion like a charred stump. Okoṭimako means pot-bellied and having a large belly. Āsane means on the paṇḍukambala stone seat. Kodhabhakkho is simply a name taken by Sakka. This, however, is a Brahma of the realm of form, who, having heard that "Sakka is endowed with the power of patience," came to test him. The yakshas confined in the enclosure, however, are not able to enter a place with such well-arranged protection. Upasaṅkamī means having heard from the gods that "It is not possible to shake him with harshness, but it is possible to drive away one who is established in patience with lowly behavior," he approached desiring to drive him away in that manner. Antaradhāyī means being unable to remain on Sakka’s seat when lowly behavior was shown, having established a strong thought process in patience, he disappeared. Na sūpahatacittomhīti, here is merely a particle, he says, "I am not of an afflicted mind." Nāvattena suvānayo means it is not easy to bring him under control with an outburst of anger, he says, "It is not easy to turn him to the control of anger." Na vo cirāhanti, here vo is merely a particle, he says, "I do not get angry for long." Second.

3. Sambarimāyāsuttavaṇṇanā
3. Explanation of the Discourse on Sambarimāyā

269.Tatiyeābādhikoti isigaṇena abhisapakāle uppannābādhena ābādhiko.Vācehi manti sace maṃ sambarimāyaṃ vācesi, evamahaṃ tampi tikicchissāmīti vadati.Mā kho tvaṃ, mārisa, vācesīti vināpi tāva sambarimāyaṃ sakko amhe bādhati, yadi pana taṃ jānissati, naṭṭhā mayaṃ, mā attano ekassa atthāya amhe nāsehīti vatvā nivārayiṃsu.Sambarova sataṃ samanti yathā sambaro asurindo māyāvī māyaṃ payojetvā vassasataṃ niraye pakko, evaṃ paccati. Tumhe dhammikāva, alaṃ vo māyāyāti vadati. Kiṃ pana sakko tassa kodhaṃ tikicchituṃ sakkuṇeyyāti? Āma sakkuṇeyya. Kathaṃ? Tadā kira so isigaṇo dharatiyeva, tasmā naṃ isīnaṃ santikaṃ netvā khamāpeyya, evamassa phāsu bhaveyya. Tena pana vañcitattā tathā akatvā pakkantova. Tatiyaṃ.

269.In the third, ābādhiko means afflicted with an illness that arose at the time of being cursed by a group of ascetics. Vācehi manti means, "If you cause me to be spoken of in connection with Sambarimāyā, I will cure even that." Mā kho tvaṃ, mārisa, vācesīti means, "Even without Sambarimāyā, Sakka is afflicting us; if he knows about that, we are ruined. Do not destroy us for the sake of your own benefit," thus they dissuaded him. Sambarova sataṃ samanti means, "Just as Sambara, the lord of the asuras, being a deceiver, having employed his deceit, was cooked in hell for a hundred years, so he is cooked. You are righteous, enough of deceit for you," he says. But is Sakka able to cure his anger? Yes, he is able. How? At that time, that group of ascetics was still alive, therefore, he should take him to the presence of the ascetics and ask for forgiveness; in this way, he would be at ease. However, because he was deceived, he departed without doing so. Third.

4. Accayasuttavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Discourse on Transgression

270.Catutthesampayojesunti kalahaṃ akaṃsu.Accasarāti atikkami, eko bhikkhu ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ atikkamma vacanaṃ avocāti attho.Yathādhammaṃnappaṭiggaṇhātīti na khamati.Kodho vo vasamāyātūti kodho tumhākaṃ vasaṃ āgacchatu, mā tumhe kodhavasaṃ gamitthāti dīpeti.Mā ca mitte hi vo jarāti etthati nipātamattaṃ, tumhākaṃ mittadhamme jarā nāma mā nibbatti. Bhummatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ, mittesu vo jarā mā nibbatti, mittabhāvato aññathābhāvo mā hotūti attho.Agarahiyaṃ mā garahitthāti agārayhaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalaṃ mā garahittha. Catutthaṃ.

270.In the fourth, sampayojesunti means they made a quarrel. Accasarāti means transgressed; the meaning is that one bhikkhu uttered a word transgressing another bhikkhu. Yathādhammaṃnappaṭiggaṇhātīti means he does not forgive. Kodho vo vasamāyātūti means may anger come under your control, it indicates that you should not go under the control of anger. Mā ca mitte hi vo jarāti, here is merely a particle, may aging not arise for you in friendly qualities. Or, it is a locative case in the sense of the ground, may aging not arise for you in friends, may there not be otherness from friendship. Agarahiyaṃ mā garahitthāti means do not criticize a blameless arahant individual. Fourth.

5. Akkodhasuttavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Discourse on Non-Anger

271.Pañcamemā vo kodho ajjhabhavīti kodho tumhe mā abhibhavi, tumheva kodhaṃ abhibhavatha.Mā ca kujjhittha kujjhitanti kujjhantānaṃ mā paṭikujjhittha.Akkodhoti mettā ca mettāpubbabhāgo ca.Avihiṃsāti karuṇā ca karuṇāpubbabhāgo ca.Atha pāpajanaṃ kodho, pabbatovābhimaddatīti lāmakajanaṃ pabbato viya kodho abhimaddatīti. Pañcamaṃ.

271.In the fifth, mā vo kodho ajjhabhavīti means may anger not overcome you, you yourselves should overcome anger. Mā ca kujjhittha kujjhitanti means do not be angry in return towards those who are angry. Akkodhoti means loving-kindness and what precedes loving-kindness. Avihiṃsāti means compassion and what precedes compassion. Atha pāpajanaṃ kodho, pabbatovābhimaddatīti means anger crushes a base person like a mountain. Fifth.

Tatiyo vaggo.

Third Chapter.

Sakkasaṃyuttavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Sakkasaṃyutta Explanation is finished.

Iti sāratthappakāsiniyā saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya

Thus ends the Sagāthāvagga Commentary in the Sāratthappakāsinī, Commentary on the Saṃyutta Nikāya.

Sagāthāvaggavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Sagāthāvagga Commentary is finished.

Saṃyuttanikāya-aṭṭhakathāya paṭhamo bhāgo.

The first volume of the Saṃyutta Nikāya Commentary.